diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16196-h.zip | bin | 0 -> 195932 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16196-h/16196-h.htm | 9457 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16196.txt | 11633 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 16196.zip | bin | 0 -> 192057 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
7 files changed, 21106 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/16196-h.zip b/16196-h.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0132da --- /dev/null +++ b/16196-h.zip diff --git a/16196-h/16196-h.htm b/16196-h/16196-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6048e44 --- /dev/null +++ b/16196-h/16196-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9457 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Transitional//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-transitional.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta name="generator" content= +"HTML Tidy for Cygwin (vers 1st September 2004), see www.w3.org" /> +<meta http-equiv="CONTENT-TYPE" content= +"text/html; charset=us-ascii" /> +<title>King Olaf's Kinsman</title> + +<style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[*/ + body {background:#ffffff; + color:black; + font-family: "Times New Roman", serif; + font-size:14pt; + margin-top:70px; + margin-left:10%; + margin-right:10%; + text-align:justify} + h1 {text-align: center; text-transform: uppercase; letter-spacing: 0.05em} + h2 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + h3 {text-align: center; letter-spacing: 0.04em} + hr {height: 5px} + pre {text-align: center; font-size: 10pt;} + p {text-indent: 4% } + caption {text-transform: uppercase; font-size: 18pt; font-weight: bold; + letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-family: "Arial";} + td { font-family: "Arial";} + thead { font-weight: bold;} + td.ltoc { letter-spacing: 0.04em; font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; + text-transform: uppercase; text-align: right} + td.rtoc { font-weight: bold; font-size: 18pt; text-align: left} +/*]]>*/ +</style> +</head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of King Olaf's Kinsman, by Charles Whistler + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: King Olaf's Kinsman + A Story of the Last Saxon Struggle against the Danes in + the Days of Ironside and Cnut + +Author: Charles Whistler + +Release Date: July 3, 2005 [EBook #16196] +[Date last updated: July 5, 2006] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING OLAF'S KINSMAN *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +</pre> + +<h1>King Olaf's Kinsman</h1> +<h2>A Story of the Last Saxon Struggle Against the Danes in the +Days of Ironside and Cnut</h2> +<h2>by Charles W. Whistler</h2> +<hr /> +<table align="center" summary="Table of Contents"> +<caption>Contents</caption> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Preface">Preface</a>.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch1">Chapter 1</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Coming Of The Vikings.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch2">Chapter 2</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Olaf The King.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch3">Chapter 3</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Breaking Of London Bridge.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch4">Chapter 4</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Earl Wulfnoth Of Sussex.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch5">Chapter 5</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">How Redwald Fared At Penhurst.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch6">Chapter 6</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Sexberga The Thane's Daughter.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch7">Chapter 7</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Fight At Leavenheath.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch8">Chapter 8</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The White Lady Of Wormingford Mere.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch9">Chapter 9</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Treachery Of Edric Streone.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch10">Chapter 10</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Flight From London.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch11">Chapter 11</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Taking Of The Queen.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch12">Chapter 12</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Among Friends.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch13">Chapter 13</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">Jealousy.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch14">Chapter 14</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Last Great Battle.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch15">Chapter 15</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">The Shadow Of Edric Streone.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"><a href="#Ch16">Chapter 16</a>:</td> +<td class="rtoc">By Wormingford Mere.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="ltoc"></td> +<td class="rtoc"><a href="#Notes">Notes</a>.</td> +</tr> +</table> +<h2><a name="Preface" id="Preface">Preface</a>.</h2> +<p>No English chronicler mentions the presence of King Olaf the +Saint in England; but the two churches dedicated to him at either +end of London Bridge, where his greatest deed was wrought, testify +to the gratitude of the London citizens towards the viking chief +who rescued their city from the Danes, and brought back the king of +their own race towards whom their loyalty was so unswerving.</p> +<p>The deeds of King Olaf recorded in this story of his kinsman are +therefore from the Norse "Saga of King Olaf the Holy," and the +various incidents are assigned as nearly as may be to their place +in the sequence of events given from the death of Swein to the +accession of Cnut, in the contemporary <i>Anglo-Saxon +Chronicle</i>, which is our most reliable authority for the +period.</p> +<p>The place where King Olaf fought his seventh battle, +"Ringmereheath in Ulfkyl's land," is doubtful. To have localized +it, therefore, on a traditional battlefield in Suffolk, where a +mound and field names point to a severe forgotten fight in the line +which a southern invader would take between Colchester and Sudbury, +may be pardonable for the purposes of Redwald's story.</p> +<p>With regard to other historic incidents in the tale, some are +from the Danish "Knytlinga" and "Jomsvikinga" Sagas, which alone +give us the age of Cnut on his accession to the throne, and recount +the interception of Queen Emma by Thorkel's men on her projected +flight. In the ordinary course of history the age of the wise king +is disregarded, and the doings of the three great jarls are +naturally enough credited to him, for after the first few years of +confusion have been passed over, he takes his place as the greatest +of our rulers since Alfred, and his age is forgotten in his +wonderful policy.</p> +<p>The doings of Edric Streone are partly from the hints give by +the Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, and partly from the accounts of later +English writers. But there is no chronicle of either English, +Danish, or Norse origin which does not hold him and his treachery +in the utmost scorn.</p> +<p>The account of the battle of Ashingdon follows the definite +local traditions of the place. The line of the river banks have +changed but little, and Cnut's earthworks still remain at Canewdon. +The first battlefield is yet known, and they still tell how Eadmund +was forced to fight on Ashingdon hill because his way across the +ford was barred by the Danish ships, and how the pursuit of the +routed English ended at Hockley.</p> +<p>Wulfnoth and his famous son Godwine are of course historic. The +Anglo-Saxon Chronicle tells us how the earl was driven into sullen +enmity with Ethelred by Streone's brother, and the Danish Sagas +record Godwine's first introduction by Jarl Ulf to Cnut after the +battle of Sherston.</p> +<p>As for the places mentioned in Redwald's story, the well on +Caldbec hill still has its terrors for the village folk, and the +destruction of the ancient mining village at Penhurst by the Danes +is remembered yet with strange tales of treasure found among its +stone buildings. The Bures folk still speak of the White Lady of +the Mere, and their belief that Boadicea lies under the great mound +is by no means unlikely to be a tradition of her true resting +place.</p> +<p>C. W. WHISTLER</p> +<p>STOCKLAND, Nov. 1896.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch1" id="Ch1">Chapter 1</a>: The Coming Of The +Vikings.</h2> +<p>All along our East Anglian shores men had watched for long, and +now word had come from Ulfkytel, our earl, that the great fleet of +Swein, the Danish king, had been sighted off the Dunwich cliffs, +and once again the fear of the Danes was on our land.</p> +<p>And so it came to pass that I, Redwald, son of Siric, the Thane +of Bures, stood at the gate of our courtyard and watched my father +and our sturdy housecarles and freemen ride away down the hill and +across the winding Stour river to join the great levy at +Colchester. And when I had seen the last flash of arms sparkle from +among the copses beyond the bridge, I had looked on Siric, my +father, for the last time in this world, but no thought rose up in +my mind that this might be so.</p> +<p>Yet if I stand now where I stood on that day, and see by chance +the glimmer of bright arms through green boughs across the river, +there comes to me a rush of sadness that dulls the bright May +sunshine and the sparkle of the rippling water, and fills the soft +May-time wind with sounds of mourning. Now to me it seems that I +was thus sad at the time that is brought back to me. But I was not +so. It is only the weight of long years of remembrance of what +should have been had I known. At that parting I turned back into +the hall downcast, only because my father had thought me not yet +strong enough to ride beside him, and a little angry and hurt +moreover, for I was broad and strong for my sixteen years.</p> +<p>Little thought I that in years to come I should remember all of +that leave taking, even to the least thing that happened; but so it +is. No man may rightly be said to forget aught. All that he has +known and learnt is there, hidden up in his mind to come forth if +there is anything that shall call it again to light.</p> +<p>Now my father lies resting among nameless heroes who died for +England on Nacton Heath--I know not even which of the great mounds +it may be that holds his bones--but he fell before the flight began +when Thurketyl Mirehead played the craven. Neither victor nor +vanquished was he when his end came, but maybe that is the best end +for a warrior after all. Some must fall, and some may live to +boast, and some remain to mourn, but to give life for fatherland in +hottest strife is good. That is what my father would have wished +for himself, and I at least sorrow but for myself and not for +him.</p> +<p>Now I have spoken of remembrance, and I will add this word--that +some things in a man's life can never be set aside from his memory. +Waking or sleeping they come back to him. Eight days after that +going of my father came such a time to me, so that every least +thing is clear to me today as then.</p> +<p>I sat plaiting a leash for my hounds on the settle before the +fire in our great hall at Bures, and I remember how the strands of +leather thong fell in my hand; I remember how my mother's spinning +wheel stopped short with a snapping of broken threads; how the +thrall who was feeding the fire stayed with the log in his hands; +how the sleepy men at the lower end of the hall sprang up with +heavy words checked on their lips before the lady's presence; how +the maidens screamed--aye, and how the draught swayed the wall +hangings, and sent a long train of sparks flying from a half-dead +torch, as the great door was thrown open and a man flung himself +into our midst, mud splashed and white faced, with hands that +quivered towards us as he cried hoarsely:</p> +<p>"In haste, mistress--you must fly--the Danes--" and fell like a +log at my mother's feet where she sat on the dais, neither moving +nor speaking more.</p> +<p>It was Grinkel, the leader of our housecarles {<a name="Glyph1" +href="#Note1" id="Glyph1">1</a>}. His armour was rent and gashed, +and no sword was in the scabbard at his side, and his helm was +gone, and now as he fell a bandage slipped from his arm, and slowly +the red stream from a great wound ran among the sweet sedges +wherewith the floor was strewn.</p> +<p>There came a mist before my eyes, and my heart beat thick and +fast as I saw him; but my mother rose up neither screaming nor +growing faint, though through her mind, as through mine, must have +glanced the knowledge of all that this homecoming of brave Grinkel +meant. She stepped from the high place to the warrior's side and +hastily rebound the wound, telling the maidens meanwhile to bring +wine that she might revive him if he were not already sped.</p> +<p>Then she rose up while the old steward took the wine and tried +to force it between the close-set teeth, and she called the farm +servants to her.</p> +<p>"Make ready all the horses and yoke the oxen to the wains," she +said in a clear voice that would not tremble. "Send the lads to +warn the village folk to fly beyond the river. For Grinkel comes +not in this wise for nought. The Danes are on us."</p> +<p>Now I remember the grim faces of the men as they went, and I +remember the look on the faces of the women as they heard, and in +the midst of us seemed to lie terror itself glaring from the set +eyes of the dead warrior. And of those memories I will say +nought--I would not have them live in the minds of any by day and +night as they lived in mine for many a long year thereafter. Many +were the tales I had heard of the coming of Ingvar's host in the +days of Eadmund our martyred king, who was crowned here at Bures in +our own church, and those tales were terrible. Now the like was on +us, and I saw that what I had heard was not the half.</p> +<p>The old steward rose up now, shaking his head in sorrow. I think +he was too old for fear.</p> +<p>"Grinkel is dead, lady," he said gently, closing the wild eyes +as he spoke, and then throwing a cloak from the wall over him. But +my mother only said, "May he rest in peace. What of the Thane?"</p> +<p>Thereat the steward looked forthright into his lady's face, and +spoke bravely for all around to hear:</p> +<p>"Doubtless the levy is broken for this once, and he bides with +Earl Ulfkytel to gather a new and stronger force. The Thane has +sent Grinkel on, and he has ridden in over-much haste for a wounded +man. He was ever eager."</p> +<p>My mother gave back her old servant's look in silence, and +seemed to assent. Yet I, though I was but a lad of sixteen, could +see what passed in that look of theirs. I knew that surely my +father had fallen, and that need was great for haste.</p> +<p>Then was hurry and hustle in the house as all that was most +valuable was gathered, and I myself could but take my arms from the +wall, and don mail-shirt and helm and sword and seax {<a name= +"Glyph2" href="#Note2" id="Glyph2">2</a>} and then look on, useless +enough, with my thoughts in a whirl all the time.</p> +<p>Presently out of their tangle came one thing clearly to me, and +that was that there were others whom I loved to be warned, besides +the villagers.</p> +<p>My mother came into the hall again, and stood for a moment like +a carven statue looking at the maidens who wrought at packing what +they might. She had not wept, but in her face was written sorrow +beyond weeping. Yet almost did she weep, when I stood beside her +and spoke, putting my hand on her arm.</p> +<p>"Mother," I said, "I must go to Wormingford and warn them also. +My horse will be ready, and I will return to you."</p> +<p>Then she looked at me, for as I go over these things I know that +this was the first time that I had ever said to her "I must," +without asking her leave, in aught that I would do. And she +answered me calmly.</p> +<p>"Aye, that is a good thought. They will need help. Bide with +them if need is, and so join us presently on the road. We will fly +to London."</p> +<p>"So far, mother?" I said. "Surely Colchester will be safe."</p> +<p>"I will go to Ethelred the king," she answered. "He has ever +been your father's friend, and will be yours. And I was the queen's +maiden in the old days, and she will welcome me. Now go and bring +Hertha to me."</p> +<p>She turned to her work, and I went out across the courtyard. +Already the wains stood there, the teams of sleepy oxen tossing +their long horns in the glare of torches. The church bell was +clanging the alarm of fire to bring home the men from field or +forest if any were abroad so late, for it was an hour after sunset, +and there was no moon yet.</p> +<p>The gray horse that my father gave me a year agone stood ready +saddled in the stall when I came to the stables. I went and loosed +him, while a groom saw me and ran to help, and as I swung into the +saddle I saw his face marked with new lines across his +forehead.</p> +<p>"Do you fly first, master?" he said, with strange meaning in his +voice.</p> +<p>"I go to Wormingford," I answered. "Likely enough, therefore, +that I fly last," and I laughed.</p> +<p>"Aye, let me go, master, let me go," he said. "It is like that +the Danes are on the road."</p> +<p>"Not yet," I said, touched by question and offer alike. "There +is many a mile between here and Ipswich, and I think that to go to +Wormingford is my work, surely."</p> +<p>So I rode away fast, seeing in the valley below me the lights of +the house that I sought. As I had said, the errand was indeed +mine.</p> +<p>For at the great house just across the river below the hills +lived the one who should be my wife in the days to come--Hertha, +daughter of Osgod, the Thane of Wormingford. It was now three years +since we had been betrothed with all solemnity in our church, and +that had seemed but fit and right, for we were two children who had +played together since we could run hand in hand. And my mother had +been as a mother also to little Hertha since she was left with only +her father to tend her.</p> +<p>Our house and Osgod's were akin, though not near, for we both +traced our line from Redwald the first Christian king of East +Anglia, whose name I bore. Hertha was two years younger than I.</p> +<p>Now Osgod the Thane had ridden away to the war with my father, +and unless he had returned with Grinkel, Hertha was alone in the +house with her old nurse and the farm servants. Most surely she +would have been at Bures with us but for some spring-time sickness +which was among the village children, and from which my mother +sought to keep her free. It might be that the thane had returned, +but it was in my mind that the manner of Grinkel's coming boded ill +to all of us.</p> +<p>So I rode on quickly down the hill towards the river. I knew not +how near the Danes might be, but I thought little of them, until +suddenly through the dusk I saw a red point of fire flicker and +broaden out into flame on a hilltop eastward, where I knew a beacon +fire was piled against need. And then from every point along the +Stour valley beacon after beacon flashed out in answer, until all +the countryside was full of them; and I hurried on more swiftly +than before.</p> +<p>Our hall stood on the hill crest above church and village, +beyond the reach of creeping river mist and sudden floods, and I +rode down the track that crosses the lower road and so comes to the +ford below Osgod's place on the Essex side of the river. And when I +came to the crossing my horse pricked his ears and snorted, so that +I knew there were horsemen about, and I reined up and waited in the +lane.</p> +<p>I could hear the quick hoofbeats of two steeds, and all the air +was full of the sound of alarm bells, for the evening was very +still.</p> +<p>Then up the road from eastward rode two men at an easy gallop, +and my horse's manner told me that a stable mate of his was coming, +so I feared no longer but went into the main road to meet them.</p> +<p>"What news?" I cried, and they halted.</p> +<p>"It is the young master," said one, and I knew the voice of +Edred, our housecarle. And when he was close to me I could see that +he was in almost as evil plight as had been Grinkel his comrade. +The other man I knew not, but he bore a headless spear shaft in his +hand, and Edred's shield had a great gash across it.</p> +<p>"Master, has Grinkel come?" Edred asked me.</p> +<p>"Aye, and is dead. He bade us fly, and could say no more. What +of my father?"</p> +<p>The men looked at one another for a moment, and then Edred said +very sadly:</p> +<p>"Woe is me that I must be the bearer of heavy tidings to you and +the lady your mother. But what is true is true and must be told. +Never has such a battle been fought in East Anglia, and the fortune +of war has gone against us."</p> +<p>The fear that I had read in my mother's eyes fell cold on me at +those words-and I asked again, longing and fearing to know the +worst:</p> +<p>"What of the thane, my father?"</p> +<p>"Master, he fell with the first," Edred answered with a breaking +of his voice. "Nor might we bring him from the place where he fell. +For the Danes swept us from the field at the last like dead leaves +in the wind, and there was nought left us but to fly. Two long +hours we fought first, and then came flight. They say one man began +it. I know not; but it was no man of ours. Now the Danes are +marching hitherwards to Colchester."</p> +<p>"What of Osgod of Wormingford?" I asked.</p> +<p>"He lies beside our lord. There is a ring of slain round them. I +would I were there also," the warrior answered.</p> +<p>"Then were there one less to care for our helpless ones," I +said. "All are preparing for flight at Bures. Come with me to +Wormingford, and we will warn them. There is work to do for us who +are left."</p> +<p>"Aye, master, that is right," he said; "we may fight again and +wipe out this business."</p> +<p>Then the other man, who belonged to Sudbury, five miles beyond +us, bade us farewell, and so rode on with his tale of terror, and +Edred followed me across the ford to Osgod's house, which was but a +mile from where we met. He told me that Grinkel had found a fresh +horse in Stoke village, and so had outstripped him.</p> +<p>Many thralls stood at the gate of Osgod's courtyard as we came +there, and they were staring at the beacon fires around us, and +listening to the wild bells that rang so strangely. There was a +fire blazing now on the green before our own house, and one on the +hill above the Wormingford mere, which men say is haunted.</p> +<p>"I would see your mistress," I said as they came and held my +horse. I had not been to the house for two days, as it chanced.</p> +<p>Then one ran and brought the house steward, and told him.</p> +<p>"I know not if that may be, master," he said; "but I will ask +Dame Gunnhild."</p> +<p>"Has the lady gone to rest?" I said, being surprised at this +delay.</p> +<p>"She is not well" the man said; "and the dame has not suffered +her to rise today."</p> +<p>"Then let me have speech with the dame without delay," I said, +for this made me uneasy, seeing what need there was for speedy +flight.</p> +<p>The steward went in, and I bade the thralls do all that Edred +ordered them, telling him to see to what was needed for flight and +so I went into the house, and stood by the hall fire waiting for +Gunnhild the nurse.</p> +<p>There is nothing in all that wide hall that I cannot remember +clearly, even to a place where the rushes were ill strewn on the +floor. And the short waiting seemed very long to me.</p> +<p>Then came Gunnhild. She was old, and I feared her, for men said +that she was a witch. But she had been in the house of Osgod the +Thane since he himself was a child, and Hertha loved her, and that +was enough for me. Nor had I any reason to think that the dame had +any but friendly feelings towards myself, though her bright eyes +and tall figure, and most of all what was said of her, feared me, +as I say. Now she came towards me swiftly, and did not wait for me +to speak first.</p> +<p>"What will you at this hour, Redwald?" she said.</p> +<p>"Nought but pressing need bade me come thus," I answered. "The +levy is broken, and the Danes are on the way to Colchester. My +mother flies to London, and you and Hertha must do likewise."</p> +<p>"So your father and hers are slain," she said, looking fixedly +at me, and standing very still.</p> +<p>"How know you that?" I asked sharply, for I had told the steward +nothing.</p> +<p>"By your face, Redwald," she said; "you were but a boy two days +agone, now you have a man's work on your hands, and you will do it. +Who bade you ride here?"</p> +<p>"No one," I said, wondering, "needs must that I should +come."</p> +<p>"That is as I thought," she said; "but we cannot fly."</p> +<p>"Why not?"</p> +<p>"Because the sickness that your mother feared is on Hertha, and +she cannot go."</p> +<p>Now I was ready to weep, but that would be of no use.</p> +<p>"Is there danger to her?" I said, and I could not keep my voice +from shaking, for Hertha was all the sister I had, and she in time +would be nearer than that to me.</p> +<p>"None," answered the dame, "save she runs risk of chill. For she +has been fevered for a while."</p> +<p>"Which is most to be feared," said I, "chill, or risk of Danish +cruelty?"</p> +<p>She made no answer, but asked me what were my mother's plans. +And when I said that she would fly to Ethelred the king, the old +nurse laughed strangely to herself.</p> +<p>"Then you go to the very cause of all this trouble," she said. +"Truly the king's name should be 'the Unredy', for rede he has +none. It is his ill counsel that has brought Swein the Dane on us. +We have to pay for the Hock-tide slayings {<a name="Glyph3" href= +"#Note3" id="Glyph3">3</a>}."</p> +<p>"We had no share in that" I said.</p> +<p>"No, because half our folk are Danes, more or less, some of the +men of Ingvar and Guthrum. But Swein will not care for that--they +are all English to him."</p> +<p>"What will you do, then?" I asked, growing half wild that she +should stand there quietly and plan nought.</p> +<p>"These folk will side with Swein presently, when they find that +he is the stronger, and then the old kinship will wake in them, and +the Wessex king will be nought to their minds. Then will be peace +here, for the Danes will sweep on to Mercia and London. Do you go +to Ethelred the Unredy--and I abiding here shall be the safer in +the end, and Hertha with me."</p> +<p>"But peace has not come yet" I said.</p> +<p>"I can hide until it does come," she said. And then, for my face +must have shown all the doubt that I felt, she spoke very kindly to +me. "Trust the old witch who wishes you well, Redwald, my son; she +who has nursed Hertha for so long will care for her till the last; +safe she will be until you return to find her when the foolishness +of Ethelred is paid for."</p> +<p>"Where can you hide?" I asked, and urged her to tell me more, +but she would not do so.</p> +<p>"No man would dream of the hiding place that I shall seek," she +said, "and I will tell it to none. Then will it be the surer."</p> +<p>"I know all this country," I answered. "There is no place."</p> +<p>She smiled faintly, and paused a little, thinking.</p> +<p>"I will tell you this," she said at last. "You go to the king; +well--I go to the queen. That is all you may know. But maybe it +will be enough to guide you someday."</p> +<p>I could not understand what she meant; nor would she tell me +more. Only she said that all would be safe, and that I need fear +nothing either for Hertha or for herself.</p> +<p>"My forbears were safe in that place to which I go," she said; +"and I alone know where it is. When the time comes, Hertha shall +tell you of it but that must wait for the days to be."</p> +<p>"I fear they will be long. Let me see Hertha before I go," I +said, "for I must needs be content."</p> +<p>"How looked she when last you saw her?"</p> +<p>"Well, and bright, and happy," I answered.</p> +<p>"Keep that memory of her therefore," Gunnhild said. "I would not +have you see her in sickness, nor may she be waked without danger. +Tell your mother that surely if she could take Hertha with her it +should be so, but it may not be. She would be harmed by a long +journey."</p> +<p>The old nurse turned and left me as swiftly as she had come. And +now it is in my mind that she went thus lest she should weep. So I +was alone in the hall, and there was no more left for me to do. I +must even let things be as she would. It came into my thought that +she was right about our half-Danish folk, for though they had +fought to keep the newcomers from the land that their fathers had +won, Swein was no foreigner, and they would as soon own him as +Ethelred of Wessex, if he got the upper hand and would give them +peace. Even we Angles never forgot that the race of Ecgberht was +Saxon and not of our own kin altogether. The Dane was as near to us +as the Wessex king, save by old comradeship, and the ties that had +come with years.</p> +<p>So all that Edred and I could do was to bid the steward take his +orders from Gunnhild, and so ride back to Bures along the riverside +track. And when we came there the long train of flying people were +crossing the bridge, and we rode past them one by one, and the +sight of those wain loads of helpless women and children was the +most piteous I had ever seen. Many such another train was I to look +on in the years to come, but none ever wrung my heart as this, for +I knew every face so well. Yet I thought they would be safe, for +the Danes were far off yet, and there was full time to gain the +depths of the forest land on the East Saxon side.</p> +<p>Now, our people had gone on more quickly than the villagers by +reason of better cattle and more hands to the work, and when we had +passed the foremost of these, the road went up the hill and no man +was upon it. So we went quickly, and then came one on foot towards +the village, and just beyond him were our folk, whom he had passed +or left.</p> +<p>It was good Father Ailwin, our old priest, and I thought that he +sought me, or took back some word to others and I would ride back +for him.</p> +<p>"What is it, Father?" I cried, "I will do your errand."</p> +<p>"Nay, my son, you cannot," he said; "your mother drew me to fly +with her, and my weakness bade me do it for a while. But I may not +leave my place. The Danes are not all heathen as they were in +Eadmund's days, and I think that I am wrong to go. When our folk +come back they must find their priest waiting for them."</p> +<p>Then I strove to turn him again to flight with us, but I could +not, and at last he commanded me to desist and leave him. And so he +gave me his blessing, and I went, being sure that he would be +slain, and weeping therefore, for I loved him well. But I told him +of Dame Gunnhild's words, and begged him to seek her and speak with +her, for she might hide him also for a while if he would not leave +the place altogether.</p> +<p>So we left our home, and that was the last time I set eyes on +our hall at Bures. Then I caught up my mother hard by the dark wood +that is round the great solemn mound that we say is the tomb of +Boadicea, the Icenian queen of the men who fought against Rome. We +call it haunted, and none of us dare set foot in those woods, by +day even.</p> +<p>The beacon fires burnt all round us, and in every farmstead was +terror and hustle as the poor folk trembled to think what they +could mean, and some came now and then and asked my mother what +they should do.</p> +<p>"Bide in your homes till you must needs take to the woods," she +said; and that was wise counsel, and many were glad thereafter that +they took it, for the Danes passed them by.</p> +<p>Now I remember all that happened on our journey to London along +the great Roman road that runs from Colchester thither, but there +is little to tell thereof, for it was safe and we hardly hurried +after the first day. We rested at the house of a thane who was well +known to us on the first evening, and there my mother heard from +Edred all that had befallen. And she bore the heavy tidings well, +for she had already given up any hope that my father still lived. +Yet as I look back I know that she was never the same after that +day.</p> +<p>So we came in safety to London, and to the court of Ethelred our +king, and there we were most kindly received, for my father was +well known to the king, and the queen loved my mother for the sake +of old days. They gave us lodging near the great house where the +court was held, and on the third day after we came, we were bidden +to the king's presence.</p> +<p>Then it was that I looked on Ethelred for the first time, and I +had thought that a king should have been more kingly than he. For +there was no command in his face, and he moved quickly and with +little meaning in what he did, being restless in his way. But he +put his hand on my shoulder very kindly, and looked in my face and +said:</p> +<p>"One may know that this is the son of Siric, my friend. He is +like what the good thane was in the old days. What shall I do for +him, lady?"</p> +<p>Now, my mother would have answered, but I was not afraid of this +handsome, careless-looking man, and I had my own wishes in the +matter. So I spoke for myself.</p> +<p>"Make me a warrior, lord king. I would fain fight the Danes, and +already I can use sword and spear, and can ride."</p> +<p>Then my mother spoke hastily and almost weeping, being broken +down with all her trouble and the long journey.</p> +<p>"I would have him serve Holy Church rather, in some monastery. +Already he can read and write, my king, for I have had him taught +in hopes that this might be."</p> +<p>Thereat the king shook his head, and walked away to the window +for a minute. Then he came back quickly and said, not looking at my +mother:</p> +<p>"Holy Church will be best served by warriors who will use carnal +arms against Swein's heathen just now. The boy is right--I would +that there were more who had his spirit. We need and shall need +those who love fighting."</p> +<p>Then he said to me:</p> +<p>"Siric your father had a wondrous sword that I used to envy him; +you shall learn to use it."</p> +<p>"Lord king," I answered, "I must learn to win it back from the +Danes, who have it now."</p> +<p>I thought the king changed countenance a little at that, and he +bit his lip.</p> +<p>"We have been well beaten in East Anglia," he said as if to +himself. "Here is truth from this boy at least."</p> +<p>Now, if Ethelred did not know that our men had been so scattered +by the Danes that they could not even ask for truce to recover +their slain, it seemed plain even to me that the king was +ill-served in some way. But I could say nought; and after that he +bade us farewell for the time.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that he gave me a place among the thanes' +sons of his own court and there I was well trained in all that +would make me a good warrior. Soon I had many friends, and best of +all I loved the athelings, Eadmund and Eadward, who soon took +notice of me, the one because I was never weary of weapon play, and +the other, Eadward, who was somewhat younger than I, because of the +learning that our good priest of Bures had taken such pains to +teach me against my will. For above all things Eadmund loved the +craft of the warrior, and Eadward all that belonged to peace.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch2" id="Ch2">Chapter 2</a>: Olaf The King.</h2> +<p>My mother lived but a few months after that flight of ours; but +at least she knew before she died that Bertha was safe. What the +old nurse had foreseen had come to pass. The half-Danish and Danish +folk of the East Angles owned Swein as king, though not willingly, +and a housecarle from Wormingford made his way to us with word from +Gunnhild that set our minds at rest. Truly our hall and Osgod's had +been burnt by parties from the Danish host, and for a time the +danger was great, for Swein's vengeance for his sister's death was +terrible.</p> +<p>Now the land was poorer, but in peace. Yet Hertha would keep in +hiding till we might see how things went, for the Danes might be +forced back, and when a Danish host retreats it hinders pursuit by +leaving a desert in its wake. Many a long year will it be before +those Danish pathways are lost to sight again. They seem to be +across every shire of our land.</p> +<p>So I lived on in Ethelred's court now in one town and now in +another, as the long struggle bade us shift either to follow or fly +the Danes; and presently the memory both of my mother and Hertha +grew dim, for wartime and new scenes age and harden a youth very +quickly. Soon I might ride at the side of Eadmund the Atheling to +try to stay the march of Swein through England; and many were the +fights I saw with him, until I was the only one left of all the +youths who had been my comrades at first, and Eadmund had won his +name of "Ironside" in bravest hopeless struggle.</p> +<p>I grew to be a close and trusted friend of his, and so at last +amidst the trouble that was all round us in those heavy times the +remembrance of Hertha became but as part of a childhood that was +long gone, and I thought of her but as of the little one with whom +I had played in the old days beside the quiet Stour. There were +none left to remind me of her, for one by one my few Bures men had +fallen, and Edred, who had been my servant at the court, gave his +life for mine in my first battle. Into Swein's East Anglia our +levies never made their way.</p> +<p>What need for me to say aught of those three years of warfare? +Their tale is written in fire over all the fair face of England. +For nothing checked Swein Forkbeard until step by step the Danish +hosts closed on London, and at last even the brave citizens were +forced to yield to him. Then Ethelred our king must needs fly from +his throne, and leave the land to its Danish master.</p> +<p>Yet it was true, as Eadmund the Atheling said, that the Dane was +but master of the land, and not of the English people. Even today +my mind is full of wondering honour for those sullen Saxon levies +of ours who for three years bore defeat after defeat at the hands +of the trained and hardened veterans of the north, uncomplaining +and unbent. What wonder if at last we were wearied out and must +hold our hands for a while?</p> +<p>So now when I was nineteen, and looking and feeling many years +older by reason of the long stress of warfare and trouble, I was at +Rouen, in Normandy, at the court of our queen's brother, Richard +the Duke. To him Ethelred had fled at the last and there, too, were +the queen and the athelings, good Abbot Elfric of Peterborough, and +a few more of the court, besides myself. Ethelred had hoped to gain +some help from the duke; but he could only give us shelter in our +need, for he had even yet to hold the land that Rolf, his +forefather, had won against his neighbours, and could spare us not +one of his warriors.</p> +<p>So in Rouen we waited and watched for some new turn of things +that might give us fresh hopes of regaining our own land. Yet it +was a weary waiting for one knew not what; and Ethelred the king +grew moody and despairing as the days went on, and there seemed to +be no help.</p> +<p>But Eadmund was ever planning for return, and was restless, +riding down to each ship that came into the river to hear what news +might be, until the winter set in, and we must needs wait until +springtime brought the traders again from the English shores.</p> +<p>Only Elfgiva the queen, whom her own people call Emma, was well +content to be in her own land again for a while, though one might +easily see that she sorely grieved for the loss of her state as the +queen of England. And Eadward the Atheling loved to be among the +wondrous buildings of the Norman land, spending long hours with the +learned men, and planning many good things to be wrought in England +when times of peace should come once more. And in these plannings +Elfric the abbot was ever ready to help him, and the more, as I +think, that to hear of their thoughts of return to England, and of +happier times, would cheer our king. For Elfric would never allow +but that we were here for a short while only, saying that England +would yet rise up refreshed, and sweep the Danes into the sea, from +whence they came.</p> +<p>"Else why should I have given all that I have--even five hundred +pounds--for St. Florentine his body (wanting the head, in truth, +but I might not have that), if I were not sure that I should take +it home for the greater glory of St. Peter's church at Medehamstede +{<a name="Glyph4" href="#Note4" id="Glyph4">4</a>} presently? +Answer me that, lord king, and be not so downhearted."</p> +<p>This he said one day, being full of his purchase, and I think +that the cheerfulness of the good man helped our king.</p> +<p>"Verily, Redwald, my son," the abbot said to me, "if I get not +St. Florentine home, I think my money is not lost. The king waxes +more hopeful when he sees the shrine waiting to be taken +overseas."</p> +<p>Nor could I say for myself that I was not pleased with the stay +in Rouen. For I had never known the fierce joy of victory, and the +rest from the long tale of defeat was good to me. Yet I set myself +to learn all that I could of the splendid weapon craft of the +Norman warriors, for I thought that I should yet need in England +all I could learn. And the new life and scenes pleased me well, for +I was young enough to let the cares of our poor land slip from my +mind for a while.</p> +<p>So the long winter wore away, and at last the season came when +we might look for the first ships of the year, and with them news +from England. Then Eadmund would go to the haven at the mouth of +the great river Seine that runs to Rouen, so that he should be at +hand to hear the first tidings that came. Glad enough was I to go +with him, and we took up our quarters in a great house that +belonged to the duke at the town they call "The Haven," and there +waited, ever watching the long gray sea line for a coming sail.</p> +<p>But none came until the first week in March, when the wind blew +steadily from the northeast, and the sky was clear and bright with +promise of open weather. Then at last we saw eight ships together +heading for the haven, and that sight was more welcome than I can +say.</p> +<p>When they came near we knew that they were no traders, but long +dragon ships, and at first we thought they were Danish vikings; and +the townsmen armed in haste and mustered along the wharves to +prevent their landing, if they came on their wonted errand of +plunder. And eagerly enough did Eadmund and I join them, only +hoping for another blow at our foes, and having no thought in our +minds that the ships we watched were bringing us more hope than we +dared long for.</p> +<p>Next I knew that these ships were like no Danish vessels that I +had ever seen, but were far more handsome, both in build and +fittings. Nor did they fly the terrible raven banner as most Danes +were wont. Then it was not long before the lines of armed townsmen +broke up their ranks and crowded down to the wharves to greet the +ships in all friendliness, for they were Norse, as it would seem, +and the Norse viking is ever welcome in the land that Rolf Ganger, +the viking, won for himself.</p> +<p>So the ships came into the harbour, brave with gilded dragon +heads and sails striped with bright colours, all fresh from their +winter quarters, and Eadmund turned away, for he thought that they +would be Swein's men, of the host of Thorkel the Norseman, his +great captain, and foster father of Cnut his son. For Swein held +Norway as well as Denmark, and many Norsemen followed him. +Thorkel's host was that which slew Elfheah, the good archbishop of +Canterbury, whom his monks called Elphege, but last year.</p> +<p>That, too, was the thought of the seamen to whom I spoke when +the ships were yet distant, and so we went back to the hall heavy +and disappointed. We would not speak to these men, knowing that +from Thorkel's folk we should but hear boasting of Swein's +victories.</p> +<p>But presently the steward came into the hall, where we sat +silently listening to the shouts of the men as they berthed the +ships, and he said that the leader of the vikings would see and +speak with Eadmund himself.</p> +<p>"Is he Thorkel, or Thorkel's man?" answered the atheling, "for +if he be, I will not see him."</p> +<p>"No, lord," said the steward, "he is one who has no dealings +with the Danes. He will not tell me his name, but I think that he +is a great man of some kind."</p> +<p>"Not a great man, but thick," said a kindly voice of one who +stood without. "If hatred of Danes will pass me into Eadmund's +presence, I may surely enter."</p> +<p>And then there came into the doorway a man who was worth more +than a second look. Never had I seen one to whom the name of king +seemed to belong so well by right as to this man, whatever his rank +might be. He stood and looked round for a moment, as if the dim +light from the high windows was not enough to show him where we +were at first, and I could not take my eyes from him.</p> +<p>He was not tall, but very square of shoulder and deep of chest, +with mighty arms that were bare, save for their heavy gold +bracelets, below the sleeves of his ring mail, and his hair and +beard were golden red and very long. He wore a silvered helm, +whereon was inlaid a golden cross above a narrow gold circlet that +was round its rim, and his hand rested on the hilt of such a +priceless sword as is told of in the old tales of the heroes. But I +forgot all these things as I looked into his pleasant weatherbeaten +face, and saw the kindly look in the gray eyes that I knew would +flash most terribly in fight. He was twenty-five years old, as I +thought; but therein I was wrong, for he was just my own age, +though looking so much older.</p> +<p>"I am Olaf Haraldsson--Olaf Digri, the Thick, as men call me," +he said. "Some call me king, though I rule but over a few ships, as +a sea king. Which of you thanes is Eadmund the Atheling?"</p> +<p>Then Eadmund rose up from his place, and went towards the king. +His seat had been in shadow, else there had been no need to ask +which was he.</p> +<p>"I have heard of you, King Olaf," he said, "for your deeds are +sung in our land already. And you are most welcome. Have you news +from England?"</p> +<p>So those two grasped each other's hands, and I think there were +no two other such men living at that time. It was good to see them +together.</p> +<p>"Aye," said the king, "I have been in England, and therefore I +have come to find you. Swein is dead, and your chance has come. Let +me help you to win your land again."</p> +<p>That was plain speaking, and for the moment Eadmund held his +breath, and could not speak for sheer surprise and gladness. But I +could not forbear leaping up and shouting, tossing my helm in the +air as I did so, so wondrous was all this to me, and so full of +hope.</p> +<p>At that Olaf laughed, and leaving Eadmund to his thoughts, +turned to me.</p> +<p>"Which of the athelings are you?" he asked. "I have heard of +Eadmund's brothers," and he held out his strong hand to take +mine.</p> +<p>"I am but the atheling's comrade--his servant, rather," I said, +growing red as I did so, for I had surely forgotten myself in my +gladness.</p> +<p>"Redwald is no servant, King Olaf," said Eadmund quickly. "He is +my closest comrade here, and has fought well at my side. Thane of +Bures in East Anglia he is--but now the Danes hold his place."</p> +<p>"Why then," said Olaf, "Thoralf's grandson surely?"</p> +<p>"Aye, king," I answered, wondering; "my grandfather was named +Thoralf. He was one of Olaf Tryggvesson's chiefs."</p> +<p>"Then have I found a cousin," laughed the king. "Give me your +hand, kinsman," and he looked me over from head to foot, but very +kindly.</p> +<p>I took the king's hand gladly, but somewhat dazed in my mind at +being thus owned. And Olaf saw that I was so, and told me more.</p> +<p>"Asta, my good mother, was this Thoralf's cousin, and we +Norsemen do not lose count of our kin. So I knew well that Thoralf +found an English home and wife when Olaf Tryggvesson was first in +England, and that he was Thane of Bures by some right of his lady. +So I knew, when I heard your name and place, that I had found a +kinsman. And I have so few that I am glad."</p> +<p>Now I knew that this was true, but we had never thought much of +Thoralf, rather priding ourselves on his wife's long descent from +King Redwald. I wished for the first time now that I knew more of +this Norse grandfather of mine.</p> +<p>"Presently we will find Rani, my foster father, who is with the +ships," said Olaf; "he knew Thoralf well. You and I must see much +of one another, cousin."</p> +<p>Then he turned to Eadmund, who was, as it seemed, well pleased +that I had found so good a friend. And he said:</p> +<p>"Forgive me if I have forgotten greater matters for a moment. +But I cannot greet a kinsman coldly, and it is in my mind that +Redwald is a cousin worth finding, if I may judge by the way in +which he hailed my news."</p> +<p>"Truly," said Eadmund, "I am minded to do as he did, now that I +have taken all the wonder of it in. But it seems over good to be +true--Swein dead--and your offered help!"</p> +<p>Then they both laughed, well content, and so Eadmund called the +steward, and wine and meat were set for the king, and they sat down +and talked, as he ate with a sailor's hunger. But I listened not to +their talk, my mind being over full of this good fortune of my own. +I had none left of my own kin, and till today I had been as it were +alone.</p> +<p>Presently, however, I heard an East Anglian name that was dear +to me. Eadmund asked how it was that Swein Forkbeard had died, for +none thought that his end was yet to be thought of as near. Now it +would seem that he had gone suddenly.</p> +<p>"He was at Gainsborough," said Olaf, "and he was about to make +his way south to Eadmund's burg. Whereon men say that to save his +town and shrine the holy martyr, King Eadmund, whom Ingvar slew, +thrust Swein through with an iron lance. Some say that he slew him +otherwise, but all agree as to his slayer. And now I think that +England will rise."</p> +<p>"What of Cnut, Swein's son?" asked Eadmund.</p> +<p>"He is but a boy. What he may be in a few years' time I know +not. With him it will be as with myself. I was given a ship when I +was twelve years old, and thereafter all that my men did goes to my +credit in the mouths of the scalds. Yet my men and I know well that +Rani, my foster father, whom you will soon know, was the real +captain and leader for the first three or four years."</p> +<p>Then said Eadmund:</p> +<p>"Cnut is of no account."</p> +<p>Olaf laughed a little, and answered:</p> +<p>"Cnut's own arm may be of little strength, but his name is on +the lips of every Dane. There are three chiefs who will hold the +kingdom in his name, and they are the men whom you must meet: +Thorkel the High, his foster father; Ulf Sprakalegsson the jarl, +his brother-in-law; and Eirik the jarl, whose brother Homing holds +London even now. Good men and loyal they are, and what they do Cnut +does."</p> +<p>"I have three chiefs in my mind who can match these," said our +atheling. "Olaf the king, and Ulfkytel of East Anglia, and Edric +Streone, my foster father."</p> +<p>Then Olaf looked in the face of Eadmund, as it seemed to me in +surprise, and made no answer.</p> +<p>"Are we not equal then?" asked the atheling.</p> +<p>"I have heard that Edric Streone is on the Danish side," said +Olaf. "Cannot Utred of Northumbria be trusted?"</p> +<p>"Edric has but sought rest, from need," answered Eadmund. "I +know not what else he could do at last. He will join us again as +soon as we land. So also will Utred."</p> +<p>"Then we are equal," said the king, while a cloud seemed to pass +from his face, for Streone led all Mercia, and were he in truth on +our side things would go well. It was no very secret talk among +some of us that Edric the earl had made peace sooner than might +have been, but that angered Eadmund and the king sorely if so much +were even hinted.</p> +<p>"Then you will indeed help us?" said Eadmund, for Olaf had +accepted the place he had named for him as it were.</p> +<p>"I have a debt to England that I can never repay," answered the +king gravely. "She gave us our first teachers in the Christian +faith. And Swein has held Norway, my own land, with the help of the +heathen jarls who are yet there. I fight the fight of the Cross, +therefore, and when I go back to my own land, it will be to sweep +away the last worship of Odin and Thor. But the time has not come +yet," and his eyes shone strangely.</p> +<p>"When it comes I will help you," said Eadmund, "if it may be +that I can do so."</p> +<p>"I know it, and I thank you; but it is my thought that I shall +need no help," said the king, while the look on his face was very +wondrous, so that I had never seen the like. It minded me of the +pictures of St. Stephen that I saw in a great church here with +Abbot Elfric and Eadward. Then he spoke of the spread of the Faith +in Norway, and how that he would be the one who should finish what +Olaf Tryggvesson, his cousin, had begun; and one might see that he +longed for power and kingship only for that work.</p> +<p>Long did those two warriors talk before they turned to lighter +matters, and in the end they planned to ride to Rouen to see the +king himself on the next day. But before night fell there came more +news with another ship that came alone into the haven. And she was +English, bearing messengers from the great witan itself.</p> +<p>These thanes told Eadmund their news, and it was this:</p> +<p>That Cnut had been hailed as king by the Danish host at +Gainsborough, but that the English people begged Ethelred to return +to them, promising that a good force should be ready to meet him on +his landing. Already the London folk had planned a rising there and +in the great towns against the Thingmen, as the Danish paid +garrisons were called, and it was likely that this had by this time +come about.</p> +<p>So at once Eadmund went with these thanes to Rouen, and Olaf +would have me bide with him till word came from the king as to the +next doings.</p> +<p>That was a pleasant time to me, for I grew to love Olaf, and he +was never willing that I should be far from him. Then, too, I heard +many tales of my grandfather Thoralf from Rani, the old viking who +had fought beside him, and had been with Tryggvesson when he was +christened in England. And of all Olaf's men I liked best Ottar the +Black, the scald, who was but five years older than myself, but who +had yet seen much fighting with the king both by land and sea. We +sang much together, for I was willing to learn from him, and he to +teach me.</p> +<p>Now of this singing there is one thing that I will set down, for +the matter comes into my story again.</p> +<p>One day Ottar sang the saga of the sword of Hiorvard; how the +maiden warrior won it from the grave mound of her father, Angantyr, +in spite of terror of the dead hero, and of the unearthly fires. +That was a good saga, and when it was ended old Rani said:</p> +<p>"Thoralf had a sword that was won by his father from a chief's +grave mound in Vendland, It was the most wondrous sword, save only +Olaf's 'Hneitir' yonder, that I have ever seen. Silver and gold was +its hilt, and the blade was wrought in patterns on the steel, and +there were runes in gold close to the hilt. He would call it 'Foe's +Bane', and that in truth was what the sword was."</p> +<p>I knew only too well that that sword became my father's in his +turn, and now it was lost to me.</p> +<p>"My father fell with sword 'Foe's Bane' in his hand," I said +sadly. "Yet I know that the name was not belied ere he did so."</p> +<p>"Then the Danes have it," said Rani, "and it will come back to +you."</p> +<p>I remembered that Ethelred himself had spoken of the sword, and +how I had made his face fall when he heard that it was lost. Nor +had I been long at court before I heard words from one thane or +another that seemed to say that Edric Streone had made light of our +defeat, for some reasons of his own.</p> +<p>"I must win it back," I said.</p> +<p>"If there is aught in old sayings," answered Ottar, "the sword +will draw its holder to face you, unless he won it in fair fight +hand to hand."</p> +<p>Thereat Olaf laughed, and no more was said. But in years to come +there were told strange tales of the longing, as it were, of his +own sword 'Hneitir' to be back at its master's side.</p> +<p>So the time went quickly for me, but to Olaf the waiting seemed +long before Eadmund rode back from Rouen. And with him came those +thanes and his half-brother Eadward, but Ethelred himself was not +with them. He would not go to England, fearing treachery as it +seemed; but Eadward was to go over and meet the witan and speak +with them. Yet the thanes said that without the king no force would +move.</p> +<p>"Why does he not go?" said Olaf impatiently. "Here is time lost +when a sudden blow would win all."</p> +<p>"Because he is Ethelred the Unredy," answered Eadmund shortly, +for he was very angry at the delay.</p> +<p>Then was another waiting, but Eadward was very wise though he +was so young, being but twelve years old at this time, and he had +Elfric the abbot with him, and at last word came from him that all +was going well. Then Ethelred made up his mind and listened to +Olaf's counsel.</p> +<p>"Strike at London," he said. "We know that the citizens are ever +loyal."</p> +<p>They had risen, as it seemed, and had slain many of the +thingmen, and Heming, Thorkel's brother, himself. That had but +brought on them hardships and a stronger garrison, while Ethelred +wavered and would not come.</p> +<p>At last Ethelred gathered what few men would follow him from +Normandy and sailed to go to Southampton, and so to Winchester. +Richard the Duke gave him a few ships and men enough to man them. +Then Olaf, as it was planned, would sail up the Thames in such time +as to meet the king's land force at London on a certain day, and +thus take the city by a double attack. And Olaf asked that I might +sail with him.</p> +<p>That Eadmund gladly agreed to, saying that we should meet on +London Bridge shortly, and so I saw him set out full of hope, and +then waited with Olaf for the short time that he would yet stay +before sailing. He would not reach the Thames too early lest London +should be held in too great force for us, and it was his plan that +we should sail up the great river too suddenly for any new Danish +force to be gathered.</p> +<p>Now on the evening before we sailed Olaf the king was restless, +and silent beyond his wont at the feasting before departure, and he +seemed to take little pleasure even in the songs of Ottar the +scald, though the men praised them loudly. I thought it likely that +some foreboding was on him, and that is no good sign before a +fight.</p> +<p>So presently I spoke to Rani, asking him if aught ailed the +king. Whereat he answered, smiling:</p> +<p>"Nought ails him but longing to be sword to sword with these old +foes of ours. This is his way, ever. If he were gay as Biorn the +marshal yonder I might wonder at him maybe."</p> +<p>But presently Olaf rose up and bade Rani take his place, saying +that he would go down to the ships to see that all was well. And +then he beckoned me to follow him, and we went down the long hall +together. It would seem that this was no new thing that he should +leave the feast there, for the little hush that fell as we passed +the long tables lasted no long time, and the men seemed not +surprised. Indeed King Olaf had little love for sitting over the +ale cup, and no man was more careful to see to all things about his +ships and men than he.</p> +<p>The great doors closed after us, and we stood in the white +moonlight for a moment. The air was cold and sharp after the warmth +of the crowded hall. Down in the harbour the water was quiet +enough, but outside a fair breeze was blowing from the +southwest.</p> +<p>"The wind will hold, and will serve us well," said Olaf. "Who of +all the Danish hosts will deem that such a wind is bringing fire +and sword on them from across the sea?"</p> +<p>Then he folded his cloak round him and we went down to the +harbour, where the long line of ships lay side by side along the +wharf with their bows shoreward. The great dragon stem heads +towered over us, shining strangely in the moonlight, and the gentle +send of the waves into the harbour made them sway and creak as +though they were coming to life.</p> +<p>"The dragons are restless as I," he said looking up at them.</p> +<p>"Tomorrow, hungry ones--tomorrow--then shall you and I be set +free to meet wind and wave and foe again."</p> +<p>Then one of the men on watch began to sing, and his song was an +old sea stave that had a swing and roll in its rough tune that was +like the broken surge of sea water, even while it was timed to the +fall of oar blades into the surf. One may not say how old those +songs are that the seamen sing.</p> +<p>"That is the dragon's answer," said the king to me. "Sing, +Redwald, and take your part."</p> +<p>So when the man came to the part where all should join, I took +up the song with him, and then many others of the men joined +in--some five or six in each ship.</p> +<p>"That is good," said Olaf, laughing softly. "Here are men whose +hearts are light."</p> +<p>The man who sang first came now and looked over the high bows of +the ship, and his figure was black against the moonlight.</p> +<p>"Ho, master scald!" he cried in his great voice, "now shall you +sing the rest. You have put me out of conceit with my own singing. +Why are you not at the feast, where I would be if I were not tied +here!"</p> +<p>"He is keeping the dragons awake," laughed the king. "Nor do I +think that even a feast would take you from the ship just as the +tide is on the turn."</p> +<p>"Maybe not, lord king," answered the man, lifting his hand in +salute. "But the dragons will be wakeful enough--never fear for +them."</p> +<p>So the king answered back cheerily, and other men came and +listened, and so at last he turned away, leaving the men who loved +him pleased and the happier for his coming thus.</p> +<p>Now I thought that we should have gone back to the hall; but +Olaf walked away from the town, going along the shore. The tide was +just out, and the flow would soon begin. Soon we lost sight of the +last lights from the houses, and still he went on, and I followed +him, not speaking, for I knew not what plans he was making.</p> +<p>At last we came to a place to which I had not been before, and +it was lonely enough. The forest came down to the beach, and the +land was low and sheltered between the hills. There the king +stayed, sitting down on a fallen tree and resting his chin on his +hand, as he looked out over the water with grave eyes that seemed +to see far beyond the tossing waves.</p> +<p>I rested beside him, and there we bided silent for an hour or +more. There was only the sound of the wind in the storm-twisted +trees behind us, and of the waves as they broke along the edge of +the bare sands, where a few waking sea birds ran and piped unseen +by us. Almost had I slept with those well-known sounds in my +ears.</p> +<p>Then suddenly the king lifted his head, and spoke one word to +me:</p> +<p>"Listen," he said.</p> +<p>I roused, but all that I could hear at first were the sounds +that I had forgotten--the song of the wind in the trees, the rush +of the breakers, and the cry of the sea birds across the sands.</p> +<p>Then my heart began to beat wildly, for out of these sounds, or +among them, began to come clearly, and yet more clearly the sound +of the tread of many armed feet--the passing of a mighty host--and +with that the thunder of the war song, and the cry of those who +bade farewell. And these sounds passed over us and around us, going +seawards; then they died away out towards the north, and were +gone.</p> +<p>Yet still the king listened, and again came the tramp of the +armed thousands, and the war song, and the voices of parting, and +they passed, and came, and passed yet once more.</p> +<p>Then after the third time there was nought but the sound of wind +and wave and sea fowl, and I drew closer to Olaf and asked him:</p> +<p>"What is this that we hear?"</p> +<p>"Wait," he said, and pointed seaward.</p> +<p>Then I looked, and I saw all the northern sky glow red as glows +the light of a burning town on the low clouds when the host that +has fired it looks back on its work. And plain and clear in the +silver moonlight against the crimson sky sat the wraith of a king, +throned on the sand at the very water's edge, and round him stood +shadowy nobles, looking seaward.</p> +<p>And even as I saw it the first wave of the rising tide sent its +edge of foam shorewards, and it surged around the kingly feet and +sapped the base of the throne, and the stately wraith turned and +looked upon the nobles, and was gone.</p> +<p>Then faded the red light from the sky, and the waves washed over +the place where the throne and court had been, and Olaf rose up and +looked in my face. Nor was there fear of what he had seen and heard +written in his quiet look.</p> +<p>"What is this, my king?" I said, trembling with the fear that +comes of things beyond our ken.</p> +<p>"It is the fate of England that is falling on her," he said +quietly.</p> +<p>"Read it me, for I fear what I have heard and seen," I said.</p> +<p>"We have heard the going of mighty hosts to England, and we have +heard the sound of farewell. But we have heard no shout of victory, +or wailing for defeat. Little therefore will be gained or lost by +this sailing of ours. Yet all is surely lost if we sail not."</p> +<p>Then he ceased, but he had not yet spoken of what we saw, and I +waited for his words. Yet still he stood silent, and looked out +over the sea, until I was fain to ask him what the vision +meant.</p> +<p>"Surely it was the wraith of a son of Swein that we saw," he +said; "but it will be long years ere Cnut bears that likeness, for +that was of a man full grown and mighty."</p> +<p>Now the reading of this was beyond me, for I have no skill in +these matters, as had Olaf. And he said nought for a little while, +but seemed to ponder over it.</p> +<p>"Now I know," said he at last. "What we have seen is the outcome +of the going of the hosts to England. There shall be a Danish +kingdom built upon sand. Cnut shall reign, but his throne shall +fall. The wave of English love for England's kings of her own race +cannot be stayed."</p> +<p>Then I was downcast, for hope that the Danes would be driven +from the land had filled all my mind, and I said:</p> +<p>"Surely the vision may mean that we shall sweep away the Danish +rule as the waves sapped the throne and swept over its place."</p> +<p>"Aye, may it be so," answered Olaf. "Often one may read these +visions best even as their bodings come to pass. Let us go back. +This is a lonesome place, and strange fancies weigh down a man's +mind when all he may hear is the wind singing to the surges. Maybe +these are but dreams. What matters it if Cnut reigns over the old +Danelagh as Guthrum reigned, if Ethelred is overlord? It will be +again as in Alfred's days, and once more an English king over the +English folk, when Cnut is gone."</p> +<p>So he turned, and led the way back towards the town, and when we +saw the lights close at hand, he bade me say nought of this to any +man.</p> +<p>"We have seen strange things, cousin," he said, taking my arm, +"and they will be better untold. You and I may see their meaning +hereafter, and maybe shall have a share in their working out. Now +let us sleep, and dream only of seeing England again tomorrow."</p> +<h2><a name="Ch3" id="Ch3">Chapter 3</a>: The Breaking Of London +Bridge.</h2> +<p>There was a fair wind for us into the Thames mouth, and all +seemed to be going well. But when we came off the Medway it seemed +that there was to be fighting, for our way was blocked by a fleet +and that stronger than ours.</p> +<p>Now as the longships were cleared for the weapon play, Olaf +wondered how the Danes should have had word of our coming, for it +was plain that this fleet of ten ships was waiting for us. Yet we +had kept well away from the forelands, lest we should make it too +plain where we were going.</p> +<p>Then one ship left the rest and came swiftly towards us, under +oars. And when the ship drew near, we saw that she bore the banner +of Ethelred himself.</p> +<p>So the fair plans that had been made had come to naught, and +when Olaf understood this his face grew dark with anger, and he +said:</p> +<p>"Almost would I leave this foolish king to go his own way +without help of mine. But I have promised Eadmund, and I must keep +my word. Henceforward I shall know what I must look for."</p> +<p>Little, therefore, had Olaf to say to Ethelred when they met, +nor would he go on board the English ship, but Ethelred must come +to him. Eadmund was at his father's side, and his face was very +wrathful, for he felt even as did Olaf.</p> +<p>"London is ours already," Ethelred said. "Wherefore I would join +you."</p> +<p>"London by this time may be in other hands," answered Olaf; "but +we shall see when we get there. Now must there be no more time lost +but we must make all speed up the river, tarrying nowhere."</p> +<p>So we sailed on. When we came to Greenwich there were no Danes +there, nor any Danish ships. I went ashore in a boat, and asked the +men I saw what was become of them. And they told me that Thorkel's +fleet had sailed northward on Swein's death, and that the thingmen +whom he had left in the place had gone to London.</p> +<p>"That is as I thought," said Olaf. "Now there will be more +trouble in driving them out than there has been in letting them +in."</p> +<p>When we came at last in sight of London Bridge I knew that Olaf +was right, for since the Danes had gained the city they had not +been idle. They had built a great fort on the Southwark side of the +river, girt with a wide moat, and all the stronger that the walls +thus surrounded were partly of timber and stone. The road from +across London Bridge runs through this fort, so that one might by +no means pass over it until the place was won. And at the other end +of the bridge the old Roman walls of London itself were far too +strong for our force to take by storm.</p> +<p>But the strangest thing to me was to see what they had done to +the great timber bridge itself, for they had made that also into a +fortress. The old railing along the roadway was gone, and in its +place were breast-high bulwarks of strong timber, and on each span +of the bridge was a high wooden tower whose upper works overhung +the water, looking downstream, as if they feared assault from the +river itself.</p> +<p>We came up to the Pool on a good flood-tide, and as we dropped +anchor there we saw all this, and, moreover, that the place was +held by the Danes in force. The red cloaks of Cnut's thingmen were +on bridge and walls and fort alike, and no few of them in either +stronghold. There was work before us if we would win the place for +our king.</p> +<p>Before any word had come to Olaf of what should be done, Eadmund +had gone ashore with all his warriors, and had fallen on the +Southwark earthwork. It was Olaf's first thought to follow him, but +he held back.</p> +<p>"Let him go," he said. "Maybe he will like best to win his own +city without my help at the first onset. Yet unless that fort is +weaker than it looks, his attack will be of no use. For, see--all +the Danes from the bridge are going to help."</p> +<p>So it was, and from the deck of Olaf's ship I looked on at the +fight for half an hour. At one time I thought that we had won the +place, for our men charged valiantly through the moat and up the +steep sides of the earthworks.</p> +<p>There waited for them the Danish axes, and an axeman behind a +wall is equal to two men below him.</p> +<p>I longed to be beside Eadmund, whom I could see now and then, +and ever where the fighting was fiercest; but Olaf bade me be +patient. There would be fighting enough for me presently, he +said.</p> +<p>"You will see that we shall have to take the bridge, and so cut +the Danish force in two. Then from the bridge we have but to fight +our way either into the fort or into the town."</p> +<p>Presently our men gave back. The earthworks were too strong for +them. Then I asked again that I might go.</p> +<p>"If you must fall, it shall be at my side, cousin," said Olaf, +laying his hand on my arm. "Eadmund does not need you."</p> +<p>For now he and his men were coming back to the ships, having won +nought but knowledge of the strength of the fort. The Danes would +not leave their walls to follow the retreating English, though +Eadmund halted just beyond bow shot, and waited as if to challenge +them to fight in the open.</p> +<p>Now by this time the tide was almost full, and the stream of the +flood was slackening. And it seemed as if one might easily scale +the bulwarks of the great low-timbered bridge from the foredeck of +a ship. Ethelred saw that, and as soon as his men were on board +again the word was passed that attack on the bridge should be made +by every vessel that could reach it.</p> +<p>As it fell out, we of Olaf's eight ships lay below the rest, and +must have passed them to reach the bridge. All we might do, +therefore, was to close up to the sterns of the vessels that were +leading, and wait to send our men across their decks when the time +came. That pleased not Olaf at first, for he thought that his turn +had come; but in the end it was well for us.</p> +<p>Now the ships slipped their cables, and drifted up to the bridge +steadily, with a few oars going aft to guide them, and as they came +the Danes crowded above them, manning their towers and lining the +whole long length with savage faces and gleaming weapons. They +howled at us as we drew near, and as the bows of the leading ships +almost touched the piles, they hove grappling irons into them from +above, holding them fast. Whereat Eadmund thanked them for saving +trouble, while the arrows fell round him like hail.</p> +<p>But in a moment that word of his was changed, for now fell from +towers and bulwarks a fearsome rain of heavy darts and javelins, +and the men fell back from the crowded fore decks to seek safety +aft until the store of weapons was spent. Truly, there must have +been sheaves of throwing weapons piled ready on the roadway of the +bridge.</p> +<p>Then Eadmund's voice cried:</p> +<p>"Steady, men--this cannot last!"</p> +<p>And even as they heard him the warriors swarmed back across the +corpse-cumbered decks, and began to climb up the piles, for the +tide held the ships strongly against the bridge. Yet when the ships +were there the height of the bridge above them was far greater than +it had seemed from a distance. Now their fore decks were under the +towers, for the upper works of these overhung the water.</p> +<p>Then the Danish war horns blew, and the men raised a great +shout, and down from those towers and from openings in the bridge +rained and thundered great ragged blocks of stone--masses rent from +the old Roman city walls--and into the ships they crashed, and +there rose a terrible cry from our men, for no ship that was ever +built could stand so fierce a storm as this.</p> +<p>Two good ships swayed and sank, and their men climbed on bridge +and piling, or leapt into the stream to reach the ships that yet +were afloat. Then the storm stayed for lack of rocks within reach, +as it would seem, for I saw men hoisting more into the towers as +fast as crane and windlass would serve them.</p> +<p>Now fell the javelins again, and still the grappling irons held +the ships, though the oars were manned. Then dared a man in each +ship to do the bravest deed of that day. Through rain of falling +javelins each ran forward, axe in hand, and cut the grappling lines +as our Norsemen cheered them in wild praise. Yet I know that not +one of those men lived to see that his deed had saved the ships, +for our oars were out and swiftly we towed them away to safety.</p> +<p>Aye, but I saw one tall Dane on the bridge strive to hold the +hands of his fellows that he might save at least the brave man in +the ship below him. And that should be told of him, for such a deed +is that of a true warrior.</p> +<p>All this I watched in dismay, for it seemed to me that we could +in no way take the town. As for Olaf, he said nought; and when we +had come to anchor again he sat on the steersman's bench, looking +at the bridge and saying no word to any of us. The Danes were +crowding the bridge and jeering at us, as one might well see.</p> +<p>Then Rani came aft and sat on the rail by me.</p> +<p>"Well," he said, "how like you this business?"</p> +<p>"Ill enough," I answered. "What can be done?"</p> +<p>He nodded towards Olaf, smiling grimly.</p> +<p>"I know of nothing; but if your king lets him go his own way he +will find out some plan. Know you what he did when the Swedes +blocked us into a lake some years ago?"</p> +<p>"I have not heard," I said.</p> +<p>"Why, seeing that we might not go out by the way in which we +came, Olaf made us dig a new channel, and we went out by that, +laughing. We all had to dig for our lives, grumbling, but we got +away."</p> +<p>Now Olaf looked up and saw us, and his face was bright +again.</p> +<p>"I am going to see Ethelred," he said, "for I think that I can +take the bridge."</p> +<p>A boat shot alongside even as he spoke, and a thane came to bid +Olaf to a council of the leaders on Ethelred's ship. So Olaf went +with him, and was long away. The tide was almost low, and darkness +had fallen before he came back in high spirits.</p> +<p>"Ethelred was sorely downcast, even to weeping," he told us, +"and so had almost given up hope of taking London. He thought of +sailing away and landing elsewhere. Then I said that I would take +the bridge tomorrow if I had help in what I needed tonight."</p> +<p>Then he looked round on us, and what he saw in our faces made +him laugh a little.</p> +<p>"It seems to me that you are over fearful of stone throwing +after the Danish sort," he said. "Had I not a plan that will save +our heads and the ship's timbers alike, I would not go. I am not +the man to risk both for nought. We will build roofs over the fore +decks and try again."</p> +<p>Then Rani growled:</p> +<p>"How are we to climb out from under your roofs so as to get upon +the bridge? We have already seen that ladders are needed for that +also."</p> +<p>"Nay," said Olaf, "we will bring the bridge down to us," and so +he went forward laughing to find his shipwrights.</p> +<p>So all that night long we wrought as he bade us, and Ethelred's +men came with spars and timber from houses they pulled down ashore, +and when morning broke we had on each ship the framework of a +strong, high-pitched roof that covered the vessels from stem to +midships or more, and stretched out beyond the gunwales on either +board.</p> +<p>Then the men who wrought ashore brought us boatloads of strong +hurdles and the sides and roofs of the wattled huts of the +Southwark thralls, and with them all our wooden shelters were +covered so strongly that, if they might not altogether stand the +weight of the greatest stones, these roofs would break their fall +and save the ships.</p> +<p>When all this was finished, King Olaf told us what his plan was. +We were not to try to storm the bridge, but were to break it.</p> +<p>"See," he said, "all night long the wagons that brought more +stones have been rumbling and rattling into the middle of the +bridge, and every Dane thereon will crowd into the centre to see +the breaking of King Olaf's ships, and their weight will help us. +We will go so far under the bridge that we may make fast our cables +to the piles, and then will row hard down the falling tide at its +swiftest. Whereupon the laugh will be on our side instead of with +the Danes, as yesterday."</p> +<p>After that he bade us all sleep, for we had some long hours to +wait for the falling tide when all was done. And we did so, after a +good meal, as well as we could, while the wains yet brought stones, +and arrows and darts in sheaves to the bridge. But forward in our +ships the men were coiling the great cables that should, we hoped, +bring the bridge and stones alike down harmlessly to us.</p> +<p>It was plain that the Danes knew what the roofs over the ships +were for, since all the while that we wrought we could see them +pointing and laughing one to another in scorn, from where we lay, +not much beyond arrow shot below them. But not one of all the men +on the bridge could have guessed what our real plan might be. Only +we who looked at the ancient bridge from the water, and marked how +frail and decaying some of the piles that upheld its narrow spans +were, knew how likely it was that Olaf's plan would succeed. The +wide roadway seemed to them to be strong enough for the wooden +towers and the many tons of stones they had burdened it with; but +now that Olaf had showed us, we saw that it was none so safe, so we +waited in good spirits.</p> +<p>The tide reached its height and as the ships swung idly to their +cables on the slack, the Danes thronged the bridge, thinking, +doubtless, that we should attack when they were within reach, as +yesterday.</p> +<p>The hum of their voices came down to us, and as the time went +by, and the ebb tide set in, the hum strengthened into a long roar +of voices, that broke out into a yelling laugh now and then, as +some word of scorn went round. For they thought our Norsemen were +afraid.</p> +<p>But they could not see beneath the penthouse roofs, where the +men, three at each oar, were armed and ready. Nor could they see +the gangs of twelve men told off to the cables on each foredeck. +Six of these were to pass the cables round the piles and make fast +while the other six were to stand by with shields ready, in case +the roofs were broken. But even then it should not take long to do +all we needed, and some of the roof would be left surely at the +worst.</p> +<p>Four only of the ships were to touch the bridge, one at each of +the four midmost pilings. The other four were made fast, stern to +stern of the leading ships, so that their weight of oar play might +be used to the full in the long pull to come, and two ships would +haul at each set of piles where the weight was heaviest upon the +bridge.</p> +<p>So we waited until the tide was at its fiercest ebb. The water +rushed through the narrow waterways of the bridge in a broken +torrent streaked with foam that swirled far down the stream towards +us; so the time having come, Olaf gave the word. His own ship was +one of the two in the middle, and Rani was in command of the +other.</p> +<p>Then in a moment the oars flashed out, and the moorings were +slipped; a shout went up from the bridge, and then the Danes were +silent, wondering. The foam flew from our bows, and as we dashed up +the stream the Danish war cry broke out again, while from end to +end of the bridge the weapons flashed and sparkled.</p> +<p>Now the arrows rattled on the penthouse roofs, and one or two +glanced from Olaf's armour and mine, and from the shields which +Ottar and I held before him. For we were alone with him at the +helm. He was steering his ship himself, as was Rani, and hardly +would he suffer us to be beside him to shield him. But we would +have it thus in the end.</p> +<p>At last we were almost on the bridge, and Olaf smiled and +watched the ships to right and left of us--the oar blades were +bending as the men struggled with clenched teeth against the fierce +current that flew past us foaming.</p> +<p>Then the Danish grapnels were cast, as yesterday. The shadow of +the bridge fell black upon us--the line of Danish faces were above +our bows--and then down crashed the great stones from above, and I +saw Olaf's lips tighten and set as he saw their work. Yet though +the good ship quivered and reeled under the shock, the penthouse +roofs were strong and steep, and but one great stone tore a hole +for itself, crushing two men beneath it; but the rest bounded into +the water, splintering an oar blade or two as they went. And all +the while the arrows rained round us, and the javelins strove to +pierce the roofs.</p> +<p>Then was a shout from forward of the ship, and Olaf's eyes +brightened as he raised his hand. Instantly the rowers stayed, and +the ships drifted away from the bridge more swiftly than they had +come, while the Danish grappling irons ripped and tore along the +roofs uselessly. There was no firm hold for them.</p> +<p>That made the Danes think that we were driven off, and their +yells began afresh.</p> +<p>Then came a quick word from Olaf, and the oars took the water to +ease the sharp check as the length of the cables was reached, while +the ship astern of us swung to her tow line. The king glanced to +right and left of him, and saw that the other three ships had fared +as well as we, and that they too were dropping down from the +bridge.</p> +<p>How the Danes roared and howled with joy, thinking that we were +all in full retreat! Yet, as the last ship tightened her cable, I +saw the jerk shake one of them from his perch on the bridge +bulwarks and send him headlong into the water.</p> +<p>Olaf saw it, and raised his hand and shouted. And with one +accord the oars of the eight great ships smote the water, and bent, +and tore the waves into foam--and London Bridge was broken!</p> +<p>The memory of that sight will never pass from my mind or from +the mind of any man of us who saw all that the lifted hand and +shout of Olaf the king brought about.</p> +<p>There was a slow groaning of timbers and a cracking, and then a +dead silence. Then the silence was broken by a wild yell of terror +from the swarming Danes, and ere they could fly from the crowded +towers and roadway where the bridge was steepest, the whole length +of three spans bent and swayed towards us, and a wide gap sprang +open across the roadway. Into that gap crumbled a great stone-laden +tower, and men like bees from a shaken swarm. And then those three +spans seemed to melt away with a great rush and roar, and howl of +men in mortal terror--and down the freed tide swept our ships, +dragging after them the timbers that the cables yet held.</p> +<p>Then into the Southwark fortress went Eadmund and his men like +fire, while from the London side of the river came the roar of a +fight, as the citizens fell on the Danes who were fleeing terror +smitten from the weakened spans that were left of London +Bridge.</p> +<p>Then Olaf swung our ships to either bank, and past us went in +confusion, on the rush of pent-up water, the great timbers and +piles of the bridge, as it broke up piece by piece in the current. +The men on Ethelred's ships had all they could do to save their +vessels from being stove in by the heavier woodwork when it was +swept down among them.</p> +<p>That danger passed; and now was our turn come to join in the +fighting, for there were none to prevent us from getting the ships +up to the bridge. And so we scaled from our decks the bulwarks that +had been so terrible, and fell on the Danes in the rear as Eadmund +in Southwark and the citizens in London took them in the front. It +must have been that few Danes were left on either bank, for the +fighting lasted no long time, and when we had done with these men +from off the bridge there was no other attack.</p> +<p>So, before the evening came we knew that London was once more in +the hands of Ethelred, and the bells were ringing to welcome back +an English king to English land. For Olaf had brought him home.</p> +<p>There was high feasting in London town that night, and Ethelred +deemed that England was already won. Nor was there any honour too +great for him to show to the man who had wrought this for him.</p> +<p>But what Olaf said was this:</p> +<p>"To win London is much--though, indeed, it should never have +been thus lost--but London is not England. There will be more +fighting yet, if Cnut is a worthy son of Swein Forkbeard."</p> +<p>Now, in after years men made light of this breaking of London +Bridge, and the reason is not far to seek. For, first of all, +Cnut's folk, when they had the upper hand, liked not to hear +thereof. And then the citizens would speak little among themselves +of their thraldom to the Danes, and much of their welcome to +Ethelred and their own share in the business when the bridge had +been broken. And lastly, it was wrought by an outlander. Truly no +Englishman, whether of Saxon or Danish kin, grudges praise to a +stranger when he has won it well, but Olaf had few to speak for him +after he had gone hence. But I have told what I saw, and think that +it should not be forgotten, for it was a great deed. Men sing the +song that Ottar the scald wrote thereon in Olaf's Norway, and I +think that they will sing it for many an age to come.</p> +<p>We have forgotten that song; but the first time he sang it was +at the great feast in the wide hall of the London merchants' guild +that night, and sorely did the few Danish lords, who sat as +captives among us unwillingly enough, scowl as they listened. But +our folk held their breath lest they should lose aught of either +voice or words of the singer, for they had never heard his like +before, and this is part of what he sang {<a name="Glyph5" href= +"#Note5" id="Glyph5">5</a>}:</p> +<pre> +"Bold in the battle +Bravest in sword play! +Thou wert the breaker +Of London's broad bridge. +Wild waxed the warfare +When thou gold wonnest +Where the shields splintered +'Neath the stones' crashing-- +When the war byrnies broke +Beaten beneath them. + +"Thine was the strong arm +That Ethelred sought for; +Back to his lost land +Thou the king leddest. +Then was the war storm +Waged when thou earnest +Safe to his high seat +Leading that king's son, +Throned by thy help +On the throne of his fathers." +</pre> +<p>He ended, and our warriors rose and cheered both hero and +singer, and when the noise ceased Ethelred gave Ottar his own +bracelet; but to Olaf he gave his hand, and there in the presence +of all the company thanked him for what he had wrought, giving more +praise to him than Ottar had sung.</p> +<p>Then sang the English gleemen of the deeds of Eadmund the +Atheling, and all were well pleased. Now those songs have bided in +our minds while Ottar's song is forgotten, and maybe that is but +natural. But Olaf was my kinsman and very dear to me, and I am +jealous for his fame.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch4" id="Ch4">Chapter 4</a>: Earl Wulfnoth Of +Sussex.</h2> +<p>Cnut the new Danish king was at Gainsborough with all the force +that had followed Swein his father, and he had made a pact with the +Lindsey folk, who were Danes of the old settlement, and of landings +long before the time of Ingvar, that they should fight for him and +find provision and horses for his host.</p> +<p>So it seemed most likely that the next thing would be that he +would march on us, and Ethelred gathered all the forces to him here +in London that he could, against his coming. At once the English +thanes came in, and even Sigeferth and Morcar, the powerful lords +of the old Danish seven boroughs in Mercia, brought their men to +his help, and that was almost more than could have been hoped. Then +too came Edric Streone, the great Earl of Mercia, Eadmund's uncle +by marriage and his foster father, praying for and gaining full +forgiveness for having seemed to side with Swein, as he said. With +these was Ulfkytel, our East Anglian earl, and many more, while +word came from Utred of Northumbria that he would not hold +back.</p> +<p>So it was not long before Ethelred and Eadmund rode away north +towards Gainsborough at the head of as good a force as they had +ever led, in order to be beforehand with the Danes, who as yet had +made no move. It seemed as though they feared this new rising of +all England against them, although all Swein's men who had been +victors before were there with their new king.</p> +<p>But Olaf, who knew more of Denmark and what might happen there +than we, said that Cnut waited for news from thence. It might be +that some trouble would arise at home, for seldom did a king come +to his throne there without fighting against upstarts who would +take it.</p> +<p>"So he holds his force in readiness in the Humber to fall on +either Denmark or England. If things go ill at home, he will go +over sea first, and return here. But if all is well, we shall have +fighting enough presently."</p> +<p>Now when the court of Ethelred had gathered again, it was not +long before he grew more cold in his way with Olaf, and one might +easily see that this grew more so with the coming of Edric Streone. +So that when the march to Lindsey was spoken of, Olaf thought well +to stay in the Thames with the ships, and when Eadmund asked him to +come north with the levies he said:</p> +<p>"It seems to me that there are jealousies already among your +thanes concerning me, and I will not be the cause of any divisions +among your folk. Yet I would help you, and here is what I can do. I +will see that no landing is made on these southern shores while you +are northward, for if you beat Cnut he will take ship and come to +Essex or Kent; or maybe even into the Thames again. Give me +authority to command here until you return, and I think I can be of +more use than if I went with you."</p> +<p>So that was what was done in the end, and Olaf was named as +captain of the ships and of any southern host that he might be able +to raise, and Olaf asked that I might stay with him.</p> +<p>That our atheling granted gladly, telling me that it was for no +lack of wish on his part to have me at his side, as ever of late, +but that I should take a better place with the king my kinsman than +among the crowd of thanes who were round Ethelred. Then he took his +own sword from his side and gave it me.</p> +<p>"Farewell therefore for a while, Redwald, my comrade," he said +when he went away. "You have helped me to tide over many heavy +hours that would have pressed sorely on me but for your +cheerfulness. When peace comes you shall have your Anglian home +again, with more added to its manors for the sake of past days and +good service."</p> +<p>That was much for the atheling to say, and heartily did I thank +him. Yet I had grown to love Olaf my kinsman better than any other +man, and I was glad to be with him, away from the court jealousies +and strivings for place. There was little of that in Olaf's fleet, +where all were old comrades, and had each long ago found the place +that he could best fill.</p> +<p>So the levies marched on Gainsborough, and Olaf bided in the +Thames and gathered ships and men till we had a fair fleet and a +good force. Then came the news that Cnut and all his host had taken +ship and fled from England without waiting to strike a blow at +Ethelred, and our folk thought that this was victory for us. But +Olaf rode down to the ships in haste, and took them down to Erith, +while his land levies followed on the Kentish shore. For he thought +it likely that Cnut did but leave Ethelred and his armies in +Lindsey while he would land here unopposed.</p> +<p>Then came a fisher's boat with word that Cnut's great fleet was +putting into Sandwich, but before we had planned to throw our force +between him and London came the strange news that again he had left +Kent and had sailed northwards.</p> +<p>We sailed then to Sandwich to learn what we might, sending two +swift ships to watch if Cnut put into the Essex creeks. But at +Sandwich we found the thanes whom Swein had held as hostages left, +cruelly maimed in hand and face, with the message from Cnut that he +would return.</p> +<p>"He may return," said Olaf, "but if all goes well he will find +England ready for him. There is some trouble in Denmark or he would +not leave us thus."</p> +<p>So now all that seemed to be on hand was to bring back the towns +that were yet held by the Danish garrisons, the thingmen, to their +rightful king, and to gather a fleet that would watch the coast +against the return of Cnut. These things seemed not so hard, and +our land would surely soon be secure.</p> +<p>Then began to creep into my mind a longing to be back in my own +place again at Bures, to see the river and woods that I loved, and +to take up the old quiet life that was half forgotten, but none the +less sweet to remember after all this war and wearing trouble. But +of all England, after Lindsey, East Anglia was the greatest Danish +stronghold for those old reasons that I have spoken of, and it was +likely that there would be more fighting there before Ethelred was +owned than anywhere else. So I could not go back yet, but must wait +for Earl Ulfkytel and his levies, who would surely make short work +of the Danes there when their turn came. After that my lands would +be my own again, and then--What wonder, after three years and more +of warfare and the hard life of a warrior who had no home but in a +court which was a camp--after exile in a strange land--with my +new-found kinship with Olaf the viking--that what should be then +had gone from my mind? Will any blame the warrior who did but +remember his playfellow as part of a long-ago dream of lost peace, +if he had forgotten what tie bound him to her? When I and little +Hertha were betrothed it had been nought to us but a pleasant show +wherein we had taken foremost parts--and across the gap of years of +trouble so it seemed to me still whenever I recalled it. I +remembered my confirmation at the good bishop's hands more plainly +than that, for well I knew what I took on me at that time.</p> +<p>But the knowledge of what our betrothal meant would have grown +up in our hearts had peace lasted. There had been none to mind me +of it, or of her, and warfare fills up the whole mind of a man. I +was brought up amid the scenes of camp and march and battle just at +that time when a boy's mind is ready to be filled with aught, and, +as he learns, the past slips away, for his real life has begun.</p> +<p>And these were strange days through which I had been. We grew +old quickly amid all the cruel trouble of the hopeless fighting. As +David, the holy king, grew from boy to man suddenly in his days, +which seem so like ours when one hears them read of in Holy Writ, +so it had been with Olaf--with Eadmund and Eadward his brother--so +it would be with Cnut, and so it was with myself. I have often +spoken with men who were rightly held as veteran warriors, and who +yet had seen less warfare in ten years than we saw in those three. +It was endless--unceasing--I would have none go through the like. I +know not now how we bore it.</p> +<p>So I had forgotten Hertha, whether there is blame to me or not. +But now, as I say, with the sudden slackening of warfare came to me +the longing for rest. I would fain find my home again and my +playmate, and all else that belonged to the past. But before I +could do so there was work to be done, and I was content to look +forward and wait.</p> +<p>Now I might make a long story of the doings of Olaf the king +during this summer. Ottar the scald has much to sing of what we +wrought. For we went through the fair land of Kent with our +Norsemen and the new levies, and brought back all the folk to +Ethelred. It was no hard task, for the poor people thought that +Cnut had deceived them by his flight; and they were ground down by +the heavy payments the Danes had levied on them. Only at +Canterbury, inside whose walls the Danish thingmen gathered in +desperation, had we any trouble, and we must needs lay siege to the +place. But in the end Olaf and I knelt in the ancient church of St. +Martin and gave thanks for victory. We had avenged the death of the +martyred archbishop, Elfheah.</p> +<p>Ethelred ravaged all Lindsey after Cnut was gone. It was a +foolish and cruel deed, and he left men there who hated his name +more than even the name of Swein, to whom they had bowed since they +must. Then he sat down at Oxford as if all were done, while to have +marched peacefully, but with a high hand, through the old Danelagh +would have made the land sure to him. Olaf did so in Kent, and when +we left it, we left a loyal people who would rise against Cnut for +Ethelred if the Danes should indeed return. And Lindsey would as +surely rise for Cnut against us.</p> +<p>But Olaf, though he blamed our king for this, in all singleness +of purpose went on with the task that he had undertaken. And now +the next thing was to gather a fleet.</p> +<p>"If we could win Wulfnoth of Sussex to help his king, we have a +fleet ready made," he said. "Let us sail to his place and speak +with him."</p> +<p>That was true, and the ships that Wulfnoth had were the king's +by right. They were the last of the fleet that England had had but +five years ago--and her mightiest.</p> +<p>Now it happened that I was to see much of this Earl Wulfnoth +before we had done with him, so I will say at once how he came to +have the king's ships, and how it was that we must ask his help for +Ethelred--or rather why he had not given it freely.</p> +<p>It was the fault of Brihtric, Edric Streone's brother, who had +some private grudge against him, and would ruin him if possible. So +he accused Wulfnoth of treachery to Ethelred, and that being the +thing that the king always dreaded from day to day--seeing maybe +that he was not free from blame in that matter himself--so +prevailed that the earl was outlawed. Whereon he fled to the fleet, +and sailed away with all the ships that would follow him.</p> +<p>Then Brihtric chased him with the rest, and met with storm and +shipwreck on the rugged southern coasts. And through the storm fell +on him Wulfnoth, and beat him and scattered or took the ships the +storm had spared. Brihtric left the rest to their own devices, and +the shipmen brought them back into the Thames. There the Danes took +them presently, and that was the end of England's fleet.</p> +<p>But Wulfnoth turned viking; and would have nought to do with +Ethelred after that. His Sussex earldom was beyond reach of attack +through the great Andred's-weald forests that keep its northern +borders, and he could keep the sea line. So Ethelred left him +alone, and Swein would not disturb him. But his help was worth +winning, and Olaf thought that he might do it.</p> +<p>So we sailed to Lymne, and then to Winchelsea, and there we +heard that the earl and some of his ships were at his great +stronghold of Pevensea, which lay not far westward along the coast. +And we came there in the second week of September, when the time +was near that the ships should be laid up in their winter +quarters.</p> +<p>As we came off the mouth of the shallow tidal haven that runs +behind the great castle, whose old Roman walls seem strong as ever, +a boat from the shore came off very boldly to speak with us. But we +could see the sparkle of arms as some ships were manned in all +haste lest we were no friendly comers.</p> +<p>The leader of the boat's crew was a handsome boy of about +fifteen, well armed and fearless, and he stepped on board Olaf's +ship without mistrust when the king hailed him.</p> +<p>"Who are you, and what would you on these shores?" he asked +before we had spoken.</p> +<p>Olaf laughed pleasantly in his quiet way, and answered:</p> +<p>"I must know who asks me before I say aught."</p> +<p>"Maybe that is fair," said the boy. "I am Godwine, son of +Wulfnoth the earl."</p> +<p>"Then you have right to ask," answered our king. "I am Olaf +Haraldsson. I am a viking, and come in peace to see and speak with +your father."</p> +<p>The boy stared at the king in wonder for a moment.</p> +<p>"Are you truly Olaf the Thick, who broke London Bridge?" he +asked.</p> +<p>"Well, I had some hand in it," answered Olaf laughing, "for I +told the men when to pull, and when they pulled, the bridge came +down. They did it and I looked on."</p> +<p>Then young Godwine laughed also, and bade the king welcome most +heartily, adding:</p> +<p>"You must tell me all about the bridge breaking presently."</p> +<p>"Nay; but Redwald my cousin, or Ottar my scald here will tell +you more than I may."</p> +<p>"Redwald is an Anglian name," said Godwine, taking my hand. "Are +you English therefore?"</p> +<p>"Aye, young sir, from East Anglian Bures, in Suffolk," I +answered.</p> +<p>"Are you Edric Streone's man then?" he said, dropping my hand +suddenly and half stepping back.</p> +<p>"I am not," I said pretty stoutly, for I was angry with +Streone's way with Olaf--and with other ways of his. "Ulfkytel is +our earl."</p> +<p>"Aye, I have heard of him as an honest man," Godwine said.</p> +<p>"Come ashore, King Olaf, and you other thanes, and there will be +good cheer for you."</p> +<p>"Can you steer us into the haven, young sir?" asked Rani, who +stood by smiling to himself. "We must have the ships inside the +island while the tide serves."</p> +<p>"Aye, that I can," said the boy eagerly; "I take my own ship in +and out without troubling any other to help."</p> +<p>And with that he took hold of Rani's arm and showed him mark +after mark, giving him depth of water and the like, while we +listened and watched his face.</p> +<p>Presently Olaf said:</p> +<p>"Take command of my ship, Godwine, and lead the rest."</p> +<p>"You will take the risk, lord king," he answered laughing.</p> +<p>"Aye, and will hold you blameless if she takes the ground before +she is beached."</p> +<p>Now there was no doubt that Godwine was used to command, and was +confident in himself, for he made no more ado, but took charge, and +bade Rani signal the rest to follow, while he went to the helm +himself.</p> +<p>Then said Olaf to me while the boy was intent on his work: "Here +is one who will be a great man in England some day, and I think +before long."</p> +<p>And I had thought the same; for Earl Wulfnoth's son would rank +high for the sake of his birth, and it seemed that he was fitted to +take the great place that might be his.</p> +<p>So Godwine beached the ships well, in the lee of the island on +which the great castle stands when the tide is high, and we went +ashore. The castle gates were well guarded in our honour, for +Godwine had sent the boat back with word who we were.</p> +<p>There greeted us Earl Wulfnoth himself in the courtyard of his +great house. One went inside the castle walls to find almost a +village of buildings, all of timber, that had grown up round the +hall that stood in the midst, and that had its courtyard and +stockading, as had our own house on the open hill at Bures. I think +there was no stronger place than this castle of Pevensea in all +Sussex, if anywhere on the southern coasts.</p> +<p>Now it were long to say how Wulfnoth the earl welcomed King +Olaf, but it was after a kingly sort, for he was king in all but +name in his earldom, shut off as it is from the rest of England by +the deep forests. But he feasted us for two days before he would +speak a word with Olaf as to what he had come to ask him, saying +that it was enough for him to see the bridge breaker and the taker +of Canterbury town, and to do him honour. For Olaf's fame had gone +widely through all England.</p> +<p>Now Godwine would ever talk with me, for I could tell him of +Olaf, and also of the long war, and of the Norman court, so that we +became great friends. But he had no liking for Ethelred, which was +not wonderful, seeing that Wulfnoth his father had not a good word +to say for him.</p> +<p>At last, when Olaf told him plainly of the needs of England and +of her king, and of what he feared of the return of Cnut, Earl +Wulfnoth answered:</p> +<p>"Had you come to ask me to go a-viking with yourself, gladly +would I have joined with or followed you. Godwine my son has yet +some things to learn which a Norseman could teach him, and it would +have been well. But Ethelred holds me as a traitor; and while Edric +Streone is at his side I will not have aught to do with him. I will +drive any Dane out of my land, and that is all. Neither Ethelred +nor Cnut is aught to me. I and my son are earls of Sussex."</p> +<p>Then he rose up from his high seat and strode out of the hall, +bidding us follow him. He led us to the eastern gate, and climbed +to the broad top of the ramparts.</p> +<p>"See yonder," he said, and pointed eastward across the river and +marsh. "There is the hill where our standard has been raised time +after time since OElla and Cissa drove in flight the Welsh who had +raised theirs in the same place before us. There will I raise it +again against Cnut or Streone or any other of his men."</p> +<p>"Edric Streone is with King Ethelred," said Olaf; "he is not +Cnut's man."</p> +<p>"He has been Swein's man; and if it suits him will be Cnut's. I +will not alter my saying of him."</p> +<p>"Ethelred believes in him," answered Olaf, "and Eadmund the +Atheling believes in him as in himself."</p> +<p>"So much the worse for them," said the earl; "you will see if I +am not right. I know Edric Streone over well, and he knows it, and +hates me."</p> +<p>"Come, therefore, and take Ethelred out of his hands," Olaf +said.</p> +<p>"Not I. Let him inlaw me again first. I will not go and ask +pardon for what I have not done."</p> +<p>And after that the earl would say no more on the matter, waxing +wroth if Olaf would try to persuade him. So it seemed that our +journey was lost; and Olaf began to be anxious to return to the +Thames, where our ships should go into winter quarters. But the +wind held in the east, and kept us for a while.</p> +<p>Wulfnoth was not sorry for this, for it was full harvest time, +and he sent his housecarles out to his other manors to gather it, +so that he had few folk about him. Godwine went with them to a +place on the downs called Chancton, where was a great house of the +earl. We parted unwillingly; but we might sail at any time if the +wind shifted, and the earl would have him go.</p> +<p>"When you have done with fighting for Ethelred the Unredy," said +the boy to me, "bring Olaf back here, and you and I, friend +Redwald, will go a-viking with him. He says he wants to go to +Jerusalem Land some day--and that would be a good cruise."</p> +<p>Now the day after the housecarles left Pevensea, there befell a +matter which would have brought them back hastily had we not been +in the haven. There was always a beacon fire ready to recall them, +and they watched for it even as they wrought in the upland fields, +or if they were among the woods. Turn by turn one would climb to a +place whence it could be seen, for one may never know what need +shall be on our English shores, and I was to learn that need for +arms might be in a forest-girt land also, from foes at home.</p> +<p>Olaf and I were in the ships. The wind was unsteady, and it +seemed that a shift was coming with that night's new moon, and we +were preparing for sailing. And from our decks we saw a little +train of people crossing the difficult path from the mainland to +the island that folk can only use when the tide is low, and then +only if they know it well or have a guide to lead them. They say +that once the path was always under water, but that the land grows +slowly, and that at some time the island will be joined to the low +hills that are nearest to it on the northwest.</p> +<p>We went back almost as these folk came into the castle garth by +the western gate, and met them in the courtyard. Then it was plain +that there was trouble on hand, for the leader of the party was a +thane whom I knew by sight, as he had been called to our feasting +when first we came, and he had brought with him two ladies, who +came in no sort of state; and, moreover, there were one or two +wounded men among the twenty rough housecarles who followed them, +and bore such burdens of household stuff as had been taken by us +when we fled from Bures.</p> +<p>I had seen the like too often to mistake these signs, and I said +to Olaf:</p> +<p>"Here is fighting on hand, my king."</p> +<p>And then before he answered, came Wulfnoth out of the great door +and hurried up to the party, doffing his velvet cap as he saw the +ladies.</p> +<p>"Ho, friend Relf," he said, "what is amiss?"</p> +<p>"Outlaws, earl," said the thane, "and in strong force."</p> +<p>"This is the pest of my life," answered the earl angrily, "for +no sooner are our men gone harvesting than these forest knaves +begin to give trouble.</p> +<p>"When were you last burnt out, Relf of Penhurst?" and he laughed +in an angry way that had no mirth in it.</p> +<p>"Four years agone--after our trouble with Brihtric," answered +the thane. "They have not been so bold since then; and the small +fights I have had with them have not been so fierce that I must +fetch you from Bosham to my help."</p> +<p>"Evil times make them bold," said the earl. "How many are there +in this band?"</p> +<p>"Enough to sack the Penhurst miners' village," the thane said. +"Men say that there are Danes among them; and I know that there are +men who are well armed beyond the wont of outlaws and forest +dwellers."</p> +<p>Then Wulfnoth called to us:</p> +<p>"See here, King Olaf, this is your fault; you have driven the +Danes out of Kent into our forests, and now we have trouble enough +on our hands."</p> +<p>"Then, Earl Wulfnoth," answered Olaf, "my men and I will fight +them here again."</p> +<p>But when we drew near I was fain to look on one of the two +ladies who still sat on their horses waiting for the earl's +pleasure. One was Relf the thane's wife, and the other his +daughter; and it was in my mind that I had never seen so beautiful +a maiden as this was. It seemed to me that I could willingly give +my life in battle against those who had harmed her home, if she +might know that I did so.</p> +<p>But the thane was telling Olaf that there must be some three +hundred of the outlaws and others.</p> +<p>"I had forty-two men yesterday, and I have but twenty with me +now," said he.</p> +<p>"Then you fought?" asked Wulfnoth.</p> +<p>"Aye," answered the thane shortly, for it was plain enough that +he had done so.</p> +<p>"Have they burnt your house?"</p> +<p>"Not when I left. They are mostly strangers to the land, and +they bide where there is ale and plunder, in the old Penhurst +village at the valley's head."</p> +<p>"Then," said Olaf, "let us march at once and save the thane's +hall."</p> +<p>"That is well said," answered the earl, rubbing his hands with +glee. "We will make a full end; there will be no more trouble for +many a year to come."</p> +<p>Then he bethought him of the two ladies, and he called his +steward and bade him take them in. At which, when they would +dismount, I went to help the maiden, and was pleased that she +thanked me for the little trouble, looking at me shyly. I think +that I had not heard a more pleasant voice than hers, or so it +seemed to me at the time. She went into the house with her mother, +and I was left with a remembrance of her words that bided with me; +and I called myself foolish for thinking twice of the meeting.</p> +<p>Then the earl and Olaf and Relf began to speak of the best way +in which to deal with these plunderers; and as I looked at the +stout fair-haired thane it seemed to me that things must have been +bad if he had had to fly.</p> +<p>It would seem that his place was some ten miles from Pevensea, +lying at the head of a forest valley, down which was a string of +the old hammer ponds that the Romans made when they worked the +iron. And the village, or town as he called it, was in the next +valley, at the head of the little river Ashbourne, whose waters +joined the river which makes the haven of Pevensea. The town was +very old, and had a few earthworks round it, though the place +whereon it stood was strong by nature. The iron workers in the old +Roman days had first built there, and they knew how to choose their +ground. Thence, too, the Romans would float their boatloads of iron +down to the port of Anderida, as they called Pevensea; and there +were yet old stone buildings that had been raised by them.</p> +<p>So if these outlaws chose to hold the place, it was likely that +we should have some fighting, though this would not be quite after +the manner of forest dwellers, unless it were true that Danes were +among them.</p> +<p>"Whether there is any fight in them or not," said Wulfnoth, "I +will have the place surrounded, and let not one get away."</p> +<p>"That is early morning work," Olaf answered. "How many of my men +will you have?"</p> +<p>"It depends on what manner of men they are," said the earl. "All +I know of them yet is that they are good trenchermen."</p> +<p>That pleased not Olaf altogether, for there seemed to be a +little slight in the words--as though he had come to the earl to be +fed only. And he made a sign to me that I knew well; and I thought +to myself that Wulfnoth of Sussex was likely to wish that he had +seen our warriors in their war gear before.</p> +<p>Olaf paid no heed to me as I went quickly down to the ships. The +men were lying about and watching the sky, for it was changing. But +at one word from me there was no more listlessness; and Rani called +them to quarters. I would that in the English levies there was the +order and quickness that was in Olaf's ships. Yet these men had +been with him for years, and were not like our hastily-gathered +villagers.</p> +<p>So in ten minutes or less they were armed and ready for aught; +and Rani and I led them up to the castle, leaving the ship guard +set, as if we were making a landing in earnest on an enemy's shore. +Eight hundred strong we were, and foremost marched the men of +Olaf's ship, each one of whom wore ring mail of the best and a good +helm, and carried both sword and axe and round shield.</p> +<p>Wulfnoth stood with his back to the gate as we entered with the +leading files. But when he heard the tramp and ring of warriors in +their mail, he started and turned round sharply. I saw his face +flush red, and I saw Olaf's smile, and Relf's face of wonder. And +then the earl broke out--angrily enough--for his castle was, as it +were, taken by Olaf.</p> +<p>"What is the meaning of this?"</p> +<p>"You wished to see my men, lord earl," said Olaf. "I sent for +them therefore. King Ethelred, for whom they fight just now, was +pleased with them."</p> +<p>Then the earl saw that Olaf tried one last plan by which to make +him side with the king. Maybe he thought that this chance had been +waited for, but it was not so. Therefore he choked down his anger +that we should come unbidden into his fortress, and laughed +harshly.</p> +<p>"Well for me, King Olaf, that you come in peace, as it seems. +One may see that these men are no untried war smiths."</p> +<p>"There is no man in my own crew who has not seen four battles +with me," answered Olaf. "Some have seen more. The rest of the men +have each seen two fights of mine."</p> +<p>"I would that I had somewhat on hand that was worthy to be +counted as another battle of yours, instead of a hunting of these +forest wolves," answered Wulfnoth, seeming to grow less angry. +"Supposing that you and I were to fight for the crown of England +for ourselves--either of us has as much right thereto as Cnut."</p> +<p>"The Danes hold that England has paid scatt {<a name="Glyph6" +href="#Note6" id="Glyph6">6</a>} to their king as overlord, and +that is proof of right for Cnut, as they say," answered Olaf.</p> +<p>"They say!" growled Wulfnoth fiercely. "King and witan and +people have been fools enough to buy peace with gold and not with +edged steel. But that has been ransom, not tribute. When a warrior +is made prisoner and held to ransom, is the man who takes the gold +to set him free his master, therefore, ever after? Scatt, forsooth! +I have a mind to go and teach the pack of fools whom Streone leads +by the nose and calls a witan, that there is one man left in +England who is strong enough to make them pay scatt to +himself!"</p> +<p>Then Olaf said, very quietly:</p> +<p>"Why not put an end to Danegeld once for all by helping me drive +out the last Dane from England? We should be strong enough as +things are now.</p> +<p>"For Streone and his tools to reap the benefit? Not I," said the +earl. "Come, we have forgotten our own business."</p> +<p>Now it seemed to me that Wulfnoth was eager to get our men back +to the ships outside of the walls again, for there is no doubt that +had Olaf chosen to take the place for Ethelred it was already done. +But such thought of treachery to his host could never be in Olaf's +mind, and it was the last time that he tried to win the earl +over.</p> +<p>So Wulfnoth went quickly down the ranks and noted all things as +a chief such as he will. But now and then he waxed moody, and +growled in his thick beard, "Scatt, forsooth!"</p> +<p>So presently he asked Olaf to bring two ship's crews--about +eight-score men in all--against the outlaws. Fifty of his own +housecarles would go, and Relf's twenty. And they were to be ready +two hours before dawn, as he meant to surprise the outlaws in the +village at the first light.</p> +<p>Then he praised the men, and had ale brought out for them, and +so recovered his good temper, and at last he said to Olaf with a +great laugh:</p> +<p>"Verily you may go away and boast that you are the first man who +has brought his armed followers inside Pevensea walls without +leave, since the days when OElla and Cissa forced the Welsh to let +them in. Now I wot that Ethelred has a friend who must be reckoned +with."</p> +<p>"Nay, but you would see the men," said Olaf.</p> +<p>"Aye, and I have seen them," answered the earl grimly.</p> +<p>When we sat down in the hall that night I was next to the maiden +Sexberga, Relf's daughter, at the high table. She was very +different from the great ladies of the court, who were all that I +knew. I tried to assure her that her home would be safe, and I +promised her many things in order to see her smile, and to please +her.</p> +<p>Yet when I went down to the ships presently, for none of us +slept within Wulfnoth's walls, I was glad that there was no light +of burning houses over Penhurst woods, as yet.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch5" id="Ch5">Chapter 5</a>: How Redwald Fared At +Penhurst.</h2> +<p>It was very dark when we marched from Pevensea. We followed the +earl's men, and save for remembering the muddy torchlit causeway to +firm ground from the castle, and after that dim hill and dale +passed in turn, and a long causeway and bridge that spanned the +mouth of a narrow valley that opened into the great Pevensea level, +I knew not much of what country we went through. After passing that +causeway we came into forest land, going along a track for awhile, +and then turning inland across rolling hills till we began to go +down again. And as the first streaks of dawn began to show above +the woods, the word was passed for silence, and then that we should +lie down and rest in the fern on the edge of a steep slope below +which shone the faint gleam of water.</p> +<p>Then came Wulfnoth and spoke to Olaf, and said that he and his +men would go beyond the village so as to take the outlaws from the +rear. He would send a man to us who would show us all that was +needed.</p> +<p>After that we lay and waited, and as the sun rose and the light +grew stronger, I thought that I had never seen a more beautiful +place.</p> +<p>We were above a little cliff of red rock that went down to the +valley of the Ashbourne brook. And all the valley from side to side +was full of the morning mists so that it seemed one lake, while the +woods were bright with the change of the leaf, from green to red +and gold--oak and beech and chestnut and hazel each with its own +colour, and all beautiful. The blue downs rose far away to our left +across the ridges of the forest land, and inland the Andred's-weald +stretched, rising hill above hill as far as one might see, timber +covered. There were trees between us and the village that we +sought; but above its place rose a dun cloud of smoke from some +houses fired that night by those who held it, and that was the one +thing that spoiled the beauty of all that I saw.</p> +<p>Now Olaf and I spoke of all this, whispering together, for we +were close to the village, and already we had heard voices from +thence as men woke. For Olaf was ever touched by the sight of a +fair land lying before him. And while he spoke, a man seemed to +rise out of a cleft of the rocks below us, and climbed up to us, +and bowed before us, saying that he was to guide us.</p> +<p>He was a great man, clad in leather from head to foot, and +carrying a sledgehammer over his shoulder. That and a billhook +stuck in his belt were his only weapons.</p> +<p>"I am Spray the smith," he said, in a low voice. "The earl is +ready, and the thane also. The knaves are all drunken with our ale, +and we may fall on them at once."</p> +<p>"Have they no watch kept?" asked Olaf wondering.</p> +<p>"None, master."</p> +<p>"Are there Danes with them?"</p> +<p>"Aye; half are Danes. But I met one of them last night and spoke +to him peacefully, being stronger than he, and I said that vikings +had come to Pevensea, and that the earl was minding them. So they +fear no one."</p> +<p>Then came a herdsman's call from the woods beyond the village, +and the smith said:</p> +<p>"That is the thane. Fall on, master, and fear nought."</p> +<p>Whereat I laughed, and the men sprang up. The smith led us for a +hundred paces through the beech trees and then across the brook, +and the steep slope up to the village was before us. There was a +little, ancient earthwork of no account round the place, but if +there had been a stockade on it, it was gone.</p> +<p>Then came a roar of yells and shouts from the far side, and we +knew that the work had begun, and ran up the hillside. Then fled a +man in chain mail out of the place, leaping over the earthworks +straight at us, unknowing.</p> +<p>Spray the smith swung his hammer, not heeding at all the sword +in the man's hands. Sword and helm alike shivered under the blow, +and the man rolled over and over down the hillside.</p> +<p>"That is the first Dane I ever slew," said Spray to me as we +topped the ridge.</p> +<p>Then we were in the village and among a crowd of wild-looking, +half-armed forest men, who fled and yelled, and smote and cried for +quarter in a strange and ghastly medley. There was no order, and +seemingly no leader among them, and an end was soon made. Before I +had struck down two men they scattered and fled for hiding, and we +followed them. Wulfnoth would have no mercy shown to these wretches +who would harry the peaceful villagers--their own kin. They would +but band together again.</p> +<p>Now I did a foolish thing which might have cost me my life. For +two outlaws ran into one of the old stone buildings of which I had +heard, and I followed them. As I crossed the threshold I stayed for +a moment, for the place seemed very dark inside, and I could not +see them. But I was plain enough to them, of course, and before I +could see that a blow was coming one smote me heavily on the helm +and I fell forward, while they leapt out over my body into the open +again. Then I seemed to slip, and fell into nothingness as my +senses left me.</p> +<p>Presently I came round, nor could I tell how long I had been +alone, I heard far off shouts that were dull and muffled as if +coming through walls, and then as my brain cleared, I saw that I +was in what seemed to be a dungeon like those that Earl Wulfnoth +had under Pevensea. All round me were walls, and the light came in +from a round hole above me.</p> +<p>When I saw that I knew that I had indeed fallen into this place, +and my sword, too, lay on the floor where it had flown from my hand +as I did so. It was lucky that I had not fallen on it.</p> +<p>Now the shouts died away, and I thought that our men were +chasing the last of the outlaws into the woods. When the silence +fell, I waxed lonely, and began to wonder if I had been forgotten. +But Olaf would miss me presently, and would surely return to the +village before long. So I would be patient, and at least try to +find a way out of this trap into which I had come so strangely.</p> +<p>But there was no way out unless a ladder or rope were lowered to +me. The roof of the place was rounded and arched above me, and the +hole was in its centre so that I could not reach it. Maybe the +place was ten feet across and ten feet high under the hole, and it +minded me of the snake pit into which Gunnar the hero was thrown, +as Ottar the scald sang. Only here were no snakes, and the air was +thick and musty, but dry enough. I could see the beams of the house +roof above the hole.</p> +<p>Then I thought that if I could prise some stones from the old +walls I might pile them up until I reached the edge of the hole +with my hands, when it would be easy to draw myself up, though +maybe not without taking off my armour. But when I tried the joints +of the masonry with the point of my seax, I did but blunt the +weapon, for the mortar was harder than the stone, which was the red +sandstone of the cliff where we had rested.</p> +<p>So I forbore and sat down, leaning my aching head against the +cool wall, to wait for Olaf's return. There would be time to shout +when I heard voices again, and it was not good to make much noise +in that place after the blow of a club that had set my ears ringing +already.</p> +<p>Then I fell to thinking of Sexberga, and those thoughts were +pleasant enough. And idly I began to sharpen my seax again on a +great square stone that was handy in the wall as I sat, but it was +very soft, and crumbled away under the steel without doing it much +good.</p> +<p>Now, when one is waiting and thinking, one will play with an +idle pastime for the sake of keeping one's hands amused as it were, +and so I went on working the long slit in the stone, which the +blade was making, deeper and deeper. The sand trickled from it in a +stream, and then all of a sudden I became aware that I had pierced +through the stone into a hole behind, and I bent over to see how +this could be.</p> +<p>The stone was not more than an inch or two thick, and there was +certainly a hollow which it closed, and when I saw that I broke and +worked away more of it until I could get my hand in. Then I found +that I could feel nothing, for the place was deep. So I made the +hole bigger yet, and put my arm in. Then I found the back and one +side of a stone-cased chest in the wall, as it were, of which the +stone I had bored was the door, though this was to all appearance +like several other of the larger blocks that the place was built +of.</p> +<p>When I reached downwards my hand could just touch what felt like +rotten canvas, and at that I began to work again at the hole. The +stone was too strong to break, though it seemed thin, and I was so +intent on this, that the voices I had longed to hear made me +start.</p> +<p>"He was hereabouts, master, when I last saw him," said one whom +I thought was Spray the smith.</p> +<p>"I will hang you up if he is lost," said Wulfnoth's voice.</p> +<p>Then I sprang up and shouted, and the vault rang painfully in my +ears. It was Olaf who called back to me.</p> +<p>"Ho, Redwald where are you?"</p> +<p>"Under the house, in a pit," I answered, standing under the +opening.</p> +<p>Then someone came tramping above me, and the next moment Spray's +leather-hosed leg came through the hole, and he nearly joined me. +Thereat others laughed, and he climbed up quickly enough, for it +was an ill feeling to be hanging over an unknown depth.</p> +<p>"Lower me down a rope," I said, as I saw his face peering into +the place with some others.</p> +<p>There seemed to be a ladder handy, for the next minute its end +came down, and at once I picked up my sword and climbed out. Olaf +stood in the doorway now with Relf.</p> +<p>"It is easy to see how my cousin got into that place," he said +to Relf, pointing to my helm, which was sorely dinted.</p> +<p>The big thane looked and laughed.</p> +<p>"That is what felled him. But I knew not of this pit," he said, +looking past me into the house where Spray and the men stood round +the hole.</p> +<p>Then the smith said:</p> +<p>"Nor did I, master. But this has been found by the forest +men--here are their tools."</p> +<p>And when we looked, all the floor of the house was broken up, +and the stone paving was piled in corners, and a pick or two lay on +them with a spade and crowbar.</p> +<p>"They have been digging for treasure," said Relf, "and that has +kept them from my house. There are always tales of gold hidden in +these old places. I have seen that they have done the like +elsewhere in the village."</p> +<p>"Aye," said Spray, "they have heard some of our tales, and they +have dug where we would not, for it spoils a house, and the wife's +temper also, to meddle with the good stone floor."</p> +<p>Now it seemed to me that here was a likelihood that there was +truth in the old tales, and that I had lit on the lost hiding place +of which some memory yet remained even from the days when OElla's +men took the town from the iron workers five hundred years and more +ago, when the might of Rome had passed.</p> +<p>"There is somewhat that I have found in this place," I said. +"Come and see what it is."</p> +<p>Wondering, Olaf and Wulfnoth climbed down the ladder after me, +and Relf did but stay to find a torch before he followed us. Then I +showed them the stone and the hollow behind it, and the earl called +for the crowbar that was left by the outlaws, and with a stroke or +two easily broke out the rest of the stone, and the glare of the +torch shone into the place that it had so long sealed.</p> +<p>It was a chamber in the wall, and maybe a yard square each way. +The stone had not filled all its width or depth of mouth, but was, +as it were, a sealed door to be broken and replaced by another. +Then we could see that the canvas I had thought that I had felt was +indeed the loose folds of the tied mouths of bags that were neatly +arranged at the bottom of this stone-built chest. And the canvas +that I had reached and pulled at had easily parted, and through the +rent showed the dull gleam of gold coin as the torchlight flared +upon it.</p> +<p>The light shone too on letters scratched on the soft stone of +the back of the chamber. I could read them, but Wulfnoth pointed to +them, saying:</p> +<p>"Here may be a curse written on him who touches. I will have our +priest read that which is there if he can."</p> +<p>Then I laughed, and said that it was no curse, but the name of +some Roman who made the place, for all that was there was:</p> +<pre> +CLAVD. MARTINVS. ARTIF. FEC. +</pre> +<p>"Which means that a workman named Martin was proud of his work, +and left his name there," I said when I had read it.</p> +<p>"And was slain, doubtless, lest he should betray the secret," +said Wulfnoth.</p> +<p>And he put his hand out to take one of the bags from the place, +feeling round the rotten canvas to get a fair grip of the mass of +coin.</p> +<p>Then he drew back his hand with a cry that came strangely from +his stern lips, for it sounded like alarm, and he stepped back.</p> +<p>"As I live," he said, "somewhat cold moved beneath my fingers in +there."</p> +<p>Even as he spoke something crawled slowly on to the bag that was +broken and sat on the red gold that was hidden no longer. There it +stayed, staring at the torchlight--a great wizened toad, whose eyes +were like the gold which it seemed to guard. And we stared at it, +for not one of us dared touch it, nor could we say aught.</p> +<p>It is ill to waste breath in wondering how the creature got into +this long-closed place or how it lived. But when I have told of +this, many a time have I heard stories of toads that have been +found in stranger places--even in solid-seeming rock. But however +it came there--and one may think of many ways--it scared us. It +seemed a thing not natural.</p> +<p>"It is the evil spirit that guards the treasure," whispered Relf +to Olaf, edging toward the ladder.</p> +<p>"Fetch Anselm the priest, and let him exorcise this," said the +earl. "It is some witchcraft of the heathen Romans."</p> +<p>"Were I in Finmark I would say that this was a 'sending' +{<a name="Glyph7" href="#Note7" id="Glyph7">7</a>}," Olaf said, +"but we are in Christian England, and this is but a toad."</p> +<p>Now I said nothing, but I wished the beast away, for I would see +the treasure I had found. Then the earl bethought himself.</p> +<p>"Maybe it is but a toad," he said. "I will cast it out."</p> +<p>And with that he went to do so, but liked it not, and drew back +again.</p> +<p>"Toad or worse," I said then, "I mind not their cold skin, and +will see what it is."</p> +<p>So I took hold of the beast, and it swelled itself out as I did +so, and croaked a little. That was the worst it did; but I will say +this, that the sound almost made me drop it. But I cast it behind +me into the shadow, and then put both hands into the chamber and +took out one of the bags.</p> +<p>It was full of gold coin, as was that which had been torn open, +and as were all the rest--ten of them--when we looked. And the +coins were older than we could tell, being stamped with strange +figures that bore some likeness to horses whose limbs fell apart, +and a strange face on the other side. Many had letters on them, and +these were mostly--CVNO.</p> +<p>"They are coins of the Welsh folk whom we conquered," said +Wulfnoth. "I have seen the like before. They made them at Selsea, +and we find many there on the shore after storms."</p> +<p>Now I think that we had found the hiding place of the tribute +money that should be sent to Rome when some ship came thence or +from beyond the Channel to fetch it, or maybe it was some iron +master's hoarded payment for the good Sussex iron that they smelted +in these valleys in the Roman days. More likely it was the first, +for men would know that it had never been sent away. None can tell +how the places of these hoards are lost, but times of war have +strange chances. Then folk do but hand down the knowledge that, +somewhere, the treasure is yet hidden {<a name="Glyph8" href= +"#Note8" id="Glyph8">8</a>}.</p> +<p>"Good booty had OElla and Cissa our forbears, but they have left +some for us," said Earl Wulfnoth.</p> +<p>"Here is gold enough to buy a good fleet for Ethelred," said +Olaf thoughtfully.</p> +<p>"Gold enough for you and me to win England for ourselves +withal," said the earl in a low voice. "You take the Danelagh, and +I the rest, and we will keep Ethelred for a puppet overlord."</p> +<p>"If Cnut wins there will be time enough to think of that," +answered Olaf coldly. "Eadmund is my friend."</p> +<p>"Not Ethelred?" said Wulfnoth eagerly.</p> +<p>"I fight for him," answered Olaf.</p> +<p>"Well, well. I did but speak my own wish," said the earl. "You +and I will not be agreed on this matter."</p> +<p>Then he turned to Relf, and began to give him some directions +about a horse whereon to load the treasure. And Olaf and I went +back up the ladder, leaving them, for the vault grew close and hot, +and this was their business. The earl would take it back to +Pevensea, where it would be safe. Word would go round quickly +enough concerning the find, and of what value it was. Nor would +that grow less in the telling, though none of us had ever seen so +much gold together before.</p> +<p>I suppose that I had been in the place for two hours or more, +and the morning sky had changed strangely since the fight began. +The sun was hidden with a great mass of heavy clouds that were +driving up fast from the southwest, although the woods around us +were still and motionless in the hot, heavy air. The smoke that +still rose from the burnt houses went up straight as a pine +tree.</p> +<p>Olaf looked up at the sky, and seemed anxious.</p> +<p>"There is a gale brewing," he said. "I am glad Rani is with the +ships."</p> +<p>Then he walked away to a spur of the hill that looked down the +valley towards the sea. We could see all the tidal water, and +almost to Pevensea, and there came a long murmur of the sea on the +pebble beach, even to where we stood, so hushed were all things. +Surely there was a heavy sea setting in to make so loud a noise as +that. And all the hills and marshes seemed close at hand, so clear +was the air.</p> +<p>Then came to us Olaf's ship master, and he was uneasy also.</p> +<p>"Tide is at its highest tonight," he said, "and if the wind gets +up from the southwest, as seems likely, it will be higher yet than +usual. See how the clouds whirl over us."</p> +<p>Then the king went back to the building and called to Wulfnoth, +who came up the ladder asking what was amiss, for he heard that +Olaf's voice was urgent.</p> +<p>"Here is a gale coming," the king said, "and we must be back +with the ships."</p> +<p>Wulfnoth came out into the open and looked round.</p> +<p>"Aye; and tide will be high at the causeway. These spring tides +run wildly at this time of year," he said. "We must be going."</p> +<p>Then was no more delay, but the horns blew the recall, and the +men came in. We had lost none, but I do not think that many outlaws +were left.</p> +<p>They brought a farm horse, with baskets slung across its back in +the Sussex manner, and into them the gold was put. I looked down +into the vault as the men left it, and saw that Relf was there, and +that they had tried every great stone in the walls in search of +another chamber, but that there had not been one. And when he came +up I was about to draw up the ladder after him, and looked down for +the last time.</p> +<p>There at the ladder's foot sat the elvish toad, and it seemed to +me that it looked pitifully up at the light. How many years might +it have been without sunlight or touch of dew or cool green leaves +that it had loved? And I was fain to climb down and take it up in +my hand and set it free on the grass outside the house, where a +dock spread its broad leaves. It crawled under them in haste, and I +saw it no more. Then I found that Spray the smith was watching me, +and he said a strange thing.</p> +<p>"That is a good deed, master," he said. "I think that you shall +never be in prison."</p> +<p>"May I never be so," I answered, wondering.</p> +<p>"I am a forest-bred man," he said, "and I love all beasts," and +then he turned away, and went to the men who were waiting for the +earl's word.</p> +<p>And when all was ready Relf came to me and said that he would go +to his own place with his men, and that he would ask me to take +word to his wife and daughter that all was safe at home. The +outlaws had been too busy in the town to seek further for plunder, +or had not cared to do so at once. So he went, as we started, and I +was pleased with the chance of having speech with Sexberga.</p> +<p>Now there was a moaning overhead as we went through the woods +along the ridge above the valley, and hot breaths of air began to +play in our faces. The clouds raced above us more swiftly, and +black masses of scud drifted yet faster below them from across the +hard black backs of the downs to the westward. There was something +strange in the feeling of the weather that seemed to betoken more +than a storm of wind and rain, and we were silent and oppressed as +we marched.</p> +<p>Now we came to the crest of the hill where the track goes down +to the level of the river and marshes and to the causeway, which we +crossed in the early morning. I could see now how narrow the outlet +of the river was between the hills where it joined the main tidal +waters, and the causeway was low, and both it and the bridge were +very ancient. They call it Boreham Bridge, and it is a place that I +shall not forget.</p> +<p>When we were halfway down the steep hill suddenly the first +blast of the gale smote us in the face, and that with a roar and +howl and rush that drowned all other sounds. The branches flew from +the trees along the hillside, and more than one great trunk gave +way at last to that onset. Then all along the coastline grew and +widened a white line of flying spindrift that hid the distant gray +walls of Pevensea on its low island, and shone like snow against +the black dun-edged cloud that came up from out of the sea.</p> +<p>"Hurry, men," shouted Wulfnoth, "or the bridge will be down! Look +at the tide!"</p> +<p>And that was racing up inland, already foaming through the +wooden arches that spanned its course. I had heard that the tide +reached this place a full hour after it began to flow at Pevensea, +and even now it was thus, two hours before it should have been at +its highest there.</p> +<p>Wulfnoth's men led, and then came the earl, riding beside Spray +and the horse which bore the treasure. Olaf was riding just behind +them, and I marched with our crew not ten paces after him. So we +went down the hill, and so we stepped on the causeway, and came to +the first timbers of the bridge. And hardly had I stepped on them +than there came a great shout from the men behind us, while one +seized my arm and pointed seaward across the marshes.</p> +<p>There came rushing across the level--blending channel and land +into one sea as it passed--a vast white roller, great as any wave +which breaks upon the shore, and its length was lost behind the +hill before us, and far away to our left. So swiftly did it come +that it seemed that none of us might gain the hill before it +whelmed us and causeway and bridge alike.</p> +<p>Earl Wulfnoth grasped the bridle of the pack horse, and the man +Spray lashed it, shouting aloud to us to hasten. And Olaf turned in +his saddle and saw me, and reined up until I grasped his stirrup +leather, and ran on beside him. And our men broke and ran, some +following us, and some going back to the hill whence we came. And +all the while the great white billow was thundering nearer, and my +head reeled with its noise and terror till I knew not what I was +doing, and let go my hold of Olaf's stirrup.</p> +<p>Then it broke over bridge and causeway, and through its roar I +heard yells, and the crash of broken timber, before I lost all +knowledge of aught but that I was lost in that mighty wave, and was +being whirled like a straw before it, where it would take me.</p> +<p>I struck out wildly as if to swim--but of what avail was that +against the weight of rushing water? I seemed to be rolled over and +against broken timber and reeds and stones--and once my hand +touched a man, for I felt it grate over the scales of armour--and +my ears were full of roarings and strange sounds, and I thought +that I was surely lost.</p> +<p>Then a strong grip was on me, and the water flew past me, and +hurled things at me, for I no longer went with it. My feet touched +ground, and other hands held me, and then I was ashore, and spent +almost nigh to death. Well for me it was that in the old days by +the Stour river I had loved to swim and dive in the deep pool +behind the island, for I had learned to save my breath. Had I not +done so, the choking of the great wave had surely ended my +days.</p> +<p>It was Olaf who had saved me. Almost had we won to the high +ground when I had let go his stirrup leather, and then the +shoreward edge of the wave had caught me. But he had faced its fury +as he saw me borne away, and had snatched me from it as it tossed +me near the bank again. Now he bent over me, trying to catch the +sound of my voice through the roar of the storm and the rush of the +flood below us. But I could not speak to him though I would, and it +was not all drowning that ailed me, for the blow which had felled +me in the fight was even now beginning to do its work. Else had I +clung to him all along, and had been safe as he was. For he won to +shore ten yards beyond its reach as the wave came.</p> +<p>Now I know that Olaf and our men carried me into a place under +the lee of a hill, and bided there till the gale blew over. There +was a sharp pain as of a piercing weapon in my side as they did so, +and after that I knew not much of being carried on to the house of +Relf, the Thane of Penhurst, along a forest road where travelling +was no easier for the fallen trees that lay across it. And after I +was there I knew nothing. The blow I had had took its effect on me, +and I had several ribs broken by some timber that smote me amid the +tossing of the great wave of the flood.</p> +<p>Many are the tales that men all round the coasts will tell of +the great sea flood that came on Michaelmas even. For it ran far +into the land where no tide had run before, and many towns were +destroyed by it, and many people were drowned. It will be long +before the scathe it wrought will be forgotten. Many of the earl's +ships were broken, even where they lay behind the island, and two +of ours were lost--carried across the level where no ship had ever +swum before. And eight of our men had been swept from the causeway +and drowned. Two lie yet under the wreck of bridge and causeway, or +in the Ashbourne valley amid wrack and ruin of field and forest +that the flood left behind it.</p> +<p>But these things I learnt afterwards. Now I was like to die, and +Olaf bided at my side and minded nought else, as men said.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch6" id="Ch6">Chapter 6</a>: Sexberga The Thane's +Daughter.</h2> +<p>Days came and went by while I lay helpless. Olaf the king at +last must needs leave me, and take the ships back to the Thames, +there to watch against Cnut's return, in which he, almost alone in +England, believed. But he would not sail before he knew that I +would recover, and he left me in the kind hands of Anselm, the old +Norman priest, who was well skilled in leech craft, and of Relf the +Thane and his wife. So I need say nought of the long days of +weakness after danger was gone, for there are few men who have not +known what they are like, and well for them if they have had such +tending as these good folk gave to me.</p> +<p>Yet it was not till November had half gone that I was able to +ride hunting again at last, and to go out with Relf in the crisp +frosts of early winter through the great woods of the +Andred's-weald in search of wolf and boar, or when the mists hung +round the gray copses, and the turf in the glades was soft, and +scent was high, to follow the deer that harboured in the deep +shaws. We were seldom without their spoils as we came homeward, and +how good it was to feel my strength coming back to me as I rode--to +find the grip on a spear shaft hardening, and the bow hand growing +steadier against a longer pull on the tough string. And Relf +rejoiced with me to see this, for he deemed that he owed me the +more care because my hurt had been gained in fighting for him and +his home. Honest and rough, with a warm heart was this forest +thane, and we grew to be fast friends.</p> +<p>Now when I was helpless, Wulfnoth the earl and Godwine would +often ride from Pevensea to learn how I fared. For Wulfnoth and +Godwine alike loved Olaf the king, and Godwine thought of me as his +own friend among the vikings of our fleet. But presently Godwine +went away to Bosham, where the earl's ships were mostly laid up, to +see to the housing of his vessels for the winter, and when I grew +strong it was rather my place to go to Pevensea and wait on +Wulfnoth, if I would see him. I think the earl came to Penhurst +more often also, because he would dig for more treasure in all the +old ruins in the town. But he found no more, as one might well +suppose, for it was but a chance that our find had escaped the +searching of the first Saxon comers. Yet I saw him now and then, +and ever would he rail at Ethelred the king, who sat still and left +the Danish thingmen in possession of the eastern strongholds even +yet.</p> +<p>Now one day the thane and I rode together with hawk and hound +eastward from Penhurst along the spur of a hill that runs thence +for many a long mile, falling southward on one side towards the sea +and lower hills between, and northward looking inland over +forest-covered hill and valley. And we went onward until we came to +the village that men call Senlac, where the long hill ridge ends +and sinks sharply into the valley of the little river Asten, and +there we thought that a heron or mallard would lie in the reedy +meadows below the place.</p> +<p>But up the course of the stream came another party, and when we +neared it, we saw that it was the earl himself with but a few +followers, and he too was riding with hawk on wrist, and hounds in +leash behind him, though it did not seem as if he had loosed +either.</p> +<p>"Ho, Relf, good morrow. What sport?" he said.</p> +<p>"Little enough, lord earl, as yet," the thane said.</p> +<p>"Do you and friend Redwald come with me, and I will show you +somewhat before you go home," the earl answered.</p> +<p>So we must go with him, willingly enough, for he was a great +hunter, and very skilful in woodcraft.</p> +<p>Now we went back through the village and up the hill again on +the same track by which we had just come, and when we were almost +at the top of the rise, the earl bade the men wait while we three +rode on. So they stayed, and we followed him, not at all knowing +what he would do.</p> +<p>Then we came to a track leading to the right as we rode, and he +took that way. It led to a place of which I had heard, for it had +no good name among the people, but I thought that he would not go +thither. Nevertheless he held straight on, and came to the place in +the hillside that was feared. And it was very beautiful, for thence +one looks out over the valley to the hills beyond, with the long +line of the sea away to the right, and to the left the valleys that +slope down to the inlet where Winchelsea stands, far off to the +eastward. There is a well which they say is haunted, though by what +I know not, save that men speak of ghostly hands that seize them as +they pass, if pass they must, at night. Hardly was there a track to +the place, though the water that comes from the rocky spring is so +wondrously pure and cold that they call the place Caldbec {<a name= +"Glyph9" href="#Note9" id="Glyph9">9</a>} Hill. And there by the +side of the spring was a little turf-built hut, hardly to be known +from the shelving bank against which it leant, and to that the earl +led us.</p> +<p>"Now," he said, "tie the horses somewhere, and we will go and +speak with the Wise Woman."</p> +<p>At that Relf was not pleased, as it seemed, for he did not +dismount.</p> +<p>"Come not if you fear her," said Wulfnoth; "bide with the horses +if you will, while I and Olaf's cousin go in. Maybe there will be a +message that he must take to his kinsman."</p> +<p>"I have nought to seek from the old dame," said Relf, "nor is +there aught that I fear from her. I give her venison betimes, as is +fitting. I will bide with the horses."</p> +<p>Wulfnoth said no more to him, and turned sharply to me. "You +give her no venison--maybe you fear her therefore!" he said in a +scornful way enough.</p> +<p>"I fear her no more than Relf," I answered, "but, like him, I +will not seek her without reason."</p> +<p>"Maybe there is reason for you to hear what she tells me," the +earl said. "I will have you come."</p> +<p>He seemed in no wise angry, but rather wishful that I should be +with him, and so I got off my horse and went. But it crossed my +mind that Wulfnoth the earl liked not to be alone, and suddenly I +remembered the way in which two of our Bures franklins had spoken +to each other when they would see Dame Gunnhild, Hertha's nurse. It +was just in this same wise.</p> +<p>There was a blue reek of oak-wood smoke across the doorway of +the hut, and at first the tears came into my eyes with its biting, +and I could see nothing as the earl drew me inside. We had to stoop +low as we crossed the threshold, and then the air was clearer at +the back of the hut, which was far larger than one would think, +seeing that its front did but cover the mouth of a cave that was in +the sandstone rock. I heard the water of the cold spring rattling +and bubbling somewhere close at hand.</p> +<p>There was a long seat hewn from the rock at the very back of the +place and to one side, and Wulfnoth drew me down beside him upon +it, and there we sat silent, waiting for I knew not what. A great +yellow cat came and rubbed itself, tail in air, against my legs, +and I stroked it, and it purred pleasantly.</p> +<p>Then I became aware that over against us across the fire sat the +most terrible-looking old witch that I had ever seen or dreamed of, +elbows on knees and chin on hand, staring at us. And when I saw her +I forgot the cat, and could not take my eyes off her.</p> +<p>So for long enough we sat, and she turned her bright eyes from +one of us to the other, letting them rest steadily on each in turn. +And at last she spoke.</p> +<p>"What do Earl Wulfnoth and Redwald the thane seek?"</p> +<p>"Read me what is in the time to come. What shall be the outcome +of this strife for England?" the earl said plainly, but in a low +voice.</p> +<p>"Time to come is longer than I can read," said the old woman, +never stirring or taking her eyes from the earl. "I can only see +into a few years, and I cannot always say what I know of them."</p> +<p>Then she turned her gaze on me, and stretched out her hand and +pointed at me. But her eyes looked past me, as it seemed.</p> +<p>"River and mere and mound," she said in a strangely soft +voice--"those, and the ways of the old time of Guthrum, in the town +that saw Eadmund the king. That is what is written for the weird of +Redwald the thane."</p> +<p>Now at that I was fairly terrified, for it was plain that this +old woman, who had never set eves on me before, had knowledge more +than mortal. But if she had gone so far, I would have her go yet +further. Black terror had been before the days of Guthrum grew +peaceful, and I swallowed my fear of her and asked:</p> +<p>"What of Guthrum's days?"</p> +<p>"Danish laws in the Danish Anglia," she said, "and the peace +that comes after the sword and the torch."</p> +<p>"Fire and sword we have had," I said. "Danish laws have ever +been ours. But Ethelred shall be king."</p> +<p>"Ethelred is king," she answered; "but I speak of time to +come."</p> +<p>Then Wulfnoth broke in:</p> +<p>"What is this that you speak of, dame? Tell me if I shall bear +fire and sword into Ethelred's land, and give it the peace that +shall be thereafter."</p> +<p>Then she turned her look away from us, and stared across the +fire and out of the doorway.</p> +<p>"Not with you, nor with your son, but with your son's son shall +fire and sword come into this land of ours," she said.</p> +<p>"Godwine's son!"</p> +<p>"Aye--Harold Godwinesson, who is unborn. Look through the smoke, +lords, across the valley, and see if you can learn aught."</p> +<p>Then I stared out through the blue reek, and the earl +looked.</p> +<p>"You do but play with me--I see nought!" he cried, half starting +up in anger.</p> +<p>But I minded him not.</p> +<p>Many a fight have I seen--but that which I saw from Caldbec Hill +through the smoke of the fire is more than I may say. No fight that +I have seen was as that--it was most terrible. Surely, if ever such +a fight shall in truth rage across the quiet Senlac stream and up +the green hillside, the fate of more than a king shall hang +thereon. Surely I saw such a strife as makes or ends a nation.</p> +<p>The old woman laughed.</p> +<p>"What has Redwald seen?" she asked mockingly.</p> +<p>The earl glanced at me, and so plainly was it written in my face +that I had seen somewhat awesome, that he gazed at me in amaze.</p> +<p>And I rose up and said:</p> +<p>"Let me go hence--I will see no more."</p> +<p>And I was staggering to the doorway; but Wulfnoth grasped my arm +and stayed me, saying:</p> +<p>"Bide here and say what you have seen--if it is aught."</p> +<p>"Ask me not, earl," I answered.</p> +<p>Then the dame spoke in her slow, soft voice.</p> +<p>"What banner saw you? Say that much, Redwald."</p> +<p>"The banner that flies from Pevensea walls--the banner that +bears a fighting warrior for its sign."</p> +<p>"Ha!" said Wulfnoth; "was it well or ill with that banner?"</p> +<p>"I know not how it went; I saw but a battle--yonder," and I +pointed to where, across the haze of smoke, valley and stream and +hill stretched before me, and thought that surely the fight still +raged as I had seen it--wave after wave of mail-clad horsemen +charging uphill to where, ringed in by English warriors, Saxon and +Anglian and Danish shoulder to shoulder, the banner of the Sussex +earls stood--while from the air above it rained the long arrows +thick as driving hail.</p> +<p>One thing I knew well, and that was that the warriors who +charged wore the war gear of the dukes of Rouen--the Normans. How +should they come here? and who should weld our English races into +one thus to withstand so new a foe from across the sea?</p> +<p>"So--a battle?" said Wulfnoth. "That is the first fancy that a +boy's brain will weave. Battles enough shall my banner see. No need +of you, witch as you are, to tell me that!"</p> +<p>"Maybe not," answered the old woman. "Why, then, Earl Wulfnoth, +come here to ask me to tell you things you know?" and she turned +away towards the fire again as if uncaring.</p> +<p>Then the earl changed his tone, saying:</p> +<p>"Nay, good dame, but I would know if I shall take up arms at all +at this time, and what shall befall if I must do so."</p> +<p>"I tell you, earl, that you have not any share in the wars that +shall be seen. And let Godwine your son bide with his sheep--so +shall he find his place."</p> +<p>Then the earl flushed red with anger and waited to hear no more, +but flung out of the house, muttering hard words on the dame and on +his own foolishness in seeking her.</p> +<p>Then the great cat sprang on my knee, and clung to me with its +strong claws as I would set it down to follow him. And as it stayed +me, the old dame spoke to me, and there was nought to fear in +either her face or voice.</p> +<p>"Ask me somewhat, Redwald."</p> +<p>I wondered, but I dared not refuse. So I said:</p> +<p>"How shall fare King Olaf?"</p> +<p>"For him a kingdom, and more than a kingdom. For him fame, and +better than fame. For him a name that shall never die."</p> +<p>"That is a wondrous weird," I said. "Tell me now of Eadmund +Atheling;" for some strange power that the old woman had seemed to +draw me to ask of her what I would most know.</p> +<p>"For Eadmund of Wessex? For him the shadow of Edric Streone over +all his brave life."</p> +<p>"What then of Cnut, the Dane King?"</p> +<p>"Honour and peace, and the goodwill of all men."</p> +<p>"Not mine," I said.</p> +<p>"Yours also, Redwald--for England's sake and his own."</p> +<p>But I could not believe her at that time.</p> +<p>Now the angry voice of Wulfnoth called me from outside the +place, and the dame said "Go," smiling at me and holding out her +hand.</p> +<p>"No more can I tell you, Redwald. But I have this to say of you, +that you have pleased me in asking nought concerning yourself."</p> +<p>"I would know nought beforehand," I said, speaking old thoughts +of my own plainly. "It is enough to hope ever for good that may not +come, and to live with one's life unclouded by fear of the evil +that must needs be."</p> +<p>The dame smiled again, very sadly, as it seemed to me. "It is +well said. Now I will tell you this, that over your life is the +shadow of no greater evil than what every man must meet. +Farewell."</p> +<p>So she spoke her last words to me, and sat down by the fire +again. And it is in my thoughts that she wept, but I know not.</p> +<p>Outside stood the earl, staring over the Senlac valley +eastward.</p> +<p>"This were a good place for a battle, after all," he said, as to +himself. Then he heard me and turned.</p> +<p>"Well, what more has the old witch told you?" he said, trying to +speak carelessly, though one might see that he longed to hear +more.</p> +<p>As we went towards the horses, I told him, therefore, of what +had been said of Eadmund and Cnut. And as he heard he grew +thoughtful.</p> +<p>"Now," he said, slowly and half to himself, "if the shadow of +that villain Streone is on Eadmund as on me, I will not strike for +myself--as yet; and Cnut shall win other men's praise before I give +him mine or go to him unsought."</p> +<p>"Eadmund needs a friend, lord earl," I said, mindful of Olaf's +errand, yet hardly daring to say more seeing that he had +failed.</p> +<p>"If there were no Ethelred--" said the earl, and stopped.</p> +<p>He said no more then until we were nearly within hearing of +Relf. Then he turned and faced me, taking my hand and staying +me.</p> +<p>"I would that Olaf and you were my friends," he said, "for you +both speak out for those whom you love or serve. See here, Redwald, +when you are tired of the ways of Ethelred's crew, come to me +again, and we will plan together. And tell Olaf the same. I shall +bide quiet, keeping my Sussex against all comers, until I think a +time has come. And then, maybe, the old banner will go forward. I +would have you with me then."</p> +<p>So it seemed that I had found a friend, though a strange one, +and I thanked the earl, and promised him as he wished, for it bound +me only to what I thought would surely never come to pass.</p> +<p>After that we went on to Relf, and rode to where we had left the +men. Then the earl left us, making his way to his ships that lay at +Bulverhythe, where some were in winter quarters. The great sea +flood had changed the Pevensea haven strangely, and he mistrusted +it.</p> +<p>I told Relf all these things, but he cared not much for aught +but his free life in the Penhurst woodlands, where he had no foes +or fear of foes left, now that the outlaws were done with.</p> +<p>"Well, if there must be fighting under the earl at some time," +he said, "I am glad that you may be with us."</p> +<p>And he cared to ask no more about it from that day, nor do I +think that he ever gave these matters, which were so heavy to me, a +thought, being always light hearted. And now as we rode on +silently, and I deemed that his mind was full of bodings, as was +mine, he roused me from the memory of what I had seen and heard by +saying, with a laugh:</p> +<p>"Saw you the old dame's cat?"</p> +<p>"Aye," I answered carelessly; "a great one, and a friendly beast +enough."</p> +<p>"Was it so? Then I will warrant that the old witch was in a +sorely bad temper," he said, laughing again.</p> +<p>"What makes you think that?" I asked, not caring if he +answered.</p> +<p>"Why, our folk say that the temper of cat and witch are ever +opposite. So when they go to ask aught of the old lady, they wait +outside till they see how the cat--which is, no doubt, her familiar +spirit--behaves. Then if the beast is wild and savage, they know +that its mistress will be in good temper and they may go in. But if +the cat is friendly, they may as well go home, else will they be +like to get harder words than they would care to hear."</p> +<p>Then I laughed also, and said that there seemed nought strange +in the ways of the great cat, but that it behaved as if used to +being noticed kindly.</p> +<p>"That is certain," said Relf. "It is not well to offend either +mistress or beast. But surely she was ill tempered?"</p> +<p>"There was nothing ill natured in her doing or sayings at all," +I said. "The earl angered her a little, but that passed."</p> +<p>"Maybe that was enough to put her familiar into a good temper," +said Relf, and was satisfied that the common saying was true.</p> +<p>Then I minded a small black cat that belonged to our leech at +Bures in the old days. It would let none come near it but its +master. Yet I have many times seen it perched on the shoulder of +the town witch, and she hated the leech sorely.</p> +<p>So I fell to thinking of the old home and ways, soon, as I +thought, to be taken up again. But at the same time there stole +into my mind the feeling that I had grown to love this place.</p> +<p>Then with flap of heavy wings and croak of alarm flew up a great +heron from a marshy pool, and in a moment all was forgotten as I +unhooded my hawk--one that Olaf had given me from the Danish spoils +at Canterbury. Then the rush of the long-winged falcon, and the cry +of the heron, and the giddy climbing of both into the gray November +sky as they strove for the highest flight, was all that I cared +for, and we shook our reins and cantered after the birds as they +drifted down the wind, soaring too high to breast it.</p> +<p>And when the heron was taken the dark thoughts were gone, and we +rode back to Penhurst gaily, speaking no word of war or coming +trouble, but of flight of hawk and wile of quarry, and the like +pleasant things.</p> +<p>After this I saw no more of Earl Wulfnoth, and the winter set in +with heavy snow and frosts, so that before long one might hardly +stir into the woods, where the drifts were over heavy in the deep +shaws to be very safe to a stranger. But we had some good days when +word came that the foresters had harboured an old boar in a +sheltered place. And to attack the fearless beast when he is thus +penned and at bay amid snow walls, is warriors' sport indeed.</p> +<p>But while the snow fell whirling in the cold blasts from the sea +round the great low-roofed hall I must needs bide within, and so I +saw more of the maiden Sexberga than before, as she sat at her +wheel with the lady, her mother, and the maidens of the house at +the upper end of the hall, while the men wrought at their indoor +work of mending and making horse gear and tool handles and the +like, below the fire that burnt in the centre.</p> +<p>And so it had been like enough that soon I should have bound my +heart to this pleasant place with ties that would have been hard to +break, but for some words that came about by chance. For there had +begun to spring up in my mind a great liking for the words and ways +of Sexberga, who had been pleasant in my eyes from the very first +time that I had seen her and her mother in Earl Wulfnoth's +courtyard.</p> +<p>And I think that there is no wonder in this, for these ladies +were ever most kind to me, and long were the days since I had +spoken with any in such a home as this. Nor, as I have said, should +I be blamed for forgetting old days at Bures in this wise.</p> +<p>Now, soon after Christmas, when there came one of those days +when men must needs keep under cover, I sat by the fire trimming +arrows, and presently it chanced that the lady and I were alone in +the hall, for the maidens were preparing the supper elsewhere, and +the housecarles had not yet come in from cattle yard and sheep +pens. And we talked quietly of this and that, as her wheel hummed +and clicked cheerfully the while, and at last some word of mine led +her to say:</p> +<p>"I have heard little of your own folk, Redwald. I do not know +even their names."</p> +<p>"After my father was slain, I had none left but my mother," I +said. "We are distant kinsfolk of Ulfkytel, our earl, but we have +no near kin."</p> +<p>"Was your mother's name Hertha?" she said, naturally enough, for +I had never named her, always speaking, as one will, of her as my +mother only.</p> +<p>I looked up wondering, for I could not think how she knew that +name, or indeed any other than that of Siric, my father, and maybe +Thorgeir, my grandfather, for Olaf had told them at first, when +they took charge of me, to what family I had belonged, and how I +was akin to him.</p> +<p>"That was not my mother's name," I answered. "It was that of a +playfellow of mine. How could you know it?"</p> +<p>"One will go back in thought and word to old times when one is +sick," the lady said, smiling. "This was a name often on your lips +as I sat by you in your sickness. It was ever 'Mother' and +'Hertha'. Olaf said that you had no sisters, or I should have +thought you called to one of them, maybe."</p> +<p>Then I remembered at last; and for a little while I sat silent, +and my heart was sorely troubled. And the trouble was because my +growing thought of Sexberga taught me, all in a flash as it were, +when the remembrance of Hertha was brought thus clearly back to me, +what tie bound me to Bures and to this more than playmate of mine. +In truth, I think that had it not been for this, until I had been +back in Bures again I should not have recalled it.</p> +<p>Now I was glad that I had said nought that might have made my +liking for the maiden plain to her, and so things would be the +easier. Yet for a few moments the thought of saying nought of the +old betrothal came to me--of letting it remain forgotten. And then +that seemed to me to be unworthy of a true man. It was done, and +might not be undone by my will alone. I would even speak plainly of +the matter; and at least I had not gone so far in any way that the +lady could blame me for silence. So I hardened my heart--for indeed +the trouble seemed great--and spoke quickly.</p> +<p>"Hertha was nearer to me than sister, for we were betrothed when +I was but thirteen and she eleven."</p> +<p>I think the trouble in my voice was plain, for the lady deemed +that there was some to be told.</p> +<p>"Where is she now?" she asked. "I hope that no harm came to her +when the evil Danes overran your land."</p> +<p>"I know not where she may be, dear lady," I said. "We know that +she was in safety after the first peril passed. Now our land is in +Danish hands, and I have no news from thence for four years."</p> +<p>"There are many places here where one might hide well enough," +she said thoughtfully. "I suppose her people could find the like in +your country. But it would be a dull life enough."</p> +<p>Then I told her of Gunnhild the nurse and her wisdom, and said +that none knew the land around Bures better than she, while she had +friends everywhere.</p> +<p>"Then you may find your Hertha yet," the lady said at last; and +as she spoke Sexberga, of whom my mind was full, came into the +hall.</p> +<p>"You speak sadly together," she said, looking from one to the +other, and noting that her mother's wheel was idle.</p> +<p>"It is no happy tale that our friend has told me," the lady +said, and so told her all that she had learned from me.</p> +<p>Then Sexberga clasped her hands together, and said:</p> +<p>"Shall I ever forget the time when we fled to Pevensea before +the outlaws? And to think of that terror--if it had lasted for days +and weeks--and months maybe, as it would for your Hertha. Could you +in no way seek her, Redwald?"</p> +<p>She knew nothing of the ways of wartime and of the troubles +which must come to men who are weapon bearers, and I tried to tell +her how I could by no means have sought Hertha, and how, had that +been possible, and had I found her, I could hardly have brought her +even to London in safety. I told her of good Bishop Elfheah and his +death, and many more things, and yet she said:</p> +<p>"I think you have been over long in seeking her. And she has +been in hiding for four years past!"</p> +<p>Now that was hardly fair, but what could she think else? Yet in +my mind was the certainty now that I might have had no easy task to +win this kindly maiden, who so little cared that I was bound +elsewhere. Now I will not say that that altogether pleased me, for +no man likes to learn that a fair maiden who is pleasant to his +eyes has no like feeling for himself; which is nought but vanity +after all. So when I turned this over in my mind I knew that I +ought to be glad that she cared nothing, for so was the less +trouble in the end, and I found also that what a man ought to be is +not the same always as what a man is.</p> +<p>So I made no answer, and Sexberga went on:</p> +<p>"Now must you seek her as soon as you can, for that is your part +as a good warrior--a good knight, as Father Anselm will say when he +hears thereof."</p> +<p>"Surely I shall go back this spring with our earl," I said. +"Then shall I find her, for she and her nurse will come back from +their hiding when peace is sure."</p> +<p>"Aye; and you will not know her!" said Sexberga, clapping her +hands and laughing. "She is a woman grown, as I am, by this +time!"</p> +<p>Then was gone my little playfellow, and in her place, in my +thoughts, must stand a maiden with eyes of sad reproach that must +be ever on me. And maybe in her heart would be fear of me, and of +what I had become, as she was bound to me.</p> +<p>And now Sexberga began to weave fancies of how I should meet +this long-lost bride of mine, and I could make no answer to her +playful railing, for I saw more clearly than she. And her mother +knew that this must be so, and sent her away on some household +errand, and I was glad.</p> +<p>Then she laid her hand on mine, and spoke very kindly to me.</p> +<p>"I fear, Redwald, that there is a strange trial coming for you; +but I think that you will face it rightly. It is likely that you +will hardly know Hertha when you see her; yet you are betrothed to +her, and that is a thing that cannot be forgotten."</p> +<p>"She will not know me at all," I said.</p> +<p>"Women are keen sighted," the lady answered; "but it is more +than likely that she will not."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"What if she has no love for me?"</p> +<p>"Or you of her? But I think that in her hiding she has thought +of you ever, and well will it be for you if you come not short of +her dream of you. But you have thought of her not at all."</p> +<p>"Blame me not, lady," I said humbly enough, though I thought I +deserved blame more than she knew.</p> +<p>"I cannot," she answered, and then a half smile crossed her fair +face; "nor should I have thought it wonderful if some other maiden +had taken her place in your heart. But that would have been ill for +three people in the end."</p> +<p>I sat silent, and maybe I was glad that the glow of the fire was +ruddy on my face, for it seemed that she had seen somewhat of my +thoughts of late.</p> +<p>"Now you must find Hertha," she went on, "and then if either of +you will be released, I think that Holy Church will not be hard on +you, nor keep you bound to each other, for things have turned out +ill for such a betrothal."</p> +<p>"This is a hard case," I said, "for supposing that one longs for +release and the other does not?"</p> +<p>"Why, you cannot be so much as lovers yet!" she said, laughing +suddenly. "Here we speak as if a child's thoughts were aught. Now +comes into my mind such a plan as is in the old stories. You shall +seek Hertha as Olaf's kinsman only--as a kinsman who seeks for you, +maybe, not letting her know who you are. Then may you try to win +her love, if you will--or if you cannot love her, you may so work +on her mind that she will not love you, and then all is easy. For +if she will not love you when you would win her, you will not hold +her bound."</p> +<p>"Surely not," I said. "This seems a good plan, if only it may be +carried out. But it depends on whether Hertha knows me again."</p> +<p>"Or the old nurse, Gunnhild," she answered. "If she lives yet, +you must take her into the plan."</p> +<p>So this seemed to me to be a matter easily managed, as I thought +thereof, and I was content. And after we had talked a while longer, +planning thus, I said:</p> +<p>"Now I must go back to Olaf as soon as I can. The winter is +wearing away."</p> +<p>"Aye; the good king will be missing you," she said.</p> +<p>I was not ready to say more, for I meant a great deal by my +words, as might be supposed. And the lady knew it, as I think, for +presently she said:</p> +<p>"I wonder that you spoke not of Hertha before."</p> +<p>"There need be no wonder, lady," I answered. "I have lived but +in the constant thought of war, until I must needs be quiet here. +But for this, I should still have forgotten her."</p> +<p>"That is true; but you must remember her now," she said, looking +quaintly at me.</p> +<p>"I will remember, lady," I answered, kissing her hand; and she +smiled on me and was content.</p> +<p>Truly that one who teaches a man that he is worthy of trust is +his best teacher of honour, and the name of the lady of Penhurst is +ever dear to me.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that I had nought wherewith to blame myself +in the days to come, and I taught myself to look on Sexberga as a +pleasant friend only, though it was hard at first, to say the +truth. And I think that her talk of Hertha, and her jesting at my +unknown bride, as she would call her, helped me, for it kept me +mindful.</p> +<p>Then at last came a messenger from Wulfnoth to bid me ride to +see him at Pevensea, and I went, wondering what new turn of things +was on hand. But when I reached the castle, I saw a ship that I +knew lying in the haven--one of Olaf's own. For Ottar the scald had +come to seek me with the first sign of open weather, bringing also +many gifts of Danish spoil for Relf and his household, and many +words of thanks also.</p> +<p>So in two days' time I parted from Relf and his people, not +without sorrow. Nor could I say all that I would to them of my +thoughts of what I owed them for their care.</p> +<p>Then Wulfnoth and Godwine gave me twenty pieces of the gold from +the treasure, and bade me return ere long.</p> +<p>"And I think that you will come back presently with an itching +to get home a sword stroke at one whom I care not to name lest I +break out," said the earl grimly.</p> +<p>"At Streone?" said I, being light of heart.</p> +<p>"Aye; curses on him!" answered Wulfnoth, and turned away with a +scowl of wrath.</p> +<p>Now Ottar had been to Penhurst with me, and we had come thence +together to the ships. And when the old walls of the great castle +were lost to sight as the vessel plunged eastward, he said:</p> +<p>"Relf's daughter is a fair maiden, friend Redwald. It is in my +mind that she will long to see you back again."</p> +<p>"Not so," I answered; "she is but friendly."</p> +<p>"But she had much ado not to weep when you parted just now, and +I saw her run home from the gate over quickly. These be signs," he +said sagely, being a scald, and therefore wise in his own conceit +about such matters.</p> +<p>Maybe I was glad to think that the maiden did care that I went, +were it ever so little, though I would not believe that it was +so.</p> +<p>So I came back into the Thames to Olaf, and glad was he to see +me once more, and that I was in no wise the worse now for my hurts. +And in his company it soon came to pass that I longed not at all +for Penhurst, though at first it seemed to me that I should have +little pleasure in life away from Sexberga. By and by I could laugh +at myself for that thought, but I have never seen cause to be sorry +therefor. There is no shame to a man that his mind has turned +towards a maiden whom he knows that he could trust and +reverence.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch7" id="Ch7">Chapter 7</a>: The Fight At +Leavenheath.</h2> +<p>March and April went by, and Olaf had gathered good fleet enough +in the Thames. But there was no word of Cnut's return, though the +dread thereof hung heavy over all the land, in such wise that no +man could plan what he would do without the thought rising up, +"Unless the Dane comes," seeing that each day might bring news of +him.</p> +<p>No man knows now what that terror and uncertainty was like--to +have ever in one's heart the fear of that awful host that seemed to +sweep from end to end of the land before a levy could be gathered +to meet it.</p> +<p>There had been time to gather a levy now against the coming of +Cnut, but naught had been done. Sick at heart and impatient was +Olaf, for England's rulers would not take care for her safety.</p> +<p>Then came word of a great council to be held at Oxford, and we +hoped much from that; but two days after it had been held there +came to us, angry and desponding, Ulfkytel, our East Anglian earl, +and told us how things had gone as ill as they might. Few words +enough are needed to tell it, but none can know what harm was +wrought thereby. Whereof Olaf says that a good leader will act +first, and call his council afterwards.</p> +<p>All the best of England were there, not only Saxon thanes of +Wessex, but also loyal Danes of the old settlement, and had the +king spoken his will plainly, all would have been well. For of the +Danish nobles, Utred of Northumbria and the two earls of the old +seven boroughs, Sigeferth and Morcar, were at one with our earl and +Eadmund for gathering a great levy, and keeping it together by +marching through the Danelagh, and calling on the Danish thingmen, +in the towns they yet held, to surrender.</p> +<p>That plan was good, and would have been carried out; but Edric +Streone rose up and reminded Ethelred of how the march through +Lindsey had done more harm than good.</p> +<p>"Cnut will not return," he said, "and messages to these Danish +garrisons with promise of peace if they surrender will be enough. +But if we fall on them, they will grow desperate, and will send for +Cnut to help them. If we win them to peace, Cnut cannot come +back."</p> +<p>Thereat Sigeferth of Stamford spoke hotly, minding Streone that +the harm was done in Lindsey by pillage and burning wrought among +peaceful folk, who were thus made enemies to the king. The thingmen +would submit quietly if they knew they must; but if they were left, +they would send word to Cnut that there was no force to oppose +him.</p> +<p>But the words of Streone prevailed as ever, and the council +broke up, and the nobles fell to feasting, while this foolish +message was sent to Swein's veterans in their towns.</p> +<p>Then Sigeferth and Morcar made no secret of their belief that +Streone was playing into Cnut's hands for reasons of his own. +Wherefore Streone sent for them in friendly wise, as if to recall +his words, and they went, and came from his house alive no more. +Then their men went to avenge their lords' deaths, and were driven +into St. Frideswide's church, and that was burnt over their +heads.</p> +<p>"Now the seven boroughs will welcome Cnut," said Ulfkytel, "and +Lindsey looks for him; so he has a clear road into the heart of +England."</p> +<p>Then I saw that Streone surely wrought for Cnut, else was he a +more foolish man than was thought, for all held him as the most +skilful at statecraft in England.</p> +<p>Then said Ulfkytel:</p> +<p>"Utred has gone to mind his own land, and I have come to ask you +to help me in East Anglia."</p> +<p>And in the end it came to pass that Olaf gave his new fleet into +the hands of the London thanes, for Ethelred seemed to care nought +for it, and took his own ships only, and we sailed first of all to +Maldon. Little trouble was there, for the Danes who held the place +submitted, being too few to fight us, and we gave their arms to the +citizens, and mounted all of our men whom we could, and so left the +ships and marched towards Colchester, along the great road that I +had last passed as a fugitive in the years that seemed to me so +long ago.</p> +<p>It was strange to me as we went, and the mist of time seemed to +pass away, so that all began to be as plain to my mind as if that +flight had been but yesterday. There was nothing of the wayside +happening that I could not remember well.</p> +<p>But all the roadside was changed, for the cottages were gone, +and the farmsteads stood no longer in the clearings. I know not +what tales of terror I might have heard concerning the burnings of +these homes. Where the thralls' huts had been were but patches of +nettles and docks hiding heaps of ashes, and the farmhouses were +charred ruins. And we saw now and then a man, skin clad and +wretched, seeking shelter in the woods in all haste as we sighted +him. But I had no need to ask aught--I knew only too well what +manner of tales might be told here, as everywhere in Swein's +track.</p> +<p>As we drew nearer Colchester, and the village folk began to +learn who we were, and so would gather with gifts for the +good-natured Norsemen who came to release them from the tyranny of +the thingmen, now and then a face that I knew would start, as it +were, upon me from among a little crowd. But none knew me, nor were +they likely to do so. Hardly could I think myself the same as the +careless boy who had watched his father ride away to the war. +Indeed, I know that I changed less in the ten years that came after +this than in the four that had gone by since that day. For in those +four years I had become the hardened warrior of many defeats and +but this one victory.</p> +<p>Now when we reached Coggeshall village, word came to us that the +Danes were gathering in force in Colchester, and that they expected +Olaf to besiege them there.</p> +<p>"I will waste no time under Colchester walls," he said, "but +will strike inland a little; then they will come out and give us +battle in the open to stay our march."</p> +<p>By this time the loyal freemen of Essex had gathered to Ulfkytel +in good force, and Olaf thought it would be well that he should +march along the road that leads from Coggeshall to Dunmow and take +that town, which is strong, so that the Danish forces should not +join against us.</p> +<p>Therefore he left us, and would go northwards from Dunmow, +taking the towns from thence to Thetford and Norwich, and he should +go to Ipswich and maybe to Dunwich after this. So would all East +Anglia submit. And all went well with Ulfkytel until the time came +when he must turn back in haste, as I must tell presently.</p> +<p>Now, after he was gone, Olaf thought that it would be well to +cross the Colne and Stour rivers, and so cut off the Sudbury Danes +from Colchester if it might be done.</p> +<p>"Then there is no better place than my own," said I, "for the +road on either side of the Stour can be guarded at Bures, and I +know all the country well."</p> +<p>That pleased Olaf, and he said that we would take up some strong +position there, and so wait to draw the Danes into the open, where +he thought that one battle would do all for us.</p> +<p>Thus I came hack to the home that I loved and longed to see +again. And when we came in the early morning to the place where the +great mound of the Icenian queen towers above its woods I know not +how my heart was stirred. I cannot say the things that I felt, and +Olaf said:</p> +<p>"Let us ride on alone and see your place."</p> +<p>Then we came swiftly to the crest of the hill, and I could see +all that was mine by right. But it was a piteous sight for me, and +my rage and sorrow made me silent as I looked.</p> +<p>The stockading that had been so good was broken and useless, and +the church was in blackened ruins, standing among the houses where +black gaps among them also showed that the Danes had been at work +and that none had had heart to rebuild. Black were the ruins of my +home on the hill above the village, and across the mere woods one +burnt gable of Hertha's home stood alone above the hill shoulder to +show where Osgod had dwelt in the hollow of the hills beside the +ford.</p> +<p>Then we rode across the bridge and into the street unchallenged, +for all the poor folk had fled from before us thinking that we were +some fresh foes. Very strange the deserted place looked to me as I +sat on my horse on the familiar green, and saw the river gleam +across the gap where the church had been, and missed the houses +that I had known so well.</p> +<p>"Call aloud, Redwald," said Olaf. "It may be that your name will +bring some from their hiding."</p> +<p>So I called, and the empty street echoed back the words:</p> +<p>"Ho, friends! I am Redwald, your thane. Will none come to greet +me?"</p> +<p>There was no answer, and Olaf lifted up his clear voice:</p> +<p>"Ho, Ethelred's men! here is help against the Danes."</p> +<p>Then from under the staging by the riverside where the boats +land their cargo, crept two men and came towards us slowly. And one +was that thrall of mine who would have gone to Wormingford for me +on the night when we fled. His silver collar of thraldom was gone, +for the Danes had taken it, and his face bore marks of long +hardship, but I knew him instantly. So I called him by name, and he +stared at me fixedly for a moment, and then cried aloud and ran to +me and fell to kissing my hand and weeping with joy at my return. +Nor could I get a word from him at first.</p> +<p>Then more of the people came from one place or another, timidly +at first, but growing bold as they saw these two men without fear +of us, and by the time that Olaf's warriors came over the bridge +there were not a few folk standing round us and looking on. One by +one I knew their faces, though years of pain had marked them +sorely. But none knew me at first, though doubtless they would do +so if I called to them as I had called to Brand the thrall.</p> +<p>Now was busy setting of watches and ordering of outposts, and +Olaf went with me to the top of our hill and there set a strong +post of our men, for there could be no better place for a camp +either for rest or defence, and the people told him that every Dane +in the countryside had gone to Colchester, where they thought to be +attacked.</p> +<p>Now Brand the thrall had followed us to the hilltop, and while I +sat and looked at the ruins of my home he left me and spoke to a +group of countrymen who looked on at the warriors. There was one +among this group whose face drew me, for I seemed to think that I +ought to know him, though I could not say who he was. He looked +like a poor franklin in his rough brown jerkin and leather-gartered +hose, and broad hat, and he bore no weapon but a short seax in his +belt, and a quarterstaff, and there was nought about him to claim +notice. But I was watching for old friends of mine with a full +heart, and scanned the face of each one that came near.</p> +<p>Then it seemed that the others spoke to this man with a sort of +reverence, and presently one bared his head before him. Thereat I +knew who he was, and my heart leapt with joy, for it was good +Father Ailwin, our priest, who had gone back to his death as we had +thought.</p> +<p>Then I made haste and went to him, dismounting before him.</p> +<p>"Father," I said, "have you forgotten Redwald, your pupil?"</p> +<p>He took my hand in silence, being too much moved to speak, and +signed the sign of the cross towards me in token of blessing. I +bowed my head, and rejoiced that he was yet living.</p> +<p>Then Olaf called me, and I said:</p> +<p>"When the warriors have dispersed, come to the house on the +green that was Gurth's. The king and I shall be there. We have much +to say to one another, father."</p> +<p>So I had to leave him at that time, for now Olaf would take +eight score of our men in haste to Sudbury, which is but five miles +away, and call on the townsfolk to rise for Ethelred and drive out +any Danes who were left there.</p> +<p>We went away quickly, and took all our mounted men, for we could +hear of no Danish force afield yet. It is likely that word of our +force had gone from Maldon, losing nothing on the way.</p> +<p>We rode to Sudbury gates and called on the townspeople to open +their gates. Then was some tumult and fighting inside the town, but +they opened to us, and we rode in. There were some slain men in the +street, for what Danes had been there had resisted the surrender to +so small a force.</p> +<p>But the Sudbury folk rejoiced to see us, and hailed Ethelred as +king very gladly. Then Olaf bade them raise what men they could and +join him at Bures on the morrow with the first light. Thereat the +old sheriff of Sudbury, whom I knew well, promised that we should +have all the men whom he could raise.</p> +<p>"Nor will they be your worst fighters, King Olaf," he said, "for +we have many wrongs to avenge."</p> +<p>It was late evening when we went back. And in the road where it +winds between the river and the hill before one comes into Bures +street waited Rani and some men with news. The Danes had come from +Colchester, and already their watch fires were burning along the +heath some four miles to eastward of us. It had fallen out, as Olaf +wished, that they would try to bar our way into Suffolk, and we +should have work to hand on the morrow.</p> +<p>Now men had gone with some thralls who could take them safely +near the host, to spy what they could of the number and the plans +of the Danes.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that I went no more into the village that +night, but slept by a fire that burnt where our own hearthstone had +been, amid the ruins of my home. And that was a sad homecoming +enough. Moreover, in the first hours of the night a wonderful thing +happened which seemed to be of ill omen, and was so strange that +maybe few will believe it.</p> +<p>There was a bit of broken wall near the fire, and I laid me down +in my cloak under its shelter, setting the sword that Eadmund had +given me against it close to my head, so that I could reach it +instantly if need were. After a while I slept, for the day had been +very long and I was weary, else would sad thoughts have kept me +waking. And presently there was a rumble and snapping that woke me +up in a dream of falling ruin, and the man who lay next to me cried +out and dragged me roughly aside.</p> +<p>The broken wall had fallen, crumbling with the heat of the fire, +I suppose, and had almost slain me. But I was not touched, though +the sword was broken. And when Ottar the scald heard of it he was +troubled, not knowing what this might betoken. But Olaf thought +little of it.</p> +<p>"It means that axe is better than sword for this fight," he +said, for he had armed me like himself after the Norse manner, than +which is none better or more handsome. He had given me a byrnie +{<a name="Glyph10" href="#Note10" id="Glyph10">10</a>} of the best +ring mail, and a helm gold-inlaid as became a king's kinsman, and +axe and shield like his own. He and his men alone of all Norsemen +in those days bore the cross on both helm and shield. Nor would +Olaf have any unchristened man in all his host. Many a stout +warrior did he turn away because he was not and would not be a +Christian, for many Danes were yet heathen, and most Norway +men.</p> +<p>Some of the men who had gone out to see the Danish force came +back soon after midnight, and they said that there would seem to be +close on a thousand of them in all.</p> +<p>After that we knew that a hard fight was before us, and the king +bade us sleep and take what rest we might. Then, very early, came +men to say that the Sudbury folk had come, and Olaf and I went down +to the village to meet them. Close on two hundred men had come with +Prat, the son of the sheriff of Sudbury, at their head, and they +were not to be despised, for they were sturdy spearmen, and many +had mail, though the most wore the stout leathern jerkin that will +turn a sword cut well enough.</p> +<p>And Prat asked that they should have the first place in the +fight, seeing that they fought for their own land.</p> +<p>"That is the place of my own ship's crew," said Olaf, "nor will +they be denied it. Now shall you fight under Redwald, your own +thane, and he will have the next place to me."</p> +<p>That pleased both them and me well, and after that Olaf sent me +on as advance guard, for we knew the country.</p> +<p>We were nine hundred strong in all, and when I took my men to +the hilltop I met a man who said that the Danes mustered some +fifteen hundred strong. There were Anglian Danes there besides +thingmen. But Olaf had said that we would fight two to one if +necessary, and so I held on; he would send after me if he would +make any change in his plans when he heard this. It was well that +we had settled with the Sudbury force already or we should have had +them to deal with besides.</p> +<p>We left Bures hill and went down the steep valley beyond it, and +I thought that the Danes might wait for us in the wood that is on +the opposite slope. But there were none, and we came out on the +open ground that stretches away in a fairly level upland for many a +mile northward and eastward before us. There I waited, for we +needed no advance guard beyond these last woodlands. One could see +to the dip that is by Leavenheath, and there the Danes would be. +And indeed across the open rode a few men in that direction, and I +knew that they were scouts who would take the news of our coming; +but they were too far away to be stopped even had I wished to do +so. Olaf would not be led far from Bures and the river, but would +have the foe come to him.</p> +<p>So we stayed just beyond the cover, and the bustards ran across +the heath as we roused them, and the larks sprung up and sang +overhead, and the blackbirds called their alarm notes in the copse +behind us, and the men talked of these things and pointed at the +rabbits that sat up to look at us before they fled, as if there +were no fighting at hand; for indeed I think that one notes all +these well-known things more plainly when one's mind is strung up +and over watchful, as it will be before somewhat great that is +looked for.</p> +<p>Then came Olaf at the head of his men, and as he came I saw the +first sparkle of armour across the heath under the sun, for the +Danes were in array, and were coming up to the level ground over +which we looked.</p> +<p>And when Olaf saw that his face grew bright with the joy of +battle in a good cause, and his hand went to his sword while he +looked quickly round for the place that he would choose. Nor was he +long in choosing, for he led us but a furlong from the cover's +edge, and there drew us up in a half circle, with the hollow +towards the cover and our horsemen on the flanks, so that the +greater force could not outflank us, while we had the wood in our +rear. So if one half of the curved line was forced back it would +but drive us closer together, back to back, and at the worst we +could not be followed into the cover except by scattered men who +would be of no account.</p> +<p>Now the strongest part of our curved line was in the centre, and +there stood Olaf's mailed shipmen, and behind them my English +spearmen. That place they liked not at first, till the king told +them carefully what he would have them do at the first charge of +horsemen for which he looked, for now it was plain that many of the +Danes were mounted.</p> +<p>Olaf and I stood between his men and mine, leaving our horses in +the cover, for a viking leader will ever fight on foot. Rani was on +the right wing, and Biorn the marshal on the left; and Ottar the +scald bore Olaf's banner beside the king. There were six of the +best warriors of the crew before Olaf as his shield wall, and six +of the best English warriors had been named by Prat to act in the +same way for me. Olaf had given me a good plain sword in place of +that which I broke, but I took a spear now, ashen shafted and +strong, in the English way, that I might be armed as were my men, +and I think that pleased them.</p> +<p>The Danes came on fast, and they had not been miscounted. They +were full half as many again as we, and they were drawn up in line +with their horsemen on the wings as we were, so that at first I +thought we should fight man to man, both horse and foot, along the +whole front.</p> +<p>Now they came almost within bow shot, and there they halted and +closed up, leaning on their weapons, while a great man, tall and +black bearded, and clad in black chain mail, rode out before them +and came towards us with his right hand held up in token of +parley.</p> +<p>Olaf went out from the line to meet him, and when they were +close together a great hush fell on the two hosts to hear what was +said.</p> +<p>"Are you the leader of this host?" the Dane said.</p> +<p>"Aye. Who are you?" answered Olaf.</p> +<p>"I am Egil Thorarinsson, of Colchester," he answered. "And +whoever you may be, I call on you to yield to Cnut, King of Denmark +and England, and Norway also."</p> +<p>"Maybe he is king of neither," Olaf answered quietly. "I am Olaf +Haraldsson, and I am here to see if he shall be King of England. So +I call on you to submit peaceably to Ethelred, leaving Cnut to take +his own land if he can."</p> +<p>"We are Cnut's men and Danes," answered Egil, "and from your +speech and name it would seem that you are no Englishman. Now if +you are Olaf the Thick, own your own king Cnut, and leave this +Ethelred the Unredy to his own foolishness."</p> +<p>"I am one of those Norsemen who hold that Cnut is no king of +ours, and therefore I fight him wherever I can. But if you will own +Ethelred there shall be peace from him, and you will but do what +the Danes of Guthrum's host did in the old days--hold the land you +have won from an English overlord."</p> +<p>"A fine overlord, forsooth," said the Dane; "maybe one would +think of it had he been a second Alfred--but Ethelred the Unredy! +Not so, King Olaf. Will you own Cnut, or must we make you?"</p> +<p>"It seems that we shall not agree until we have fought out this +question," said Olaf, laughing a little.</p> +<p>The Dane laughed back.</p> +<p>"Aye, I suppose not. I would that you had a few more men. But +that is a hard lot in the centre."</p> +<p>And so he looked down our line with an unmoved face, and turned +his horse and rode slowly back to his own men. Olaf came back to us +with a confident look enough.</p> +<p>"There is a man worth fighting," he said to me; "he is foster +brother of Thorkel the High, who leads young Cnut, and he seems an +honest warrior enough."</p> +<p>Then all at once his face hardened, and he spoke in the sharp +tone of command:</p> +<p>"Get your spearmen forward--the horsemen are coming first."</p> +<p>And I saw even before he spoke that this was so, for they were +closing in across their line from the wings, and forming up for an +attack that they maybe thought would break the grim ranks of Olaf's +crew who were the strength of our centre.</p> +<p>So I gave the word, and my spearmen came quickly forward through +the viking line, and there stood two deep, setting the butt ends of +their spears firmly in the ground at their feet, and lowering the +points to meet the horses breast high. Olaf bade the front rank +kneel on one knee and take both hands to the spear shaft, and then +the thick hedge of glittering points was double. I had never seen +this plan before, but it was what Olaf had bidden us do if there +was a charge of horsemen. And I stood in the second rank with Prat +beside me, and behind me were the men of Olaf's shield wall. I took +my axe in my right hand instead of the sword, for the heavier +weapon seemed best against what was coming.</p> +<p>Now were the foes ready, even as the spearmen knelt, and a chief +rode out before them and gave the word to charge, and with a great +roar they answered him, spurring their horses and flying down on +us. The arrow shafts rattled on the bow staves as Olaf's vikings +made ready, and I cried to my spearmen to stand steady, for it +seemed as if that thundering charge must sweep the crouching lines +like chaff before it. And as it came we were silent, and no spear +wavered in all the long hedge to right and left of me.</p> +<p>They were but fifty paces from us; and then with hiss and rattle +as of the first gust of a storm in dry branches the arrows flew +among them, smiting man and horse alike, and down went full half of +the foremost line, while over the fallen leapt and plunged those +behind them unchecked, and were upon us sword in air; and the tough +spear shafts bent and cracked, and a great shout went up, and over +the shoulders of my men flashed the viking axes, falling on horses +and dismounted men, and the Danish riders recoiled from the +steadfast spearmen whose line they could not break though they had +gapped it here and there, while the arrows and javelins flew among +them unceasingly.</p> +<p>They drew back disordered, and then from the wings charged our +horsemen and broke them, chasing them back towards their own men in +disorder, while my stolid spearmen closed up again shoulder to +shoulder, and the level hedge of spear points was ready again. But +now they shone no longer, for they were dulled with the crimson +token of their work.</p> +<p>Then the Danish ranks opened, and their horsemen passed through +to the rear, and at once our men wheeled back to their posts on the +wings, shouting in the faces of the Danes as they galloped past +their lines. Then was the ground open between the forces again, but +now it was cumbered with fallen men and horses, and below our spear +points was a ghastly barrier of those who had dared to rush on +them, for spear had begun and axe had finished the work.</p> +<p>"Well done, spearmen!" Olaf cried to us, "now is our turn."</p> +<p>And at his word his vikings took our place, and we were content. +For we had borne the first shock of the battle after all, and had +earned praise. Moreover the whole line cheered us as we fell back +into the second line.</p> +<p>"Now comes the real fighting," said Olaf to me; "stay by my +side, cousin, and you and I will see some sword play together."</p> +<p>So I stood on the left hand, and Ottar was on his right with the +standard, and Prat of Sudbury was next to me. The viking line was +two deep before us, and Olaf's shieldmen and mine were between us +and the rear rank, and my spearmen leant on their weapons behind us +again. But it took us less time to fall into place thus than it has +taken to say how we stood.</p> +<p>And hardly were we steady again before the whole Danish line +broke out into their war song and advanced. Then the song became a +hoarse roar, and their line lapped round to compass our bowed +front, and man to man they flung themselves on us as the storm of +darts and arrows crossed from side to side between us. Then rang +the war chime, the clang of steel on steel loud over Leavenheath, +and there came into my heart again the longing to wipe out the +memory of old defeats, and I gripped my axe and shield and waited +for my turn to come.</p> +<p>There was a little time while I might see all that happened, and +at the first rush I saw Biorn's men give back a pace--no more--and +win their place again. I saw our horsemen watching for a chance to +charge in on the Danish flank, and I saw the Danish riders wheeling +to meet them. Then I must keep my eyes for what was before me, for +men were falling. Then Ottar began to sing, and his voice rose over +the cries of battle, and rang in tune with the sword strokes as it +seemed to me, and with his singing came to me, as to many, the +longing to do great deeds and to fall if I might but be sung +thus.</p> +<p>Then I saw a Dane fell one of the vikings, and leap at the men +of Olaf's shield wall, and an axe flashed and he went down. The +fighting was coming nearer to me, and I watched and waited, and I +knew that I had never seen so stern a fight as this, for before me +Olaf's veterans fought against Swein's--the trained thingmen who +held the towns. And neither side had ever known defeat, and it +seemed to me that surely we must fight till all were slain, for +these were men who would not yield.</p> +<p>Then was a gap in the ranks before me for a moment, and through +it glanced like light a long spear with a hook that caught the edge +of Prat's red shield and tore it aside; and I smote it and cut the +shaft in twain, so that it was but wood that darted against Prat's +mail, and he said, "Thanks, master," and smiled at me, for the +ranks had closed up again.</p> +<p>Then before me I saw Egil's black armour, and the mighty form of +the chief who had led the mounted Danes; and they rushed on us and +their men followed them, and in a moment one was shield to shield +with me, and I took his blow on mine, and my stroke went home on +his helm, and he fell at my feet, swaying backwards, while over him +tripped Egil, and lost his footing, and came with a heavy fall +against me, so close and suddenly that I could not strike him or he +me, and I grappled with him and we went down together.</p> +<p>Then my spearmen roared "Out, out!" and charged on the Danes who +had broken our line thus, and I heard Olaf's voice shouting, and +then I was inside our line behind the heels of the men who fought, +and struggling with the Danish chief for mastery.</p> +<p>That was a tough wrestle, but I had been in training with Olaf, +and the Dane had been shut up in the town at ease; and at last he +gave way, and I knelt on his broad chest, drew my seax, and bade +him yield.</p> +<p>"Not I," he said, panting for breath.</p> +<p>But I would not slay a brave warrior who had fallen as I knew by +chance, and so I said--for fighting was too hot for any man to pay +heed to us, as his Danes were trying to reach him through my +spearmen:</p> +<p>"You had better. For you have fought well, and this is but +chance."</p> +<p>"Tie me up, then," he growled. "Who are you?"</p> +<p>"Olaf's cousin," said I.</p> +<p>"I can yield to you, then," he said; "take my sword and tie me +up, for I will escape if I can."</p> +<p>Then two spearmen turned and shouted, and went to drive their +weapons into the body of my foe, and I put my shield in the +way.</p> +<p>"Strike not a fallen man," I said, and they forebore, +ashamed.</p> +<p>Then I loosed the baldric that his sword hung in--his axe was +gone as he fell or wrestled--and took the weapon. And lo! it was +sword Foe's Bane, my father's sword; and I cast away my axe and +gripped the well-known hilt, and bade the spearmen guard my +captive, and turned back into the fight. And all this had gone by +in a whirl, as it were, and the Danes were still striving to regain +their lord, while Olaf and Ottar were smiting unceasingly. Only +Prat was gone, while now our whole line was of spearmen and vikings +mingled, and the Danish line was in no sort of order, but I thought +they prepared for another rush on us.</p> +<p>Then it came, and we were driven back fighting; it slackened, +and we took our ground again. And then I know not what sign Olaf +saw in the faces of the Danes before him, but suddenly he spoke, +and our war horns brayed. Then Ottar raised the standard and +pointed it forward, and there rose a thundering cheer from our +whole line as we charged and swept the Danes before us, spear and +axe and sword cleaving their way unchecked. And surely sword Foe's +Bane wiped out the dishonour of biding in a foeman's power that +day.</p> +<p>Then rode our horsemen among the disordered crowd, and that was +the end. The Danes broke and fled, and Olaf had won his seventh +battle, and I had seen victory at last; moreover the sword of +Thorgeir was in my hand.</p> +<p>The light-armed men and the riders followed the flying Danes, +and Olaf sheathed his red sword with the light of victory shining +on his face, and while the men cheered around us he put his hand on +my shoulder and asked if I were hurt.</p> +<p>"I saw you fall, cousin," he said, "but I could not win to you. +The Danes pressed on to reach the man you had down."</p> +<p>"It was Egil," I said. "I am not hurt--are you touched?"</p> +<p>And he was not, but it was our good mail that had saved us both. +There would be work for the armourer by and by before we could wear +it again, for after Egil had fallen I had been beside the king, and +there was no lack of blows before the time had come when our charge +ended the matter. Only three of his six shield men and two of mine +were left.</p> +<p>But Prat was slain, and many another good warrior lay dead where +our line had been.</p> +<p>Now when I looked for Egil he was gone. The two spearmen lay +where I thought he had been, and I looked to find him slain also. +So I asked the men round me, and at last found one who had seen him +dragged up by the rush that bore us back. And so he had +escaped.</p> +<p>"That is the chance of war," said Olaf, "but you could not have +slain him with honour."</p> +<p>"Nevertheless," said Ottar, "Redwald has a sure token there that +he overcame him," and he pointed to my sword.</p> +<p>"It is my father's sword," I said. "It has come back to me, even +as you said it would."</p> +<p>"They have not said too much of sword Foe's Bane," Ottar +answered. "For I have seen you use it--and I think that Hneitir is +hardly more handsome."</p> +<p>Now came that which is the most terrible part of a battle, even +for the victors, and that is the calling of the roll. And sad +enough were we when that was done, for the loss was heavy. Yet what +the loss was to the Danes I cannot say, for our men chased them +till there were no two left together to make a stand among those +who had not found safety in the woods that fringe the heath.</p> +<p>Then we bore back our wounded--and they were many--to Bures, and +it was noonday when we reached there. But there was no rest for +Olaf yet, for Colchester must be barred against the Danes.</p> +<p>He and I therefore took a hundred of our men, mounting them on +the freshest of the horses, and covered the nine miles between us +and the town as quickly as we might. Very fair the old place looked +to me as we crossed the Colne and saw the walls among the trees on +the steep hillside, and the houses nestling against it. The gates +were shut, and there was a strong guard along the ramparts on +either side, and we halted and summoned the townsfolk to surrender +to Ethelred in peace.</p> +<p>Doubtless some flying Danes had brought news of how the battle +had gone, for at once the gates were opened to us, and the chief +men came out and prayed for favour at Olaf's hands, and he told +them that Ethelred their king would take no revenge on them for +having bowed to Swein and his mighty force. So there was rejoicing +in Colchester, for it seemed to the townsfolk that peace had surely +come at last, and with it relief from the oppression of the +thingmen. For these warriors had carried matters with a high hand, +so that no Anglian dared to call them aught but lord--it must be +"lord Dane" if they spoke even to the meanest of the hosts and the +gravest burgher must give way to some footman of Swein's if they +met in street or on bridge. So they were not loved.</p> +<p>Olaf bade the townspeople prove their loyalty by taking all the +Danish warriors who were in the place, and bringing them to him on +the market hill where the great roads cross. Then was fighting in +Colchester for a while, but in the end, towards sunset, there was a +sullen gathering of them enough, and many were wounded.</p> +<p>Then the king went and spoke to them.</p> +<p>"What think you that I will do to you?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Even as we would do to you," one said.</p> +<p>"Hang me, maybe?" said Olaf.</p> +<p>"Aye, what else?" the man answered in a careless way, but +looking more anxious than he would wish one to see.</p> +<p>"I do not hang good warriors," the king said. "What would you do +if I gave you life?"</p> +<p>"What bargain do you want to make?" said the Dane.</p> +<p>"If I put you into a ship and let you go, will you promise to +take a message for me to Cnut, and not to come back to England as +foes?"</p> +<p>"If that is all, we will do it," the man answered, while his +look grew less careful, and the other men assented readily enough +with the fierce townsmen and their broad spears waiting around +them.</p> +<p>"Go and tell Cnut, then, that Ethelred is king, and how you have +fared. That is all I bid you. Are there any Norsemen among +you?"</p> +<p>There were eight or ten among the six-score prisoners, and Olaf +spoke aside with them.</p> +<p>"Go back to our own land and say what you have seen of the +dealings of Olaf Haraldsson with those who fight bravely though +against him. And if when you hear that I have returned to Norway +you come and mind me of today, I will give you a place among my own +men."</p> +<p>Then they said that they would fain serve him now; but he would +not have that, and then they said that they would surely come to +him if they heard that he was anywhere in their land.</p> +<p>There were two trading busses in the river, and into these +vessels we put the Danes, giving them all they needed to take them +back to Denmark, but leaving them no arms. The townsfolk would have +it that they would return and take revenge in spite of their +promise, but Olaf told them that they must not fear so few men, but +rather take care to be ready against the coming of more.</p> +<p>So the Danes sailed away down the river and to sea, and whether +they kept their promise or not I cannot say. But I think that Olaf +had done somewhat towards preparing a welcome for himself when he +should return to his own land by acting thus. I would that Ethelred +and Eadmund had been wise as he, for by forgiveness they would have +won men to them. But evil counsel was ever waiting on them, and +maybe they are not to blame so much as is he who gave it.</p> +<p>There were no men of note among these Danes whom we took, and we +thought that Ulfkytel would maybe hear of Egil before long, if he +could by any means get his scattered forces together. Yet the rout +was very complete, else he would have been back in Colchester +before us.</p> +<p>The townsfolk made a great feast in Colchester for us that +night, and next day Olaf called the headmen and set all in order +for Ethelred the king. And we thought that the town was safe for +him, for a levy would be made to hold the place at once. We rode +back to Bures in the evening, therefore, taking a few of our men as +a guard lest there should be parties of Danes on the road--a likely +thing enough, as a beaten and disbanded force in a hostile land +must live by plunder, for a time at least. But we met none.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch8" id="Ch8">Chapter 8</a>: The White Lady Of +Wormingford Mere.</h2> +<p>As we rode over the uplands we saw that the Sudbury men would do +all honour to those who had fallen fighting beside them, for they +made a great mound over Olaf's men, and Ailwin our priest was there +with us to see that they had Christian burial with such solemnity +as might be in those troubled days. There might be no chanting of +choir or swinging of censer at that burying; but when the holy +rites were ended Ottar the scald sang the deeds of those who were +gone, while the mound was closed. And that would be what those +valiant warriors loved to hear.</p> +<p>So passed the day, and then were our wounded to be seen; but at +last I might sit quietly in the house on the green and speak all +that I would with Ailwin, and we had much to say. I know not if I +longed or feared now to speak of Hertha, but I would do so. Yet +first I asked Ailwin how he himself had fared when the Danes came; +for I had thought that he would have been slain.</p> +<p>"Aye, my son, that I should have surely been," he said, "but I +found a hiding place until their fury was past, and the host swept +on, leaving but a few among us. Some of these were wounded men, and +you mind that I am skilled in leechcraft. So I dressed myself in a +freeman's garb and tended them, winning their respect at least, if +not gratitude. So I have been the leech ever since, for the church +was burnt, and many a priest was slain, and these Danes are but +half Christian if they are not open pagans; and I might not don my +frock, else would there have been no one left to christen and say +mass and marry for our poor folk in quiet places."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"Where did you find a hiding place, father?"</p> +<p>"It was shown me by one who made me promise--aye and take oath, +moreover, as if my word were not enough--that I would tell no man +where it is. For such a place once known to any but those who use +it is safe no longer."</p> +<p>"Was it Gunnhild who helped you thus?" I said, for I remembered +now my last words to him, that he should seek her.</p> +<p>"I may say that it was Gunnhild. There she and Hertha and I were +safe till the worst was over," he answered, and looked in my +face.</p> +<p>Then I must say what was in my mind all the while, and I asked +him plainly:</p> +<p>"Where is Hertha now, father? Is she yet well and safe?"</p> +<p>"Both well and safe with Gunnhild," he said.</p> +<p>"Where is she--can I seek her?"</p> +<p>The old man looked at me meaningly for a minute, and I grew hot +under his kindly gaze.</p> +<p>"What remember you of Hertha, my son?" he said gently.</p> +<p>"All, father," I answered; "but does she remember aught?"</p> +<p>"She remembers--she has never forgotten," he said.</p> +<p>And I had forgotten for so long. I think the old priest, who was +so used to deal with men, saw what was written in my face, for he +smiled a little and said:</p> +<p>"Women have time to think, but a warrior of today has had none. +What think you of your meeting with Hertha?"</p> +<p>Then I said, being sure that Ailwin understood the puzzle that +was in my mind:</p> +<p>"Father, I know not what to think. We are bound--but now it is +likely that we should not know one another if we met; in truth, I +think I fear to meet her."</p> +<p>"Is there any other maiden?" he asked, still smiling.</p> +<p>"Once I thought there was--and not so long ago either," I said +honestly, "but I remembered in time. Now I will say truly that +there is not."</p> +<p>I had no longing for Penhurst now.</p> +<p>Then there came across me a strange feeling that one might +hardly call jealousy--though it was near it--and I said:</p> +<p>"Has she seen any other who would make her wish to forget?"</p> +<p>"Truly she has not," Ailwin laughed; "how should she?"</p> +<p>"I know not where she has been, father," I said with a lighter +heart, although but an hour ago I thought that I should have been +glad to hear that it was so.</p> +<p>"Ah--I forgot," Ailwin said in some little confusion as I +thought, and he was silent. But now I would say more.</p> +<p>"Well, then, father, both of us are heart whole, as it seems. +But I know not if she would be pleased with me as I am now."</p> +<p>Ailwin looked up quickly at me, and then said:</p> +<p>"One cannot tell. Maybe she thinks the same concerning you and +your thought of her."</p> +<p>Then I told the good man of that plan which the lady of Penhurst +had made when we spoke of the same doubt, and he laughed thereat, +which did not please me. So I said:</p> +<p>"Well, then, let me see her."</p> +<p>"Not yet," he said after a little thought. "This is not the +first time that I have gone over this matter. Gunnhild has spoken +with me more than once, and yesterday she gave me a message for +you, and I was but to give it if I found that you longed to see +Hertha again."</p> +<p>"What is it, then?"</p> +<p>"She says that the troubles are not over yet. Cnut will be back +shortly, and then you have warriors' work to do. When that is done +there will be peace, for England or Denmark, or both, will be worn +out. It will not be long ere that is so, she says, and she is very +wise. Then come and find Hertha if you will. But now there will be +less trouble for both if you meet not."</p> +<p>Then I grew impatient, for I hate concealments of any kind.</p> +<p>"Better break the betrothal at once, then," I said, "for if I +must wait I cannot say that I may not meet with a maiden whom I +shall love."</p> +<p>"Then shall you let me know," said Ailwin coolly, "and it shall +be broken. Thus will be no sorrow to Hertha."</p> +<p>"So be it," said I. "But I think you are hard on me."</p> +<p>"No so, my son," said the good man, "not so. Redwald and Hertha +of today are strangers. I do not altogether hold with these early +betrothals; but what is, must be. Wait a little, and then when +peace comes, and you can dwell, one at Bures and one at Wormingford +in the old way--seeing one another and learning what shall be best +for both--all will be well. Be content. Your place and hers lie in +ruins. Why, Redwald, what home have you to give her?"</p> +<p>Now that word of common sense was the best that he could have +spoken, for I was waxing angry at being thus played with, as I +thought. But at that moment Olaf and Ottar came in with clang and +ring of mail and sword, and so no more was said, and soon Ailwin +rose to depart. But I followed him out, and asked him for the last +time:</p> +<p>"Will you not tell me where Hertha bides?"</p> +<p>"No, my son--not yet. Believe me it is best."</p> +<p>"Well, then," I answered, "I shall try to find her; but if I +cannot, you mind what I said."</p> +<p>"I will not forget. But I will add this--that there are many +fair maidens, and but one Hertha."</p> +<p>Then he turned away into the dark, and was gone with an +uplifting of his hand in parting blessing. I knew the good man +loved me, and now I was sorry that I had spoken harshly to him, yet +I had a feeling that I had been treated ill. Maybe that was +foolish, but one acts on foolish thoughts often enough.</p> +<p>There was a man sitting on the settle in the porch of the house +as I turned back. I had not noticed him as we came out. Now the +firelight from the half-open door fell on his face, and I saw that +it was one of those two thralls of mine.</p> +<p>"Ho, Brand," I said, "answer me truly. Know you where bides Dame +Gunnhild the witch?"</p> +<p>"No, lord. We know not where she bides but it is not far hence, +for we see her at times in the village, though not often."</p> +<p>"How did she escape when the Danes came?"</p> +<p>"She and the lady Hertha took boat--it was but three days after +you had gone. All the men had fled as she bade them, but her +brother came and helped her with the boat. They went into the mere, +and that was the last we saw of them."</p> +<p>Now I remembered to have heard of Gunnhild's brother, but I had +never seen him.</p> +<p>"Where does her brother live?" I asked.</p> +<p>"I know not. I have not seen him again," answered the man.</p> +<p>"Whence comes Dame Gunnhild into the village?" I went on, +thinking that I might learn somewhat in that way.</p> +<p>"Master," said Brand, "she comes at twilight, nor will she have +anyone follow her. Ill would it fare with the man who did so. I do +not know whence she comes."</p> +<p>Now it seemed to me that the man had more in his mind than that, +and at least that there must be some talk about the place, which is +small enough to make the doings of everyone the talk of each one +else.</p> +<p>"Where do men say she lives?" I asked therefore.</p> +<p>The man looked doubtfully at me, but he could see that I was not +angry. So he smiled foolishly, and answered:</p> +<p>"We say nought, lord. Danes hear everything in some way."</p> +<p>"Well, you can tell me safely enough."</p> +<p>"We think it is witchcraft of the old dame's, and that she and +the lady Hertha live with the White Lady in the mere of +Wormingford."</p> +<p>Then I was fain to laugh, for it was witchcraft more than even +Gunnhild could compass, by which she might find refuge in the +depths of that bottomless mere where the White Lady dwells. The +place has an ill name enough among our folk, and even on a bright +summer day, when all the margin of the wide circle of water is +starred with the white lilies, I have known silence fall on those +laughing ones who plucked the flowers, so still and dark are the +waters, and so silent the thick woods that hem the mere round under +the shadow of the westward hill that hides the sunset. No man cares +to go near the mere when darkness has fallen, so much do our people +fear to see the White Lady of whom Brand spoke.</p> +<p>I feared her not, for she was a lady of our own race, who was +drowned there by the wild Welsh folk in some raid of theirs when we +Angles first came from the land beyond the seas and drove them out. +Ours was the clan of the Wormings--I bore the badge of the twining +snake myself today, marked on my left arm, as had all my fathers +before me--so ford and mere were named after us, and we were proud +of the long descent, as I have said. Once had my mother seen the +Lady, and that was on the day that my father was slain. Therefore +had she seen unmoved the coming of Grinkel, for she knew already +what had befallen. I had not seen the Lady, but I know that many +others of my race had done so, and ever before the coming to them +of somewhat great that was not always ill. But she never spoke to +them, but floated, white robed, over the mere, singing at times, or +silent.</p> +<p>Now it came into my mind that the thrall was not so far wrong, +and that there was a chance that Gunnhild might have some hiding +place among those woods about the mere, for no man willingly +searches them, and Danes fear these places more than we, being +heathenish altogether. So I asked Brand if the Danes knew about the +White Lady.</p> +<p>"Ay, master, they soon learned that. They call her 'Uldra', +though why I know not."</p> +<p>That was the name of the water spirit they believed in. So I +became all the more sure that Gunnhild was there. It would be easy +for her to feign to be the White Lady and so terrify any man who +sought her. A man is apt to shape aught he sees into what he fears +he may see.</p> +<p>"Has the White Lady been seen of late?" I asked therefore.</p> +<p>"I have heard that the Danes say that they have seen her," he +answered. "They have seen also bale fires burning on the mound +where the great queen lies."</p> +<p>That last was an old tale among us also, but I had never seen +any light above the great mound. Ottar had many sagas that told of +the fires that burnt, unearthly, above buried heroes, and the Danes +would watch for them, and so, as I have said, would certainly see +them, or deem that they did so. Yet I suppose that these strange +fires may have burnt on the tombs of heathen men, else would not +the tales have been told thereof so certainly. But Christian +warriors rest in peace, and about their last bed is no unquiet. Nor +may Christian folk be frighted by the bale fires of the long-ago +heathen's mounds. For their sakes they have been quenched, as I +think.</p> +<p>So I stood and mused for a while, turning over in my mind how +best to find Gunnhild at the mere without leading others to her +hiding place. And at last I laughed to myself, the thing was so +simple. I had but to go into the mere woods at twilight or in the +dusk, and wander about until she heard and feared my coming. Then +she would play the White Lady's part on me to fray me away, and all +was done. She could not tell who I was, nor would she think it +likely that I would seek her there, and would easily forgive me for +doing so, when we met.</p> +<p>I bade Brand the thrall goodnight, and went back into the great +room of the house, where Olaf sat with Ottar resting and talking +together. There was no one else in the place, for we had no fear of +aught, and Olaf cared not to have many men about him. Some of his +men would come presently and sleep across the doorway, but the +evening was young yet.</p> +<p>"You seem as if you had heard somewhat pleasant," Olaf said when +I came in.</p> +<p>I suppose that my certainty of finding Gunnhild and Hertha +pleased me well enough to make my face bright.</p> +<p>Now both Olaf and Ottar knew of my wish to search for Hertha, +and who she was, for I had told them as we sailed to Maldon on the +way to my own country again, and they were eager to help me to take +her from hiding into what we thought would be greater safety. So +when the king said this, at first I thought of saying only that I +had surely found out where she was hidden. But then I would not +keep back what Ailwin had said, for Olaf might have advice for +me.</p> +<p>Therefore I sat down and told them all the story of my talks +with the priest and the thrall, adding that I was the more sure +that Gunnhild was hard by, because Ailwin had said that it was but +yesterday she had given him the message for me.</p> +<p>Then Olaf said:</p> +<p>"Cousin, I think these two old folk are right. Better wait for +peace, as they say."</p> +<p>"It is not so sure that Cnut will come back," I said.</p> +<p>"Is it not?" said Olaf. "Why--seeing that he has left his host +of thingmen in the towns, and we had Thorkel's foster brother to +fight but the other day, and that these Danes do not yield at once +and so gain peace and hold what they have, but will rather fight +than own Ethelred--I think that none can well doubt that word has +gone round the Danes in the kingdom that he will return, and that +they need not fear to hold out till he comes."</p> +<p>Then the last doubt of trouble to come passed from me, for it +was plain that these thingmen looked for help presently. But Olaf +was thinking of my affairs again.</p> +<p>"Four years is overlong for anyone to play ghost on a whole +countryside," he said laughing. "I cannot think that Gunnhild, even +if she be a witch, can have bided in sight of the village all this +time without being found."</p> +<p>"No man dares go near the place," I said.</p> +<p>"Well, whence has she her food unless from the village? I think +she cannot be so near," he replied, and there was reason in his +question.</p> +<p>I was cast down at this, for I had made so sure that I had found +out the secret that was so carefully kept from me. When there is +mystery made, which is, or seems, needless, there is pleasure and a +feeling of mastery in finding it out unaided, and I was losing +that.</p> +<p>I will say this, however, that I was more vexed in this way than +with the thought that I should not find Hertha, for in my own mind +I began already to own that Ailwin and Gunnhild were in the right +about our not meeting yet.</p> +<p>Olaf saw that I was vexed now, and put forward a plan which he +thought would be pleasant to me, for he was certain that I should +not be satisfied until I had seen if I was right.</p> +<p>"There is no reason why we should not go to the mere and see if +Gunnhild is there," he said. "If she is, maybe it will be well for +you to speak with her. And if not--why, then we know at least that +she has a good hiding place elsewhere."</p> +<p>That was a plan that pleased me well, for though I had no fear +of going to that lonely place so long as I had made myself certain +that I should meet Gunnhild, now that it seemed not quite so sure +but that I should find myself alone there, the thought of the quest +was not quite so pleasant to me.</p> +<p>"Then we may as well go at once," Olaf said. "How like you the +thought, Ottar?"</p> +<p>"I like not such places, my king," the scald answered honestly. +"There are chills that come over one, and rising of the hair."</p> +<p>"Aye, there are," answered Olaf. "I have a fear of this White +Lady myself. Therefore am I going with Redwald, because I want to +see if there is aught to be feared of."</p> +<p>"I will come with you," the scald said, hardening his heart, for +his mind was full of the wild tales of the old heathen days which +he sang, and he feared more than we.</p> +<p>"It is but a lady after all," said Olaf, laughing at Ottar's +face.</p> +<p>"I have a sort of fear of living ladies," the scald said, "how +much more, therefore, of their ghosts! I had rather meet Danes. For +when one sees them there comes a stiffening of back and knees and +fists--whereas--"</p> +<p>"Aye, Redwald and I know somewhat of what you mean," laughed +Olaf, and then Ottar laughed, and we took our cloaks and were +going, but first must seek Rani, and tell him that we were now +about to leave the village for an hour or so.</p> +<p>Now no man questioned Olaf as to his lonely walks, as I saw in +Normandy, and Rani said nought but:</p> +<p>"Take your arms, for there may be wandering Danes about."</p> +<p>But we were armed already, though without mail, and as we went +not far it seemed unlikely that we should need any. It was but a +half-hour's walk from the house.</p> +<p>Now the mere lies on the south side of the river, which runs +into it only by a narrow inlet, and this inlet is so overshadowed +by the trees of the thick woodland that when one has passed through +the opening it is lost to sight very quickly. So heavy is the +growth of timber round the mere that one can see the water from no +place, save for a glimpse as this inlet is passed in going down the +river, and many a stranger has passed by all unknowing that such a +mere could be near him. Hardly can the wind reach the wide waters +to ruffle them even when a gale blows, and so the place is more +silent, and its terror falls more heavily on a man's mind.</p> +<p>It was two hours after sunset when we started, but the fringe of +the woodland is but a mile and a half from the village, and we were +soon there. The night was bright enough, with a clear sky and stars +overhead, though there was no moon as yet.</p> +<p>As we went Olaf was very cheerful, and railed pleasantly at +Ottar for his fears, while I said little, not knowing if I wanted +to find Gunnhild or not.</p> +<p>But Ottar would not pretend to be braver than he felt, having no +shame in fear of things other than earthly, a matter wherein I +think that he was right.</p> +<p>"Why," said the king, "if Dame Gunnhild tries to fray us, do you +but turn that cloak of yours inside out, and you will frighten +her"--for it chanced that the scald's red cloak had a white woollen +lining, whereof he was somewhat proud, being a lover of bright +dress.</p> +<p>"It is ill to mock a spirit," the scald said; "wherefore do I +believe the less that a Wise Woman will bide in the place that it +haunts."</p> +<p>So they talked until we came to the woodland; and when we came +among the trees a silence fell on us.</p> +<p>"It is of no use," I said, "let us go back. You are right, and +she cannot bide here."</p> +<p>"Why, now that I have got over my fear so far," Olaf said, "I +will go on, even to the water's edge. Then will we go back."</p> +<p>I could not gainsay him, as may be known, and so we went on. It +was easy at first to thread our way through the trees, but +presently they were thicker, and it was dark. There was no wind +moving in the boughs overhead, and there is no denying that the +silence of that deserted place weighed heavily on us all.</p> +<p>And when we drew close to the water's edge, and saw the still +water, starlit, stretching before us, a water hen sprang from the +reeds almost at our feet with her shrill warning cry, and flapped +out into the middle of the dark mere, leaving a long trail of +broken water behind her that gleamed for a moment with dancing star +sparks from the sky, as if it might have been the path of the White +Lady herself. And from all round the lake came the answering cries +of her mates, sounding weird and strange through the silent gloom. +I heard Ottar draw a deep breath, and we all three started, and +stood still, as if turned to stone.</p> +<p>"We have taken fright easily," said Olaf, as if angry with +himself for being thus startled. "My heart beats like a hammer, and +I will bide here till I can do better than that."</p> +<p>Yet he spoke in a whisper; and I saw no reason to try to answer +him if I could. Then he walked on, keeping to the right, where the +ground is high, at the hill foot, but still skirting the water's +edge. Then I saw something beside the reeds, and went aside to see +what it was; and, as I thought, it was a canoe that some fisher had +left. There was a paddle still in it, and a bow net set on hoops, +such as we were wont to use for eels and tench.</p> +<p>"Here is how Gunnhild might find food," I thought, but it was +not likely.</p> +<p>Ottar stood and looked into it with me, but the king had walked +on.</p> +<p>Now it grew darker as we followed him, and Ottar tripped and +fell, and I lost him, though I could hear him close behind me as he +broke a branch now and then in passing.</p> +<p>The king stayed in a clear place that I remembered well. Great +trees stood round, and it was pleasant to sit there and look out +over the water on a summers noonday.</p> +<p>"Where is Ottar?" he said, when I stood by him.</p> +<p>"Close behind me. I heard him even now," I answered. "Let us go +back, my king. There is nought here."</p> +<p>"Aye, we will go back now," he said. "But Ottar is before +me."</p> +<p>"Listen," I said, "the scald is behind us. I lost him in the +dark."</p> +<p>"Nay, but I heard him in front of me even as you came," the king +said.</p> +<p>And when we stood still we could hear the scald where I thought; +but also we heard footsteps and breaking branches before us.</p> +<p>We could see anything that was not in shadow pretty plainly; and +now Olaf whispered to me:</p> +<p>"Someone is forward, and coming nearer. Get your sword +loose."</p> +<p>At that there came a cry like the moor hen's from the thicket +before us, and in a moment, with a great shout and crashing, there +broke out on us many men, and I was down and held fast before I +could draw on them. I saw Olaf draw the long dagger that hung ready +to his right hand, and smite backwards over his shoulder in the +face of a man who was pinioning him from behind, and the man +shrieked and reeled backward into the bushes, hands to face. And +then Olaf cried, "We are beset," and was borne down.</p> +<p>Then the men tied us roughly with belts, and stood round us.</p> +<p>I looked every moment to see the rush of Ottar into the midst, +sword in hand; and saw that it would go hard with him, for all the +men were armed, and some wore mail that rattled as they moved. But +he came not; and I wondered if he too were taken, or if he had +turned craven and had fled, a thought that I put from me as sorely +wronging the brave scald; and then wondered how long it would take +him to reach the nearest outpost of our men and come to rescue +us.</p> +<p>But now one was hammering flint on steel and making a fire in +haste that he might see who they had caught. And when it blazed up +I saw that the men were Danes. No doubt they were strangers to the +place, men who had wandered here from the Leavenheath woods after +the battle; for no Dane who came from close at hand would have +dared to shelter in this place. There were fourteen of them in +all.</p> +<p>"Ho," said one who seemed to take the lead, "we have trapped +some gay birds. Now, who might you be?"</p> +<p>He spoke to Olaf, who answered nothing. So the man turned to me +with the same question. But I followed the king's plan and made no +answer. Whereat the man kicked me, saying:</p> +<p>"Answer, you Norway rat!"</p> +<p>I ground my teeth with rage, and said nothing.</p> +<p>"Fetch the English churl, and ask him if he knows who these +are," said the Dane. "Then shall we see if this is a question of +drowning or ransom."</p> +<p>Two of tho men went back into the woods, and presently returned, +dragging with them my thrall Brand, whose teeth chattered with +terror, more of the place than of the Danes as it seemed, for he +kept his eyes on the mere.</p> +<p>When he saw me I shook my head ever so little in token that he +should not own us. If Olaf thought best we could do that for +ourselves.</p> +<p>Then they cuffed the poor thrall, and asked him if he knew us; +and for answer he did but point out over the mere, whose waters +looked black as ink beyond the fire lit circle of trees and +shore.</p> +<p>"Let us go hence, lord Danes," he said trembling, "then will I +say what I can. The Lady is wroth with men who come here at +night."</p> +<p>"We care for no ladies," said the leading Dane. "What are you +feared of?"</p> +<p>"The White Lady who dwells in the mere. To look on her in her +wrath is death," Brand said--and one might well see that his terror +was real.</p> +<p>The Danes looked on one another, and there were white faces +among them. Then, as luck would have it, one said:</p> +<p>"This must be the mere of which I have heard strange tales. Let +us go," and he began to edge away towards the fire.</p> +<p>Then the leader said:</p> +<p>"Let us find out if these men are worth taking with us," and he +came and questioned us again, and again we answered not.</p> +<p>"I will make you speak," he said savagely. "Take them up and +make ready to cast them into the water."</p> +<p>Now I wondered where Ottar was. Surely he must be back with more +men soon.</p> +<p>"Aye, throw them in, and let us be going," said one or two, for +they had been asking Brand many questions, and now were eager to +leave the place and its terrors.</p> +<p>So one brawny Dane took my feet and another my shoulders and +began to lift me; while I could not so much as struggle, so tightly +was I bound.</p> +<p>"Hold!" said the leader. "Will you throw away a sword like +that?"</p> +<p>It was certain now that they were in haste, for they had +forgotten to strip me in their wish to have done.</p> +<p>They set me down again, and that was the saving of us. For even +as they loosed their grip on me, one who stood near the water cried +out in a sharp voice:</p> +<p>"Listen--what is that!"</p> +<p>And they all stayed motionless as had we when the bird scared +us.</p> +<p>There was a sound of wondrously sweet singing from away across +the mere. Such a voice it was as I had never heard before, neither +like the singing of man or woman, nor had the song words that I +could catch.</p> +<p>The Danes forgot us as they heard that, and huddled together in +twos and threes, looking out to whence the sound came. As for Brand +the thrall, he fell on his knees and hid his face against a tree +trunk, crying faintly:</p> +<p>"It is the White Lady."</p> +<p>So too thought I; and now I will not say that I feared her, for +she was of my own race, and maybe she came to my help.</p> +<p>Then I saw some of the Danes gasp and start, and point across +the water, speechless, and I looked also.</p> +<p>Plain enough in the firelight stood a tall white figure on the +water of the mere, coming slowly towards us, and singing the while +that wondrous song. And ever as it drew nearer the song grew +wilder; and the long white-robed arm pointed towards us.</p> +<p>Then the thrall leapt up and yelled, and fled into the dark +wood. And that was enough for the Danes. They gave not another +thought to us, but cried out in mortal terror and fled also, +tripping and crashing through the underwood as they went; while the +song of the White Lady grew louder, and she still neared us.</p> +<p>Then, still singing, her pace quickened, and suddenly I saw that +she came in no magic wise, but in the fisher's canoe which I had +seen. And then the bows touched the shore, while with a wholesome +clank of sword, and throwing back his long white cloak, Ottar the +scald leapt ashore and came to us, dagger in hand, and cut our +bonds.</p> +<p>"Into the boat, lord king--quick!" he said. "We shall be safe +there."</p> +<p>Dazed and stiff I was, but I rose and followed Olaf; then Ottar +pushed off, and we shot out towards the midst of the mere into +safety.</p> +<p>Then the king stared at me and at Ottar for a moment in +amazement, and then laughed until the woods rang again, and I and +the scald were fain to join him. Never had I heard such sounds +before in that haunted place.</p> +<p>"Now, Ottar," he said, when he could speak again, "never say +more that you fear troll, or nix, or ghost--for you have done what +you told me but half an hour ago was most unwise."</p> +<p>"I needs must do somewhat, lord king," said Ottar gravely, "and +it came into my mind that these Danes would be as badly scared as +should I have been had I met Gunnhild; and methought that Redwald's +lady would forgive me for his sake."</p> +<p>"Aye, surely," I said.</p> +<p>Then--was it fancy, or a vision wrought on me by long looking at +Ottar as he came across the red track of the firelight on the +water, still dimpled by the boat, glided the white form of no +earthly maiden, and was gone.</p> +<p>I saw it and said nought. Ottar sat in the stern facing us, and +his eyes were away from the fire, and Olaf was beside me, and I +thought that he started.</p> +<p>Then Ottar said:</p> +<p>"Can we go back by water, Redwald? It would be safer."</p> +<p>I showed him the channel which leads to the river, and he took +the paddle with which he had so deftly sculled the boat across the +mere, and as we left the overhanging trees and saw the faint glow +of the rising moon across the open river we breathed more freely, +and were safe.</p> +<p>Surely had it not been for the scald's ready wit both Olaf and I +had been lying even now in the dark mere. For it would have been +death to us all three had Ottar tried to rescue us sword in hand. +It is his saying that he was so frozen with fear at first--until he +knew we had met with mortals only--that he stood still and +helpless, listening. Then came to him the thought of what to do, +when he heard the talk of either ransom or drowning and knew that +we were not slain. So even as Olaf had bidden him in jest, he had +turned his cloak and had saved us.</p> +<p>But Ottar the scald's courage and craft are well known, and I +have other thoughts concerning his fear. But I know this, that +never again could he find that strange and sweet voice that had +come to him in the need of his master.</p> +<p>Brand the thrall cowered in the house porch when we returned, +and he was pale as a sheet, while his knees trembled even yet. We +took him in and gave him wine and meat, and then asked him how the +Danes got hold of him.</p> +<p>"Master," he said, "they caught me but a little while after I +had left you--as I set snares for rabbits on the hill. I let them +come to me, thinking them some of the king's men who are kindly. +Then they said they needed a guide through the country to the sea, +and kept me with them."</p> +<p>Then Olaf said to him:</p> +<p>"No ill will come of this seeing of the White Lady, for she came +to save Redwald your lord; you may sleep in peace therefore, but it +would be unlucky to say that you saw her."</p> +<p>Then the man said that he would not speak of the matter, and it +was plain that he dared not do so. But he went away cheerfully +enough, with his mind at rest from its fears.</p> +<p>"It would be ill luck for me if Rani heard of this," said Olaf, +looking ruefully at us; "for we cannot deny that he warned us. My +foster father loves rating a king now and then, though it be only a +small one like myself."</p> +<p>So we said nought that night, and none asked where we had been. +Now I slept next to Olaf, and in the night I woke with a new terror +on me, and I put my hand on his and woke him.</p> +<p>"My king," I whispered, "what if Gunnhild and Hertha are indeed +in the woods yonder? These Danes will have found them."</p> +<p>The king was silent for a moment, for the fear that my guess as +to their hiding place might be right came to him also before he +gave the matter thought.</p> +<p>"It is not likely. The thought of danger makes it seem possible +again," he said. "But I like not these prowling Danes--they are +looking for hiding places for themselves."</p> +<p>"She was safe before," I said, but a great fear came to me with +his words.</p> +<p>There had been nought to drive the Danes to seek sheltered spots +before, now they were sure to do so.</p> +<p>"This matter is not in our hands," said the king, when I said as +much. "We can do nought. Pray, therefore, and sleep again. I think +that you need fear little."</p> +<p>Then after a while he spoke once more.</p> +<p>"Redwald, saw you aught upon the mere while we sat in the canoe +in its midst?"</p> +<p>"Aye, my king," I answered, knowing what he meant.</p> +<p>"I saw her also," he said.</p> +<p>So it had been no fancy of mine, but the White Lady of our house +had indeed passed before my eyes. I began to wonder if this +portended aught to me, but soon I thought that it did not, for the +like peril in which I had been, and even then had hardly escaped +from, had not befallen any of my kin, as I was in peril at her own +place, which was a new thing. So I judged that she showed her +thought of us only.</p> +<p>In the morning matters fell out so that we had never need to say +what danger we had run. For the men had seen Brand's plight, which +was pitiful, after Danes and thickets had done their work on him, +and told Olaf that the man had met with and escaped Danes from the +mere woods.</p> +<p>So with twenty men we searched those covers in broad daylight, +and found no token of any dwellers in the place. Nor were any Danes +left, save one, and that was the man whom Olaf had smitten, for he +had died. The embers of the fire were near him, and on the bank lay +the severed belts that had bound us.</p> +<p>"These Danes have fought among themselves," said our men, and +hove the body into the water. So the Dane lies there instead of +Olaf the king and me, with the Welshmen whom my heathen forefathers +cast into the black depths, in revenge for the death of the White +Lady.</p> +<p>Now when we came back to Bures there was a tired horse standing +by the house door, and in the hall waited a messenger from +Colchester, and he brought the news that we looked for and yet +feared, so that we had hoped against hope that it would not +come.</p> +<p>A Frisian trader had put into the Colchester river, and he +brought word that even now Cnut might be taking the sea for +England, for in all the western havens of Denmark was gathered such +a mighty host and fleet that no man had ever known the like, and he +had heard that the day for sailing would soon come.</p> +<p>Then Olaf made no delay but rode to Colchester to see this +shipmaster and speak with him, for he thought that he might find +out from him what point on our coasts would be that at which Cnut +aimed first.</p> +<p>So Gunnhild and Olaf were right, and the little peace we had had +was to end. Now would come the last struggle of English and Dane +for mastery in our land, and in my heart I wished that we had such +a king as Olaf Haraldsson. For it seemed to me that we were not +ready, though we had had a year and more in which to prepare.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch9" id="Ch9">Chapter 9</a>: The Treachery Of Edric +Streone.</h2> +<p>When Olaf had gone I sought out Father Ailwin, for the danger +that I had seen for Hertha lay heavily on my mind, and now also I +would tell him of the certainty of coming warfare, asking him what +he and Gunnhild would do. So I went to the place where one might be +sure to find him during the last two days, and that was in the +churchyard, where our people and Olaf's men were working together +to raise for him a little wattled chapel among the ruins, that +should serve at least until I could return and build the church +anew.</p> +<p>It was a sore grief to me that the old one was gone, for in it +had been crowned Eadmund the Holy, and it was rich with his gifts. +And our hall had been the first house in which he had feasted as +crowned king, so that we call the lane from church to hilltop St. +Eadmund's Lane since he rode along it in all the pomp of that high +festival after he left the altar. Only the ruins of God's house and +man's abode were there now, but the lane was bright with the +flowers that the good king loved, and the nightingale sang in the +wooded banks even as when he listened to it in the old days. We had +always these things to mind us of the martyr.</p> +<p>But Ailwin was not with the men, though he had been foremost in +working and planning with them. Nor had any of them seen him that +day.</p> +<p>So I waited for a little while and watched the work, wondering +if I should live now to do all that I would in making new the +place. And then as I walked to look across the bridge I passed a +heap of earth that the men had thrown out for the place of a post, +and I saw somewhat glittering in it, and stooped and took it +up.</p> +<p>It was a silver penny, and when I rubbed the earth from it, I +knew that it was one of Eadmund's, mint new and fresh as on the day +when he stood in his robes and crown, even where I stood in the +place of the old porch, while the people shouted and scrambled and +fought in glee for the largess he threw among them. Doubtless this +had been so thrown and had been trodden under foot and lost.</p> +<p>Now it came into my hands even when my thoughts were most +troubled, and to me it seemed as a sign that I should surely return +to the place that the saint had loved. I was greatly cheered +thereat, for as I waited for Olaf to return I saw as it were the +long hope of home and peace dashed from me, and the pain of the +coming war grew plainer than I had known it in Ethelred's court. +The old love of home had waked in me as I wandered in the places of +my boyhood, and for the first time I learned the aching of the +hearts of those who had known more of home than I, and would lose +it.</p> +<p>But I was young, and it needed but a little thing to turn my +thoughts, so this token as I say helped me to banish them. What +might not Eadmund the Saint, who slew Swein to save his shrine from +heathen hands, be able to do for me?</p> +<p>I would tell Ailwin presently, and ask him what vow I should +make in return for this remembrance.</p> +<p>But Ailwin came not, and I grew impatient, and went to the +cottage where he dwelt as the leech, at the head of the little +street towards our hall. Maybe he would be there.</p> +<p>The door was open, and the little black cat that had been the +leech's in the old days, and would not leave its house, sat in the +sun on the step. I went inside and called, but there was no man. +And then a footstep came from the road and in at the wicket, and a +strange priest, younger than Ailwin, and frocked and cowled came +in.</p> +<p>He saluted me gravely, and I bowed to him, and then he asked me +where Redwald the thane might be found.</p> +<p>"I am he, father," I said.</p> +<p>"Then I have a message to you from Ailwin, your priest, whose +place I am sent to take for a time."</p> +<p>"This is his house, father," I answered. "Let us come in and +hear what he would tell me."</p> +<p>So we sat down inside the one room on the bench across the wall, +and I wondered what I should hear.</p> +<p>"I will give my message first," the priest said, "and afterwards +you shall tell me Ailwin's ways with your people, and I will try to +be as himself with them."</p> +<p>I laughed a little, though I was pleased, and answered:</p> +<p>"You cannot do that, father--for he has christened everyone in +the parish that is thirty years younger than he.</p> +<p>"Aye, I forgot that," the priest said gravely. "They will miss +him sorely. Therefore I will say that he will return ere long, but +that my ways must be borne with until he comes."</p> +<p>"Now I think that if you steer between those two sayings of +yours you will do well," I answered.</p> +<p>"Ailwin's ways wrought in my manner, therefore. I thank you, +thane," the priest said. "I am cloister bred, and know nought much +of secular work. Now, that is enough about myself. This morning, +very early, came Ailwin and asked for one to take his place, and I +am a Dane of the old settlement, and so I came, as running less +risk if Cnut returns, as they say he will. Then Ailwin bade me seek +you and say this. That because of the wandering Danes he would take +his charges into some more quiet place for a time at least. Truly, +he bade me tell you, they have a last refuge where none would find +them, but it is ill fitted for a long stay, and it is likely that +once there it might now be months before they could leave it. So he +and Gunnhild think best to go far off. They will return with peace, +and then he bids me tell you that, if the Lord will, all shall be +well."</p> +<p>"Where will he go?" I asked.</p> +<p>"I know not. He gave me the message, and I know no more. Not +even of whom he speaks."</p> +<p>Now for a moment I grew angry with Ailwin again, for it seemed +to me that I should have been told more than this. Then I thought +that perhaps Ailwin himself knew not yet where he would go.</p> +<p>"Does Ailwin know that there is news from Denmark?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Our abbot told him, but he knew already, having had word from +Colchester in some way. He had heard before we as it seems."</p> +<p>That was doubtless Gunnhild's work, for I came to know +afterwards that in the long years of trouble she had made a chain +of friends who would pass word to her from every point whence +trouble would come. It seems to me that much of the dame's +knowledge of coming events was gained in ways like this rather than +by witchcraft.</p> +<p>Then I was glad that the danger that I had learned had been +foreseen by her and Ailwin; and as I sat without speaking for a few +minutes I felt that now I was free to follow Olaf where he would +lead his men to meet the Danes, for Hertha was not here, and her I +could follow no longer.</p> +<p>There was no more to be learned from the priest, and so we rose +up and went down to the churchyard, and saw the work, and I told +him what I could of Ailwin and his ways, and thought that he had +found one who was like him in thought and gentleness.</p> +<p>So presently I took Eadmund's penny from my pouch and gave it to +him, telling him about it, even as I would have told Ailwin.</p> +<p>"Give me this back when I return, father," I said, "and it shall +remind me of some vow which I will make at your advice."</p> +<p>"Make no vows, my son, save this one," he said. "What will +befall you we know not, and therefore there is but one vow which we +know certainly that you may be able to keep. I will have you put +the penny where you may see it often, and so you shall remember, +and vow if you will, that when your eyes fall on it you shall say a +prayer to Him who gave power to Eadmund to conquer in dying, for +this home of yours and this church, that out of ruin may come +beauty, and after war, peace."</p> +<p>"I will make that vow, father," I said gladly.</p> +<p>"Forget not me at times in the prayer," he said very humbly; and +I promised that I would not, taking the penny back.</p> +<p>Then he went and began to work on the church, being plainly +skilful in the matter, and I went up to our hall's ruins and looked +out over the land, and planned again what I would do in the days to +come.</p> +<p>It was long dark when Olaf rode back, and he had learnt but +little. But he had sent messengers to Ulfkytel at Thetford to warn +him to watch his coasts, for he must go back to London with the +ships to guard the Thames.</p> +<p>"And you, Redwald, my cousin, must go to Ethelred or Eadmund and +warn them, and make them rouse, and raise and have ready the +mightiest levy that they have ever led, for I think that all +Denmark and Norway have sent their best to follow Cnut. We will +ride together to Maldon, for the men shall follow me and find the +ships with their cables up-and-down waiting for them, and you must +hasten, for no time must be lost."</p> +<p>So it came to pass that my dream of finding Hertha passed from +me, and the thought of war filled my mind again, for next morning +we rode away southward along the Roman road, and the cheers of the +villagers died away behind me and were forgotten.</p> +<p>Then I left Olaf where the road turns off to Maldon, to meet him +again in London before many days, and I and my fifty men rode on. +For Olaf would have me go as befitted his kinsman, and a word to +the Colchester elders had found me the well-armed and mounted +Anglian warriors who joined us after we reached the great road.</p> +<p>But when I came to London my journey was not at an end. Ethelred +the king was at Corsham, in Wiltshire, and sorely sick as was said, +and Eadmund was at Stamford. Now when I heard that I wondered, and +asked the Sheriff, at whose house I was made most welcome, how this +was.</p> +<p>Eadmund had been with his father, and had gone to Malmsbury, and +there had seen the Lady Algitha, the widow of Earl Sigeferth whom +Edric Streone slew, and had married her, and now had gone to take +over the Five Boroughs for himself. That was good hearing, maybe, +for Olaf had feared that Streone would have taken them.</p> +<p>But next I found that this marriage was sorely against the +king's will, and that he and Eadmund had parted in anger therefore. +I seemed then to see the hand of Streone in this quarrel, for all +men knew that he slew the earls to gain the Five Boroughs for his +own.</p> +<p>Then I thought that to go so far into Wessex to seek the sick +king would be but lost time. I had better go to Stamford and seek +the Atheling, and maybe it would be as well that he was free to act +by himself, seeing that need was urgent. So I lay but one night in +London, and then rode away to Stamford along the great Ermin +Street, and there I found Eadmund and told him all that Olaf had +bidden me.</p> +<p>And when he had heard all, he said:</p> +<p>"Let me send for Edric Streone, my foster father, and we will +take counsel with him."</p> +<p>"Send round the war arrow first, my prince," I urged, "then when +the earl comes no time will be lost. He cannot but counsel you to +raise men instantly."</p> +<p>"Why," he said, "Cnut can but fall on the east coast. Utred is +in Northumbria to guard the Humber, and Ulfkytel guards the Wash, +and Olaf is in the Thames. They will drive away the Danes before +they set foot on the beach."</p> +<p>"They are still fighting the thingmen in the towns," I said. +"Northumbria and Anglia are Danish at heart yet."</p> +<p>Aye, and I might have added "Mercia also," but I knew not that +yet. Eadmund should have known it, though. It was but a few weeks +before it was plain that Wessex alone and London stood fast for +Ethelred.</p> +<p>I chafed, but Eadmund would not be hurried. I cannot tell what +strange blindness, save it was his trust in Streone, had fallen on +him at this time.</p> +<p>Then the earl came from Nottingham, and at the very first he +sent for me. Eadmund had told him my news when he sent for him.</p> +<p>I found him alone in a chamber of Eadmund's house--that which +had been Sigeferth's, and it seemed that no memory of the murdered +earl haunted him. His great form was as square and strong as ever, +and his grizzled brown beard was as bushy and well cared for as +when I used to see him and speak with him before the flight into +Normandy. And he still had the same pleasant voice and ways, even +to the little chuckle--as to himself--when he spoke, and the way he +had of gazing on the rafters rather than at the man to whom he was +talking.</p> +<p>"So, Redwald, my friend," he laughed, "you have turned viking as +it seems! How have you fared in East Anglia with Olaf the +Thick?"</p> +<p>"Well enough, lord earl," I said, "but there is work to be done +there yet."</p> +<p>"Aha! those thingmen are no babes," he said. "Where is your earl +now?"</p> +<p>"At Thetford, as they say."</p> +<p>"Well, what is this tale that you bring about Cnut?"</p> +<p>I told him, and he laughed in his way.</p> +<p>"Cnut is but a boy. No such great following would gather to +him," he said. "It is not possible."</p> +<p>"Eirik and Ulf and Thorkel the jarls may gather them for Cnut," +I answered. "And he is Swein's son."</p> +<p>"Those men are Cnut as yet, as one may say," answered Edric +chuckling. "One has to deal with them therefore. What says +Olaf?"</p> +<p>"He says the same, lord earl."</p> +<p>Then he turned sharply towards me, though he did not look at me, +and said:</p> +<p>"The king does not trust Olaf, I fear. He thinks that he might +be won over to Cnut's side."</p> +<p>"Ethelred our king should have no mistrust of the man who +brought him home," I said coldly, having no doubt who made the +first jealousy of Olaf.</p> +<p>"He should not, in truth," Edric answered. "But what if Cnut +offered Olaf the under-kingship of Norway, or Northumbria say, if +he would go over to his side?"</p> +<p>"He would not take it," I said.</p> +<p>"Have you ever heard him say as much?" asked Edric in a careless +way.</p> +<p>I was growing angry now, for this seemed beside the point.</p> +<p>"Such a thing has never been spoken of between us," I said.</p> +<p>"So. Then ask him the question one day, and see what his answer +is."</p> +<p>"I can answer it now," I said hotly; "he would refuse. Nor will +the offer ever be made."</p> +<p>"I am not so sure of that," said Edric. "Cnut needs help, and +will bid high for it. Nay, I know that it will be made. We have our +spies in Cnut's court, Redwald, and know more than you may think. +Tell him, therefore, only what I have said to you, and let me know +his answer by someone whom you can trust."</p> +<p>Then I rose up in my anger, and said:</p> +<p>"You ask me to spy on the king, lord earl, and I will not do +it."</p> +<p>"Nay, nay," he said. "I do but want to set our king's mind at +rest. I know what the honest viking's answer would be; he would be +as wroth as you. Only I would have sure word to send to +Ethelred."</p> +<p>Then I said, while Edric watched me sidelong:</p> +<p>"Olaf's force is small, and our levies, lord earl, should be +enough without his help, if they are raised in time. Our king may +be sure that Olaf has not sent me to raise England thus against +himself."</p> +<p>"Aye, I will tell Ethelred so. Our king is very sick, and a sick +man's fancies are many. So Olaf thinks that we should raise a great +levy at once."</p> +<p>Then he spoke of nought but that, and so earnestly that I +believed that the summons to the sheriffs would surely go out that +night. And he spoke of the help of the ships that Olaf had +gathered, praising him honestly, and not over much or too little, +so that I forgot his doubtful speeches, and thought that all was +well, and that his own levies were now gathering.</p> +<p>And so after an hour or more's talk he rose up and held out his +hand.</p> +<p>"Many thanks, Redwald, for your pains," he said taking mine. "I +think that Cnut and his jarls will have lost their journey through +your coming hither. The king shall not forget you when all is safe +again."</p> +<p>Who would not have been pleased with this? I went from Streone's +presence with a light heart, until I came to the great hall, and +there sat in the high place the Lady Algitha herself and her +maidens. Very beautiful she was, but very sad looking. And when I +crossed the floor before her I bowed, and she beckoned to me.</p> +<p>So I came near, and knelt on one knee before her.</p> +<p>"You are Redwald, Olaf's kinsman and messenger?" she asked.</p> +<p>"Yes, lady," I answered.</p> +<p>"I have heard of your coming. Have you spoken with the +earl--Streone?" she said, while a wrinkle crossed her fair forehead +as she named him.</p> +<p>"I have but just left him, lady."</p> +<p>She sunk her voice very low, and bent a little towards me.</p> +<p>"Were his words pleasant and fair spoken?" she said.</p> +<p>"They could not have been more so--at the last," I replied, the +memory of my anger coming back to me of a sudden.</p> +<p>"You crossed him once, then?"</p> +<p>"But a little; he crossed me rather," I said plainly.</p> +<p>"Wear your mail, Redwald," she said whisperingly. +"Farewell."</p> +<p>Then she was once more herself again, the lady whose hand I +might kiss reverently and look at afar. But in those few moments +she had been as a friend who warned me of a danger unforeseen. Even +thus had Edric Streone spoken with Sigeferth, fairly and +pleasantly.</p> +<p>I left the house, feeling uneasy therefore; but I could not +think that Edric would deem me worth crushing, and it seemed that +the lady would let her hatred of Edric go far.</p> +<p>They had given me lodging in the town across the river, where +there was a large guest house that had been made in the days of +OEthelfloed {<a name="Glyph11" href="#Note11" id="Glyph11">11</a>}, +the brave lady of the Mercians who won back the Five Boroughs from +the Danes. One could see the great fort she made rising from the +river banks over the whole town. No other thane was in guest +quarters there with me, and I and my men had the place to +ourselves. Nor was there anyone in Stamford at the time whom I +knew, apart from the people of Eadmund's household.</p> +<p>So I went along the street slowly enough, and presently I passed +a house where through the open window I saw a goldsmith working, +and I thought that he could do somewhat for me. I would have the +penny of St. Eadmund set in a gold band on the scabbard of sword +Foe's Bane, where I should see it continually. There was much gilt +silver work over all the scabbard from end to end--wrought by what +skilful artists in the Norseland, or how long ago, I cannot +tell--and there was a place among the other work where such a +fitting would go well.</p> +<p>But I had placed the coin in safety in the house, and I must go +and fetch it, and I passed on for the time. Then I loitered on the +bridge, for the old town and its grim earthworks looks very fair +thence, and so a thane sent from Eadmund caught me up and took me +back to the great house, for he had some word for me. It was near +sunset by this time.</p> +<p>"Redwald, my friend," the Atheling said, when I stood before +him, "I would have you go back to Olaf. You have done your errand +well, and your kinsman will want to have you with him. You will +fight for us no less well with him than here."</p> +<p>Now I could speak plainly with the Atheling ever, and I said, +being anxious to know more of Streone's meanings:</p> +<p>"I am glad that you tell me so, my prince, for Edric the earl +would have it that our king fears that Olaf's good faith may be +little."</p> +<p>"That is new to me," Eadmund said, frowning; "but, as you know, +my father and I have had little to say to each other of late."</p> +<p>"Then you doubt him not?" I asked.</p> +<p>"I would as soon doubt Edric himself," he said, "and him I trust +as I would trust myself."</p> +<p>"That is well," answered I. "For I feared that you also might +have been doubtful of Olaf."</p> +<p>"Why, what should the king think of Olaf but that he has been +his best friend?"</p> +<p>"The earl tells me that he has heard that Cnut will offer Olaf +some under-kingship if he will take his part," I said.</p> +<p>"I cannot tell how he has heard that," Eadmund said, and he +looked puzzled.</p> +<p>"By your spies in Cnut's court," said I.</p> +<p>"We have no spies there. I hate spying," the Atheling said. +"What means he?"</p> +<p>Then I saw that for some reason which was beyond me Streone had +let me know more than was safe. It was plain that if he spoke +truth, he had more dealings with Cnut than were known to the +Atheling. Yet the earl might, for Ethelred's sake, watch thus on +Cnut, rightly enough, and think it safer to say nought to Eadmund, +whose wisdom was not so great as his valour. It was a poor watch +enough though, I thought, if he knew the talk about Olaf and not +the plans for sailing, which should surely have been told him first +of all.</p> +<p>"Maybe he minded him of some old plan of Cnut's that he heard +when you were in Lindsey," I said, that being all that I could +imagine. "That were enough to return to the mind of our king in his +sickness, and trouble him."</p> +<p>"Aye, I think my father fears treachery from all men," the +Atheling answered. "But Olaf has done well for us both at the first +and now in sending word by you."</p> +<p>Then the sword I was wearing caught Eadmund's eyes, for he was +ever fond of goodly war gear.</p> +<p>"So--you have a new sword instead of that I gave you," he said. +"And I think you have made a good exchange. Let me see this."</p> +<p>"I broke the other blade strangely enough," I told him. "But +this was my father's sword, and it has come back to me."</p> +<p>Now I must tell him all about our great fight, and at the end he +said:</p> +<p>"I would that I had been there. It was a good fight." Then he +laughed, and added: "Now, I will say this, that Streone noted this +fine sword of yours, and wondered who had given it you, and +why."</p> +<p>"Did he think that Cnut had bribed me also?" I said. "Such a +sword as this is to a simple thane as much as a petty kingdom to +Olaf."</p> +<p>Then Eadmund spoke in the old tone of comradeship that we had +been wont to use in Normandy.</p> +<p>"On my word, I believe he did! But you have often spoken to me +of this sword, and you described it well. I think had I found it on +a Dane I should have claimed it for you. But I never thought you +would see it again."</p> +<p>"Would you have believed that I was bribed, my prince, had it +not chanced that you had heard of the sword from me beforetime?" I +asked, being bitterly hurt that the earl should have put this into +Eadmund's mind.</p> +<p>Did he want to make him doubt all his former friends?</p> +<p>"Not I, Redwald," the Atheling said. "Streone is over careful +for our safety, I think, and lets his love for us make him suspect +all men. I told him as much, and he said that perhaps it was so. +Then I said that Olaf had doubtless given you the weapon, and he +would have me ask you. He thought that you should not have lightly +set aside my gift."</p> +<p>Now I was sure that the earl strove to break Eadmund's +friendship with Olaf, for to anger me would help to do so. The next +thing would be to have me made away with, for that would turn Olaf +into a foe, and he would leave England maybe. I thought that the +earl would stand alone in Eadmund's counsels, and did not dream yet +that he was indeed working for Cnut in order to take the first +place in England as Thorkel did in Denmark. But that was plain +enough ere long, and all men know it now. At this time, however, +these matters puzzled me, and had it not been for the slaying of +Sigeferth and Morcar and one or two others, maybe I should have +thought little of danger to myself. It was only as Olaf's kinsman +that I was worth a thought of the man whose deep statecraft I could +not pretend to understand.</p> +<p>So I said:</p> +<p>"The earl's life must be uneasy with all these doubts. But so +long as you yourself have none of King Olaf and myself, it is +little matter what he thinks. His doubts will be proved false in +time, and he will have fretted for nought."</p> +<p>"That is true," Eadmund answered. "I would that he troubled me +not with his suspicions."</p> +<p>So the matter passed, and we spoke for a little while of the +fleet and of Olaf's plans, and then I left him, saying that I would +ride back to London with the first light of morning.</p> +<p>"We shall have one good fight, and then peace," said Eadmund. +"Farewell, and trouble nought about my foster father and his ways +of doubting. He will doubt me next, maybe."</p> +<p>He laughed lightly, and I went away down the street with a +troubled mind, and was willing to get back to my lodgings through +the dusk as quickly as I might.</p> +<p>And when I came there I put on my mail, as the lady had bidden +me--rather blaming myself for doing so for all that, for it seemed +to show fear of somewhat that I could not name.</p> +<p>Then I thought of the goldsmith again, and sent a man for him, +thinking that he could do the work here in hall, so that I could be +sure of having the scabbard, which was very valuable, when I rode +away.</p> +<p>When he came I showed him what I would have done, and he said +that it was no long business, and took his tools into a corner and +lighted a wax taper and began to work by its light. The sword stood +by my chair as I ate my supper at the head of the long tables where +my men sat.</p> +<p>The goldsmith ended his work soon after the men had gone out to +the stables to tend their horses for the night, and only he and I +and my headman Thrand were left in the hall. He had put a flat band +of chased gold round the scabbard, and the silver penny showed +through a round setting that was in it.</p> +<p>I gave him one of the gold pieces that Earl Wulfnoth had taken +from the treasure for me, and the man weighed it, wondering at its +weight and fineness. Then he said that he was overpaid, and must +give me money for the overweight, and asked that one should go back +to his house with him and return with it.</p> +<p>"There were men lurking in the porches and on the bridge," he +said, "when I came down here. I suppose there will be a fray when +they meet the men they wait for, so I fear to go back alone. A +goldsmith is ever fair prey."</p> +<p>Then came a knocking on the door, and my man went to see what +was wanted. Then one said to him:</p> +<p>"Edric the earl bids Redwald the thane to speak with him at his +house before he sleeps."</p> +<p>Now the goldsmith stood where he could see the long streak of +light that shone from the door across the street, and he said to me +in a low voice:</p> +<p>"There are a dozen armed men outside, lord."</p> +<p>Thrand turned round to tell me this message, and as he did so +Streone's messenger pushed by him into the hail, rudely enough.</p> +<p>"To the stables and call my men," I whispered to the goldsmith, +pointing to the door which led thither, and he went out slowly, not +knowing why I sent him.</p> +<p>"Where is Redwald, Olaf's man?" the newcomer said, and his tone +was so rough that at the uncivil words I glanced at him sharply and +made no answer. He was fully armed, I saw.</p> +<p>But my follower would not bear this.</p> +<p>"Yonder is Redwald the thane," he said; "mind how you speak, +man."</p> +<p>"Thane or not, I have come to take him to Edric the earl," was +the answer.</p> +<p>"Ho, thane! hear you the earl's message?"</p> +<p>Now when this began, I had taken up the scabbard with my right +hand and was looking at the work, and the sword was in my left, +hidden by my cloak as it fell to my side. I suppose the earl's +housecarle thought I was unarmed.</p> +<p>"I am Redwald," I said, putting the scabbard on the table, and +so leaving my right hand free. "I hear an uncivilly-given message +enough. And I think the earl has not sent for me in such terms as +those."</p> +<p>The man raised his hand a little and made a sign, and I heard +the quick steps of men crossing the street with clatter of steel. +Then I knew that Edric had sent for me, dead or alive.</p> +<p>"Come you must," the man said.</p> +<p>"What if I will not?" I answered.</p> +<p>"I will make you," he said, and with that he smote Thrand fairly +in the face and felled him, hitting squarely from his left +shoulder, and then his sword was out and he made one step towards +me.</p> +<p>Quick as thought I grasped the hilt of my sword, and smote +upwards with it as I drew it from under the fold of my cloak. There +is no stopping that stroke, and the man leapt back from it as it +seemed, but the blade smote him beneath the chin, and so far as he +was concerned Edric's message had come to naught. He would never +draw sword on any man again. Nor do I think he would have been thus +bold had he not thought me unarmed.</p> +<p>Then at the same moment my man was up, cursing, and the doorway +to the street was full of Edric's men, and some of mine were coming +leisurely through the other.</p> +<p>The crash of the falling man woke my people into life, and they +ran to their spears, which were piled along the walls, and the +earl's men faltered on the threshold, for they liked not the look +of sword Foe's Bane, maybe. Then my man Thrand ran at the great +door, which opened inward, and swung it to in the faces of Edric's +men, and barred it. I heard them give a howl of rage as he did so, +for one or two of them were flung backward into the street, so +suddenly and strongly did he fling it against them in his rage.</p> +<p>Then we looked at one another, and at the dead man on the floor, +in silence. I was the only one of all who knew what this message +brought by armed men from Streone might mean. And all had happened +so suddenly, from the time that the man had told me that I must +come, and had drawn sword on me, to when the door slammed, that +there had been no time for thought or wonder even.</p> +<p>I took up the scabbard and buckled it on, and sheathed the +sword, and said:</p> +<p>"We shall hear more of this, men. Stamford town is no place for +us now."</p> +<p>"What is all this, lord?" asked the leader, who stood with his +back against the door still.</p> +<p>"Edric the earl has another business on hand like that of Earls +Sigeferth and Morcar," I said. Whereat the men growled +fiercely.</p> +<p>The goldsmith came in with the last of my men, and heard me say +this, and now looked in the face of him whom I had slain.</p> +<p>"This is the man who brought the like message to our earls," he +said. "I was at Oxford, and saw him come. And the street then was +full of armed men, as is ours tonight. Better go hence, lord, else +you will be burnt out, as our men were when they went to avenge our +lords' deaths, and were driven into St. Frideswide's Church."</p> +<p>Now it seemed to me also that we had better hasten, or we should +have a strong force down on us. Then if we fought, Edric would have +occasion against me, and if not, I was lost.</p> +<p>"To horse, men!" I said. "We will go to Peterborough for this +night. Abbot Elfric is my friend, and will give us shelter."</p> +<p>"Let us take the road for London rather, and get back to Olaf +the king," said the headman. "The horses are fresh, and we can ride +far, and the nights are warm if we must lie out."</p> +<p>"We will speak of that outside the town," I answered. "To horse +at once, and silently, or they will take warning and bring more +men."</p> +<p>They ran out, leaving a dozen with me. Edric's men were yet in +the street, and now they drew near the door, listening as I +thought.</p> +<p>"How shall you escape?" I said to the goldsmith.</p> +<p>"Out of the back way, lord, and up the meadows to the ford if +the ferryman is asleep. But I must go before the house is +beset."</p> +<p>"Keep the gold for your service," I said, "for I think that the +silver penny has saved me."</p> +<p>So he thanked me, and crept away easily enough. I suppose that +Edric's men had no orders that had made provision for trouble with +me of this sort, and that they hardly knew what had happened. But +it was likely that they would send word to Edric directly, when +they began to be sure that something had gone amiss. They tried the +door again, but without much heart. My men wanted to throw it open +and charge out on them, but I would not suffer it. So long as they +loitered outside we had time to get away. Then some of them tried +the gate of the courtyard behind the house, but the men had barred +that after the goldsmith had gone out. And all the while the horses +were being saddled silently, and they would be ready in a few +minutes.</p> +<p>The earl's men spoke now outside the door, and I could hear what +they said.</p> +<p>"Let us break in and see what has befallen Godric."</p> +<p>"Nay, the hall is full of men now. Let us go back."</p> +<p>"It was Godric's own fault. He had no reason to smite the +porter, who stayed him not."</p> +<p>Then I thought that the men knew not what their errand was, and +were to take orders from the slain man. Thus there would be no +fighting in the street when we came out.</p> +<p>So it was, for when the horses were ready, the stablemen of the +house threw open the great gates of the courtyard, which was beside +the house, as it happened, and we rode out quietly, but with +weapons ready, and they did but shrink together and stare when they +saw us. There were about thirty of them in all.</p> +<p>Now I would not give Edric any reason to blame me to Eadmund, +and so I wheeled my men to the right, away from the bridge and +along the great road towards London, and letting them go on slowly, +I called to a man who stood foremost.</p> +<p>"This is a sorry business," I said; "but your leader had no +right to smite my man, and one waxes hasty when a man behaves thus. +He was an unmannerly messenger."</p> +<p>"Aye, lord, he was," the men said.</p> +<p>"Well, then, tell your earl that I have even now left the town, +and that being ready to do so I came not with you; and say how it +was that this man was slain, and that I am sorry therefor."</p> +<p>"We will tell him," they said.</p> +<p>So I spurred my horse and rode after my company, knowing that it +would be hard for Edric to know the rights of the matter. The men +would certainly not wonder at the slaying of Godric, seeing how he +had behaved. I thought that Eadmund would never hear of this.</p> +<p>I believe that I escaped very narrowly, and also that the silver +penny was the cause thereof. For, first of all, it had been likely +that Eadmund's messenger would not have found me so easily had I +gone elsewhere than back to get it, and so I should have been +belated and attacked in the street by these men. And next, the +goldsmith warned me that the armed men waited outside. And then it +was certain that Godric, the earl's man, would have cut me down +before I could have drawn sword, had I not already held the weapon +unsheathed. And that was because I looked on the penny and its +setting before belting on the scabbard.</p> +<p>Now I thought, when we were fairly on the road, that we would go +to Peterborough, to my good friend the Abbot Elfric, for I would +fain tell him all this, thinking that he might warn Eadmund of +Streone to more effect than could I. And inside the abbey walls +would be a safe place for the night. It was not so certain that we +should not be pursued, and so we went quickly, the horses rejoicing +in the road after their idleness, for we had been three weeks in +Stamford, waiting for the earl.</p> +<p>So we rode till we came to Castor, the old Roman town, and +stayed not there, but went to the ford over the Nene at Water +Newton, the road beyond the river being better than that on this +side. It is not an easy ford, for a horseman has to turn downstream +when nearly over, else he is over head and ears before he knows. +One of my men had known somewhat of the place, and was going +through first, but as his horse shied a little at the sparkling +water and he was urging it in, a man rode fast down the opposite +bank, and into the river, coming over to us. I heard his horse +snorting, as if out of breath.</p> +<p>"Watch how he comes," I said to my man.</p> +<p>But there was little use in that, for he went to ride straight +through, and next moment his horse was swimming, and he was crying +for help, being bewildered, for the river was full and current +strong.</p> +<p>Now, I was used to swimming my horse in our Stour fords, which +are often very deep in autumn and winter, and so I rode in and +grasped his horse's bridle, and told him to take heart, and so +fetched him to our side.</p> +<p>"Give me a fresh mount, in the king's name," he said, for his +horse was spent.</p> +<p>"Little thanks is that," said I. "What is the hurry?"</p> +<p>"I am sent with all speed to Redwald the thane, at Stamford, +with word for Eadmund the Atheling."</p> +<p>"I am Redwald," I said. "Who sent you?"</p> +<p>"Olaf the king. Show me your sword, master."</p> +<p>I held out the hilt of my sword, for that was a token which a +messenger should give and receive that Olaf and I had agreed +on.</p> +<p>"Cnut the Dane has landed at Sandwich," the man said. "Eight +hundred ships he has, and men more than I can count. The Kentish +men have risen, and Olaf is with them; but he has not, and cannot +have enough men to stay the Dane. There must be a levy of all +England."</p> +<p>Then I was almost beside myself with rage, and could have wept, +for the levy that should have been waiting for this had not even +had a summons. And from the bottom of my heart I blamed Edric +Streone for all the woe that I saw must come on England.</p> +<p>There was but one thing for me to do, and that was to go back to +Stamford and see the Atheling. He would see me at midnight when no +one else dared wake him, maybe, for he would know that I had heavy +matters to speak of if I thus summoned him. The messenger would +have to wait till morning, and could but give his message. I could +reason with the Atheling, while this messenger would fall into +Streone's hands. And that I knew now was the worst that could +befall.</p> +<p>"Give the man a fresh horse," I said. "I must go back with +him."</p> +<p>"Not so, lord," the men said. "You will be waylaid."</p> +<p>"I think my luck will serve me," I answered. "Do you find some +barn at Chesterton over the water, and leave two or three men to +watch for my coming. Thrand and Guthorm may come with me."</p> +<p>Then they grumbled at my running into danger, but I would be +obeyed, though I must let them bide on this side of the ford.</p> +<p>We were but seven miles from Stamford town, and we went back at +a hard gallop on the good turf alongside the paving of the Roman +way. It was in my mind to see Eadmund and leave him at once, before +Streone knew that any man had come into the town, if I could.</p> +<p>The bridge was barred, and the gates were too high to be leapt; +but the guards were sleepy, and would not let me through, until I +bade them open in the king's name. Then they did so, and we rode +clattering up the street to the great hall.</p> +<p>There was bustle enough when I beat on the courtyard gates, for +the place was stockaded, and there was a strong guard inside. +Presently they opened the wicket, and the captain looked out +angrily enough.</p> +<p>He began to rate us, but I cut him short.</p> +<p>"I am Redwald," I said, "and I must see the Atheling without +delay."</p> +<p>The officer knew me well enough then, and let us in.</p> +<p>"You cannot see the Atheling, thane," he said. "It is as much as +my life is worth to disturb him."</p> +<p>"I will do it myself, then," I said. "Take me into the +house."</p> +<p>"What is amiss?" he asked, hesitating. "Is the king dead?"</p> +<p>"Nay, worse than that," I answered shortly, and the officer +stared at me in horror.</p> +<p>"Oh, fool!" I said; "Cnut is landed, and it is Eadmund only who +can save our land. Let me to him."</p> +<p>The warrior clutched his sword hilt with a sort of groan, and +turned and took me into the house without a word. We went across +the great hall, where the housecarles slept around the walls, sword +under pillow, and spear at side. They raised their heads when their +captain spoke the watchword, and looked at me curiously, but did +not stir more than enough for that. They were not bidden.</p> +<p>We crossed a room where a few young thanes' sons slept, as I had +slept before the king's door when I was first at court, and these +leapt up, sword in hand.</p> +<p>"What will you?" one said in a low voice, setting his back +against the door.</p> +<p>"I must see Eadmund, our atheling, on king's business," I said +gently, remembering how I should have felt when on the same duty, +if one had come thus.</p> +<p>"He may not be waked," the boy said.</p> +<p>Then I spoke loudly, so as to end the business without troubling +these faithful guards.</p> +<p>"I am Redwald of Bures. I think that Eadmund will see me."</p> +<p>"Hush! hush! thane," the boy said.</p> +<p>But there was no need to say more, for the long camp life had +sharpened Eadmund's ears to aught unusual. Now I heard the bar of +the door thrown down, and Eadmund came out with a cloak round him +and his sheathed sword in his left hand.</p> +<p>"Redwald--friend--what is it?" he said.</p> +<p>"Even what we have feared, my prince," I answered, looking at +him.</p> +<p>"Where has the blow fallen?"</p> +<p>"At Sandwich. Olaf is there, and the Kentishmen have risen. His +word is that he has not enough men."</p> +<p>"Surely Kent and London and Olaf--" he said.</p> +<p>"Eight hundred ships lie in Ebbsfleet. A ship may hold a hundred +or but twenty men--not less."</p> +<p>Then Eadmund made a sign to his people, and they went out and +left us together, and we looked on one another.</p> +<p>"Let me send for the earl," he said; but I put my hand on his +arm.</p> +<p>"You are enough, my prince. But for sending for him your levies +would be here, and we should march together even now to +London."</p> +<p>He groaned.</p> +<p>"You are right, and I am a fool," he said.</p> +<p>"Wait for the earl no longer," I urged; "raise your own levy, +and bid him follow you or the king as he will. There must be a +raising of all England. Send to the king tonight."</p> +<p>"What will Cnut do?" he asked me.</p> +<p>"Olaf thought that if he landed in Kent he would make for London +and besiege it. If so, you have time yet."</p> +<p>"There shall be no delay. Bide here and help me."</p> +<p>"I cannot," I said, and told him plainly of Edric's message to +me, and the way in which it was sent; and I ended: "Let me go to +Olaf, therefore, and take word from you that you come in haste. The +earl doubts me yet."</p> +<p>"I do not understand it," Eadmund said, "but it must be so. Go +back and tell Olaf to hold Cnut under London walls, and I will be +there in a day before he expects, gathering forces as I come."</p> +<p>I kissed his hand and went, and as I did so I heard him bid his +followers arm him. So I knew that he was roused, and that if he +were himself all might yet be well.</p> +<p>Then I got to horse, and I and my two men rode down the street +as fast as we had come. No man was about, and the bridge gates +swung open for us.</p> +<p>"They are in a hurry to get rid of us," said Thrand, as we went +through and passed the last houses of the town beyond the +river.</p> +<p>Then the road lay white in the moonbeams before us until it ran +among the trees of the first woodland, and there in the black +shadow was a sparkle as of armour in the shafts of light that came +through the leaves into the over-arched hollow of the track.</p> +<p>If any man was there he could see us clearly, though we could +not well see him, for we were in full brightness.</p> +<p>Then Guthorm spoke, peering under his hand.</p> +<p>"Four men across the road, lord--horsemen standing still."</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"If they are friends they will stand aside for us. If not, they +will expect us to halt and argue matters with them. Any way, they +have no right to the whole road, even if they mean us no harm. Ride +on steadily, one on either side of me, and when we are twenty paces +from them, if they yet bar our way, spur your horses and we will +clear the road."</p> +<p>"Swords out, master?" said Thrand.</p> +<p>"No, spear butts ready; maybe they are friends. But I am in a +hurry."</p> +<p>So we rode over those four men, and I fear they were hurt, for +we left two rolling horse and two men in the road. Nor did I ever +know if they were Edric's men or not. Howbeit, their swords were +drawn, and so I think we were not wrong in what we did, though the +Colchester men smote hard, and my spear shaft was badly sprung over +a helm.</p> +<p>After that we did not draw rein till we came to our comrades, +and they were halfway back to Stamford looking for me. Then we took +the road to London, for we would not tarry now at Peterborough.</p> +<p>Maybe my story would have had a different end had I gone +there--but it was not to be. Yet, though I knew it not, I was close +to Hertha at that time.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch10" id="Ch10">Chapter 10</a>: The Flight From +London.</h2> +<p>I came back to Olaf while he gathered his ships in the Pool +below London Bridge, and I found him ill at ease and angry with +Ethelred and Eadmund, and when I told him all, most angry with +Streone.</p> +<p>"Now you must stay with me, cousin, for that man will have you +slain if he can. There is no doubt that he works for Cnut. And this +word of his about a bribe for me is not his own invention; he has +been told to make it."</p> +<p>Then he told me of the vast host that had poured into Kent. It +was the greatest host that had ever landed on English +shores--greater even than had been ours when we Angles left our old +home a desert, and came over to this new land and took it. Olaf and +the Kentish levies had fought and had been driven back, and now day +by day we looked to see Cnut's armies before London, and also for +the coming of Eadmund with his men. But neither came, for the +Mercian levies would not fight unless the king himself headed them, +and Cnut passed through Surrey into Wessex and none could withstand +him.</p> +<p>Aye, they fought him. Wessex is covered with nameless +battlefields; but ere long half of Cnut's fleet was sent round to +the Severn, and Ethelred, sick and despairing, came back to London +with but a few men.</p> +<p>It angers me even to think of what befell after that. Eadmund +and Streone gathered each a good force, and came together within +touch of Cnut. And then on the eve of battle, Edric made known his +plan to his Mercian thanes, and that was nothing more nor less than +that they should go over bodily to Cnut when the fight began. Which +treachery so wrought on the honest Mercians that they would fight +not at all, and so disbanded in sight of the enemy, leaving Eadmund +with but enough men to make good his retreat. And Cnut was master +of all the land from Kent to Severn shores, Ethelred's own country. +So Edric Streone went over to Cnut, and with him many thanes who +despaired of help from Ethelred, and chose rather peace under a +king who was strong enough to give it them. And one night forty of +the English ships slipped away from us down the tide and joined the +Danes at Sandwich. The men had been bribed by Streone, as we +found.</p> +<p>Almost then did Olaf make up his mind to leave England, but he +pitied Ethelred, who turned to him again in this new trouble, and +he did not go.</p> +<p>"But my men will not bide patiently much longer," he told me; +"here is neither honour nor gold to be won, and I need them for my +going to Norway when the time comes."</p> +<p>For every day Olaf looked for some sign that should bid him go +back and take his own land from Cnut's hand.</p> +<p>Now Ethelred would not stir from London, fearing treachery +everywhere. And again Eadmund's levies melted away for want of +their king's presence, and at last we persuaded him to meet Eadmund +at Coventry, and I went with him. There was a good levy that would +have followed him, but some breath of suspicion came over him, and +suddenly he left them and fled back to London and the citizens, +whom he trusted alone of all England. And he would not suffer me to +bide with Eadmund, but I must go back with him. So the levies +melted, and Eadmund went north to Earl Utred of Northumbria for +help.</p> +<p>Then when the winter wore away, and April came in calm and +bright, the most awesome thing befell England that had been yet. +For in the north Eadmund and Utred marched across the country, +laying waste all as they went, lest the north should rise for Cnut; +and going east as they went west, Cnut ravaged and burnt all the +southern midlands. Then rose the wail of all England, for friend +and foe alike had turned on her, and her case was at its hardest. +And from that time forwards I know that none who chose Cnut for +king should be blamed.</p> +<p>Then Cnut fell on York, and Utred of Northumbria, whose wife was +Danish, submitted to him, and was slain by Streone's advice, as men +say, though some say that he was slain by Thorkel the Jarl when he +took the ships that tried to escape from the Humber. It may be +thus. The shipmen fought well, and were all slain--sixty ships' +crews.</p> +<p>Now all England was open to Cnut, and Eirik the jarl fell on +Norwich and drove Ulfkytel back on us, and from him we heard of +this trouble.</p> +<p>On the eve of St. George's day, Ethelred sent for me to his +chamber, for he would speak with me. I found him sitting in a great +chair before the fire, wrapped in furs, though the day was warm and +sunny, and he was very feeble, so that his thin hands had little +strength in them. The queen, Emma, was with him, looking young and +handsome as ever, and in the light of a narrow window sat Eadward +the Atheling, the sunshine falling on his strange white hair and on +the pages of a great book over which he pored. He just lifted his +pale eyes from his reading as I went in and saw who it was, and +smiled pleasantly at me, and then turned to his book again. I +thought that the troubles of the time passed lightly on the proud +lady and the boy, whose learning was all that she cared for.</p> +<p>"Come near, Redwald, my son," the king said, in his voice that +had grown so faint of late. "I have a charge to lay on you."</p> +<p>I went and knelt by him, and he put his hand on my shoulder, and +the tears came to my eyes at the kindly touch, for it was the same +as, and yet so unlike, that which had been a promise of friendship +to me at the first time that I saw him.</p> +<p>"All things are slipping from me, Redwald," the king said; "nor +is there aught that I grieve to lay down when the day comes on +which I must pass through the gate of death. Crown and sceptre have +been heavy burdens to me, for with them has been the weight of the +sword also. I have borne those ill, and used that cruelly. I am the +Unredy; but I have listened to ill counsels, having none of my own, +nor wit to see what was best."</p> +<p>He ceased for faintness, and my heart ached to hear him speak +thus to me, his servant. But Emma the queen turned half away from +him, her face growing hard and scornful as she heard. Then Eadward +set his book down gently, and, looking sadly at his mother, came +and stood over against me at the other side of the king, and took +his wan hand and said:</p> +<p>"There are laws which you have made, my father, which will live +in the hearts of men alongside those that Eadgar made--our best. +There will not be all blame to you in the days to come, when men +see clearly how things have gone with you."</p> +<p>Thereat Ethelred smiled faintly, and he answered:</p> +<p>"I pray that it may be so. But the good outweighs not the evil. +I may not count the one--I must confess the other."</p> +<p>He passed into thought, looking into the fire, and we were still +beside him. The queen moved away to the seat where Eadward had been +sitting and took his place, staring out of the window with unseeing +eyes. And I was glad that she was no longer beside us.</p> +<p>Presently the king raised his head and turned it a little +towards me.</p> +<p>"Redwald," he said, "you were our companion in Normandy, and you +are a trusted friend of ours. It will not be long before the queen +must fly to her brother--the good duke--again, and it is in my mind +that her flight will be perilous. When that time comes, let it be +your place to see her safely thither, with the athelings, her sons. +It may be that Olaf will help you, but that you must see to as best +you can. And I have sent for Abbot Elfric to help you."</p> +<p>"Lord king," I said, "what I can I will do, but I think there +are men better fitted than I to guard our queen."</p> +<p>"None whom we trust more fully," the king said.</p> +<p>"See, my queen, this is he to whom you must look for furtherance +of your journey."</p> +<p>Then Emma turned from the window, and her face was still +unmoved.</p> +<p>"I can trust Redwald," she said. "It will be well."</p> +<p>But Eadward wept openly, for he knew that the king spoke of the +day when he should die.</p> +<p>"That is well," the king said, and leaned back on his pillows. +"Now have I no care left. Yet it is hard to put so heavy a burden +on your young shoulders, my thane."</p> +<p>"It is an honour rather," I answered. "May I be worthy +thereof."</p> +<p>Then a brightness came over the king's face, and he answered me +slowly and plainly, and with great joy, as it were.</p> +<p>"Presently I shall meet with Eadmund, your martyred king, and to +him I will say that his thane of Bures is worthy."</p> +<p>"Forget me not also, my father, when you come to that place," +Eadward said.</p> +<p>"I will not forget. Now is given me to see plainly what shall be +in the time to come--to what all tends even now. For now in the +time of my death comes to me rede unearthly, as I think. There must +be a strong hand who shall weld England into one--who shall bid our +land forget that difference has ever been betwixt Angle and Saxon, +Jute and Northumbrian, Mercian and Wessexman, Saxon and English and +Dane. And when that wonder is wrought, then shall come peace and a +new life to the land, under one who will give them the laws that +they need to bind them into one English race, strong and honest, +and patient in all things."</p> +<p>Then said Eadward, as the king ceased:</p> +<p>"That is what those who love England would most hope for."</p> +<p>But his voice was hushed, as in the presence of one who sees +beyond this earth.</p> +<p>Thereat the king looked on him, and said:</p> +<p>"Have patience, my son, and you shall see it; aye, and you shall +have part and share therein."</p> +<p>After that he spoke no more, and for a time we waited beside +him. Soon he seemed to sleep, and I rose at a sign from the queen +and left his chamber. Nor did I ever see Ethelred our king alive +again. For when the morning came he had laid his heavy burdens down +and had passed to the rest that he longed for. And the bells that +rang merrily for St. George's mass ceased, and the toll for the +dead went mournfully over the city.</p> +<p>"Eadmund is king, God help him," men said.</p> +<p>So it came to pass that even as they buried the king in the +great Church of St. Paul the Danish armies were closing round the +city, and when I went to Olaf to beg him to advise me concerning +the flight of the queen, he answered:</p> +<p>"You and I must part, my cousin. For you had better take ship +from some quiet port, and that on the southern coast, and so make +for Normandy. But I must see the citizens through this siege, and +then I will come to you at Rouen, and we will take counsel together +again."</p> +<p>He would bide no longer in England after this, for the doubt of +him that Eadmund would not listen to was strong in the minds of +others, and his presence was of little use. Only the London folk +and Ulfkytel loved him, knowing him well, and holding that they +owed him much. But none knew better than Earl Ulfkytel that Olaf +must not bide here longer.</p> +<p>Now our scouts kept coming in with news of Cnut, and at last I +could see by which road to fly with most chance of safety. I would +go by Winchester and so to Southampton and there take ship with the +queen. Cnut's fleet would be in the Thames ere long, if it barred +not the mouth already.</p> +<p>But Abbot Elfric had not come. We feared that he had fallen into +Danish hands, for it was hard to say where they were not. It seemed +that we must perforce leave London without him. Yet I would stay +till the last for his coming.</p> +<p>Now I must leave England, and I have said little about myself. +But when this duty was laid on me by the king, I thought more of my +lost quest of Hertha than I had done of late. For now I must leave +her in our poor land, where she must be hunted maybe from hiding to +biding, place to place, and in my heart grew up an unreasoning +anger against Ailwin and Gunnhild, who by their secrecy had kept me +from bringing her here with Olaf.</p> +<p>Then as I looked over this I became sure that they had seen +somewhat in me which their charge could not love, so that they +would keep me from her altogether. And I made up my mind to that at +last, not wondering that it was so, for I was but a warrior and a +landless thane with nought to be proud of but skilful weapon play, +and some scars to show that I had been in a fight or two where +blows were falling. And I minded how I had told Ailwin that I held +myself free, and thought that he and Gunnhild, and maybe Hertha +also, would have it so.</p> +<p>Yet I cared little for that, having heavier things to fill my +mind than thought for a maiden whose very looks I knew not now. At +least these two had taken Hertha into their charge, denying me any +part therein, and I could not blame them rightly. I had done my +best and could no more.</p> +<p>Then at the last moment Elfric came.</p> +<p>"Glad am I that you have not gone, my son," he said, as I +greeted him. "I have wandered many a long mile over crossroads to +escape the Danes. Very nearly did they have me once, but I escaped +them. That will be a pleasant tale beside Duke Richard's fire, +however. When must we go?"</p> +<p>"With nightfall, father," I said. "The horses are standing +almost ready even now. How many shall you need?"</p> +<p>"Myself, and my chaplain, and three sisters--five," he said, "if +you can take so many. These would fly with me and the queen."</p> +<p>I thought for a moment. The queen had Eadward and his brother +Alfred and five maidens with her, and there were the pack horses +and the servants. But two of the maidens were unwilling to go, +being daughters of London thanes. Our court was very small in these +days. So, as every woman added to our company was a source of +weakness, in that our pace must be that of the least able to bear +fatigue, I doubted until I thought that the queen might let the +sisters take the places of the maidens who cared not to fly with +her.</p> +<p>I went and asked her this, and she flushed with wounded pride, +though I gave her my reasons and urged her peril.</p> +<p>"How shall it be told that Emma of Normandy was beholden to a +nunnery for her handmaidens?" she said.</p> +<p>"It shall not be told, my queen," I said stoutly. "Men shall say +that you gave protection to the holy women."</p> +<p>Truly my wits were sharpened by sore need, for at once the queen +agreed to this. She loved power, and even this little use thereof +pleased her.</p> +<p>"When can we go?" she asked. "I long to see my own land +again."</p> +<p>"At nightfall, in two hours' time," I told her.</p> +<p>"It is well. Be ready then," she said.</p> +<p>She had persuaded herself, as I believe, that she arranged all +things, and I was glad to have it so, for I had feared that I +should have had trouble more than enough with her unreasoning +pride.</p> +<p>So I told Elfric that his nuns could go, and he thanked me, +laughing a little, with some thought of their journey here as I +thought, and he added:</p> +<p>"Aye, their dress protects them a little. It is not as in the +old days of heathen against Christian. There is this to be said for +Cnut, that he will have no monastery or nunnery harried if his +orders are carried out."</p> +<p>Then a thought came to me, and I wished that I could persuade +our queen to take on herself and her maidens the convent dress. She +would not be the first royal lady of England who had worn it. And I +asked Elfric to persuade her to do so, for Emma's great failing was +love of queenship.</p> +<p>"If I know aught of our queen," he said, "she wants to ride in +state."</p> +<p>"She does," I answered. "I think, father, that we have a +troublous journey before us. She will not believe but that she may +ride as ever through the land."</p> +<p>"You plan and I will argue," the good man said, being ever light +hearted.</p> +<p>So he went to the queen and spoke long with her, but she would +in no wise ride out of London but as a queen, even as she had told +me more than once. There was nothing against that but that word +might go to the Danish leaders that she was leaving the city. +Still, if we could get her to disguise herself thus when our guards +left us it might be as well. The Danes, did they seek her, would +look for a larger party than ours, and would pay no heed to us, +perhaps.</p> +<p>Now Olaf and my Colchester spearmen would be our guards even to +the Surrey hills, for beyond them was not much fear of the Danes, +who were advancing from Mercia, northward of the Thames. Only in +the towns were garrisons whom we must fear, for they sent out +parties to raid the land for provender and plunder and to keep the +poor folk from rising on them.</p> +<p>So it was my plan, and it seemed good to Elfric, to travel as a +little party only. So could we more easily escape notice, and take +the byways, while an armed force, however small, would draw on us +the notice of the Danes whose duty it was to watch against any +gathering of English warriors.</p> +<p>We started that night as soon as dark came on, and the queen was +pleased with the guard around her, and that Olaf the king himself +rode at her side. Men cheered him as we passed along the streets, +and the queen deemed that the cries were for her, and drew herself +up proud and disdainful as she sat on her white horse with spearmen +before and behind her, and her maidens on either side. But I doubt +if any man knew who she was in the dusk. And I had sent the pack +horses and servants on before us to wait our coming at a certain +place, so that none should be able to say that we were a party of +fugitives.</p> +<p>Presently the queen waxed silent, and Olaf and I could talk to +one another of what we would do in the time to come if this and +that happened. I told him that I should certainly return to fight +at Eadmund's side, for the queen would not keep me in Rouen. When +he left London it was his wish to seek me there, and so we looked +to see one another again before very long.</p> +<p>"Then it is farewell, my cousin," he said, when at last we came +to Banstead, for he would not leave us sooner. "We have had a good +fight or two together, and may have more, and to more profit, as I +hope, in the days to come."</p> +<p>We halted at the monastery and prayed for shelter there for the +night, or at least what was left of it, and while Elfric spoke with +the superior of the nuns who were there, I took leave thus of Olaf +and of my spearmen. And these prayed me to return soon and lead +them again. That I promised them, and so the darkness closed +between us as they rode away, and I was left sad at heart enough, +for Olaf was as a brother to me, and I knew not when I should meet +with him again.</p> +<p>There was no talk of Danes at this quiet place over which the +wave of war had gone already, leaving it poorer, but in peace; and +it was not until the next afternoon that we rode out again, our +party being that which must see the long road over together.</p> +<p>Twelve of us there were. The queen and her two maidens and the +three nuns, Elfric the abbot and his chaplain, Eadward and Alfred +the athelings, and Alfred's tutor--who was a churchman of Elfric's +own monastery--and myself.</p> +<p>Then there were the servants, ten in all, who rode each leading +a lightly-laden pack horse. It was such a party as an abbot might +well travel with, and that is all that would be said of us if the +Danish riders asked aught of the roadside folk. I and Eadward alone +were armed as the abbot's housecarles. The men bore but spear and +seax, as would any wayfarer for fear of robbers and the like.</p> +<p>Now, when all was ready in the courtyard, and we waited for the +queen, she stood on the threshold before I knew her, for the nuns +of the place, taught by Elfric, had prayed her to take their dress +for the journey, and she had done so, as also had her two maidens. +They were as abbess and sisters therefore, and I thought that one +trouble was over--that is if our queen would but take the part of a +nun as well as the dress, and be guided by Elfric the abbot.</p> +<p>Thus our journey to the sea was begun. And of that journey I +might tell much, for it was a strange one. I think that the hardest +task that a man could have, must be to take a proud and headstrong +woman through a country full of danger, when she dislikes the +manner of journey. And when that woman is a queen, surely it is +harder yet. Had it not been for Elfric and Eadward I know not how +we should have fared, for at times Emma the queen would not speak +with me, if some plan that I must needs make was not to her liking. +And seeing that she knew nought of the meaning of either time or +distance, that was often enough. And when I heard of danger that +must be skirted she would tell me that none would dare molest the +queen--that she would declare herself and all would be well.</p> +<p>And seeing that of all hostages to Cnut the queen would be the +most valuable, that plan would be fatal. I will say this now, that +more than once I was obliged for very safety's sake to give wayside +folk, among whom we were, to understand that the abbess was crazed +through the long troubles, believing herself a queen.</p> +<p>And, alas for our land! it was but too easy for them to believe +it. Few there were who knew not some wretched ones crazed at that +time by all that had befallen them.</p> +<p>Well it was for us that the nights were clear and warm, and that +the good Surrey and Hampshire franklins' wives were compassionate +and hospitable. I could not now retrace our footsteps, for we could +go by no road at times, but must take to the woods and downs.</p> +<p>And ever when we did so the queen rode sullenly, and angry with +all around her, while Eadward and I and the two priests, who were +valiant men enough, were ahead, scenting danger everywhere, for we +had many a narrow escape of meeting raiding Danes. The stragglers +of that mighty host were everywhere. I think that had we fallen +into such hands I should have tried to send a man in all haste to +the nearest post of the thingmen, that we might be taken again by +warriors at least.</p> +<p>But the ladies bore the long journey well, and Elfric's nuns the +best. I had little to do with them, having so many cares about me, +and was glad enough to leave them in the closer charge of the abbot +and his priests. But soon I found that there was one of the three +nuns who was untiring and ever able to hearten the rest, and that +even the queen listened to her. The dress made all five of the +maidens seem alike at first, but in a few days the pleasant, +cheerful face of this one seemed familiar to me, and it was fair +enough for all the novice's garb she wore. I thought she minded me +of someone whom I knew, and at last, finding out a likeness as I +looked for one, I called her in my own mind Sister Sexberga, for +surely she was like that fair friend of mine. It never happened +that I heard her name, for I was ever forward and away from the +queen's complainings, and the nuns spoke little even to one +another.</p> +<p>Little rest and much care had I all the way thus. I will not +write it, but will go on to the time when we came safely in sight +of Winchester town. I could not enter it with my charges, but must +needs go by myself, for here I should learn more sure news than +anywhere. And what I might learn would decide whether I could take +ship in Southampton Water or turn eastwards a little and go to +Portsmouth or Bosham havens.</p> +<p>Now I knew that the Danes held the place in force, and so I told +the queen. But to pass by her royal city seemed more than she could +bear, and she wished and commanded us to ride in and call on her +citizens to rise and protect her.</p> +<p>"Queen of England I am and will be," she said. "I have borne +indignity long enough."</p> +<p>"My queen," I said, "if you see Winchester you will not see +Normandy."</p> +<p>Then Elfric spoke with her, and at last she wept, saying that +she was deserted, and the like, and so turned sullen, bidding us +give her up to the Danes, who would respect a queen in +distress.</p> +<p>Having seen this manner of submission to counsel not once or +twice before, I put on a franklin's dress, and gave sword Foe's +Bane into Eadward's keeping, and took a hunting spear instead, and +went down into the town, leaving my party ten miles away in a nook +of the wooded hills.</p> +<p>The scarlet-cloaked Danish thingmen at the gates paid no heed to +me, for it was market day, and many countryside people were going +in and out. So I went to the marketplace, and sat down on a bench +outside an inn with others and listened to all that I could, while +I drank my ale and ate as did the rest.</p> +<p>Some I talked with. There was little hatred of Cnut here, as I +found. There was some change, too, in the ways of the thingmen, for +it was not their plan here to make themselves hated and feared as +in East Anglia.</p> +<p>Then came a man whose face and walk were those of a seaman, and +he sat down close to me, and I pushed the ale mug towards him, and +we began to talk of his calling. He had come to Winchester to find +some merchant who needed a ship, as it seemed, and he began, as a +good sailor will, to praise his own vessel with little +encouragement.</p> +<p>I found out from him that Southampton Water was full of Danish +vessels, and so I asked where his own lay.</p> +<p>"In Bosham haven," he said. "Earl Wulfnoth will have no Danes in +his land. I must get some safe conduct from the Danish folk here if +I come into the Water. So being tired of doing nought I even rode +up to this place to see if aught could be managed for a +voyage."</p> +<p>Now I thought that I was in luck's way, for from this man, who +seemed honest enough, I could perhaps gain all I wanted. His ship +was a great buss, fitted with a cabin fore and aft under the raised +decks, and I could wish for no better chance than this might +be.</p> +<p>"Would you take passengers for Normandy instead of goods?" I +asked him carelessly.</p> +<p>"Aye, truly, and gladly if they could pay well."</p> +<p>"Now I will tell you that I am Earl Wulfnoth's friend," I said, +"and you may know that pay is safe, therefore. I was at Pevensea +when Olaf the Thick, the viking, came there."</p> +<p>He took my word for my friendship with the earl, and then I +arranged for all things to be ready for us in a week's time. We had +some rough country to cross before we came to Bosham, and I would +not hurry over it. We wrangled over the price a little, as was +fitting, for I would not seem too eager; but at last he said that +he would depart on the morrow, and we shook hands and were +satisfied.</p> +<p>"Speak not of this matter, friend Bertric," I said, "or we may +be waylaid by Danes off the haven's mouth."</p> +<p>"Little fear of that, master," he laughed. "Our young Earl +Godwine has beaten one or two ships already."</p> +<p>Then I went back light hearted to my people, and when the queen +heard what I had done her mood changed, and she was most gracious, +and thanked me, saying that she feared that I had run into danger +for her in going into the town. So I felt myself repaid in full for +the little trouble, that had been without risk as it fell out.</p> +<p>Very fair was the great Andred's-weald in the late April +weather, but the forest tracts were rough and the way seemed long. +Once we beat off, easily enough, some cowardly outlaws, but there +were no Danes in Andred's-weald, and we came to Bosham in +safety.</p> +<p>There Bertric's good ship was ready for us, and it happened that +no other vessels, save fishing craft, were in the haven. I had +looked to meet Godwine, my friend, but he and his ships were in +Dorchester water, and there were few to mark our coming into the +quiet town, or our going on board, which we did without delay.</p> +<p>We had no need of the stout housecarles, who had led the horses +and served us so well, so the queen, as I asked her, gave them the +horses as gifts in recompense for their journey, and so when they +had gone we were few indeed. But there was room for few passengers +in the buss. The queen and her ladies had the larger after cabin, +and Elfric and the athelings and the two priests had that under the +fore deck. I would remain on deck with Bertric and his crew of +twenty men, but there was no hardship in that.</p> +<p>That night on Bertric's ship was the first for three long weeks +that had sound sleep for me, for they hauled out into the middle of +the haven, and none could come near us unseen, and I was at last +free from care and watching.</p> +<p>But one thing troubled honest Bertric, and that was that he had +found a black kitten on board. None knew whence it came, and he +said it was an ill sign. And he dared do nought but treat it well, +since it had come.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch11" id="Ch11">Chapter 11</a>: The Taking Of The +Queen.</h2> +<p>When the early sunlight woke me, we were almost at the haven +mouth, and slipping past Selsea, with its gray pile of buildings, +on the first of the ebb tide. The wind was in the northeast, with a +springtime coldness in it, but it was fair for Normandy, and there +was no sea running under the land. We were well out at sea, +therefore, ere Elfric, almost as worn out as I, came from his close +quarters forward and stood by me, looking over the blue water of +the Channel to where the Isle of Wight loomed to the westward.</p> +<p>"Now I think that all is well, Redwald," the abbot said, "and +every mile from the English shore takes us further from +danger."</p> +<p>And so we stood and talked in the waist of the ship, and Eadward +came and joined us. The men ate their breakfast forward, and +brought us some, and the two churchmen came out with the little +atheling, and then Sister Sexberga, as I called her, came and +shivered in the cold breeze and spoke to Bertric, who was alone on +the after deck steering, and so went back to the cabin, where the +queen had all things needful for breaking her fast.</p> +<p>Then Bertric whistled sharply, and I looked up at him. He +pointed away to the eastward, and out to sea. There I saw far off +on the skyline the sails of two ships that grew larger as I watched +them.</p> +<p>I went to the break of the after deck and climbed up beside +him.</p> +<p>"Men say that two ships passed westwards tonight, master," he +said. "Here be two more heading over from the south."</p> +<p>"Can you tell what they are?" I asked him.</p> +<p>"Longships, as I think," he answered. "We shall know +betimes."</p> +<p>The vessels hove up quickly, for our great brown sail bore us +more or less across their course.</p> +<p>"It is safer to hold on, master," he said, "for to up helm and +fly would be to bring them after us if they are vikings. They will +see that we are not laden with cargo, and will not pay heed to us +therefore."</p> +<p>It was but half an hour after that when we knew that the two +ships were Danish war vessels, and that they were laying a fresh +course to overhaul us. Nor was there any chance of our escaping +them. They were thrice as fast as we.</p> +<p>Then I feared greatly, for I knew not what would happen. It +might be that they would let our party go on, finding them to all +seeming nought but church folk; but one could not tell, and I +feared. So also did Elfric when I went to him and told him what +these ships were, and that they were bearing down on us.</p> +<p>"We cannot fight," he said. "We must let things be as the Lord +will."</p> +<p>"If any roughness is shown to the womenfolk," I said, "there +will be one man who will fight."</p> +<p>"And will lose his life for naught," he answered. "If the worst +comes to the worst we must even do as the queen has bidden us +before now. We must proclaim her, and then we shall be safe from +harm, if captives to Cnut. Tell me, have you heard that he is cruel +to those he takes?"</p> +<p>"Rather I have heard that he is not," I said. "Moreover, if Emma +of Normandy suffers aught at his hands he will have the duke to +deal with very shortly."</p> +<p>"Now are we in the Lord's hands," said Elfric, for a hoarse hail +came from the leading ship, which was to windward of us. She was a +splendid dragonship, bright with gold and colour.</p> +<p>"What will you have me do, master?" Bertric cried to me.</p> +<p>"They can do what they will with us whatever we try. We may fare +better by obeying," I said, for in truth there was nought else to +do.</p> +<p>Now the great ship ranged up alongside of us, and the tall +warrior at the helmsman's side hailed us again to heave to. And I +saw a man bend his bow, and an arrow flew down the wind and stuck +in the deck not far from me. Whereon Bertric raised his arm in +answer and called to his men, and luffed while they lowered the +sail. The Dane at the same time struck sail, and got out some oars +in order to come alongside of us. There was no sea running that +would make this dangerous.</p> +<p>Then I went to the low door of the after cabin, and spoke to the +queen.</p> +<p>"Here is a ship that will come alongside ours," I said. "Fear +nought, but wait for my word."</p> +<p>And then a glint of bright colour caught my eyes, and I looked +more closely into the dark place; and there sat the queen no longer +as a humble abbess, but in her own dress, for she had cast off the +garb she hated, and she answered me:</p> +<p>"Who dares to stay the Queen of England on her passage?"</p> +<p>"Oh, madam," I said, "for pity's sake don the convent robe +again. I fear that the Danes are on us."</p> +<p>Then she cowered back into the shadow and said nought, for the +very word terrified her when she knew her foes were so near. But +Sister Sexberga came to the door, and she was pale enough, though +her face lacked no courage.</p> +<p>"What shall we do, Redwald--thane?" she said quickly.</p> +<p>"Keep a brave heart, sister," I answered, "and let me manage +all. I will bide before the door, and you will hear all I say. +Then, if I say that we have the Queen of England, let our mistress +come forward and disclose herself. But I hope they will let us go +free. Pray that it may be so."</p> +<p>Then the two ships jarred together, and I saw that the Dane was +well manned with armed warriors, and I also saw that their leader +was Egil Thorarinsson, whom I had captured and again lost at +Leavenheath fight. I will say that I was glad to see him, for I +knew him as a free-spoken warrior who loved fair play, and I +thought that he owed me a life, for I did not slay him when I +might.</p> +<p>They leapt on board--a dozen armed Danes with Egil at their +head--and there before them stood Elfric the abbot with his cross +in his hand, facing them alone. His priests were forward under +cover, praying doubtless, with the athelings. The great ship +sheered off again, and bided within half arrow shot of us, all her +rail crowded with men looking on.</p> +<p>"Neither gold nor goods have we," Elfric cried. "We are peaceful +folk who cross the seas. It is the part of a good warrior and +viking to let such go unharmed."</p> +<p>"Aye, so it is," answered Egil; "but, as it happens, we are +looking for certain peaceful folk."</p> +<p>"You will not harm us," said Elfric, who knew nought of our +queen's foolishness. "It is but a party of church people who go to +Normandy."</p> +<p>"Put the holy man aside," said Egil to his men. "We are not +heathens, and we will not hurt you, father."</p> +<p>So the warriors laughed, and went to draw Elfric away; but when +he saw that I stood before the cabin door, he stepped aside by +himself and watched what should befall. I had no mail on, and at +first they did not notice me. It was the first day that I had not +worn mail since we left London; but Foe's Bane was loose in the +scabbard, and ready in case of need.</p> +<p>"Ho, skipper!" Egil cried, "whom have you on board?"</p> +<p>"Yon priest and some more of his sort," Bertric said.</p> +<p>"We have lit on a crow's nest," a man said, laughing. "Where are +they, then?"</p> +<p>"In the fore peak, and aft here, deadly sick," said Bertric.</p> +<p>Then Egil's eyes lit on me, and he stared for a minute.</p> +<p>"Ho!" he cried, "here is no crow, but a stout warrior enough. +What do you here, Olaf's right-hand man?"</p> +<p>"Helping the crows over seas," I said, trying to meet his words +lightly, though my heart was heavy enough.</p> +<p>"Why then, friend," he said, "I must see these charges of yours. +Stand aside, and let me go into that cabin."</p> +<p>"Nay, Egil; they are but nuns here."</p> +<p>The honest warrior looked puzzled, but some of his men began to +crowd aft, being tired of the parley, and one tried to push me +aside, saying:</p> +<p>"Let us fetch them out, and waste no more words."</p> +<p>Whereon I sent him reeling against the gunwale, hands to face, +for I dealt with him even as Godric served my warrior at +Stamford.</p> +<p>Then I had my sword out, for it was time--and two men who drew +sword on me went down on the deck before me. Sword Foe's Bane smote +not amiss. Then was a ring of shouting Danes forming, and I felt +someone at my shoulder, and Egil cried out:</p> +<p>"Hold, men! the warrior is my man. Let me deal with him."</p> +<p>And there was Sister Sexberga beside me, with Bertric's sword, +that had hung over his berth, in her hand; and her eyes were +flashing, and it seemed to me that she had used a sword before +this, or had learnt its use. It was reddened now.</p> +<p>The men gave back, and Egil came before me and he was +laughing.</p> +<p>"That is enough, Redwald of Bures," he said. "I owe you a life, +and you have it. If all your charges are like that maiden we had +better begone. Little nunnery training is there about her sword +play."</p> +<p>Then the sister shrank back into the cabin, and the men stared +after her with a kind of awe, as at a Valkyrie of the old faith who +had come to my help. There was a man whom she had smitten who was +binding up a wound in his bare forearm. I believe that she stayed a +shrewd blow from me.</p> +<p>"Let us go, Egil," I said.</p> +<p>"Presently, maybe. But I seek someone, and must needs see your +people. No harm shall come to them."</p> +<p>Then I thought that all was well, and I turned to the door and +spoke:</p> +<p>"Lady abbess, you must needs come forward. I know this chief, +and you need fear nought."</p> +<p>I heard Sister Sexberga's voice speaking low and pleadingly for +a moment--and then all was lost.</p> +<p>"I am the Queen of England," said Emma in her proud, shrill +voice. "Begone, churls, and let me not."</p> +<p>And bright in crimson and ermine she came from the cabin and +stood swaying on the deck before Egil and his men, while round her +train played heedlessly the ill-omened black kitten; and that +seemed strange.</p> +<p>Egil bared his head and bowed before her.</p> +<p>"Are you truly the queen?" he said.</p> +<p>"Aye, knave. Who else should I be?" she answered. "Fetch me the +old priest."</p> +<p>"Nay, Redwald will tell me now," Egil said. "Does this lady +speak truth?"</p> +<p>"It is true," I answered. "Why should you hinder her going to +the duke, her brother, who will seek her at your hands?"</p> +<p>Now Emma had been still during these words, looking with hard +and scornful eyes at all before her, but now she spoke:</p> +<p>"Let the sail be set again that I may go on my way. You shall +surely answer for this hindrance."</p> +<p>But no one stirred, though even the Danes were silent, for there +is that in the tones of one who is wont to be obeyed which makes +men listen whether they will or not.</p> +<p>"Do you hear me?" she said, stamping her foot.</p> +<p>"Redwald, see that I am obeyed. Drive these knaves into the sea, +and let me be rid of them."</p> +<p>Then Egil answered her, saving me trouble thereby, for I had +nought to say:</p> +<p>"Queen, we will do your bidding and hoist the sail. But my men +and I must bide here."</p> +<p>"I care not, so that you do not hinder my folk," she said.</p> +<p>And with that she turned away, saying to the brave sister who +yet stood beside her:</p> +<p>"Let us seek shelter again--the wind is cold, and I am offended +with the sight of these men."</p> +<p>They went into the cabin and closed the door after them, and +Egil and I looked at one another. Egil grinned, but I could not. +Outside the door the kitten mewed restlessly in the cold wind to be +taken in.</p> +<p>"So," he said, "cheer up. This is not your fault; you almost won +through. Had the queen come forth as an abbess, I think that I had +left you for very shame. Priests and black cats are aye unlucky +passengers, however."</p> +<p>I think that I was never so angry as then. To lose all our pains +for the safety of the queen, and that by reason of her own +foolishness, was hard.</p> +<p>Egil left me and went to Bertric; and once more the sail was +set, and the ship headed backward for the English coast. We had +almost lost sight of it. The two longships ranged up on either side +of us, shortening sail to keep us company.</p> +<p>They took the two men whom I had slain and set them forward +under some covering. Neither Egil nor his warriors bore me any +grudge for their fall, which was in fair fight of their own making. +After that Egil's men made the crew bring them what food and ale +they had, and sat down below the fore deck quietly enough. They +were courtmen of Jarl Thorkel's, as I thought, being better than +the wild warriors who made the bulk of Cnut's great host.</p> +<p>Elfric came to me when all was quiet thus, and leant on the rail +beside me for some time without speaking. We were making a long +slant over to the English coast, and my heart was full of heavy +thoughts, for I could not help wondering if this mischance had come +about by my fault; and I was angry and sore that all the plans that +I had made so confidently had come to naught. Presently the abbot +said:</p> +<p>"The queen takes this matter very easily."</p> +<p>"The trouble is to come," I answered; "she thinks that she is +yet on her journey."</p> +<p>"It is no fault of ours that she is not," said he. "Maybe it is +best thus. I suppose that she will understand how things are when +we reach the shore. What will be done with us?"</p> +<p>"Let us ask Egil," I said. "I think we might have fallen into +worse hands than his. It is in my mind that he likes not his +errand."</p> +<p>So we went aft to the chief, who stood beside Bertric. And when +I came to him he said, pointing westward:</p> +<p>"Here comes Earl Wulfnoth, as I think."</p> +<p>Then I saw three large ships beating up to us, and the sail of +one bore, painted on it, the device of a fighting warrior, Earl +Wulfnoth's own ensign.</p> +<p>Now, on this I had a hope that we might be rescued by him, and +my face must have shown as much, while Elfric glanced at me with +the same thought written plainly in his eyes.</p> +<p>"I will not risk meeting the earl, though I do not think that he +will interfere with us," Egil said; "but we are to windward of him, +and can do as we like.</p> +<p>"Now, I have been wondering what I shall do with you, +Redwald."</p> +<p>"Let me be taken with the queen and the athelings," I said. +"What will you do with them?"</p> +<p>"They must go to Cnut," he answered; "but I am thinking that +that will be bad for you."</p> +<p>"Why?"</p> +<p>"Maybe it is not my business, but I think that I owe you a good +turn for letting me off at Leavenheath. If I take you to Cnut, +Streone will have somewhat to say about you--and he is a great man +with our king just now."</p> +<p>"Well, what if he has. He knows me well enough, and cares nought +about me," I answered.</p> +<p>"Cares enough about you to have told Cnut to hang you as soon as +he gets you," Egil said. "I suppose you have offended him in some +way."</p> +<p>Then Elfric said:</p> +<p>"That is so. Redwald escaped from his hands at Stamford. We +heard many tales about it at Peterborough. They say that Eadmund +the Martyr came bodily and saved him out of a house beset by the +earl's men."</p> +<p>"If there is one dead man that we Danes have to fear, it is that +king," Egil said. "Is this tale true?"</p> +<p>And he stared at me as at one who had dealings with the other +world.</p> +<p>I knew that my story must have come into this shape through some +tales that the goldsmith had set about.</p> +<p>"Hardly," said I; "but it is a long story. Maybe Eadmund the +Saint had more to do with it than I know; but I saw him not."</p> +<p>"Well then, Redwald, it seems unsafe for you to go near +Streone--"</p> +<p>"It will be unsafe for him," I said savagely, for my temper was +sorely tried by my failure, as I have said.</p> +<p>Egil laughed.</p> +<p>"Why, then, all the more must I keep you out of his way."</p> +<p>"Hang me and have done," I said; "I am of no more use."</p> +<p>"That," quoth Egil, "is what I thought concerning myself when +you had me down in the fight. Now I am here to let you go, and bid +you take heart. This is but chance of war, and one must take it as +it comes."</p> +<p>Now it was so plain that the honest chief wished me well, that I +could not but thank him for his words, though, indeed, just at this +time I seemed to care little for what became of me.</p> +<p>"You are a generous foe, Egil Thorarinsson," I said.</p> +<p>"You and I shall be good friends some day, as I hope," he said; +"meanwhile we will be fair foes. You slew me not, because I had +fallen more or less by chance. Therefore I will let you go because +you have fallen into my hands by chance. I will only lay this on +you, that you shall bide with Earl Wulfnoth for two months before +you fight against us again."</p> +<p>I was full of wonder at this, for he might well have made me +promise to take up arms against Cnut no more, and I could have done +no less than promise it, seeing that I was in his hands.</p> +<p>"Why, I must tie you down for a while," he said laughing at my +face of doubt.</p> +<p>"Nay, Egil, I do but wonder that you set me free at all," I +said.</p> +<p>"Is that so? I have wondered that you slew me not in the heat of +battle. Well, I will add this, that if we fall on Earl Wulfnoth you +may fight for him."</p> +<p>I held out my hand, and Egil took it.</p> +<p>"You have my word, Egil; you are most generous," I said.</p> +<p>Then he glanced at sword Foe's Bane.</p> +<p>"Some day you and I, maybe, will have a good fight for your +sword in all friendliness," he said.</p> +<p>"Surely I thought you would take it back," I cried. "I feared +so, for it was my father's sword."</p> +<p>"Aha! I knew there was somewhat strange about that blade," he +said. "Tell me what story it has."</p> +<p>I told him in a few words about the winning of the sword from +the grave mound by Thorgeir, my grandfather, and asked Egil how he +came by it.</p> +<p>"I bought it from a man after Nacton fight, and I have never had +any luck with it. I was sure it was a magic sword of some sort; for +it let go three men whom I should surely have slain with any other +blade. It seemed to turn in my hand. Such swords as these will not +be used by any other than he who can win them from the owner."</p> +<p>"Ottar, Olaf's scald, said that it would draw the holder to me," +I said; "but I would not believe it."</p> +<p>"You English have forgotten the old sayings," Egil said. "Now +you know that he is right; keep the sword therefore."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"If I must die a bed death, Egil, the sword shall be sent to +you, for I think that you have the most claim to it."</p> +<p>He grew red with pleasure at my saying, and Elfric broke in on +our talk.</p> +<p>"I would that I might see many more meetings of brave foes like +this. Then would peace come very shortly."</p> +<p>"Why, father," said Egil, "Redwald and I have not any hate for +each other, though we must fight on opposite sides."</p> +<p>"That is well. I would that it were ever so."</p> +<p>Then Egil changed his tone, for we were nearing shore. The ships +he had seen were still far away, beating southward now.</p> +<p>"Are these maidens nuns, or but in disguise, father?" he +said.</p> +<p>Elfric answered not at once, and I said:</p> +<p>"Three are nuns, two only are disguised. You will not take the +queen's maidens from her?"</p> +<p>"Not I," he answered. "I think that even with the abbot's help +and theirs I shall have trouble enough with the queen when she +finds that the shore we reach is not Normandy."</p> +<p>"Shall you take me?" asked Elfric.</p> +<p>"I must take all but my own friend here, and the three holy +women; I will not hinder them. They can find shelter in Selsea or +Chichester--a nun has always friends and a house--if Redwald will +see them safely to the door," Egil said very kindly.</p> +<p>Then he bade the men get out the boat, which was a good one, and +fitted for carrying cargo from ship to shore. Two of Bertric's men +were to go ashore with me and the nuns, taking messages also to the +Bosham folk of what had befallen the ship.</p> +<p>"You will scare the wife if you say you have fallen into the +hands of the Danes," Egil said laughing at the shipmaster.</p> +<p>"It is the truth," Bertric said stoutly. "'Tis the doing of yon +cat."</p> +<p>"You shall come to no harm with us, and your ship shall come +back to Bosham shortly. We have no war with your earl, and all will +be well. Tell them, therefore, that it is thus. King Cnut is +generous to all who fight not against him."</p> +<p>When I heard that I began to see why our people went over to his +side so readily, and it seemed to me that he was fighting not only +with sword, but also with policy.</p> +<p>"Now call your nuns, father," Egil said.</p> +<p>"May I have one word with Redwald first?" the abbot asked.</p> +<p>"Tell him what you will," Egil answered, and went forward.</p> +<p>He called one of the priests and told him to bid the three nuns +come forth.</p> +<p>Then Elfric said to me:</p> +<p>"Two of these women are nuns, the third, she who stood by you so +well even now--saving your life, moreover--is not. She is the +orphan daughter of a thane, whom her guardians begged me to take to +Normandy, finding her a place in the queen's household or in some +convent, if that might not be. She is friendless. But I think she +may as well go with the nuns to Selsea. Bid her wait there till she +hears from me--unless some lady will take pity on her and give her +shelter."</p> +<p>"She will be more likely to take the vows, as have so many +maidens of today who are in her case," I said. "I will do all for +the nuns and her that I can."</p> +<p>The three sisters came out now. Two were weeping, and they were +the nuns. The third was flushed and looked troubled, and she cast a +glance back into the dark cabin. I heard the queen's voice speaking +fast to her, as it would seem, and she shrank away as if dreading +it.</p> +<p>Elfric went to meet them, and then the queen herself came +through the cabin door stooping, for it was not high.</p> +<p>"This is your doing," she said to the abbot. "Am I to be left +without any attendants?"</p> +<p>"My queen," the good man said, "we can take the sisters no +further with us. They must go ashore."</p> +<p>The queen looked at the coast, which was plain enough now. It +was certain that she had no knowledge that we were returning to +England. That the ship was on another tack meant nothing to +her.</p> +<p>"Why cannot they bide here and go on land with me? We cannot be +more than an hour in reaching the harbour," and she pointed to +Selsea.</p> +<p>"Tell her, father, I pray you," said the maiden in a low voice. +"She believes that we are even now nearing her home."</p> +<p>Then I thought that this might come more easily from myself, +seeing that Elfric had to stay with her, and I stood before her, +and spoke.</p> +<p>"My Queen, that is not the Norman shore which you see. The +Danes, into whose hands we have fallen, are taking us back to +England."</p> +<p>As I said this, the queen's face grew white with rage, and she +looked from Elfric to me, speechless. On the deck above stood Egil, +and he caught my eye, and looked ruefully at us.</p> +<p>"What!" she said, "has Cnut bought you also? Is there no man +whom I can trust?"</p> +<p>That was the most cruel thing that she could have said, but I +knew what despair might lie behind her anger, and I answered +nothing--nor did Elfric. We waited for the storm to pass.</p> +<p>"Ill it was that Ethelred trusted me to your hands--" she began +again.</p> +<p>But there was one who would not bear this. The friendless maiden +spoke plainly for us.</p> +<p>"Queen," she said, "I have borne your reproaches to myself in +silence, but I cannot bear that these brave servants of yours +should be blamed. Look at the abbot's torn and dusty robes, look at +the thane's care-worn face--are they in the plight of men who are +bribed?"</p> +<p>But the queen made no answer, and her face was like stone as she +looked on none of us, gazing straight before her.</p> +<p>"What lies on yonder deck?" the girl went on, pointing to where +the two bodies lay under their covering. "It is the thane's sword +and risk of life that stayed them from laying hands on you. Does a +bought man slay his buyers?"</p> +<p>Still the queen was silent, and then I said:</p> +<p>"I think that you misjudge us, my queen. Had we wished to betray +you it would have been long ere this that the Danes would have been +summoned to take you."</p> +<p>I do not think that she heard me, and I am glad, for I spoke in +anger. I saw her lean against the bulkhead, and her hand sought her +heart, and she reeled a little. The maiden sprang forward to +support her, for it seemed as if she would fall. But she recovered +in a moment, and shook herself free of the girl's clasp.</p> +<p>"I am wrong, good friends," she said. "Now I know from what you +have shielded me all this long journey through. What will they do +with me?"</p> +<p>And she began to weep silently, yet she would not let the maiden +touch her.</p> +<p>Elfric spoke then in his gentle voice.</p> +<p>"We cannot blame you, my queen, for the blow is heavy; yet the +chief who has taken us is a true warrior and kindly, you need fear +nought."</p> +<p>Then came Egil from the fore deck, and bowed to the queen, and +said:</p> +<p>"I must take you to Cnut the king, lady; and his commands are +that you are to be treated as becomes the sister of Duke Richard. I +am here to see that it is so."</p> +<p>Then the queen's mood changed, and she was once more +herself.</p> +<p>"You shall answer to my brother for all you do," she said in her +proud way.</p> +<p>"I have to answer to Jarl Thorkel and to King Cnut," Egil said +simply. "The duke is no lord of mine."</p> +<p>Thereat the queen paid no sort of heed to him, but spoke to +me.</p> +<p>"I will tell my brother hereafter of your great care for me, my +thane. Why must you leave me now?"</p> +<p>Surely I should have asked Egil to let me stay, but he knew best +what was safe for me.</p> +<p>"I will not take either thane or nuns, lady," he said. "They +must leave you even now; time is short."</p> +<p>She glanced coldly at the chief, and answered him by speaking to +me. She had brought herself now to see that she was powerless.</p> +<p>"Then I must say farewell, Redwald. In better days I will not +forget your service," and then she smiled a little, and gave me her +hand to kiss as I knelt before her, adding: "I think that I have +been an ill-natured travelling companion at times."</p> +<p>Then she turned away quickly and sought the cabin. But she said +no word to the maiden who had made the journey lighter to her, and +I saw that this grieved her sorely.</p> +<p>Now I took hasty leave of Elfric and the athelings, and sad was +I at parting with them. But I told Eadward that Egil was worthy of +his charge, and a generous foe.</p> +<p>"You will not blame me that this matter has failed even at the +last, my prince," I said.</p> +<p>"Not I, Redwald, good friend; you and I will laugh over it at +some time hereafter," the atheling said.</p> +<p>I shook my head.</p> +<p>"It has been waste trouble and pains," I said sorrowfully.</p> +<p>"That it has not been," quoth Elfric. "No duty well and truly +done is lost in the end, though it may seem to be so at the time. I +shall remember my guardian in this journey all my life long, and +the queen shall remember presently. You have been most patient. +Lose not patience now. Be of good cheer rather that things are none +so ill as they might be."</p> +<p>So the good man strove to hearten me, for I thought meanly +enough of myself at that time, because I had been so certain that +all was well, and now my pride was humbled. Maybe it was good for +me that this should be so, but good things are passing bitter if +all are like this. Lastly, he gave me his blessing, and I joined +the sisters in the boat, and she was cast off, while at that moment +the black kitten came to the rail and leapt in after us, which I +liked not at all.</p> +<p>Then the great ship slipped away, her helm went down, and she +headed away out to sea to escape a meeting with Godwine's vessels +that had now gone about for the shore again, beating to windward +for Bosham. As she passed us I saw the abbot and Eadward wave to us +from the fore deck, and Egil lifted his hand in salute from beside +Bertric at the helm.</p> +<p>Then they were gone beyond our reach, and we could no longer +make them out. Our rowers were bending to their oars, and the boat +was making good way enough, shoreward.</p> +<p>I do not know how I can say enough of Egil's friendliness to me, +for I found my armour on the floor of the boat alongside the few +things the poor women had. Helm and shield and axe too were there. +He was as one of the heroes, of whom Ottar sang, in his way to me. +Then I grew light hearted in that strange way that comes after long +strain of fearing the worst, when the worst is known and it is not +so terrible after all. I had no fear for the queen, and I was free, +and going to Godwine and his father who were my friends. Also I +should see Penhurst and Relf again, most likely.</p> +<p>Now when that memory came to me, suddenly I thought that I must +see Sexberga. And it was strange to me that I had no pleasure in +that thought. Most of all I hoped that Olaf would put in at +Pevensea on his way to Normandy. It was likely enough.</p> +<p>So I sat and pondered, not sadly, but looking forward ever, and, +as I say, feeling that a load was lifted from me. Then at last my +thoughts came back from myself, and I turned to the sisters and +told them that the queen was safe, if a prisoner. They need not +grieve for her. The two nuns wept, but the thane's daughter smiled +a little, and said, fondling the cat meanwhile on her lap:</p> +<p>"In truth, I think that the queen will be happier in making Egil +and his Danes obey her in little services than she has been in +having to be guided by yourself and the abbot."</p> +<p>"It has been hard for her," I answered; "but she owes you much, +as I think."</p> +<p>"She hates me," the girl said, half tearfully, "because I was +the only one who dared speak plainly to her."</p> +<p>"Elfric and I owe you much, Sister Sexberga," said I, naming her +as I had thought of her through all the journey, because I recalled +so many times when we had looked to her for help in persuading the +queen to common sense,</p> +<p>She looked astonished at this, and smiled oddly, and then I saw +what I had done.</p> +<p>"Forgive me," I said hastily; "I know not your name. That is +what I ever called you to myself when I had to think of you in +ordering matters."</p> +<p>"Why 'Sexberga'?" she said, looking out seawards.</p> +<p>"Truly I thought you like a lady of that name whom I knew. But +now the likeness is gone," I said.</p> +<p>"Maybe I ought to be proud thereof," she said coldly enough.</p> +<p>"I will not say that," I answered. "Let me know your name that I +may remember it."</p> +<p>"My name is Uldra," she said, without looking at me, and +flushing a little, and then busying herself with the kitten's +ears.</p> +<p>"That is a Norse name, lady," said I.</p> +<p>"Aye--and a heathen one. But it is the best I have."</p> +<p>Then I said, feeling that I could not say aright what I +would:</p> +<p>"Lady Uldra, I have to thank you for saving my life today. Yours +was a brave deed."</p> +<p>She shivered a little, at the thought of what she had done, as I +think, for the heat of anger had gone.</p> +<p>"I am glad I was of use," she answered. "What are we to do when +we come to land?"</p> +<p>"I will take you and the sisters to the great nunnery that good +St. Wilfrith founded. There you will be welcomed."</p> +<p>So I said, but as I looked at her I thought what a prison the +nunnery would be to such a maiden as this. Yet it was all that +could be done.</p> +<p>"That will be peaceful," she said, but the tears seemed close at +hand.</p> +<p>Now one of the men spoke to the other, looking back over his +shoulder at him, and then when he was answered he turned to me.</p> +<p>"Master," he said, "tide serves ill for Selsea, and it will be +easy for us to go straight up the haven to Bosham. The flood tide +is strong in with us. May we do so?"</p> +<p>"Is there any nunnery there?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Why, yes, master--a little one."</p> +<p>There too was Wulfnoth's great house, where I should be welcome, +as I knew. So I asked the sisters if this would suit them.</p> +<p>"One place is as another to us," they replied.</p> +<p>So we went on up the haven, and it was a long pull, so that it +was late in the afternoon when we came in sight of the town.</p> +<p>Now I had said no more to Uldra about ourselves--save for a few +words concerning sea and tides and the like--but had tried to cheer +her, and myself also, by speaking of how Cnut would treat the +queen--namely, that it was most likely to be in high honour, lest +the duke should fall on him.</p> +<p>But as we sighted our journey's end, I bethought myself.</p> +<p>"Lady," I said, "is there aught that I can do for you in sending +messages to your folk? There will be chapmen and the like going +Londonwards shortly, when the siege is over."</p> +<p>"I have no friends there," she said.</p> +<p>"You shall bid me do what you will for you when I am free to go +to our king again," said I. "There will be some who would know +where you are and how you fare."</p> +<p>She thanked me, saying nothing but that when the time came, if I +yet remembered her and would ask her, she might give me messages +for those at Peterborough whom she had left, and I promised to do +all I could in bearing them.</p> +<p>"I cannot forget the maiden who saved my life," I said.</p> +<p>She made no answer, and the boat shot alongside the little +wharf, where a crowd was gathering quickly to see us come. Many +questions there were when Bertric's men were known.</p> +<p>There was a kindly-looking monk among his people, and I went to +him, and brought him to the nuns where they and Uldra stood apart +by themselves, while the two men were busy with their folk.</p> +<p>"<i>Pax vobiscum</i>," he said; "you shall be welcome, my +sisters, at our little nunnery for tonight. Then will we ask the +bishop on the morrow what you had better do."</p> +<p>Then they were eager to go with him, and I bade them farewell, +bowing, and they turned away. They might say nothing, according to +their rule, Elfric told me, save in need.</p> +<p>Neither did Uldra speak, though no vow of silence was on her, +but she went with them for a little way. I was rather hurt at this, +and began to go back to the boat, wondering that she had no word of +farewell.</p> +<p>"Redwald--thane," came a gentle call in her voice, and I turned +sharply.</p> +<p>She was close to me, and the sisters were waiting for her twenty +paces or so away.</p> +<p>"Farewell," she said. "I could but thank you for all your care +for us."</p> +<p>"It has been freely given, lady," I said. "I only grieve that +the journey has ended thus. May it be well with you."</p> +<p>"I will pray for you, thane, day and night in the nunnery that +it may be so with you," she answered, with a little sort of +choking. "The gratitude of us helpless women to you for your long +patience is more than we can say."</p> +<p>Then she went swiftly back to the nuns, and they went their way. +I thought that I had not deserved so much. And of this I was sure, +that had not the sisters' dress kept me far from Uldra, I had +forgotten Hertha in her company. Then thought I that there was no +reason why I should remember Hertha any longer. And next, that it +were better that I should think of no maiden at all, at this +time.</p> +<p>Which last seemed wisest, and so I grew discontented, and went +down to the boat and bade the men take my arms and few belongings +to Earl Wulfnoth's house.</p> +<p>When I came there the steward knew me, and made me very welcome. +The earl was at Pevensea or Shoreham, but Godwine was in and out of +the haven, and would be here ere long. So they told me, and set a +good meal before me. And when I had eaten I lay down on a settle +and slept the long sleep that comes to one wearied in mind and body +alike. If the house had burnt over my head I should not have waked, +for others watched now, and I had no need to wake for aught.</p> +<p>A man knows those things in his sleep, I verily believe. One ill +dream I had, and that was of Bertric's unlucky kitten, which seemed +to be the queen in some uncanny way. Sometimes I wonder what became +of it. I never learned, but it brought me no more ill luck.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch12" id="Ch12">Chapter 12</a>: Among Friends.</h2> +<p>When I woke it was daylight again. A fire burnt on the hearth in +the middle of the hall, and someone had spread a wolf-skin rug over +me. I had not moved from sunset to sunrise, and I was refreshed and +broad awake at once, wondering at first where I was, and who had +laughed and woke me.</p> +<p>There was a youth sitting on a table's edge by the wall over +against where I lay, and a big broad-shouldered man leant on it +with folded arms beside him, and at first I stared at them till my +thoughts came back, and they laughed at me again, and then I knew +Godwine and Relf the thane, who had but just come up from their +ship to find me.</p> +<p>"On my word," said Godwine, "here is a man who could teach one +how to sleep! We have sat here and talked about you for ten minutes +or more."</p> +<p>"Redwald sleeps as though he had lost time to make up," said +Relf. "Welcome back to us, anyway."</p> +<p>"Aye--welcome you are," said Godwine warmly, "but how did you +come here?"</p> +<p>I got up and took their hands, rejoicing to see them. It was +good to be among friends again after the long watching and many +dangers. Then came the steward followed by his men with a mighty +breakfast, and as he set the tables on the high place, Godwine's +men trooped in. They had had to wait for the morning tide into the +haven, and the ship was just berthed.</p> +<p>"Food first," Relf advised. "Then shall Redwald tell us all he +knows."</p> +<p>So by and by we sat in the morning sunlight in the courtyard, +and I told them all that had happened from beginning to end. They +knew no more than that Ethelred was dead, and that Cnut was +besieging London.</p> +<p>"We tried to chase those Danes because they had got our man's +ship," said Godwine. "When we got near enough, for they came down +wind and passed us before long, we found that Bertric was contented +enough, running up his own flag, and the Danes did not stay to +fight. So we came home, only losing our tide by the delay."</p> +<p>"What would you have done had you known that the queen was on +board, and a prisoner?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Why, nothing more than we have done," Godwine said. "My father +hates Emma the cat as bitterly as he does Streone the fox, which is +saying a good deal. The cat's claws are clipped now, maybe."</p> +<p>Well, I knew this, and said nothing. One could expect no more +from Earl Wulfnoth's son. Nor do I think that any loved Emma the +queen much. One may know how a person is thought of by the way in +which folk name them often enough, and though our king would have +had his young wife called by her English name, Elfgiva, none ever +did so. Her Norman, foreign name was all we used. If she had been +loved, we should have rejoiced to name her in our own way.</p> +<p>Then Godwine said:</p> +<p>"You have had an ill time with Emma, as I think, if she is all +that my father says."</p> +<p>"Nay, Godwine," said Relf, "Redwald will not bear much of this. +He is the queen's faithful servant, and will have nought against +her, and he is right."</p> +<p>"So he is, and I am wrong," said the lad at once. "Forgive me, +friend; I did not think."</p> +<p>Then I laughed, and turned it off. Godwine was only too right, +but I could not say so. Now, however, I may say that the memory of +Emma the queen's ways is to me as a nightmare.</p> +<p>"I would that I could meet with this Egil," Godwine said as I +gave him sword Foe's Bane to handle; and then he forgot all else in +the beauty of the weapon.</p> +<p>"What have you done with the brave maiden?" Relf asked me +now.</p> +<p>"She is in the nunnery here," I said. "She is friendless, having +no folk of her own nearer than Peterborough."</p> +<p>"That is far off," said Relf, and began to think, twisting his +beard as was his wont when pondering somewhat weighty.</p> +<p>Now, before he had made up his mind to say any more, Godwine was +ready to hear about the winning back of the sword, and of the +fights in Ulfkytel's land, and then a man came from the ships with +some business, and he went away with him. And by that time Relf had +somewhat to say.</p> +<p>"Penhurst is a lonesome place, and it will be worse for my wife +when Sexberga is gone," he said musingly.</p> +<p>"Why, where is your daughter going?" I asked him.</p> +<p>He looked at me sidewise for a moment, and I thought that his +face fell a little. Then he said:</p> +<p>"Going to be wedded shortly."</p> +<p>"That is well," I said. "To whom?"</p> +<p>Then the thane turned fairly round on me with wide eyes, and a +blank fear fell on me that he meant that I was to wed her. Yet +surely the lady had told him that I was betrothed.</p> +<p>"Ho!" he said; "did you not know that? Methought everyone +did."</p> +<p>That was worse, and I knew not what he looked for from me.</p> +<p>"I have been away; I have heard nought," I answered lamely +enough.</p> +<p>"Oh, aye; so you have," he said. "Truly, I forgot that. We quiet +people fancy that all the world knows our affairs. And it was in my +mind that you had a tenderness that way yourself. I knew not how +you would take it."</p> +<p>Then we both laughed, but it was not a hearty laughter, for each +feared the other a little, as it seemed.</p> +<p>"I am glad for Sexberga, if she is happy," said I.</p> +<p>"Why, now, that is well," said Relf. "I had thought that I must +break this matter gently to you."</p> +<p>"Maybe you would have had to do so had I bided at Penhurst much +longer," said I truly enough.</p> +<p>"All the same, Redwald, I wish it were you, on my faith," said +the thane, growing red in his earnestness.</p> +<p>"Thanks therefor," said I. "It is good to hear you say so; but I +am a landless warrior in bad luck, and so it is better as it is. +Who is the man of Sexberga's choice?"</p> +<p>"Eldred of Dallington," said he. "A good youth enough, and with +lands enough. He has never seen a fight, though," and then he +turned on me suddenly, putting his hand on mine. "I could have +sworn, lad, that you were fond of the girl. Tell me if it is so, +and Eldred shall go down the wind like a strayed hawk, for all I +care."</p> +<p>I shook my head, but it came over me for a moment that I wished +I might recall the wandering fancies of the winter days in +Penhurst--but that passed, and I was lonely in heart.</p> +<p>"Nay, thane, that is not so. My sword here is all that I love +next to my king and Olaf my cousin--and Relf the thane. I have no +love for any maiden, nor could Sexberga think twice of me."</p> +<p>"If you had bided a little longer. Well, then, no hearts are +broken, or so much as awry, and that is well. So, as I was saying, +Penhurst will be lonely directly, and already I love this maiden +with the outland name for saving you. How would she take it if we +gave her shelter with us? I am going back home in a day or two, and +you must come with me."</p> +<p>The good thane spoke fast, being easier in his mind, as it +seemed, on one point, and not willing to make any show of +generosity on the other.</p> +<p>"That is a kind thought of yours," I said, being very glad, and +not less so that I could not help rejoicing that I should see more +of Uldra.</p> +<p>"I wonder what my wife would say?" he said thoughtfully.</p> +<p>"If I know aught of her kindness, and I think that I have proved +it well," answered I, "she will be glad to help this orphan +maiden."</p> +<p>"Let us go and see her, and ask her to come, therefore," said +Relf, rising up. "I want to thank her, moreover, for saving +you."</p> +<p>I was nowise loath, and so we went along under the trees towards +the nunnery. And as we went Relf talked of Eldred, the Thane of +Dallington, and the wedding that was to come. And all the while I +believe that he was troubling about two things that were mixed in +his mind--fear that I was set aside by Sexberga, and a wish that I +had been the bridegroom.</p> +<p>Then we knocked on the great door, and he was silent until a +sister looked through the little barred square wicket in the midst +of it.</p> +<p>"We would speak with the Lady Uldra," I said. "I am the thane +who brought her ashore."</p> +<p>The sister said nought, but shut the wicket door, and left us. +We heard her steps retreating across the little courtyard, and she +shut a door after her somewhere else. Then all was quiet.</p> +<p>"What does that mean?" Relf said.</p> +<p>"That we have to wait," said I "that is all. It is the way in +which they treat folk at these places. They would do the same if +the queen came. She has gone to her Superior."</p> +<p>"What would Emma say?" chuckled Relf, looking slyly at me.</p> +<p>"One cannot say much to an iron-barred oak door."</p> +<p>"But there are thanes and such-like left outside," he said, +laughing more yet. "Now Godwine is not here, I dare say that you +have felt, more than once, the queen's tongue for nought."</p> +<p>"I will deny it," said I, "to anyone but Elfric the abbot," +whereat he laughed till the tears came into his eyes. He had known +our queen in the old days before Streone's treachery.</p> +<p>I was glad that the wicket flew open again. Relf stayed his +laughter in a moment, and became very grave.</p> +<p>"What would she say now?" he whispered.</p> +<p>"Enough," I said, for the sister, having seen that we waited, +unbarred the gate and let us in. Then she pointed to a door on our +right, and went away.</p> +<p>I took Relf's arm and led him to this door--for he was going to +follow the sister--and we opened it. It led into a small +high-roofed chamber, that had a great crucifix painted in bright +colours on the east wall, and pictured legends on the rest, between +high narrow windows.</p> +<p>But there stood Uldra, no longer in convent dress, but in some +robe of dark blue and crimson that became her well, so that at +first I hardly knew her, for now for the first time I saw her +bright brown hair that the novice's hood had hidden from me. I +could not say that Uldra was fair as Sexberga to look on, but, as +ever, I thought that her face was the sweetest that I had seen in +all my life.</p> +<p>I was a little abashed before this grave and stately maiden, who +was the same, and yet not the same, as she who had been through so +much danger and trial with me, and I could not find a word to say +at first. Nor could she, as it seemed, and so we looked at one +another until she smiled. It was only for a moment, however, for +when her face lighted up thus, Relf found his voice and spoke.</p> +<p>"I have come to thank you, lady, for saving my comrade's life +yesterday," he said, taking her hand and kissing it. "I had lost a +good friend but for you, he tells me."</p> +<p>"But for the thane, your friend, I know not what would have +become of us," she answered. "The thanks are from me to him, +rather."</p> +<p>"Yet I think that I owe you somewhat," Relf said, "and now I am +minded to try to show that I would thank you in deed, and not in +word only."</p> +<p>He paused, and Uldra looked at me as if asking if I could throw +any light on this stranger's meaning.</p> +<p>"Relf, the Thane of Penhurst, is he who gave me shelter and care +when I was hurt in a fight and a flood last winter," I said. "He +has indeed been a good friend to me."</p> +<p>"Not I," said Relf; "you fought for me. It was my wife and +Sexberga, my daughter, who tended you."</p> +<p>Now at that name, which she already knew, the maiden looked +quickly away from me, and a little flush began to creep up into her +face, with pleasure as it would seem.</p> +<p>"I have heard of your daughter Sexberga already," she said to +Relf with a little smile.</p> +<p>"Why, that is well," he said. "Now, after her wedding my wife +will be sorely lost for want of a companion, and I would ask you to +come home to Penhurst with us, and bide there until you may seek +your friends again--or as long as you wish. And glad shall we be of +your help at the wedding feast."</p> +<p>So he spoke cheerfully, trying to make all the honour come from +her, as kindness to himself and his wife. But though the tears came +into Uldra's eyes at the good thane's plain meaning, she was silent +yet, save that she said:</p> +<p>"I know not how to thank you for your goodwill to me."</p> +<p>"Nay," he said; "but my wife will blame me if you come not. +'Here,' she will say, 'is the companion whom I needed, and a friend +of our Redwald's, moreover, and you have not brought her.' I pray +you, come with us. Do you ask her, Redwald; I am rough, and you are +courtly."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"Lady, this is all that Elfric would wish for you. I cannot tell +you of the great kindness that is waiting for you in the thane's +home."</p> +<p>And for answer she turned away and began to weep, and Relf could +bear that not at all, and he went to her and put his arm round her, +as he would have done to Sexberga, and tried to reassure her.</p> +<p>"Why," he said, "here is nought to weep about, maiden. Maybe we +are homely people, but I think that you may learn to be happier in +freedom with us than here. Nay, but weep not so bitterly, you shall +be as our daughter to us if you will, for Redwald's life's sake. +Aye, you shall have Sexberga's own chamber and all that--"</p> +<p>But still Uldra wept, and I was unhappy to see her do so. This +could not be all for sudden relief from doubt as I had thought at +first.</p> +<p>Then she took herself gently from the thane's arm, and dried her +eyes, and clasped her hands tightly before her, and said:</p> +<p>"I cannot say how I thank you; but I must bide here."</p> +<p>"This is a cold place," said the thane. "It is no home for +you."</p> +<p>"I think it will be so in the end," she said very sadly.</p> +<p>And I tried hard to think of somewhat to say that might persuade +her, but there was that meaning in her voice that seemed to stay +whatever came to me. I thought that she had made up her mind to +take the veil, and there are few things that will turn a maiden +from that when once she has chosen it.</p> +<p>Then said Relf:</p> +<p>"Maybe I ask you too suddenly, lady. Let us leave it till +tomorrow, and I pray you think with all kindness of the matter, for +I shall be sorely grieved if you will not come."</p> +<p>And I said the same as well as I could, but though she promised +to give her answer in the morning, it was plain to me that it would +be even as she said now.</p> +<p>Then we took our leave of her, and found our way out of the +place, somewhat down-hearted. The door was bolted after us, though +I do not know who did it, or whence the portress watched our going. +And it was dismal to hear the great bars jarring in their +sockets.</p> +<p>"Poor maid," said Relf. "Why does she choose such a prison?"</p> +<p>"Those dismal nuns have talked her into it," said I angrily.</p> +<p>"Maybe. It is a way they have," the thane said. "'Come in here!' +said the rat in the trap to the rat outside, 'one is safe from the +cat behind these bars.'"</p> +<p>So we walked on for a little, and then he said:</p> +<p>"How did she hear of Sexberga? I thought you had had no speech +with her on the journey."</p> +<p>"Nor had I," I answered. "I thought she was another silent nun. +But I thought she was like Sexberga, and so I called her Sister +Sexberga to myself, giving her a name in my thoughts. Then in the +boat it slipped out unawares when I had to speak to her, and she +asked to be told why I called her so."</p> +<p>"As much like Sexberga as you are like Godwine, which is not at +all," said Relf laughing. "Was she pleased?"</p> +<p>"Why, I think not," I answered.</p> +<p>"How much more about Sexberga did you tell her?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Nothing, there was no need."</p> +<p>Then Relf began to chuckle to himself, and I could not tell why. +But presently he said:</p> +<p>"Did you give the sisters names likewise?"</p> +<p>"Yes, I did. I do not think I should have cared to say what they +were," I answered, laughing also.</p> +<p>He said no more about this, and we came to the hall, and then +went to find Godwine at the ships. But I could not but feel +disappointed that Uldra would not come with us. And that was not +all for her own sake, as I found when I came to turn over my +thoughts a little. I would fain see more of the maiden who had +borne peril so well, and had stood so bravely at my side.</p> +<p>Now when Godwine heard how our errand had failed, he laughed at +Relf's downcast looks and said, scanning my weatherbeaten and +forest-worn garments:</p> +<p>"Maidens love to see warriors go in bright array. She is tired +of those old weeds of Redwald's. We must fit him out afresh in the +morning, and then she will listen maybe."</p> +<p>He was so pleased with this boyish wisdom of his own, being +fully persuaded that he was right, that he and I must ride together +to Chichester with morning light, and find new gear for me.</p> +<p>"We roll in riches since you fell into the pit," he said, when I +would pay for what I had with my last piece of gold. "And you must +keep that one; there are more due to you yet as I think."</p> +<p>Nor would he be denied in this, and it is not a warrior's part +to take an earl's gifts grudgingly. And when I fairly shone in +bright array from head to foot, he must needs add a wonderful round +brooch, silver and gold wrought, with crimson garnets at the ends +and in the spaces of the arms of a cross of inlaid pearl and +enamel, such as one seldom sees.</p> +<p>"It is a Kentish brooch," he said, "so shall men know that you +are a friend of the earls of Kent and Sussex."</p> +<p>That was an earl's giving indeed, but Godwine is ever open +handed, and I am not alone in learning how he will give.</p> +<p>"Now we must go back, and you shall seek this damsel again since +old Relf is so set thereon. As for you, it is likely that you have +had trouble enough with her already, and will care little if she +will not come," he said, and looked me over from head to foot as we +stood outside the chapman's house in the wide place where the four +roads cross in Chichester town.</p> +<p>"My faith!" he added, "I believe that even Emma the Cat would +mind what you told her now!"</p> +<p>"Lord earl," said I, "you will make me vain."</p> +<p>"Earl, forsooth!" he cried, "the clothes have made you mighty +courtly all at once. Godwine and Redwald are going back to Bosham, +and the earl bides at Chichester Cross--mind you that!"</p> +<p>And he swung himself on his horse laughing, and we rode away, +while the people shouted, for they had gathered in twos and threes +to look on him.</p> +<p>Now when we came back to the great house, there was Relf sitting +on the bench where we had sat yesterday, and he looked as if he had +had good news.</p> +<p>"Now, thane," said Godwine, "here is a new messenger to your +sorrowful damsel."</p> +<p>Relf stared at me and laughed, and when I got off my horse +Godwine would have us go at once. So Relf took my arm and we went, +while the young earl joked us till we were out of hearing.</p> +<p>"Now," said the thane, "we will not spoil the earl's jest, but +must even let him think that all has been his doing thus."</p> +<p>"Why, he will see us start for Penhurst, and if Uldra is not +there--"</p> +<p>"Aye, but she will be. She is coming gladly," Relf said.</p> +<p>"How is this?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Just that I have been to see the maiden while you were gone, +and I spoke to her as to a daughter, and so she is coming."</p> +<p>"You would not wait for me, then?" I said, being glad that he +had managed without me, as things had turned out.</p> +<p>"Methought I could do better alone. The girl would say more to +me than if you were there, perhaps. Moreover, I had a notion why +she would not come, and I wanted to ask her if I was right. And I +was."</p> +<p>"I thought of that," said I; "she was in the same plight as +myself until Godwine decked me out thus. Women think more of their +attire than we."</p> +<p>The thane chuckled in his quiet way.</p> +<p>"Why, perhaps that had somewhat to do with it, but I did not ask +her, I forgot. But I did tell the old Lady Superior to do so, and +gave her withal to care for the maiden."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"It is well that you persuaded her; maybe I should have been in +the way. I should have lost my tongue again, I think."</p> +<p>"Well, yes," said Relf, still laughing to himself, "it was you +who were in the way; however, as you say, all is well, and she +rides with us tomorrow. We will go and find a mule or a good forest +pony for her, and so tell Godwine that the clothes have done +it."</p> +<p>Now I never thought that there was anything more behind the +thane's words, for of all things that had made my soul weary in +these last weeks the complaints of Emma the queen about her dress +had been the worst. So this seemed to me to be quite enough to +explain Uldra's first refusal, and though I believe that Relf had +been on the point of telling me more, he forbore, and let this +suffice.</p> +<p>Relf knew where to look for a beast, and we soon had a good bay +pony, that was quiet enough and strong, sent to Godwine's stables. +And then Relf told the earl what he had done.</p> +<p>"Then I was right," said Godwine gleefully. "I will warrant that +you two wise heads would never have thought thereof."</p> +<p>"Are you coming with us?" I asked him, for I did not care to +have to find answers to many questions about our speech with Uldra, +as things were.</p> +<p>"I am coming by sea presently with two ships," he said. "I shall +wait till Bertric comes back, and so maybe shall have news of your +queen to tell you. He should not be long. Relf goes back for the +early hay time, he says, but I believe that he is tired of the +sea."</p> +<p>"I am no sailor, lord," the thane said.</p> +<p>"As any of my crew will tell you," Godwine said merrily.</p> +<p>"Never, Redwald, was any man so undone as Relf when there is a +little sea on. A common forest deer thief could tie him up."</p> +<p>"I should have thanked one for slaying me at times," said Relf +grimly. "I prefer solid ground to shifty deck planks."</p> +<p>So whether it was love of home or loathing of sea that took him +back to Penhurst, Relf and I left Godwine on the next morning; and +at the nunnery door waited Uldra, looking bright and cheerful and +greeting us gladly as we came. And it seemed to me that her +troubles had passed from her, and that she was indeed glad to be +leaving the walls of the place that was so prison-like.</p> +<p>Now that was a fair and pleasant ride over the Downs and among +the forest paths through Sussex, and I look back on it as the +brightest time that I had had in all the long years of trouble. The +joy of going back to my old home at Bures had been clouded with the +knowledge of loss, and with the sight of the trail of war. But here +were none of these things.</p> +<p>We rode with twenty housecarles of Relf's behind us, and it was +a new thing to me that I should see the wayside folk run out into +the trackway to see us pass; that the farm thralls in the fields +should but rise up, straightening stiffened backs and laughing, and +stay their work for a moment to watch us; that no man who met us +should ask with anxious face, "What news of the Danes?"</p> +<p>New it was, and most pleasant to Uldra also, for she had come +through all the harried land, where the click of steel or the glint +of armour had bidden the poor folk fly in terror, so that one rode +through silent and deserted villages, and past farms where nought +but the dogs told of life about the place. And that was what I had +seen over all England since Swein of Denmark landed, so long ago. +Men will hardly believe it now. Relf could hardly believe us as we +told him. Yet today, were I to ride into an East Saxon village +shouting "The Danes!" there are men who would cast down tools and +all else that they were busied with, and clutch at the weapons that +rust on the wall before thought could come to them. For the terror +of these years cannot pass from England yet while any man is alive +who knew it.</p> +<p>Now there was another pleasure for me, and that was to watch +Uldra growing brighter and happier day by day. It was wonderful to +me to see this, and with me she was ever frank and open, never +wearying of speaking of our former journey and its troubles, for we +could smile at them now. And Relf grew very fond of her in those +few days, as one might see. Nor do I know how anyone could help +doing so. Even the rough housecarles would watch for a chance of +doing some little service for her.</p> +<p>And yet, as I have said, Uldra was not the fairest maiden that I +had seen. Men are apt to think that the fairest must ever be the +best, and a man learns that it is not so only by degrees, maybe. +And when I looked on Uldra's face it began to seem to me the best +that could be, and ever to me it would seem that I knew it well. +For some look of hers that should be new to me was not new--I had +expected it in some way, and should have wondered not to see it +cross her face. And so in gesture and in word also. So that she +seemed already well known to me, and why this was I could not say, +and at times it troubled me as puzzling things will. But, all the +same, I loved to find myself so puzzled.</p> +<p>Thus, by the time we came over the great spur of the Downs that +ends in Beachy Head, and looked over all Pevensea level to the +Penhurst woods and hills beyond, I and Uldra were very good +friends, and Relf was pleased that it should be so, and rode +between us in high content.</p> +<p>It was midday when we passed the last hill of the Downs where +the mighty giant lies like a shadow on the grass by Wilmington; +then we saw the gray castle where Wulfnoth bided, away to our +right; and then along the steep ridge inland and down to Boreham, +where I must tell the maiden of the great sea wave, and how Olaf +saved me. And so we came to Penhurst in its valley among the trees, +and the ride was over.</p> +<p>Now there is no need to say what welcome was at that house, +whether for its lord, or for the warrior who had been nursed back +to life there, or for the new-come homeless maiden. Relf was not +wrong when he told her that she should be as a daughter in the +house.</p> +<p>Some of the men had ridden on, so that the homecoming feast +should be spread for us, and there was the lady at the courtyard +gates, and with her Sexberga, and a tall, handsome young thane, +whom I knew for Eldred of Dallington; and there was Father Anselm, +and Spray the smith, and many more whose faces I was glad to see +again.</p> +<p>And among all those faces were nought but welcoming looks--save +from one only. I did not note this, being taken up with watching +how they greeted Uldra, for that seemed to me to be the only thing +that I cared about. If I had any thought of Sexberga now, it was as +if she had been my sister, and I hoped that she would be pleased +with the maiden who was thus brought to her unlooked for. I need +have troubled nought about that, however, for she and her mother +were alike in many things, and if I was sure of the one, so might I +have been of the other in all that had to do with kindness.</p> +<p>But if I had looked beyond Sexberga to where her young thane +stood I should have met with a black scowl enough, though I could +not have told why this should be his greeting for me. I had but +seen him once before, and that was at Earl Wulfnoth's feast to Olaf +when we first came.</p> +<p>That was an evening to be remembered as most pleasant when, +after the feast, we sat and spoke of all that had happened since I +left Penhurst. I told them all the tale of warfare, and of Olaf's +deeds, and of the winning back of my sword, and how that helped our +meeting with Egil.</p> +<p>And when Spray the smith, who sat listening, with the other men +in the hall below the high place, heard of that escape from the +Danes, he said, without ceremony:</p> +<p>"Master, well I knew that you would never be cast into +prison."</p> +<p>"That was a saying of yours, Spray," said I. "May the luck +last."</p> +<p>Then Uldra would tell the story of our journey in her way, and +my name came pretty often into her tale. So, looking about the hall +while she spoke, my eyes lit on Eldred, and it seemed that he was +ill at ease, and displeased with somewhat. I thought that he would +rather be sitting nearer Sexberga, maybe, and troubled nought about +him, though I did think that he showed his ill temper over plainly +in his face.</p> +<p>Now, in all this story telling there was one thing about which I +said nothing, and that was my search for Hertha. It seemed to me +that there was no need for doing so, and moreover, I would tell the +lady thereof in private at some time. And I was glad that Sexberga +asked me nought about it. I do not think that she had forgotten it, +but she had her own reasons for saying nought of the matter, which +were foolish enough when I found them out. The lady, her mother, +waited for me to say what I would in my own way when I thought +right.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch13" id="Ch13">Chapter 13</a>: Jealousy.</h2> +<p>That generous foe of mine, Egil--if indeed I should not call him +my friend, as he named me once--had set two months as the time in +which I must bide in peace, and I will not say that this space +seemed likely to go over-heavily for me. We could hear little news +except from such ships as put in from along the coast, and the +first news that came was when Godwine returned from Bosham.</p> +<p>The Danes had taken the queen to Winchester in high honour, and +there she was living in some sort of state, which pleased her well +enough, until word came from Cnut concerning her. It was thought +that he would let her go back to Normandy, keeping the athelings as +hostages. So concerning her and them my mind was at rest.</p> +<p>Now Cnut was besieging London. But before he had left Wessex, +there had been a great council of bishops and clergy at Salisbury, +and at that gathering he had been chosen as king in succession to +Ethelred, whose house was not loved. There, too, he was present, +and swore to be their faithful king and to protect Holy Church in +all things.</p> +<p>Then into Wessex went Eadmund, ravaging and laying waste there. +One might know what hatred of him would come from that, and my +heart sank at hearing this folly.</p> +<p>Two days after Godwine came, we saw the sails of a great fleet +going westward, and we thought that Cnut had been beaten off from +London. But a ship that had sprung a leak in some way put into +Wulfnoth's haven at Shoreham from this fleet, and from thence we +learnt that the Danes had halved their forces, and that Cnut and +Ulf the jarl were going again into the Severn to withstand Eadmund +in Wessex, and if possible to hem him in between two forces in the +old way of the days of Alfred. London was beset straitly, but not +taken yet.</p> +<p>I was more content then, for I could not have reached our king, +had I returned from Normandy, as it seemed. And now it was possible +that he might make headway against the divided forces of the Danes. +I might join him yet in time to share in some final victory.</p> +<p>So the early summer days at Penhurst became very pleasant to me, +for I had little care that need sit heavily on my mind. Indeed, I +think that I should almost have forgotten that I had any, but for +the foolishness of Sexberga, which bid fair to turn all things to +sadness at one time.</p> +<p>I had spoken with her mother about my search for Hertha, telling +her plainly all that had passed between me and Ailwin, and I asked +her to tell me what she thought I must do now.</p> +<p>"Wait yet longer," she answered; "peace will come, and he will +bring Hertha back to Bures."</p> +<p>That ought to have been my own plan, but I had rather hoped to +hear her say that I was right in holding myself free to choose +afresh as I would. The thought of being bound seemed irksome to me; +though why I, landless and luckless, should have found it so, I +could not say. It mattered not at all at present. So I said:</p> +<p>"That is all one can do, lady; it matters not."</p> +<p>"What thinks Sexberga?" I asked presently.</p> +<p>"You have not spoken to her of your search, then?" the lady +said. "I had thought that she would ask you of it first of +all."</p> +<p>She had asked nothing, and I had said nothing.</p> +<p>Then the lady said:</p> +<p>"She and I spoke thereof with Uldra but yesterday, and they were +both full of your praises for wishing to seek for your Hertha. They +will be glad to hear that you have done so, and sad that you have +failed to find her."</p> +<p>Then there came over me a wish that Uldra knew nought about it. +And that angered me with myself, because it was plain that I cared +overmuch for the company and pleasant voice and looks of this +maiden who was friendless as I.</p> +<p>So that was all that was said at the time, and I met Uldra in my +foolishness as if this were going to make some difference in her +way with me. Which of course it did not. Whereupon I was angrier +yet with myself for deeming that it would.</p> +<p>Now, there was another person who should have known of this +betrothal of mine, and that was Edred, but Sexberga never told him, +and her mother did not, for she thought that Sexberga would do +so.</p> +<p>Of all the foolish things that a maiden can do, the most foolish +is to try to make the man who is to wed her jealous. For it is +playing with edged tools in two ways--if the man, being an honest +man and trustful, is not jealous, the maiden thinks that he cares +not, and so is herself wretched. But if he is jealous, why, then +every thought of his towards the maiden is changed and spoilt, and +it will be long, if ever, before full trust is won again between +those two.</p> +<p>But this seems to be good sport to some damsels, and so it was +with Sexberga. The blacker grew the young thane's looks the more +she would praise me, and the more she would choose to speak with me +rather than to him; wherefore his life was made wretched for him, +and I think he hated the sight of me. Maybe I was blind not to see +this, but I liked him well enough, save for what I thought was his +sullen temper, and I would try to joke him into better humour at +times in all good fellowship. But I think that the trouble began +before I came back, with talk of the time when I had been at +Penhurst before.</p> +<p>He was ever at Penhurst--I should have thought ill of him if he +had not been--for Dallington was close at hand, and he was ever +welcome.</p> +<p>After that talk with the lady I must needs ask Sexberga what she +thought concerning my strange betrothal, she having had so much to +say thereon before. And so one day, as I had been with Spray to see +some traps set by the bank of the Ashbourne river for otter, and +was coming back with him, bearing a great one between us on a pole, +we met Sexberga in the woodland track to the house, and Spray went +on, while I walked back with her on her way to the old +village--where we had had the fight--and talked about my baffled +search.</p> +<p>Now her saying was that I had no need to pay any more heed to +this betrothal after what I had said to Ailwin, and that he himself +would seem to try to break it by thus taking Hertha out of my ken. +And we talked freely of the matter, and the last thing that I said +was this, coming round to what I had made up my better mind +for:</p> +<p>"It is not much matter either way. I can think of no maiden as +things are."</p> +<p>Whereon we met Eldred, and his face was not pleasant to look on, +though he said nothing at that moment, and turned and walked +silently with us on the other side of the maiden.</p> +<p>When we came to the village I said that we would wait outside +until she came back, and thought that Eldred would go along with +her. But he stayed with me, and I looked round for a sunny seat +where one could see all the long chain of bright hammer ponds that +went in steps, as it were, down the valley before us.</p> +<p>"Nay," he said in a strange voice, "come over to the other side +of the valley--there is a pleasant place there."</p> +<p>"The lady will miss us," said I.</p> +<p>"We need not be long," he said. "The place I would show you is +not far. One of us can be back before she has done with these +churls."</p> +<p>So, as I supposed that we might have to wait for half an hour, +because every woman in the place would want to tell her ailments to +the kindly young mistress most likely, we went together, passing +over the brook, and going up the steep valley side beyond it, until +we came to the rocks of the old quarry where we had rested before +the fight with the outlaws.</p> +<p>A pleasant place enough it was, truly, for the rocks stood round +in a little cliff, hemming in a lawn of short grass on every side +but one, and the trees that hung on the bank of the stream closed +that in. So when we were fairly within this circle of red cliff and +green trees Eldred said:</p> +<p>"This will do. We will see which of us is to go back to +Sexberga."</p> +<p>"Why, you will," said I, thinking that he had some device by +which he might be free from my presence. "I spoil company for you +both, and will go back to the hall by the lower track +presently."</p> +<p>"You have spoilt company long enough," he said, his face growing +very savage of a sudden. "Now I will end it, one way or the +other."</p> +<p>"What is this foolishness?" I said, seeing now what he +meant.</p> +<p>"You know well enough," he answered with a great oath. "Pluck +out that fine sword of yours and show that you can do more than +talk of using it."</p> +<p>"Come, Eldred," said I, "I have not deserved this."</p> +<p>"You deserve all that I shall give you," he answered, drawing +his sword. "Stand up like a man."</p> +<p>Now it seemed very hard to me that all these friendships should +be broken and spoilt by this foolish business, as they would be if +either of us was hurt; and so I tried to quiet him yet once +more.</p> +<p>"Eldred, listen to reason," I said. "I have done you no wrong. +Tell me of what you complain."</p> +<p>Thereat he only cursed, bidding me draw and cease prating.</p> +<p>"I will not fight you thus," I said, for he was growing over +wild to fight well for himself. "Let us find some to attend us and +watch the business, that neither of us may be blamed. It is ill to +slay a man in a hidden place like this with none to say that the +fight was fair."</p> +<p>"You are afraid," he said sneeringly.</p> +<p>"You must ask Relf if that is likely," said I, for I would not +be angered by his angry words. "But I do not care to risk blame to +you or me. Nought is gained by fighting thus."</p> +<p>"Ask Relf, forsooth!" he snarled. "I care not to hear again how +you lay hid in the pit yonder while others fought."</p> +<p>"Have a care, Eldred," I said then. "You grow heedless in your +anger, and go too far. I do not think that you mean this."</p> +<p>"Do you need to be called nidring {<a name="Glyph12" href= +"#Note12" id="Glyph12">12</a>}?" he snarled at me.</p> +<p>Now none heard that word pass between us, and though it made me +bitterly angry I kept my wrath back. Truly I began to think that I +was foolish to argue with him; but there would be grief, lifelong, +at Penhurst if deadly harm befell either of us where none could say +that all was fairly fought out.</p> +<p>"Are you not going?" he said in a choking sort of way.</p> +<p>"No," I said, "not until I know what all this is about."</p> +<p>"What good in going over that again?" he answered. "You know +well enough. Let me be--you have won."</p> +<p>"I know," said I; "but you have not told me aught. I can only +guess that you think that I have taken your place with +Sexberga."</p> +<p>"Aye--and now you have won it."</p> +<p>"I want it not," I answered. "Had you not been so angry you +would have known that, when I bid you go back and meet her without +me."</p> +<p>Now he looked at me with a sort of doubt, and said, in a +somewhat halting way:</p> +<p>"I heard you just now tell her that it could not be that you +could think of her--as things are."</p> +<p>Then I remembered what my last words had been, and I saw that +they might easily have misled him after all the trouble he seemed +to have had.</p> +<p>"You heard too much or too little," said I, being minded to +laugh, though the matter was over serious to him to let me do so. +"I spoke of my own troubles, which were the less because my +fortunes prevent my thinking of any maiden, seeing that I have no +home to give a wife when I find her. You were wrong in thinking +that I spoke of Sexberga--I spoke, as you might have known, of the +one whom I have lost."</p> +<p>"How should I know that? I know nought of your affairs."</p> +<p>Then thought I to myself that I would punish Sexberga, for she +had tortured this honest lover of hers over much.</p> +<p>"I will not tell you that tale. Ask Sexberga, who has known it +from the first."</p> +<p>Then I was sorry for what I had said, for he flushed darkly.</p> +<p>"I have been made a fool of," he said.</p> +<p>"Nay; but you should have been more trustful," said I. "Now, +were I in your place, I would go home to Dallington and bide there +for a week, and the maiden will be pleased enough to see you when +you return. And if she tries to make you jealous again, seem to +mind it not. There is little sport in it for her then."</p> +<p>"I suppose there would not be," said he, and he began to look +more cheerful.</p> +<p>"Now," said I, "I was betrothed long ago--the war time has come +between me and her who should have been my wife. I have hunted for +her and cannot find her--and that is all. Now you understand. It +was Sexberga who cheered me in my search, and so I spoke to her +thereof."</p> +<p>"I should not have doubted you," he said frankly; "forgive +me."</p> +<p>I held out my hand and he took it. There was nought but +friendliness in his grasp, and I could not blame him. I blamed +Sexberga wholly.</p> +<p>Then he laughed a little ruefully.</p> +<p>"I am a fool with a sword," he said. "Will you teach me +somewhat? I think I was mad when I used those evil words to +you."</p> +<p>"I have forgotten them," I answered; and so I had. One does not +think much of what a man says in utmost rage as his. "Come, let us +go back to the village."</p> +<p>So we went back together, but Sexberga had gone on her way +homeward without us. Whereat Eldred was not sorry, and said that he +was going back to his own place.</p> +<p>"You will see me no more for a few days," he said. "I think your +plan is good."</p> +<p>"Mind this," I answered, "I never tried it."</p> +<p>"Lookers-on see best," he answered, laughing bitterly. "But +think no more of my anger with yourself, I pray you."</p> +<p>I told him that I would not, and so we parted good friends +enough, though I feared that he might take this matter to heart in +such wise that he would have some ill moments presently. There was +little spring in his walk as he took the path towards +Dallington.</p> +<p>I said nought of this affair, as one might suppose, and made +little excuse to Sexberga for leaving her. We had walked too far, +and had returned too late to find her, I said. She pouted and said +nothing, but I thought that her punishment had already begun.</p> +<p>Next day there were ships heading in for Pevensea, and I rode +away to find out what I could, and forgot Eldred and his troubles. +For Olaf had come, and that was luck beyond what I could have +looked for.</p> +<p>The ten great ships slid into the haven, and I was first on the +strand to meet the king. Wulfnoth and Godwine were riding inland, +and doubtless were returning posthaste if they knew that ships had +come. But for a little while I had my kinsman to myself, and great +was his wonder to find me in this place.</p> +<p>"I have thought that I should have to ransom you from Cnut's +hand," he said, "for we have heard that Thorkel's men took the +queen's ship. Were you not taken likewise?"</p> +<p>So when he heard of all that had brought me here, he praised +Egil highly.</p> +<p>"He is a Norseman, and no Dane, by birth," he said. "One may be +proud that he is so. I would that he were my man."</p> +<p>Then was my turn, and I wondered how Olaf had left London, for +the Thames was full of Danish ships, as I had heard.</p> +<p>"Aye, so it is yet," he told me. "The Danes cannot take the +city, try what they will, though they dug a great ditch round the +Southwark fort, and took ships through it above the bridge, and so +kept us shut up close enough. But walls and forts and citizens are +too much for them. Now the siege is but a blind, while the real +warfare is to be in Wessex. So I came away with the Danes, my men +being tired of unprofitable warfare where we were not wanted, and +gaining, moreover, neither gold nor honour."</p> +<p>"You came away with the Danes?" I cried. "Surely you made no +pact with them?"</p> +<p>"Not I," said he. "But they sailed with an evening tide, which +was my chance. Ten ships among four hundred or so make no odds. We +took off the dragon heads, and when it was quite dark rowed down +after them, and so caught them up at Greenwich. Then we slipped +through the fleet easily, for it was mostly of cargo ships full of +men, and no one paid any heed to us, as might be supposed. So by +daylight we led the fleet, or nearly, and when the next night came +we stood away from it, going across Channel. Then I came here to +see if Wulfnoth or Godwine would cruise with me on some other +shore, as I promised."</p> +<p>Then I asked him what I had better do, for with the sight of his +face came the longing to be free again.</p> +<p>"Come with me," he said. "I am going to win ransom from a town +or two against the time when I shall need gold wherewith to win men +to me in Norway."</p> +<p>I think that I should have done this in the end, though I did +not like to leave England without striking one more blow for +Eadmund, and I cannot deny that I thought that Uldra would blame me +if I did leave our land when she needed every sword that would +strike for her. I had come to think very much of what the steadfast +eyes of the brave maiden would tell me as I watched her face.</p> +<p>But that evening came Wulfnoth and Godwine, and they had made a +plan for themselves which might help me to reach Eadmund when my +freedom came. They had manors on the Severn, at Berkeley, and the +earl would go there to save them if possible from plunder. At +least, that is what he told me and Olaf. Whether he had any other +deeper plan I cannot say. It seemed afterwards as if that might be +so.</p> +<p>They brought back some strange news, too, at which both Olaf and +I wondered. There was a rumour spreading through the country from +Winchester that Cnut would wed Emma the queen.</p> +<p>"It is not likely," said Olaf. "She is twenty years older than +he."</p> +<p>"If any man wants revenge on Cnut, I would counsel him to go and +do all he can to see that this marriage comes to pass," sneered the +earl, in his hatred of the Norman lady.</p> +<p>"What says Redwald?" asked Godwine.</p> +<p>"First, that the queen has little choice in the matter," said I; +"and next, that, between ourselves, I think that she would do much +to remain a queen in truth, if it must be over Denmark instead of +England; and lastly, that if Cnut weds her, he keeps the duke, her +brother, quiet, and maybe brings over more of our people to his +side."</p> +<p>It was only too plain now that Cnut had a party for him in +England, and I thought that he tried to strengthen it thus, if the +report were true. But it seemed hardly possible; so much so, that +when I turned the question over in speaking with Olaf presently, we +thought that no man could have invented the story, and that it must +be true.</p> +<p>Now Olaf and I went to Penhurst on the next day, for though he +would not stop long in England, he would see and thank these good +friends of mine for their care of me. And great was the rejoicing +when he came.</p> +<p>I had told him of Uldra, and presently he bade Ottar, who was +with us, sing of Leavenheath fight, and so spoke quietly with her, +sitting a little apart in the shadow of the hall, for he wished to +tell her also that he owed her thanks.</p> +<p>When the end of the long summer day came, and he must go back to +the ships--for he would not sleep away from them--I went with him +in order to see all that I might of him before he left, for I had +made up my mind to go westward with Godwine, seeing that my promise +to Egil was to bide in peace with Wulfnoth till the time came when +I was free.</p> +<p>So as we rode with no other near us, he said:</p> +<p>"What of Hertha, my cousin?"</p> +<p>"I know not," I answered. "I have heard nought, nor shall I now +till I go back to Bures."</p> +<p>"Shall you hold to your betrothal?"</p> +<p>"Aye; the ladies think that it is my part to do so."</p> +<p>"So you asked them? Is that why fair Sexberga is so dull and +restless?"</p> +<p>I laughed, for he had heard Ottar jesting about the fair maid at +Penhurst more than once.</p> +<p>"No," I answered. "She has been crossing her lover, and he is in +dudgeon for a while--that is all."</p> +<p>"I am glad," he said. "Asked you aught of Uldra?"</p> +<p>"I have not spoken of it to her."</p> +<p>"Is that so?" said Olaf, smiling. "Now she is likely to have +more than common interest in you, for one reason or another."</p> +<p>Then I said frankly, knowing what he meant:</p> +<p>"And I in her. That is partly the reason why I must go with +Wulfnoth and Godwine westward. And the rest of the reason is this, +that I would be near Eadmund. And maybe if I looked to find more +reason yet it would be to leave Sexberga to work out matters +without having me to fall back on when Eldred is to be made +jealous."</p> +<p>Thereat Olaf laughed long.</p> +<p>"You have had an ill time with the womenfolk of late," he said, +and it was true enough.</p> +<p>"I have," said I, "and I am tired thereof. I shall be glad to be +where byrnies and swords are more common than kirtles and +distaffs."</p> +<p>Yet in my mind I knew that I should not leave Uldra with much +cheerfulness. Such companionship as ours had been, strange and full +of peril, was a closer bond than even the care of me that had made +me think twice or more about Sexberga. Thoughts of her came lightly +in idleness, but when I thought of Uldra, there was comradeship +that had borne the strain of peril.</p> +<p>Now I knew well what that comradeship might easily ripen into, +and maybe, because I knew it, what I would not allow had begun. But +Uldra had never given me any reason to think that this was so with +her.</p> +<p>Olaf said that maybe I was right, and after that we talked of +his doings, wondering now when we should meet again, for we were +going different ways. Our parting was not as it had been before, +when we knew that sooner or later we should forgather in one place +or the other.</p> +<p>"I think, my cousin," he said, "that the time will soon come +when I shall head north again for Norway, and I long for the sign +that I must go. I am going to sail now towards Jerusalem Land, that +I may at least try to see the Holy Places before I die. It may be +that I shall reach that land, and it may be not, but when the sign +comes I must turn back and go to fight the last fight that shall be +between Christian and heathen in our country."</p> +<p>So he said to me before his ship sailed with the morning tide. +And I had no words in which to answer him, for his going seemed to +leave me friendless again, so much had we been at one together. +Almost had I taken up that journey to the Holy Land with him, but I +thought that if it was a good and pious thing to go on that +pilgrimage for myself, it was even more so to bide for the sake of +king and country here in the land that should be holy for all of us +who are English. And when I said that to Olaf, he smiled brightly +and answered:</p> +<p>"If old Norway called for me, I would say the same. You are +right."</p> +<p>Thus we parted, and I watched his sails fade and sink into the +rim of the southern sea, and then rode back to Relf feeling as if +the time to come had little brightness for me.</p> +<p>I went slowly, and by the longer way, for I had much to think +of, and I cared not just yet for the light talk of the happy people +in the Penhurst hall. And so I came into the way that leads across +the woodland through Ashburnham and so by the upper hammer ponds to +Penhurst, and when I was about a mile from the hall I met Uldra +coming from a side track.</p> +<p>"Why, thane," she said in her bright way, "is aught amiss?"</p> +<p>"I have lost my kinsman, lady," I said, "and I have none other +left me. Therefore I am sad enough. But these things must be, and +the shadow of parting will pass presently."</p> +<p>I got off my horse and walked beside her, and I was glad that I +had met her first of all. She had been to some sick thrall, and was +now returning.</p> +<p>"Partings are hard," she said, "but one may always hope to meet +again."</p> +<p>Then I said, speaking my thoughts:</p> +<p>"I must go west into Wessex with the earl's ships, and I have +more partings to come therefore."</p> +<p>She made no answer at once, and I thought that none was needed; +but when she spoke again her voice was graver than before.</p> +<p>"You would be near our king if possible by doing so?"</p> +<p>"That is my thought," I answered. "If I wait in this pleasant +place I may be far from him when the day comes that I should stand +at his side again."</p> +<p>"You have six weeks--not so much by two days--yet," she said +thoughtfully. "It is not long. Then you will be fighting once +more."</p> +<p>"I hope so--and not in vain at last," I answered. "All our land +longs for peace."</p> +<p>"Aye, and they tell me that you have a search to make," she +said, looking away across the woodlands that lay down the valley to +our right. "I fear there will be sorrow if--if you fall."</p> +<p>"Aye, I have a search that has been made hard for me," I said +somewhat bitterly. "Truly I had not thought of falling; but it is +in my mind that little grief will be in that quarter if I do so. +Those who might have ended the search in an hour or two have kept +their charge more deeply hidden than ever from me."</p> +<p>"Is that the maiden's doing, think you?" she said, hesitating a +little, for the question was not an easy one for her to put, maybe. +But it was like her to make excuse for others.</p> +<p>"I cannot tell," said I, "but I think it likely. We were but +children, and she fears me now."</p> +<p>"That is to be seen," she said; "but I hope that you will find +her. What shall you do if--if she loves you not now?"</p> +<p>"I would let her go free, surely."</p> +<p>"Even if you found you loved her yet?"</p> +<p>"Aye. I would not hold her bound were she unwilling."</p> +<p>"But if it were the other way--if she would wed you willingly, +and you--well, were unwilling?"</p> +<p>"I would keep troth," said I; "she should not know it."</p> +<p>She laughed softly and answered:</p> +<p>"You could not hide that from her."</p> +<p>Then I fell silent, for I liked not this subject at any +time--still less from Uldra. And I think that she saw that I was +displeased at her questioning, for after a little while she said +shyly:</p> +<p>"I think that I have asked you too closely about your affairs. +Forgive me--women are anxious about such matters."</p> +<p>"It is a trouble to me, lady," I said, hardening my heart lest I +should say too much; "but I can see no further than the coming +warfare. When that is ended there will be time for me to think more +thereof. But, as I have said, I believe that Hertha wishes that she +were not bound."</p> +<p>Now I had almost said "even as I wish," but I stopped in +time.</p> +<p>"Now, whether that is so or not, she should think well of you +for your faith kept to her," Uldra said, and there was a little +shake in her voice as of tears close at hand.</p> +<p>Then I knew that if she kept faith with me as I with her--though +this was in a poor way enough--I must think well of her also. +Wherefore, being obliged thus to think of one another, it would be +likely enough that there would be pretence of love on both +sides--and so things would be bad. Whereupon the puzzle in my mind +grew more tangled yet, and I waxed savage, being so helpless.</p> +<p>And all the while those two words that came to me as I talked to +Relf grew plainer, and seemed to ring in my ears unspoken, +"<i>Landless and luckless--landless and luckless</i>," for that was +what it all came to.</p> +<p>Then Uldra looked at me and saw the trouble in my face, and took +what seemed to her to be the only way to help me.</p> +<p>"You cannot think of these matters now, Redwald," she said +softly. "It is well for a warrior that he has none who is bound to +him so closely that he must ever think of her. It is well for +Hertha that she knows not what peril you are in--that she cannot +picture you to herself--"</p> +<p>She stopped with a sob that she could not check, and stayed her +walk as if she had tripped. I turned to her, and put out my hand, +and she leant on my arm with both hers for a moment, hanging her +head down, and I thought she was faint, for my pace had quickened. +So I waited till she raised her head again, longing to help her +more and yet not daring to do so, lest I should give way altogether +and say all I would. And then I said:</p> +<p>"Let me set you on the horse--you are weary with keeping step +with me."</p> +<p>She shook her head, but she said nothing, and so I lifted her +and set her in the saddle, and the colour came back to her +face.</p> +<p>"Thanks, thane," she said, "I am very foolish. I have been +setting myself in your Hertha's place--as if she knew aught of you +now. Aye, it is better as it is for both of you, as things must be +for a while."</p> +<p>And I thought to myself:</p> +<p>"Would that you were in Hertha's place;" and then this other +thought, "She says right--landless and luckless am I, and there is +none to trouble about me--nor shall there be."</p> +<p>"But I was going to tell you this, if I may," she said, "I will +pray night and day that things may be well for you and yours in the +end."</p> +<p>"Aye, pray therefor, Uldra," I answered, and thereafter we said +no more, for the hall gates were before us, and the dogs came out +to bid us welcome, and the thralls followed them to see who came. I +helped her from the horse, and she smiled and went in.</p> +<p>Now, I saw Uldra no more that night, and Sexberga was unfriendly +with me because Eldred still kept away. So I had my thoughts to +myself while Relf slept as was his wont after supper, and the lady +of the house turned her wheel as ever. I think that I would not +wish any man to have such strange and sad thoughts as mine were at +that time. There was nought of which I could be sure--save of +Uldra's friendship, and of that it were better not to think, +maybe.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch14" id="Ch14">Chapter 14</a>: The Last Great +Battle.</h2> +<p>Ten days after I spoke thus with Uldra I was at Berkeley with +Wulfnoth and Godwine. That was in the third week in June, while I +was on my honour not to fight for a month yet. I had parted from +Uldra as from a dear friend and no more, though well I knew now +that she was more than that to me. And there had been a look in her +face, moreover, that bided with me, making me wretched and yet +glad, for it told me that her thoughts were as mine. And more than +that neither of us would show. The tide of war had hold of me, and +whither it would drift me none could say. Nor did I lose much. I +had nought to lose as it seemed to me.</p> +<p>As for the rest of those who were such good friends of mine at +Penhurst, they had wished me hearty God-speeds, bidding me return +again, and that soon. Eldred of Dallington and Sexberga stood hand +in hand as I went, vowing that they would not be content till I +returned for their wedding, for there was no trouble between them +since the young thane had come in from his place one day as if +nought had happened, calling me to walk with him when Sexberga had +feigned to wish for none of his company. After which he had talked +lightly of going to Wessex with the earl and me; and he had no +further trouble. I know not what he said presently in private to +Sexberga, but he was the one who led thereafter, and I think that +the maiden was the happier that it was so. There are some maids who +will seem to wish to rule, though they are longing all the while to +be ruled.</p> +<p>So we came up the Severn river to Berkeley, passing the endless +lines of Danish ships that lay along the strand below Anst cliffs +and Oldbury. Cnut's ship guard held the ancient fort in force, men +said. His men boarded us, but Wulfnoth's name was well known, and +it was not Cnut's plan to make an enemy of him. So we went on our +way unhindered, and I bided, chafing sorely, in the great house +where Wulfnoth lived in no state at all, as if he were but a rich +franklin--gray clad and rough in ways and talk.</p> +<p>Now it is hard to me to think of what passed so close to me +while I was helpless. But I saw nought of the battle that was at +Pen-Selwood, and even as I heard thereof from men who had left the +levy, the greatest battle of all was being fought within a +morning's ride of us, at Sherston.</p> +<p>Two days that battle raged, and all men say that Eadmund would +surely have chased the Danes in the end to their ships, but for a +trick of Edric Streone's. It was another count in the long score +against him, and I seemed to see that the words of the witch of +Senlac were coming true--his shadow was over our king, for ill in +all things.</p> +<p>The battle was going against Cnut--once Eadmund himself had cut +his way through the press of Danes before their king, and had +almost come to hand strokes with him, but had been borne back. And +then Streone's eyes lit on one Osmer, a warrior of the Danish host, +standing near him, and he saw that he was like our king. Therefore +he slew him, and set his head on a spear, and rode forward to where +the English line pressed most hardly on the Danish ranks. There he +raised the head aloft, shouting in his great voice:</p> +<p>"Fly, English, fly! Eadmund is dead. Know his head!"</p> +<p>Then for a moment panic seized our folk, and they held their +hands, and in that pause Ulf the jarl charged among them, and the +line was broken and flight began.</p> +<p>But Eadmund unhelmed when he heard the cry that he was slain, +and rode through the ranks, and our men knew him, and cheered, and +fell on the Danes afresh, and the broken line closed up, and they +fought till night fell, and in the night the Danes drew off. And in +the night by twos and threes, and then in companies, Eadmund's +levies melted away from him, for his men were worn out and sick of +slaughter, and knew not enough to bid them stay to follow their +foes and turn retreat into rout, and doubt into victory. The Danes +were going, they saw and heard; what need to stay longer?</p> +<p>So it came to pass that nothing was wrought by that awful +fighting, and both sides claimed victory, for our men deemed that +they had won, and the Danes claimed it because they were not +followed, and because Ulf the jarl had cut through our line.</p> +<p>It was through this last that I lost Godwine as a companion. For +Ulf lost himself in the forest that was in the rear of our forces, +because he followed the flying too far, and the dusk of the evening +was close at hand. He thought that the victory was surely won, for +it had ever been that the first sign of flight was followed by rout +of our men. At least the Danes learnt this at Sherston, that +Eadmund could hold his own against them.</p> +<p>So Ulf the jarl wandered all night in the wood, and came out of +it on the hillside where Godwine was speaking to one of his +father's shepherds. And Godwine brought him, unknowing who he was, +back to Berkeley.</p> +<p>Then maybe came into Wulfnoth's mind that rede of the witch of +Senlac, that bade Godwine mind his sheep, and so find his place, or +else this was part of the plan which had brought him into Wessex. +For he asked Ulf to take Godwine to Cnut, and find him a place in +his court, and the jarl did so. It was not until Godwine came to +the ships that he knew who it was that he had guided, and they won +him over, and he stayed.</p> +<p>Nor did I know. I spoke with Ulf, asking him of the battle, and +of Egil, and the like, for he was the earl's guest. And I thought +nothing of Godwine's guidance of a Dane to the ships, for the earl +was no foe of Cnut. But when I rose in the morning after Ulf had +come, and found that he and Godwine had gone in the night, and was +told by Wulfnoth who the warrior was, and what he had asked for his +son, I was very angry, though I knew that the earl had little cause +to love the house of Ethelred.</p> +<p>But the earl said, very quietly:</p> +<p>"There are two kings in England, and no king of England. Choice +is free to me, and I choose that king who will honour my son, and +who has done me no wrong. Were you to go to Cnut I would hold you +blameworthy, seeing how things have been between you and Eadmund. +Godwine goes to Cnut even as he flies to his ships. No man may say +that he did but join him when he was victor."</p> +<p>Now, it was not Wulfnoth's way to give reasons thus for aught +that he did, and I was surprised that he would do so to me. But I +could look at things in his way if I put my own love for Eadmund +aside, and I said:</p> +<p>"I may not blame you, lord earl, maybe; but it is hard for me to +see my friend take what I think the wrong side."</p> +<p>"Think no ill of him. It is my doing," Wulfnoth said. "All his +life has Godwine been bidden to hate the house of Ethelred of +Wessex. Now before long this warfare must end. And if your king has +the victory I pray you speak for Godwine if need is. And if Cnut is +victor you will need Godwine, maybe, to speak for you. Let this +matter bide there between us. I would now that I had not let him +go, for I am lonely."</p> +<p>Then I knew why the fierce old earl unbent to speak thus to me, +and I spoke only of honour to be gained in the service of so great +a king as Cnut.</p> +<p>Thereafter the time went very heavily for me. The great Danish +fleet left the Severn on the day when Godwine would have come to +them, and then Eadmund must gather another levy, and prepare for +some fresh landing. And before that was done I was free again, and +I could join him with a light heart. The earl gave me a good horse +when I rode away, and parted with me very kindly for Godwine's +sake, he said, and his own liking for me also.</p> +<p>"I shall look for you at Pevensea yet. Come to me when things go +ill with you, and you shall be welcome."</p> +<p>I knew not if ever I should see Sussex again. But of this I was +sure now, that if fortune went with me presently, I would surely +seek Ailwin and tell him that I must be free, and so would seek +Uldra, and ask her to share what I might have to give her, if a +home should be mine again. I had thought much of this brave, quiet +maiden while I was chafing at doing nought in Wulfnoth's farmstead, +though I would not have stayed at Penhurst.</p> +<p>Now came a time when the victory was ours, and it seemed that at +last the strong hand had come. For men would follow Eadmund, and he +had the power of making them fight as he would. Yet there was +nothing that would keep our levies together. Had they done so we +had surely conquered, but it was ever the same. They fought and +dispersed, and all the work and loss was for nought. I think it +would have been the same with the Danish host had they been in +their own country; but here they must needs hold together, and Cnut +and his jarls wielded that mighty force as a man wields his sword. +Eadmund smote as a man who fells his enemy with a staff that breaks +in the smiting, so that he must needs seek another while his fallen +foe rises again, sword in hand.</p> +<p>But our men were called from home and fireside to fight, and +when they won and their own fields and houses were safe, they +thought they had done all, and went home again, at ease, and maybe +boasting overmuch.</p> +<p>We marched on London and relieved the city, driving the Danes in +flight to their ships. And Eadmund slept that night among a great +host; and in the morning the Wessex men were going home, and only +his own housecarles and the men who followed him from ruined Mercia +and East Anglia and Kent would bide around him. London could take +care of herself now. But Eadmund strove to gather them for one more +blow, and we had a great fight at Brentford, for the Danes had gone +up river, and we won. Yet the Danes turned on us when the ships +were reached, and we lost many men in the river, for they scattered +in their eagerness to plunder the ships that they thought were +already won, and so, without order or leaders, were driven to their +death in the swift water.</p> +<p>Then Wessex disbanded, and all the work of gathering our forces +must be done over again; and at once the Danes closed in round +London when Eadmund had gone back to Salisbury.</p> +<p>Surely it would have broken the heart of any man but Eadmund the +Ironside that thus it must be, but he would say:</p> +<p>"England is waking; we shall win yet."</p> +<p>Then Cnut recalled the ships and host from London, and they +raised the siege, and went into the Orwell, and once again began to +march across the heart of our land.</p> +<p>This fourth levy that Eadmund the king had made was the best +that he had had. And word must have come thereof to the Danes, for +they went back to their fleet; and so waited for a little while, +thinking doubtless that this levy would melt away in idleness as +ever. For they came back into the Medway with the booty they had, +and there we fell on them and drove them headlong to their ships, +and I surely thought that we had done with Cnut for good and +all.</p> +<p>Then fell the shadow of ill on us. Edric Streone and his men met +us at Aylesford, and he came in to the king and made most humble +submission to him.</p> +<p>And that was what Olaf had told Eadmund would happen when once +again he had the victory. Therefore when I saw the earl come into +the camp to speak with Eadmund I said:</p> +<p>"Mind you what Olaf said. How that you should hang Streone."</p> +<p>"Aye, I mind it. But the man is deserted by his new friends. +They have gone."</p> +<p>Almost had Eadmund quarrelled with Olaf on that saying.</p> +<p>"Put him in ward, my king, at least," I urged, and Ulfkytel, who +had come with us from London, prayed him also to do so.</p> +<p>But Eadmund's fate was on him, and he received his foster father +kindly, and forgave him, and thought that all would be well.</p> +<p>Now with Ulfkytel came my Colchester men, or rather the thirty +who were left, And those two brothers, Thrand and Guthorm, who had +ridden to Stamford with me were there also. These two came to me +that evening when I was alone, and said that they had a plan they +would carry out if I gave the word. And it was nothing more or less +than that they would fall on Edric Streone and slay him when and +where they met him.</p> +<p>I would that they had not asked me, but had wrought the deed on +their own account. But I said that I could not have this done, for +it was too much after Streone's own manner of settling things. I +could not think of letting my men lie in wait for any foe of mine, +however good cause I had for hating him. And I did hate Streone +with a hate that I am not ashamed of, not for my own sake, but +because he was a traitor to both king and country. There were +Englishmen who fought for Cnut thinking that thus they wrought best +for England and her peace--as Wulfnoth chose for Godwine--and I had +no hatred for them. They were honest if they were wrong; but they +were no traitors. But Edric Streone was as Judas to me.</p> +<p>So Thrand and Guthorm grumbled, and forbore, though they would +have spent their own lives willingly in this way had I lifted a +finger. It was, however, in revenge for the Stamford business that +they would slay the earl, and that was only my quarrel, nothing +higher. Nevertheless I owed them thanks for their love thus shown +to me, and so I told them. Little had I done to deserve it; but who +shall know what wins the love of rough souls like these?</p> +<p>Strange news came with Streone, though I had heard rumours +thereof before, as I have said. It was true that Cnut was to wed +Emma the queen; and they had, as it seemed, already been betrothed, +at the advice of the three great jarls. Now she and the athelings +her sons were back in Normandy, and one might see what the reason +of this policy was, Not only was Duke Richard kept quiet, but also +Cnut was stepfather to Eadward Atheling and his brothers. That +meant that if Cnut won, they must needs suffer him to take the +crown unopposed. And more than this, if Cnut must leave England +alone presently, when Eadmund died he would claim the throne at +once, either for himself or for one of these athelings as his +under-king. For no man ever thought twice of Eadmund's brother +Edwy, who was weak bodily, nor of his half brother, the other Edwy, +whom we called "king of the churls," by reason of the low birth of +his mother, for no thanes would follow him had he had the gift of +leading.</p> +<p>Cnut's fleet went from the Medway northward, and it was in the +thoughts of all men that the end had come, and that he sought his +own land at last. And that seemed the more certain to most because +Streone had submitted, as if he knew that he had no further hope of +honour from the Danish king. Presently, however, it was plain that +his coming over was but part of the deepest plot that he had yet +made.</p> +<p>Suddenly, even as our levies dispersed in spite of all the +king's entreaties, came the news that the Danish fleet had turned +and was in the Crouch river in Essex, whence already the host had +begun their march inland across Mercia in the old way. And so for +the fifth time Eadmund strove to gather all England to him, and his +summons was well obeyed. The thanes and their men gathered in +haste, savage with hope deferred, and Cnut shrank back again to +Ashingdon on the Crouch, and there built himself an earthwork on +the south side of the river, while his ships lay on the further +shore at Burnham, and in the anchorage, and along the mud below the +earthworks, seeming countless. And there he waited for us, and +there we knew that he meant to end the warfare in one great fight +for mastery, with his ships behind him that he might go if he were +at last obliged.</p> +<p>And there, too, though we knew it not, he waited for Streone to +give England into his hands.</p> +<p>We were close on him when his main force fell back upon his +earthworks, where they stand on the little hill above the river +banks that men will call "Cnut's dune" {<a name="Glyph13" href= +"#Note13" id="Glyph13">13</a>} henceforward, in memory of what he +won there. And Ulfkytel and I and the few East Anglians that we had +were with the advance guard, and drove in the pickets that were +between us and the hill. And then we knew that Cnut meant to stand +and fight in the open, and we were glad, for out of his +intrenchments poured his men, and we sent horsemen back to Eadmund +to hurry on the main body of our forces.</p> +<p>They were a mile or two behind us, and we waited impatiently, +watching the Danish host as it neared us, forming into the terrible +half circle as it came. And I remember all of that waiting, for the +day began with such hope, and ended so fearfully for us.</p> +<p>One could not have had a better day on which to fight, for there +was neither sun to dazzle, nor rain to beat in the faces of men who +needed eyes to guard their lives. But it was a gray day with a +pleasant wind that blew in from the sea, and the light was +wonderfully clear and shadowless as before rain, so that one could +see all things over-plainly, as it were. The rounded top of +Ashingdon hill seemed to tower higher than its wont, and close at +hand, beyond the swampy meadows to our left, and I wondered that +Cnut had not chosen that for his camping ground, though maybe it +would have been less well placed for reaching the ships, owing to +some shoaling of water that did not suit them. The tide was nearly +high now, and all the wide stretch of the Crouch river was alive +with the ships that brought over men from the Burnham shore, and +one could see the very wake and the ripple at the bows as they +came.</p> +<p>And when one looked at the Danes, the chiefs who ordered the +host were plain to be seen, and the gay colours of banners and +cloaks and shields were wonderful in the brightness, though at +first we were nearly half a mile from them as we waited. I thought +that we were about equal to them in numbers, and I knew that did we +but fight as at Sherston the day would surely be ours. For when a +force that is hard pressed knows that safety is close behind them +there is an ever-present reason for giving way.</p> +<p>"We can drive this host to the ships, lord earl," I said to +Ulfkytel.</p> +<p>"Aye, surely," he answered. "They know that the ships wait for +them, and so will give back."</p> +<p>Now came Eadmund, and behind him our men marched steadily, and +at his side was Edric Streone. He looked at the Danes, and his face +was bright and confident.</p> +<p>"How shall we fight, lord earl?" he said to Ulfkytel.</p> +<p>"Redwald and I have spoken thereof," the earl answered. "And it +seems to us that Olaf's viking plan is best. Let us fight in a +wedge, and drive the point through that circle and break it in +twain. We of East Anglia will willingly make the point, as we are +on our own ground."</p> +<p>"It is a good plan, but I have not tried it," said Eadmund; and +then Streone spoke.</p> +<p>"The old Saxon line is surely good enough," he said. "What need +to take up with outland plans?"</p> +<p>"It will be good enough if our men fight as at Sherston," +Eadmund answered.</p> +<p>And all the thanes who were gathering round him cried out that +they would surely not fail him, and one could not but listen to the +voice of all the noblest in England who were gathered there, for +Eadmund had all his best with him. It was indeed a levy of all +England.</p> +<p>So we were to fight in line, as Eadmund had given us our places +on the day before, when we neared the battlefield. He himself was +in the centre with his Wessex men, and Edric Streone and his +Mercians were with him. There were some of us who had cried out at +that, but the earl had said proudly that he would make amends for +former ill, and the council had listened to and believed his +words.</p> +<p>Ulfkytel was on the left, and there our line was flanked by the +marshes that lie between the long slope where we were to fight and +Ashingdon hill. At least he would have no horsemen upon him from +the side, and that flank was safe from turning. The right wing was +given to the Lindsey men under their own ealdorman, and with them +were the men of the Five Boroughs {<a name="Glyph14" href="#Note14" +id="Glyph14">14</a>}.</p> +<p>So our line was drawn up, and Eadmund rode out before them and +they cheered, and then he unhelmed, and Bishop Ednoth of +Dorchester, clad in his robes over chain mail, and with a heavy +mace at his saddle bow, rode up beside him, and a monk who was with +him brought forward and raised aloft a golden cross, and at that +sign the host knelt, and the bishop shrived them and blessed them +before the fight, and the sound of the "Amen" they spoke was like a +thunder roll from end to end of the line. And it reached the ears +of the Danes who waited for us, and they broke out into their war +song--the Heysaa--and thereat our men sprang up and shouted thrice, +and then the sullen silence of the Saxon kin settled down on them, +for we are not wont to speak much when work is meant.</p> +<p>Silently we crossed the heath between us and the yelling Danes, +and I rode beside Eadmund in my old place, and my heart was light, +and sword Foe's Bane rattled in the scabbard as if longing to be +let loose. And all the while I kept my eyes on Streone, who was +riding among his Mercians twenty yards away to our right, and +presently behind him I saw Thrand and Guthorm.</p> +<p>I thought that was ill for Streone, but I could not help it +now--we were but a hundred yards from the foe. The first arrow +flight crossed as I saw them, and then Eadmund cried:</p> +<p>"Forward--remember Sherston!"</p> +<p>At that word the front ranks sprang like wolves to meet one +another--and then came the shock of the meeting lines and the howl +and cheer of Dane and Englishman--and under the arrow storm the +spear and axe and sword were at work.</p> +<p>I kept my shield up and covering Eadmund's right side, and +watched. The time for us to take our part had not come yet. And +Eadmund looked on his foes to see what chance might be for a charge +that would break them when arms grew weary.</p> +<p>Many were the brave deeds that I saw done in that little time, +as the first lines fought man to man. And presently I knew that +over against us was Cnut the king, for I saw one who was little +more than a boy, whose helm bore a golden crown. There were several +chiefs round him also, and one was Ulf. But I saw not Godwine, for +he would not fight on that day against his own kin.</p> +<p>There, too, was another chief--he was Eirik the jarl, though I +knew it not then; and he looked ever to our right, as if waiting +for somewhat. And when I saw that I looked also, but there was +nought that I could see. Our whole line was fighting well, and this +first attack had brought no faltering on either side.</p> +<p>Then said Eadmund to me:</p> +<p>"Let us make a dash for my stepfather yonder," pointing to +Cnut--and even as he said it the brave bishop on his left threw up +his arms and fell from his horse, smitten in the face with a +javelin, and Eadmund leapt down to help him.</p> +<p>As he did so I heard a shout raised that he was slain.</p> +<p>Then was a roar from our right like nothing that I had ever +heard--I pray that none may ever hear the like again--and I turned +and looked to see what was on hand, and I saw the Mercians going +backward, and Streone's horse was heading away from the Danes; and +then the men of the Five Boroughs howled and fell on Dane and +Mercian alike, cursing and smiting like madmen.</p> +<p>And I saw my two men leap up among the press and smite over the +heads of those around them at Streone, and they were smitten +down--they had not touched him.</p> +<p>That was all in a moment, and I called to the king, and he rose +up and leapt on his horse and looked. And as he did so the +Mercians, Streone's men, wheeled round and fell on our flank, +fighting for the Danes, and the Danish line swept the Stamford men +from before them and joined the Mercians; and I heard a great sob +rise in Eadmund's throat, and he called to me, and charged among +the traitor's men to reach him if he might. And the Mercians broke +and fled before us, and the Danish line unbroken rolled forward and +swept us into flight, for our men knew not what they could do.</p> +<p>Then I pointed to Ashingdon hill and cried:</p> +<p>"We can rally yonder!"</p> +<p>And Eadmund gainsaid me not, but groaned, and called to his men, +and we got together and faced round, so that the Danes drew back a +little, as men will when a boar turns to bay. And we fought to +reach the Lindsey and Borough men through the Danes, who had filled +the gap that the flight of the Mercians had made--and won to them. +There was the greatest slaughter of the Danish host at that time. +But we could not win to Ulfkytel, for the centre and left wing of +the Danes lapped us round, and their right drove him back on the +marshes, away from us.</p> +<p>Then we were pressed back along the higher ground, and we were +forced into a great ring that the Danes could not break, and ever +where sign of weakening was Eadmund rode and shouted and smote, and +the Danes gave back before him. Once or twice I could hold my hand +as he sat in the midst of our circle watching all that went on, and +I saw many things in those few moments while sword Foe's Bane +rested.</p> +<p>The Mercians had not followed us for very shame, but they sat on +the open hillside in the place where the Danish line had been. I +think it was not Streone's fault that they were not fighting hand +to hand with us. I saw him ride to Ulf the jarl, and I saw Ulf turn +his shoulder on him, and then he sought Rink, and that chief spoke +but a word to him, so that he tried not to reach Cnut, who never +looked at him.</p> +<p>Then I saw Ulfkytel's men breaking and taking to the marshes, +where the Danes cared not to follow them. More than one I could see +sinking under the weight of arms in the fen slime among the green +tussocks of grass that he had slipped from, and I saw that the +flying men made for Ashingdon hill.</p> +<p>Now as we drew back some word went round among the Danish host +and their onset slackened, and presently they drew off and left us +to retreat as we would. They could not break our ring, and we were +coming to broken land where we might have some advantage.</p> +<p>Then Eadmund said:</p> +<p>"We will go to yonder hill and hold it. Then will East Anglia +come to us, and we can begin again tomorrow, maybe; and if not, we +can watch the Danes away. All is not lost yet."</p> +<p>So we went to Ashingdon hill, and there formed up. Only the +Danish horsemen followed us to find out what we did. And we saw the +main force drawing back towards their earthworks on one wing, while +the other held the place of battle, and it was not plain at once +why they thus divided.</p> +<p>We rested for a short half hour on Ashingdon hill, and the men +of Ulfkytel gathered to us. But the brave earl was slain, and with +him Abbot Wulsy, and the Mercians had slain the Ealdorman of +Lindsey when they turned on us, and many more lay in the place +where the flight began, good men and noble sold to their deaths by +the traitor.</p> +<p>It was about midday when we won back to the hill, and the +battle, from the time when we had first met, had lasted but a short +time. Yet what with slaughter when we broke, and the desertion of +the Mercians, we were short of a full third of our men now.</p> +<p>Eadmund waxed restless. There was the best half of a long summer +day before us, and our men were angry and full of longing to fight +and take revenge. I think there was not one that did not know all +that might hang on this battle.</p> +<p>"Redwald," the king said, "is there no way by which we might +cross the river? Then might we fall on the ships at Burnham, and +Cnut must send his men over ship by ship, and so we might well gain +the victory."</p> +<p>I looked at the tide, and called for some Essex men who knew the +place, and one came and told me that in two hours' time we might +cross at a ford higher up, which they name Hull bridge, though +there is no bridge there. And when he heard that, at once our king +set his men in order and cheered them with fresh hopes, and we +started to march thither.</p> +<p>And at the same time Cnut's ships began to move, and from +Burnham and from this shore his men were coming up on the tide +towards the very place where we would cross, and before the ford +could be passed by us we knew that they would be there in +force.</p> +<p>"So," said Eadmund quietly, "they are before us. We will even go +back to the hill."</p> +<p>We went back, and then I think that we knew the worst. We were +hemmed in upon it, for the half of the Danish force that had +remained were barring our way inland, while from the river every +other man of the Danish host was coming up to attack us from that +side.</p> +<p>"Now it would seem that some of us will stay on this hill for +good," said Eadmund; "but if we must lie here till the last day it +is a place whence one can look out over the English land and sea +and river for which we have died."</p> +<p>And so he drew us up in the ring again there on the hilltop, +which was wide enough, and we sat down and waited for the coming of +the Danes.</p> +<p>"Lord king," I said, "let us make a wedge and cut through the +Danes inland. So shall we win back to the open country, and we can +gather men afresh."</p> +<p>He smiled wearily at me, and it seemed to me that at last he had +given up hope. And but for Streone's treachery that thing would +never have been. It had broken our king's spirit.</p> +<p>"Friend," he said, "I will die here if I can."</p> +<p>"That shall not be while there is one to give his life for you," +I answered, and the thanes around us murmured "Aye!" in that stern +voice that means more than aught of clamour.</p> +<p>Then I saw some Wessex thanes speaking earnestly to one another, +and presently they beckoned to me, and while Eadmund sat silent on +his horse I went to them to hear what they would.</p> +<p>"We will get the king off this field if we can," they said. "We +cannot lose him. If chance is, we will take him against his will. +Hinder us not."</p> +<p>"That is well," said I. "I will help you, for he is the hope of +England."</p> +<p>Maybe Ashingdon hilltop is full fifty acres in the more level +summit, and we could not guard it all; so we waited on that edge +nearest the Danes, the half circle that faces inland from the +marshes towards the battle ground we had lost, and to Hockley from +the river. And presently the Danes began to come up the hill in +even line, and we watched them drawing nearer in silence.</p> +<p>Then Eadmund bade our bowmen get to work; but the arrows were as +nought against the long line that did but quicken its advance as +they felt their sting here and there.</p> +<p>The Danes spread out along the hillside to surround us, and then +when they had gained the summit they charged on us, and again we +were hand to hand with them.</p> +<p>I suppose we fought so, without stirring from the place where we +were, for half an hour. Our circle thinned, but never broke, and +Dane after Dane fell or drew back to let fresh men come forward, +and as we might we also sent fresh men from our inner ranks to +relieve those who had grown weary. It was stern hand-to-hand +fighting, and one knows how that will ever be--one of two men must +go down or give way, and our men fell, but give way they would +not.</p> +<p>I have said we were on the edge of the hilltop circle, and +therefore the attack from the steep hill slope was weakest. And so +it came to pass that presently the line against us there was +thinned out, because men pressed upwards to the level, and then +those Wessex thanes saw that we might break through and cut our way +down the hill and make good our retreat.</p> +<p>Where Eadmund was I followed, and I know that I saved him once +or twice from spear thrusts that would have slain him when he +charged among the Danes, where they pressed us most hardly. Wearied +was my arm, but sword Foe's Bane bit through helm and harness, and +once I was facing Ulf the jarl, and he cried out to me:</p> +<p>"Well smitten, Wulfnoth's man!"</p> +<p>For he knew me. And I looked for Egil, that I might call him to +come and win the sword from me, but I could not see him; and a +foolish fear that some other than he might get the good blade got +hold of me, for I had no doubt that I must fall, and no fear +thereof, save that. And why I longed for Egil thus was, I think, +because of utter weariness and loss of hope.</p> +<p>Then they pushed us as it were over the hill edge, and we began +to go down, and I knew at once what would come next.</p> +<p>The line of Danes on the hill slope gave way before us and left +the way clear; and at first we went slowly and in good order, and +then they charged on us down the hill with crushing weight of +numbers.</p> +<p>And so we fled. I saw the Wessex thanes catch Eadmund's bridle, +and they turned his horse and spoke to him. And he threatened them +with his sword for a moment; but they were urgent, and at last he +fled. And I, knowing that if we could keep back the Danes but for a +few minutes longer he might escape, cried to what chiefs were left +to us, and we rallied on the hillside for a last stand.</p> +<p>Then my horse reared and fell back on me, and I heard a great +shout, and the rush of many feet passed over me, and Ashingdon +fight and aught else was lost in blackness.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch15" id="Ch15">Chapter 15</a>: The Shadow Of Edric +Streone.</h2> +<p>"The man is dead," said a rough voice. "Let him bide."</p> +<p>"He is not," one answered. "He had nought to slay him. Here be +three flesh wounds only."</p> +<p>Then I began to come to myself, for water was being poured on my +face, and I opened my eyes and saw Thrand of Colchester looking at +me. My head was on his knee, and he had a helm full of water in his +hand. His own head and arm were bandaged, and the man who spoke to +him was passing on, seeking elsewhere. All that had happened came +back to me in a moment then, and my ears woke to the sounds round +me. I knew them only too well, for they were the awesome sounds of +the time after battle.</p> +<p>"Where is the king?" I said.</p> +<p>"Safe enough, they say," Thrand answered. "Is it well with you, +master?"</p> +<p>I sat up, and the maze passed from me. I had but been stunned by +the fall from my horse, and now seemed little the worse, save for +sickness and dull weight of weariness. I had been an hour or two +thus, as it would seem, for now the Danish host was gone, and only +a few men sought for friends on that hillside, as Thrand had sought +for me. My horse was dead, slain by the spear thrust that made him +rear. It was that one which Earl Wulfnoth gave me when I left +him.</p> +<p>"I shall be myself again directly," I said. "How has it all +ended? I thought I saw you slain."</p> +<p>"The Danes are chasing our men towards yon village," he said +grimly pointing towards Hockley. "They will not catch the king, +however. They smote me badly enough when I tried to be revenged on +Streone, and they slew Guthorm; but they only stunned me."</p> +<p>"Go hence before Streone catches you," said I.</p> +<p>"Not I," said Thrand. "He knows me not, and I shall wait for +another chance. The Danes think me a Mercian, and so I bide with +you. Can you fly now, master?"</p> +<p>I tried to rise, but I was weak and shaken, and sank down again. +I was not fit for walking even yet.</p> +<p>"I must wait," I said.</p> +<p>"There are stray horses enough down yonder," Thrand said, +looking over the meadows below us. "I will go and catch one. We +must go soon, or the Danes will be back."</p> +<p>"No use," said I. "They are between us and safety. I must wait +and take my chance."</p> +<p>With that I missed the sword that I loved, for I had thought of +selling my life dearly if the Danes would slay me.</p> +<p>"Where is sword Foe's Bane?" I cried.</p> +<p>Thrand looked round about me, but could see it not. Then he +turned over one or two of the slain men who lay thickly in the +place where our last stand was made. But he could not find it, +until a wounded man of ours asked what he sought. Thrand told him. +Then I noted how few wounded there were. The sun, nigh to setting +now, broke out and shone athwart the hillside; and it sparkled like +the ice heaps on the long banks that a winter's tide has left by +the river, for everywhere were the mail-clad slain. But the +sparkles were steady, as on the ice, not as on a host that is +marching. Ice cold were those who would need mail no more on +Ashingdon hill.</p> +<p>"The sword is under the horse," the man said groaning. And it +was so, and unhurt.</p> +<p>"Get me a sword from off the field," I said, "and hide Foe's +Bane somewhere. Then, if they slay me, take it to Egil, Jarl +Thorkel's foster brother; and if not, I can find it again. I will +not have it taken from me thus."</p> +<p>So Thrand took it and its scabbard and hid both under his cloak, +and went to where there was a patch of woodland at the foot of the +hill--ash and alder growing by the marsh side--some two hundred +yards off.</p> +<p>I closed my eyes and waited till he came back--and he was gone +for some while. Presently he came, and told me that he had hidden +it under a fallen tree trunk, and that the place was dry and safe. +He found me another sword easily enough--and it was notched from +point to hilt. Its edge was not like that of Foe's Bane, but the +man whose it had been had done his duty with it. It was an English +sword.</p> +<p>Now I thought that I could walk again, and stood up and made a +step or two, painfully enough, in truth, but in such wise that I +should soon do better. And then over the brow of the hill the Danes +began to come. They had circled round and I had not noted them, and +came on us from the other side. They were searching among the slain +for their comrades.</p> +<p>Half a dozen of them came towards Thrand and me, and I suppose +that they would have slain me. But my man was ready for them, and +took the sword from me quickly.</p> +<p>"Will the king suffer us to keep captives?" he said.</p> +<p>"Aye," one answered, in some Jutland speech that was new to me, +though one could understand it well enough, "there is word that we +are to take any chiefs alive--but that is a new word to us. Who +minds it?"</p> +<p>"I do," said Thrand. "Here is one who will pay for freedom, and +he has yielded to me."</p> +<p>"That is luck for you," they said, and passed on.</p> +<p>There was plunder enough all around, and they were in haste lest +others should come. Thrand's Anglian speech was Danish enough for +them.</p> +<p>"Now you are safe, master," Thrand said; "no need for the +sword."</p> +<p>"I am a captive," said I bitterly.</p> +<p>Then my eyes sought the ground as Thrand cast the useless blade +away, and there, crawling on the reddened turf, was a toad that +feared not the still dead, and must seek its food whether men lived +or died, unheeding aught but that. And when I saw it, into my mind +flashed the time when I had stood, weakened and hurt, and looked at +the like in Penhurst village--and the words that Spray the smith +spoke came to me, and they cheered me, as a little thing will +sometimes. And then I thought of her who prayed for me among +Penhurst woods, and I was glad that life was left me yet.</p> +<p>More Danes kept coming now, and presently one who was in some +command came to where I sat with Thrand standing over me.</p> +<p>"Is this a captive?" he asked.</p> +<p>"Aye," said Thrand.</p> +<p>"Who is he?"</p> +<p>"Some thane or other. What shall I do with him?"</p> +<p>"Cnut wants to see all captives. Take him to the fort whence we +came."</p> +<p>He passed on, and Thrand said:</p> +<p>"Master, if you can find Egil all may be well, Let us go."</p> +<p>That was all that I could do. Egil or Godwine might befriend me. +Godwine surely would, but I knew not if his word would go for +anything.</p> +<p>Aye, but that was an awesome walk across the upland, where the +flower of England lay dead. I knew not what had befallen us fully +until I went slowly over Ashingdon hill. All the best blood of +England was spilt there; and I knew, as we passed the wide ring of +heaped corpses where our stand had been longest, that the hopes of +Eadmund had come to nought, and that the shadow of Streone lay +black across his life.</p> +<p>We came to the further slope of the hill, and were going down, +and through the tears of rage and grief that filled my eyes I saw a +few horsemen breasting the slope towards us, and one of them was +Edric Streone the traitor himself; and when I saw him I felt as a +man who lights suddenly on a viper, and I shuddered, for the sight +of him was loathsome to me, and Thrand ground his teeth.</p> +<p>Streone's eyes fell on us, and he turned his horse to meet us. +And when he knew who I was he glowered at me without speaking, and +I looked him full in the face once, and then turned my back on him. +He did not know my man.</p> +<p>"Bind your prisoner," he said sharply to Thrand.</p> +<p>"No need to do that," said Thrand coolly, "he is sorely hurt, +and has no arms."</p> +<p>Then the other horsemen rode up leisurely.</p> +<p>"Who is this?" said one--and he was Jarl Eirik.</p> +<p>"No one worth having," said Streone, and reined round his horse +to go on as if caring nought.</p> +<p>They went on up the hill. I suppose that they were going there +that Edric Streone might say who the slain were. As for us we went +our way, and Thrand cursed the earl with every step.</p> +<p>We had hardly got away from the hill when men came after us in +haste, and before I knew that it was myself whom they sought, they +had pushed Thrand aside and bound my hands.</p> +<p>"What is this?" Thrand asked angrily.</p> +<p>And I said:</p> +<p>"Bind me not. I go to yield myself."</p> +<p>"Earl Edric's orders," said the men. "We are to keep you here +till he comes."</p> +<p>At that I knew that I had fallen into his hands, and that my +life was not worth much. I could see that Thrand knew this +also.</p> +<p>"That is all very well," I said; "but I am Egil Thorarinsson's +captive."</p> +<p>Whereat one of the men laughed.</p> +<p>"You may not choose your captor, man. Egil has not been ashore +all day. He is with the ships yonder."</p> +<p>Then Thrand said, seeming very wroth:</p> +<p>"I will not lose a good captive and ransom for any Mercian +turncoat. I will go and find the king and make complaint."</p> +<p>"Tell him that you are Egil at the same time," a Dane sneered. +"You will not hoodwink him as you have this Saxon."</p> +<p>"Is not this man Egil?" I asked, looking at Thrand with a hope +that he would guess whom I needed.</p> +<p>"He Egil!" they answered, laughing loudly. And at that Thrand +turned and went away quickly, and I sat down and said:</p> +<p>"What will Earl Edric do with me?"</p> +<p>One said one thing and one another, and I did not listen much. +But they all thought in the end that Edric's lust for gold would +make him hold me to heavy ransom. I thought that he loved revenge +even better than wealth, and this cheered me not at all.</p> +<p>About sunset Edric Streone came. Thrand had, I thought, made his +escape, most likely, and I was glad. He had helped me all he +could.</p> +<p>The earl left the party he was with, and came to me and my +guards. He looked at me sidewise for a while, and then spoke to me +in broad Wessex, which the Danes could hardly understand, if at +all.</p> +<p>"So, Master Redwald, what will you give for freedom?"</p> +<p>I answered him back in my own Anglian speech, which any Dane +knows, for it is but the Danish tongue with a difference of turn of +voice, and words here and there:</p> +<p>"I will give a traitor nothing."</p> +<p>"But I am going to hang you," and he chuckled in his evil way. +There were many meanings in that laugh of Streone's.</p> +<p>"You can do as you like with me, as it happens," I answered, +"but I had rather swing at a rope's end as an honest man than sit +at Cnut's table as Streone the traitor."</p> +<p>He tried to laugh, but it stuck in his throat, and so he turned +to rage instead.</p> +<p>"Smite him," he said to the Danes.</p> +<p>"Not we," said the spokesman of the half dozen. "Settle your own +affairs between you."</p> +<p>"Take him to yon tree and hang him, and have done," said +Edric.</p> +<p>"Spear me rather," said I in a low voice to the men.</p> +<p>They laughed uneasily, but did not move, and Edric again bade +them take me to the tree, which was about a hundred paces away.</p> +<p>They took me there and set me under a great bough, and then +stood looking at me and the earl. They had no rope, and the belts +that bound me were of no use for a halter. Edric saw what was +needed, and swore. Then he sent one of the men to the ships to get +a line of some sort; and I think that his utter hatred of anyone +who had seen through his plans made him spare me from spear or +sword, for there is no disgrace in death by steel. But at this time +there seemed no disgrace in the death he meant me to die, for it +was shame to him, not to me.</p> +<p>The ships were not so far off. It was not long before three or +four men came through the gathering dusk, and one had a coil of +rope over his shoulder. And after them came across the hillside a +horseman, beside whom ran a man on foot. There were many men about, +and these were too far for me to heed them. I only noticed that +which should end my life.</p> +<p>"Set to work quickly," said Streone.</p> +<p>So they flung the end of the line over the bough, sailorwise, +and made a running bowline in the part that came down. There is +torture in that way, and some of the men grumbled thereat, being +less hard hearted. So they began to argue about the matter, and +Streone watched my face, for this was pleasure to him, as it +seemed, though he did not look straight at me. I wished they would +hasten, that was all.</p> +<p>Now the horseman and his follower came up, and lo! Egil was the +rider, and with him was Thrand.</p> +<p>"Ho!" cried Egil, "hold hard. That is my man."</p> +<p>Streone turned on him with a snarl.</p> +<p>"Your man!" he said. "I took him. Hold your peace."</p> +<p>"There you lie," quoth Thrand. "I took him myself for Egil, my +master--as your own men know. I told them."</p> +<p>"He did so," the Danes said, for they loved Egil, and Streone +was a stranger of no great reputation, though high in rank.</p> +<p>"Set him loose," said Egil. "I will have no man interfere with +my captives."</p> +<p>Then Streone hid his anger, and took Egil aside while the Danes +and Thrand set me free. Presently Egil broke out into a great +laugh.</p> +<p>"Want you to hang him for slaying men of yours!" he cried. "Why, +he might hang you for the same. How many of his men did you slay +this morning?"</p> +<p>"That was in fight--he killed the others in time of peace."</p> +<p>"Better not say much of that fight," said Egil. "There was a +peace breaking there."</p> +<p>Streone turned pale at that, for he saw that the Danes did not +hold his ways in honour though they had profited by them.</p> +<p>"Well, then, take him. Little gain will he be to you, for he is +landless and ruined," he sneered, chuckling.</p> +<p>"Well," said Egil, "he is a close friend of Earl Wulfnoth's, and +maybe it is just as well that you hung him not. Cnut would hardly +have thanked you for setting that man against him, and maybe +bringing Olaf the Norseman down on him also."</p> +<p>Streone had thought not of those things. He turned ashy pale at +the picture Egil had drawn of loss of Cnut's favour. He looked once +or twice towards me as if he were trying to frame some excuse, but +none would come.</p> +<p>"I knew it not," he said, falsely enough. "I am glad you +came."</p> +<p>Egil only laughed, and with that Streone rode away quickly, and +never looked back as he went.</p> +<p>Thereafter Egil took me down to the ships, and he sent Thrand +for sword Foe's Bane when the night had fallen. Most kindly did the +Dane treat me, but I cared for little. I could not move for +stiffness and bruising after I had slept for twelve hours on end, +but that was nought compared with the sorrow for what had befallen +us.</p> +<p>Two days after this the Danish host followed in the track of +Eadmund and his flying levies: but Egil stayed in command of the +ships, and I with him. I had not seen Cnut, but Egil had spoken of +me to him.</p> +<p>"I have heard of Redwald of Bures before," the king had said. +"What know I of him? I think it is somewhat good."</p> +<p>"He nearly got Emma the queen out of England," Egil had +answered. "I know not if you call that a good deed, lord king."</p> +<p>"That is it. She spoke to me for him, asking me to treat him +well if he fell into my hands, because of his faithful service and +long-suffering patience on the journey."</p> +<p>Then he asked what he could do, but Egil answered that I would +bide with him at this time, and hereafter he would mind the king of +me again.</p> +<p>"Do so," said Cnut. "He must be a friend of mine."</p> +<p>I could not but think well of the young king for this, but it +seemed unlikely that friendly towards him I should ever be. +Nevertheless, the words of the witch of Senlac were coming +true.</p> +<p>Then we, safe in the shelter of the river, waited for news: the +two kings being in Wessex. But I could not think it likely that +Cnut would give time for a fresh gathering of Wessex men to +Eadmund.</p> +<p>Nor did he. All men know how the two kings met at Olney in the +Severn, and how peace was made, after Eadmund had said that he +would rather fight out the matter hand to hand to the death. Few of +us knew then how little able Cnut was to fight the mighty Ironside, +but we thought him strong in body as in name. Else had that plan +never been thought of.</p> +<p>They say that Edric Streone advised Cnut to take the old +Danelagh and Northumbria and leave Eadmund the rest of the kingdom, +the survivor to succeed to all the land. Maybe he did. If so, it +was that he might earn more from Cnut by giving him all the land. +But it is certain that thus Cnut wrought best for himself, for the +Danelagh received him gladly, while Wessex loved Eadmund. And when +Eadmund should die, Wessex would take Cnut for king at Eadmund's +word, as it were, by reason of the treaty made and oaths given and +received. Not for nothing do men call the King Cnut the Wise, for +it is certain that he had Eadmund in his power, and forbore to use +his advantage to the full.</p> +<p>So the long struggle ended, and at last there was rest to the +land. But I, who had hoped for victory, felt as though life had +little pleasure left when first this news came to me. But in a few +days came one of Godwine's men bearing messages to me from him, and +also from Eadmund my king.</p> +<p>The first were most kindly, speaking of hope of seeing me ere +long, and the like; but it seemed that the young earl had promised +Eadmund to send me the letter which the messenger brought, and that +that was the most important business. I took the letter ashore and +went to Ashingdon hill and sat there among the graves of the slain +and read it, while the summer sun and wind and sky were over me, +while the land and sea seemed at rest, and all was in a great peace +after the strife that I had seen in that place.</p> +<p>To my Thane, greeting.--What has befallen us, and how we have +divided the kingdom with our brother Cnut in the old way of the +days of Alfred the greatest of our line, you will have heard. We +have fought, and all men say that we have fought well; but this is +how things have been ordered by the Lord of Hosts. Therefore, my +thane, for your sake, and seeing specially that already our brother +Cnut is well disposed toward you, as Godwine son of Wulfnoth tells +us, by reason of your service to Emma the queen--I would bid you +accept him as ruler of East Anglia, where your place is. And you +shall hold this letter in proof that thus our word to you is, if in +days to come the line of Wessex kings shell hold the kingdom once +more. Few have been those who have been faithful to us as have +you.</p> +<p>Now, I will set down no more, for Eadmund my king wrote to me as +he was wont to speak in the days that were gone, and I wept as I +read his words--wept bitterly there on Ashingdon hill, and I am not +ashamed thereof.</p> +<p>And when I had spelt out to the end of his letter there were +words also that were pleasant to me. For they were written by +Elfric the abbot, my friend, thus:</p> +<p>Written by the hand of Elfric, Abbot of St. Peter's Minster at +Medehamstede.</p> +<p>I, Elfric, bid you, my son Redwald, be of cheer, for in the end +all shall be for the best. Bide in your home of Bures if Cnut +wills, as I think shall be, and see to the good of your own people +as would your father who has gone. There is an end of war for +England. It remains for us to make for the things of peace.</p> +<p>Then I sat and thought for long, and at last it seemed to me +that I could do nought but as both king and friend would bid me, +and the words that Elfric had written weighed more with me than +those of the king. Now that I could fight no more I began to long +to get back to that home life in the old place that had seemed so +near to me and had been taken away.</p> +<p>And then came the thought of Uldra, and of what she would say of +this. But as things were, and with this letter before me, I could +not doubt what her word would be. She would speak as Elfric wrote. +Then I longed for Olaf and his counsel. But he was far beyond my +reach, nor could I tell where he might be. He had gone across the +gray rim of the sea, and no track was there for me to follow.</p> +<p>The evening fell, and still I sat there, and Thrand of +Colchester came to seek me--I know not what he feared for me if I +grew lonely on Ashingdon hill now that all seemed lost.</p> +<p>"Master, come back to the ships," he said. "It is ill biding +here after sunset. The slain are unquiet by reason of Streone's +deeds."</p> +<p>"They will not harm me, Thrand," I answered. "I would I lay here +with them even now . . . but that is past."</p> +<p>I rose up and went down the hill with him, and the sun set +behind it, and it was gray and black against the red evening sky. +There was a mist from the river, and one might think that one saw +many things moving therein.</p> +<p>And I know not that I saw anything more than mortal--though +maybe I did--until as we went to Cnut's dune, under which Egil's +ship lay, and we passed that place where the left wing of our line +had been driven back on the marsh. Then I saw an armed man coming +towards us, and Thrand, who walked at my shoulder, closed up to me, +for the warrior had a drawn sword in his hand.</p> +<p>And when we came face to face I knew that I looked once more on +Ulfkytel our earl, and a great fear fell on me, for he lay with his +men in the mound where he fell, and Egil and I had raised it over +him. Then I must speak.</p> +<p>"Greeting to the earl," I said, and my voice sounded +strange.</p> +<p>But he made no answer, save that he looked me in the face and +smiled at me gravely and sweetly, and sheathed the sword he held, +folding his arms thereafter as one whose work is done. And while +one might count a score, I saw him, plainly as in life, and then he +was gone.</p> +<p>Wherefore I thought that our own earl was not wroth with me for +what I would do; and after that my mind was at rest, and ready to +take what peace might come to me at the hands of Cnut the king.</p> +<p>"We have seen the earl," Thrand said, when he was gone.</p> +<p>"Aye. He tells us that the war is at an end, and that, in truth, +Cnut is king in East Anglia."</p> +<p>"It is well," Thrand answered simply. "Dane were my fathers, and +Danish is my name and that of Guthorm my brother. If Cnut lets us +keep our old customs and governs with justice, it is all we +need."</p> +<p>There was spoken the word of all Anglia, whether of the north or +south folk, and I knew it. No man would but hail him there +willingly. Our people had never forgotten that the Wessex kings +were far from them, and that little help came from thence.</p> +<p>Now, when I came to Egil, I told him that the letter I had +gotten bore messages to me from Eadmund, and I read it to him so +far as I have written here.</p> +<p>"This is good," he answered, when I said that it should be as +the king said. "Now are you Cnut's man and my friend indeed. +Thorkel, my foster brother, is to be Earl of East Anglia, and you +shall be Thane of Bures as ever. And I shall have to mind +Colchester and this shore, and we shall see much of each +other."</p> +<p>So he rejoiced, and I grew more cheerful as the days went on. +Then Thorkel came, and together we went to Colchester, and thence +he bade me go to Bures in peace and take my old place, for he said +that Cnut and Emma the queen would have me honoured in all that I +would, even did he himself not wish to keep me as his own +friend.</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"What of Geirmund, your own man, who had Bures?"</p> +<p>Egil laughed.</p> +<p>"Geirmund is the man over whom I fell at your feet at +Leavenheath fight. You yourself have made an end of him. I wonder +that you knew it not."</p> +<p>So I went back to Bures, and there is no need to say how my poor +folk rejoiced. But Ailwin was not there, nor had Gunnhild been +seen. The young priest was there yet, and well loved.</p> +<p>Then I said to myself:</p> +<p>"Let things bide for a while. When peace comes altogether and +certainly, then will Ailwin bring back Hertha, and there will be +trouble enough then, maybe. As it is, my house must be rebuilt, and +the land has to settle down after war."</p> +<p>With that I set to work to gather the timber together from my +own woods, that we might begin to build in the coming springtime, +and I grew happy enough at that work, though I would that I worked +for Uldra.</p> +<p>Then came the news that Eadmund our king was dead, slain by +Streone's men--some say by the Earl's son, others by the king's own +men, whom he bribed. One will, I suppose, never know what hands did +the deed, but Streone's doing it was when all is told.</p> +<p>There is more in my mind about this than I will say. But Thrand, +who had been with me, begged that he might go to Colchester for a +while; and I let him go, for he waxed restless, though I knew not +what he would leave me for.</p> +<p>Then the kingdom was Cnut's, and he spoke to the Wessex nobles +at a great council in London in such wise that they hailed him for +king. There was naught else for them to do. And he promised to keep +the laws of Eadgar {<a name="Glyph15" href="#Note15" id= +"Glyph15">15</a>}, and to defend Holy Church, and to make no +difference between Dane and Saxon, and by that time men knew that +what Cnut the king promised that he would perform.</p> +<p>So came the strong hand that Ethelred our dying king had +foretold, and sure and lasting peace lay fair before England. Above +all things that made for our content Cnut promised to send home his +host. Nor was it long before Jarl Eirik sailed away with all but +those to whom lands had fallen. There were many manors whose +English lords had died, and they must own Danish masters.</p> +<p>And I will say this other word, that now at the time that I +write of these things, men speak of English only, for Cnut has +welded the races of England into one in such wise as has never been +before.</p> +<p>So I mourned for Eadmund, and wrought at home-making until the +springtime came, and all the while the thought of Uldra grew dearer +to me, and I longed to seek her again. And the thought of Hertha +and my betrothal seemed as bondage to me. Yet I would do nought +till Ailwin came or till I could find him. But none knew where he +was.</p> +<p>I knew now that it was well that Hertha and I should not meet +till all was broken off, for her I could not love, and she knew +nought of me. Yet for her sake I set the Wormingford thralls at +work in the like manner as my own people were busied, that she +might find withal to build her own house place afresh, when, if +ever, she should return.</p> +<p>Now, one day as I stood watching the shaping of the timber for +the first framing of my hall, Thrand came back. He ran to me when +he saw me, and cried:</p> +<p>"Master all is avenged! Streone the traitor is no more."</p> +<p>I took him away to a quiet place, for this news was strange, and +the thralls were listening wonderingly, and I asked him how this +came about.</p> +<p>"Master, I slew him myself," he said grimly.</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"By subtlety--after his own manner?"</p> +<p>"Not so, master. But even in Cnut's own presence."</p> +<p>So I was amazed, and bade him tell all.</p> +<p>"When I left you, master," he said, "I took service with Jarl +Thorkel. Then he went to court in London, even as I hoped, for that +was all I needed, and presently came Streone with a great train to +see Cnut. Now the king is not a great and strong man, as men think +who have not seen him, but is tall and overgrown for his years, +looking eighteen or twenty, though he is younger. He will be a +powerful man some day, but his mail hangs loosely on him now. He is +like an eagle in face, for his nose is high and bent, and his eyes +are clear and piercing. Quiet and very pleasant is he in his way, +and being so young also, some think they can do as they will with +him. But that they try not twice.</p> +<p>"This is what Streone thought, for he deemed that he should be +the king's master if he set him on the throne. So he must needs try +to gain more wealth from the king, and after he had been at court +for a while, one might see that Cnut grew weary of his words. But +at last there was a great feast, and I stood behind Thorkel at the +high place, and Streone was next to Thorkel, and Thorkel to the +king on his right hand. When the ale was going round, Streone began +to find fault with some ordering of Cnut's, and at last said:</p> +<p>"Maybe one might judge how things would go when the man who gave +you this kingdom is treated thus.'</p> +<p>"Then Cnut looked at him very quietly and said:</p> +<p>"'You have the same honours from me as from Ethelred.'</p> +<p>"'Not so, not so,' he said. 'I was wont to sit at the king's +right hand, with none between me and him.'</p> +<p>"Thereat Thorkel would have spoken, but Cnut held up his hand. I +saw his bright eyes shining, and Streone should have taken warning, +but his fate was on him.</p> +<p>"'You think, then, that you have not all you deserve?' the king +said.</p> +<p>"'I have not. You have all--owing to me.'</p> +<p>"Then Cnut rose up and faced him, and a great hush fell on all +the assembly.</p> +<p>"'This earl, as it seems, will be content with nothing short of +the king's seat. Two kings has he pulled down, and one has he slain +of those two. We have profited by this, as all men know. But here +do I proclaim myself clear from all part in the slaying of Eadmund +my brother, who, but for this man, might hereafter have taken all +the kingdom when I died, according to our oaths. I suppose that no +man will believe that I had nought to do with this murder, but I am +clear thereof, both in thought or wish or deed.</p> +<p>"'Now in gaining the kingdom which has been the right of the +Danish kings--if tribute paid for conquest in old time means +aught--at least since the days of Guthrum, if not before, I have +used the help of this earl, for Mercia was ours by right, as in the +Danelagh. I will not say that his way of helping me has been what +one would wish, but in war one uses what weapons one can find. For +his help to me the Earl of Mercia has been well paid. Now, what +shall be given to the man who betrayed to death the foster son who +believed in him as in himself?'</p> +<p>"Then I, Thrand the freeman of Colchester, nowise caring what +befell me, answered in a loud voice:</p> +<p>"'Let him die. He is not fit to live.'</p> +<p>"'Slay him, therefore,' said Cnut.</p> +<p>"Thereat Streone cried for mercy once, grovelling. And he having +done so, I lifted the axe I bore and slew him, even on the high +place at the king's feet.</p> +<p>"Then one in the hall said in a great voice:</p> +<p>"'Justice is from the hands of Cnut the king.'</p> +<p>"There went round a murmur of assent to that, and I called to me +another of Thorkel's men, a Colchester man of your guard also, and +while all held their peace and Cnut stood still looking at what was +done, stirring neither hand nor foot, but with his eyes burning +bright with rage and his head a little forward, as an eagle that +will strike, we two bore the traitor's body to the window that +overhangs the Thames, and cast it thereout into the swift tide.</p> +<p>"After that I went my way down the hall, and the king cried:</p> +<p>"'Let the man go forth.'</p> +<p>"So that none spoke to me or withstood me.</p> +<p>"When I got to the street it was dark, and it seemed to me that +the best thing that I could do was to fly. So I went by day and +night, and I am here."</p> +<p>So that was the traitor's end. And I was glad, for I knew that +England was free from her greatest foe. Justly was Edric Streone +slain, and all men held that it was well done. Nor did any man ever +seek Thrand to avenge the earl's death on his slayer. I think none +held him worth avenging.</p> +<p>I bade Thrand hold his peace concerning his part in this matter, +for a while at least, lest I should lose him.</p> +<p>After Streone's death it was plain that Cnut was king indeed, +for his Danish jarls knew him too well to despise him. They went +each to his place, and the land began to smile again with the peace +that had come, and Cnut sent Eirik the jarl home to Denmark with +the host, as I have said.</p> +<h2><a name="Ch16" id="Ch16">Chapter 16</a>: By Wormingford +Mere.</h2> +<p>Now it was not long after Streone's death that I had a message +from Emma the queen to bid me to her wedding with Cnut, that should +be completed with all magnificence. And I went with Thorkel the +jarl and Egil, and I could not complain of the welcome I had both +from the queen and from Cnut. I might say much of that wedding, for +it was wonderful, but I cared not much for it, except that there I +met Elfric the abbot again, and he would have me stay in his house, +so that it was most pleasant to be with him, and away from the +bustle and mirth of the strangers who were with the king.</p> +<p>But for this wedding Eadward Atheling would not come from +Normandy. Men said that he was likely to gather forces against his +new stepfather, but that it would be of no use. So thought I, for +it was a true word that I had heard at Senlac in the hut on Caldbec +hill--that Cnut should have the goodwill of all men, even of +myself. For so it was, as one might see written in the faces of the +London burghers, who alone of all England had baffled him again and +again, and now could not do enough honour to him. He had won even +their love.</p> +<p>When I would go back to Bures, Emma the queen sent for me, +hearing that I would speak with her ere I went, and she received me +most kindly, coming down from her high place to greet me.</p> +<p>"Redwald," she said, laughing a little, "I was a sore burden to +you when we fled hence."</p> +<p>"My queen," I answered, "the danger was the burden. It weighed +on all of us."</p> +<p>"That is a court speech," she said; "but we taught you court +ways, and I will not blame it. Nevertheless, though you will not +tell me so plainly, I know that I made things worse for you by my +foolishness. Forgive the abbess, if the queen may expect nought but +smooth words."</p> +<p>"I do not know how I can answer you, Queen Emma," said I at +that, "but it is true that for you I would go through the same +again."</p> +<p>"Then I am forgiven," she said. "Now tell me what became of the +brave maiden who withstood the Danes with you, and also my sharp +tongue--trouble sharpened it, Redwald, and I have repented my hard +words to her."</p> +<p>"She is with friends at Penhurst, near to Earl Wulfnoth's castle +of Pevensea. And she feared that you would hate her."</p> +<p>"I would that I could reward her rather," the queen said. "Have +you seen her of late?"</p> +<p>"Not since just before last midsummer," I answered; and I +suppose my face showed some feeling that the queen noted.</p> +<p>"Redwald," she said, "if you would wed this maiden it is I who +would give her a portion that should be worthy of her and of you. +Can it be so?"</p> +<p>"My queen," I said with a great hope in my heart, "if that is +your will, I think that it must be so. But in honesty I will tell +you that an old betrothal that was when I was a child seems to +stand in the way. But neither I nor the child to whom I was +betrothed have seen one another since the coming of Swein's host. +And I know not where she is."</p> +<p>"Ah! you would have it broken, and I wonder not. That can surely +be."</p> +<p>Then all at once came over me one thought of how Hertha had +perhaps, after all, longed and waited and prayed for my coming. I +remembered words that Ailwin had spoken that seemed to say that +this might be so; and thus on the very threshold of freedom I +shrank back lest I should wrong the child I had loved by breaking +my troth so solemnly plighted; and I knew not what to say, while +the queen looked at me wondering.</p> +<p>Then she smiled and said:</p> +<p>"Maybe you cannot love the maiden. Wait awhile, and let me hear +of you again. One may not, in kindness, force these matters. But I +will trust you to tell me if she is to wed any other than you--for +her portion shall be ready for her. The riches of England and +Denmark and Norway are mine."</p> +<p>There spoke Emma of Normandy again, and her proud look came +back. The maidens on the dais were smiling at one another, for the +queen was turned away from them.</p> +<p>"Let it be thus, my queen," I said, after I had thanked her.</p> +<p>And she said that it should be so, deeming that I had thought of +Uldra not at all, maybe.</p> +<p>Then she spoke of my own doings, and Cnut came as we did so. I +bowed to him, and he took my hand, calling me "thane" in all good +faith.</p> +<p>"Now I have to come ere long into your country," he said, "for I +have vowed to build a church in each place where I have fought and +conquered. Have you a house where I may stay?"</p> +<p>"My place is far from Ashingdon, lord king," I answered, "and I +am rebuilding my father's house as best I can."</p> +<p>"I suppose my men burnt it?" he said plainly.</p> +<p>"Your father's men did so in the first coming."</p> +<p>"Therefore shall his son rebuild for your father's son," said +the king. "Will you accept aught from me?"</p> +<p>"Lord king," said I, "I have fought against you, and have owned +you unwillingly at first."</p> +<p>"That is certain," he said laughing, "else had you not tried to +take away my queen. Go to, Redwald, you are a troublesome +subject."</p> +<p>"I think I shall be so no longer," I answered.</p> +<p>So those two most royal ones bade me farewell, and I went away +to Elfric, and found Godwine there. The young earl was high in +favour with Cnut, and rightly.</p> +<p>Presently came one from the king with somewhat for me, and that +was a goodly gift of money, which I hardly cared to take at +first.</p> +<p>Then Godwine laughed at me.</p> +<p>"We have a great chest half full of gold at Pevensea out of +which you may take a double handful whenever you need it. Cnut has +the gold of three kingdoms and says you may do the same out of his +hoards. Head breaking brought you the first, and hardship the +second. Take one as you would the other, man. It is your due."</p> +<p>And Elfric added that the king's gift was surely out of goodness +of heart. There could be no thought of bribes now. So I took it, +and was glad thereof, for I could not ask my people for rents and +dues yet.</p> +<p>Elfric asked me of Uldra, as one might suppose, and was glad +when he heard of her welfare.</p> +<p>"I suppose that when I get back to Medehamstede her folk will +want to know how she fares in Normandy, or the like. Maybe they +have troubled the good abbess already more than enough, for she +brought her to me."</p> +<p>"Whose daughter was she?" I asked.</p> +<p>"Maybe I heard, but I have forgotten," he said. "The abbess +knows. I saw not her folk, for the sisters brought her with them +with my consent."</p> +<p>So I went back to Bures well content with all but one thing, and +that was what troubled me more than enough. But I knew not that to +my dying day I shall rejoice that I kept my troth to Hertha.</p> +<p>It was on one of those wondrous days that come in October, with +glory of sunshine and clear sky over gold and crimson of forest and +copse, that I learnt this.</p> +<p>I would go to Wormingford now and then to see that all was going +well with the rebuilding of Hertha's home, for Cnut's gift was +enough for that also, seeing that all one needed was at hand and +did but require setting up by skilled workers. Our priest, Father +Oswin, found me such craftsmen as I needed.</p> +<p>"Let me rebuild the church first, father," I had said to him +when I returned thus rich.</p> +<p>"Not so, my son. That is a matter which must be taken in hand +presently, and not hurriedly. Shelter first the man who shall do +it, and provide for the fatherless at Wormingford, and it will be +better done after all."</p> +<p>Therefore I was very busy. And on this day of which I speak I +walked in the late afternoon, and must needs turn aside into the +woods by the mere, for I had often done that of late, loving the +place for old memories the more now that Olaf came into them. It +seemed to me that I had never seen the still mere look more +wondrously beautiful than on this day, for we had had neither wind +nor rain to mar the autumn beauty of the trees, and that was +doubled by the mirror of the water.</p> +<p>So I lingered in that place where Olaf and I had been so nearly +slain, thinking of that night and of many other days, and then I +heard a footstep coming through the wood, and turned to see who it +might be, for I had never met any other in the haunted place.</p> +<p>And there came towards me slowly a white-robed maiden who looked +steadfastly at me, saying nought. And I thought that surely she was +the White Lady of the Mere. The shadows flickered across her face +and dress, and in her hand she bore a basket with crimson leaves +and the like.</p> +<p>And then I saw that surely this was Hertha coming to meet me as +in the old days when I had waited for her here--Hertha grown older, +and changed; but yet as I saw her here in the old place one could +not but know her, and half I cried out her name, and then stayed +with my heart beating fast.</p> +<p>For as she came into the clearing and was close to me she held +out her hands, and the basket fell at her feet, and lo! it was +Uldra, whom I loved--and Uldra was Hertha--and I had in my arms all +that I longed for, and my trouble was gone for evermore.</p> +<p>"How was it that you knew me not before this?" she asked +presently, while we walked together to Wormingford to find Ailwin. +They had but come back that morning.</p> +<p>"Always have I seemed to know you well," I said, "but first the +sisters' dress, and then that I looked not for Hertha in London, +prevented me. And so I grew to know your looks and ways as Uldra, +whom I grew to love. Then all thought of the old likeness that +puzzled me at first was forgotten. There is no wonder in it, for +you have grown from childhood to womanhood since we fled from +Bures, and I have gone through much that blotted your face from my +mind. Rather do I wonder where you have been all this time."</p> +<p>"One secret I may not tell you today," she said; "and that is +where our safest hiding place has been in sorest peril. Some day I +will show it you, for it is not far. But for long did Gunnhild and +I dwell with her brother in the forest and marsh fastnesses beyond +the Colne. There one might take to the woods when prowling Danes +were near, though it was but twice, and but for a few hours then, +that we had to do so. There was little or no danger there when the +host passed on. Some day shall you and I ride to that quiet +farmstead, for I love the kindly folk who cared for me so +well."</p> +<p>Then I said, and my words came to pass afterwards:</p> +<p>"If they will, they shall have my best farm here for their own, +that they may be near you. Now tell me how you came to be with +Elfric."</p> +<p>She blushed a little, and laughed.</p> +<p>"When we were at Penhurst," she said, "you told me how you were +seeking me--well, maybe I was seeking you. It fell out thus. When +you and Olaf, whom I long to see, scattered the Danes here, +Gunnhild said that we must fly, for they were seeking hiding +places. So she would go to her sister, who is abbess at Ramsey, by +the great mere of Whittlesea. So we fled there, and the journey was +overmuch for her, and there she died after two days. That was a +sore grief to me, but I will not speak of grief now. Then Ailwin +told the abbess to keep me with her until all things were safe, +when he would return for me. But Gunnhild had asked her to find me +a place with the Lady Algitha, Eadmund Atheling's wife, because I +should meet you in his house often enough. That she could do, and +would have done.</p> +<p>"Then the Danes came, and one day Elfric sent word that he was +going to Normandy. Those two sisters would go home, and so the +abbess sent me with them, thinking that thus her sister's plan for +me would be best carried out. For she was told by Elfric that you +were in charge of the party, saying the sisters would be safe in +your care. Elfric might get me a place in the queen's new +household; and if not--if you knew me not nor cared for me--there +was always the convent."</p> +<p>"So all that plan came out thus--and it is well," I said. "But +why would you not come to Penhurst at first?"</p> +<p>She laughed lightly, answering:</p> +<p>"Can you not guess? Relf saw, and set things right. Did he never +tell you what was wrong?"</p> +<p>"He said that it was want of travelling gear," said I.</p> +<p>"Why, that was not it, though being thoughtful and fatherly he +asked of that first."</p> +<p>"Tell me what was the trouble, then."</p> +<p>"I thought--there were things said, and you called me by her +name--that the wedding Relf spoke of was yours and Sexberga's. That +was all."</p> +<p>"Surely Relf knew not who you were?"</p> +<p>"No. He did not till Ailwin came to Penhurst."</p> +<p>"Then," said I, "it passes me to know how he found out what the +trouble was."</p> +<p>"Because he has a daughter of his own," she laughed.</p> +<p>And so she began to speak of Sexberga's wedding, which had been +not long since.</p> +<p>Then we came to Wormingford, and there was Ailwin, bent and aged +indeed by the troubles, but well, and rejoiced to see me once more, +and that I and Hertha were so happily together. But I had to ask +his pardon for my roughness to him before I could feel content.</p> +<p>"My son, had you not felt this matter very deeply, I know you +would not have troubled yourself even to wrath about it. Truly I +was glad to hear you speak so. There is nought to forgive."</p> +<p>So he said, and maybe he was right.</p> +<p>I rode back presently to Bures with my heart full of joy, and a +wondrous content. And when I came to the house on the green I was +to learn that joys come not always singly any more than sorrows, +which are ever doubled.</p> +<p>The door stood open as I rode up, and in the red light from +within the house stood two tall figures on the threshold, and the +light flashed from helms and mail as they moved, and for a moment a +fear came over me that some new call to arms waited me, so that the +peace that I thought I had at last found was to be snatched from +me. For it was as in the days when Olaf's men stood on guard over +us at the doorway.</p> +<p>More like those days it was yet to be, for as I reined up a +voice cried:</p> +<p>"Ho, cousin what of the White Lady?"</p> +<p>And Olaf himself came and greeted me as I leapt from the saddle, +holding my shoulders and looking at me as he took me into the light +to scan my face. The other warrior was Ottar the scald, my friend, +and now I had all that I could wish.</p> +<p>We sat together in the old places, and he said presently:</p> +<p>"You seem contented enough with Cnut, to judge by your face, my +cousin."</p> +<p>"I had forgotten him. I am content with all things," I +answered.</p> +<p>"How came you here?"</p> +<p>"Nay, but you shall tell me of yourself first," he said. "Then I +may have somewhat to say of my doings."</p> +<p>So I told him all.</p> +<p>"Why then, you must be wedded betimes," he said; "for I must see +that wedding, though I would not have Cnut catch me. The ships are +in Colchester river, and but for Egil I had never got there +even."</p> +<p>Then I heard how he had been southward, and what deeds he had +done; and it was Ottar who told me that, for Olaf had nought to say +of himself. But presently when it came to the time when he turned +his ships homeward, Olaf took up the story.</p> +<p>"When I was minded to go on from this place, in Carl's water as +they call it, even to Jerusalem and the holy places, I had the sign +that I looked for--the sign that I should go back to Norway. I +slept, and in my sleep there came to me a man, very noble looking +and handsome, and yet terrible, and he stood by me and spoke to me +saying, '<i>Fare back to the land that is thy birthright, for King +of Norway thou shalt be for evermore</i>.' And I knew this man for +Olaf Tryggvesson my kinsman, and I think that he means that I shall +gain all Norway for Christ's faith, and that my sons shall reign +after me in the days to come."</p> +<p>"It is certain that you shall win Norway," I said, "for so also +ran the words of the Senlac witch, '<i>For Olaf a kingdom and more +than a kingdom--a name that shall never die</i>'."</p> +<p>"I think men will remember me if I beat Cnut in my own land," he +said lightly. "So I came back as far as the Seine river, and there +was Eadward Atheling trying to raise men against Cnut his +stepfather. I knew not that that peaceful youth could rage so +terribly when occasion was, It was ill to speak of Cnut to him--or +of the queen either. Now I spoke with his few thanes, and they held +that it was of no use to try to attack England. None would rise to +help him. But he begged me to go with him for the sake of old days +and common hatred of the Dane. Wherefore I thought that it was as +well for England that he learnt his foolishness, and we went +together, and were well beaten off from the first place we put +into. So he went back contented to try no more, and I put in here +on my way homeward."</p> +<p>Then I said:</p> +<p>"Do you blame me for submitting to Cnut?"</p> +<p>"You could do nought else," he answered. "And from all I hear he +is likely to be a good king. Mind you that vision we saw on the +shore in Normandy?"</p> +<p>"It has come to pass as you read it," I answered.</p> +<p>Then he said:</p> +<p>"Yet more is to come to pass of that vision. Cnut will reign and +will pass when his time comes, and with him will pass his kingdoms. +There will be none of his line who shall keep them {<a name= +"Glyph16" href="#Note16" id="Glyph16">16</a>}."</p> +<p>"After him Eadward, therefore, or Alfred, should they live," I +said, musing. For the words of dying Ethelred came back to me--his +foretelling of the strong hand followed by the wise.</p> +<p>"That will be seen," answered Olaf. "Now I came to know if you +were yet landless and desperate so that you would sail to Norway +with me. But now I cannot ask you that. Nevertheless I shall be +more glad to see you wedded and at rest here, for I think that you +have seen your share of war."</p> +<p>"And I have been unlucky therein," said I.</p> +<p>"Now has your luck changed," said Olaf. "And all is well."</p> +<p>So it came to pass that our wedding was made the happier by the +presence of Olaf the king and by the songs of Ottar the scald. And +Egil came from Colchester, and with him many of those of my men who +were left, and Olaf's ship captains, so that with Sudbury folk and +our own people there was a merry gathering enough, and the little +church was over full when Ailwin and Oswin were ready at the +altar.</p> +<p>After that was over, Olaf came forward and gave to the priests a +great chain of gold links, bidding them lay it on the altar for a +gift towards rebuilding the house of God.</p> +<p>"Only one thing do I ask you," he said, speaking in a hushed +voice as he stood there. "And that is that no week shall pass +without remembrance of those of my men who died for England on +Leavenheath."</p> +<p>And Oswin said:</p> +<p>"It shall be so, King Olaf, for it has already become our custom +here. Now will we remember your name also."</p> +<pre> +* * * * * * +</pre> +<p>Ten years agone it is since Olaf sailed away from us and won +Norway from the hand of Cnut. Now and then come Norsemen to me from +him when they put into Colchester or Maldon, and ever do they bring +gifts for Hertha and Olaf and Eadmund and Uldra, the children that +are ours. For all things have gone well with us, and with all +England under the strong and wise rule of Cnut the king.</p> +<p>I stood beside him on Ashingdon hill when he came to see to the +building of the churches on the battlefield at the place of the +first fight, and at Ashingdon, and at Hockley where the flight +ended. And he dedicated that at Ashingdon to St. Andrew, in memory +of Eadmund his noble foe and brother king, for on the day of that +saint Streone slew him.</p> +<p>There Cnut the king stood and spoke to me:</p> +<p>"I build these churches, and their walls will decay in time, and +maybe men will forget who built them, but the deeds of Eadmund will +not be forgotten, for there are few men who have fought a losing +fight so sternly and steadfastly as did he. Nor shall men forget +you, Redwald, and those who fought and died here, and on the other +fields that are rich with their blood spilt for love of England. +None may say that their lives are wasted, for I see before us a new +brotherhood that will rise out of our long strife, because Dane and +Saxon and Anglian know each other for men."</p> +<p>So he said, and so it is, and our England is rising from the +strife into a mighty oneness that has never been hers before.</p> +<p>We went to London before long to see the great wedding that was +made for Godwine, my friend, and Gyda, the fair daughter of Ulf the +jarl, and niece of Cnut himself. There also were Relf and the lady +of Penhurst, and Eldred and Sexberga, and many more of Wulfnoth's +thanes. But the old viking had gone to his place beyond the grave, +and I saw him no more after I left him at Berkeley.</p> +<p>Godwine is the greatest man in England now, and well loved. All +men speak of his deeds in Denmark, whither he took the king's +English host when troubles were there, and he is one of those who +hold the kingdoms together since Ulf and Thorkel and Eirik are +dead. They were slain in petty quarrels, and it is ever in my mind +that it was in judgment on them for treating with Streone the +traitor in the days when Cnut had not yet taken the kingship and +rule into his own hands. I hold him blameless of that, for what +could a boy of thirteen, however wise, do against their word and +plans?</p> +<p>But Thrand of Colchester lives yet, being port reeve of his own +town under Egil, my good friend.</p> +<p>None have ever seen the White Lady of the Mere again, nor has +aught ill befallen my thrall, who thought he saw her. I gave him +his freedom when we were wedded, and he is over the herds for us. +But ever do I choose rather to call my dear one "Uldra," the name +which she borrowed from the White Lady when I met her at Bosham, +and asked what I should call her, for by that name I learnt to love +her.</p> +<p>Now one day she bade me take her to the great mound of Boadicea +the queen beyond the river, for she had somewhat to show me, and +half fearing I went. But she had no fear of the place, and one +might see that she knew her way through the pathless woods around +it well, so that I wondered. She led me across the water which +stands around it in the old trench, stepping on fallen trees which +made a sort of bridge, and then went to a place where the bushes +grew thickly and tangled.</p> +<p>"Can you see aught strange here?" she said to me.</p> +<p>I could see nothing but thicket of briar and sloe climbing the +steep side of the mound. And therefore she parted them, not easily +at first, for none had touched them for long; and there before me +was the opening of a low stone-sided-and-roofed passage, leading to +the heart of the mound.</p> +<p>"Enter," she said. "This is our hiding place in sorest +need."</p> +<p>"Hardly dare I do so. It is ill to disturb the mighty dead," I +answered.</p> +<p>"The dead queen has sheltered us helpless women well," she +answered. "She is not disturbed, for this is not her resting +place."</p> +<p>So I went in, stooping double, for the stone passage was very +low. I cannot tell whence the stone came, nor why the place was +made unless it were to receive some chiefs of the Iceni, whose +bones were gone had they ever been there, for there was a stone +chamber in the mound's heart, fitted with stone seats and stone +beds, as it were, and four people might well live in that place, +for it was cool in summer and warm in winter, but very silent.</p> +<p>I spoke not a word till we were in the sunshine again, and then +I shivered.</p> +<p>"I could not have entered that place alone," I said.</p> +<p>"Gunnhild had no fear thereof, nor had I as a little child. +Three times we bided there for days, while the Danes pillaged and +burnt all around us, and were safe."</p> +<p>It was some old secret handed down to Gunnhild that had taught +her how to find the passage entrance. But she knew not where the +great queen lay. Maybe her resting place is below the mound itself, +or maybe she lies elsewhere, as some say.</p> +<p>Then said I:</p> +<p>"Let us close the place. I pray that none may need it +again."</p> +<p>So I loosened the earth above with my spear butt and it fell and +covered the doorway. And none, save Hertha and myself, know where +its place is.</p> +<p>Yet men say that they see the bale fires burning even now, on +the mound top on the nights when men look for such things. I have +never seen them.</p> +<p>There are two men of whom I must say a word, for I love them +well. One is Father Ailwin, our priest, and my old master--who +bides here with Oswin, whom I prayed to stay with us also--growing +old peacefully; and the other is Elfric the abbot, my friend ever, +and now Cnut's best adviser. Each in his own way fills well the +place that is his, one as the counsellor and friend of plain folk +like ourselves, winning the love and reverence of thane, and +franklin, and thrall alike; and the other as the wisest in the land +maybe, high in honour with all the highest in church and state. +Well have those two wrought, and we cannot do without their like, +whether in village or court.</p> +<p>It is likely that Elfric will be archbishop ere long, and that +will be well for us all. So great is the name of Cnut the king that +hereafter it will be that all that was wrought of wisdom in his +time will be laid to his account; but he would not have it so, for +he knows what he owes to Elfric. But also I think that the cruel +deeds wrought by the jarls while he was yet but a child will be +thought his work also, for men will forget how young he was when +the crown came to him, seeing that in utmost loyalty the jarls +spoke of him ever as commanding, as the old viking ways bade +them.</p> +<p>But I who knew him almost from the first have seen how he hated +these deeds, staying the hands of his chiefs as soon as he knew +what his power was. Therein wrought Emma the queen, whose pride +taught him what his place was, sooner than might else have +been.</p> +<p>Now I will say one last word of myself, who am happy--in wife, +and children, and home. Cnut made me ealdorman, that so I might +serve East Anglia, and I am glad, for I must needs go to the great +witan at times and meet Godwine and Relf and many others who are my +friends. But, rather than Redwald the ealdorman, I would that I +might be called ever by the name which comes into the songs of +Ottar the scald now and then--the name in which I have most pride, +King Olaf's kinsman.</p> +<p>THE END.</p> +<h2><a name="Notes" id="Notes">Notes</a>.</h2> +<dl> +<dt><a name="Note1" href="#Glyph1" id="Note1">1</a></dt> +<dd>the armed followers of a Saxon noble.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note2" href="#Glyph2" id="Note2">2</a></dt> +<dd>The national weapon. A short, strong, curved blade used as a +dirk.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note3" href="#Glyph3" id="Note3">3</a></dt> +<dd>The massacre of the Danes on St. Brice's day, 1002 A.D., in +which Swein's sister was killed.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note4" href="#Glyph4" id="Note4">4</a></dt> +<dd>Now Peterborough.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note5" href="#Glyph5" id="Note5">5</a></dt> +<dd>From the Heimskringla, Saga of Olaf the Saint.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note6" href="#Glyph6" id="Note6">6</a></dt> +<dd>Tribute.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note7" href="#Glyph7" id="Note7">7</a></dt> +<dd>An embodied familiar spirit.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note8" href="#Glyph8" id="Note8">8</a></dt> +<dd>According to Bede, in A.D. 418 the Romans collected and hid all +the treasure in England, except some part which they took to Gaul. +OElla took Anderida in 491 A.D.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note9" href="#Glyph9" id="Note9">9</a></dt> +<dd>The cold spring.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note10" href="#Glyph10" id="Note10">10</a></dt> +<dd>Mail shirt.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note11" href="#Glyph11" id="Note11">11</a></dt> +<dd>Daughter of Alfred the Great, and wife of Ethelred, Earl of +Mercia.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note12" href="#Glyph12" id="Note12">12</a></dt> +<dd>The utmost term of Saxon contempt.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note13" href="#Glyph13" id="Note13">13</a></dt> +<dd>Now Canewdon.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note14" href="#Glyph14" id="Note14">14</a></dt> +<dd>The "Five Boroughs" of the old Danelagh were Leicester, +Lincoln, Nottingham, Stamford, and Derby.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note15" href="#Glyph15" id="Note15">15</a></dt> +<dd>The work of the great Dunstan, and the first code that +recognized the rights of Danish settlers.</dd> +<dt><a name="Note16" href="#Glyph16" id="Note16">16</a></dt> +<dd>This prophecy of Olaf's is recorded in the "Saga of Olaf the +Saint".</dd> +</dl> + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of King Olaf's Kinsman, by Charles Whistler + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING OLAF'S KINSMAN *** + +***** This file should be named 16196-h.htm or 16196-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/1/9/16196/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/16196.txt b/16196.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80eec57 --- /dev/null +++ b/16196.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11633 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of King Olaf's Kinsman, by Charles Whistler + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: King Olaf's Kinsman + A Story of the Last Saxon Struggle against the Danes in + the Days of Ironside and Cnut + +Author: Charles Whistler + +Release Date: July 3, 2005 [EBook #16196] +[Date last updated: July 5, 2006] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ASCII + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING OLAF'S KINSMAN *** + + + + +Produced by Martin Robb + + + + + +KING OLAF'S KINSMAN + +A Story of the Last Saxon Struggle Against the Danes +in the Days of Ironside and Cnut + +by Charles W. Whistler + + Preface. + Chapter 1: The Coming Of The Vikings. + Chapter 2: Olaf The King. + Chapter 3: The Breaking Of London Bridge. + Chapter 4: Earl Wulfnoth Of Sussex. + Chapter 5: How Redwald Fared At Penhurst. + Chapter 6: Sexberga The Thane's Daughter. + Chapter 7: The Fight At Leavenheath. + Chapter 8: The White Lady Of Wormingford Mere. + Chapter 9: The Treachery Of Edric Streone. +Chapter 10: The Flight From London. +Chapter 11: The Taking Of The Queen. +Chapter 12: Among Friends. +Chapter 13: Jealousy. +Chapter 14: The Last Great Battle. +Chapter 15: The Shadow Of Edric Streone. +Chapter 16: By Wormingford Mere. + Notes. + + + +Preface. + + +No English chronicler mentions the presence of King Olaf the Saint +in England; but the two churches dedicated to him at either end of +London Bridge, where his greatest deed was wrought, testify to the +gratitude of the London citizens towards the viking chief who +rescued their city from the Danes, and brought back the king of +their own race towards whom their loyalty was so unswerving. + +The deeds of King Olaf recorded in this story of his kinsman are +therefore from the Norse "Saga of King Olaf the Holy," and the +various incidents are assigned as nearly as may be to their place +in the sequence of events given from the death of Swein to the +accession of Cnut, in the contemporary Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, which +is our most reliable authority for the period. + +The place where King Olaf fought his seventh battle, "Ringmereheath +in Ulfkyl's land," is doubtful. To have localized it, therefore, on +a traditional battlefield in Suffolk, where a mound and field names +point to a severe forgotten fight in the line which a southern +invader would take between Colchester and Sudbury, may be +pardonable for the purposes of Redwald's story. + +With regard to other historic incidents in the tale, some are from +the Danish "Knytlinga" and "Jomsvikinga" Sagas, which alone give us +the age of Cnut on his accession to the throne, and recount the +interception of Queen Emma by Thorkel's men on her projected +flight. In the ordinary course of history the age of the wise king +is disregarded, and the doings of the three great jarls are +naturally enough credited to him, for after the first few years of +confusion have been passed over, he takes his place as the greatest +of our rulers since Alfred, and his age is forgotten in his +wonderful policy. + +The doings of Edric Streone are partly from the hints give by the +Anglo-Saxon Chronicle, and partly from the accounts of later +English writers. But there is no chronicle of either English, +Danish, or Norse origin which does not hold him and his treachery +in the utmost scorn. + +The account of the battle of Ashingdon follows the definite local +traditions of the place. The line of the river banks have changed +but little, and Cnut's earthworks still remain at Canewdon. The +first battlefield is yet known, and they still tell how Eadmund was +forced to fight on Ashingdon hill because his way across the ford +was barred by the Danish ships, and how the pursuit of the routed +English ended at Hockley. + +Wulfnoth and his famous son Godwine are of course historic. The +Anglo-Saxon Chronicle tells us how the earl was driven into sullen +enmity with Ethelred by Streone's brother, and the Danish Sagas +record Godwine's first introduction by Jarl Ulf to Cnut after the +battle of Sherston. + +As for the places mentioned in Redwald's story, the well on Caldbec +hill still has its terrors for the village folk, and the +destruction of the ancient mining village at Penhurst by the Danes +is remembered yet with strange tales of treasure found among its +stone buildings. The Bures folk still speak of the White Lady of +the Mere, and their belief that Boadicea lies under the great mound +is by no means unlikely to be a tradition of her true resting +place. + +C. W. WHISTLER + +STOCKLAND, Nov. 1896. + + + +Chapter 1: The Coming Of The Vikings. + + +All along our East Anglian shores men had watched for long, and now +word had come from Ulfkytel, our earl, that the great fleet of +Swein, the Danish king, had been sighted off the Dunwich cliffs, +and once again the fear of the Danes was on our land. + +And so it came to pass that I, Redwald, son of Siric, the Thane of +Bures, stood at the gate of our courtyard and watched my father and +our sturdy housecarles and freemen ride away down the hill and +across the winding Stour river to join the great levy at +Colchester. And when I had seen the last flash of arms sparkle from +among the copses beyond the bridge, I had looked on Siric, my +father, for the last time in this world, but no thought rose up in +my mind that this might be so. + +Yet if I stand now where I stood on that day, and see by chance the +glimmer of bright arms through green boughs across the river, there +comes to me a rush of sadness that dulls the bright May sunshine +and the sparkle of the rippling water, and fills the soft May-time +wind with sounds of mourning. Now to me it seems that I was thus +sad at the time that is brought back to me. But I was not so. It is +only the weight of long years of remembrance of what should have +been had I known. At that parting I turned back into the hall +downcast, only because my father had thought me not yet strong +enough to ride beside him, and a little angry and hurt moreover, +for I was broad and strong for my sixteen years. + +Little thought I that in years to come I should remember all of +that leave taking, even to the least thing that happened; but so it +is. No man may rightly be said to forget aught. All that he has +known and learnt is there, hidden up in his mind to come forth if +there is anything that shall call it again to light. + +Now my father lies resting among nameless heroes who died for +England on Nacton Heath--I know not even which of the great mounds +it may be that holds his bones--but he fell before the flight began +when Thurketyl Mirehead played the craven. Neither victor nor +vanquished was he when his end came, but maybe that is the best end +for a warrior after all. Some must fall, and some may live to +boast, and some remain to mourn, but to give life for fatherland in +hottest strife is good. That is what my father would have wished +for himself, and I at least sorrow but for myself and not for him. + +Now I have spoken of remembrance, and I will add this word--that +some things in a man's life can never be set aside from his memory. +Waking or sleeping they come back to him. Eight days after that +going of my father came such a time to me, so that every least +thing is clear to me today as then. + +I sat plaiting a leash for my hounds on the settle before the fire +in our great hall at Bures, and I remember how the strands of +leather thong fell in my hand; I remember how my mother's spinning +wheel stopped short with a snapping of broken threads; how the +thrall who was feeding the fire stayed with the log in his hands; +how the sleepy men at the lower end of the hall sprang up with +heavy words checked on their lips before the lady's presence; how +the maidens screamed--aye, and how the draught swayed the wall +hangings, and sent a long train of sparks flying from a half-dead +torch, as the great door was thrown open and a man flung himself +into our midst, mud splashed and white faced, with hands that +quivered towards us as he cried hoarsely: + +"In haste, mistress--you must fly--the Danes--" and fell like a log +at my mother's feet where she sat on the dais, neither moving nor +speaking more. + +It was Grinkel, the leader of our housecarles {1}. His armour +was rent and gashed, and no sword was in the scabbard at his side, +and his helm was gone, and now as he fell a bandage slipped from +his arm, and slowly the red stream from a great wound ran among the +sweet sedges wherewith the floor was strewn. + +There came a mist before my eyes, and my heart beat thick and fast +as I saw him; but my mother rose up neither screaming nor growing +faint, though through her mind, as through mine, must have glanced +the knowledge of all that this homecoming of brave Grinkel meant. +She stepped from the high place to the warrior's side and hastily +rebound the wound, telling the maidens meanwhile to bring wine that +she might revive him if he were not already sped. + +Then she rose up while the old steward took the wine and tried to +force it between the close-set teeth, and she called the farm +servants to her. + +"Make ready all the horses and yoke the oxen to the wains," she +said in a clear voice that would not tremble. "Send the lads to +warn the village folk to fly beyond the river. For Grinkel comes +not in this wise for nought. The Danes are on us." + +Now I remember the grim faces of the men as they went, and I +remember the look on the faces of the women as they heard, and in +the midst of us seemed to lie terror itself glaring from the set +eyes of the dead warrior. And of those memories I will say +nought--I would not have them live in the minds of any by day and +night as they lived in mine for many a long year thereafter. Many +were the tales I had heard of the coming of Ingvar's host in the +days of Eadmund our martyred king, who was crowned here at Bures in +our own church, and those tales were terrible. Now the like was on +us, and I saw that what I had heard was not the half. + +The old steward rose up now, shaking his head in sorrow. I think he +was too old for fear. + +"Grinkel is dead, lady," he said gently, closing the wild eyes as +he spoke, and then throwing a cloak from the wall over him. But my +mother only said, "May he rest in peace. What of the Thane?" + +Thereat the steward looked forthright into his lady's face, and +spoke bravely for all around to hear: + +"Doubtless the levy is broken for this once, and he bides with Earl +Ulfkytel to gather a new and stronger force. The Thane has sent +Grinkel on, and he has ridden in over-much haste for a wounded man. +He was ever eager." + +My mother gave back her old servant's look in silence, and seemed +to assent. Yet I, though I was but a lad of sixteen, could see what +passed in that look of theirs. I knew that surely my father had +fallen, and that need was great for haste. + +Then was hurry and hustle in the house as all that was most +valuable was gathered, and I myself could but take my arms from the +wall, and don mail-shirt and helm and sword and seax {2} and +then look on, useless enough, with my thoughts in a whirl all the +time. + +Presently out of their tangle came one thing clearly to me, and +that was that there were others whom I loved to be warned, besides +the villagers. + +My mother came into the hall again, and stood for a moment like a +carven statue looking at the maidens who wrought at packing what +they might. She had not wept, but in her face was written sorrow +beyond weeping. Yet almost did she weep, when I stood beside her +and spoke, putting my hand on her arm. + +"Mother," I said, "I must go to Wormingford and warn them also. My +horse will be ready, and I will return to you." + +Then she looked at me, for as I go over these things I know that +this was the first time that I had ever said to her "I must," +without asking her leave, in aught that I would do. And she +answered me calmly. + +"Aye, that is a good thought. They will need help. Bide with them +if need is, and so join us presently on the road. We will fly to +London." + +"So far, mother?" I said. "Surely Colchester will be safe." + +"I will go to Ethelred the king," she answered. "He has ever been +your father's friend, and will be yours. And I was the queen's +maiden in the old days, and she will welcome me. Now go and bring +Hertha to me." + +She turned to her work, and I went out across the courtyard. +Already the wains stood there, the teams of sleepy oxen tossing +their long horns in the glare of torches. The church bell was +clanging the alarm of fire to bring home the men from field or +forest if any were abroad so late, for it was an hour after sunset, +and there was no moon yet. + +The gray horse that my father gave me a year agone stood ready +saddled in the stall when I came to the stables. I went and loosed +him, while a groom saw me and ran to help, and as I swung into the +saddle I saw his face marked with new lines across his forehead. + +"Do you fly first, master?" he said, with strange meaning in his +voice. + +"I go to Wormingford," I answered. "Likely enough, therefore, that +I fly last," and I laughed. + +"Aye, let me go, master, let me go," he said. "It is like that the +Danes are on the road." + +"Not yet," I said, touched by question and offer alike. "There is +many a mile between here and Ipswich, and I think that to go to +Wormingford is my work, surely." + +So I rode away fast, seeing in the valley below me the lights of +the house that I sought. As I had said, the errand was indeed mine. + +For at the great house just across the river below the hills lived +the one who should be my wife in the days to come--Hertha, daughter +of Osgod, the Thane of Wormingford. It was now three years since we +had been betrothed with all solemnity in our church, and that had +seemed but fit and right, for we were two children who had played +together since we could run hand in hand. And my mother had been as +a mother also to little Hertha since she was left with only her +father to tend her. + +Our house and Osgod's were akin, though not near, for we both +traced our line from Redwald the first Christian king of East +Anglia, whose name I bore. Hertha was two years younger than I. + +Now Osgod the Thane had ridden away to the war with my father, and +unless he had returned with Grinkel, Hertha was alone in the house +with her old nurse and the farm servants. Most surely she would +have been at Bures with us but for some spring-time sickness which +was among the village children, and from which my mother sought to +keep her free. It might be that the thane had returned, but it was +in my mind that the manner of Grinkel's coming boded ill to all of +us. + +So I rode on quickly down the hill towards the river. I knew not +how near the Danes might be, but I thought little of them, until +suddenly through the dusk I saw a red point of fire flicker and +broaden out into flame on a hilltop eastward, where I knew a beacon +fire was piled against need. And then from every point along the +Stour valley beacon after beacon flashed out in answer, until all +the countryside was full of them; and I hurried on more swiftly +than before. + +Our hall stood on the hill crest above church and village, beyond +the reach of creeping river mist and sudden floods, and I rode down +the track that crosses the lower road and so comes to the ford +below Osgod's place on the Essex side of the river. And when I came +to the crossing my horse pricked his ears and snorted, so that I +knew there were horsemen about, and I reined up and waited in the +lane. + +I could hear the quick hoofbeats of two steeds, and all the air was +full of the sound of alarm bells, for the evening was very still. + +Then up the road from eastward rode two men at an easy gallop, and +my horse's manner told me that a stable mate of his was coming, so +I feared no longer but went into the main road to meet them. + +"What news?" I cried, and they halted. + +"It is the young master," said one, and I knew the voice of Edred, +our housecarle. And when he was close to me I could see that he was +in almost as evil plight as had been Grinkel his comrade. The other +man I knew not, but he bore a headless spear shaft in his hand, and +Edred's shield had a great gash across it. + +"Master, has Grinkel come?" Edred asked me. + +"Aye, and is dead. He bade us fly, and could say no more. What of +my father?" + +The men looked at one another for a moment, and then Edred said +very sadly: + +"Woe is me that I must be the bearer of heavy tidings to you and +the lady your mother. But what is true is true and must be told. +Never has such a battle been fought in East Anglia, and the fortune +of war has gone against us." + +The fear that I had read in my mother's eyes fell cold on me at +those words-and I asked again, longing and fearing to know the +worst: + +"What of the thane, my father?" + +"Master, he fell with the first," Edred answered with a breaking of +his voice. "Nor might we bring him from the place where he fell. +For the Danes swept us from the field at the last like dead leaves +in the wind, and there was nought left us but to fly. Two long +hours we fought first, and then came flight. They say one man began +it. I know not; but it was no man of ours. Now the Danes are +marching hitherwards to Colchester." + +"What of Osgod of Wormingford?" I asked. + +"He lies beside our lord. There is a ring of slain round them. I +would I were there also," the warrior answered. + +"Then were there one less to care for our helpless ones," I said. +"All are preparing for flight at Bures. Come with me to +Wormingford, and we will warn them. There is work to do for us who +are left." + +"Aye, master, that is right," he said; "we may fight again and wipe +out this business." + +Then the other man, who belonged to Sudbury, five miles beyond us, +bade us farewell, and so rode on with his tale of terror, and Edred +followed me across the ford to Osgod's house, which was but a mile +from where we met. He told me that Grinkel had found a fresh horse +in Stoke village, and so had outstripped him. + +Many thralls stood at the gate of Osgod's courtyard as we came +there, and they were staring at the beacon fires around us, and +listening to the wild bells that rang so strangely. There was a +fire blazing now on the green before our own house, and one on the +hill above the Wormingford mere, which men say is haunted. + +"I would see your mistress," I said as they came and held my horse. +I had not been to the house for two days, as it chanced. + +Then one ran and brought the house steward, and told him. + +"I know not if that may be, master," he said; "but I will ask Dame +Gunnhild." + +"Has the lady gone to rest?" I said, being surprised at this delay. + +"She is not well" the man said; "and the dame has not suffered her +to rise today." + +"Then let me have speech with the dame without delay," I said, for +this made me uneasy, seeing what need there was for speedy flight. + +The steward went in, and I bade the thralls do all that Edred +ordered them, telling him to see to what was needed for flight and +so I went into the house, and stood by the hall fire waiting for +Gunnhild the nurse. + +There is nothing in all that wide hall that I cannot remember +clearly, even to a place where the rushes were ill strewn on the +floor. And the short waiting seemed very long to me. + +Then came Gunnhild. She was old, and I feared her, for men said +that she was a witch. But she had been in the house of Osgod the +Thane since he himself was a child, and Hertha loved her, and that +was enough for me. Nor had I any reason to think that the dame had +any but friendly feelings towards myself, though her bright eyes +and tall figure, and most of all what was said of her, feared me, +as I say. Now she came towards me swiftly, and did not wait for me +to speak first. + +"What will you at this hour, Redwald?" she said. + +"Nought but pressing need bade me come thus," I answered. "The levy +is broken, and the Danes are on the way to Colchester. My mother +flies to London, and you and Hertha must do likewise." + +"So your father and hers are slain," she said, looking fixedly at +me, and standing very still. + +"How know you that?" I asked sharply, for I had told the steward +nothing. + +"By your face, Redwald," she said; "you were but a boy two days +agone, now you have a man's work on your hands, and you will do it. +Who bade you ride here?" + +"No one," I said, wondering, "needs must that I should come." + +"That is as I thought," she said; "but we cannot fly." + +"Why not?" + +"Because the sickness that your mother feared is on Hertha, and she +cannot go." + +Now I was ready to weep, but that would be of no use. + +"Is there danger to her?" I said, and I could not keep my voice +from shaking, for Hertha was all the sister I had, and she in time +would be nearer than that to me. + +"None," answered the dame, "save she runs risk of chill. For she +has been fevered for a while." + +"Which is most to be feared," said I, "chill, or risk of Danish +cruelty?" + +She made no answer, but asked me what were my mother's plans. And +when I said that she would fly to Ethelred the king, the old nurse +laughed strangely to herself. + +"Then you go to the very cause of all this trouble," she said. +"Truly the king's name should be 'the Unredy', for rede he has +none. It is his ill counsel that has brought Swein the Dane on us. +We have to pay for the Hock-tide slayings {3}." + +"We had no share in that" I said. + +"No, because half our folk are Danes, more or less, some of the men +of Ingvar and Guthrum. But Swein will not care for that--they are +all English to him." + +"What will you do, then?" I asked, growing half wild that she +should stand there quietly and plan nought. + +"These folk will side with Swein presently, when they find that he +is the stronger, and then the old kinship will wake in them, and +the Wessex king will be nought to their minds. Then will be peace +here, for the Danes will sweep on to Mercia and London. Do you go +to Ethelred the Unredy--and I abiding here shall be the safer in +the end, and Hertha with me." + +"But peace has not come yet" I said. + +"I can hide until it does come," she said. And then, for my face +must have shown all the doubt that I felt, she spoke very kindly to +me. "Trust the old witch who wishes you well, Redwald, my son; she +who has nursed Hertha for so long will care for her till the last; +safe she will be until you return to find her when the foolishness +of Ethelred is paid for." + +"Where can you hide?" I asked, and urged her to tell me more, but +she would not do so. + +"No man would dream of the hiding place that I shall seek," she +said, "and I will tell it to none. Then will it be the surer." + +"I know all this country," I answered. "There is no place." + +She smiled faintly, and paused a little, thinking. + +"I will tell you this," she said at last. "You go to the king; +well--I go to the queen. That is all you may know. But maybe it +will be enough to guide you someday." + +I could not understand what she meant; nor would she tell me more. +Only she said that all would be safe, and that I need fear nothing +either for Hertha or for herself. + +"My forbears were safe in that place to which I go," she said; "and +I alone know where it is. When the time comes, Hertha shall tell +you of it but that must wait for the days to be." + +"I fear they will be long. Let me see Hertha before I go," I said, +"for I must needs be content." + +"How looked she when last you saw her?" + +"Well, and bright, and happy," I answered. + +"Keep that memory of her therefore," Gunnhild said. "I would not +have you see her in sickness, nor may she be waked without danger. +Tell your mother that surely if she could take Hertha with her it +should be so, but it may not be. She would be harmed by a long +journey." + +The old nurse turned and left me as swiftly as she had come. And +now it is in my mind that she went thus lest she should weep. So I +was alone in the hall, and there was no more left for me to do. I +must even let things be as she would. It came into my thought that +she was right about our half-Danish folk, for though they had +fought to keep the newcomers from the land that their fathers had +won, Swein was no foreigner, and they would as soon own him as +Ethelred of Wessex, if he got the upper hand and would give them +peace. Even we Angles never forgot that the race of Ecgberht was +Saxon and not of our own kin altogether. The Dane was as near to us +as the Wessex king, save by old comradeship, and the ties that had +come with years. + +So all that Edred and I could do was to bid the steward take his +orders from Gunnhild, and so ride back to Bures along the riverside +track. And when we came there the long train of flying people were +crossing the bridge, and we rode past them one by one, and the +sight of those wain loads of helpless women and children was the +most piteous I had ever seen. Many such another train was I to look +on in the years to come, but none ever wrung my heart as this, for +I knew every face so well. Yet I thought they would be safe, for +the Danes were far off yet, and there was full time to gain the +depths of the forest land on the East Saxon side. + +Now, our people had gone on more quickly than the villagers by +reason of better cattle and more hands to the work, and when we had +passed the foremost of these, the road went up the hill and no man +was upon it. So we went quickly, and then came one on foot towards +the village, and just beyond him were our folk, whom he had passed +or left. + +It was good Father Ailwin, our old priest, and I thought that he +sought me, or took back some word to others and I would ride back +for him. + +"What is it, Father?" I cried, "I will do your errand." + +"Nay, my son, you cannot," he said; "your mother drew me to fly +with her, and my weakness bade me do it for a while. But I may not +leave my place. The Danes are not all heathen as they were in +Eadmund's days, and I think that I am wrong to go. When our folk +come back they must find their priest waiting for them." + +Then I strove to turn him again to flight with us, but I could not, +and at last he commanded me to desist and leave him. And so he gave +me his blessing, and I went, being sure that he would be slain, and +weeping therefore, for I loved him well. But I told him of Dame +Gunnhild's words, and begged him to seek her and speak with her, +for she might hide him also for a while if he would not leave the +place altogether. + +So we left our home, and that was the last time I set eyes on our +hall at Bures. Then I caught up my mother hard by the dark wood +that is round the great solemn mound that we say is the tomb of +Boadicea, the Icenian queen of the men who fought against Rome. We +call it haunted, and none of us dare set foot in those woods, by +day even. + +The beacon fires burnt all round us, and in every farmstead was +terror and hustle as the poor folk trembled to think what they +could mean, and some came now and then and asked my mother what +they should do. + +"Bide in your homes till you must needs take to the woods," she +said; and that was wise counsel, and many were glad thereafter that +they took it, for the Danes passed them by. + +Now I remember all that happened on our journey to London along the +great Roman road that runs from Colchester thither, but there is +little to tell thereof, for it was safe and we hardly hurried after +the first day. We rested at the house of a thane who was well known +to us on the first evening, and there my mother heard from Edred +all that had befallen. And she bore the heavy tidings well, for she +had already given up any hope that my father still lived. Yet as I +look back I know that she was never the same after that day. + +So we came in safety to London, and to the court of Ethelred our +king, and there we were most kindly received, for my father was +well known to the king, and the queen loved my mother for the sake +of old days. They gave us lodging near the great house where the +court was held, and on the third day after we came, we were bidden +to the king's presence. + +Then it was that I looked on Ethelred for the first time, and I had +thought that a king should have been more kingly than he. For there +was no command in his face, and he moved quickly and with little +meaning in what he did, being restless in his way. But he put his +hand on my shoulder very kindly, and looked in my face and said: + +"One may know that this is the son of Siric, my friend. He is like +what the good thane was in the old days. What shall I do for him, +lady?" + +Now, my mother would have answered, but I was not afraid of this +handsome, careless-looking man, and I had my own wishes in the +matter. So I spoke for myself. + +"Make me a warrior, lord king. I would fain fight the Danes, and +already I can use sword and spear, and can ride." + +Then my mother spoke hastily and almost weeping, being broken down +with all her trouble and the long journey. + +"I would have him serve Holy Church rather, in some monastery. +Already he can read and write, my king, for I have had him taught +in hopes that this might be." + +Thereat the king shook his head, and walked away to the window for +a minute. Then he came back quickly and said, not looking at my +mother: + +"Holy Church will be best served by warriors who will use carnal +arms against Swein's heathen just now. The boy is right--I would +that there were more who had his spirit. We need and shall need +those who love fighting." + +Then he said to me: + +"Siric your father had a wondrous sword that I used to envy him; +you shall learn to use it." + +"Lord king," I answered, "I must learn to win it back from the +Danes, who have it now." + +I thought the king changed countenance a little at that, and he bit +his lip. + +"We have been well beaten in East Anglia," he said as if to +himself. "Here is truth from this boy at least." + +Now, if Ethelred did not know that our men had been so scattered by +the Danes that they could not even ask for truce to recover their +slain, it seemed plain even to me that the king was ill-served in +some way. But I could say nought; and after that he bade us +farewell for the time. + +So it came to pass that he gave me a place among the thanes' sons +of his own court and there I was well trained in all that would +make me a good warrior. Soon I had many friends, and best of all I +loved the athelings, Eadmund and Eadward, who soon took notice of +me, the one because I was never weary of weapon play, and the +other, Eadward, who was somewhat younger than I, because of the +learning that our good priest of Bures had taken such pains to +teach me against my will. For above all things Eadmund loved the +craft of the warrior, and Eadward all that belonged to peace. + + + +Chapter 2: Olaf The King. + + +My mother lived but a few months after that flight of ours; but at +least she knew before she died that Bertha was safe. What the old +nurse had foreseen had come to pass. The half-Danish and Danish +folk of the East Angles owned Swein as king, though not willingly, +and a housecarle from Wormingford made his way to us with word from +Gunnhild that set our minds at rest. Truly our hall and Osgod's had +been burnt by parties from the Danish host, and for a time the +danger was great, for Swein's vengeance for his sister's death was +terrible. + +Now the land was poorer, but in peace. Yet Hertha would keep in +hiding till we might see how things went, for the Danes might be +forced back, and when a Danish host retreats it hinders pursuit by +leaving a desert in its wake. Many a long year will it be before +those Danish pathways are lost to sight again. They seem to be +across every shire of our land. + +So I lived on in Ethelred's court now in one town and now in +another, as the long struggle bade us shift either to follow or fly +the Danes; and presently the memory both of my mother and Hertha +grew dim, for wartime and new scenes age and harden a youth very +quickly. Soon I might ride at the side of Eadmund the Atheling to +try to stay the march of Swein through England; and many were the +fights I saw with him, until I was the only one left of all the +youths who had been my comrades at first, and Eadmund had won his +name of "Ironside" in bravest hopeless struggle. + +I grew to be a close and trusted friend of his, and so at last +amidst the trouble that was all round us in those heavy times the +remembrance of Hertha became but as part of a childhood that was +long gone, and I thought of her but as of the little one with whom +I had played in the old days beside the quiet Stour. There were +none left to remind me of her, for one by one my few Bures men had +fallen, and Edred, who had been my servant at the court, gave his +life for mine in my first battle. Into Swein's East Anglia our +levies never made their way. + +What need for me to say aught of those three years of warfare? +Their tale is written in fire over all the fair face of England. +For nothing checked Swein Forkbeard until step by step the Danish +hosts closed on London, and at last even the brave citizens were +forced to yield to him. Then Ethelred our king must needs fly from +his throne, and leave the land to its Danish master. + +Yet it was true, as Eadmund the Atheling said, that the Dane was +but master of the land, and not of the English people. Even today +my mind is full of wondering honour for those sullen Saxon levies +of ours who for three years bore defeat after defeat at the hands +of the trained and hardened veterans of the north, uncomplaining +and unbent. What wonder if at last we were wearied out and must +hold our hands for a while? + +So now when I was nineteen, and looking and feeling many years +older by reason of the long stress of warfare and trouble, I was at +Rouen, in Normandy, at the court of our queen's brother, Richard +the Duke. To him Ethelred had fled at the last and there, too, were +the queen and the athelings, good Abbot Elfric of Peterborough, and +a few more of the court, besides myself. Ethelred had hoped to gain +some help from the duke; but he could only give us shelter in our +need, for he had even yet to hold the land that Rolf, his +forefather, had won against his neighbours, and could spare us not +one of his warriors. + +So in Rouen we waited and watched for some new turn of things that +might give us fresh hopes of regaining our own land. Yet it was a +weary waiting for one knew not what; and Ethelred the king grew +moody and despairing as the days went on, and there seemed to be no +help. + +But Eadmund was ever planning for return, and was restless, riding +down to each ship that came into the river to hear what news might +be, until the winter set in, and we must needs wait until +springtime brought the traders again from the English shores. + +Only Elfgiva the queen, whom her own people call Emma, was well +content to be in her own land again for a while, though one might +easily see that she sorely grieved for the loss of her state as the +queen of England. And Eadward the Atheling loved to be among the +wondrous buildings of the Norman land, spending long hours with the +learned men, and planning many good things to be wrought in England +when times of peace should come once more. And in these plannings +Elfric the abbot was ever ready to help him, and the more, as I +think, that to hear of their thoughts of return to England, and of +happier times, would cheer our king. For Elfric would never allow +but that we were here for a short while only, saying that England +would yet rise up refreshed, and sweep the Danes into the sea, from +whence they came. + +"Else why should I have given all that I have--even five hundred +pounds--for St. Florentine his body (wanting the head, in truth, +but I might not have that), if I were not sure that I should take +it home for the greater glory of St. Peter's church at Medehamstede +{4} presently? Answer me that, lord king, and be not so +downhearted." + +This he said one day, being full of his purchase, and I think that +the cheerfulness of the good man helped our king. + +"Verily, Redwald, my son," the abbot said to me, "if I get not St. +Florentine home, I think my money is not lost. The king waxes more +hopeful when he sees the shrine waiting to be taken overseas." + +Nor could I say for myself that I was not pleased with the stay in +Rouen. For I had never known the fierce joy of victory, and the +rest from the long tale of defeat was good to me. Yet I set myself +to learn all that I could of the splendid weapon craft of the +Norman warriors, for I thought that I should yet need in England +all I could learn. And the new life and scenes pleased me well, for +I was young enough to let the cares of our poor land slip from my +mind for a while. + +So the long winter wore away, and at last the season came when we +might look for the first ships of the year, and with them news from +England. Then Eadmund would go to the haven at the mouth of the +great river Seine that runs to Rouen, so that he should be at hand +to hear the first tidings that came. Glad enough was I to go with +him, and we took up our quarters in a great house that belonged to +the duke at the town they call "The Haven," and there waited, ever +watching the long gray sea line for a coming sail. + +But none came until the first week in March, when the wind blew +steadily from the northeast, and the sky was clear and bright with +promise of open weather. Then at last we saw eight ships together +heading for the haven, and that sight was more welcome than I can +say. + +When they came near we knew that they were no traders, but long +dragon ships, and at first we thought they were Danish vikings; and +the townsmen armed in haste and mustered along the wharves to +prevent their landing, if they came on their wonted errand of +plunder. And eagerly enough did Eadmund and I join them, only +hoping for another blow at our foes, and having no thought in our +minds that the ships we watched were bringing us more hope than we +dared long for. + +Next I knew that these ships were like no Danish vessels that I had +ever seen, but were far more handsome, both in build and fittings. +Nor did they fly the terrible raven banner as most Danes were wont. +Then it was not long before the lines of armed townsmen broke up +their ranks and crowded down to the wharves to greet the ships in +all friendliness, for they were Norse, as it would seem, and the +Norse viking is ever welcome in the land that Rolf Ganger, the +viking, won for himself. + +So the ships came into the harbour, brave with gilded dragon heads +and sails striped with bright colours, all fresh from their winter +quarters, and Eadmund turned away, for he thought that they would +be Swein's men, of the host of Thorkel the Norseman, his great +captain, and foster father of Cnut his son. For Swein held Norway +as well as Denmark, and many Norsemen followed him. Thorkel's host +was that which slew Elfheah, the good archbishop of Canterbury, +whom his monks called Elphege, but last year. + +That, too, was the thought of the seamen to whom I spoke when the +ships were yet distant, and so we went back to the hall heavy and +disappointed. We would not speak to these men, knowing that from +Thorkel's folk we should but hear boasting of Swein's victories. + +But presently the steward came into the hall, where we sat silently +listening to the shouts of the men as they berthed the ships, and +he said that the leader of the vikings would see and speak with +Eadmund himself. + +"Is he Thorkel, or Thorkel's man?" answered the atheling, "for if +he be, I will not see him." + +"No, lord," said the steward, "he is one who has no dealings with +the Danes. He will not tell me his name, but I think that he is a +great man of some kind." + +"Not a great man, but thick," said a kindly voice of one who stood +without. "If hatred of Danes will pass me into Eadmund's presence, +I may surely enter." + +And then there came into the doorway a man who was worth more than +a second look. Never had I seen one to whom the name of king seemed +to belong so well by right as to this man, whatever his rank might +be. He stood and looked round for a moment, as if the dim light +from the high windows was not enough to show him where we were at +first, and I could not take my eyes from him. + +He was not tall, but very square of shoulder and deep of chest, +with mighty arms that were bare, save for their heavy gold +bracelets, below the sleeves of his ring mail, and his hair and +beard were golden red and very long. He wore a silvered helm, +whereon was inlaid a golden cross above a narrow gold circlet that +was round its rim, and his hand rested on the hilt of such a +priceless sword as is told of in the old tales of the heroes. But I +forgot all these things as I looked into his pleasant weatherbeaten +face, and saw the kindly look in the gray eyes that I knew would +flash most terribly in fight. He was twenty-five years old, as I +thought; but therein I was wrong, for he was just my own age, +though looking so much older. + +"I am Olaf Haraldsson--Olaf Digri, the Thick, as men call me," he +said. "Some call me king, though I rule but over a few ships, as a +sea king. Which of you thanes is Eadmund the Atheling?" + +Then Eadmund rose up from his place, and went towards the king. His +seat had been in shadow, else there had been no need to ask which +was he. + +"I have heard of you, King Olaf," he said, "for your deeds are sung +in our land already. And you are most welcome. Have you news from +England?" + +So those two grasped each other's hands, and I think there were no +two other such men living at that time. It was good to see them +together. + +"Aye," said the king, "I have been in England, and therefore I have +come to find you. Swein is dead, and your chance has come. Let me +help you to win your land again." + +That was plain speaking, and for the moment Eadmund held his +breath, and could not speak for sheer surprise and gladness. But I +could not forbear leaping up and shouting, tossing my helm in the +air as I did so, so wondrous was all this to me, and so full of +hope. + +At that Olaf laughed, and leaving Eadmund to his thoughts, turned +to me. + +"Which of the athelings are you?" he asked. "I have heard of +Eadmund's brothers," and he held out his strong hand to take mine. + +"I am but the atheling's comrade--his servant, rather," I said, +growing red as I did so, for I had surely forgotten myself in my +gladness. + +"Redwald is no servant, King Olaf," said Eadmund quickly. "He is my +closest comrade here, and has fought well at my side. Thane of +Bures in East Anglia he is--but now the Danes hold his place." + +"Why then," said Olaf, "Thoralf's grandson surely?" + +"Aye, king," I answered, wondering; "my grandfather was named +Thoralf. He was one of Olaf Tryggvesson's chiefs." + +"Then have I found a cousin," laughed the king. "Give me your hand, +kinsman," and he looked me over from head to foot, but very kindly. + +I took the king's hand gladly, but somewhat dazed in my mind at +being thus owned. And Olaf saw that I was so, and told me more. + +"Asta, my good mother, was this Thoralf's cousin, and we Norsemen +do not lose count of our kin. So I knew well that Thoralf found an +English home and wife when Olaf Tryggvesson was first in England, +and that he was Thane of Bures by some right of his lady. So I +knew, when I heard your name and place, that I had found a kinsman. +And I have so few that I am glad." + +Now I knew that this was true, but we had never thought much of +Thoralf, rather priding ourselves on his wife's long descent from +King Redwald. I wished for the first time now that I knew more of +this Norse grandfather of mine. + +"Presently we will find Rani, my foster father, who is with the +ships," said Olaf; "he knew Thoralf well. You and I must see much +of one another, cousin." + +Then he turned to Eadmund, who was, as it seemed, well pleased that +I had found so good a friend. And he said: + +"Forgive me if I have forgotten greater matters for a moment. But I +cannot greet a kinsman coldly, and it is in my mind that Redwald is +a cousin worth finding, if I may judge by the way in which he +hailed my news." + +"Truly," said Eadmund, "I am minded to do as he did, now that I +have taken all the wonder of it in. But it seems over good to be +true--Swein dead--and your offered help!" + +Then they both laughed, well content, and so Eadmund called the +steward, and wine and meat were set for the king, and they sat down +and talked, as he ate with a sailor's hunger. But I listened not to +their talk, my mind being over full of this good fortune of my own. +I had none left of my own kin, and till today I had been as it were +alone. + +Presently, however, I heard an East Anglian name that was dear to +me. Eadmund asked how it was that Swein Forkbeard had died, for +none thought that his end was yet to be thought of as near. Now it +would seem that he had gone suddenly. + +"He was at Gainsborough," said Olaf, "and he was about to make his +way south to Eadmund's burg. Whereon men say that to save his town +and shrine the holy martyr, King Eadmund, whom Ingvar slew, thrust +Swein through with an iron lance. Some say that he slew him +otherwise, but all agree as to his slayer. And now I think that +England will rise." + +"What of Cnut, Swein's son?" asked Eadmund. + +"He is but a boy. What he may be in a few years' time I know not. +With him it will be as with myself. I was given a ship when I was +twelve years old, and thereafter all that my men did goes to my +credit in the mouths of the scalds. Yet my men and I know well that +Rani, my foster father, whom you will soon know, was the real +captain and leader for the first three or four years." + +Then said Eadmund: + +"Cnut is of no account." + +Olaf laughed a little, and answered: + +"Cnut's own arm may be of little strength, but his name is on the +lips of every Dane. There are three chiefs who will hold the +kingdom in his name, and they are the men whom you must meet: +Thorkel the High, his foster father; Ulf Sprakalegsson the jarl, +his brother-in-law; and Eirik the jarl, whose brother Homing holds +London even now. Good men and loyal they are, and what they do Cnut +does." + +"I have three chiefs in my mind who can match these," said our +atheling. "Olaf the king, and Ulfkytel of East Anglia, and Edric +Streone, my foster father." + +Then Olaf looked in the face of Eadmund, as it seemed to me in +surprise, and made no answer. + +"Are we not equal then?" asked the atheling. + +"I have heard that Edric Streone is on the Danish side," said Olaf. +"Cannot Utred of Northumbria be trusted?" + +"Edric has but sought rest, from need," answered Eadmund. "I know +not what else he could do at last. He will join us again as soon as +we land. So also will Utred." + +"Then we are equal," said the king, while a cloud seemed to pass +from his face, for Streone led all Mercia, and were he in truth on +our side things would go well. It was no very secret talk among +some of us that Edric the earl had made peace sooner than might +have been, but that angered Eadmund and the king sorely if so much +were even hinted. + +"Then you will indeed help us?" said Eadmund, for Olaf had accepted +the place he had named for him as it were. + +"I have a debt to England that I can never repay," answered the +king gravely. "She gave us our first teachers in the Christian +faith. And Swein has held Norway, my own land, with the help of the +heathen jarls who are yet there. I fight the fight of the Cross, +therefore, and when I go back to my own land, it will be to sweep +away the last worship of Odin and Thor. But the time has not come +yet," and his eyes shone strangely. + +"When it comes I will help you," said Eadmund, "if it may be that I +can do so." + +"I know it, and I thank you; but it is my thought that I shall need +no help," said the king, while the look on his face was very +wondrous, so that I had never seen the like. It minded me of the +pictures of St. Stephen that I saw in a great church here with +Abbot Elfric and Eadward. Then he spoke of the spread of the Faith +in Norway, and how that he would be the one who should finish what +Olaf Tryggvesson, his cousin, had begun; and one might see that he +longed for power and kingship only for that work. + +Long did those two warriors talk before they turned to lighter +matters, and in the end they planned to ride to Rouen to see the +king himself on the next day. But before night fell there came more +news with another ship that came alone into the haven. And she was +English, bearing messengers from the great witan itself. + +These thanes told Eadmund their news, and it was this: + +That Cnut had been hailed as king by the Danish host at +Gainsborough, but that the English people begged Ethelred to return +to them, promising that a good force should be ready to meet him on +his landing. Already the London folk had planned a rising there and +in the great towns against the Thingmen, as the Danish paid +garrisons were called, and it was likely that this had by this time +come about. + +So at once Eadmund went with these thanes to Rouen, and Olaf would +have me bide with him till word came from the king as to the next +doings. + +That was a pleasant time to me, for I grew to love Olaf, and he was +never willing that I should be far from him. Then, too, I heard +many tales of my grandfather Thoralf from Rani, the old viking who +had fought beside him, and had been with Tryggvesson when he was +christened in England. And of all Olaf's men I liked best Ottar the +Black, the scald, who was but five years older than myself, but who +had yet seen much fighting with the king both by land and sea. We +sang much together, for I was willing to learn from him, and he to +teach me. + +Now of this singing there is one thing that I will set down, for +the matter comes into my story again. + +One day Ottar sang the saga of the sword of Hiorvard; how the +maiden warrior won it from the grave mound of her father, Angantyr, +in spite of terror of the dead hero, and of the unearthly fires. +That was a good saga, and when it was ended old Rani said: + +"Thoralf had a sword that was won by his father from a chief's +grave mound in Vendland, It was the most wondrous sword, save only +Olaf's 'Hneitir' yonder, that I have ever seen. Silver and gold was +its hilt, and the blade was wrought in patterns on the steel, and +there were runes in gold close to the hilt. He would call it 'Foe's +Bane', and that in truth was what the sword was." + +I knew only too well that that sword became my father's in his +turn, and now it was lost to me. + +"My father fell with sword 'Foe's Bane' in his hand," I said sadly. +"Yet I know that the name was not belied ere he did so." + +"Then the Danes have it," said Rani, "and it will come back to +you." + +I remembered that Ethelred himself had spoken of the sword, and how +I had made his face fall when he heard that it was lost. Nor had I +been long at court before I heard words from one thane or another +that seemed to say that Edric Streone had made light of our defeat, +for some reasons of his own. + +"I must win it back," I said. + +"If there is aught in old sayings," answered Ottar, "the sword will +draw its holder to face you, unless he won it in fair fight hand to +hand." + +Thereat Olaf laughed, and no more was said. But in years to come +there were told strange tales of the longing, as it were, of his +own sword 'Hneitir' to be back at its master's side. + +So the time went quickly for me, but to Olaf the waiting seemed +long before Eadmund rode back from Rouen. And with him came those +thanes and his half-brother Eadward, but Ethelred himself was not +with them. He would not go to England, fearing treachery as it +seemed; but Eadward was to go over and meet the witan and speak +with them. Yet the thanes said that without the king no force would +move. + +"Why does he not go?" said Olaf impatiently. "Here is time lost +when a sudden blow would win all." + +"Because he is Ethelred the Unredy," answered Eadmund shortly, for +he was very angry at the delay. + +Then was another waiting, but Eadward was very wise though he was +so young, being but twelve years old at this time, and he had +Elfric the abbot with him, and at last word came from him that all +was going well. Then Ethelred made up his mind and listened to +Olaf's counsel. + +"Strike at London," he said. "We know that the citizens are ever +loyal." + +They had risen, as it seemed, and had slain many of the thingmen, +and Heming, Thorkel's brother, himself. That had but brought on +them hardships and a stronger garrison, while Ethelred wavered and +would not come. + +At last Ethelred gathered what few men would follow him from +Normandy and sailed to go to Southampton, and so to Winchester. +Richard the Duke gave him a few ships and men enough to man them. +Then Olaf, as it was planned, would sail up the Thames in such time +as to meet the king's land force at London on a certain day, and +thus take the city by a double attack. And Olaf asked that I might +sail with him. + +That Eadmund gladly agreed to, saying that we should meet on London +Bridge shortly, and so I saw him set out full of hope, and then +waited with Olaf for the short time that he would yet stay before +sailing. He would not reach the Thames too early lest London should +be held in too great force for us, and it was his plan that we +should sail up the great river too suddenly for any new Danish +force to be gathered. + +Now on the evening before we sailed Olaf the king was restless, and +silent beyond his wont at the feasting before departure, and he +seemed to take little pleasure even in the songs of Ottar the +scald, though the men praised them loudly. I thought it likely that +some foreboding was on him, and that is no good sign before a +fight. + +So presently I spoke to Rani, asking him if aught ailed the king. +Whereat he answered, smiling: + +"Nought ails him but longing to be sword to sword with these old +foes of ours. This is his way, ever. If he were gay as Biorn the +marshal yonder I might wonder at him maybe." + +But presently Olaf rose up and bade Rani take his place, saying +that he would go down to the ships to see that all was well. And +then he beckoned me to follow him, and we went down the long hall +together. It would seem that this was no new thing that he should +leave the feast there, for the little hush that fell as we passed +the long tables lasted no long time, and the men seemed not +surprised. Indeed King Olaf had little love for sitting over the +ale cup, and no man was more careful to see to all things about his +ships and men than he. + +The great doors closed after us, and we stood in the white +moonlight for a moment. The air was cold and sharp after the warmth +of the crowded hall. Down in the harbour the water was quiet +enough, but outside a fair breeze was blowing from the southwest. + +"The wind will hold, and will serve us well," said Olaf. "Who of +all the Danish hosts will deem that such a wind is bringing fire +and sword on them from across the sea?" + +Then he folded his cloak round him and we went down to the harbour, +where the long line of ships lay side by side along the wharf with +their bows shoreward. The great dragon stem heads towered over us, +shining strangely in the moonlight, and the gentle send of the +waves into the harbour made them sway and creak as though they were +coming to life. + +"The dragons are restless as I," he said looking up at them. + +"Tomorrow, hungry ones--tomorrow--then shall you and I be set free +to meet wind and wave and foe again." + +Then one of the men on watch began to sing, and his song was an old +sea stave that had a swing and roll in its rough tune that was like +the broken surge of sea water, even while it was timed to the fall +of oar blades into the surf. One may not say how old those songs +are that the seamen sing. + +"That is the dragon's answer," said the king to me. "Sing, Redwald, +and take your part." + +So when the man came to the part where all should join, I took up +the song with him, and then many others of the men joined in--some +five or six in each ship. + +"That is good," said Olaf, laughing softly. "Here are men whose +hearts are light." + +The man who sang first came now and looked over the high bows of +the ship, and his figure was black against the moonlight. + +"Ho, master scald!" he cried in his great voice, "now shall you +sing the rest. You have put me out of conceit with my own singing. +Why are you not at the feast, where I would be if I were not tied +here!" + +"He is keeping the dragons awake," laughed the king. "Nor do I +think that even a feast would take you from the ship just as the +tide is on the turn." + +"Maybe not, lord king," answered the man, lifting his hand in +salute. "But the dragons will be wakeful enough--never fear for +them." + +So the king answered back cheerily, and other men came and +listened, and so at last he turned away, leaving the men who loved +him pleased and the happier for his coming thus. + +Now I thought that we should have gone back to the hall; but Olaf +walked away from the town, going along the shore. The tide was just +out, and the flow would soon begin. Soon we lost sight of the last +lights from the houses, and still he went on, and I followed him, +not speaking, for I knew not what plans he was making. + +At last we came to a place to which I had not been before, and it +was lonely enough. The forest came down to the beach, and the land +was low and sheltered between the hills. There the king stayed, +sitting down on a fallen tree and resting his chin on his hand, as +he looked out over the water with grave eyes that seemed to see far +beyond the tossing waves. + +I rested beside him, and there we bided silent for an hour or more. +There was only the sound of the wind in the storm-twisted trees +behind us, and of the waves as they broke along the edge of the +bare sands, where a few waking sea birds ran and piped unseen by +us. Almost had I slept with those well-known sounds in my ears. + +Then suddenly the king lifted his head, and spoke one word to me: + +"Listen," he said. + +I roused, but all that I could hear at first were the sounds that I +had forgotten--the song of the wind in the trees, the rush of the +breakers, and the cry of the sea birds across the sands. + +Then my heart began to beat wildly, for out of these sounds, or +among them, began to come clearly, and yet more clearly the sound +of the tread of many armed feet--the passing of a mighty host--and +with that the thunder of the war song, and the cry of those who +bade farewell. And these sounds passed over us and around us, going +seawards; then they died away out towards the north, and were gone. + +Yet still the king listened, and again came the tramp of the armed +thousands, and the war song, and the voices of parting, and they +passed, and came, and passed yet once more. + +Then after the third time there was nought but the sound of wind +and wave and sea fowl, and I drew closer to Olaf and asked him: + +"What is this that we hear?" + +"Wait," he said, and pointed seaward. + +Then I looked, and I saw all the northern sky glow red as glows the +light of a burning town on the low clouds when the host that has +fired it looks back on its work. And plain and clear in the silver +moonlight against the crimson sky sat the wraith of a king, throned +on the sand at the very water's edge, and round him stood shadowy +nobles, looking seaward. + +And even as I saw it the first wave of the rising tide sent its +edge of foam shorewards, and it surged around the kingly feet and +sapped the base of the throne, and the stately wraith turned and +looked upon the nobles, and was gone. + +Then faded the red light from the sky, and the waves washed over +the place where the throne and court had been, and Olaf rose up and +looked in my face. Nor was there fear of what he had seen and heard +written in his quiet look. + +"What is this, my king?" I said, trembling with the fear that comes +of things beyond our ken. + +"It is the fate of England that is falling on her," he said +quietly. + +"Read it me, for I fear what I have heard and seen," I said. + +"We have heard the going of mighty hosts to England, and we have +heard the sound of farewell. But we have heard no shout of victory, +or wailing for defeat. Little therefore will be gained or lost by +this sailing of ours. Yet all is surely lost if we sail not." + +Then he ceased, but he had not yet spoken of what we saw, and I +waited for his words. Yet still he stood silent, and looked out +over the sea, until I was fain to ask him what the vision meant. + +"Surely it was the wraith of a son of Swein that we saw," he said; +"but it will be long years ere Cnut bears that likeness, for that +was of a man full grown and mighty." + +Now the reading of this was beyond me, for I have no skill in these +matters, as had Olaf. And he said nought for a little while, but +seemed to ponder over it. + +"Now I know," said he at last. "What we have seen is the outcome of +the going of the hosts to England. There shall be a Danish kingdom +built upon sand. Cnut shall reign, but his throne shall fall. The +wave of English love for England's kings of her own race cannot be +stayed." + +Then I was downcast, for hope that the Danes would be driven from +the land had filled all my mind, and I said: + +"Surely the vision may mean that we shall sweep away the Danish +rule as the waves sapped the throne and swept over its place." + +"Aye, may it be so," answered Olaf. "Often one may read these +visions best even as their bodings come to pass. Let us go back. +This is a lonesome place, and strange fancies weigh down a man's +mind when all he may hear is the wind singing to the surges. Maybe +these are but dreams. What matters it if Cnut reigns over the old +Danelagh as Guthrum reigned, if Ethelred is overlord? It will be +again as in Alfred's days, and once more an English king over the +English folk, when Cnut is gone." + +So he turned, and led the way back towards the town, and when we +saw the lights close at hand, he bade me say nought of this to any +man. + +"We have seen strange things, cousin," he said, taking my arm, "and +they will be better untold. You and I may see their meaning +hereafter, and maybe shall have a share in their working out. Now +let us sleep, and dream only of seeing England again tomorrow." + + + +Chapter 3: The Breaking Of London Bridge. + + +There was a fair wind for us into the Thames mouth, and all seemed +to be going well. But when we came off the Medway it seemed that +there was to be fighting, for our way was blocked by a fleet and +that stronger than ours. + +Now as the longships were cleared for the weapon play, Olaf +wondered how the Danes should have had word of our coming, for it +was plain that this fleet of ten ships was waiting for us. Yet we +had kept well away from the forelands, lest we should make it too +plain where we were going. + +Then one ship left the rest and came swiftly towards us, under +oars. And when the ship drew near, we saw that she bore the banner +of Ethelred himself. + +So the fair plans that had been made had come to naught, and when +Olaf understood this his face grew dark with anger, and he said: + +"Almost would I leave this foolish king to go his own way without +help of mine. But I have promised Eadmund, and I must keep my word. +Henceforward I shall know what I must look for." + +Little, therefore, had Olaf to say to Ethelred when they met, nor +would he go on board the English ship, but Ethelred must come to +him. Eadmund was at his father's side, and his face was very +wrathful, for he felt even as did Olaf. + +"London is ours already," Ethelred said. "Wherefore I would join +you." + +"London by this time may be in other hands," answered Olaf; "but we +shall see when we get there. Now must there be no more time lost +but we must make all speed up the river, tarrying nowhere." + +So we sailed on. When we came to Greenwich there were no Danes +there, nor any Danish ships. I went ashore in a boat, and asked the +men I saw what was become of them. And they told me that Thorkel's +fleet had sailed northward on Swein's death, and that the thingmen +whom he had left in the place had gone to London. + +"That is as I thought," said Olaf. "Now there will be more trouble +in driving them out than there has been in letting them in." + +When we came at last in sight of London Bridge I knew that Olaf was +right, for since the Danes had gained the city they had not been +idle. They had built a great fort on the Southwark side of the +river, girt with a wide moat, and all the stronger that the walls +thus surrounded were partly of timber and stone. The road from +across London Bridge runs through this fort, so that one might by +no means pass over it until the place was won. And at the other end +of the bridge the old Roman walls of London itself were far too +strong for our force to take by storm. + +But the strangest thing to me was to see what they had done to the +great timber bridge itself, for they had made that also into a +fortress. The old railing along the roadway was gone, and in its +place were breast-high bulwarks of strong timber, and on each span +of the bridge was a high wooden tower whose upper works overhung +the water, looking downstream, as if they feared assault from the +river itself. + +We came up to the Pool on a good flood-tide, and as we dropped +anchor there we saw all this, and, moreover, that the place was +held by the Danes in force. The red cloaks of Cnut's thingmen were +on bridge and walls and fort alike, and no few of them in either +stronghold. There was work before us if we would win the place for +our king. + +Before any word had come to Olaf of what should be done, Eadmund +had gone ashore with all his warriors, and had fallen on the +Southwark earthwork. It was Olaf's first thought to follow him, but +he held back. + +"Let him go," he said. "Maybe he will like best to win his own city +without my help at the first onset. Yet unless that fort is weaker +than it looks, his attack will be of no use. For, see--all the +Danes from the bridge are going to help." + +So it was, and from the deck of Olaf's ship I looked on at the +fight for half an hour. At one time I thought that we had won the +place, for our men charged valiantly through the moat and up the +steep sides of the earthworks. + +There waited for them the Danish axes, and an axeman behind a wall +is equal to two men below him. + +I longed to be beside Eadmund, whom I could see now and then, and +ever where the fighting was fiercest; but Olaf bade me be patient. +There would be fighting enough for me presently, he said. + +"You will see that we shall have to take the bridge, and so cut the +Danish force in two. Then from the bridge we have but to fight our +way either into the fort or into the town." + +Presently our men gave back. The earthworks were too strong for +them. Then I asked again that I might go. + +"If you must fall, it shall be at my side, cousin," said Olaf, +laying his hand on my arm. "Eadmund does not need you." + +For now he and his men were coming back to the ships, having won +nought but knowledge of the strength of the fort. The Danes would +not leave their walls to follow the retreating English, though +Eadmund halted just beyond bow shot, and waited as if to challenge +them to fight in the open. + +Now by this time the tide was almost full, and the stream of the +flood was slackening. And it seemed as if one might easily scale +the bulwarks of the great low-timbered bridge from the foredeck of +a ship. Ethelred saw that, and as soon as his men were on board +again the word was passed that attack on the bridge should be made +by every vessel that could reach it. + +As it fell out, we of Olaf's eight ships lay below the rest, and +must have passed them to reach the bridge. All we might do, +therefore, was to close up to the sterns of the vessels that were +leading, and wait to send our men across their decks when the time +came. That pleased not Olaf at first, for he thought that his turn +had come; but in the end it was well for us. + +Now the ships slipped their cables, and drifted up to the bridge +steadily, with a few oars going aft to guide them, and as they came +the Danes crowded above them, manning their towers and lining the +whole long length with savage faces and gleaming weapons. They +howled at us as we drew near, and as the bows of the leading ships +almost touched the piles, they hove grappling irons into them from +above, holding them fast. Whereat Eadmund thanked them for saving +trouble, while the arrows fell round him like hail. + +But in a moment that word of his was changed, for now fell from +towers and bulwarks a fearsome rain of heavy darts and javelins, +and the men fell back from the crowded fore decks to seek safety +aft until the store of weapons was spent. Truly, there must have +been sheaves of throwing weapons piled ready on the roadway of the +bridge. + +Then Eadmund's voice cried: + +"Steady, men--this cannot last!" + +And even as they heard him the warriors swarmed back across the +corpse-cumbered decks, and began to climb up the piles, for the +tide held the ships strongly against the bridge. Yet when the ships +were there the height of the bridge above them was far greater than +it had seemed from a distance. Now their fore decks were under the +towers, for the upper works of these overhung the water. + +Then the Danish war horns blew, and the men raised a great shout, +and down from those towers and from openings in the bridge rained +and thundered great ragged blocks of stone--masses rent from the +old Roman city walls--and into the ships they crashed, and there +rose a terrible cry from our men, for no ship that was ever built +could stand so fierce a storm as this. + +Two good ships swayed and sank, and their men climbed on bridge and +piling, or leapt into the stream to reach the ships that yet were +afloat. Then the storm stayed for lack of rocks within reach, as it +would seem, for I saw men hoisting more into the towers as fast as +crane and windlass would serve them. + +Now fell the javelins again, and still the grappling irons held the +ships, though the oars were manned. Then dared a man in each ship +to do the bravest deed of that day. Through rain of falling +javelins each ran forward, axe in hand, and cut the grappling lines +as our Norsemen cheered them in wild praise. Yet I know that not +one of those men lived to see that his deed had saved the ships, +for our oars were out and swiftly we towed them away to safety. + +Aye, but I saw one tall Dane on the bridge strive to hold the hands +of his fellows that he might save at least the brave man in the +ship below him. And that should be told of him, for such a deed is +that of a true warrior. + +All this I watched in dismay, for it seemed to me that we could in +no way take the town. As for Olaf, he said nought; and when we had +come to anchor again he sat on the steersman's bench, looking at +the bridge and saying no word to any of us. The Danes were crowding +the bridge and jeering at us, as one might well see. + +Then Rani came aft and sat on the rail by me. + +"Well," he said, "how like you this business?" + +"Ill enough," I answered. "What can be done?" + +He nodded towards Olaf, smiling grimly. + +"I know of nothing; but if your king lets him go his own way he +will find out some plan. Know you what he did when the Swedes +blocked us into a lake some years ago?" + +"I have not heard," I said. + +"Why, seeing that we might not go out by the way in which we came, +Olaf made us dig a new channel, and we went out by that, laughing. +We all had to dig for our lives, grumbling, but we got away." + +Now Olaf looked up and saw us, and his face was bright again. + +"I am going to see Ethelred," he said, "for I think that I can take +the bridge." + +A boat shot alongside even as he spoke, and a thane came to bid +Olaf to a council of the leaders on Ethelred's ship. So Olaf went +with him, and was long away. The tide was almost low, and darkness +had fallen before he came back in high spirits. + +"Ethelred was sorely downcast, even to weeping," he told us, "and +so had almost given up hope of taking London. He thought of sailing +away and landing elsewhere. Then I said that I would take the +bridge tomorrow if I had help in what I needed tonight." + +Then he looked round on us, and what he saw in our faces made him +laugh a little. + +"It seems to me that you are over fearful of stone throwing after +the Danish sort," he said. "Had I not a plan that will save our +heads and the ship's timbers alike, I would not go. I am not the +man to risk both for nought. We will build roofs over the fore +decks and try again." + +Then Rani growled: + +"How are we to climb out from under your roofs so as to get upon +the bridge? We have already seen that ladders are needed for that +also." + +"Nay," said Olaf, "we will bring the bridge down to us," and so he +went forward laughing to find his shipwrights. + +So all that night long we wrought as he bade us, and Ethelred's men +came with spars and timber from houses they pulled down ashore, and +when morning broke we had on each ship the framework of a strong, +high-pitched roof that covered the vessels from stem to midships or +more, and stretched out beyond the gunwales on either board. + +Then the men who wrought ashore brought us boatloads of strong +hurdles and the sides and roofs of the wattled huts of the +Southwark thralls, and with them all our wooden shelters were +covered so strongly that, if they might not altogether stand the +weight of the greatest stones, these roofs would break their fall +and save the ships. + +When all this was finished, King Olaf told us what his plan was. We +were not to try to storm the bridge, but were to break it. + +"See," he said, "all night long the wagons that brought more stones +have been rumbling and rattling into the middle of the bridge, and +every Dane thereon will crowd into the centre to see the breaking +of King Olaf's ships, and their weight will help us. We will go so +far under the bridge that we may make fast our cables to the piles, +and then will row hard down the falling tide at its swiftest. +Whereupon the laugh will be on our side instead of with the Danes, +as yesterday." + +After that he bade us all sleep, for we had some long hours to wait +for the falling tide when all was done. And we did so, after a good +meal, as well as we could, while the wains yet brought stones, and +arrows and darts in sheaves to the bridge. But forward in our ships +the men were coiling the great cables that should, we hoped, bring +the bridge and stones alike down harmlessly to us. + +It was plain that the Danes knew what the roofs over the ships were +for, since all the while that we wrought we could see them pointing +and laughing one to another in scorn, from where we lay, not much +beyond arrow shot below them. But not one of all the men on the +bridge could have guessed what our real plan might be. Only we who +looked at the ancient bridge from the water, and marked how frail +and decaying some of the piles that upheld its narrow spans were, +knew how likely it was that Olaf's plan would succeed. The wide +roadway seemed to them to be strong enough for the wooden towers +and the many tons of stones they had burdened it with; but now that +Olaf had showed us, we saw that it was none so safe, so we waited +in good spirits. + +The tide reached its height and as the ships swung idly to their +cables on the slack, the Danes thronged the bridge, thinking, +doubtless, that we should attack when they were within reach, as +yesterday. + +The hum of their voices came down to us, and as the time went by, +and the ebb tide set in, the hum strengthened into a long roar of +voices, that broke out into a yelling laugh now and then, as some +word of scorn went round. For they thought our Norsemen were +afraid. + +But they could not see beneath the penthouse roofs, where the men, +three at each oar, were armed and ready. Nor could they see the +gangs of twelve men told off to the cables on each foredeck. Six of +these were to pass the cables round the piles and make fast while +the other six were to stand by with shields ready, in case the +roofs were broken. But even then it should not take long to do all +we needed, and some of the roof would be left surely at the worst. + +Four only of the ships were to touch the bridge, one at each of the +four midmost pilings. The other four were made fast, stern to stern +of the leading ships, so that their weight of oar play might be +used to the full in the long pull to come, and two ships would haul +at each set of piles where the weight was heaviest upon the bridge. + +So we waited until the tide was at its fiercest ebb. The water +rushed through the narrow waterways of the bridge in a broken +torrent streaked with foam that swirled far down the stream towards +us; so the time having come, Olaf gave the word. His own ship was +one of the two in the middle, and Rani was in command of the other. + +Then in a moment the oars flashed out, and the moorings were +slipped; a shout went up from the bridge, and then the Danes were +silent, wondering. The foam flew from our bows, and as we dashed up +the stream the Danish war cry broke out again, while from end to +end of the bridge the weapons flashed and sparkled. + +Now the arrows rattled on the penthouse roofs, and one or two +glanced from Olaf's armour and mine, and from the shields which +Ottar and I held before him. For we were alone with him at the +helm. He was steering his ship himself, as was Rani, and hardly +would he suffer us to be beside him to shield him. But we would +have it thus in the end. + +At last we were almost on the bridge, and Olaf smiled and watched +the ships to right and left of us--the oar blades were bending as +the men struggled with clenched teeth against the fierce current +that flew past us foaming. + +Then the Danish grapnels were cast, as yesterday. The shadow of the +bridge fell black upon us--the line of Danish faces were above our +bows--and then down crashed the great stones from above, and I saw +Olaf's lips tighten and set as he saw their work. Yet though the +good ship quivered and reeled under the shock, the penthouse roofs +were strong and steep, and but one great stone tore a hole for +itself, crushing two men beneath it; but the rest bounded into the +water, splintering an oar blade or two as they went. And all the +while the arrows rained round us, and the javelins strove to pierce +the roofs. + +Then was a shout from forward of the ship, and Olaf's eyes +brightened as he raised his hand. Instantly the rowers stayed, and +the ships drifted away from the bridge more swiftly than they had +come, while the Danish grappling irons ripped and tore along the +roofs uselessly. There was no firm hold for them. + +That made the Danes think that we were driven off, and their yells +began afresh. + +Then came a quick word from Olaf, and the oars took the water to +ease the sharp check as the length of the cables was reached, while +the ship astern of us swung to her tow line. The king glanced to +right and left of him, and saw that the other three ships had fared +as well as we, and that they too were dropping down from the +bridge. + +How the Danes roared and howled with joy, thinking that we were all +in full retreat! Yet, as the last ship tightened her cable, I saw +the jerk shake one of them from his perch on the bridge bulwarks +and send him headlong into the water. + +Olaf saw it, and raised his hand and shouted. And with one accord +the oars of the eight great ships smote the water, and bent, and +tore the waves into foam--and London Bridge was broken! + +The memory of that sight will never pass from my mind or from the +mind of any man of us who saw all that the lifted hand and shout of +Olaf the king brought about. + +There was a slow groaning of timbers and a cracking, and then a +dead silence. Then the silence was broken by a wild yell of terror +from the swarming Danes, and ere they could fly from the crowded +towers and roadway where the bridge was steepest, the whole length +of three spans bent and swayed towards us, and a wide gap sprang +open across the roadway. Into that gap crumbled a great stone-laden +tower, and men like bees from a shaken swarm. And then those three +spans seemed to melt away with a great rush and roar, and howl of +men in mortal terror--and down the freed tide swept our ships, +dragging after them the timbers that the cables yet held. + +Then into the Southwark fortress went Eadmund and his men like +fire, while from the London side of the river came the roar of a +fight, as the citizens fell on the Danes who were fleeing terror +smitten from the weakened spans that were left of London Bridge. + +Then Olaf swung our ships to either bank, and past us went in +confusion, on the rush of pent-up water, the great timbers and +piles of the bridge, as it broke up piece by piece in the current. +The men on Ethelred's ships had all they could do to save their +vessels from being stove in by the heavier woodwork when it was +swept down among them. + +That danger passed; and now was our turn come to join in the +fighting, for there were none to prevent us from getting the ships +up to the bridge. And so we scaled from our decks the bulwarks that +had been so terrible, and fell on the Danes in the rear as Eadmund +in Southwark and the citizens in London took them in the front. It +must have been that few Danes were left on either bank, for the +fighting lasted no long time, and when we had done with these men +from off the bridge there was no other attack. + +So, before the evening came we knew that London was once more in +the hands of Ethelred, and the bells were ringing to welcome back +an English king to English land. For Olaf had brought him home. + +There was high feasting in London town that night, and Ethelred +deemed that England was already won. Nor was there any honour too +great for him to show to the man who had wrought this for him. + +But what Olaf said was this: + +"To win London is much--though, indeed, it should never have been +thus lost--but London is not England. There will be more fighting +yet, if Cnut is a worthy son of Swein Forkbeard." + +Now, in after years men made light of this breaking of London +Bridge, and the reason is not far to seek. For, first of all, +Cnut's folk, when they had the upper hand, liked not to hear +thereof. And then the citizens would speak little among themselves +of their thraldom to the Danes, and much of their welcome to +Ethelred and their own share in the business when the bridge had +been broken. And lastly, it was wrought by an outlander. Truly no +Englishman, whether of Saxon or Danish kin, grudges praise to a +stranger when he has won it well, but Olaf had few to speak for him +after he had gone hence. But I have told what I saw, and think that +it should not be forgotten, for it was a great deed. Men sing the +song that Ottar the scald wrote thereon in Olaf's Norway, and I +think that they will sing it for many an age to come. + +We have forgotten that song; but the first time he sang it was at +the great feast in the wide hall of the London merchants' guild +that night, and sorely did the few Danish lords, who sat as +captives among us unwillingly enough, scowl as they listened. But +our folk held their breath lest they should lose aught of either +voice or words of the singer, for they had never heard his like +before, and this is part of what he sang {5}: + +"Bold in the battle +Bravest in sword play! +Thou wert the breaker +Of London's broad bridge. +Wild waxed the warfare +When thou gold wonnest +Where the shields splintered +'Neath the stones' crashing-- +When the war byrnies broke +Beaten beneath them. + +"Thine was the strong arm +That Ethelred sought for; +Back to his lost land +Thou the king leddest. +Then was the war storm +Waged when thou earnest +Safe to his high seat +Leading that king's son, +Throned by thy help +On the throne of his fathers." + +He ended, and our warriors rose and cheered both hero and singer, +and when the noise ceased Ethelred gave Ottar his own bracelet; but +to Olaf he gave his hand, and there in the presence of all the +company thanked him for what he had wrought, giving more praise to +him than Ottar had sung. + +Then sang the English gleemen of the deeds of Eadmund the Atheling, +and all were well pleased. Now those songs have bided in our minds +while Ottar's song is forgotten, and maybe that is but natural. But +Olaf was my kinsman and very dear to me, and I am jealous for his +fame. + + + +Chapter 4: Earl Wulfnoth Of Sussex. + + +Cnut the new Danish king was at Gainsborough with all the force +that had followed Swein his father, and he had made a pact with the +Lindsey folk, who were Danes of the old settlement, and of landings +long before the time of Ingvar, that they should fight for him and +find provision and horses for his host. + +So it seemed most likely that the next thing would be that he would +march on us, and Ethelred gathered all the forces to him here in +London that he could, against his coming. At once the English +thanes came in, and even Sigeferth and Morcar, the powerful lords +of the old Danish seven boroughs in Mercia, brought their men to +his help, and that was almost more than could have been hoped. Then +too came Edric Streone, the great Earl of Mercia, Eadmund's uncle +by marriage and his foster father, praying for and gaining full +forgiveness for having seemed to side with Swein, as he said. With +these was Ulfkytel, our East Anglian earl, and many more, while +word came from Utred of Northumbria that he would not hold back. + +So it was not long before Ethelred and Eadmund rode away north +towards Gainsborough at the head of as good a force as they had +ever led, in order to be beforehand with the Danes, who as yet had +made no move. It seemed as though they feared this new rising of +all England against them, although all Swein's men who had been +victors before were there with their new king. + +But Olaf, who knew more of Denmark and what might happen there than +we, said that Cnut waited for news from thence. It might be that +some trouble would arise at home, for seldom did a king come to his +throne there without fighting against upstarts who would take it. + +"So he holds his force in readiness in the Humber to fall on either +Denmark or England. If things go ill at home, he will go over sea +first, and return here. But if all is well, we shall have fighting +enough presently." + +Now when the court of Ethelred had gathered again, it was not long +before he grew more cold in his way with Olaf, and one might easily +see that this grew more so with the coming of Edric Streone. So +that when the march to Lindsey was spoken of, Olaf thought well to +stay in the Thames with the ships, and when Eadmund asked him to +come north with the levies he said: + +"It seems to me that there are jealousies already among your thanes +concerning me, and I will not be the cause of any divisions among +your folk. Yet I would help you, and here is what I can do. I will +see that no landing is made on these southern shores while you are +northward, for if you beat Cnut he will take ship and come to Essex +or Kent; or maybe even into the Thames again. Give me authority to +command here until you return, and I think I can be of more use +than if I went with you." + +So that was what was done in the end, and Olaf was named as captain +of the ships and of any southern host that he might be able to +raise, and Olaf asked that I might stay with him. + +That our atheling granted gladly, telling me that it was for no +lack of wish on his part to have me at his side, as ever of late, +but that I should take a better place with the king my kinsman than +among the crowd of thanes who were round Ethelred. Then he took his +own sword from his side and gave it me. + +"Farewell therefore for a while, Redwald, my comrade," he said when +he went away. "You have helped me to tide over many heavy hours +that would have pressed sorely on me but for your cheerfulness. +When peace comes you shall have your Anglian home again, with more +added to its manors for the sake of past days and good service." + +That was much for the atheling to say, and heartily did I thank +him. Yet I had grown to love Olaf my kinsman better than any other +man, and I was glad to be with him, away from the court jealousies +and strivings for place. There was little of that in Olaf's fleet, +where all were old comrades, and had each long ago found the place +that he could best fill. + +So the levies marched on Gainsborough, and Olaf bided in the Thames +and gathered ships and men till we had a fair fleet and a good +force. Then came the news that Cnut and all his host had taken ship +and fled from England without waiting to strike a blow at Ethelred, +and our folk thought that this was victory for us. But Olaf rode +down to the ships in haste, and took them down to Erith, while his +land levies followed on the Kentish shore. For he thought it likely +that Cnut did but leave Ethelred and his armies in Lindsey while he +would land here unopposed. + +Then came a fisher's boat with word that Cnut's great fleet was +putting into Sandwich, but before we had planned to throw our force +between him and London came the strange news that again he had left +Kent and had sailed northwards. + +We sailed then to Sandwich to learn what we might, sending two +swift ships to watch if Cnut put into the Essex creeks. But at +Sandwich we found the thanes whom Swein had held as hostages left, +cruelly maimed in hand and face, with the message from Cnut that he +would return. + +"He may return," said Olaf, "but if all goes well he will find +England ready for him. There is some trouble in Denmark or he would +not leave us thus." + +So now all that seemed to be on hand was to bring back the towns +that were yet held by the Danish garrisons, the thingmen, to their +rightful king, and to gather a fleet that would watch the coast +against the return of Cnut. These things seemed not so hard, and +our land would surely soon be secure. + +Then began to creep into my mind a longing to be back in my own +place again at Bures, to see the river and woods that I loved, and +to take up the old quiet life that was half forgotten, but none the +less sweet to remember after all this war and wearing trouble. But +of all England, after Lindsey, East Anglia was the greatest Danish +stronghold for those old reasons that I have spoken of, and it was +likely that there would be more fighting there before Ethelred was +owned than anywhere else. So I could not go back yet, but must wait +for Earl Ulfkytel and his levies, who would surely make short work +of the Danes there when their turn came. After that my lands would +be my own again, and then--What wonder, after three years and more +of warfare and the hard life of a warrior who had no home but in a +court which was a camp--after exile in a strange land--with my +new-found kinship with Olaf the viking--that what should be then +had gone from my mind? Will any blame the warrior who did but +remember his playfellow as part of a long-ago dream of lost peace, +if he had forgotten what tie bound him to her? When I and little +Hertha were betrothed it had been nought to us but a pleasant show +wherein we had taken foremost parts--and across the gap of years of +trouble so it seemed to me still whenever I recalled it. I +remembered my confirmation at the good bishop's hands more plainly +than that, for well I knew what I took on me at that time. + +But the knowledge of what our betrothal meant would have grown up +in our hearts had peace lasted. There had been none to mind me of +it, or of her, and warfare fills up the whole mind of a man. I was +brought up amid the scenes of camp and march and battle just at +that time when a boy's mind is ready to be filled with aught, and, +as he learns, the past slips away, for his real life has begun. + +And these were strange days through which I had been. We grew old +quickly amid all the cruel trouble of the hopeless fighting. As +David, the holy king, grew from boy to man suddenly in his days, +which seem so like ours when one hears them read of in Holy Writ, +so it had been with Olaf--with Eadmund and Eadward his brother--so +it would be with Cnut, and so it was with myself. I have often +spoken with men who were rightly held as veteran warriors, and who +yet had seen less warfare in ten years than we saw in those three. +It was endless--unceasing--I would have none go through the like. I +know not now how we bore it. + +So I had forgotten Hertha, whether there is blame to me or not. But +now, as I say, with the sudden slackening of warfare came to me the +longing for rest. I would fain find my home again and my playmate, +and all else that belonged to the past. But before I could do so +there was work to be done, and I was content to look forward and +wait. + +Now I might make a long story of the doings of Olaf the king during +this summer. Ottar the scald has much to sing of what we wrought. +For we went through the fair land of Kent with our Norsemen and the +new levies, and brought back all the folk to Ethelred. It was no +hard task, for the poor people thought that Cnut had deceived them +by his flight; and they were ground down by the heavy payments the +Danes had levied on them. Only at Canterbury, inside whose walls +the Danish thingmen gathered in desperation, had we any trouble, +and we must needs lay siege to the place. But in the end Olaf and I +knelt in the ancient church of St. Martin and gave thanks for +victory. We had avenged the death of the martyred archbishop, +Elfheah. + +Ethelred ravaged all Lindsey after Cnut was gone. It was a foolish +and cruel deed, and he left men there who hated his name more than +even the name of Swein, to whom they had bowed since they must. +Then he sat down at Oxford as if all were done, while to have +marched peacefully, but with a high hand, through the old Danelagh +would have made the land sure to him. Olaf did so in Kent, and when +we left it, we left a loyal people who would rise against Cnut for +Ethelred if the Danes should indeed return. And Lindsey would as +surely rise for Cnut against us. + +But Olaf, though he blamed our king for this, in all singleness of +purpose went on with the task that he had undertaken. And now the +next thing was to gather a fleet. + +"If we could win Wulfnoth of Sussex to help his king, we have a +fleet ready made," he said. "Let us sail to his place and speak +with him." + +That was true, and the ships that Wulfnoth had were the king's by +right. They were the last of the fleet that England had had but +five years ago--and her mightiest. + +Now it happened that I was to see much of this Earl Wulfnoth before +we had done with him, so I will say at once how he came to have the +king's ships, and how it was that we must ask his help for +Ethelred--or rather why he had not given it freely. + +It was the fault of Brihtric, Edric Streone's brother, who had some +private grudge against him, and would ruin him if possible. So he +accused Wulfnoth of treachery to Ethelred, and that being the thing +that the king always dreaded from day to day--seeing maybe that he +was not free from blame in that matter himself--so prevailed that +the earl was outlawed. Whereon he fled to the fleet, and sailed +away with all the ships that would follow him. + +Then Brihtric chased him with the rest, and met with storm and +shipwreck on the rugged southern coasts. And through the storm fell +on him Wulfnoth, and beat him and scattered or took the ships the +storm had spared. Brihtric left the rest to their own devices, and +the shipmen brought them back into the Thames. There the Danes took +them presently, and that was the end of England's fleet. + +But Wulfnoth turned viking; and would have nought to do with +Ethelred after that. His Sussex earldom was beyond reach of attack +through the great Andred's-weald forests that keep its northern +borders, and he could keep the sea line. So Ethelred left him +alone, and Swein would not disturb him. But his help was worth +winning, and Olaf thought that he might do it. + +So we sailed to Lymne, and then to Winchelsea, and there we heard +that the earl and some of his ships were at his great stronghold of +Pevensea, which lay not far westward along the coast. And we came +there in the second week of September, when the time was near that +the ships should be laid up in their winter quarters. + +As we came off the mouth of the shallow tidal haven that runs +behind the great castle, whose old Roman walls seem strong as ever, +a boat from the shore came off very boldly to speak with us. But we +could see the sparkle of arms as some ships were manned in all +haste lest we were no friendly comers. + +The leader of the boat's crew was a handsome boy of about fifteen, +well armed and fearless, and he stepped on board Olaf's ship +without mistrust when the king hailed him. + +"Who are you, and what would you on these shores?" he asked before +we had spoken. + +Olaf laughed pleasantly in his quiet way, and answered: + +"I must know who asks me before I say aught." + +"Maybe that is fair," said the boy. "I am Godwine, son of Wulfnoth +the earl." + +"Then you have right to ask," answered our king. "I am Olaf +Haraldsson. I am a viking, and come in peace to see and speak with +your father." + +The boy stared at the king in wonder for a moment. + +"Are you truly Olaf the Thick, who broke London Bridge?" he asked. + +"Well, I had some hand in it," answered Olaf laughing, "for I told +the men when to pull, and when they pulled, the bridge came down. +They did it and I looked on." + +Then young Godwine laughed also, and bade the king welcome most +heartily, adding: + +"You must tell me all about the bridge breaking presently." + +"Nay; but Redwald my cousin, or Ottar my scald here will tell you +more than I may." + +"Redwald is an Anglian name," said Godwine, taking my hand. "Are +you English therefore?" + +"Aye, young sir, from East Anglian Bures, in Suffolk," I answered. + +"Are you Edric Streone's man then?" he said, dropping my hand +suddenly and half stepping back. + +"I am not," I said pretty stoutly, for I was angry with Streone's +way with Olaf--and with other ways of his. "Ulfkytel is our earl." + +"Aye, I have heard of him as an honest man," Godwine said. + +"Come ashore, King Olaf, and you other thanes, and there will be +good cheer for you." + +"Can you steer us into the haven, young sir?" asked Rani, who stood +by smiling to himself. "We must have the ships inside the island +while the tide serves." + +"Aye, that I can," said the boy eagerly; "I take my own ship in and +out without troubling any other to help." + +And with that he took hold of Rani's arm and showed him mark after +mark, giving him depth of water and the like, while we listened and +watched his face. + +Presently Olaf said: + +"Take command of my ship, Godwine, and lead the rest." + +"You will take the risk, lord king," he answered laughing. + +"Aye, and will hold you blameless if she takes the ground before +she is beached." + +Now there was no doubt that Godwine was used to command, and was +confident in himself, for he made no more ado, but took charge, and +bade Rani signal the rest to follow, while he went to the helm +himself. + +Then said Olaf to me while the boy was intent on his work: "Here is +one who will be a great man in England some day, and I think before +long." + +And I had thought the same; for Earl Wulfnoth's son would rank high +for the sake of his birth, and it seemed that he was fitted to take +the great place that might be his. + +So Godwine beached the ships well, in the lee of the island on +which the great castle stands when the tide is high, and we went +ashore. The castle gates were well guarded in our honour, for +Godwine had sent the boat back with word who we were. + +There greeted us Earl Wulfnoth himself in the courtyard of his +great house. One went inside the castle walls to find almost a +village of buildings, all of timber, that had grown up round the +hall that stood in the midst, and that had its courtyard and +stockading, as had our own house on the open hill at Bures. I think +there was no stronger place than this castle of Pevensea in all +Sussex, if anywhere on the southern coasts. + +Now it were long to say how Wulfnoth the earl welcomed King Olaf, +but it was after a kingly sort, for he was king in all but name in +his earldom, shut off as it is from the rest of England by the deep +forests. But he feasted us for two days before he would speak a +word with Olaf as to what he had come to ask him, saying that it +was enough for him to see the bridge breaker and the taker of +Canterbury town, and to do him honour. For Olaf's fame had gone +widely through all England. + +Now Godwine would ever talk with me, for I could tell him of Olaf, +and also of the long war, and of the Norman court, so that we +became great friends. But he had no liking for Ethelred, which was +not wonderful, seeing that Wulfnoth his father had not a good word +to say for him. + +At last, when Olaf told him plainly of the needs of England and of +her king, and of what he feared of the return of Cnut, Earl +Wulfnoth answered: + +"Had you come to ask me to go a-viking with yourself, gladly would +I have joined with or followed you. Godwine my son has yet some +things to learn which a Norseman could teach him, and it would have +been well. But Ethelred holds me as a traitor; and while Edric +Streone is at his side I will not have aught to do with him. I will +drive any Dane out of my land, and that is all. Neither Ethelred +nor Cnut is aught to me. I and my son are earls of Sussex." + +Then he rose up from his high seat and strode out of the hall, +bidding us follow him. He led us to the eastern gate, and climbed +to the broad top of the ramparts. + +"See yonder," he said, and pointed eastward across the river and +marsh. "There is the hill where our standard has been raised time +after time since OElla and Cissa drove in flight the Welsh who had +raised theirs in the same place before us. There will I raise it +again against Cnut or Streone or any other of his men." + +"Edric Streone is with King Ethelred," said Olaf; "he is not Cnut's +man." + +"He has been Swein's man; and if it suits him will be Cnut's. I +will not alter my saying of him." + +"Ethelred believes in him," answered Olaf, "and Eadmund the +Atheling believes in him as in himself." + +"So much the worse for them," said the earl; "you will see if I am +not right. I know Edric Streone over well, and he knows it, and +hates me." + +"Come, therefore, and take Ethelred out of his hands," Olaf said. + +"Not I. Let him inlaw me again first. I will not go and ask pardon +for what I have not done." + +And after that the earl would say no more on the matter, waxing +wroth if Olaf would try to persuade him. So it seemed that our +journey was lost; and Olaf began to be anxious to return to the +Thames, where our ships should go into winter quarters. But the +wind held in the east, and kept us for a while. + +Wulfnoth was not sorry for this, for it was full harvest time, and +he sent his housecarles out to his other manors to gather it, so +that he had few folk about him. Godwine went with them to a place +on the downs called Chancton, where was a great house of the earl. +We parted unwillingly; but we might sail at any time if the wind +shifted, and the earl would have him go. + +"When you have done with fighting for Ethelred the Unredy," said +the boy to me, "bring Olaf back here, and you and I, friend +Redwald, will go a-viking with him. He says he wants to go to +Jerusalem Land some day--and that would be a good cruise." + +Now the day after the housecarles left Pevensea, there befell a +matter which would have brought them back hastily had we not been +in the haven. There was always a beacon fire ready to recall them, +and they watched for it even as they wrought in the upland fields, +or if they were among the woods. Turn by turn one would climb to a +place whence it could be seen, for one may never know what need +shall be on our English shores, and I was to learn that need for +arms might be in a forest-girt land also, from foes at home. + +Olaf and I were in the ships. The wind was unsteady, and it seemed +that a shift was coming with that night's new moon, and we were +preparing for sailing. And from our decks we saw a little train of +people crossing the difficult path from the mainland to the island +that folk can only use when the tide is low, and then only if they +know it well or have a guide to lead them. They say that once the +path was always under water, but that the land grows slowly, and +that at some time the island will be joined to the low hills that +are nearest to it on the northwest. + +We went back almost as these folk came into the castle garth by the +western gate, and met them in the courtyard. Then it was plain that +there was trouble on hand, for the leader of the party was a thane +whom I knew by sight, as he had been called to our feasting when +first we came, and he had brought with him two ladies, who came in +no sort of state; and, moreover, there were one or two wounded men +among the twenty rough housecarles who followed them, and bore such +burdens of household stuff as had been taken by us when we fled +from Bures. + +I had seen the like too often to mistake these signs, and I said to +Olaf: + +"Here is fighting on hand, my king." + +And then before he answered, came Wulfnoth out of the great door +and hurried up to the party, doffing his velvet cap as he saw the +ladies. + +"Ho, friend Relf," he said, "what is amiss?" + +"Outlaws, earl," said the thane, "and in strong force." + +"This is the pest of my life," answered the earl angrily, "for no +sooner are our men gone harvesting than these forest knaves begin +to give trouble. + +"When were you last burnt out, Relf of Penhurst?" and he laughed in +an angry way that had no mirth in it. + +"Four years agone--after our trouble with Brihtric," answered the +thane. "They have not been so bold since then; and the small fights +I have had with them have not been so fierce that I must fetch you +from Bosham to my help." + +"Evil times make them bold," said the earl. "How many are there in +this band?" + +"Enough to sack the Penhurst miners' village," the thane said. "Men +say that there are Danes among them; and I know that there are men +who are well armed beyond the wont of outlaws and forest dwellers." + +Then Wulfnoth called to us: + +"See here, King Olaf, this is your fault; you have driven the Danes +out of Kent into our forests, and now we have trouble enough on our +hands." + +"Then, Earl Wulfnoth," answered Olaf, "my men and I will fight them +here again." + +But when we drew near I was fain to look on one of the two ladies +who still sat on their horses waiting for the earl's pleasure. One +was Relf the thane's wife, and the other his daughter; and it was +in my mind that I had never seen so beautiful a maiden as this was. +It seemed to me that I could willingly give my life in battle +against those who had harmed her home, if she might know that I did +so. + +But the thane was telling Olaf that there must be some three +hundred of the outlaws and others. + +"I had forty-two men yesterday, and I have but twenty with me now," +said he. + +"Then you fought?" asked Wulfnoth. + +"Aye," answered the thane shortly, for it was plain enough that he +had done so. + +"Have they burnt your house?" + +"Not when I left. They are mostly strangers to the land, and they +bide where there is ale and plunder, in the old Penhurst village at +the valley's head." + +"Then," said Olaf, "let us march at once and save the thane's +hall." + +"That is well said," answered the earl, rubbing his hands with +glee. "We will make a full end; there will be no more trouble for +many a year to come." + +Then he bethought him of the two ladies, and he called his steward +and bade him take them in. At which, when they would dismount, I +went to help the maiden, and was pleased that she thanked me for +the little trouble, looking at me shyly. I think that I had not +heard a more pleasant voice than hers, or so it seemed to me at the +time. She went into the house with her mother, and I was left with +a remembrance of her words that bided with me; and I called myself +foolish for thinking twice of the meeting. + +Then the earl and Olaf and Relf began to speak of the best way in +which to deal with these plunderers; and as I looked at the stout +fair-haired thane it seemed to me that things must have been bad if +he had had to fly. + +It would seem that his place was some ten miles from Pevensea, +lying at the head of a forest valley, down which was a string of +the old hammer ponds that the Romans made when they worked the +iron. And the village, or town as he called it, was in the next +valley, at the head of the little river Ashbourne, whose waters +joined the river which makes the haven of Pevensea. The town was +very old, and had a few earthworks round it, though the place +whereon it stood was strong by nature. The iron workers in the old +Roman days had first built there, and they knew how to choose their +ground. Thence, too, the Romans would float their boatloads of iron +down to the port of Anderida, as they called Pevensea; and there +were yet old stone buildings that had been raised by them. + +So if these outlaws chose to hold the place, it was likely that we +should have some fighting, though this would not be quite after the +manner of forest dwellers, unless it were true that Danes were +among them. + +"Whether there is any fight in them or not," said Wulfnoth, "I will +have the place surrounded, and let not one get away." + +"That is early morning work," Olaf answered. "How many of my men +will you have?" + +"It depends on what manner of men they are," said the earl. "All I +know of them yet is that they are good trenchermen." + +That pleased not Olaf altogether, for there seemed to be a little +slight in the words--as though he had come to the earl to be fed +only. And he made a sign to me that I knew well; and I thought to +myself that Wulfnoth of Sussex was likely to wish that he had seen +our warriors in their war gear before. + +Olaf paid no heed to me as I went quickly down to the ships. The +men were lying about and watching the sky, for it was changing. But +at one word from me there was no more listlessness; and Rani called +them to quarters. I would that in the English levies there was the +order and quickness that was in Olaf's ships. Yet these men had +been with him for years, and were not like our hastily-gathered +villagers. + +So in ten minutes or less they were armed and ready for aught; and +Rani and I led them up to the castle, leaving the ship guard set, +as if we were making a landing in earnest on an enemy's shore. +Eight hundred strong we were, and foremost marched the men of +Olaf's ship, each one of whom wore ring mail of the best and a good +helm, and carried both sword and axe and round shield. + +Wulfnoth stood with his back to the gate as we entered with the +leading files. But when he heard the tramp and ring of warriors in +their mail, he started and turned round sharply. I saw his face +flush red, and I saw Olaf's smile, and Relf's face of wonder. And +then the earl broke out--angrily enough--for his castle was, as it +were, taken by Olaf. + +"What is the meaning of this?" + +"You wished to see my men, lord earl," said Olaf. "I sent for them +therefore. King Ethelred, for whom they fight just now, was pleased +with them." + +Then the earl saw that Olaf tried one last plan by which to make +him side with the king. Maybe he thought that this chance had been +waited for, but it was not so. Therefore he choked down his anger +that we should come unbidden into his fortress, and laughed +harshly. + +"Well for me, King Olaf, that you come in peace, as it seems. One +may see that these men are no untried war smiths." + +"There is no man in my own crew who has not seen four battles with +me," answered Olaf. "Some have seen more. The rest of the men have +each seen two fights of mine." + +"I would that I had somewhat on hand that was worthy to be counted +as another battle of yours, instead of a hunting of these forest +wolves," answered Wulfnoth, seeming to grow less angry. "Supposing +that you and I were to fight for the crown of England for +ourselves--either of us has as much right thereto as Cnut." + +"The Danes hold that England has paid scatt {6} to their king +as overlord, and that is proof of right for Cnut, as they say," +answered Olaf. + +"They say!" growled Wulfnoth fiercely. "King and witan and people +have been fools enough to buy peace with gold and not with edged +steel. But that has been ransom, not tribute. When a warrior is +made prisoner and held to ransom, is the man who takes the gold to +set him free his master, therefore, ever after? Scatt, forsooth! I +have a mind to go and teach the pack of fools whom Streone leads by +the nose and calls a witan, that there is one man left in England +who is strong enough to make them pay scatt to himself!" + +Then Olaf said, very quietly: + +"Why not put an end to Danegeld once for all by helping me drive +out the last Dane from England? We should be strong enough as +things are now. + +"For Streone and his tools to reap the benefit? Not I," said the +earl. "Come, we have forgotten our own business." + +Now it seemed to me that Wulfnoth was eager to get our men back to +the ships outside of the walls again, for there is no doubt that +had Olaf chosen to take the place for Ethelred it was already done. +But such thought of treachery to his host could never be in Olaf's +mind, and it was the last time that he tried to win the earl over. + +So Wulfnoth went quickly down the ranks and noted all things as a +chief such as he will. But now and then he waxed moody, and growled +in his thick beard, "Scatt, forsooth!" + +So presently he asked Olaf to bring two ship's crews--about +eight-score men in all--against the outlaws. Fifty of his own +housecarles would go, and Relf's twenty. And they were to be ready +two hours before dawn, as he meant to surprise the outlaws in the +village at the first light. + +Then he praised the men, and had ale brought out for them, and so +recovered his good temper, and at last he said to Olaf with a great +laugh: + +"Verily you may go away and boast that you are the first man who +has brought his armed followers inside Pevensea walls without +leave, since the days when OElla and Cissa forced the Welsh to let +them in. Now I wot that Ethelred has a friend who must be reckoned +with." + +"Nay, but you would see the men," said Olaf. + +"Aye, and I have seen them," answered the earl grimly. + +When we sat down in the hall that night I was next to the maiden +Sexberga, Relf's daughter, at the high table. She was very +different from the great ladies of the court, who were all that I +knew. I tried to assure her that her home would be safe, and I +promised her many things in order to see her smile, and to please +her. + +Yet when I went down to the ships presently, for none of us slept +within Wulfnoth's walls, I was glad that there was no light of +burning houses over Penhurst woods, as yet. + + + +Chapter 5: How Redwald Fared At Penhurst. + + +It was very dark when we marched from Pevensea. We followed the +earl's men, and save for remembering the muddy torchlit causeway to +firm ground from the castle, and after that dim hill and dale +passed in turn, and a long causeway and bridge that spanned the +mouth of a narrow valley that opened into the great Pevensea level, +I knew not much of what country we went through. After passing that +causeway we came into forest land, going along a track for awhile, +and then turning inland across rolling hills till we began to go +down again. And as the first streaks of dawn began to show above +the woods, the word was passed for silence, and then that we should +lie down and rest in the fern on the edge of a steep slope below +which shone the faint gleam of water. + +Then came Wulfnoth and spoke to Olaf, and said that he and his men +would go beyond the village so as to take the outlaws from the +rear. He would send a man to us who would show us all that was +needed. + +After that we lay and waited, and as the sun rose and the light +grew stronger, I thought that I had never seen a more beautiful +place. + +We were above a little cliff of red rock that went down to the +valley of the Ashbourne brook. And all the valley from side to side +was full of the morning mists so that it seemed one lake, while the +woods were bright with the change of the leaf, from green to red +and gold--oak and beech and chestnut and hazel each with its own +colour, and all beautiful. The blue downs rose far away to our left +across the ridges of the forest land, and inland the Andred's-weald +stretched, rising hill above hill as far as one might see, timber +covered. There were trees between us and the village that we +sought; but above its place rose a dun cloud of smoke from some +houses fired that night by those who held it, and that was the one +thing that spoiled the beauty of all that I saw. + +Now Olaf and I spoke of all this, whispering together, for we were +close to the village, and already we had heard voices from thence +as men woke. For Olaf was ever touched by the sight of a fair land +lying before him. And while he spoke, a man seemed to rise out of a +cleft of the rocks below us, and climbed up to us, and bowed before +us, saying that he was to guide us. + +He was a great man, clad in leather from head to foot, and carrying +a sledgehammer over his shoulder. That and a billhook stuck in his +belt were his only weapons. + +"I am Spray the smith," he said, in a low voice. "The earl is +ready, and the thane also. The knaves are all drunken with our ale, +and we may fall on them at once." + +"Have they no watch kept?" asked Olaf wondering. + +"None, master." + +"Are there Danes with them?" + +"Aye; half are Danes. But I met one of them last night and spoke to +him peacefully, being stronger than he, and I said that vikings had +come to Pevensea, and that the earl was minding them. So they fear +no one." + +Then came a herdsman's call from the woods beyond the village, and +the smith said: + +"That is the thane. Fall on, master, and fear nought." + +Whereat I laughed, and the men sprang up. The smith led us for a +hundred paces through the beech trees and then across the brook, +and the steep slope up to the village was before us. There was a +little, ancient earthwork of no account round the place, but if +there had been a stockade on it, it was gone. + +Then came a roar of yells and shouts from the far side, and we knew +that the work had begun, and ran up the hillside. Then fled a man +in chain mail out of the place, leaping over the earthworks +straight at us, unknowing. + +Spray the smith swung his hammer, not heeding at all the sword in +the man's hands. Sword and helm alike shivered under the blow, and +the man rolled over and over down the hillside. + +"That is the first Dane I ever slew," said Spray to me as we topped +the ridge. + +Then we were in the village and among a crowd of wild-looking, +half-armed forest men, who fled and yelled, and smote and cried for +quarter in a strange and ghastly medley. There was no order, and +seemingly no leader among them, and an end was soon made. Before I +had struck down two men they scattered and fled for hiding, and we +followed them. Wulfnoth would have no mercy shown to these wretches +who would harry the peaceful villagers--their own kin. They would +but band together again. + +Now I did a foolish thing which might have cost me my life. For two +outlaws ran into one of the old stone buildings of which I had +heard, and I followed them. As I crossed the threshold I stayed for +a moment, for the place seemed very dark inside, and I could not +see them. But I was plain enough to them, of course, and before I +could see that a blow was coming one smote me heavily on the helm +and I fell forward, while they leapt out over my body into the open +again. Then I seemed to slip, and fell into nothingness as my +senses left me. + +Presently I came round, nor could I tell how long I had been alone, +I heard far off shouts that were dull and muffled as if coming +through walls, and then as my brain cleared, I saw that I was in +what seemed to be a dungeon like those that Earl Wulfnoth had under +Pevensea. All round me were walls, and the light came in from a +round hole above me. + +When I saw that I knew that I had indeed fallen into this place, +and my sword, too, lay on the floor where it had flown from my hand +as I did so. It was lucky that I had not fallen on it. + +Now the shouts died away, and I thought that our men were chasing +the last of the outlaws into the woods. When the silence fell, I +waxed lonely, and began to wonder if I had been forgotten. But Olaf +would miss me presently, and would surely return to the village +before long. So I would be patient, and at least try to find a way +out of this trap into which I had come so strangely. + +But there was no way out unless a ladder or rope were lowered to +me. The roof of the place was rounded and arched above me, and the +hole was in its centre so that I could not reach it. Maybe the +place was ten feet across and ten feet high under the hole, and it +minded me of the snake pit into which Gunnar the hero was thrown, +as Ottar the scald sang. Only here were no snakes, and the air was +thick and musty, but dry enough. I could see the beams of the house +roof above the hole. + +Then I thought that if I could prise some stones from the old walls +I might pile them up until I reached the edge of the hole with my +hands, when it would be easy to draw myself up, though maybe not +without taking off my armour. But when I tried the joints of the +masonry with the point of my seax, I did but blunt the weapon, for +the mortar was harder than the stone, which was the red sandstone +of the cliff where we had rested. + +So I forbore and sat down, leaning my aching head against the cool +wall, to wait for Olaf's return. There would be time to shout when +I heard voices again, and it was not good to make much noise in +that place after the blow of a club that had set my ears ringing +already. + +Then I fell to thinking of Sexberga, and those thoughts were +pleasant enough. And idly I began to sharpen my seax again on a +great square stone that was handy in the wall as I sat, but it was +very soft, and crumbled away under the steel without doing it much +good. + +Now, when one is waiting and thinking, one will play with an idle +pastime for the sake of keeping one's hands amused as it were, and +so I went on working the long slit in the stone, which the blade +was making, deeper and deeper. The sand trickled from it in a +stream, and then all of a sudden I became aware that I had pierced +through the stone into a hole behind, and I bent over to see how +this could be. + +The stone was not more than an inch or two thick, and there was +certainly a hollow which it closed, and when I saw that I broke and +worked away more of it until I could get my hand in. Then I found +that I could feel nothing, for the place was deep. So I made the +hole bigger yet, and put my arm in. Then I found the back and one +side of a stone-cased chest in the wall, as it were, of which the +stone I had bored was the door, though this was to all appearance +like several other of the larger blocks that the place was built +of. + +When I reached downwards my hand could just touch what felt like +rotten canvas, and at that I began to work again at the hole. The +stone was too strong to break, though it seemed thin, and I was so +intent on this, that the voices I had longed to hear made me start. + +"He was hereabouts, master, when I last saw him," said one whom I +thought was Spray the smith. + +"I will hang you up if he is lost," said Wulfnoth's voice. + +Then I sprang up and shouted, and the vault rang painfully in my +ears. It was Olaf who called back to me. + +"Ho, Redwald where are you?" + +"Under the house, in a pit," I answered, standing under the +opening. + +Then someone came tramping above me, and the next moment Spray's +leather-hosed leg came through the hole, and he nearly joined me. +Thereat others laughed, and he climbed up quickly enough, for it +was an ill feeling to be hanging over an unknown depth. + +"Lower me down a rope," I said, as I saw his face peering into the +place with some others. + +There seemed to be a ladder handy, for the next minute its end came +down, and at once I picked up my sword and climbed out. Olaf stood +in the doorway now with Relf. + +"It is easy to see how my cousin got into that place," he said to +Relf, pointing to my helm, which was sorely dinted. + +The big thane looked and laughed. + +"That is what felled him. But I knew not of this pit," he said, +looking past me into the house where Spray and the men stood round +the hole. + +Then the smith said: + +"Nor did I, master. But this has been found by the forest men--here +are their tools." + +And when we looked, all the floor of the house was broken up, and +the stone paving was piled in corners, and a pick or two lay on +them with a spade and crowbar. + +"They have been digging for treasure," said Relf, "and that has +kept them from my house. There are always tales of gold hidden in +these old places. I have seen that they have done the like +elsewhere in the village." + +"Aye," said Spray, "they have heard some of our tales, and they +have dug where we would not, for it spoils a house, and the wife's +temper also, to meddle with the good stone floor." + +Now it seemed to me that here was a likelihood that there was truth +in the old tales, and that I had lit on the lost hiding place of +which some memory yet remained even from the days when OElla's men +took the town from the iron workers five hundred years and more +ago, when the might of Rome had passed. + +"There is somewhat that I have found in this place," I said. "Come +and see what it is." + +Wondering, Olaf and Wulfnoth climbed down the ladder after me, and +Relf did but stay to find a torch before he followed us. Then I +showed them the stone and the hollow behind it, and the earl called +for the crowbar that was left by the outlaws, and with a stroke or +two easily broke out the rest of the stone, and the glare of the +torch shone into the place that it had so long sealed. + +It was a chamber in the wall, and maybe a yard square each way. The +stone had not filled all its width or depth of mouth, but was, as +it were, a sealed door to be broken and replaced by another. Then +we could see that the canvas I had thought that I had felt was +indeed the loose folds of the tied mouths of bags that were neatly +arranged at the bottom of this stone-built chest. And the canvas +that I had reached and pulled at had easily parted, and through the +rent showed the dull gleam of gold coin as the torchlight flared +upon it. + +The light shone too on letters scratched on the soft stone of the +back of the chamber. I could read them, but Wulfnoth pointed to +them, saying: + +"Here may be a curse written on him who touches. I will have our +priest read that which is there if he can." + +Then I laughed, and said that it was no curse, but the name of some +Roman who made the place, for all that was there was: + +CLAVD. MARTINVS. ARTIF. FEC. + +"Which means that a workman named Martin was proud of his work, and +left his name there," I said when I had read it. + +"And was slain, doubtless, lest he should betray the secret," said +Wulfnoth. + +And he put his hand out to take one of the bags from the place, +feeling round the rotten canvas to get a fair grip of the mass of +coin. + +Then he drew back his hand with a cry that came strangely from his +stern lips, for it sounded like alarm, and he stepped back. + +"As I live," he said, "somewhat cold moved beneath my fingers in +there." + +Even as he spoke something crawled slowly on to the bag that was +broken and sat on the red gold that was hidden no longer. There it +stayed, staring at the torchlight--a great wizened toad, whose eyes +were like the gold which it seemed to guard. And we stared at it, +for not one of us dared touch it, nor could we say aught. + +It is ill to waste breath in wondering how the creature got into +this long-closed place or how it lived. But when I have told of +this, many a time have I heard stories of toads that have been +found in stranger places--even in solid-seeming rock. But however +it came there--and one may think of many ways--it scared us. It +seemed a thing not natural. + +"It is the evil spirit that guards the treasure," whispered Relf to +Olaf, edging toward the ladder. + +"Fetch Anselm the priest, and let him exorcise this," said the +earl. "It is some witchcraft of the heathen Romans." + +"Were I in Finmark I would say that this was a 'sending' {7}," +Olaf said, "but we are in Christian England, and this is but a +toad." + +Now I said nothing, but I wished the beast away, for I would see +the treasure I had found. Then the earl bethought himself. + +"Maybe it is but a toad," he said. "I will cast it out." + +And with that he went to do so, but liked it not, and drew back +again. + +"Toad or worse," I said then, "I mind not their cold skin, and will +see what it is." + +So I took hold of the beast, and it swelled itself out as I did so, +and croaked a little. That was the worst it did; but I will say +this, that the sound almost made me drop it. But I cast it behind +me into the shadow, and then put both hands into the chamber and +took out one of the bags. + +It was full of gold coin, as was that which had been torn open, and +as were all the rest--ten of them--when we looked. And the coins +were older than we could tell, being stamped with strange figures +that bore some likeness to horses whose limbs fell apart, and a +strange face on the other side. Many had letters on them, and these +were mostly--CVNO. + +"They are coins of the Welsh folk whom we conquered," said +Wulfnoth. "I have seen the like before. They made them at Selsea, +and we find many there on the shore after storms." + +Now I think that we had found the hiding place of the tribute money +that should be sent to Rome when some ship came thence or from +beyond the Channel to fetch it, or maybe it was some iron master's +hoarded payment for the good Sussex iron that they smelted in these +valleys in the Roman days. More likely it was the first, for men +would know that it had never been sent away. None can tell how the +places of these hoards are lost, but times of war have strange +chances. Then folk do but hand down the knowledge that, somewhere, +the treasure is yet hidden {8}. + +"Good booty had OElla and Cissa our forbears, but they have left +some for us," said Earl Wulfnoth. + +"Here is gold enough to buy a good fleet for Ethelred," said Olaf +thoughtfully. + +"Gold enough for you and me to win England for ourselves withal," +said the earl in a low voice. "You take the Danelagh, and I the +rest, and we will keep Ethelred for a puppet overlord." + +"If Cnut wins there will be time enough to think of that," answered +Olaf coldly. "Eadmund is my friend." + +"Not Ethelred?" said Wulfnoth eagerly. + +"I fight for him," answered Olaf. + +"Well, well. I did but speak my own wish," said the earl. "You and +I will not be agreed on this matter." + +Then he turned to Relf, and began to give him some directions about +a horse whereon to load the treasure. And Olaf and I went back up +the ladder, leaving them, for the vault grew close and hot, and +this was their business. The earl would take it back to Pevensea, +where it would be safe. Word would go round quickly enough +concerning the find, and of what value it was. Nor would that grow +less in the telling, though none of us had ever seen so much gold +together before. + +I suppose that I had been in the place for two hours or more, and +the morning sky had changed strangely since the fight began. The +sun was hidden with a great mass of heavy clouds that were driving +up fast from the southwest, although the woods around us were still +and motionless in the hot, heavy air. The smoke that still rose +from the burnt houses went up straight as a pine tree. + +Olaf looked up at the sky, and seemed anxious. + +"There is a gale brewing," he said. "I am glad Rani is with the +ships." + +Then he walked away to a spur of the hill that looked down the +valley towards the sea. We could see all the tidal water, and +almost to Pevensea, and there came a long murmur of the sea on the +pebble beach, even to where we stood, so hushed were all things. +Surely there was a heavy sea setting in to make so loud a noise as +that. And all the hills and marshes seemed close at hand, so clear +was the air. + +Then came to us Olaf's ship master, and he was uneasy also. + +"Tide is at its highest tonight," he said, "and if the wind gets up +from the southwest, as seems likely, it will be higher yet than +usual. See how the clouds whirl over us." + +Then the king went back to the building and called to Wulfnoth, who +came up the ladder asking what was amiss, for he heard that Olaf's +voice was urgent. + +"Here is a gale coming," the king said, "and we must be back with +the ships." + +Wulfnoth came out into the open and looked round. + +"Aye; and tide will be high at the causeway. These spring tides run +wildly at this time of year," he said. "We must be going." + +Then was no more delay, but the horns blew the recall, and the men +came in. We had lost none, but I do not think that many outlaws +were left. + +They brought a farm horse, with baskets slung across its back in +the Sussex manner, and into them the gold was put. I looked down +into the vault as the men left it, and saw that Relf was there, and +that they had tried every great stone in the walls in search of +another chamber, but that there had not been one. And when he came +up I was about to draw up the ladder after him, and looked down for +the last time. + +There at the ladder's foot sat the elvish toad, and it seemed to me +that it looked pitifully up at the light. How many years might it +have been without sunlight or touch of dew or cool green leaves +that it had loved? And I was fain to climb down and take it up in +my hand and set it free on the grass outside the house, where a +dock spread its broad leaves. It crawled under them in haste, and I +saw it no more. Then I found that Spray the smith was watching me, +and he said a strange thing. + +"That is a good deed, master," he said. "I think that you shall +never be in prison." + +"May I never be so," I answered, wondering. + +"I am a forest-bred man," he said, "and I love all beasts," and +then he turned away, and went to the men who were waiting for the +earl's word. + +And when all was ready Relf came to me and said that he would go to +his own place with his men, and that he would ask me to take word +to his wife and daughter that all was safe at home. The outlaws had +been too busy in the town to seek further for plunder, or had not +cared to do so at once. So he went, as we started, and I was +pleased with the chance of having speech with Sexberga. + +Now there was a moaning overhead as we went through the woods along +the ridge above the valley, and hot breaths of air began to play in +our faces. The clouds raced above us more swiftly, and black masses +of scud drifted yet faster below them from across the hard black +backs of the downs to the westward. There was something strange in +the feeling of the weather that seemed to betoken more than a storm +of wind and rain, and we were silent and oppressed as we marched. + +Now we came to the crest of the hill where the track goes down to +the level of the river and marshes and to the causeway, which we +crossed in the early morning. I could see now how narrow the outlet +of the river was between the hills where it joined the main tidal +waters, and the causeway was low, and both it and the bridge were +very ancient. They call it Boreham Bridge, and it is a place that I +shall not forget. + +When we were halfway down the steep hill suddenly the first blast +of the gale smote us in the face, and that with a roar and howl and +rush that drowned all other sounds. The branches flew from the +trees along the hillside, and more than one great trunk gave way at +last to that onset. Then all along the coastline grew and widened a +white line of flying spindrift that hid the distant gray walls of +Pevensea on its low island, and shone like snow against the black +dun-edged cloud that came up from out of the sea. + +"Hurry, men," shouted Wulfnoth, "or the bridge will be down! Look +at the tide!" + +And that was racing up inland, already foaming through the wooden +arches that spanned its course. I had heard that the tide reached +this place a full hour after it began to flow at Pevensea, and even +now it was thus, two hours before it should have been at its +highest there. + +Wulfnoth's men led, and then came the earl, riding beside Spray and +the horse which bore the treasure. Olaf was riding just behind +them, and I marched with our crew not ten paces after him. So we +went down the hill, and so we stepped on the causeway, and came to +the first timbers of the bridge. And hardly had I stepped on them +than there came a great shout from the men behind us, while one +seized my arm and pointed seaward across the marshes. + +There came rushing across the level--blending channel and land into +one sea as it passed--a vast white roller, great as any wave which +breaks upon the shore, and its length was lost behind the hill +before us, and far away to our left. So swiftly did it come that it +seemed that none of us might gain the hill before it whelmed us and +causeway and bridge alike. + +Earl Wulfnoth grasped the bridle of the pack horse, and the man +Spray lashed it, shouting aloud to us to hasten. And Olaf turned in +his saddle and saw me, and reined up until I grasped his stirrup +leather, and ran on beside him. And our men broke and ran, some +following us, and some going back to the hill whence we came. And +all the while the great white billow was thundering nearer, and my +head reeled with its noise and terror till I knew not what I was +doing, and let go my hold of Olaf's stirrup. + +Then it broke over bridge and causeway, and through its roar I +heard yells, and the crash of broken timber, before I lost all +knowledge of aught but that I was lost in that mighty wave, and was +being whirled like a straw before it, where it would take me. + +I struck out wildly as if to swim--but of what avail was that +against the weight of rushing water? I seemed to be rolled over and +against broken timber and reeds and stones--and once my hand +touched a man, for I felt it grate over the scales of armour--and +my ears were full of roarings and strange sounds, and I thought +that I was surely lost. + +Then a strong grip was on me, and the water flew past me, and +hurled things at me, for I no longer went with it. My feet touched +ground, and other hands held me, and then I was ashore, and spent +almost nigh to death. Well for me it was that in the old days by +the Stour river I had loved to swim and dive in the deep pool +behind the island, for I had learned to save my breath. Had I not +done so, the choking of the great wave had surely ended my days. + +It was Olaf who had saved me. Almost had we won to the high ground +when I had let go his stirrup leather, and then the shoreward edge +of the wave had caught me. But he had faced its fury as he saw me +borne away, and had snatched me from it as it tossed me near the +bank again. Now he bent over me, trying to catch the sound of my +voice through the roar of the storm and the rush of the flood below +us. But I could not speak to him though I would, and it was not all +drowning that ailed me, for the blow which had felled me in the +fight was even now beginning to do its work. Else had I clung to +him all along, and had been safe as he was. For he won to shore ten +yards beyond its reach as the wave came. + +Now I know that Olaf and our men carried me into a place under the +lee of a hill, and bided there till the gale blew over. There was a +sharp pain as of a piercing weapon in my side as they did so, and +after that I knew not much of being carried on to the house of +Relf, the Thane of Penhurst, along a forest road where travelling +was no easier for the fallen trees that lay across it. And after I +was there I knew nothing. The blow I had had took its effect on me, +and I had several ribs broken by some timber that smote me amid the +tossing of the great wave of the flood. + +Many are the tales that men all round the coasts will tell of the +great sea flood that came on Michaelmas even. For it ran far into +the land where no tide had run before, and many towns were +destroyed by it, and many people were drowned. It will be long +before the scathe it wrought will be forgotten. Many of the earl's +ships were broken, even where they lay behind the island, and two +of ours were lost--carried across the level where no ship had ever +swum before. And eight of our men had been swept from the causeway +and drowned. Two lie yet under the wreck of bridge and causeway, or +in the Ashbourne valley amid wrack and ruin of field and forest +that the flood left behind it. + +But these things I learnt afterwards. Now I was like to die, and +Olaf bided at my side and minded nought else, as men said. + + + +Chapter 6: Sexberga The Thane's Daughter. + + +Days came and went by while I lay helpless. Olaf the king at last +must needs leave me, and take the ships back to the Thames, there +to watch against Cnut's return, in which he, almost alone in +England, believed. But he would not sail before he knew that I +would recover, and he left me in the kind hands of Anselm, the old +Norman priest, who was well skilled in leech craft, and of Relf the +Thane and his wife. So I need say nought of the long days of +weakness after danger was gone, for there are few men who have not +known what they are like, and well for them if they have had such +tending as these good folk gave to me. + +Yet it was not till November had half gone that I was able to ride +hunting again at last, and to go out with Relf in the crisp frosts +of early winter through the great woods of the Andred's-weald in +search of wolf and boar, or when the mists hung round the gray +copses, and the turf in the glades was soft, and scent was high, to +follow the deer that harboured in the deep shaws. We were seldom +without their spoils as we came homeward, and how good it was to +feel my strength coming back to me as I rode--to find the grip on a +spear shaft hardening, and the bow hand growing steadier against a +longer pull on the tough string. And Relf rejoiced with me to see +this, for he deemed that he owed me the more care because my hurt +had been gained in fighting for him and his home. Honest and rough, +with a warm heart was this forest thane, and we grew to be fast +friends. + +Now when I was helpless, Wulfnoth the earl and Godwine would often +ride from Pevensea to learn how I fared. For Wulfnoth and Godwine +alike loved Olaf the king, and Godwine thought of me as his own +friend among the vikings of our fleet. But presently Godwine went +away to Bosham, where the earl's ships were mostly laid up, to see +to the housing of his vessels for the winter, and when I grew +strong it was rather my place to go to Pevensea and wait on +Wulfnoth, if I would see him. I think the earl came to Penhurst +more often also, because he would dig for more treasure in all the +old ruins in the town. But he found no more, as one might well +suppose, for it was but a chance that our find had escaped the +searching of the first Saxon comers. Yet I saw him now and then, +and ever would he rail at Ethelred the king, who sat still and left +the Danish thingmen in possession of the eastern strongholds even +yet. + +Now one day the thane and I rode together with hawk and hound +eastward from Penhurst along the spur of a hill that runs thence +for many a long mile, falling southward on one side towards the sea +and lower hills between, and northward looking inland over +forest-covered hill and valley. And we went onward until we came to +the village that men call Senlac, where the long hill ridge ends +and sinks sharply into the valley of the little river Asten, and +there we thought that a heron or mallard would lie in the reedy +meadows below the place. + +But up the course of the stream came another party, and when we +neared it, we saw that it was the earl himself with but a few +followers, and he too was riding with hawk on wrist, and hounds in +leash behind him, though it did not seem as if he had loosed +either. + +"Ho, Relf, good morrow. What sport?" he said. + +"Little enough, lord earl, as yet," the thane said. + +"Do you and friend Redwald come with me, and I will show you +somewhat before you go home," the earl answered. + +So we must go with him, willingly enough, for he was a great +hunter, and very skilful in woodcraft. + +Now we went back through the village and up the hill again on the +same track by which we had just come, and when we were almost at +the top of the rise, the earl bade the men wait while we three rode +on. So they stayed, and we followed him, not at all knowing what he +would do. + +Then we came to a track leading to the right as we rode, and he +took that way. It led to a place of which I had heard, for it had +no good name among the people, but I thought that he would not go +thither. Nevertheless he held straight on, and came to the place in +the hillside that was feared. And it was very beautiful, for thence +one looks out over the valley to the hills beyond, with the long +line of the sea away to the right, and to the left the valleys that +slope down to the inlet where Winchelsea stands, far off to the +eastward. There is a well which they say is haunted, though by what +I know not, save that men speak of ghostly hands that seize them as +they pass, if pass they must, at night. Hardly was there a track to +the place, though the water that comes from the rocky spring is so +wondrously pure and cold that they call the place Caldbec {9} +Hill. And there by the side of the spring was a little turf-built +hut, hardly to be known from the shelving bank against which it +leant, and to that the earl led us. + +"Now," he said, "tie the horses somewhere, and we will go and speak +with the Wise Woman." + +At that Relf was not pleased, as it seemed, for he did not +dismount. + +"Come not if you fear her," said Wulfnoth; "bide with the horses if +you will, while I and Olaf's cousin go in. Maybe there will be a +message that he must take to his kinsman." + +"I have nought to seek from the old dame," said Relf, "nor is there +aught that I fear from her. I give her venison betimes, as is +fitting. I will bide with the horses." + +Wulfnoth said no more to him, and turned sharply to me. "You give +her no venison--maybe you fear her therefore!" he said in a +scornful way enough. + +"I fear her no more than Relf," I answered, "but, like him, I will +not seek her without reason." + +"Maybe there is reason for you to hear what she tells me," the earl +said. "I will have you come." + +He seemed in no wise angry, but rather wishful that I should be +with him, and so I got off my horse and went. But it crossed my +mind that Wulfnoth the earl liked not to be alone, and suddenly I +remembered the way in which two of our Bures franklins had spoken +to each other when they would see Dame Gunnhild, Hertha's nurse. It +was just in this same wise. + +There was a blue reek of oak-wood smoke across the doorway of the +hut, and at first the tears came into my eyes with its biting, and +I could see nothing as the earl drew me inside. We had to stoop low +as we crossed the threshold, and then the air was clearer at the +back of the hut, which was far larger than one would think, seeing +that its front did but cover the mouth of a cave that was in the +sandstone rock. I heard the water of the cold spring rattling and +bubbling somewhere close at hand. + +There was a long seat hewn from the rock at the very back of the +place and to one side, and Wulfnoth drew me down beside him upon +it, and there we sat silent, waiting for I knew not what. A great +yellow cat came and rubbed itself, tail in air, against my legs, +and I stroked it, and it purred pleasantly. + +Then I became aware that over against us across the fire sat the +most terrible-looking old witch that I had ever seen or dreamed of, +elbows on knees and chin on hand, staring at us. And when I saw her +I forgot the cat, and could not take my eyes off her. + +So for long enough we sat, and she turned her bright eyes from one +of us to the other, letting them rest steadily on each in turn. And +at last she spoke. + +"What do Earl Wulfnoth and Redwald the thane seek?" + +"Read me what is in the time to come. What shall be the outcome of +this strife for England?" the earl said plainly, but in a low +voice. + +"Time to come is longer than I can read," said the old woman, never +stirring or taking her eyes from the earl. "I can only see into a +few years, and I cannot always say what I know of them." + +Then she turned her gaze on me, and stretched out her hand and +pointed at me. But her eyes looked past me, as it seemed. + +"River and mere and mound," she said in a strangely soft +voice--"those, and the ways of the old time of Guthrum, in the town +that saw Eadmund the king. That is what is written for the weird of +Redwald the thane." + +Now at that I was fairly terrified, for it was plain that this old +woman, who had never set eves on me before, had knowledge more than +mortal. But if she had gone so far, I would have her go yet +further. Black terror had been before the days of Guthrum grew +peaceful, and I swallowed my fear of her and asked: + +"What of Guthrum's days?" + +"Danish laws in the Danish Anglia," she said, "and the peace that +comes after the sword and the torch." + +"Fire and sword we have had," I said. "Danish laws have ever been +ours. But Ethelred shall be king." + +"Ethelred is king," she answered; "but I speak of time to come." + +Then Wulfnoth broke in: + +"What is this that you speak of, dame? Tell me if I shall bear fire +and sword into Ethelred's land, and give it the peace that shall be +thereafter." + +Then she turned her look away from us, and stared across the fire +and out of the doorway. + +"Not with you, nor with your son, but with your son's son shall +fire and sword come into this land of ours," she said. + +"Godwine's son!" + +"Aye--Harold Godwinesson, who is unborn. Look through the smoke, +lords, across the valley, and see if you can learn aught." + +Then I stared out through the blue reek, and the earl looked. + +"You do but play with me--I see nought!" he cried, half starting up +in anger. + +But I minded him not. + +Many a fight have I seen--but that which I saw from Caldbec Hill +through the smoke of the fire is more than I may say. No fight that +I have seen was as that--it was most terrible. Surely, if ever such +a fight shall in truth rage across the quiet Senlac stream and up +the green hillside, the fate of more than a king shall hang +thereon. Surely I saw such a strife as makes or ends a nation. + +The old woman laughed. + +"What has Redwald seen?" she asked mockingly. + +The earl glanced at me, and so plainly was it written in my face +that I had seen somewhat awesome, that he gazed at me in amaze. + +And I rose up and said: + +"Let me go hence--I will see no more." + +And I was staggering to the doorway; but Wulfnoth grasped my arm +and stayed me, saying: + +"Bide here and say what you have seen--if it is aught." + +"Ask me not, earl," I answered. + +Then the dame spoke in her slow, soft voice. + +"What banner saw you? Say that much, Redwald." + +"The banner that flies from Pevensea walls--the banner that bears a +fighting warrior for its sign." + +"Ha!" said Wulfnoth; "was it well or ill with that banner?" + +"I know not how it went; I saw but a battle--yonder," and I pointed +to where, across the haze of smoke, valley and stream and hill +stretched before me, and thought that surely the fight still raged +as I had seen it--wave after wave of mail-clad horsemen charging +uphill to where, ringed in by English warriors, Saxon and Anglian +and Danish shoulder to shoulder, the banner of the Sussex earls +stood--while from the air above it rained the long arrows thick as +driving hail. + +One thing I knew well, and that was that the warriors who charged +wore the war gear of the dukes of Rouen--the Normans. How should +they come here? and who should weld our English races into one thus +to withstand so new a foe from across the sea? + +"So--a battle?" said Wulfnoth. "That is the first fancy that a +boy's brain will weave. Battles enough shall my banner see. No need +of you, witch as you are, to tell me that!" + +"Maybe not," answered the old woman. "Why, then, Earl Wulfnoth, +come here to ask me to tell you things you know?" and she turned +away towards the fire again as if uncaring. + +Then the earl changed his tone, saying: + +"Nay, good dame, but I would know if I shall take up arms at all at +this time, and what shall befall if I must do so." + +"I tell you, earl, that you have not any share in the wars that +shall be seen. And let Godwine your son bide with his sheep--so +shall he find his place." + +Then the earl flushed red with anger and waited to hear no more, +but flung out of the house, muttering hard words on the dame and on +his own foolishness in seeking her. + +Then the great cat sprang on my knee, and clung to me with its +strong claws as I would set it down to follow him. And as it stayed +me, the old dame spoke to me, and there was nought to fear in +either her face or voice. + +"Ask me somewhat, Redwald." + +I wondered, but I dared not refuse. So I said: + +"How shall fare King Olaf?" + +"For him a kingdom, and more than a kingdom. For him fame, and +better than fame. For him a name that shall never die." + +"That is a wondrous weird," I said. "Tell me now of Eadmund +Atheling;" for some strange power that the old woman had seemed to +draw me to ask of her what I would most know. + +"For Eadmund of Wessex? For him the shadow of Edric Streone over +all his brave life." + +"What then of Cnut, the Dane King?" + +"Honour and peace, and the goodwill of all men." + +"Not mine," I said. + +"Yours also, Redwald--for England's sake and his own." + +But I could not believe her at that time. + +Now the angry voice of Wulfnoth called me from outside the place, +and the dame said "Go," smiling at me and holding out her hand. + +"No more can I tell you, Redwald. But I have this to say of you, +that you have pleased me in asking nought concerning yourself." + +"I would know nought beforehand," I said, speaking old thoughts of +my own plainly. "It is enough to hope ever for good that may not +come, and to live with one's life unclouded by fear of the evil +that must needs be." + +The dame smiled again, very sadly, as it seemed to me. "It is well +said. Now I will tell you this, that over your life is the shadow +of no greater evil than what every man must meet. Farewell." + +So she spoke her last words to me, and sat down by the fire again. +And it is in my thoughts that she wept, but I know not. + +Outside stood the earl, staring over the Senlac valley eastward. + +"This were a good place for a battle, after all," he said, as to +himself. Then he heard me and turned. + +"Well, what more has the old witch told you?" he said, trying to +speak carelessly, though one might see that he longed to hear more. + +As we went towards the horses, I told him, therefore, of what had +been said of Eadmund and Cnut. And as he heard he grew thoughtful. + +"Now," he said, slowly and half to himself, "if the shadow of that +villain Streone is on Eadmund as on me, I will not strike for +myself--as yet; and Cnut shall win other men's praise before I give +him mine or go to him unsought." + +"Eadmund needs a friend, lord earl," I said, mindful of Olaf's +errand, yet hardly daring to say more seeing that he had failed. + +"If there were no Ethelred--" said the earl, and stopped. + +He said no more then until we were nearly within hearing of Relf. +Then he turned and faced me, taking my hand and staying me. + +"I would that Olaf and you were my friends," he said, "for you both +speak out for those whom you love or serve. See here, Redwald, when +you are tired of the ways of Ethelred's crew, come to me again, and +we will plan together. And tell Olaf the same. I shall bide quiet, +keeping my Sussex against all comers, until I think a time has +come. And then, maybe, the old banner will go forward. I would have +you with me then." + +So it seemed that I had found a friend, though a strange one, and I +thanked the earl, and promised him as he wished, for it bound me +only to what I thought would surely never come to pass. + +After that we went on to Relf, and rode to where we had left the +men. Then the earl left us, making his way to his ships that lay at +Bulverhythe, where some were in winter quarters. The great sea +flood had changed the Pevensea haven strangely, and he mistrusted +it. + +I told Relf all these things, but he cared not much for aught but +his free life in the Penhurst woodlands, where he had no foes or +fear of foes left, now that the outlaws were done with. + +"Well, if there must be fighting under the earl at some time," he +said, "I am glad that you may be with us." + +And he cared to ask no more about it from that day, nor do I think +that he ever gave these matters, which were so heavy to me, a +thought, being always light hearted. And now as we rode on +silently, and I deemed that his mind was full of bodings, as was +mine, he roused me from the memory of what I had seen and heard by +saying, with a laugh: + +"Saw you the old dame's cat?" + +"Aye," I answered carelessly; "a great one, and a friendly beast +enough." + +"Was it so? Then I will warrant that the old witch was in a sorely +bad temper," he said, laughing again. + +"What makes you think that?" I asked, not caring if he answered. + +"Why, our folk say that the temper of cat and witch are ever +opposite. So when they go to ask aught of the old lady, they wait +outside till they see how the cat--which is, no doubt, her familiar +spirit--behaves. Then if the beast is wild and savage, they know +that its mistress will be in good temper and they may go in. But if +the cat is friendly, they may as well go home, else will they be +like to get harder words than they would care to hear." + +Then I laughed also, and said that there seemed nought strange in +the ways of the great cat, but that it behaved as if used to being +noticed kindly. + +"That is certain," said Relf. "It is not well to offend either +mistress or beast. But surely she was ill tempered?" + +"There was nothing ill natured in her doing or sayings at all," I +said. "The earl angered her a little, but that passed." + +"Maybe that was enough to put her familiar into a good temper," +said Relf, and was satisfied that the common saying was true. + +Then I minded a small black cat that belonged to our leech at Bures +in the old days. It would let none come near it but its master. Yet +I have many times seen it perched on the shoulder of the town +witch, and she hated the leech sorely. + +So I fell to thinking of the old home and ways, soon, as I thought, +to be taken up again. But at the same time there stole into my mind +the feeling that I had grown to love this place. + +Then with flap of heavy wings and croak of alarm flew up a great +heron from a marshy pool, and in a moment all was forgotten as I +unhooded my hawk--one that Olaf had given me from the Danish spoils +at Canterbury. Then the rush of the long-winged falcon, and the cry +of the heron, and the giddy climbing of both into the gray November +sky as they strove for the highest flight, was all that I cared +for, and we shook our reins and cantered after the birds as they +drifted down the wind, soaring too high to breast it. + +And when the heron was taken the dark thoughts were gone, and we +rode back to Penhurst gaily, speaking no word of war or coming +trouble, but of flight of hawk and wile of quarry, and the like +pleasant things. + +After this I saw no more of Earl Wulfnoth, and the winter set in +with heavy snow and frosts, so that before long one might hardly +stir into the woods, where the drifts were over heavy in the deep +shaws to be very safe to a stranger. But we had some good days when +word came that the foresters had harboured an old boar in a +sheltered place. And to attack the fearless beast when he is thus +penned and at bay amid snow walls, is warriors' sport indeed. + +But while the snow fell whirling in the cold blasts from the sea +round the great low-roofed hall I must needs bide within, and so I +saw more of the maiden Sexberga than before, as she sat at her +wheel with the lady, her mother, and the maidens of the house at +the upper end of the hall, while the men wrought at their indoor +work of mending and making horse gear and tool handles and the +like, below the fire that burnt in the centre. + +And so it had been like enough that soon I should have bound my +heart to this pleasant place with ties that would have been hard to +break, but for some words that came about by chance. For there had +begun to spring up in my mind a great liking for the words and ways +of Sexberga, who had been pleasant in my eyes from the very first +time that I had seen her and her mother in Earl Wulfnoth's +courtyard. + +And I think that there is no wonder in this, for these ladies were +ever most kind to me, and long were the days since I had spoken +with any in such a home as this. Nor, as I have said, should I be +blamed for forgetting old days at Bures in this wise. + +Now, soon after Christmas, when there came one of those days when +men must needs keep under cover, I sat by the fire trimming arrows, +and presently it chanced that the lady and I were alone in the +hall, for the maidens were preparing the supper elsewhere, and the +housecarles had not yet come in from cattle yard and sheep pens. +And we talked quietly of this and that, as her wheel hummed and +clicked cheerfully the while, and at last some word of mine led her +to say: + +"I have heard little of your own folk, Redwald. I do not know even +their names." + +"After my father was slain, I had none left but my mother," I said. +"We are distant kinsfolk of Ulfkytel, our earl, but we have no near +kin." + +"Was your mother's name Hertha?" she said, naturally enough, for I +had never named her, always speaking, as one will, of her as my +mother only. + +I looked up wondering, for I could not think how she knew that +name, or indeed any other than that of Siric, my father, and maybe +Thorgeir, my grandfather, for Olaf had told them at first, when +they took charge of me, to what family I had belonged, and how I +was akin to him. + +"That was not my mother's name," I answered. "It was that of a +playfellow of mine. How could you know it?" + +"One will go back in thought and word to old times when one is +sick," the lady said, smiling. "This was a name often on your lips +as I sat by you in your sickness. It was ever 'Mother' and +'Hertha'. Olaf said that you had no sisters, or I should have +thought you called to one of them, maybe." + +Then I remembered at last; and for a little while I sat silent, and +my heart was sorely troubled. And the trouble was because my +growing thought of Sexberga taught me, all in a flash as it were, +when the remembrance of Hertha was brought thus clearly back to me, +what tie bound me to Bures and to this more than playmate of mine. +In truth, I think that had it not been for this, until I had been +back in Bures again I should not have recalled it. + +Now I was glad that I had said nought that might have made my +liking for the maiden plain to her, and so things would be the +easier. Yet for a few moments the thought of saying nought of the +old betrothal came to me--of letting it remain forgotten. And then +that seemed to me to be unworthy of a true man. It was done, and +might not be undone by my will alone. I would even speak plainly of +the matter; and at least I had not gone so far in any way that the +lady could blame me for silence. So I hardened my heart--for indeed +the trouble seemed great--and spoke quickly. + +"Hertha was nearer to me than sister, for we were betrothed when I +was but thirteen and she eleven." + +I think the trouble in my voice was plain, for the lady deemed that +there was some to be told. + +"Where is she now?" she asked. "I hope that no harm came to her +when the evil Danes overran your land." + +"I know not where she may be, dear lady," I said. "We know that she +was in safety after the first peril passed. Now our land is in +Danish hands, and I have no news from thence for four years." + +"There are many places here where one might hide well enough," she +said thoughtfully. "I suppose her people could find the like in +your country. But it would be a dull life enough." + +Then I told her of Gunnhild the nurse and her wisdom, and said that +none knew the land around Bures better than she, while she had +friends everywhere. + +"Then you may find your Hertha yet," the lady said at last; and as +she spoke Sexberga, of whom my mind was full, came into the hall. + +"You speak sadly together," she said, looking from one to the +other, and noting that her mother's wheel was idle. + +"It is no happy tale that our friend has told me," the lady said, +and so told her all that she had learned from me. + +Then Sexberga clasped her hands together, and said: + +"Shall I ever forget the time when we fled to Pevensea before the +outlaws? And to think of that terror--if it had lasted for days and +weeks--and months maybe, as it would for your Hertha. Could you in +no way seek her, Redwald?" + +She knew nothing of the ways of wartime and of the troubles which +must come to men who are weapon bearers, and I tried to tell her +how I could by no means have sought Hertha, and how, had that been +possible, and had I found her, I could hardly have brought her even +to London in safety. I told her of good Bishop Elfheah and his +death, and many more things, and yet she said: + +"I think you have been over long in seeking her. And she has been +in hiding for four years past!" + +Now that was hardly fair, but what could she think else? Yet in my +mind was the certainty now that I might have had no easy task to +win this kindly maiden, who so little cared that I was bound +elsewhere. Now I will not say that that altogether pleased me, for +no man likes to learn that a fair maiden who is pleasant to his +eyes has no like feeling for himself; which is nought but vanity +after all. So when I turned this over in my mind I knew that I +ought to be glad that she cared nothing, for so was the less +trouble in the end, and I found also that what a man ought to be is +not the same always as what a man is. + +So I made no answer, and Sexberga went on: + +"Now must you seek her as soon as you can, for that is your part as +a good warrior--a good knight, as Father Anselm will say when he +hears thereof." + +"Surely I shall go back this spring with our earl," I said. "Then +shall I find her, for she and her nurse will come back from their +hiding when peace is sure." + +"Aye; and you will not know her!" said Sexberga, clapping her hands +and laughing. "She is a woman grown, as I am, by this time!" + +Then was gone my little playfellow, and in her place, in my +thoughts, must stand a maiden with eyes of sad reproach that must +be ever on me. And maybe in her heart would be fear of me, and of +what I had become, as she was bound to me. + +And now Sexberga began to weave fancies of how I should meet this +long-lost bride of mine, and I could make no answer to her playful +railing, for I saw more clearly than she. And her mother knew that +this must be so, and sent her away on some household errand, and I +was glad. + +Then she laid her hand on mine, and spoke very kindly to me. + +"I fear, Redwald, that there is a strange trial coming for you; but +I think that you will face it rightly. It is likely that you will +hardly know Hertha when you see her; yet you are betrothed to her, +and that is a thing that cannot be forgotten." + +"She will not know me at all," I said. + +"Women are keen sighted," the lady answered; "but it is more than +likely that she will not." + +Then said I: + +"What if she has no love for me?" + +"Or you of her? But I think that in her hiding she has thought of +you ever, and well will it be for you if you come not short of her +dream of you. But you have thought of her not at all." + +"Blame me not, lady," I said humbly enough, though I thought I +deserved blame more than she knew. + +"I cannot," she answered, and then a half smile crossed her fair +face; "nor should I have thought it wonderful if some other maiden +had taken her place in your heart. But that would have been ill for +three people in the end." + +I sat silent, and maybe I was glad that the glow of the fire was +ruddy on my face, for it seemed that she had seen somewhat of my +thoughts of late. + +"Now you must find Hertha," she went on, "and then if either of you +will be released, I think that Holy Church will not be hard on you, +nor keep you bound to each other, for things have turned out ill +for such a betrothal." + +"This is a hard case," I said, "for supposing that one longs for +release and the other does not?" + +"Why, you cannot be so much as lovers yet!" she said, laughing +suddenly. "Here we speak as if a child's thoughts were aught. Now +comes into my mind such a plan as is in the old stories. You shall +seek Hertha as Olaf's kinsman only--as a kinsman who seeks for you, +maybe, not letting her know who you are. Then may you try to win +her love, if you will--or if you cannot love her, you may so work +on her mind that she will not love you, and then all is easy. For +if she will not love you when you would win her, you will not hold +her bound." + +"Surely not," I said. "This seems a good plan, if only it may be +carried out. But it depends on whether Hertha knows me again." + +"Or the old nurse, Gunnhild," she answered. "If she lives yet, you +must take her into the plan." + +So this seemed to me to be a matter easily managed, as I thought +thereof, and I was content. And after we had talked a while longer, +planning thus, I said: + +"Now I must go back to Olaf as soon as I can. The winter is wearing +away." + +"Aye; the good king will be missing you," she said. + +I was not ready to say more, for I meant a great deal by my words, +as might be supposed. And the lady knew it, as I think, for +presently she said: + +"I wonder that you spoke not of Hertha before." + +"There need be no wonder, lady," I answered. "I have lived but in +the constant thought of war, until I must needs be quiet here. But +for this, I should still have forgotten her." + +"That is true; but you must remember her now," she said, looking +quaintly at me. + +"I will remember, lady," I answered, kissing her hand; and she +smiled on me and was content. + +Truly that one who teaches a man that he is worthy of trust is his +best teacher of honour, and the name of the lady of Penhurst is +ever dear to me. + +So it came to pass that I had nought wherewith to blame myself in +the days to come, and I taught myself to look on Sexberga as a +pleasant friend only, though it was hard at first, to say the +truth. And I think that her talk of Hertha, and her jesting at my +unknown bride, as she would call her, helped me, for it kept me +mindful. + +Then at last came a messenger from Wulfnoth to bid me ride to see +him at Pevensea, and I went, wondering what new turn of things was +on hand. But when I reached the castle, I saw a ship that I knew +lying in the haven--one of Olaf's own. For Ottar the scald had come +to seek me with the first sign of open weather, bringing also many +gifts of Danish spoil for Relf and his household, and many words of +thanks also. + +So in two days' time I parted from Relf and his people, not without +sorrow. Nor could I say all that I would to them of my thoughts of +what I owed them for their care. + +Then Wulfnoth and Godwine gave me twenty pieces of the gold from +the treasure, and bade me return ere long. + +"And I think that you will come back presently with an itching to +get home a sword stroke at one whom I care not to name lest I break +out," said the earl grimly. + +"At Streone?" said I, being light of heart. + +"Aye; curses on him!" answered Wulfnoth, and turned away with a +scowl of wrath. + +Now Ottar had been to Penhurst with me, and we had come thence +together to the ships. And when the old walls of the great castle +were lost to sight as the vessel plunged eastward, he said: + +"Relf's daughter is a fair maiden, friend Redwald. It is in my mind +that she will long to see you back again." + +"Not so," I answered; "she is but friendly." + +"But she had much ado not to weep when you parted just now, and I +saw her run home from the gate over quickly. These be signs," he +said sagely, being a scald, and therefore wise in his own conceit +about such matters. + +Maybe I was glad to think that the maiden did care that I went, +were it ever so little, though I would not believe that it was so. + +So I came back into the Thames to Olaf, and glad was he to see me +once more, and that I was in no wise the worse now for my hurts. +And in his company it soon came to pass that I longed not at all +for Penhurst, though at first it seemed to me that I should have +little pleasure in life away from Sexberga. By and by I could laugh +at myself for that thought, but I have never seen cause to be sorry +therefor. There is no shame to a man that his mind has turned +towards a maiden whom he knows that he could trust and reverence. + + + +Chapter 7: The Fight At Leavenheath. + + +March and April went by, and Olaf had gathered good fleet enough in +the Thames. But there was no word of Cnut's return, though the +dread thereof hung heavy over all the land, in such wise that no +man could plan what he would do without the thought rising up, +"Unless the Dane comes," seeing that each day might bring news of +him. + +No man knows now what that terror and uncertainty was like--to have +ever in one's heart the fear of that awful host that seemed to +sweep from end to end of the land before a levy could be gathered +to meet it. + +There had been time to gather a levy now against the coming of +Cnut, but naught had been done. Sick at heart and impatient was +Olaf, for England's rulers would not take care for her safety. + +Then came word of a great council to be held at Oxford, and we +hoped much from that; but two days after it had been held there +came to us, angry and desponding, Ulfkytel, our East Anglian earl, +and told us how things had gone as ill as they might. Few words +enough are needed to tell it, but none can know what harm was +wrought thereby. Whereof Olaf says that a good leader will act +first, and call his council afterwards. + +All the best of England were there, not only Saxon thanes of +Wessex, but also loyal Danes of the old settlement, and had the +king spoken his will plainly, all would have been well. For of the +Danish nobles, Utred of Northumbria and the two earls of the old +seven boroughs, Sigeferth and Morcar, were at one with our earl and +Eadmund for gathering a great levy, and keeping it together by +marching through the Danelagh, and calling on the Danish thingmen, +in the towns they yet held, to surrender. + +That plan was good, and would have been carried out; but Edric +Streone rose up and reminded Ethelred of how the march through +Lindsey had done more harm than good. + +"Cnut will not return," he said, "and messages to these Danish +garrisons with promise of peace if they surrender will be enough. +But if we fall on them, they will grow desperate, and will send for +Cnut to help them. If we win them to peace, Cnut cannot come back." + +Thereat Sigeferth of Stamford spoke hotly, minding Streone that the +harm was done in Lindsey by pillage and burning wrought among +peaceful folk, who were thus made enemies to the king. The thingmen +would submit quietly if they knew they must; but if they were left, +they would send word to Cnut that there was no force to oppose him. + +But the words of Streone prevailed as ever, and the council broke +up, and the nobles fell to feasting, while this foolish message was +sent to Swein's veterans in their towns. + +Then Sigeferth and Morcar made no secret of their belief that +Streone was playing into Cnut's hands for reasons of his own. +Wherefore Streone sent for them in friendly wise, as if to recall +his words, and they went, and came from his house alive no more. +Then their men went to avenge their lords' deaths, and were driven +into St. Frideswide's church, and that was burnt over their heads. + +"Now the seven boroughs will welcome Cnut," said Ulfkytel, "and +Lindsey looks for him; so he has a clear road into the heart of +England." + +Then I saw that Streone surely wrought for Cnut, else was he a more +foolish man than was thought, for all held him as the most skilful +at statecraft in England. + +Then said Ulfkytel: + +"Utred has gone to mind his own land, and I have come to ask you to +help me in East Anglia." + +And in the end it came to pass that Olaf gave his new fleet into +the hands of the London thanes, for Ethelred seemed to care nought +for it, and took his own ships only, and we sailed first of all to +Maldon. Little trouble was there, for the Danes who held the place +submitted, being too few to fight us, and we gave their arms to the +citizens, and mounted all of our men whom we could, and so left the +ships and marched towards Colchester, along the great road that I +had last passed as a fugitive in the years that seemed to me so +long ago. + +It was strange to me as we went, and the mist of time seemed to +pass away, so that all began to be as plain to my mind as if that +flight had been but yesterday. There was nothing of the wayside +happening that I could not remember well. + +But all the roadside was changed, for the cottages were gone, and +the farmsteads stood no longer in the clearings. I know not what +tales of terror I might have heard concerning the burnings of these +homes. Where the thralls' huts had been were but patches of nettles +and docks hiding heaps of ashes, and the farmhouses were charred +ruins. And we saw now and then a man, skin clad and wretched, +seeking shelter in the woods in all haste as we sighted him. But I +had no need to ask aught--I knew only too well what manner of tales +might be told here, as everywhere in Swein's track. + +As we drew nearer Colchester, and the village folk began to learn +who we were, and so would gather with gifts for the good-natured +Norsemen who came to release them from the tyranny of the thingmen, +now and then a face that I knew would start, as it were, upon me +from among a little crowd. But none knew me, nor were they likely +to do so. Hardly could I think myself the same as the careless boy +who had watched his father ride away to the war. Indeed, I know +that I changed less in the ten years that came after this than in +the four that had gone by since that day. For in those four years I +had become the hardened warrior of many defeats and but this one +victory. + +Now when we reached Coggeshall village, word came to us that the +Danes were gathering in force in Colchester, and that they expected +Olaf to besiege them there. + +"I will waste no time under Colchester walls," he said, "but will +strike inland a little; then they will come out and give us battle +in the open to stay our march." + +By this time the loyal freemen of Essex had gathered to Ulfkytel in +good force, and Olaf thought it would be well that he should march +along the road that leads from Coggeshall to Dunmow and take that +town, which is strong, so that the Danish forces should not join +against us. + +Therefore he left us, and would go northwards from Dunmow, taking +the towns from thence to Thetford and Norwich, and he should go to +Ipswich and maybe to Dunwich after this. So would all East Anglia +submit. And all went well with Ulfkytel until the time came when he +must turn back in haste, as I must tell presently. + +Now, after he was gone, Olaf thought that it would be well to cross +the Colne and Stour rivers, and so cut off the Sudbury Danes from +Colchester if it might be done. + +"Then there is no better place than my own," said I, "for the road +on either side of the Stour can be guarded at Bures, and I know all +the country well." + +That pleased Olaf, and he said that we would take up some strong +position there, and so wait to draw the Danes into the open, where +he thought that one battle would do all for us. + +Thus I came hack to the home that I loved and longed to see again. +And when we came in the early morning to the place where the great +mound of the Icenian queen towers above its woods I know not how my +heart was stirred. I cannot say the things that I felt, and Olaf +said: + +"Let us ride on alone and see your place." + +Then we came swiftly to the crest of the hill, and I could see all +that was mine by right. But it was a piteous sight for me, and my +rage and sorrow made me silent as I looked. + +The stockading that had been so good was broken and useless, and +the church was in blackened ruins, standing among the houses where +black gaps among them also showed that the Danes had been at work +and that none had had heart to rebuild. Black were the ruins of my +home on the hill above the village, and across the mere woods one +burnt gable of Hertha's home stood alone above the hill shoulder to +show where Osgod had dwelt in the hollow of the hills beside the +ford. + +Then we rode across the bridge and into the street unchallenged, +for all the poor folk had fled from before us thinking that we were +some fresh foes. Very strange the deserted place looked to me as I +sat on my horse on the familiar green, and saw the river gleam +across the gap where the church had been, and missed the houses +that I had known so well. + +"Call aloud, Redwald," said Olaf. "It may be that your name will +bring some from their hiding." + +So I called, and the empty street echoed back the words: + +"Ho, friends! I am Redwald, your thane. Will none come to greet +me?" + +There was no answer, and Olaf lifted up his clear voice: + +"Ho, Ethelred's men! here is help against the Danes." + +Then from under the staging by the riverside where the boats land +their cargo, crept two men and came towards us slowly. And one was +that thrall of mine who would have gone to Wormingford for me on +the night when we fled. His silver collar of thraldom was gone, for +the Danes had taken it, and his face bore marks of long hardship, +but I knew him instantly. So I called him by name, and he stared at +me fixedly for a moment, and then cried aloud and ran to me and +fell to kissing my hand and weeping with joy at my return. Nor +could I get a word from him at first. + +Then more of the people came from one place or another, timidly at +first, but growing bold as they saw these two men without fear of +us, and by the time that Olaf's warriors came over the bridge there +were not a few folk standing round us and looking on. One by one I +knew their faces, though years of pain had marked them sorely. But +none knew me at first, though doubtless they would do so if I +called to them as I had called to Brand the thrall. + +Now was busy setting of watches and ordering of outposts, and Olaf +went with me to the top of our hill and there set a strong post of +our men, for there could be no better place for a camp either for +rest or defence, and the people told him that every Dane in the +countryside had gone to Colchester, where they thought to be +attacked. + +Now Brand the thrall had followed us to the hilltop, and while I +sat and looked at the ruins of my home he left me and spoke to a +group of countrymen who looked on at the warriors. There was one +among this group whose face drew me, for I seemed to think that I +ought to know him, though I could not say who he was. He looked +like a poor franklin in his rough brown jerkin and leather-gartered +hose, and broad hat, and he bore no weapon but a short seax in his +belt, and a quarterstaff, and there was nought about him to claim +notice. But I was watching for old friends of mine with a full +heart, and scanned the face of each one that came near. + +Then it seemed that the others spoke to this man with a sort of +reverence, and presently one bared his head before him. Thereat I +knew who he was, and my heart leapt with joy, for it was good +Father Ailwin, our priest, who had gone back to his death as we had +thought. + +Then I made haste and went to him, dismounting before him. + +"Father," I said, "have you forgotten Redwald, your pupil?" + +He took my hand in silence, being too much moved to speak, and +signed the sign of the cross towards me in token of blessing. I +bowed my head, and rejoiced that he was yet living. + +Then Olaf called me, and I said: + +"When the warriors have dispersed, come to the house on the green +that was Gurth's. The king and I shall be there. We have much to +say to one another, father." + +So I had to leave him at that time, for now Olaf would take eight +score of our men in haste to Sudbury, which is but five miles away, +and call on the townsfolk to rise for Ethelred and drive out any +Danes who were left there. + +We went away quickly, and took all our mounted men, for we could +hear of no Danish force afield yet. It is likely that word of our +force had gone from Maldon, losing nothing on the way. + +We rode to Sudbury gates and called on the townspeople to open +their gates. Then was some tumult and fighting inside the town, but +they opened to us, and we rode in. There were some slain men in the +street, for what Danes had been there had resisted the surrender to +so small a force. + +But the Sudbury folk rejoiced to see us, and hailed Ethelred as +king very gladly. Then Olaf bade them raise what men they could and +join him at Bures on the morrow with the first light. Thereat the +old sheriff of Sudbury, whom I knew well, promised that we should +have all the men whom he could raise. + +"Nor will they be your worst fighters, King Olaf," he said, "for we +have many wrongs to avenge." + +It was late evening when we went back. And in the road where it +winds between the river and the hill before one comes into Bures +street waited Rani and some men with news. The Danes had come from +Colchester, and already their watch fires were burning along the +heath some four miles to eastward of us. It had fallen out, as Olaf +wished, that they would try to bar our way into Suffolk, and we +should have work to hand on the morrow. + +Now men had gone with some thralls who could take them safely near +the host, to spy what they could of the number and the plans of the +Danes. + +So it came to pass that I went no more into the village that night, +but slept by a fire that burnt where our own hearthstone had been, +amid the ruins of my home. And that was a sad homecoming enough. +Moreover, in the first hours of the night a wonderful thing +happened which seemed to be of ill omen, and was so strange that +maybe few will believe it. + +There was a bit of broken wall near the fire, and I laid me down in +my cloak under its shelter, setting the sword that Eadmund had +given me against it close to my head, so that I could reach it +instantly if need were. After a while I slept, for the day had been +very long and I was weary, else would sad thoughts have kept me +waking. And presently there was a rumble and snapping that woke me +up in a dream of falling ruin, and the man who lay next to me cried +out and dragged me roughly aside. + +The broken wall had fallen, crumbling with the heat of the fire, I +suppose, and had almost slain me. But I was not touched, though the +sword was broken. And when Ottar the scald heard of it he was +troubled, not knowing what this might betoken. But Olaf thought +little of it. + +"It means that axe is better than sword for this fight," he said, +for he had armed me like himself after the Norse manner, than which +is none better or more handsome. He had given me a byrnie {10} +of the best ring mail, and a helm gold-inlaid as became a king's +kinsman, and axe and shield like his own. He and his men alone of +all Norsemen in those days bore the cross on both helm and shield. +Nor would Olaf have any unchristened man in all his host. Many a +stout warrior did he turn away because he was not and would not be +a Christian, for many Danes were yet heathen, and most Norway men. + +Some of the men who had gone out to see the Danish force came back +soon after midnight, and they said that there would seem to be +close on a thousand of them in all. + +After that we knew that a hard fight was before us, and the king +bade us sleep and take what rest we might. Then, very early, came +men to say that the Sudbury folk had come, and Olaf and I went down +to the village to meet them. Close on two hundred men had come with +Prat, the son of the sheriff of Sudbury, at their head, and they +were not to be despised, for they were sturdy spearmen, and many +had mail, though the most wore the stout leathern jerkin that will +turn a sword cut well enough. + +And Prat asked that they should have the first place in the fight, +seeing that they fought for their own land. + +"That is the place of my own ship's crew," said Olaf, "nor will +they be denied it. Now shall you fight under Redwald, your own +thane, and he will have the next place to me." + +That pleased both them and me well, and after that Olaf sent me on +as advance guard, for we knew the country. + +We were nine hundred strong in all, and when I took my men to the +hilltop I met a man who said that the Danes mustered some fifteen +hundred strong. There were Anglian Danes there besides thingmen. +But Olaf had said that we would fight two to one if necessary, and +so I held on; he would send after me if he would make any change in +his plans when he heard this. It was well that we had settled with +the Sudbury force already or we should have had them to deal with +besides. + +We left Bures hill and went down the steep valley beyond it, and I +thought that the Danes might wait for us in the wood that is on the +opposite slope. But there were none, and we came out on the open +ground that stretches away in a fairly level upland for many a mile +northward and eastward before us. There I waited, for we needed no +advance guard beyond these last woodlands. One could see to the dip +that is by Leavenheath, and there the Danes would be. And indeed +across the open rode a few men in that direction, and I knew that +they were scouts who would take the news of our coming; but they +were too far away to be stopped even had I wished to do so. Olaf +would not be led far from Bures and the river, but would have the +foe come to him. + +So we stayed just beyond the cover, and the bustards ran across the +heath as we roused them, and the larks sprung up and sang overhead, +and the blackbirds called their alarm notes in the copse behind us, +and the men talked of these things and pointed at the rabbits that +sat up to look at us before they fled, as if there were no fighting +at hand; for indeed I think that one notes all these well-known +things more plainly when one's mind is strung up and over watchful, +as it will be before somewhat great that is looked for. + +Then came Olaf at the head of his men, and as he came I saw the +first sparkle of armour across the heath under the sun, for the +Danes were in array, and were coming up to the level ground over +which we looked. + +And when Olaf saw that his face grew bright with the joy of battle +in a good cause, and his hand went to his sword while he looked +quickly round for the place that he would choose. Nor was he long +in choosing, for he led us but a furlong from the cover's edge, and +there drew us up in a half circle, with the hollow towards the +cover and our horsemen on the flanks, so that the greater force +could not outflank us, while we had the wood in our rear. So if one +half of the curved line was forced back it would but drive us +closer together, back to back, and at the worst we could not be +followed into the cover except by scattered men who would be of no +account. + +Now the strongest part of our curved line was in the centre, and +there stood Olaf's mailed shipmen, and behind them my English +spearmen. That place they liked not at first, till the king told +them carefully what he would have them do at the first charge of +horsemen for which he looked, for now it was plain that many of the +Danes were mounted. + +Olaf and I stood between his men and mine, leaving our horses in +the cover, for a viking leader will ever fight on foot. Rani was on +the right wing, and Biorn the marshal on the left; and Ottar the +scald bore Olaf's banner beside the king. There were six of the +best warriors of the crew before Olaf as his shield wall, and six +of the best English warriors had been named by Prat to act in the +same way for me. Olaf had given me a good plain sword in place of +that which I broke, but I took a spear now, ashen shafted and +strong, in the English way, that I might be armed as were my men, +and I think that pleased them. + +The Danes came on fast, and they had not been miscounted. They were +full half as many again as we, and they were drawn up in line with +their horsemen on the wings as we were, so that at first I thought +we should fight man to man, both horse and foot, along the whole +front. + +Now they came almost within bow shot, and there they halted and +closed up, leaning on their weapons, while a great man, tall and +black bearded, and clad in black chain mail, rode out before them +and came towards us with his right hand held up in token of parley. + +Olaf went out from the line to meet him, and when they were close +together a great hush fell on the two hosts to hear what was said. + +"Are you the leader of this host?" the Dane said. + +"Aye. Who are you?" answered Olaf. + +"I am Egil Thorarinsson, of Colchester," he answered. "And whoever +you may be, I call on you to yield to Cnut, King of Denmark and +England, and Norway also." + +"Maybe he is king of neither," Olaf answered quietly. "I am Olaf +Haraldsson, and I am here to see if he shall be King of England. So +I call on you to submit peaceably to Ethelred, leaving Cnut to take +his own land if he can." + +"We are Cnut's men and Danes," answered Egil, "and from your speech +and name it would seem that you are no Englishman. Now if you are +Olaf the Thick, own your own king Cnut, and leave this Ethelred the +Unredy to his own foolishness." + +"I am one of those Norsemen who hold that Cnut is no king of ours, +and therefore I fight him wherever I can. But if you will own +Ethelred there shall be peace from him, and you will but do what +the Danes of Guthrum's host did in the old days--hold the land you +have won from an English overlord." + +"A fine overlord, forsooth," said the Dane; "maybe one would think +of it had he been a second Alfred--but Ethelred the Unredy! Not so, +King Olaf. Will you own Cnut, or must we make you?" + +"It seems that we shall not agree until we have fought out this +question," said Olaf, laughing a little. + +The Dane laughed back. + +"Aye, I suppose not. I would that you had a few more men. But that +is a hard lot in the centre." + +And so he looked down our line with an unmoved face, and turned his +horse and rode slowly back to his own men. Olaf came back to us +with a confident look enough. + +"There is a man worth fighting," he said to me; "he is foster +brother of Thorkel the High, who leads young Cnut, and he seems an +honest warrior enough." + +Then all at once his face hardened, and he spoke in the sharp tone +of command: + +"Get your spearmen forward--the horsemen are coming first." + +And I saw even before he spoke that this was so, for they were +closing in across their line from the wings, and forming up for an +attack that they maybe thought would break the grim ranks of Olaf's +crew who were the strength of our centre. + +So I gave the word, and my spearmen came quickly forward through +the viking line, and there stood two deep, setting the butt ends of +their spears firmly in the ground at their feet, and lowering the +points to meet the horses breast high. Olaf bade the front rank +kneel on one knee and take both hands to the spear shaft, and then +the thick hedge of glittering points was double. I had never seen +this plan before, but it was what Olaf had bidden us do if there +was a charge of horsemen. And I stood in the second rank with Prat +beside me, and behind me were the men of Olaf's shield wall. I took +my axe in my right hand instead of the sword, for the heavier +weapon seemed best against what was coming. + +Now were the foes ready, even as the spearmen knelt, and a chief +rode out before them and gave the word to charge, and with a great +roar they answered him, spurring their horses and flying down on +us. The arrow shafts rattled on the bow staves as Olaf's vikings +made ready, and I cried to my spearmen to stand steady, for it +seemed as if that thundering charge must sweep the crouching lines +like chaff before it. And as it came we were silent, and no spear +wavered in all the long hedge to right and left of me. + +They were but fifty paces from us; and then with hiss and rattle as +of the first gust of a storm in dry branches the arrows flew among +them, smiting man and horse alike, and down went full half of the +foremost line, while over the fallen leapt and plunged those behind +them unchecked, and were upon us sword in air; and the tough spear +shafts bent and cracked, and a great shout went up, and over the +shoulders of my men flashed the viking axes, falling on horses and +dismounted men, and the Danish riders recoiled from the steadfast +spearmen whose line they could not break though they had gapped it +here and there, while the arrows and javelins flew among them +unceasingly. + +They drew back disordered, and then from the wings charged our +horsemen and broke them, chasing them back towards their own men in +disorder, while my stolid spearmen closed up again shoulder to +shoulder, and the level hedge of spear points was ready again. But +now they shone no longer, for they were dulled with the crimson +token of their work. + +Then the Danish ranks opened, and their horsemen passed through to +the rear, and at once our men wheeled back to their posts on the +wings, shouting in the faces of the Danes as they galloped past +their lines. Then was the ground open between the forces again, but +now it was cumbered with fallen men and horses, and below our spear +points was a ghastly barrier of those who had dared to rush on +them, for spear had begun and axe had finished the work. + +"Well done, spearmen!" Olaf cried to us, "now is our turn." + +And at his word his vikings took our place, and we were content. +For we had borne the first shock of the battle after all, and had +earned praise. Moreover the whole line cheered us as we fell back +into the second line. + +"Now comes the real fighting," said Olaf to me; "stay by my side, +cousin, and you and I will see some sword play together." + +So I stood on the left hand, and Ottar was on his right with the +standard, and Prat of Sudbury was next to me. The viking line was +two deep before us, and Olaf's shieldmen and mine were between us +and the rear rank, and my spearmen leant on their weapons behind us +again. But it took us less time to fall into place thus than it has +taken to say how we stood. + +And hardly were we steady again before the whole Danish line broke +out into their war song and advanced. Then the song became a hoarse +roar, and their line lapped round to compass our bowed front, and +man to man they flung themselves on us as the storm of darts and +arrows crossed from side to side between us. Then rang the war +chime, the clang of steel on steel loud over Leavenheath, and there +came into my heart again the longing to wipe out the memory of old +defeats, and I gripped my axe and shield and waited for my turn to +come. + +There was a little time while I might see all that happened, and at +the first rush I saw Biorn's men give back a pace--no more--and win +their place again. I saw our horsemen watching for a chance to +charge in on the Danish flank, and I saw the Danish riders wheeling +to meet them. Then I must keep my eyes for what was before me, for +men were falling. Then Ottar began to sing, and his voice rose over +the cries of battle, and rang in tune with the sword strokes as it +seemed to me, and with his singing came to me, as to many, the +longing to do great deeds and to fall if I might but be sung thus. + +Then I saw a Dane fell one of the vikings, and leap at the men of +Olaf's shield wall, and an axe flashed and he went down. The +fighting was coming nearer to me, and I watched and waited, and I +knew that I had never seen so stern a fight as this, for before me +Olaf's veterans fought against Swein's--the trained thingmen who +held the towns. And neither side had ever known defeat, and it +seemed to me that surely we must fight till all were slain, for +these were men who would not yield. + +Then was a gap in the ranks before me for a moment, and through it +glanced like light a long spear with a hook that caught the edge of +Prat's red shield and tore it aside; and I smote it and cut the +shaft in twain, so that it was but wood that darted against Prat's +mail, and he said, "Thanks, master," and smiled at me, for the +ranks had closed up again. + +Then before me I saw Egil's black armour, and the mighty form of +the chief who had led the mounted Danes; and they rushed on us and +their men followed them, and in a moment one was shield to shield +with me, and I took his blow on mine, and my stroke went home on +his helm, and he fell at my feet, swaying backwards, while over him +tripped Egil, and lost his footing, and came with a heavy fall +against me, so close and suddenly that I could not strike him or he +me, and I grappled with him and we went down together. + +Then my spearmen roared "Out, out!" and charged on the Danes who +had broken our line thus, and I heard Olaf's voice shouting, and +then I was inside our line behind the heels of the men who fought, +and struggling with the Danish chief for mastery. + +That was a tough wrestle, but I had been in training with Olaf, and +the Dane had been shut up in the town at ease; and at last he gave +way, and I knelt on his broad chest, drew my seax, and bade him +yield. + +"Not I," he said, panting for breath. + +But I would not slay a brave warrior who had fallen as I knew by +chance, and so I said--for fighting was too hot for any man to pay +heed to us, as his Danes were trying to reach him through my +spearmen: + +"You had better. For you have fought well, and this is but chance." + +"Tie me up, then," he growled. "Who are you?" + +"Olaf's cousin," said I. + +"I can yield to you, then," he said; "take my sword and tie me up, +for I will escape if I can." + +Then two spearmen turned and shouted, and went to drive their +weapons into the body of my foe, and I put my shield in the way. + +"Strike not a fallen man," I said, and they forebore, ashamed. + +Then I loosed the baldric that his sword hung in--his axe was gone +as he fell or wrestled--and took the weapon. And lo! it was sword +Foe's Bane, my father's sword; and I cast away my axe and gripped +the well-known hilt, and bade the spearmen guard my captive, and +turned back into the fight. And all this had gone by in a whirl, as +it were, and the Danes were still striving to regain their lord, +while Olaf and Ottar were smiting unceasingly. Only Prat was gone, +while now our whole line was of spearmen and vikings mingled, and +the Danish line was in no sort of order, but I thought they +prepared for another rush on us. + +Then it came, and we were driven back fighting; it slackened, and +we took our ground again. And then I know not what sign Olaf saw in +the faces of the Danes before him, but suddenly he spoke, and our +war horns brayed. Then Ottar raised the standard and pointed it +forward, and there rose a thundering cheer from our whole line as +we charged and swept the Danes before us, spear and axe and sword +cleaving their way unchecked. And surely sword Foe's Bane wiped out +the dishonour of biding in a foeman's power that day. + +Then rode our horsemen among the disordered crowd, and that was the +end. The Danes broke and fled, and Olaf had won his seventh battle, +and I had seen victory at last; moreover the sword of Thorgeir was +in my hand. + +The light-armed men and the riders followed the flying Danes, and +Olaf sheathed his red sword with the light of victory shining on +his face, and while the men cheered around us he put his hand on my +shoulder and asked if I were hurt. + +"I saw you fall, cousin," he said, "but I could not win to you. The +Danes pressed on to reach the man you had down." + +"It was Egil," I said. "I am not hurt--are you touched?" + +And he was not, but it was our good mail that had saved us both. +There would be work for the armourer by and by before we could wear +it again, for after Egil had fallen I had been beside the king, and +there was no lack of blows before the time had come when our charge +ended the matter. Only three of his six shield men and two of mine +were left. + +But Prat was slain, and many another good warrior lay dead where +our line had been. + +Now when I looked for Egil he was gone. The two spearmen lay where +I thought he had been, and I looked to find him slain also. So I +asked the men round me, and at last found one who had seen him +dragged up by the rush that bore us back. And so he had escaped. + +"That is the chance of war," said Olaf, "but you could not have +slain him with honour." + +"Nevertheless," said Ottar, "Redwald has a sure token there that he +overcame him," and he pointed to my sword. + +"It is my father's sword," I said. "It has come back to me, even as +you said it would." + +"They have not said too much of sword Foe's Bane," Ottar answered. +"For I have seen you use it--and I think that Hneitir is hardly +more handsome." + +Now came that which is the most terrible part of a battle, even for +the victors, and that is the calling of the roll. And sad enough +were we when that was done, for the loss was heavy. Yet what the +loss was to the Danes I cannot say, for our men chased them till +there were no two left together to make a stand among those who had +not found safety in the woods that fringe the heath. + +Then we bore back our wounded--and they were many--to Bures, and it +was noonday when we reached there. But there was no rest for Olaf +yet, for Colchester must be barred against the Danes. + +He and I therefore took a hundred of our men, mounting them on the +freshest of the horses, and covered the nine miles between us and +the town as quickly as we might. Very fair the old place looked to +me as we crossed the Colne and saw the walls among the trees on the +steep hillside, and the houses nestling against it. The gates were +shut, and there was a strong guard along the ramparts on either +side, and we halted and summoned the townsfolk to surrender to +Ethelred in peace. + +Doubtless some flying Danes had brought news of how the battle had +gone, for at once the gates were opened to us, and the chief men +came out and prayed for favour at Olaf's hands, and he told them +that Ethelred their king would take no revenge on them for having +bowed to Swein and his mighty force. So there was rejoicing in +Colchester, for it seemed to the townsfolk that peace had surely +come at last, and with it relief from the oppression of the +thingmen. For these warriors had carried matters with a high hand, +so that no Anglian dared to call them aught but lord--it must be +"lord Dane" if they spoke even to the meanest of the hosts and the +gravest burgher must give way to some footman of Swein's if they +met in street or on bridge. So they were not loved. + +Olaf bade the townspeople prove their loyalty by taking all the +Danish warriors who were in the place, and bringing them to him on +the market hill where the great roads cross. Then was fighting in +Colchester for a while, but in the end, towards sunset, there was a +sullen gathering of them enough, and many were wounded. + +Then the king went and spoke to them. + +"What think you that I will do to you?" he asked. + +"Even as we would do to you," one said. + +"Hang me, maybe?" said Olaf. + +"Aye, what else?" the man answered in a careless way, but looking +more anxious than he would wish one to see. + +"I do not hang good warriors," the king said. "What would you do if +I gave you life?" + +"What bargain do you want to make?" said the Dane. + +"If I put you into a ship and let you go, will you promise to take +a message for me to Cnut, and not to come back to England as foes?" + +"If that is all, we will do it," the man answered, while his look +grew less careful, and the other men assented readily enough with +the fierce townsmen and their broad spears waiting around them. + +"Go and tell Cnut, then, that Ethelred is king, and how you have +fared. That is all I bid you. Are there any Norsemen among you?" + +There were eight or ten among the six-score prisoners, and Olaf +spoke aside with them. + +"Go back to our own land and say what you have seen of the dealings +of Olaf Haraldsson with those who fight bravely though against him. +And if when you hear that I have returned to Norway you come and +mind me of today, I will give you a place among my own men." + +Then they said that they would fain serve him now; but he would not +have that, and then they said that they would surely come to him if +they heard that he was anywhere in their land. + +There were two trading busses in the river, and into these vessels +we put the Danes, giving them all they needed to take them back to +Denmark, but leaving them no arms. The townsfolk would have it that +they would return and take revenge in spite of their promise, but +Olaf told them that they must not fear so few men, but rather take +care to be ready against the coming of more. + +So the Danes sailed away down the river and to sea, and whether +they kept their promise or not I cannot say. But I think that Olaf +had done somewhat towards preparing a welcome for himself when he +should return to his own land by acting thus. I would that Ethelred +and Eadmund had been wise as he, for by forgiveness they would have +won men to them. But evil counsel was ever waiting on them, and +maybe they are not to blame so much as is he who gave it. + +There were no men of note among these Danes whom we took, and we +thought that Ulfkytel would maybe hear of Egil before long, if he +could by any means get his scattered forces together. Yet the rout +was very complete, else he would have been back in Colchester +before us. + +The townsfolk made a great feast in Colchester for us that night, +and next day Olaf called the headmen and set all in order for +Ethelred the king. And we thought that the town was safe for him, +for a levy would be made to hold the place at once. We rode back to +Bures in the evening, therefore, taking a few of our men as a guard +lest there should be parties of Danes on the road--a likely thing +enough, as a beaten and disbanded force in a hostile land must live +by plunder, for a time at least. But we met none. + + + +Chapter 8: The White Lady Of Wormingford Mere. + + +As we rode over the uplands we saw that the Sudbury men would do +all honour to those who had fallen fighting beside them, for they +made a great mound over Olaf's men, and Ailwin our priest was there +with us to see that they had Christian burial with such solemnity +as might be in those troubled days. There might be no chanting of +choir or swinging of censer at that burying; but when the holy +rites were ended Ottar the scald sang the deeds of those who were +gone, while the mound was closed. And that would be what those +valiant warriors loved to hear. + +So passed the day, and then were our wounded to be seen; but at +last I might sit quietly in the house on the green and speak all +that I would with Ailwin, and we had much to say. I know not if I +longed or feared now to speak of Hertha, but I would do so. Yet +first I asked Ailwin how he himself had fared when the Danes came; +for I had thought that he would have been slain. + +"Aye, my son, that I should have surely been," he said, "but I +found a hiding place until their fury was past, and the host swept +on, leaving but a few among us. Some of these were wounded men, and +you mind that I am skilled in leechcraft. So I dressed myself in a +freeman's garb and tended them, winning their respect at least, if +not gratitude. So I have been the leech ever since, for the church +was burnt, and many a priest was slain, and these Danes are but +half Christian if they are not open pagans; and I might not don my +frock, else would there have been no one left to christen and say +mass and marry for our poor folk in quiet places." + +Then I said: + +"Where did you find a hiding place, father?" + +"It was shown me by one who made me promise--aye and take oath, +moreover, as if my word were not enough--that I would tell no man +where it is. For such a place once known to any but those who use +it is safe no longer." + +"Was it Gunnhild who helped you thus?" I said, for I remembered now +my last words to him, that he should seek her. + +"I may say that it was Gunnhild. There she and Hertha and I were +safe till the worst was over," he answered, and looked in my face. + +Then I must say what was in my mind all the while, and I asked him +plainly: + +"Where is Hertha now, father? Is she yet well and safe?" + +"Both well and safe with Gunnhild," he said. + +"Where is she--can I seek her?" + +The old man looked at me meaningly for a minute, and I grew hot +under his kindly gaze. + +"What remember you of Hertha, my son?" he said gently. + +"All, father," I answered; "but does she remember aught?" + +"She remembers--she has never forgotten," he said. + +And I had forgotten for so long. I think the old priest, who was so +used to deal with men, saw what was written in my face, for he +smiled a little and said: + +"Women have time to think, but a warrior of today has had none. +What think you of your meeting with Hertha?" + +Then I said, being sure that Ailwin understood the puzzle that was +in my mind: + +"Father, I know not what to think. We are bound--but now it is +likely that we should not know one another if we met; in truth, I +think I fear to meet her." + +"Is there any other maiden?" he asked, still smiling. + +"Once I thought there was--and not so long ago either," I said +honestly, "but I remembered in time. Now I will say truly that +there is not." + +I had no longing for Penhurst now. + +Then there came across me a strange feeling that one might hardly +call jealousy--though it was near it--and I said: + +"Has she seen any other who would make her wish to forget?" + +"Truly she has not," Ailwin laughed; "how should she?" + +"I know not where she has been, father," I said with a lighter +heart, although but an hour ago I thought that I should have been +glad to hear that it was so. + +"Ah--I forgot," Ailwin said in some little confusion as I thought, +and he was silent. But now I would say more. + +"Well, then, father, both of us are heart whole, as it seems. But I +know not if she would be pleased with me as I am now." + +Ailwin looked up quickly at me, and then said: + +"One cannot tell. Maybe she thinks the same concerning you and your +thought of her." + +Then I told the good man of that plan which the lady of Penhurst +had made when we spoke of the same doubt, and he laughed thereat, +which did not please me. So I said: + +"Well, then, let me see her." + +"Not yet," he said after a little thought. "This is not the first +time that I have gone over this matter. Gunnhild has spoken with me +more than once, and yesterday she gave me a message for you, and I +was but to give it if I found that you longed to see Hertha again." + +"What is it, then?" + +"She says that the troubles are not over yet. Cnut will be back +shortly, and then you have warriors' work to do. When that is done +there will be peace, for England or Denmark, or both, will be worn +out. It will not be long ere that is so, she says, and she is very +wise. Then come and find Hertha if you will. But now there will be +less trouble for both if you meet not." + +Then I grew impatient, for I hate concealments of any kind. + +"Better break the betrothal at once, then," I said, "for if I must +wait I cannot say that I may not meet with a maiden whom I shall +love." + +"Then shall you let me know," said Ailwin coolly, "and it shall be +broken. Thus will be no sorrow to Hertha." + +"So be it," said I. "But I think you are hard on me." + +"No so, my son," said the good man, "not so. Redwald and Hertha of +today are strangers. I do not altogether hold with these early +betrothals; but what is, must be. Wait a little, and then when +peace comes, and you can dwell, one at Bures and one at Wormingford +in the old way--seeing one another and learning what shall be best +for both--all will be well. Be content. Your place and hers lie in +ruins. Why, Redwald, what home have you to give her?" + +Now that word of common sense was the best that he could have +spoken, for I was waxing angry at being thus played with, as I +thought. But at that moment Olaf and Ottar came in with clang and +ring of mail and sword, and so no more was said, and soon Ailwin +rose to depart. But I followed him out, and asked him for the last +time: + +"Will you not tell me where Hertha bides?" + +"No, my son--not yet. Believe me it is best." + +"Well, then," I answered, "I shall try to find her; but if I +cannot, you mind what I said." + +"I will not forget. But I will add this--that there are many fair +maidens, and but one Hertha." + +Then he turned away into the dark, and was gone with an uplifting +of his hand in parting blessing. I knew the good man loved me, and +now I was sorry that I had spoken harshly to him, yet I had a +feeling that I had been treated ill. Maybe that was foolish, but +one acts on foolish thoughts often enough. + +There was a man sitting on the settle in the porch of the house as +I turned back. I had not noticed him as we came out. Now the +firelight from the half-open door fell on his face, and I saw that +it was one of those two thralls of mine. + +"Ho, Brand," I said, "answer me truly. Know you where bides Dame +Gunnhild the witch?" + +"No, lord. We know not where she bides but it is not far hence, for +we see her at times in the village, though not often." + +"How did she escape when the Danes came?" + +"She and the lady Hertha took boat--it was but three days after you +had gone. All the men had fled as she bade them, but her brother +came and helped her with the boat. They went into the mere, and +that was the last we saw of them." + +Now I remembered to have heard of Gunnhild's brother, but I had +never seen him. + +"Where does her brother live?" I asked. + +"I know not. I have not seen him again," answered the man. + +"Whence comes Dame Gunnhild into the village?" I went on, thinking +that I might learn somewhat in that way. + +"Master," said Brand, "she comes at twilight, nor will she have +anyone follow her. Ill would it fare with the man who did so. I do +not know whence she comes." + +Now it seemed to me that the man had more in his mind than that, +and at least that there must be some talk about the place, which is +small enough to make the doings of everyone the talk of each one +else. + +"Where do men say she lives?" I asked therefore. + +The man looked doubtfully at me, but he could see that I was not +angry. So he smiled foolishly, and answered: + +"We say nought, lord. Danes hear everything in some way." + +"Well, you can tell me safely enough." + +"We think it is witchcraft of the old dame's, and that she and the +lady Hertha live with the White Lady in the mere of Wormingford." + +Then I was fain to laugh, for it was witchcraft more than even +Gunnhild could compass, by which she might find refuge in the +depths of that bottomless mere where the White Lady dwells. The +place has an ill name enough among our folk, and even on a bright +summer day, when all the margin of the wide circle of water is +starred with the white lilies, I have known silence fall on those +laughing ones who plucked the flowers, so still and dark are the +waters, and so silent the thick woods that hem the mere round under +the shadow of the westward hill that hides the sunset. No man cares +to go near the mere when darkness has fallen, so much do our people +fear to see the White Lady of whom Brand spoke. + +I feared her not, for she was a lady of our own race, who was +drowned there by the wild Welsh folk in some raid of theirs when we +Angles first came from the land beyond the seas and drove them out. +Ours was the clan of the Wormings--I bore the badge of the twining +snake myself today, marked on my left arm, as had all my fathers +before me--so ford and mere were named after us, and we were proud +of the long descent, as I have said. Once had my mother seen the +Lady, and that was on the day that my father was slain. Therefore +had she seen unmoved the coming of Grinkel, for she knew already +what had befallen. I had not seen the Lady, but I know that many +others of my race had done so, and ever before the coming to them +of somewhat great that was not always ill. But she never spoke to +them, but floated, white robed, over the mere, singing at times, or +silent. + +Now it came into my mind that the thrall was not so far wrong, and +that there was a chance that Gunnhild might have some hiding place +among those woods about the mere, for no man willingly searches +them, and Danes fear these places more than we, being heathenish +altogether. So I asked Brand if the Danes knew about the White +Lady. + +"Ay, master, they soon learned that. They call her 'Uldra', though +why I know not." + +That was the name of the water spirit they believed in. So I became +all the more sure that Gunnhild was there. It would be easy for her +to feign to be the White Lady and so terrify any man who sought +her. A man is apt to shape aught he sees into what he fears he may +see. + +"Has the White Lady been seen of late?" I asked therefore. + +"I have heard that the Danes say that they have seen her," he +answered. "They have seen also bale fires burning on the mound +where the great queen lies." + +That last was an old tale among us also, but I had never seen any +light above the great mound. Ottar had many sagas that told of the +fires that burnt, unearthly, above buried heroes, and the Danes +would watch for them, and so, as I have said, would certainly see +them, or deem that they did so. Yet I suppose that these strange +fires may have burnt on the tombs of heathen men, else would not +the tales have been told thereof so certainly. But Christian +warriors rest in peace, and about their last bed is no unquiet. Nor +may Christian folk be frighted by the bale fires of the long-ago +heathen's mounds. For their sakes they have been quenched, as I +think. + +So I stood and mused for a while, turning over in my mind how best +to find Gunnhild at the mere without leading others to her hiding +place. And at last I laughed to myself, the thing was so simple. I +had but to go into the mere woods at twilight or in the dusk, and +wander about until she heard and feared my coming. Then she would +play the White Lady's part on me to fray me away, and all was done. +She could not tell who I was, nor would she think it likely that I +would seek her there, and would easily forgive me for doing so, +when we met. + +I bade Brand the thrall goodnight, and went back into the great +room of the house, where Olaf sat with Ottar resting and talking +together. There was no one else in the place, for we had no fear of +aught, and Olaf cared not to have many men about him. Some of his +men would come presently and sleep across the doorway, but the +evening was young yet. + +"You seem as if you had heard somewhat pleasant," Olaf said when I +came in. + +I suppose that my certainty of finding Gunnhild and Hertha pleased +me well enough to make my face bright. + +Now both Olaf and Ottar knew of my wish to search for Hertha, and +who she was, for I had told them as we sailed to Maldon on the way +to my own country again, and they were eager to help me to take her +from hiding into what we thought would be greater safety. So when +the king said this, at first I thought of saying only that I had +surely found out where she was hidden. But then I would not keep +back what Ailwin had said, for Olaf might have advice for me. + +Therefore I sat down and told them all the story of my talks with +the priest and the thrall, adding that I was the more sure that +Gunnhild was hard by, because Ailwin had said that it was but +yesterday she had given him the message for me. + +Then Olaf said: + +"Cousin, I think these two old folk are right. Better wait for +peace, as they say." + +"It is not so sure that Cnut will come back," I said. + +"Is it not?" said Olaf. "Why--seeing that he has left his host of +thingmen in the towns, and we had Thorkel's foster brother to fight +but the other day, and that these Danes do not yield at once and so +gain peace and hold what they have, but will rather fight than own +Ethelred--I think that none can well doubt that word has gone round +the Danes in the kingdom that he will return, and that they need +not fear to hold out till he comes." + +Then the last doubt of trouble to come passed from me, for it was +plain that these thingmen looked for help presently. But Olaf was +thinking of my affairs again. + +"Four years is overlong for anyone to play ghost on a whole +countryside," he said laughing. "I cannot think that Gunnhild, even +if she be a witch, can have bided in sight of the village all this +time without being found." + +"No man dares go near the place," I said. + +"Well, whence has she her food unless from the village? I think she +cannot be so near," he replied, and there was reason in his +question. + +I was cast down at this, for I had made so sure that I had found +out the secret that was so carefully kept from me. When there is +mystery made, which is, or seems, needless, there is pleasure and a +feeling of mastery in finding it out unaided, and I was losing +that. + +I will say this, however, that I was more vexed in this way than +with the thought that I should not find Hertha, for in my own mind +I began already to own that Ailwin and Gunnhild were in the right +about our not meeting yet. + +Olaf saw that I was vexed now, and put forward a plan which he +thought would be pleasant to me, for he was certain that I should +not be satisfied until I had seen if I was right. + +"There is no reason why we should not go to the mere and see if +Gunnhild is there," he said. "If she is, maybe it will be well for +you to speak with her. And if not--why, then we know at least that +she has a good hiding place elsewhere." + +That was a plan that pleased me well, for though I had no fear of +going to that lonely place so long as I had made myself certain +that I should meet Gunnhild, now that it seemed not quite so sure +but that I should find myself alone there, the thought of the quest +was not quite so pleasant to me. + +"Then we may as well go at once," Olaf said. "How like you the +thought, Ottar?" + +"I like not such places, my king," the scald answered honestly. +"There are chills that come over one, and rising of the hair." + +"Aye, there are," answered Olaf. "I have a fear of this White Lady +myself. Therefore am I going with Redwald, because I want to see if +there is aught to be feared of." + +"I will come with you," the scald said, hardening his heart, for +his mind was full of the wild tales of the old heathen days which +he sang, and he feared more than we. + +"It is but a lady after all," said Olaf, laughing at Ottar's face. + +"I have a sort of fear of living ladies," the scald said, "how much +more, therefore, of their ghosts! I had rather meet Danes. For when +one sees them there comes a stiffening of back and knees and +fists--whereas--" + +"Aye, Redwald and I know somewhat of what you mean," laughed Olaf, +and then Ottar laughed, and we took our cloaks and were going, but +first must seek Rani, and tell him that we were now about to leave +the village for an hour or so. + +Now no man questioned Olaf as to his lonely walks, as I saw in +Normandy, and Rani said nought but: + +"Take your arms, for there may be wandering Danes about." + +But we were armed already, though without mail, and as we went not +far it seemed unlikely that we should need any. It was but a +half-hour's walk from the house. + +Now the mere lies on the south side of the river, which runs into +it only by a narrow inlet, and this inlet is so overshadowed by the +trees of the thick woodland that when one has passed through the +opening it is lost to sight very quickly. So heavy is the growth of +timber round the mere that one can see the water from no place, +save for a glimpse as this inlet is passed in going down the river, +and many a stranger has passed by all unknowing that such a mere +could be near him. Hardly can the wind reach the wide waters to +ruffle them even when a gale blows, and so the place is more +silent, and its terror falls more heavily on a man's mind. + +It was two hours after sunset when we started, but the fringe of +the woodland is but a mile and a half from the village, and we were +soon there. The night was bright enough, with a clear sky and stars +overhead, though there was no moon as yet. + +As we went Olaf was very cheerful, and railed pleasantly at Ottar +for his fears, while I said little, not knowing if I wanted to find +Gunnhild or not. + +But Ottar would not pretend to be braver than he felt, having no +shame in fear of things other than earthly, a matter wherein I +think that he was right. + +"Why," said the king, "if Dame Gunnhild tries to fray us, do you +but turn that cloak of yours inside out, and you will frighten +her"--for it chanced that the scald's red cloak had a white woollen +lining, whereof he was somewhat proud, being a lover of bright +dress. + +"It is ill to mock a spirit," the scald said; "wherefore do I +believe the less that a Wise Woman will bide in the place that it +haunts." + +So they talked until we came to the woodland; and when we came +among the trees a silence fell on us. + +"It is of no use," I said, "let us go back. You are right, and she +cannot bide here." + +"Why, now that I have got over my fear so far," Olaf said, "I will +go on, even to the water's edge. Then will we go back." + +I could not gainsay him, as may be known, and so we went on. It was +easy at first to thread our way through the trees, but presently +they were thicker, and it was dark. There was no wind moving in the +boughs overhead, and there is no denying that the silence of that +deserted place weighed heavily on us all. + +And when we drew close to the water's edge, and saw the still +water, starlit, stretching before us, a water hen sprang from the +reeds almost at our feet with her shrill warning cry, and flapped +out into the middle of the dark mere, leaving a long trail of +broken water behind her that gleamed for a moment with dancing star +sparks from the sky, as if it might have been the path of the White +Lady herself. And from all round the lake came the answering cries +of her mates, sounding weird and strange through the silent gloom. +I heard Ottar draw a deep breath, and we all three started, and +stood still, as if turned to stone. + +"We have taken fright easily," said Olaf, as if angry with himself +for being thus startled. "My heart beats like a hammer, and I will +bide here till I can do better than that." + +Yet he spoke in a whisper; and I saw no reason to try to answer him +if I could. Then he walked on, keeping to the right, where the +ground is high, at the hill foot, but still skirting the water's +edge. Then I saw something beside the reeds, and went aside to see +what it was; and, as I thought, it was a canoe that some fisher had +left. There was a paddle still in it, and a bow net set on hoops, +such as we were wont to use for eels and tench. + +"Here is how Gunnhild might find food," I thought, but it was not +likely. + +Ottar stood and looked into it with me, but the king had walked on. + +Now it grew darker as we followed him, and Ottar tripped and fell, +and I lost him, though I could hear him close behind me as he broke +a branch now and then in passing. + +The king stayed in a clear place that I remembered well. Great +trees stood round, and it was pleasant to sit there and look out +over the water on a summers noonday. + +"Where is Ottar?" he said, when I stood by him. + +"Close behind me. I heard him even now," I answered. "Let us go +back, my king. There is nought here." + +"Aye, we will go back now," he said. "But Ottar is before me." + +"Listen," I said, "the scald is behind us. I lost him in the dark." + +"Nay, but I heard him in front of me even as you came," the king +said. + +And when we stood still we could hear the scald where I thought; +but also we heard footsteps and breaking branches before us. + +We could see anything that was not in shadow pretty plainly; and +now Olaf whispered to me: + +"Someone is forward, and coming nearer. Get your sword loose." + +At that there came a cry like the moor hen's from the thicket +before us, and in a moment, with a great shout and crashing, there +broke out on us many men, and I was down and held fast before I +could draw on them. I saw Olaf draw the long dagger that hung ready +to his right hand, and smite backwards over his shoulder in the +face of a man who was pinioning him from behind, and the man +shrieked and reeled backward into the bushes, hands to face. And +then Olaf cried, "We are beset," and was borne down. + +Then the men tied us roughly with belts, and stood round us. + +I looked every moment to see the rush of Ottar into the midst, +sword in hand; and saw that it would go hard with him, for all the +men were armed, and some wore mail that rattled as they moved. But +he came not; and I wondered if he too were taken, or if he had +turned craven and had fled, a thought that I put from me as sorely +wronging the brave scald; and then wondered how long it would take +him to reach the nearest outpost of our men and come to rescue us. + +But now one was hammering flint on steel and making a fire in haste +that he might see who they had caught. And when it blazed up I saw +that the men were Danes. No doubt they were strangers to the place, +men who had wandered here from the Leavenheath woods after the +battle; for no Dane who came from close at hand would have dared to +shelter in this place. There were fourteen of them in all. + +"Ho," said one who seemed to take the lead, "we have trapped some +gay birds. Now, who might you be?" + +He spoke to Olaf, who answered nothing. So the man turned to me +with the same question. But I followed the king's plan and made no +answer. Whereat the man kicked me, saying: + +"Answer, you Norway rat!" + +I ground my teeth with rage, and said nothing. + +"Fetch the English churl, and ask him if he knows who these are," +said the Dane. "Then shall we see if this is a question of drowning +or ransom." + +Two of tho men went back into the woods, and presently returned, +dragging with them my thrall Brand, whose teeth chattered with +terror, more of the place than of the Danes as it seemed, for he +kept his eyes on the mere. + +When he saw me I shook my head ever so little in token that he +should not own us. If Olaf thought best we could do that for +ourselves. + +Then they cuffed the poor thrall, and asked him if he knew us; and +for answer he did but point out over the mere, whose waters looked +black as ink beyond the fire lit circle of trees and shore. + +"Let us go hence, lord Danes," he said trembling, "then will I say +what I can. The Lady is wroth with men who come here at night." + +"We care for no ladies," said the leading Dane. "What are you +feared of?" + +"The White Lady who dwells in the mere. To look on her in her wrath +is death," Brand said--and one might well see that his terror was +real. + +The Danes looked on one another, and there were white faces among +them. Then, as luck would have it, one said: + +"This must be the mere of which I have heard strange tales. Let us +go," and he began to edge away towards the fire. + +Then the leader said: + +"Let us find out if these men are worth taking with us," and he +came and questioned us again, and again we answered not. + +"I will make you speak," he said savagely. "Take them up and make +ready to cast them into the water." + +Now I wondered where Ottar was. Surely he must be back with more +men soon. + +"Aye, throw them in, and let us be going," said one or two, for +they had been asking Brand many questions, and now were eager to +leave the place and its terrors. + +So one brawny Dane took my feet and another my shoulders and began +to lift me; while I could not so much as struggle, so tightly was I +bound. + +"Hold!" said the leader. "Will you throw away a sword like that?" + +It was certain now that they were in haste, for they had forgotten +to strip me in their wish to have done. + +They set me down again, and that was the saving of us. For even as +they loosed their grip on me, one who stood near the water cried +out in a sharp voice: + +"Listen--what is that!" + +And they all stayed motionless as had we when the bird scared us. + +There was a sound of wondrously sweet singing from away across the +mere. Such a voice it was as I had never heard before, neither like +the singing of man or woman, nor had the song words that I could +catch. + +The Danes forgot us as they heard that, and huddled together in +twos and threes, looking out to whence the sound came. As for Brand +the thrall, he fell on his knees and hid his face against a tree +trunk, crying faintly: + +"It is the White Lady." + +So too thought I; and now I will not say that I feared her, for she +was of my own race, and maybe she came to my help. + +Then I saw some of the Danes gasp and start, and point across the +water, speechless, and I looked also. + +Plain enough in the firelight stood a tall white figure on the +water of the mere, coming slowly towards us, and singing the while +that wondrous song. And ever as it drew nearer the song grew +wilder; and the long white-robed arm pointed towards us. + +Then the thrall leapt up and yelled, and fled into the dark wood. +And that was enough for the Danes. They gave not another thought to +us, but cried out in mortal terror and fled also, tripping and +crashing through the underwood as they went; while the song of the +White Lady grew louder, and she still neared us. + +Then, still singing, her pace quickened, and suddenly I saw that +she came in no magic wise, but in the fisher's canoe which I had +seen. And then the bows touched the shore, while with a wholesome +clank of sword, and throwing back his long white cloak, Ottar the +scald leapt ashore and came to us, dagger in hand, and cut our +bonds. + +"Into the boat, lord king--quick!" he said. "We shall be safe +there." + +Dazed and stiff I was, but I rose and followed Olaf; then Ottar +pushed off, and we shot out towards the midst of the mere into +safety. + +Then the king stared at me and at Ottar for a moment in amazement, +and then laughed until the woods rang again, and I and the scald +were fain to join him. Never had I heard such sounds before in that +haunted place. + +"Now, Ottar," he said, when he could speak again, "never say more +that you fear troll, or nix, or ghost--for you have done what you +told me but half an hour ago was most unwise." + +"I needs must do somewhat, lord king," said Ottar gravely, "and it +came into my mind that these Danes would be as badly scared as +should I have been had I met Gunnhild; and methought that Redwald's +lady would forgive me for his sake." + +"Aye, surely," I said. + +Then--was it fancy, or a vision wrought on me by long looking at +Ottar as he came across the red track of the firelight on the +water, still dimpled by the boat, glided the white form of no +earthly maiden, and was gone. + +I saw it and said nought. Ottar sat in the stern facing us, and his +eyes were away from the fire, and Olaf was beside me, and I thought +that he started. + +Then Ottar said: + +"Can we go back by water, Redwald? It would be safer." + +I showed him the channel which leads to the river, and he took the +paddle with which he had so deftly sculled the boat across the +mere, and as we left the overhanging trees and saw the faint glow +of the rising moon across the open river we breathed more freely, +and were safe. + +Surely had it not been for the scald's ready wit both Olaf and I +had been lying even now in the dark mere. For it would have been +death to us all three had Ottar tried to rescue us sword in hand. +It is his saying that he was so frozen with fear at first--until he +knew we had met with mortals only--that he stood still and +helpless, listening. Then came to him the thought of what to do, +when he heard the talk of either ransom or drowning and knew that +we were not slain. So even as Olaf had bidden him in jest, he had +turned his cloak and had saved us. + +But Ottar the scald's courage and craft are well known, and I have +other thoughts concerning his fear. But I know this, that never +again could he find that strange and sweet voice that had come to +him in the need of his master. + +Brand the thrall cowered in the house porch when we returned, and +he was pale as a sheet, while his knees trembled even yet. We took +him in and gave him wine and meat, and then asked him how the Danes +got hold of him. + +"Master," he said, "they caught me but a little while after I had +left you--as I set snares for rabbits on the hill. I let them come +to me, thinking them some of the king's men who are kindly. Then +they said they needed a guide through the country to the sea, and +kept me with them." + +Then Olaf said to him: + +"No ill will come of this seeing of the White Lady, for she came to +save Redwald your lord; you may sleep in peace therefore, but it +would be unlucky to say that you saw her." + +Then the man said that he would not speak of the matter, and it was +plain that he dared not do so. But he went away cheerfully enough, +with his mind at rest from its fears. + +"It would be ill luck for me if Rani heard of this," said Olaf, +looking ruefully at us; "for we cannot deny that he warned us. My +foster father loves rating a king now and then, though it be only a +small one like myself." + +So we said nought that night, and none asked where we had been. Now +I slept next to Olaf, and in the night I woke with a new terror on +me, and I put my hand on his and woke him. + +"My king," I whispered, "what if Gunnhild and Hertha are indeed in +the woods yonder? These Danes will have found them." + +The king was silent for a moment, for the fear that my guess as to +their hiding place might be right came to him also before he gave +the matter thought. + +"It is not likely. The thought of danger makes it seem possible +again," he said. "But I like not these prowling Danes--they are +looking for hiding places for themselves." + +"She was safe before," I said, but a great fear came to me with his +words. + +There had been nought to drive the Danes to seek sheltered spots +before, now they were sure to do so. + +"This matter is not in our hands," said the king, when I said as +much. "We can do nought. Pray, therefore, and sleep again. I think +that you need fear little." + +Then after a while he spoke once more. + +"Redwald, saw you aught upon the mere while we sat in the canoe in +its midst?" + +"Aye, my king," I answered, knowing what he meant. + +"I saw her also," he said. + +So it had been no fancy of mine, but the White Lady of our house +had indeed passed before my eyes. I began to wonder if this +portended aught to me, but soon I thought that it did not, for the +like peril in which I had been, and even then had hardly escaped +from, had not befallen any of my kin, as I was in peril at her own +place, which was a new thing. So I judged that she showed her +thought of us only. + +In the morning matters fell out so that we had never need to say +what danger we had run. For the men had seen Brand's plight, which +was pitiful, after Danes and thickets had done their work on him, +and told Olaf that the man had met with and escaped Danes from the +mere woods. + +So with twenty men we searched those covers in broad daylight, and +found no token of any dwellers in the place. Nor were any Danes +left, save one, and that was the man whom Olaf had smitten, for he +had died. The embers of the fire were near him, and on the bank lay +the severed belts that had bound us. + +"These Danes have fought among themselves," said our men, and hove +the body into the water. So the Dane lies there instead of Olaf the +king and me, with the Welshmen whom my heathen forefathers cast +into the black depths, in revenge for the death of the White Lady. + +Now when we came back to Bures there was a tired horse standing by +the house door, and in the hall waited a messenger from Colchester, +and he brought the news that we looked for and yet feared, so that +we had hoped against hope that it would not come. + +A Frisian trader had put into the Colchester river, and he brought +word that even now Cnut might be taking the sea for England, for in +all the western havens of Denmark was gathered such a mighty host +and fleet that no man had ever known the like, and he had heard +that the day for sailing would soon come. + +Then Olaf made no delay but rode to Colchester to see this +shipmaster and speak with him, for he thought that he might find +out from him what point on our coasts would be that at which Cnut +aimed first. + +So Gunnhild and Olaf were right, and the little peace we had had +was to end. Now would come the last struggle of English and Dane +for mastery in our land, and in my heart I wished that we had such +a king as Olaf Haraldsson. For it seemed to me that we were not +ready, though we had had a year and more in which to prepare. + + + +Chapter 9: The Treachery Of Edric Streone. + + +When Olaf had gone I sought out Father Ailwin, for the danger that +I had seen for Hertha lay heavily on my mind, and now also I would +tell him of the certainty of coming warfare, asking him what he and +Gunnhild would do. So I went to the place where one might be sure +to find him during the last two days, and that was in the +churchyard, where our people and Olaf's men were working together +to raise for him a little wattled chapel among the ruins, that +should serve at least until I could return and build the church +anew. + +It was a sore grief to me that the old one was gone, for in it had +been crowned Eadmund the Holy, and it was rich with his gifts. And +our hall had been the first house in which he had feasted as +crowned king, so that we call the lane from church to hilltop St. +Eadmund's Lane since he rode along it in all the pomp of that high +festival after he left the altar. Only the ruins of God's house and +man's abode were there now, but the lane was bright with the +flowers that the good king loved, and the nightingale sang in the +wooded banks even as when he listened to it in the old days. We had +always these things to mind us of the martyr. + +But Ailwin was not with the men, though he had been foremost in +working and planning with them. Nor had any of them seen him that +day. + +So I waited for a little while and watched the work, wondering if I +should live now to do all that I would in making new the place. And +then as I walked to look across the bridge I passed a heap of earth +that the men had thrown out for the place of a post, and I saw +somewhat glittering in it, and stooped and took it up. + +It was a silver penny, and when I rubbed the earth from it, I knew +that it was one of Eadmund's, mint new and fresh as on the day when +he stood in his robes and crown, even where I stood in the place of +the old porch, while the people shouted and scrambled and fought in +glee for the largess he threw among them. Doubtless this had been +so thrown and had been trodden under foot and lost. + +Now it came into my hands even when my thoughts were most troubled, +and to me it seemed as a sign that I should surely return to the +place that the saint had loved. I was greatly cheered thereat, for +as I waited for Olaf to return I saw as it were the long hope of +home and peace dashed from me, and the pain of the coming war grew +plainer than I had known it in Ethelred's court. The old love of +home had waked in me as I wandered in the places of my boyhood, and +for the first time I learned the aching of the hearts of those who +had known more of home than I, and would lose it. + +But I was young, and it needed but a little thing to turn my +thoughts, so this token as I say helped me to banish them. What +might not Eadmund the Saint, who slew Swein to save his shrine from +heathen hands, be able to do for me? + +I would tell Ailwin presently, and ask him what vow I should make +in return for this remembrance. + +But Ailwin came not, and I grew impatient, and went to the cottage +where he dwelt as the leech, at the head of the little street +towards our hall. Maybe he would be there. + +The door was open, and the little black cat that had been the +leech's in the old days, and would not leave its house, sat in the +sun on the step. I went inside and called, but there was no man. +And then a footstep came from the road and in at the wicket, and a +strange priest, younger than Ailwin, and frocked and cowled came +in. + +He saluted me gravely, and I bowed to him, and then he asked me +where Redwald the thane might be found. + +"I am he, father," I said. + +"Then I have a message to you from Ailwin, your priest, whose place +I am sent to take for a time." + +"This is his house, father," I answered. "Let us come in and hear +what he would tell me." + +So we sat down inside the one room on the bench across the wall, +and I wondered what I should hear. + +"I will give my message first," the priest said, "and afterwards +you shall tell me Ailwin's ways with your people, and I will try to +be as himself with them." + +I laughed a little, though I was pleased, and answered: + +"You cannot do that, father--for he has christened everyone in the +parish that is thirty years younger than he. + +"Aye, I forgot that," the priest said gravely. "They will miss him +sorely. Therefore I will say that he will return ere long, but that +my ways must be borne with until he comes." + +"Now I think that if you steer between those two sayings of yours +you will do well," I answered. + +"Ailwin's ways wrought in my manner, therefore. I thank you, +thane," the priest said. "I am cloister bred, and know nought much +of secular work. Now, that is enough about myself. This morning, +very early, came Ailwin and asked for one to take his place, and I +am a Dane of the old settlement, and so I came, as running less +risk if Cnut returns, as they say he will. Then Ailwin bade me seek +you and say this. That because of the wandering Danes he would take +his charges into some more quiet place for a time at least. Truly, +he bade me tell you, they have a last refuge where none would find +them, but it is ill fitted for a long stay, and it is likely that +once there it might now be months before they could leave it. So he +and Gunnhild think best to go far off. They will return with peace, +and then he bids me tell you that, if the Lord will, all shall be +well." + +"Where will he go?" I asked. + +"I know not. He gave me the message, and I know no more. Not even +of whom he speaks." + +Now for a moment I grew angry with Ailwin again, for it seemed to +me that I should have been told more than this. Then I thought that +perhaps Ailwin himself knew not yet where he would go. + +"Does Ailwin know that there is news from Denmark?" I asked. + +"Our abbot told him, but he knew already, having had word from +Colchester in some way. He had heard before we as it seems." + +That was doubtless Gunnhild's work, for I came to know afterwards +that in the long years of trouble she had made a chain of friends +who would pass word to her from every point whence trouble would +come. It seems to me that much of the dame's knowledge of coming +events was gained in ways like this rather than by witchcraft. + +Then I was glad that the danger that I had learned had been +foreseen by her and Ailwin; and as I sat without speaking for a few +minutes I felt that now I was free to follow Olaf where he would +lead his men to meet the Danes, for Hertha was not here, and her I +could follow no longer. + +There was no more to be learned from the priest, and so we rose up +and went down to the churchyard, and saw the work, and I told him +what I could of Ailwin and his ways, and thought that he had found +one who was like him in thought and gentleness. + +So presently I took Eadmund's penny from my pouch and gave it to +him, telling him about it, even as I would have told Ailwin. + +"Give me this back when I return, father," I said, "and it shall +remind me of some vow which I will make at your advice." + +"Make no vows, my son, save this one," he said. "What will befall +you we know not, and therefore there is but one vow which we know +certainly that you may be able to keep. I will have you put the +penny where you may see it often, and so you shall remember, and +vow if you will, that when your eyes fall on it you shall say a +prayer to Him who gave power to Eadmund to conquer in dying, for +this home of yours and this church, that out of ruin may come +beauty, and after war, peace." + +"I will make that vow, father," I said gladly. + +"Forget not me at times in the prayer," he said very humbly; and I +promised that I would not, taking the penny back. + +Then he went and began to work on the church, being plainly skilful +in the matter, and I went up to our hall's ruins and looked out +over the land, and planned again what I would do in the days to +come. + +It was long dark when Olaf rode back, and he had learnt but little. +But he had sent messengers to Ulfkytel at Thetford to warn him to +watch his coasts, for he must go back to London with the ships to +guard the Thames. + +"And you, Redwald, my cousin, must go to Ethelred or Eadmund and +warn them, and make them rouse, and raise and have ready the +mightiest levy that they have ever led, for I think that all +Denmark and Norway have sent their best to follow Cnut. We will +ride together to Maldon, for the men shall follow me and find the +ships with their cables up-and-down waiting for them, and you must +hasten, for no time must be lost." + +So it came to pass that my dream of finding Hertha passed from me, +and the thought of war filled my mind again, for next morning we +rode away southward along the Roman road, and the cheers of the +villagers died away behind me and were forgotten. + +Then I left Olaf where the road turns off to Maldon, to meet him +again in London before many days, and I and my fifty men rode on. +For Olaf would have me go as befitted his kinsman, and a word to +the Colchester elders had found me the well-armed and mounted +Anglian warriors who joined us after we reached the great road. + +But when I came to London my journey was not at an end. Ethelred +the king was at Corsham, in Wiltshire, and sorely sick as was said, +and Eadmund was at Stamford. Now when I heard that I wondered, and +asked the Sheriff, at whose house I was made most welcome, how this +was. + +Eadmund had been with his father, and had gone to Malmsbury, and +there had seen the Lady Algitha, the widow of Earl Sigeferth whom +Edric Streone slew, and had married her, and now had gone to take +over the Five Boroughs for himself. That was good hearing, maybe, +for Olaf had feared that Streone would have taken them. + +But next I found that this marriage was sorely against the king's +will, and that he and Eadmund had parted in anger therefore. I +seemed then to see the hand of Streone in this quarrel, for all men +knew that he slew the earls to gain the Five Boroughs for his own. + +Then I thought that to go so far into Wessex to seek the sick king +would be but lost time. I had better go to Stamford and seek the +Atheling, and maybe it would be as well that he was free to act by +himself, seeing that need was urgent. So I lay but one night in +London, and then rode away to Stamford along the great Ermin +Street, and there I found Eadmund and told him all that Olaf had +bidden me. + +And when he had heard all, he said: + +"Let me send for Edric Streone, my foster father, and we will take +counsel with him." + +"Send round the war arrow first, my prince," I urged, "then when +the earl comes no time will be lost. He cannot but counsel you to +raise men instantly." + +"Why," he said, "Cnut can but fall on the east coast. Utred is in +Northumbria to guard the Humber, and Ulfkytel guards the Wash, and +Olaf is in the Thames. They will drive away the Danes before they +set foot on the beach." + +"They are still fighting the thingmen in the towns," I said. +"Northumbria and Anglia are Danish at heart yet." + +Aye, and I might have added "Mercia also," but I knew not that yet. +Eadmund should have known it, though. It was but a few weeks before +it was plain that Wessex alone and London stood fast for Ethelred. + +I chafed, but Eadmund would not be hurried. I cannot tell what +strange blindness, save it was his trust in Streone, had fallen on +him at this time. + +Then the earl came from Nottingham, and at the very first he sent +for me. Eadmund had told him my news when he sent for him. + +I found him alone in a chamber of Eadmund's house--that which had +been Sigeferth's, and it seemed that no memory of the murdered earl +haunted him. His great form was as square and strong as ever, and +his grizzled brown beard was as bushy and well cared for as when I +used to see him and speak with him before the flight into Normandy. +And he still had the same pleasant voice and ways, even to the +little chuckle--as to himself--when he spoke, and the way he had of +gazing on the rafters rather than at the man to whom he was +talking. + +"So, Redwald, my friend," he laughed, "you have turned viking as it +seems! How have you fared in East Anglia with Olaf the Thick?" + +"Well enough, lord earl," I said, "but there is work to be done +there yet." + +"Aha! those thingmen are no babes," he said. "Where is your earl +now?" + +"At Thetford, as they say." + +"Well, what is this tale that you bring about Cnut?" + +I told him, and he laughed in his way. + +"Cnut is but a boy. No such great following would gather to him," +he said. "It is not possible." + +"Eirik and Ulf and Thorkel the jarls may gather them for Cnut," I +answered. "And he is Swein's son." + +"Those men are Cnut as yet, as one may say," answered Edric +chuckling. "One has to deal with them therefore. What says Olaf?" + +"He says the same, lord earl." + +Then he turned sharply towards me, though he did not look at me, +and said: + +"The king does not trust Olaf, I fear. He thinks that he might be +won over to Cnut's side." + +"Ethelred our king should have no mistrust of the man who brought +him home," I said coldly, having no doubt who made the first +jealousy of Olaf. + +"He should not, in truth," Edric answered. "But what if Cnut +offered Olaf the under-kingship of Norway, or Northumbria say, if +he would go over to his side?" + +"He would not take it," I said. + +"Have you ever heard him say as much?" asked Edric in a careless +way. + +I was growing angry now, for this seemed beside the point. + +"Such a thing has never been spoken of between us," I said. + +"So. Then ask him the question one day, and see what his answer +is." + +"I can answer it now," I said hotly; "he would refuse. Nor will the +offer ever be made." + +"I am not so sure of that," said Edric. "Cnut needs help, and will +bid high for it. Nay, I know that it will be made. We have our +spies in Cnut's court, Redwald, and know more than you may think. +Tell him, therefore, only what I have said to you, and let me know +his answer by someone whom you can trust." + +Then I rose up in my anger, and said: + +"You ask me to spy on the king, lord earl, and I will not do it." + +"Nay, nay," he said. "I do but want to set our king's mind at rest. +I know what the honest viking's answer would be; he would be as +wroth as you. Only I would have sure word to send to Ethelred." + +Then I said, while Edric watched me sidelong: + +"Olaf's force is small, and our levies, lord earl, should be enough +without his help, if they are raised in time. Our king may be sure +that Olaf has not sent me to raise England thus against himself." + +"Aye, I will tell Ethelred so. Our king is very sick, and a sick +man's fancies are many. So Olaf thinks that we should raise a great +levy at once." + +Then he spoke of nought but that, and so earnestly that I believed +that the summons to the sheriffs would surely go out that night. +And he spoke of the help of the ships that Olaf had gathered, +praising him honestly, and not over much or too little, so that I +forgot his doubtful speeches, and thought that all was well, and +that his own levies were now gathering. + +And so after an hour or more's talk he rose up and held out his +hand. + +"Many thanks, Redwald, for your pains," he said taking mine. "I +think that Cnut and his jarls will have lost their journey through +your coming hither. The king shall not forget you when all is safe +again." + +Who would not have been pleased with this? I went from Streone's +presence with a light heart, until I came to the great hall, and +there sat in the high place the Lady Algitha herself and her +maidens. Very beautiful she was, but very sad looking. And when I +crossed the floor before her I bowed, and she beckoned to me. + +So I came near, and knelt on one knee before her. + +"You are Redwald, Olaf's kinsman and messenger?" she asked. + +"Yes, lady," I answered. + +"I have heard of your coming. Have you spoken with the +earl--Streone?" she said, while a wrinkle crossed her fair forehead +as she named him. + +"I have but just left him, lady." + +She sunk her voice very low, and bent a little towards me. + +"Were his words pleasant and fair spoken?" she said. + +"They could not have been more so--at the last," I replied, the +memory of my anger coming back to me of a sudden. + +"You crossed him once, then?" + +"But a little; he crossed me rather," I said plainly. + +"Wear your mail, Redwald," she said whisperingly. "Farewell." + +Then she was once more herself again, the lady whose hand I might +kiss reverently and look at afar. But in those few moments she had +been as a friend who warned me of a danger unforeseen. Even thus +had Edric Streone spoken with Sigeferth, fairly and pleasantly. + +I left the house, feeling uneasy therefore; but I could not think +that Edric would deem me worth crushing, and it seemed that the +lady would let her hatred of Edric go far. + +They had given me lodging in the town across the river, where there +was a large guest house that had been made in the days of +OEthelfloed {11}, the brave lady of the Mercians who won back +the Five Boroughs from the Danes. One could see the great fort she +made rising from the river banks over the whole town. No other +thane was in guest quarters there with me, and I and my men had the +place to ourselves. Nor was there anyone in Stamford at the time +whom I knew, apart from the people of Eadmund's household. + +So I went along the street slowly enough, and presently I passed a +house where through the open window I saw a goldsmith working, and +I thought that he could do somewhat for me. I would have the penny +of St. Eadmund set in a gold band on the scabbard of sword Foe's +Bane, where I should see it continually. There was much gilt silver +work over all the scabbard from end to end--wrought by what skilful +artists in the Norseland, or how long ago, I cannot tell--and there +was a place among the other work where such a fitting would go +well. + +But I had placed the coin in safety in the house, and I must go and +fetch it, and I passed on for the time. Then I loitered on the +bridge, for the old town and its grim earthworks looks very fair +thence, and so a thane sent from Eadmund caught me up and took me +back to the great house, for he had some word for me. It was near +sunset by this time. + +"Redwald, my friend," the Atheling said, when I stood before him, +"I would have you go back to Olaf. You have done your errand well, +and your kinsman will want to have you with him. You will fight for +us no less well with him than here." + +Now I could speak plainly with the Atheling ever, and I said, being +anxious to know more of Streone's meanings: + +"I am glad that you tell me so, my prince, for Edric the earl would +have it that our king fears that Olaf's good faith may be little." + +"That is new to me," Eadmund said, frowning; "but, as you know, my +father and I have had little to say to each other of late." + +"Then you doubt him not?" I asked. + +"I would as soon doubt Edric himself," he said, "and him I trust as +I would trust myself." + +"That is well," answered I. "For I feared that you also might have +been doubtful of Olaf." + +"Why, what should the king think of Olaf but that he has been his +best friend?" + +"The earl tells me that he has heard that Cnut will offer Olaf some +under-kingship if he will take his part," I said. + +"I cannot tell how he has heard that," Eadmund said, and he looked +puzzled. + +"By your spies in Cnut's court," said I. + +"We have no spies there. I hate spying," the Atheling said. "What +means he?" + +Then I saw that for some reason which was beyond me Streone had let +me know more than was safe. It was plain that if he spoke truth, he +had more dealings with Cnut than were known to the Atheling. Yet +the earl might, for Ethelred's sake, watch thus on Cnut, rightly +enough, and think it safer to say nought to Eadmund, whose wisdom +was not so great as his valour. It was a poor watch enough though, +I thought, if he knew the talk about Olaf and not the plans for +sailing, which should surely have been told him first of all. + +"Maybe he minded him of some old plan of Cnut's that he heard when +you were in Lindsey," I said, that being all that I could imagine. +"That were enough to return to the mind of our king in his +sickness, and trouble him." + +"Aye, I think my father fears treachery from all men," the Atheling +answered. "But Olaf has done well for us both at the first and now +in sending word by you." + +Then the sword I was wearing caught Eadmund's eyes, for he was ever +fond of goodly war gear. + +"So--you have a new sword instead of that I gave you," he said. +"And I think you have made a good exchange. Let me see this." + +"I broke the other blade strangely enough," I told him. "But this +was my father's sword, and it has come back to me." + +Now I must tell him all about our great fight, and at the end he +said: + +"I would that I had been there. It was a good fight." Then he +laughed, and added: "Now, I will say this, that Streone noted this +fine sword of yours, and wondered who had given it you, and why." + +"Did he think that Cnut had bribed me also?" I said. "Such a sword +as this is to a simple thane as much as a petty kingdom to Olaf." + +Then Eadmund spoke in the old tone of comradeship that we had been +wont to use in Normandy. + +"On my word, I believe he did! But you have often spoken to me of +this sword, and you described it well. I think had I found it on a +Dane I should have claimed it for you. But I never thought you +would see it again." + +"Would you have believed that I was bribed, my prince, had it not +chanced that you had heard of the sword from me beforetime?" I +asked, being bitterly hurt that the earl should have put this into +Eadmund's mind. + +Did he want to make him doubt all his former friends? + +"Not I, Redwald," the Atheling said. "Streone is over careful for +our safety, I think, and lets his love for us make him suspect all +men. I told him as much, and he said that perhaps it was so. Then I +said that Olaf had doubtless given you the weapon, and he would +have me ask you. He thought that you should not have lightly set +aside my gift." + +Now I was sure that the earl strove to break Eadmund's friendship +with Olaf, for to anger me would help to do so. The next thing +would be to have me made away with, for that would turn Olaf into a +foe, and he would leave England maybe. I thought that the earl +would stand alone in Eadmund's counsels, and did not dream yet that +he was indeed working for Cnut in order to take the first place in +England as Thorkel did in Denmark. But that was plain enough ere +long, and all men know it now. At this time, however, these matters +puzzled me, and had it not been for the slaying of Sigeferth and +Morcar and one or two others, maybe I should have thought little of +danger to myself. It was only as Olaf's kinsman that I was worth a +thought of the man whose deep statecraft I could not pretend to +understand. + +So I said: + +"The earl's life must be uneasy with all these doubts. But so long +as you yourself have none of King Olaf and myself, it is little +matter what he thinks. His doubts will be proved false in time, and +he will have fretted for nought." + +"That is true," Eadmund answered. "I would that he troubled me not +with his suspicions." + +So the matter passed, and we spoke for a little while of the fleet +and of Olaf's plans, and then I left him, saying that I would ride +back to London with the first light of morning. + +"We shall have one good fight, and then peace," said Eadmund. +"Farewell, and trouble nought about my foster father and his ways +of doubting. He will doubt me next, maybe." + +He laughed lightly, and I went away down the street with a troubled +mind, and was willing to get back to my lodgings through the dusk +as quickly as I might. + +And when I came there I put on my mail, as the lady had bidden +me--rather blaming myself for doing so for all that, for it seemed +to show fear of somewhat that I could not name. + +Then I thought of the goldsmith again, and sent a man for him, +thinking that he could do the work here in hall, so that I could be +sure of having the scabbard, which was very valuable, when I rode +away. + +When he came I showed him what I would have done, and he said that +it was no long business, and took his tools into a corner and +lighted a wax taper and began to work by its light. The sword stood +by my chair as I ate my supper at the head of the long tables where +my men sat. + +The goldsmith ended his work soon after the men had gone out to the +stables to tend their horses for the night, and only he and I and +my headman Thrand were left in the hall. He had put a flat band of +chased gold round the scabbard, and the silver penny showed through +a round setting that was in it. + +I gave him one of the gold pieces that Earl Wulfnoth had taken from +the treasure for me, and the man weighed it, wondering at its +weight and fineness. Then he said that he was overpaid, and must +give me money for the overweight, and asked that one should go back +to his house with him and return with it. + +"There were men lurking in the porches and on the bridge," he said, +"when I came down here. I suppose there will be a fray when they +meet the men they wait for, so I fear to go back alone. A goldsmith +is ever fair prey." + +Then came a knocking on the door, and my man went to see what was +wanted. Then one said to him: + +"Edric the earl bids Redwald the thane to speak with him at his +house before he sleeps." + +Now the goldsmith stood where he could see the long streak of light +that shone from the door across the street, and he said to me in a +low voice: + +"There are a dozen armed men outside, lord." + +Thrand turned round to tell me this message, and as he did so +Streone's messenger pushed by him into the hail, rudely enough. + +"To the stables and call my men," I whispered to the goldsmith, +pointing to the door which led thither, and he went out slowly, not +knowing why I sent him. + +"Where is Redwald, Olaf's man?" the newcomer said, and his tone was +so rough that at the uncivil words I glanced at him sharply and +made no answer. He was fully armed, I saw. + +But my follower would not bear this. + +"Yonder is Redwald the thane," he said; "mind how you speak, man." + +"Thane or not, I have come to take him to Edric the earl," was the +answer. + +"Ho, thane! hear you the earl's message?" + +Now when this began, I had taken up the scabbard with my right hand +and was looking at the work, and the sword was in my left, hidden +by my cloak as it fell to my side. I suppose the earl's housecarle +thought I was unarmed. + +"I am Redwald," I said, putting the scabbard on the table, and so +leaving my right hand free. "I hear an uncivilly-given message +enough. And I think the earl has not sent for me in such terms as +those." + +The man raised his hand a little and made a sign, and I heard the +quick steps of men crossing the street with clatter of steel. Then +I knew that Edric had sent for me, dead or alive. + +"Come you must," the man said. + +"What if I will not?" I answered. + +"I will make you," he said, and with that he smote Thrand fairly in +the face and felled him, hitting squarely from his left shoulder, +and then his sword was out and he made one step towards me. + +Quick as thought I grasped the hilt of my sword, and smote upwards +with it as I drew it from under the fold of my cloak. There is no +stopping that stroke, and the man leapt back from it as it seemed, +but the blade smote him beneath the chin, and so far as he was +concerned Edric's message had come to naught. He would never draw +sword on any man again. Nor do I think he would have been thus bold +had he not thought me unarmed. + +Then at the same moment my man was up, cursing, and the doorway to +the street was full of Edric's men, and some of mine were coming +leisurely through the other. + +The crash of the falling man woke my people into life, and they ran +to their spears, which were piled along the walls, and the earl's +men faltered on the threshold, for they liked not the look of sword +Foe's Bane, maybe. Then my man Thrand ran at the great door, which +opened inward, and swung it to in the faces of Edric's men, and +barred it. I heard them give a howl of rage as he did so, for one +or two of them were flung backward into the street, so suddenly and +strongly did he fling it against them in his rage. + +Then we looked at one another, and at the dead man on the floor, in +silence. I was the only one of all who knew what this message +brought by armed men from Streone might mean. And all had happened +so suddenly, from the time that the man had told me that I must +come, and had drawn sword on me, to when the door slammed, that +there had been no time for thought or wonder even. + +I took up the scabbard and buckled it on, and sheathed the sword, +and said: + +"We shall hear more of this, men. Stamford town is no place for us +now." + +"What is all this, lord?" asked the leader, who stood with his back +against the door still. + +"Edric the earl has another business on hand like that of Earls +Sigeferth and Morcar," I said. Whereat the men growled fiercely. + +The goldsmith came in with the last of my men, and heard me say +this, and now looked in the face of him whom I had slain. + +"This is the man who brought the like message to our earls," he +said. "I was at Oxford, and saw him come. And the street then was +full of armed men, as is ours tonight. Better go hence, lord, else +you will be burnt out, as our men were when they went to avenge our +lords' deaths, and were driven into St. Frideswide's Church." + +Now it seemed to me also that we had better hasten, or we should +have a strong force down on us. Then if we fought, Edric would have +occasion against me, and if not, I was lost. + +"To horse, men!" I said. "We will go to Peterborough for this +night. Abbot Elfric is my friend, and will give us shelter." + +"Let us take the road for London rather, and get back to Olaf the +king," said the headman. "The horses are fresh, and we can ride +far, and the nights are warm if we must lie out." + +"We will speak of that outside the town," I answered. "To horse at +once, and silently, or they will take warning and bring more men." + +They ran out, leaving a dozen with me. Edric's men were yet in the +street, and now they drew near the door, listening as I thought. + +"How shall you escape?" I said to the goldsmith. + +"Out of the back way, lord, and up the meadows to the ford if the +ferryman is asleep. But I must go before the house is beset." + +"Keep the gold for your service," I said, "for I think that the +silver penny has saved me." + +So he thanked me, and crept away easily enough. I suppose that +Edric's men had no orders that had made provision for trouble with +me of this sort, and that they hardly knew what had happened. But +it was likely that they would send word to Edric directly, when +they began to be sure that something had gone amiss. They tried the +door again, but without much heart. My men wanted to throw it open +and charge out on them, but I would not suffer it. So long as they +loitered outside we had time to get away. Then some of them tried +the gate of the courtyard behind the house, but the men had barred +that after the goldsmith had gone out. And all the while the horses +were being saddled silently, and they would be ready in a few +minutes. + +The earl's men spoke now outside the door, and I could hear what +they said. + +"Let us break in and see what has befallen Godric." + +"Nay, the hall is full of men now. Let us go back." + +"It was Godric's own fault. He had no reason to smite the porter, +who stayed him not." + +Then I thought that the men knew not what their errand was, and +were to take orders from the slain man. Thus there would be no +fighting in the street when we came out. + +So it was, for when the horses were ready, the stablemen of the +house threw open the great gates of the courtyard, which was beside +the house, as it happened, and we rode out quietly, but with +weapons ready, and they did but shrink together and stare when they +saw us. There were about thirty of them in all. + +Now I would not give Edric any reason to blame me to Eadmund, and +so I wheeled my men to the right, away from the bridge and along +the great road towards London, and letting them go on slowly, I +called to a man who stood foremost. + +"This is a sorry business," I said; "but your leader had no right +to smite my man, and one waxes hasty when a man behaves thus. He +was an unmannerly messenger." + +"Aye, lord, he was," the men said. + +"Well, then, tell your earl that I have even now left the town, and +that being ready to do so I came not with you; and say how it was +that this man was slain, and that I am sorry therefor." + +"We will tell him," they said. + +So I spurred my horse and rode after my company, knowing that it +would be hard for Edric to know the rights of the matter. The men +would certainly not wonder at the slaying of Godric, seeing how he +had behaved. I thought that Eadmund would never hear of this. + +I believe that I escaped very narrowly, and also that the silver +penny was the cause thereof. For, first of all, it had been likely +that Eadmund's messenger would not have found me so easily had I +gone elsewhere than back to get it, and so I should have been +belated and attacked in the street by these men. And next, the +goldsmith warned me that the armed men waited outside. And then it +was certain that Godric, the earl's man, would have cut me down +before I could have drawn sword, had I not already held the weapon +unsheathed. And that was because I looked on the penny and its +setting before belting on the scabbard. + +Now I thought, when we were fairly on the road, that we would go to +Peterborough, to my good friend the Abbot Elfric, for I would fain +tell him all this, thinking that he might warn Eadmund of Streone +to more effect than could I. And inside the abbey walls would be a +safe place for the night. It was not so certain that we should not +be pursued, and so we went quickly, the horses rejoicing in the +road after their idleness, for we had been three weeks in Stamford, +waiting for the earl. + +So we rode till we came to Castor, the old Roman town, and stayed +not there, but went to the ford over the Nene at Water Newton, the +road beyond the river being better than that on this side. It is +not an easy ford, for a horseman has to turn downstream when nearly +over, else he is over head and ears before he knows. One of my men +had known somewhat of the place, and was going through first, but +as his horse shied a little at the sparkling water and he was +urging it in, a man rode fast down the opposite bank, and into the +river, coming over to us. I heard his horse snorting, as if out of +breath. + +"Watch how he comes," I said to my man. + +But there was little use in that, for he went to ride straight +through, and next moment his horse was swimming, and he was crying +for help, being bewildered, for the river was full and current +strong. + +Now, I was used to swimming my horse in our Stour fords, which are +often very deep in autumn and winter, and so I rode in and grasped +his horse's bridle, and told him to take heart, and so fetched him +to our side. + +"Give me a fresh mount, in the king's name," he said, for his horse +was spent. + +"Little thanks is that," said I. "What is the hurry?" + +"I am sent with all speed to Redwald the thane, at Stamford, with +word for Eadmund the Atheling." + +"I am Redwald," I said. "Who sent you?" + +"Olaf the king. Show me your sword, master." + +I held out the hilt of my sword, for that was a token which a +messenger should give and receive that Olaf and I had agreed on. + +"Cnut the Dane has landed at Sandwich," the man said. "Eight +hundred ships he has, and men more than I can count. The Kentish +men have risen, and Olaf is with them; but he has not, and cannot +have enough men to stay the Dane. There must be a levy of all +England." + +Then I was almost beside myself with rage, and could have wept, for +the levy that should have been waiting for this had not even had a +summons. And from the bottom of my heart I blamed Edric Streone for +all the woe that I saw must come on England. + +There was but one thing for me to do, and that was to go back to +Stamford and see the Atheling. He would see me at midnight when no +one else dared wake him, maybe, for he would know that I had heavy +matters to speak of if I thus summoned him. The messenger would +have to wait till morning, and could but give his message. I could +reason with the Atheling, while this messenger would fall into +Streone's hands. And that I knew now was the worst that could +befall. + +"Give the man a fresh horse," I said. "I must go back with him." + +"Not so, lord," the men said. "You will be waylaid." + +"I think my luck will serve me," I answered. "Do you find some barn +at Chesterton over the water, and leave two or three men to watch +for my coming. Thrand and Guthorm may come with me." + +Then they grumbled at my running into danger, but I would be +obeyed, though I must let them bide on this side of the ford. + +We were but seven miles from Stamford town, and we went back at a +hard gallop on the good turf alongside the paving of the Roman way. +It was in my mind to see Eadmund and leave him at once, before +Streone knew that any man had come into the town, if I could. + +The bridge was barred, and the gates were too high to be leapt; but +the guards were sleepy, and would not let me through, until I bade +them open in the king's name. Then they did so, and we rode +clattering up the street to the great hall. + +There was bustle enough when I beat on the courtyard gates, for the +place was stockaded, and there was a strong guard inside. Presently +they opened the wicket, and the captain looked out angrily enough. + +He began to rate us, but I cut him short. + +"I am Redwald," I said, "and I must see the Atheling without +delay." + +The officer knew me well enough then, and let us in. + +"You cannot see the Atheling, thane," he said. "It is as much as my +life is worth to disturb him." + +"I will do it myself, then," I said. "Take me into the house." + +"What is amiss?" he asked, hesitating. "Is the king dead?" + +"Nay, worse than that," I answered shortly, and the officer stared +at me in horror. + +"Oh, fool!" I said; "Cnut is landed, and it is Eadmund only who can +save our land. Let me to him." + +The warrior clutched his sword hilt with a sort of groan, and +turned and took me into the house without a word. We went across +the great hall, where the housecarles slept around the walls, sword +under pillow, and spear at side. They raised their heads when their +captain spoke the watchword, and looked at me curiously, but did +not stir more than enough for that. They were not bidden. + +We crossed a room where a few young thanes' sons slept, as I had +slept before the king's door when I was first at court, and these +leapt up, sword in hand. + +"What will you?" one said in a low voice, setting his back against +the door. + +"I must see Eadmund, our atheling, on king's business," I said +gently, remembering how I should have felt when on the same duty, +if one had come thus. + +"He may not be waked," the boy said. + +Then I spoke loudly, so as to end the business without troubling +these faithful guards. + +"I am Redwald of Bures. I think that Eadmund will see me." + +"Hush! hush! thane," the boy said. + +But there was no need to say more, for the long camp life had +sharpened Eadmund's ears to aught unusual. Now I heard the bar of +the door thrown down, and Eadmund came out with a cloak round him +and his sheathed sword in his left hand. + +"Redwald--friend--what is it?" he said. + +"Even what we have feared, my prince," I answered, looking at him. + +"Where has the blow fallen?" + +"At Sandwich. Olaf is there, and the Kentishmen have risen. His +word is that he has not enough men." + +"Surely Kent and London and Olaf--" he said. + +"Eight hundred ships lie in Ebbsfleet. A ship may hold a hundred or +but twenty men--not less." + +Then Eadmund made a sign to his people, and they went out and left +us together, and we looked on one another. + +"Let me send for the earl," he said; but I put my hand on his arm. + +"You are enough, my prince. But for sending for him your levies +would be here, and we should march together even now to London." + +He groaned. + +"You are right, and I am a fool," he said. + +"Wait for the earl no longer," I urged; "raise your own levy, and +bid him follow you or the king as he will. There must be a raising +of all England. Send to the king tonight." + +"What will Cnut do?" he asked me. + +"Olaf thought that if he landed in Kent he would make for London +and besiege it. If so, you have time yet." + +"There shall be no delay. Bide here and help me." + +"I cannot," I said, and told him plainly of Edric's message to me, +and the way in which it was sent; and I ended: "Let me go to Olaf, +therefore, and take word from you that you come in haste. The earl +doubts me yet." + +"I do not understand it," Eadmund said, "but it must be so. Go back +and tell Olaf to hold Cnut under London walls, and I will be there +in a day before he expects, gathering forces as I come." + +I kissed his hand and went, and as I did so I heard him bid his +followers arm him. So I knew that he was roused, and that if he +were himself all might yet be well. + +Then I got to horse, and I and my two men rode down the street as +fast as we had come. No man was about, and the bridge gates swung +open for us. + +"They are in a hurry to get rid of us," said Thrand, as we went +through and passed the last houses of the town beyond the river. + +Then the road lay white in the moonbeams before us until it ran +among the trees of the first woodland, and there in the black +shadow was a sparkle as of armour in the shafts of light that came +through the leaves into the over-arched hollow of the track. + +If any man was there he could see us clearly, though we could not +well see him, for we were in full brightness. + +Then Guthorm spoke, peering under his hand. + +"Four men across the road, lord--horsemen standing still." + +Then said I: + +"If they are friends they will stand aside for us. If not, they +will expect us to halt and argue matters with them. Any way, they +have no right to the whole road, even if they mean us no harm. Ride +on steadily, one on either side of me, and when we are twenty paces +from them, if they yet bar our way, spur your horses and we will +clear the road." + +"Swords out, master?" said Thrand. + +"No, spear butts ready; maybe they are friends. But I am in a +hurry." + +So we rode over those four men, and I fear they were hurt, for we +left two rolling horse and two men in the road. Nor did I ever know +if they were Edric's men or not. Howbeit, their swords were drawn, +and so I think we were not wrong in what we did, though the +Colchester men smote hard, and my spear shaft was badly sprung over +a helm. + +After that we did not draw rein till we came to our comrades, and +they were halfway back to Stamford looking for me. Then we took the +road to London, for we would not tarry now at Peterborough. + +Maybe my story would have had a different end had I gone there--but +it was not to be. Yet, though I knew it not, I was close to Hertha +at that time. + + + +Chapter 10: The Flight From London. + + +I came back to Olaf while he gathered his ships in the Pool below +London Bridge, and I found him ill at ease and angry with Ethelred +and Eadmund, and when I told him all, most angry with Streone. + +"Now you must stay with me, cousin, for that man will have you +slain if he can. There is no doubt that he works for Cnut. And this +word of his about a bribe for me is not his own invention; he has +been told to make it." + +Then he told me of the vast host that had poured into Kent. It was +the greatest host that had ever landed on English shores--greater +even than had been ours when we Angles left our old home a desert, +and came over to this new land and took it. Olaf and the Kentish +levies had fought and had been driven back, and now day by day we +looked to see Cnut's armies before London, and also for the coming +of Eadmund with his men. But neither came, for the Mercian levies +would not fight unless the king himself headed them, and Cnut +passed through Surrey into Wessex and none could withstand him. + +Aye, they fought him. Wessex is covered with nameless battlefields; +but ere long half of Cnut's fleet was sent round to the Severn, and +Ethelred, sick and despairing, came back to London with but a few +men. + +It angers me even to think of what befell after that. Eadmund and +Streone gathered each a good force, and came together within touch +of Cnut. And then on the eve of battle, Edric made known his plan +to his Mercian thanes, and that was nothing more nor less than that +they should go over bodily to Cnut when the fight began. Which +treachery so wrought on the honest Mercians that they would fight +not at all, and so disbanded in sight of the enemy, leaving Eadmund +with but enough men to make good his retreat. And Cnut was master +of all the land from Kent to Severn shores, Ethelred's own country. +So Edric Streone went over to Cnut, and with him many thanes who +despaired of help from Ethelred, and chose rather peace under a +king who was strong enough to give it them. And one night forty of +the English ships slipped away from us down the tide and joined the +Danes at Sandwich. The men had been bribed by Streone, as we found. + +Almost then did Olaf make up his mind to leave England, but he +pitied Ethelred, who turned to him again in this new trouble, and +he did not go. + +"But my men will not bide patiently much longer," he told me; "here +is neither honour nor gold to be won, and I need them for my going +to Norway when the time comes." + +For every day Olaf looked for some sign that should bid him go back +and take his own land from Cnut's hand. + +Now Ethelred would not stir from London, fearing treachery +everywhere. And again Eadmund's levies melted away for want of +their king's presence, and at last we persuaded him to meet Eadmund +at Coventry, and I went with him. There was a good levy that would +have followed him, but some breath of suspicion came over him, and +suddenly he left them and fled back to London and the citizens, +whom he trusted alone of all England. And he would not suffer me to +bide with Eadmund, but I must go back with him. So the levies +melted, and Eadmund went north to Earl Utred of Northumbria for +help. + +Then when the winter wore away, and April came in calm and bright, +the most awesome thing befell England that had been yet. For in the +north Eadmund and Utred marched across the country, laying waste +all as they went, lest the north should rise for Cnut; and going +east as they went west, Cnut ravaged and burnt all the southern +midlands. Then rose the wail of all England, for friend and foe +alike had turned on her, and her case was at its hardest. And from +that time forwards I know that none who chose Cnut for king should +be blamed. + +Then Cnut fell on York, and Utred of Northumbria, whose wife was +Danish, submitted to him, and was slain by Streone's advice, as men +say, though some say that he was slain by Thorkel the Jarl when he +took the ships that tried to escape from the Humber. It may be +thus. The shipmen fought well, and were all slain--sixty ships' +crews. + +Now all England was open to Cnut, and Eirik the jarl fell on +Norwich and drove Ulfkytel back on us, and from him we heard of +this trouble. + +On the eve of St. George's day, Ethelred sent for me to his +chamber, for he would speak with me. I found him sitting in a great +chair before the fire, wrapped in furs, though the day was warm and +sunny, and he was very feeble, so that his thin hands had little +strength in them. The queen, Emma, was with him, looking young and +handsome as ever, and in the light of a narrow window sat Eadward +the Atheling, the sunshine falling on his strange white hair and on +the pages of a great book over which he pored. He just lifted his +pale eyes from his reading as I went in and saw who it was, and +smiled pleasantly at me, and then turned to his book again. I +thought that the troubles of the time passed lightly on the proud +lady and the boy, whose learning was all that she cared for. + +"Come near, Redwald, my son," the king said, in his voice that had +grown so faint of late. "I have a charge to lay on you." + +I went and knelt by him, and he put his hand on my shoulder, and +the tears came to my eyes at the kindly touch, for it was the same +as, and yet so unlike, that which had been a promise of friendship +to me at the first time that I saw him. + +"All things are slipping from me, Redwald," the king said; "nor is +there aught that I grieve to lay down when the day comes on which I +must pass through the gate of death. Crown and sceptre have been +heavy burdens to me, for with them has been the weight of the sword +also. I have borne those ill, and used that cruelly. I am the +Unredy; but I have listened to ill counsels, having none of my own, +nor wit to see what was best." + +He ceased for faintness, and my heart ached to hear him speak thus +to me, his servant. But Emma the queen turned half away from him, +her face growing hard and scornful as she heard. Then Eadward set +his book down gently, and, looking sadly at his mother, came and +stood over against me at the other side of the king, and took his +wan hand and said: + +"There are laws which you have made, my father, which will live in +the hearts of men alongside those that Eadgar made--our best. There +will not be all blame to you in the days to come, when men see +clearly how things have gone with you." + +Thereat Ethelred smiled faintly, and he answered: + +"I pray that it may be so. But the good outweighs not the evil. I +may not count the one--I must confess the other." + +He passed into thought, looking into the fire, and we were still +beside him. The queen moved away to the seat where Eadward had been +sitting and took his place, staring out of the window with unseeing +eyes. And I was glad that she was no longer beside us. + +Presently the king raised his head and turned it a little towards +me. + +"Redwald," he said, "you were our companion in Normandy, and you +are a trusted friend of ours. It will not be long before the queen +must fly to her brother--the good duke--again, and it is in my mind +that her flight will be perilous. When that time comes, let it be +your place to see her safely thither, with the athelings, her sons. +It may be that Olaf will help you, but that you must see to as best +you can. And I have sent for Abbot Elfric to help you." + +"Lord king," I said, "what I can I will do, but I think there are +men better fitted than I to guard our queen." + +"None whom we trust more fully," the king said. + +"See, my queen, this is he to whom you must look for furtherance of +your journey." + +Then Emma turned from the window, and her face was still unmoved. + +"I can trust Redwald," she said. "It will be well." + +But Eadward wept openly, for he knew that the king spoke of the day +when he should die. + +"That is well," the king said, and leaned back on his pillows. "Now +have I no care left. Yet it is hard to put so heavy a burden on +your young shoulders, my thane." + +"It is an honour rather," I answered. "May I be worthy thereof." + +Then a brightness came over the king's face, and he answered me +slowly and plainly, and with great joy, as it were. + +"Presently I shall meet with Eadmund, your martyred king, and to +him I will say that his thane of Bures is worthy." + +"Forget me not also, my father, when you come to that place," +Eadward said. + +"I will not forget. Now is given me to see plainly what shall be in +the time to come--to what all tends even now. For now in the time +of my death comes to me rede unearthly, as I think. There must be a +strong hand who shall weld England into one--who shall bid our land +forget that difference has ever been betwixt Angle and Saxon, Jute +and Northumbrian, Mercian and Wessexman, Saxon and English and +Dane. And when that wonder is wrought, then shall come peace and a +new life to the land, under one who will give them the laws that +they need to bind them into one English race, strong and honest, +and patient in all things." + +Then said Eadward, as the king ceased: + +"That is what those who love England would most hope for." + +But his voice was hushed, as in the presence of one who sees beyond +this earth. + +Thereat the king looked on him, and said: + +"Have patience, my son, and you shall see it; aye, and you shall +have part and share therein." + +After that he spoke no more, and for a time we waited beside him. +Soon he seemed to sleep, and I rose at a sign from the queen and +left his chamber. Nor did I ever see Ethelred our king alive again. +For when the morning came he had laid his heavy burdens down and +had passed to the rest that he longed for. And the bells that rang +merrily for St. George's mass ceased, and the toll for the dead +went mournfully over the city. + +"Eadmund is king, God help him," men said. + +So it came to pass that even as they buried the king in the great +Church of St. Paul the Danish armies were closing round the city, +and when I went to Olaf to beg him to advise me concerning the +flight of the queen, he answered: + +"You and I must part, my cousin. For you had better take ship from +some quiet port, and that on the southern coast, and so make for +Normandy. But I must see the citizens through this siege, and then +I will come to you at Rouen, and we will take counsel together +again." + +He would bide no longer in England after this, for the doubt of him +that Eadmund would not listen to was strong in the minds of others, +and his presence was of little use. Only the London folk and +Ulfkytel loved him, knowing him well, and holding that they owed +him much. But none knew better than Earl Ulfkytel that Olaf must +not bide here longer. + +Now our scouts kept coming in with news of Cnut, and at last I +could see by which road to fly with most chance of safety. I would +go by Winchester and so to Southampton and there take ship with the +queen. Cnut's fleet would be in the Thames ere long, if it barred +not the mouth already. + +But Abbot Elfric had not come. We feared that he had fallen into +Danish hands, for it was hard to say where they were not. It seemed +that we must perforce leave London without him. Yet I would stay +till the last for his coming. + +Now I must leave England, and I have said little about myself. But +when this duty was laid on me by the king, I thought more of my +lost quest of Hertha than I had done of late. For now I must leave +her in our poor land, where she must be hunted maybe from hiding to +biding, place to place, and in my heart grew up an unreasoning +anger against Ailwin and Gunnhild, who by their secrecy had kept me +from bringing her here with Olaf. + +Then as I looked over this I became sure that they had seen +somewhat in me which their charge could not love, so that they +would keep me from her altogether. And I made up my mind to that at +last, not wondering that it was so, for I was but a warrior and a +landless thane with nought to be proud of but skilful weapon play, +and some scars to show that I had been in a fight or two where +blows were falling. And I minded how I had told Ailwin that I held +myself free, and thought that he and Gunnhild, and maybe Hertha +also, would have it so. + +Yet I cared little for that, having heavier things to fill my mind +than thought for a maiden whose very looks I knew not now. At least +these two had taken Hertha into their charge, denying me any part +therein, and I could not blame them rightly. I had done my best and +could no more. + +Then at the last moment Elfric came. + +"Glad am I that you have not gone, my son," he said, as I greeted +him. "I have wandered many a long mile over crossroads to escape +the Danes. Very nearly did they have me once, but I escaped them. +That will be a pleasant tale beside Duke Richard's fire, however. +When must we go?" + +"With nightfall, father," I said. "The horses are standing almost +ready even now. How many shall you need?" + +"Myself, and my chaplain, and three sisters--five," he said, "if +you can take so many. These would fly with me and the queen." + +I thought for a moment. The queen had Eadward and his brother +Alfred and five maidens with her, and there were the pack horses +and the servants. But two of the maidens were unwilling to go, +being daughters of London thanes. Our court was very small in these +days. So, as every woman added to our company was a source of +weakness, in that our pace must be that of the least able to bear +fatigue, I doubted until I thought that the queen might let the +sisters take the places of the maidens who cared not to fly with +her. + +I went and asked her this, and she flushed with wounded pride, +though I gave her my reasons and urged her peril. + +"How shall it be told that Emma of Normandy was beholden to a +nunnery for her handmaidens?" she said. + +"It shall not be told, my queen," I said stoutly. "Men shall say +that you gave protection to the holy women." + +Truly my wits were sharpened by sore need, for at once the queen +agreed to this. She loved power, and even this little use thereof +pleased her. + +"When can we go?" she asked. "I long to see my own land again." + +"At nightfall, in two hours' time," I told her. + +"It is well. Be ready then," she said. + +She had persuaded herself, as I believe, that she arranged all +things, and I was glad to have it so, for I had feared that I +should have had trouble more than enough with her unreasoning +pride. + +So I told Elfric that his nuns could go, and he thanked me, +laughing a little, with some thought of their journey here as I +thought, and he added: + +"Aye, their dress protects them a little. It is not as in the old +days of heathen against Christian. There is this to be said for +Cnut, that he will have no monastery or nunnery harried if his +orders are carried out." + +Then a thought came to me, and I wished that I could persuade our +queen to take on herself and her maidens the convent dress. She +would not be the first royal lady of England who had worn it. And I +asked Elfric to persuade her to do so, for Emma's great failing was +love of queenship. + +"If I know aught of our queen," he said, "she wants to ride in +state." + +"She does," I answered. "I think, father, that we have a troublous +journey before us. She will not believe but that she may ride as +ever through the land." + +"You plan and I will argue," the good man said, being ever light +hearted. + +So he went to the queen and spoke long with her, but she would in +no wise ride out of London but as a queen, even as she had told me +more than once. There was nothing against that but that word might +go to the Danish leaders that she was leaving the city. Still, if +we could get her to disguise herself thus when our guards left us +it might be as well. The Danes, did they seek her, would look for a +larger party than ours, and would pay no heed to us, perhaps. + +Now Olaf and my Colchester spearmen would be our guards even to the +Surrey hills, for beyond them was not much fear of the Danes, who +were advancing from Mercia, northward of the Thames. Only in the +towns were garrisons whom we must fear, for they sent out parties +to raid the land for provender and plunder and to keep the poor +folk from rising on them. + +So it was my plan, and it seemed good to Elfric, to travel as a +little party only. So could we more easily escape notice, and take +the byways, while an armed force, however small, would draw on us +the notice of the Danes whose duty it was to watch against any +gathering of English warriors. + +We started that night as soon as dark came on, and the queen was +pleased with the guard around her, and that Olaf the king himself +rode at her side. Men cheered him as we passed along the streets, +and the queen deemed that the cries were for her, and drew herself +up proud and disdainful as she sat on her white horse with spearmen +before and behind her, and her maidens on either side. But I doubt +if any man knew who she was in the dusk. And I had sent the pack +horses and servants on before us to wait our coming at a certain +place, so that none should be able to say that we were a party of +fugitives. + +Presently the queen waxed silent, and Olaf and I could talk to one +another of what we would do in the time to come if this and that +happened. I told him that I should certainly return to fight at +Eadmund's side, for the queen would not keep me in Rouen. When he +left London it was his wish to seek me there, and so we looked to +see one another again before very long. + +"Then it is farewell, my cousin," he said, when at last we came to +Banstead, for he would not leave us sooner. "We have had a good +fight or two together, and may have more, and to more profit, as I +hope, in the days to come." + +We halted at the monastery and prayed for shelter there for the +night, or at least what was left of it, and while Elfric spoke with +the superior of the nuns who were there, I took leave thus of Olaf +and of my spearmen. And these prayed me to return soon and lead +them again. That I promised them, and so the darkness closed +between us as they rode away, and I was left sad at heart enough, +for Olaf was as a brother to me, and I knew not when I should meet +with him again. + +There was no talk of Danes at this quiet place over which the wave +of war had gone already, leaving it poorer, but in peace; and it +was not until the next afternoon that we rode out again, our party +being that which must see the long road over together. + +Twelve of us there were. The queen and her two maidens and the +three nuns, Elfric the abbot and his chaplain, Eadward and Alfred +the athelings, and Alfred's tutor--who was a churchman of Elfric's +own monastery--and myself. + +Then there were the servants, ten in all, who rode each leading a +lightly-laden pack horse. It was such a party as an abbot might +well travel with, and that is all that would be said of us if the +Danish riders asked aught of the roadside folk. I and Eadward alone +were armed as the abbot's housecarles. The men bore but spear and +seax, as would any wayfarer for fear of robbers and the like. + +Now, when all was ready in the courtyard, and we waited for the +queen, she stood on the threshold before I knew her, for the nuns +of the place, taught by Elfric, had prayed her to take their dress +for the journey, and she had done so, as also had her two maidens. +They were as abbess and sisters therefore, and I thought that one +trouble was over--that is if our queen would but take the part of a +nun as well as the dress, and be guided by Elfric the abbot. + +Thus our journey to the sea was begun. And of that journey I might +tell much, for it was a strange one. I think that the hardest task +that a man could have, must be to take a proud and headstrong woman +through a country full of danger, when she dislikes the manner of +journey. And when that woman is a queen, surely it is harder yet. +Had it not been for Elfric and Eadward I know not how we should +have fared, for at times Emma the queen would not speak with me, if +some plan that I must needs make was not to her liking. And seeing +that she knew nought of the meaning of either time or distance, +that was often enough. And when I heard of danger that must be +skirted she would tell me that none would dare molest the +queen--that she would declare herself and all would be well. + +And seeing that of all hostages to Cnut the queen would be the most +valuable, that plan would be fatal. I will say this now, that more +than once I was obliged for very safety's sake to give wayside +folk, among whom we were, to understand that the abbess was crazed +through the long troubles, believing herself a queen. + +And, alas for our land! it was but too easy for them to believe it. +Few there were who knew not some wretched ones crazed at that time +by all that had befallen them. + +Well it was for us that the nights were clear and warm, and that +the good Surrey and Hampshire franklins' wives were compassionate +and hospitable. I could not now retrace our footsteps, for we could +go by no road at times, but must take to the woods and downs. + +And ever when we did so the queen rode sullenly, and angry with all +around her, while Eadward and I and the two priests, who were +valiant men enough, were ahead, scenting danger everywhere, for we +had many a narrow escape of meeting raiding Danes. The stragglers +of that mighty host were everywhere. I think that had we fallen +into such hands I should have tried to send a man in all haste to +the nearest post of the thingmen, that we might be taken again by +warriors at least. + +But the ladies bore the long journey well, and Elfric's nuns the +best. I had little to do with them, having so many cares about me, +and was glad enough to leave them in the closer charge of the abbot +and his priests. But soon I found that there was one of the three +nuns who was untiring and ever able to hearten the rest, and that +even the queen listened to her. The dress made all five of the +maidens seem alike at first, but in a few days the pleasant, +cheerful face of this one seemed familiar to me, and it was fair +enough for all the novice's garb she wore. I thought she minded me +of someone whom I knew, and at last, finding out a likeness as I +looked for one, I called her in my own mind Sister Sexberga, for +surely she was like that fair friend of mine. It never happened +that I heard her name, for I was ever forward and away from the +queen's complainings, and the nuns spoke little even to one +another. + +Little rest and much care had I all the way thus. I will not write +it, but will go on to the time when we came safely in sight of +Winchester town. I could not enter it with my charges, but must +needs go by myself, for here I should learn more sure news than +anywhere. And what I might learn would decide whether I could take +ship in Southampton Water or turn eastwards a little and go to +Portsmouth or Bosham havens. + +Now I knew that the Danes held the place in force, and so I told +the queen. But to pass by her royal city seemed more than she could +bear, and she wished and commanded us to ride in and call on her +citizens to rise and protect her. + +"Queen of England I am and will be," she said. "I have borne +indignity long enough." + +"My queen," I said, "if you see Winchester you will not see +Normandy." + +Then Elfric spoke with her, and at last she wept, saying that she +was deserted, and the like, and so turned sullen, bidding us give +her up to the Danes, who would respect a queen in distress. + +Having seen this manner of submission to counsel not once or twice +before, I put on a franklin's dress, and gave sword Foe's Bane into +Eadward's keeping, and took a hunting spear instead, and went down +into the town, leaving my party ten miles away in a nook of the +wooded hills. + +The scarlet-cloaked Danish thingmen at the gates paid no heed to +me, for it was market day, and many countryside people were going +in and out. So I went to the marketplace, and sat down on a bench +outside an inn with others and listened to all that I could, while +I drank my ale and ate as did the rest. + +Some I talked with. There was little hatred of Cnut here, as I +found. There was some change, too, in the ways of the thingmen, for +it was not their plan here to make themselves hated and feared as +in East Anglia. + +Then came a man whose face and walk were those of a seaman, and he +sat down close to me, and I pushed the ale mug towards him, and we +began to talk of his calling. He had come to Winchester to find some +merchant who needed a ship, as it seemed, and he began, as a good +sailor will, to praise his own vessel with little encouragement. + +I found out from him that Southampton Water was full of Danish +vessels, and so I asked where his own lay. + +"In Bosham haven," he said. "Earl Wulfnoth will have no Danes in +his land. I must get some safe conduct from the Danish folk here if +I come into the Water. So being tired of doing nought I even rode +up to this place to see if aught could be managed for a voyage." + +Now I thought that I was in luck's way, for from this man, who +seemed honest enough, I could perhaps gain all I wanted. His ship +was a great buss, fitted with a cabin fore and aft under the raised +decks, and I could wish for no better chance than this might be. + +"Would you take passengers for Normandy instead of goods?" I asked +him carelessly. + +"Aye, truly, and gladly if they could pay well." + +"Now I will tell you that I am Earl Wulfnoth's friend," I said, +"and you may know that pay is safe, therefore. I was at Pevensea +when Olaf the Thick, the viking, came there." + +He took my word for my friendship with the earl, and then I +arranged for all things to be ready for us in a week's time. We had +some rough country to cross before we came to Bosham, and I would +not hurry over it. We wrangled over the price a little, as was +fitting, for I would not seem too eager; but at last he said that +he would depart on the morrow, and we shook hands and were +satisfied. + +"Speak not of this matter, friend Bertric," I said, "or we may be +waylaid by Danes off the haven's mouth." + +"Little fear of that, master," he laughed. "Our young Earl Godwine +has beaten one or two ships already." + +Then I went back light hearted to my people, and when the queen +heard what I had done her mood changed, and she was most gracious, +and thanked me, saying that she feared that I had run into danger +for her in going into the town. So I felt myself repaid in full for +the little trouble, that had been without risk as it fell out. + +Very fair was the great Andred's-weald in the late April weather, +but the forest tracts were rough and the way seemed long. Once we +beat off, easily enough, some cowardly outlaws, but there were no +Danes in Andred's-weald, and we came to Bosham in safety. + +There Bertric's good ship was ready for us, and it happened that no +other vessels, save fishing craft, were in the haven. I had looked +to meet Godwine, my friend, but he and his ships were in Dorchester +water, and there were few to mark our coming into the quiet town, +or our going on board, which we did without delay. + +We had no need of the stout housecarles, who had led the horses and +served us so well, so the queen, as I asked her, gave them the +horses as gifts in recompense for their journey, and so when they +had gone we were few indeed. But there was room for few passengers +in the buss. The queen and her ladies had the larger after cabin, +and Elfric and the athelings and the two priests had that under the +fore deck. I would remain on deck with Bertric and his crew of +twenty men, but there was no hardship in that. + +That night on Bertric's ship was the first for three long weeks +that had sound sleep for me, for they hauled out into the middle of +the haven, and none could come near us unseen, and I was at last +free from care and watching. + +But one thing troubled honest Bertric, and that was that he had +found a black kitten on board. None knew whence it came, and he +said it was an ill sign. And he dared do nought but treat it well, +since it had come. + + + +Chapter 11: The Taking Of The Queen. + + +When the early sunlight woke me, we were almost at the haven mouth, +and slipping past Selsea, with its gray pile of buildings, on the +first of the ebb tide. The wind was in the northeast, with a +springtime coldness in it, but it was fair for Normandy, and there +was no sea running under the land. We were well out at sea, +therefore, ere Elfric, almost as worn out as I, came from his close +quarters forward and stood by me, looking over the blue water of +the Channel to where the Isle of Wight loomed to the westward. + +"Now I think that all is well, Redwald," the abbot said, "and every +mile from the English shore takes us further from danger." + +And so we stood and talked in the waist of the ship, and Eadward +came and joined us. The men ate their breakfast forward, and +brought us some, and the two churchmen came out with the little +atheling, and then Sister Sexberga, as I called her, came and +shivered in the cold breeze and spoke to Bertric, who was alone on +the after deck steering, and so went back to the cabin, where the +queen had all things needful for breaking her fast. + +Then Bertric whistled sharply, and I looked up at him. He pointed +away to the eastward, and out to sea. There I saw far off on the +skyline the sails of two ships that grew larger as I watched them. + +I went to the break of the after deck and climbed up beside him. + +"Men say that two ships passed westwards tonight, master," he said. +"Here be two more heading over from the south." + +"Can you tell what they are?" I asked him. + +"Longships, as I think," he answered. "We shall know betimes." + +The vessels hove up quickly, for our great brown sail bore us more +or less across their course. + +"It is safer to hold on, master," he said, "for to up helm and fly +would be to bring them after us if they are vikings. They will see +that we are not laden with cargo, and will not pay heed to us +therefore." + +It was but half an hour after that when we knew that the two ships +were Danish war vessels, and that they were laying a fresh course +to overhaul us. Nor was there any chance of our escaping them. They +were thrice as fast as we. + +Then I feared greatly, for I knew not what would happen. It might +be that they would let our party go on, finding them to all seeming +nought but church folk; but one could not tell, and I feared. So +also did Elfric when I went to him and told him what these ships +were, and that they were bearing down on us. + +"We cannot fight," he said. "We must let things be as the Lord +will." + +"If any roughness is shown to the womenfolk," I said, "there will +be one man who will fight." + +"And will lose his life for naught," he answered. "If the worst +comes to the worst we must even do as the queen has bidden us +before now. We must proclaim her, and then we shall be safe from +harm, if captives to Cnut. Tell me, have you heard that he is cruel +to those he takes?" + +"Rather I have heard that he is not," I said. "Moreover, if Emma of +Normandy suffers aught at his hands he will have the duke to deal +with very shortly." + +"Now are we in the Lord's hands," said Elfric, for a hoarse hail +came from the leading ship, which was to windward of us. She was a +splendid dragonship, bright with gold and colour. + +"What will you have me do, master?" Bertric cried to me. + +"They can do what they will with us whatever we try. We may fare +better by obeying," I said, for in truth there was nought else to +do. + +Now the great ship ranged up alongside of us, and the tall warrior +at the helmsman's side hailed us again to heave to. And I saw a man +bend his bow, and an arrow flew down the wind and stuck in the deck +not far from me. Whereon Bertric raised his arm in answer and +called to his men, and luffed while they lowered the sail. The Dane +at the same time struck sail, and got out some oars in order to +come alongside of us. There was no sea running that would make this +dangerous. + +Then I went to the low door of the after cabin, and spoke to the +queen. + +"Here is a ship that will come alongside ours," I said. "Fear +nought, but wait for my word." + +And then a glint of bright colour caught my eyes, and I looked more +closely into the dark place; and there sat the queen no longer as a +humble abbess, but in her own dress, for she had cast off the garb +she hated, and she answered me: + +"Who dares to stay the Queen of England on her passage?" + +"Oh, madam," I said, "for pity's sake don the convent robe again. I +fear that the Danes are on us." + +Then she cowered back into the shadow and said nought, for the very +word terrified her when she knew her foes were so near. But Sister +Sexberga came to the door, and she was pale enough, though her face +lacked no courage. + +"What shall we do, Redwald--thane?" she said quickly. + +"Keep a brave heart, sister," I answered, "and let me manage all. I +will bide before the door, and you will hear all I say. Then, if I +say that we have the Queen of England, let our mistress come +forward and disclose herself. But I hope they will let us go free. +Pray that it may be so." + +Then the two ships jarred together, and I saw that the Dane was +well manned with armed warriors, and I also saw that their leader +was Egil Thorarinsson, whom I had captured and again lost at +Leavenheath fight. I will say that I was glad to see him, for I +knew him as a free-spoken warrior who loved fair play, and I +thought that he owed me a life, for I did not slay him when I +might. + +They leapt on board--a dozen armed Danes with Egil at their +head--and there before them stood Elfric the abbot with his cross +in his hand, facing them alone. His priests were forward under +cover, praying doubtless, with the athelings. The great ship +sheered off again, and bided within half arrow shot of us, all her +rail crowded with men looking on. + +"Neither gold nor goods have we," Elfric cried. "We are peaceful +folk who cross the seas. It is the part of a good warrior and +viking to let such go unharmed." + +"Aye, so it is," answered Egil; "but, as it happens, we are looking +for certain peaceful folk." + +"You will not harm us," said Elfric, who knew nought of our queen's +foolishness. "It is but a party of church people who go to +Normandy." + +"Put the holy man aside," said Egil to his men. "We are not +heathens, and we will not hurt you, father." + +So the warriors laughed, and went to draw Elfric away; but when he +saw that I stood before the cabin door, he stepped aside by himself +and watched what should befall. I had no mail on, and at first they +did not notice me. It was the first day that I had not worn mail +since we left London; but Foe's Bane was loose in the scabbard, and +ready in case of need. + +"Ho, skipper!" Egil cried, "whom have you on board?" + +"Yon priest and some more of his sort," Bertric said. + +"We have lit on a crow's nest," a man said, laughing. "Where are +they, then?" + +"In the fore peak, and aft here, deadly sick," said Bertric. + +Then Egil's eyes lit on me, and he stared for a minute. + +"Ho!" he cried, "here is no crow, but a stout warrior enough. What +do you here, Olaf's right-hand man?" + +"Helping the crows over seas," I said, trying to meet his words +lightly, though my heart was heavy enough. + +"Why then, friend," he said, "I must see these charges of yours. +Stand aside, and let me go into that cabin." + +"Nay, Egil; they are but nuns here." + +The honest warrior looked puzzled, but some of his men began to +crowd aft, being tired of the parley, and one tried to push me +aside, saying: + +"Let us fetch them out, and waste no more words." + +Whereon I sent him reeling against the gunwale, hands to face, for +I dealt with him even as Godric served my warrior at Stamford. + +Then I had my sword out, for it was time--and two men who drew +sword on me went down on the deck before me. Sword Foe's Bane smote +not amiss. Then was a ring of shouting Danes forming, and I felt +someone at my shoulder, and Egil cried out: + +"Hold, men! the warrior is my man. Let me deal with him." + +And there was Sister Sexberga beside me, with Bertric's sword, that +had hung over his berth, in her hand; and her eyes were flashing, +and it seemed to me that she had used a sword before this, or had +learnt its use. It was reddened now. + +The men gave back, and Egil came before me and he was laughing. + +"That is enough, Redwald of Bures," he said. "I owe you a life, and +you have it. If all your charges are like that maiden we had better +begone. Little nunnery training is there about her sword play." + +Then the sister shrank back into the cabin, and the men stared +after her with a kind of awe, as at a Valkyrie of the old faith who +had come to my help. There was a man whom she had smitten who was +binding up a wound in his bare forearm. I believe that she stayed a +shrewd blow from me. + +"Let us go, Egil," I said. + +"Presently, maybe. But I seek someone, and must needs see your +people. No harm shall come to them." + +Then I thought that all was well, and I turned to the door and +spoke: + +"Lady abbess, you must needs come forward. I know this chief, and +you need fear nought." + +I heard Sister Sexberga's voice speaking low and pleadingly for a +moment--and then all was lost. + +"I am the Queen of England," said Emma in her proud, shrill voice. +"Begone, churls, and let me not." + +And bright in crimson and ermine she came from the cabin and stood +swaying on the deck before Egil and his men, while round her train +played heedlessly the ill-omened black kitten; and that seemed +strange. + +Egil bared his head and bowed before her. + +"Are you truly the queen?" he said. + +"Aye, knave. Who else should I be?" she answered. "Fetch me the old +priest." + +"Nay, Redwald will tell me now," Egil said. "Does this lady speak +truth?" + +"It is true," I answered. "Why should you hinder her going to the +duke, her brother, who will seek her at your hands?" + +Now Emma had been still during these words, looking with hard and +scornful eyes at all before her, but now she spoke: + +"Let the sail be set again that I may go on my way. You shall +surely answer for this hindrance." + +But no one stirred, though even the Danes were silent, for there is +that in the tones of one who is wont to be obeyed which makes men +listen whether they will or not. + +"Do you hear me?" she said, stamping her foot. + +"Redwald, see that I am obeyed. Drive these knaves into the sea, +and let me be rid of them." + +Then Egil answered her, saving me trouble thereby, for I had nought +to say: + +"Queen, we will do your bidding and hoist the sail. But my men and +I must bide here." + +"I care not, so that you do not hinder my folk," she said. + +And with that she turned away, saying to the brave sister who yet +stood beside her: + +"Let us seek shelter again--the wind is cold, and I am offended +with the sight of these men." + +They went into the cabin and closed the door after them, and Egil +and I looked at one another. Egil grinned, but I could not. Outside +the door the kitten mewed restlessly in the cold wind to be taken +in. + +"So," he said, "cheer up. This is not your fault; you almost won +through. Had the queen come forth as an abbess, I think that I had +left you for very shame. Priests and black cats are aye unlucky +passengers, however." + +I think that I was never so angry as then. To lose all our pains +for the safety of the queen, and that by reason of her own +foolishness, was hard. + +Egil left me and went to Bertric; and once more the sail was set, +and the ship headed backward for the English coast. We had almost +lost sight of it. The two longships ranged up on either side of us, +shortening sail to keep us company. + +They took the two men whom I had slain and set them forward under +some covering. Neither Egil nor his warriors bore me any grudge for +their fall, which was in fair fight of their own making. After that +Egil's men made the crew bring them what food and ale they had, and +sat down below the fore deck quietly enough. They were courtmen of +Jarl Thorkel's, as I thought, being better than the wild warriors +who made the bulk of Cnut's great host. + +Elfric came to me when all was quiet thus, and leant on the rail +beside me for some time without speaking. We were making a long +slant over to the English coast, and my heart was full of heavy +thoughts, for I could not help wondering if this mischance had come +about by my fault; and I was angry and sore that all the plans that +I had made so confidently had come to naught. Presently the abbot +said: + +"The queen takes this matter very easily." + +"The trouble is to come," I answered; "she thinks that she is yet +on her journey." + +"It is no fault of ours that she is not," said he. "Maybe it is +best thus. I suppose that she will understand how things are when +we reach the shore. What will be done with us?" + +"Let us ask Egil," I said. "I think we might have fallen into worse +hands than his. It is in my mind that he likes not his errand." + +So we went aft to the chief, who stood beside Bertric. And when I +came to him he said, pointing westward: + +"Here comes Earl Wulfnoth, as I think." + +Then I saw three large ships beating up to us, and the sail of one +bore, painted on it, the device of a fighting warrior, Earl +Wulfnoth's own ensign. + +Now, on this I had a hope that we might be rescued by him, and my +face must have shown as much, while Elfric glanced at me with the +same thought written plainly in his eyes. + +"I will not risk meeting the earl, though I do not think that he +will interfere with us," Egil said; "but we are to windward of him, +and can do as we like. + +"Now, I have been wondering what I shall do with you, Redwald." + +"Let me be taken with the queen and the athelings," I said. "What +will you do with them?" + +"They must go to Cnut," he answered; "but I am thinking that that +will be bad for you." + +"Why?" + +"Maybe it is not my business, but I think that I owe you a good +turn for letting me off at Leavenheath. If I take you to Cnut, +Streone will have somewhat to say about you--and he is a great man +with our king just now." + +"Well, what if he has. He knows me well enough, and cares nought +about me," I answered. + +"Cares enough about you to have told Cnut to hang you as soon as he +gets you," Egil said. "I suppose you have offended him in some +way." + +Then Elfric said: + +"That is so. Redwald escaped from his hands at Stamford. We heard +many tales about it at Peterborough. They say that Eadmund the +Martyr came bodily and saved him out of a house beset by the earl's +men." + +"If there is one dead man that we Danes have to fear, it is that +king," Egil said. "Is this tale true?" + +And he stared at me as at one who had dealings with the other +world. + +I knew that my story must have come into this shape through some +tales that the goldsmith had set about. + +"Hardly," said I; "but it is a long story. Maybe Eadmund the Saint +had more to do with it than I know; but I saw him not." + +"Well then, Redwald, it seems unsafe for you to go near Streone--" + +"It will be unsafe for him," I said savagely, for my temper was +sorely tried by my failure, as I have said. + +Egil laughed. + +"Why, then, all the more must I keep you out of his way." + +"Hang me and have done," I said; "I am of no more use." + +"That," quoth Egil, "is what I thought concerning myself when you +had me down in the fight. Now I am here to let you go, and bid you +take heart. This is but chance of war, and one must take it as it +comes." + +Now it was so plain that the honest chief wished me well, that I +could not but thank him for his words, though, indeed, just at this +time I seemed to care little for what became of me. + +"You are a generous foe, Egil Thorarinsson," I said. + +"You and I shall be good friends some day, as I hope," he said; +"meanwhile we will be fair foes. You slew me not, because I had +fallen more or less by chance. Therefore I will let you go because +you have fallen into my hands by chance. I will only lay this on +you, that you shall bide with Earl Wulfnoth for two months before +you fight against us again." + +I was full of wonder at this, for he might well have made me +promise to take up arms against Cnut no more, and I could have done +no less than promise it, seeing that I was in his hands. + +"Why, I must tie you down for a while," he said laughing at my face +of doubt. + +"Nay, Egil, I do but wonder that you set me free at all," I said. + +"Is that so? I have wondered that you slew me not in the heat of +battle. Well, I will add this, that if we fall on Earl Wulfnoth you +may fight for him." + +I held out my hand, and Egil took it. + +"You have my word, Egil; you are most generous," I said. + +Then he glanced at sword Foe's Bane. + +"Some day you and I, maybe, will have a good fight for your sword +in all friendliness," he said. + +"Surely I thought you would take it back," I cried. "I feared so, +for it was my father's sword." + +"Aha! I knew there was somewhat strange about that blade," he said. +"Tell me what story it has." + +I told him in a few words about the winning of the sword from the +grave mound by Thorgeir, my grandfather, and asked Egil how he came +by it. + +"I bought it from a man after Nacton fight, and I have never had +any luck with it. I was sure it was a magic sword of some sort; for +it let go three men whom I should surely have slain with any other +blade. It seemed to turn in my hand. Such swords as these will not +be used by any other than he who can win them from the owner." + +"Ottar, Olaf's scald, said that it would draw the holder to me," I +said; "but I would not believe it." + +"You English have forgotten the old sayings," Egil said. "Now you +know that he is right; keep the sword therefore." + +Then I said: + +"If I must die a bed death, Egil, the sword shall be sent to you, +for I think that you have the most claim to it." + +He grew red with pleasure at my saying, and Elfric broke in on our +talk. + +"I would that I might see many more meetings of brave foes like +this. Then would peace come very shortly." + +"Why, father," said Egil, "Redwald and I have not any hate for each +other, though we must fight on opposite sides." + +"That is well. I would that it were ever so." + +Then Egil changed his tone, for we were nearing shore. The ships he +had seen were still far away, beating southward now. + +"Are these maidens nuns, or but in disguise, father?" he said. + +Elfric answered not at once, and I said: + +"Three are nuns, two only are disguised. You will not take the +queen's maidens from her?" + +"Not I," he answered. "I think that even with the abbot's help and +theirs I shall have trouble enough with the queen when she finds +that the shore we reach is not Normandy." + +"Shall you take me?" asked Elfric. + +"I must take all but my own friend here, and the three holy women; +I will not hinder them. They can find shelter in Selsea or +Chichester--a nun has always friends and a house--if Redwald will +see them safely to the door," Egil said very kindly. + +Then he bade the men get out the boat, which was a good one, and +fitted for carrying cargo from ship to shore. Two of Bertric's men +were to go ashore with me and the nuns, taking messages also to the +Bosham folk of what had befallen the ship. + +"You will scare the wife if you say you have fallen into the hands +of the Danes," Egil said laughing at the shipmaster. + +"It is the truth," Bertric said stoutly. "'Tis the doing of yon +cat." + +"You shall come to no harm with us, and your ship shall come back +to Bosham shortly. We have no war with your earl, and all will be +well. Tell them, therefore, that it is thus. King Cnut is generous +to all who fight not against him." + +When I heard that I began to see why our people went over to his +side so readily, and it seemed to me that he was fighting not only +with sword, but also with policy. + +"Now call your nuns, father," Egil said. + +"May I have one word with Redwald first?" the abbot asked. + +"Tell him what you will," Egil answered, and went forward. + +He called one of the priests and told him to bid the three nuns +come forth. + +Then Elfric said to me: + +"Two of these women are nuns, the third, she who stood by you so +well even now--saving your life, moreover--is not. She is the +orphan daughter of a thane, whom her guardians begged me to take to +Normandy, finding her a place in the queen's household or in some +convent, if that might not be. She is friendless. But I think she +may as well go with the nuns to Selsea. Bid her wait there till she +hears from me--unless some lady will take pity on her and give her +shelter." + +"She will be more likely to take the vows, as have so many maidens +of today who are in her case," I said. "I will do all for the nuns +and her that I can." + +The three sisters came out now. Two were weeping, and they were the +nuns. The third was flushed and looked troubled, and she cast a +glance back into the dark cabin. I heard the queen's voice speaking +fast to her, as it would seem, and she shrank away as if dreading +it. + +Elfric went to meet them, and then the queen herself came through +the cabin door stooping, for it was not high. + +"This is your doing," she said to the abbot. "Am I to be left +without any attendants?" + +"My queen," the good man said, "we can take the sisters no further +with us. They must go ashore." + +The queen looked at the coast, which was plain enough now. It was +certain that she had no knowledge that we were returning to +England. That the ship was on another tack meant nothing to her. + +"Why cannot they bide here and go on land with me? We cannot be +more than an hour in reaching the harbour," and she pointed to +Selsea. + +"Tell her, father, I pray you," said the maiden in a low voice. +"She believes that we are even now nearing her home." + +Then I thought that this might come more easily from myself, seeing +that Elfric had to stay with her, and I stood before her, and +spoke. + +"My Queen, that is not the Norman shore which you see. The Danes, +into whose hands we have fallen, are taking us back to England." + +As I said this, the queen's face grew white with rage, and she +looked from Elfric to me, speechless. On the deck above stood Egil, +and he caught my eye, and looked ruefully at us. + +"What!" she said, "has Cnut bought you also? Is there no man whom I +can trust?" + +That was the most cruel thing that she could have said, but I knew +what despair might lie behind her anger, and I answered +nothing--nor did Elfric. We waited for the storm to pass. + +"Ill it was that Ethelred trusted me to your hands--" she began +again. + +But there was one who would not bear this. The friendless maiden +spoke plainly for us. + +"Queen," she said, "I have borne your reproaches to myself in +silence, but I cannot bear that these brave servants of yours +should be blamed. Look at the abbot's torn and dusty robes, look at +the thane's care-worn face--are they in the plight of men who are +bribed?" + +But the queen made no answer, and her face was like stone as she +looked on none of us, gazing straight before her. + +"What lies on yonder deck?" the girl went on, pointing to where the +two bodies lay under their covering. "It is the thane's sword and +risk of life that stayed them from laying hands on you. Does a +bought man slay his buyers?" + +Still the queen was silent, and then I said: + +"I think that you misjudge us, my queen. Had we wished to betray +you it would have been long ere this that the Danes would have been +summoned to take you." + +I do not think that she heard me, and I am glad, for I spoke in +anger. I saw her lean against the bulkhead, and her hand sought her +heart, and she reeled a little. The maiden sprang forward to +support her, for it seemed as if she would fall. But she recovered +in a moment, and shook herself free of the girl's clasp. + +"I am wrong, good friends," she said. "Now I know from what you +have shielded me all this long journey through. What will they do +with me?" + +And she began to weep silently, yet she would not let the maiden +touch her. + +Elfric spoke then in his gentle voice. + +"We cannot blame you, my queen, for the blow is heavy; yet the +chief who has taken us is a true warrior and kindly, you need fear +nought." + +Then came Egil from the fore deck, and bowed to the queen, and +said: + +"I must take you to Cnut the king, lady; and his commands are that +you are to be treated as becomes the sister of Duke Richard. I am +here to see that it is so." + +Then the queen's mood changed, and she was once more herself. + +"You shall answer to my brother for all you do," she said in her +proud way. + +"I have to answer to Jarl Thorkel and to King Cnut," Egil said +simply. "The duke is no lord of mine." + +Thereat the queen paid no sort of heed to him, but spoke to me. + +"I will tell my brother hereafter of your great care for me, my +thane. Why must you leave me now?" + +Surely I should have asked Egil to let me stay, but he knew best +what was safe for me. + +"I will not take either thane or nuns, lady," he said. "They must +leave you even now; time is short." + +She glanced coldly at the chief, and answered him by speaking to +me. She had brought herself now to see that she was powerless. + +"Then I must say farewell, Redwald. In better days I will not +forget your service," and then she smiled a little, and gave me her +hand to kiss as I knelt before her, adding: "I think that I have +been an ill-natured travelling companion at times." + +Then she turned away quickly and sought the cabin. But she said no +word to the maiden who had made the journey lighter to her, and I +saw that this grieved her sorely. + +Now I took hasty leave of Elfric and the athelings, and sad was I +at parting with them. But I told Eadward that Egil was worthy of +his charge, and a generous foe. + +"You will not blame me that this matter has failed even at the +last, my prince," I said. + +"Not I, Redwald, good friend; you and I will laugh over it at some +time hereafter," the atheling said. + +I shook my head. + +"It has been waste trouble and pains," I said sorrowfully. + +"That it has not been," quoth Elfric. "No duty well and truly done +is lost in the end, though it may seem to be so at the time. I +shall remember my guardian in this journey all my life long, and +the queen shall remember presently. You have been most patient. +Lose not patience now. Be of good cheer rather that things are none +so ill as they might be." + +So the good man strove to hearten me, for I thought meanly enough +of myself at that time, because I had been so certain that all was +well, and now my pride was humbled. Maybe it was good for me that +this should be so, but good things are passing bitter if all are +like this. Lastly, he gave me his blessing, and I joined the +sisters in the boat, and she was cast off, while at that moment the +black kitten came to the rail and leapt in after us, which I liked +not at all. + +Then the great ship slipped away, her helm went down, and she +headed away out to sea to escape a meeting with Godwine's vessels +that had now gone about for the shore again, beating to windward +for Bosham. As she passed us I saw the abbot and Eadward wave to us +from the fore deck, and Egil lifted his hand in salute from beside +Bertric at the helm. + +Then they were gone beyond our reach, and we could no longer make +them out. Our rowers were bending to their oars, and the boat was +making good way enough, shoreward. + +I do not know how I can say enough of Egil's friendliness to me, +for I found my armour on the floor of the boat alongside the few +things the poor women had. Helm and shield and axe too were there. +He was as one of the heroes, of whom Ottar sang, in his way to me. +Then I grew light hearted in that strange way that comes after long +strain of fearing the worst, when the worst is known and it is not +so terrible after all. I had no fear for the queen, and I was free, +and going to Godwine and his father who were my friends. Also I +should see Penhurst and Relf again, most likely. + +Now when that memory came to me, suddenly I thought that I must see +Sexberga. And it was strange to me that I had no pleasure in that +thought. Most of all I hoped that Olaf would put in at Pevensea on +his way to Normandy. It was likely enough. + +So I sat and pondered, not sadly, but looking forward ever, and, as +I say, feeling that a load was lifted from me. Then at last my +thoughts came back from myself, and I turned to the sisters and +told them that the queen was safe, if a prisoner. They need not +grieve for her. The two nuns wept, but the thane's daughter smiled +a little, and said, fondling the cat meanwhile on her lap: + +"In truth, I think that the queen will be happier in making Egil +and his Danes obey her in little services than she has been in +having to be guided by yourself and the abbot." + +"It has been hard for her," I answered; "but she owes you much, as +I think." + +"She hates me," the girl said, half tearfully, "because I was the +only one who dared speak plainly to her." + +"Elfric and I owe you much, Sister Sexberga," said I, naming her as +I had thought of her through all the journey, because I recalled so +many times when we had looked to her for help in persuading the +queen to common sense, + +She looked astonished at this, and smiled oddly, and then I saw +what I had done. + +"Forgive me," I said hastily; "I know not your name. That is what I +ever called you to myself when I had to think of you in ordering +matters." + +"Why 'Sexberga'?" she said, looking out seawards. + +"Truly I thought you like a lady of that name whom I knew. But now +the likeness is gone," I said. + +"Maybe I ought to be proud thereof," she said coldly enough. + +"I will not say that," I answered. "Let me know your name that I +may remember it." + +"My name is Uldra," she said, without looking at me, and flushing a +little, and then busying herself with the kitten's ears. + +"That is a Norse name, lady," said I. + +"Aye--and a heathen one. But it is the best I have." + +Then I said, feeling that I could not say aright what I would: + +"Lady Uldra, I have to thank you for saving my life today. Yours +was a brave deed." + +She shivered a little, at the thought of what she had done, as I +think, for the heat of anger had gone. + +"I am glad I was of use," she answered. "What are we to do when we +come to land?" + +"I will take you and the sisters to the great nunnery that good St. +Wilfrith founded. There you will be welcomed." + +So I said, but as I looked at her I thought what a prison the +nunnery would be to such a maiden as this. Yet it was all that +could be done. + +"That will be peaceful," she said, but the tears seemed close at +hand. + +Now one of the men spoke to the other, looking back over his +shoulder at him, and then when he was answered he turned to me. + +"Master," he said, "tide serves ill for Selsea, and it will be easy +for us to go straight up the haven to Bosham. The flood tide is +strong in with us. May we do so?" + +"Is there any nunnery there?" I asked. + +"Why, yes, master--a little one." + +There too was Wulfnoth's great house, where I should be welcome, as +I knew. So I asked the sisters if this would suit them. + +"One place is as another to us," they replied. + +So we went on up the haven, and it was a long pull, so that it was +late in the afternoon when we came in sight of the town. + +Now I had said no more to Uldra about ourselves--save for a few +words concerning sea and tides and the like--but had tried to cheer +her, and myself also, by speaking of how Cnut would treat the +queen--namely, that it was most likely to be in high honour, lest +the duke should fall on him. + +But as we sighted our journey's end, I bethought myself. + +"Lady," I said, "is there aught that I can do for you in sending +messages to your folk? There will be chapmen and the like going +Londonwards shortly, when the siege is over." + +"I have no friends there," she said. + +"You shall bid me do what you will for you when I am free to go to +our king again," said I. "There will be some who would know where +you are and how you fare." + +She thanked me, saying nothing but that when the time came, if I +yet remembered her and would ask her, she might give me messages +for those at Peterborough whom she had left, and I promised to do +all I could in bearing them. + +"I cannot forget the maiden who saved my life," I said. + +She made no answer, and the boat shot alongside the little wharf, +where a crowd was gathering quickly to see us come. Many questions +there were when Bertric's men were known. + +There was a kindly-looking monk among his people, and I went to +him, and brought him to the nuns where they and Uldra stood apart +by themselves, while the two men were busy with their folk. + +"Pax vobiscum," he said; "you shall be welcome, my sisters, at our +little nunnery for tonight. Then will we ask the bishop on the +morrow what you had better do." + +Then they were eager to go with him, and I bade them farewell, +bowing, and they turned away. They might say nothing, according to +their rule, Elfric told me, save in need. + +Neither did Uldra speak, though no vow of silence was on her, but +she went with them for a little way. I was rather hurt at this, and +began to go back to the boat, wondering that she had no word of +farewell. + +"Redwald--thane," came a gentle call in her voice, and I turned +sharply. + +She was close to me, and the sisters were waiting for her twenty +paces or so away. + +"Farewell," she said. "I could but thank you for all your care for +us." + +"It has been freely given, lady," I said. "I only grieve that the +journey has ended thus. May it be well with you." + +"I will pray for you, thane, day and night in the nunnery that it +may be so with you," she answered, with a little sort of choking. +"The gratitude of us helpless women to you for your long patience +is more than we can say." + +Then she went swiftly back to the nuns, and they went their way. I +thought that I had not deserved so much. And of this I was sure, +that had not the sisters' dress kept me far from Uldra, I had +forgotten Hertha in her company. Then thought I that there was no +reason why I should remember Hertha any longer. And next, that it +were better that I should think of no maiden at all, at this time. + +Which last seemed wisest, and so I grew discontented, and went down +to the boat and bade the men take my arms and few belongings to +Earl Wulfnoth's house. + +When I came there the steward knew me, and made me very welcome. +The earl was at Pevensea or Shoreham, but Godwine was in and out of +the haven, and would be here ere long. So they told me, and set a +good meal before me. And when I had eaten I lay down on a settle +and slept the long sleep that comes to one wearied in mind and body +alike. If the house had burnt over my head I should not have waked, +for others watched now, and I had no need to wake for aught. + +A man knows those things in his sleep, I verily believe. One ill +dream I had, and that was of Bertric's unlucky kitten, which seemed +to be the queen in some uncanny way. Sometimes I wonder what became +of it. I never learned, but it brought me no more ill luck. + + + +Chapter 12: Among Friends. + + +When I woke it was daylight again. A fire burnt on the hearth in +the middle of the hall, and someone had spread a wolf-skin rug over +me. I had not moved from sunset to sunrise, and I was refreshed and +broad awake at once, wondering at first where I was, and who had +laughed and woke me. + +There was a youth sitting on a table's edge by the wall over +against where I lay, and a big broad-shouldered man leant on it +with folded arms beside him, and at first I stared at them till my +thoughts came back, and they laughed at me again, and then I knew +Godwine and Relf the thane, who had but just come up from their +ship to find me. + +"On my word," said Godwine, "here is a man who could teach one how +to sleep! We have sat here and talked about you for ten minutes or +more." + +"Redwald sleeps as though he had lost time to make up," said Relf. +"Welcome back to us, anyway." + +"Aye--welcome you are," said Godwine warmly, "but how did you come +here?" + +I got up and took their hands, rejoicing to see them. It was good +to be among friends again after the long watching and many dangers. +Then came the steward followed by his men with a mighty breakfast, +and as he set the tables on the high place, Godwine's men trooped +in. They had had to wait for the morning tide into the haven, and +the ship was just berthed. + +"Food first," Relf advised. "Then shall Redwald tell us all he +knows." + +So by and by we sat in the morning sunlight in the courtyard, and I +told them all that had happened from beginning to end. They knew no +more than that Ethelred was dead, and that Cnut was besieging +London. + +"We tried to chase those Danes because they had got our man's +ship," said Godwine. "When we got near enough, for they came down +wind and passed us before long, we found that Bertric was contented +enough, running up his own flag, and the Danes did not stay to +fight. So we came home, only losing our tide by the delay." + +"What would you have done had you known that the queen was on +board, and a prisoner?" I asked. + +"Why, nothing more than we have done," Godwine said. "My father +hates Emma the cat as bitterly as he does Streone the fox, which is +saying a good deal. The cat's claws are clipped now, maybe." + +Well, I knew this, and said nothing. One could expect no more from +Earl Wulfnoth's son. Nor do I think that any loved Emma the queen +much. One may know how a person is thought of by the way in which +folk name them often enough, and though our king would have had his +young wife called by her English name, Elfgiva, none ever did so. +Her Norman, foreign name was all we used. If she had been loved, we +should have rejoiced to name her in our own way. + +Then Godwine said: + +"You have had an ill time with Emma, as I think, if she is all that +my father says." + +"Nay, Godwine," said Relf, "Redwald will not bear much of this. He +is the queen's faithful servant, and will have nought against her, +and he is right." + +"So he is, and I am wrong," said the lad at once. "Forgive me, +friend; I did not think." + +Then I laughed, and turned it off. Godwine was only too right, but +I could not say so. Now, however, I may say that the memory of Emma +the queen's ways is to me as a nightmare. + +"I would that I could meet with this Egil," Godwine said as I gave +him sword Foe's Bane to handle; and then he forgot all else in the +beauty of the weapon. + +"What have you done with the brave maiden?" Relf asked me now. + +"She is in the nunnery here," I said. "She is friendless, having no +folk of her own nearer than Peterborough." + +"That is far off," said Relf, and began to think, twisting his +beard as was his wont when pondering somewhat weighty. + +Now, before he had made up his mind to say any more, Godwine was +ready to hear about the winning back of the sword, and of the +fights in Ulfkytel's land, and then a man came from the ships with +some business, and he went away with him. And by that time Relf had +somewhat to say. + +"Penhurst is a lonesome place, and it will be worse for my wife +when Sexberga is gone," he said musingly. + +"Why, where is your daughter going?" I asked him. + +He looked at me sidewise for a moment, and I thought that his face +fell a little. Then he said: + +"Going to be wedded shortly." + +"That is well," I said. "To whom?" + +Then the thane turned fairly round on me with wide eyes, and a +blank fear fell on me that he meant that I was to wed her. Yet +surely the lady had told him that I was betrothed. + +"Ho!" he said; "did you not know that? Methought everyone did." + +That was worse, and I knew not what he looked for from me. + +"I have been away; I have heard nought," I answered lamely enough. + +"Oh, aye; so you have," he said. "Truly, I forgot that. We quiet +people fancy that all the world knows our affairs. And it was in my +mind that you had a tenderness that way yourself. I knew not how +you would take it." + +Then we both laughed, but it was not a hearty laughter, for each +feared the other a little, as it seemed. + +"I am glad for Sexberga, if she is happy," said I. + +"Why, now, that is well," said Relf. "I had thought that I must +break this matter gently to you." + +"Maybe you would have had to do so had I bided at Penhurst much +longer," said I truly enough. + +"All the same, Redwald, I wish it were you, on my faith," said the +thane, growing red in his earnestness. + +"Thanks therefor," said I. "It is good to hear you say so; but I am +a landless warrior in bad luck, and so it is better as it is. Who +is the man of Sexberga's choice?" + +"Eldred of Dallington," said he. "A good youth enough, and with +lands enough. He has never seen a fight, though," and then he +turned on me suddenly, putting his hand on mine. "I could have +sworn, lad, that you were fond of the girl. Tell me if it is so, +and Eldred shall go down the wind like a strayed hawk, for all I +care." + +I shook my head, but it came over me for a moment that I wished I +might recall the wandering fancies of the winter days in +Penhurst--but that passed, and I was lonely in heart. + +"Nay, thane, that is not so. My sword here is all that I love next +to my king and Olaf my cousin--and Relf the thane. I have no love +for any maiden, nor could Sexberga think twice of me." + +"If you had bided a little longer. Well, then, no hearts are +broken, or so much as awry, and that is well. So, as I was saying, +Penhurst will be lonely directly, and already I love this maiden +with the outland name for saving you. How would she take it if we +gave her shelter with us? I am going back home in a day or two, and +you must come with me." + +The good thane spoke fast, being easier in his mind, as it seemed, +on one point, and not willing to make any show of generosity on the +other. + +"That is a kind thought of yours," I said, being very glad, and not +less so that I could not help rejoicing that I should see more of +Uldra. + +"I wonder what my wife would say?" he said thoughtfully. + +"If I know aught of her kindness, and I think that I have proved it +well," answered I, "she will be glad to help this orphan maiden." + +"Let us go and see her, and ask her to come, therefore," said Relf, +rising up. "I want to thank her, moreover, for saving you." + +I was nowise loath, and so we went along under the trees towards +the nunnery. And as we went Relf talked of Eldred, the Thane of +Dallington, and the wedding that was to come. And all the while I +believe that he was troubling about two things that were mixed in +his mind--fear that I was set aside by Sexberga, and a wish that I +had been the bridegroom. + +Then we knocked on the great door, and he was silent until a sister +looked through the little barred square wicket in the midst of it. + +"We would speak with the Lady Uldra," I said. "I am the thane who +brought her ashore." + +The sister said nought, but shut the wicket door, and left us. We +heard her steps retreating across the little courtyard, and she +shut a door after her somewhere else. Then all was quiet. + +"What does that mean?" Relf said. + +"That we have to wait," said I "that is all. It is the way in which +they treat folk at these places. They would do the same if the +queen came. She has gone to her Superior." + +"What would Emma say?" chuckled Relf, looking slyly at me. + +"One cannot say much to an iron-barred oak door." + +"But there are thanes and such-like left outside," he said, +laughing more yet. "Now Godwine is not here, I dare say that you +have felt, more than once, the queen's tongue for nought." + +"I will deny it," said I, "to anyone but Elfric the abbot," whereat +he laughed till the tears came into his eyes. He had known our +queen in the old days before Streone's treachery. + +I was glad that the wicket flew open again. Relf stayed his +laughter in a moment, and became very grave. + +"What would she say now?" he whispered. + +"Enough," I said, for the sister, having seen that we waited, +unbarred the gate and let us in. Then she pointed to a door on our +right, and went away. + +I took Relf's arm and led him to this door--for he was going to +follow the sister--and we opened it. It led into a small +high-roofed chamber, that had a great crucifix painted in bright +colours on the east wall, and pictured legends on the rest, between +high narrow windows. + +But there stood Uldra, no longer in convent dress, but in some robe +of dark blue and crimson that became her well, so that at first I +hardly knew her, for now for the first time I saw her bright brown +hair that the novice's hood had hidden from me. I could not say +that Uldra was fair as Sexberga to look on, but, as ever, I thought +that her face was the sweetest that I had seen in all my life. + +I was a little abashed before this grave and stately maiden, who +was the same, and yet not the same, as she who had been through so +much danger and trial with me, and I could not find a word to say +at first. Nor could she, as it seemed, and so we looked at one +another until she smiled. It was only for a moment, however, for +when her face lighted up thus, Relf found his voice and spoke. + +"I have come to thank you, lady, for saving my comrade's life +yesterday," he said, taking her hand and kissing it. "I had lost a +good friend but for you, he tells me." + +"But for the thane, your friend, I know not what would have become +of us," she answered. "The thanks are from me to him, rather." + +"Yet I think that I owe you somewhat," Relf said, "and now I am +minded to try to show that I would thank you in deed, and not in +word only." + +He paused, and Uldra looked at me as if asking if I could throw any +light on this stranger's meaning. + +"Relf, the Thane of Penhurst, is he who gave me shelter and care +when I was hurt in a fight and a flood last winter," I said. "He +has indeed been a good friend to me." + +"Not I," said Relf; "you fought for me. It was my wife and +Sexberga, my daughter, who tended you." + +Now at that name, which she already knew, the maiden looked quickly +away from me, and a little flush began to creep up into her face, +with pleasure as it would seem. + +"I have heard of your daughter Sexberga already," she said to Relf +with a little smile. + +"Why, that is well," he said. "Now, after her wedding my wife will +be sorely lost for want of a companion, and I would ask you to come +home to Penhurst with us, and bide there until you may seek your +friends again--or as long as you wish. And glad shall we be of your +help at the wedding feast." + +So he spoke cheerfully, trying to make all the honour come from +her, as kindness to himself and his wife. But though the tears came +into Uldra's eyes at the good thane's plain meaning, she was silent +yet, save that she said: + +"I know not how to thank you for your goodwill to me." + +"Nay," he said; "but my wife will blame me if you come not. 'Here,' +she will say, 'is the companion whom I needed, and a friend of our +Redwald's, moreover, and you have not brought her.' I pray you, +come with us. Do you ask her, Redwald; I am rough, and you are +courtly." + +Then I said: + +"Lady, this is all that Elfric would wish for you. I cannot tell +you of the great kindness that is waiting for you in the thane's +home." + +And for answer she turned away and began to weep, and Relf could +bear that not at all, and he went to her and put his arm round her, +as he would have done to Sexberga, and tried to reassure her. + +"Why," he said, "here is nought to weep about, maiden. Maybe we are +homely people, but I think that you may learn to be happier in +freedom with us than here. Nay, but weep not so bitterly, you shall +be as our daughter to us if you will, for Redwald's life's sake. +Aye, you shall have Sexberga's own chamber and all that--" + +But still Uldra wept, and I was unhappy to see her do so. This +could not be all for sudden relief from doubt as I had thought at +first. + +Then she took herself gently from the thane's arm, and dried her +eyes, and clasped her hands tightly before her, and said: + +"I cannot say how I thank you; but I must bide here." + +"This is a cold place," said the thane. "It is no home for you." + +"I think it will be so in the end," she said very sadly. + +And I tried hard to think of somewhat to say that might persuade +her, but there was that meaning in her voice that seemed to stay +whatever came to me. I thought that she had made up her mind to +take the veil, and there are few things that will turn a maiden +from that when once she has chosen it. + +Then said Relf: + +"Maybe I ask you too suddenly, lady. Let us leave it till tomorrow, +and I pray you think with all kindness of the matter, for I shall +be sorely grieved if you will not come." + +And I said the same as well as I could, but though she promised to +give her answer in the morning, it was plain to me that it would be +even as she said now. + +Then we took our leave of her, and found our way out of the place, +somewhat down-hearted. The door was bolted after us, though I do +not know who did it, or whence the portress watched our going. And +it was dismal to hear the great bars jarring in their sockets. + +"Poor maid," said Relf. "Why does she choose such a prison?" + +"Those dismal nuns have talked her into it," said I angrily. + +"Maybe. It is a way they have," the thane said. "'Come in here!' +said the rat in the trap to the rat outside, 'one is safe from the +cat behind these bars.'" + +So we walked on for a little, and then he said: + +"How did she hear of Sexberga? I thought you had had no speech with +her on the journey." + +"Nor had I," I answered. "I thought she was another silent nun. But +I thought she was like Sexberga, and so I called her Sister +Sexberga to myself, giving her a name in my thoughts. Then in the +boat it slipped out unawares when I had to speak to her, and she +asked to be told why I called her so." + +"As much like Sexberga as you are like Godwine, which is not at +all," said Relf laughing. "Was she pleased?" + +"Why, I think not," I answered. + +"How much more about Sexberga did you tell her?" he asked. + +"Nothing, there was no need." + +Then Relf began to chuckle to himself, and I could not tell why. +But presently he said: + +"Did you give the sisters names likewise?" + +"Yes, I did. I do not think I should have cared to say what they +were," I answered, laughing also. + +He said no more about this, and we came to the hall, and then went +to find Godwine at the ships. But I could not but feel disappointed +that Uldra would not come with us. And that was not all for her own +sake, as I found when I came to turn over my thoughts a little. I +would fain see more of the maiden who had borne peril so well, and +had stood so bravely at my side. + +Now when Godwine heard how our errand had failed, he laughed at +Relf's downcast looks and said, scanning my weatherbeaten and +forest-worn garments: + +"Maidens love to see warriors go in bright array. She is tired of +those old weeds of Redwald's. We must fit him out afresh in the +morning, and then she will listen maybe." + +He was so pleased with this boyish wisdom of his own, being fully +persuaded that he was right, that he and I must ride together to +Chichester with morning light, and find new gear for me. + +"We roll in riches since you fell into the pit," he said, when I +would pay for what I had with my last piece of gold. "And you must +keep that one; there are more due to you yet as I think." + +Nor would he be denied in this, and it is not a warrior's part to +take an earl's gifts grudgingly. And when I fairly shone in bright +array from head to foot, he must needs add a wonderful round +brooch, silver and gold wrought, with crimson garnets at the ends +and in the spaces of the arms of a cross of inlaid pearl and +enamel, such as one seldom sees. + +"It is a Kentish brooch," he said, "so shall men know that you are +a friend of the earls of Kent and Sussex." + +That was an earl's giving indeed, but Godwine is ever open handed, +and I am not alone in learning how he will give. + +"Now we must go back, and you shall seek this damsel again since +old Relf is so set thereon. As for you, it is likely that you have +had trouble enough with her already, and will care little if she +will not come," he said, and looked me over from head to foot as we +stood outside the chapman's house in the wide place where the four +roads cross in Chichester town. + +"My faith!" he added, "I believe that even Emma the Cat would mind +what you told her now!" + +"Lord earl," said I, "you will make me vain." + +"Earl, forsooth!" he cried, "the clothes have made you mighty +courtly all at once. Godwine and Redwald are going back to Bosham, +and the earl bides at Chichester Cross--mind you that!" + +And he swung himself on his horse laughing, and we rode away, while +the people shouted, for they had gathered in twos and threes to +look on him. + +Now when we came back to the great house, there was Relf sitting on +the bench where we had sat yesterday, and he looked as if he had +had good news. + +"Now, thane," said Godwine, "here is a new messenger to your +sorrowful damsel." + +Relf stared at me and laughed, and when I got off my horse Godwine +would have us go at once. So Relf took my arm and we went, while +the young earl joked us till we were out of hearing. + +"Now," said the thane, "we will not spoil the earl's jest, but must +even let him think that all has been his doing thus." + +"Why, he will see us start for Penhurst, and if Uldra is not +there--" + +"Aye, but she will be. She is coming gladly," Relf said. + +"How is this?" I asked. + +"Just that I have been to see the maiden while you were gone, and I +spoke to her as to a daughter, and so she is coming." + +"You would not wait for me, then?" I said, being glad that he had +managed without me, as things had turned out. + +"Methought I could do better alone. The girl would say more to me +than if you were there, perhaps. Moreover, I had a notion why she +would not come, and I wanted to ask her if I was right. And I was." + +"I thought of that," said I; "she was in the same plight as myself +until Godwine decked me out thus. Women think more of their attire +than we." + +The thane chuckled in his quiet way. + +"Why, perhaps that had somewhat to do with it, but I did not ask +her, I forgot. But I did tell the old Lady Superior to do so, and +gave her withal to care for the maiden." + +Then I said: + +"It is well that you persuaded her; maybe I should have been in the +way. I should have lost my tongue again, I think." + +"Well, yes," said Relf, still laughing to himself, "it was you who +were in the way; however, as you say, all is well, and she rides +with us tomorrow. We will go and find a mule or a good forest pony +for her, and so tell Godwine that the clothes have done it." + +Now I never thought that there was anything more behind the thane's +words, for of all things that had made my soul weary in these last +weeks the complaints of Emma the queen about her dress had been the +worst. So this seemed to me to be quite enough to explain Uldra's +first refusal, and though I believe that Relf had been on the point +of telling me more, he forbore, and let this suffice. + +Relf knew where to look for a beast, and we soon had a good bay +pony, that was quiet enough and strong, sent to Godwine's stables. +And then Relf told the earl what he had done. + +"Then I was right," said Godwine gleefully. "I will warrant that +you two wise heads would never have thought thereof." + +"Are you coming with us?" I asked him, for I did not care to have +to find answers to many questions about our speech with Uldra, as +things were. + +"I am coming by sea presently with two ships," he said. "I shall +wait till Bertric comes back, and so maybe shall have news of your +queen to tell you. He should not be long. Relf goes back for the +early hay time, he says, but I believe that he is tired of the +sea." + +"I am no sailor, lord," the thane said. + +"As any of my crew will tell you," Godwine said merrily. + +"Never, Redwald, was any man so undone as Relf when there is a +little sea on. A common forest deer thief could tie him up." + +"I should have thanked one for slaying me at times," said Relf +grimly. "I prefer solid ground to shifty deck planks." + +So whether it was love of home or loathing of sea that took him +back to Penhurst, Relf and I left Godwine on the next morning; and +at the nunnery door waited Uldra, looking bright and cheerful and +greeting us gladly as we came. And it seemed to me that her +troubles had passed from her, and that she was indeed glad to be +leaving the walls of the place that was so prison-like. + +Now that was a fair and pleasant ride over the Downs and among the +forest paths through Sussex, and I look back on it as the brightest +time that I had had in all the long years of trouble. The joy of +going back to my old home at Bures had been clouded with the +knowledge of loss, and with the sight of the trail of war. But here +were none of these things. + +We rode with twenty housecarles of Relf's behind us, and it was a +new thing to me that I should see the wayside folk run out into the +trackway to see us pass; that the farm thralls in the fields should +but rise up, straightening stiffened backs and laughing, and stay +their work for a moment to watch us; that no man who met us should +ask with anxious face, "What news of the Danes?" + +New it was, and most pleasant to Uldra also, for she had come +through all the harried land, where the click of steel or the glint +of armour had bidden the poor folk fly in terror, so that one rode +through silent and deserted villages, and past farms where nought +but the dogs told of life about the place. And that was what I had +seen over all England since Swein of Denmark landed, so long ago. +Men will hardly believe it now. Relf could hardly believe us as we +told him. Yet today, were I to ride into an East Saxon village +shouting "The Danes!" there are men who would cast down tools and +all else that they were busied with, and clutch at the weapons that +rust on the wall before thought could come to them. For the terror +of these years cannot pass from England yet while any man is alive +who knew it. + +Now there was another pleasure for me, and that was to watch Uldra +growing brighter and happier day by day. It was wonderful to me to +see this, and with me she was ever frank and open, never wearying +of speaking of our former journey and its troubles, for we could +smile at them now. And Relf grew very fond of her in those few +days, as one might see. Nor do I know how anyone could help doing +so. Even the rough housecarles would watch for a chance of doing +some little service for her. + +And yet, as I have said, Uldra was not the fairest maiden that I +had seen. Men are apt to think that the fairest must ever be the +best, and a man learns that it is not so only by degrees, maybe. +And when I looked on Uldra's face it began to seem to me the best +that could be, and ever to me it would seem that I knew it well. +For some look of hers that should be new to me was not new--I had +expected it in some way, and should have wondered not to see it +cross her face. And so in gesture and in word also. So that she +seemed already well known to me, and why this was I could not say, +and at times it troubled me as puzzling things will. But, all the +same, I loved to find myself so puzzled. + +Thus, by the time we came over the great spur of the Downs that +ends in Beachy Head, and looked over all Pevensea level to the +Penhurst woods and hills beyond, I and Uldra were very good +friends, and Relf was pleased that it should be so, and rode +between us in high content. + +It was midday when we passed the last hill of the Downs where the +mighty giant lies like a shadow on the grass by Wilmington; then we +saw the gray castle where Wulfnoth bided, away to our right; and +then along the steep ridge inland and down to Boreham, where I must +tell the maiden of the great sea wave, and how Olaf saved me. And +so we came to Penhurst in its valley among the trees, and the ride +was over. + +Now there is no need to say what welcome was at that house, whether +for its lord, or for the warrior who had been nursed back to life +there, or for the new-come homeless maiden. Relf was not wrong when +he told her that she should be as a daughter in the house. + +Some of the men had ridden on, so that the homecoming feast should +be spread for us, and there was the lady at the courtyard gates, +and with her Sexberga, and a tall, handsome young thane, whom I +knew for Eldred of Dallington; and there was Father Anselm, and +Spray the smith, and many more whose faces I was glad to see again. + +And among all those faces were nought but welcoming looks--save +from one only. I did not note this, being taken up with watching +how they greeted Uldra, for that seemed to me to be the only thing +that I cared about. If I had any thought of Sexberga now, it was as +if she had been my sister, and I hoped that she would be pleased +with the maiden who was thus brought to her unlooked for. I need +have troubled nought about that, however, for she and her mother +were alike in many things, and if I was sure of the one, so might I +have been of the other in all that had to do with kindness. + +But if I had looked beyond Sexberga to where her young thane stood +I should have met with a black scowl enough, though I could not +have told why this should be his greeting for me. I had but seen +him once before, and that was at Earl Wulfnoth's feast to Olaf when +we first came. + +That was an evening to be remembered as most pleasant when, after +the feast, we sat and spoke of all that had happened since I left +Penhurst. I told them all the tale of warfare, and of Olaf's deeds, +and of the winning back of my sword, and how that helped our +meeting with Egil. + +And when Spray the smith, who sat listening, with the other men in +the hall below the high place, heard of that escape from the Danes, +he said, without ceremony: + +"Master, well I knew that you would never be cast into prison." + +"That was a saying of yours, Spray," said I. "May the luck last." + +Then Uldra would tell the story of our journey in her way, and my +name came pretty often into her tale. So, looking about the hall +while she spoke, my eyes lit on Eldred, and it seemed that he was +ill at ease, and displeased with somewhat. I thought that he would +rather be sitting nearer Sexberga, maybe, and troubled nought about +him, though I did think that he showed his ill temper over plainly +in his face. + +Now, in all this story telling there was one thing about which I +said nothing, and that was my search for Hertha. It seemed to me +that there was no need for doing so, and moreover, I would tell the +lady thereof in private at some time. And I was glad that Sexberga +asked me nought about it. I do not think that she had forgotten it, +but she had her own reasons for saying nought of the matter, which +were foolish enough when I found them out. The lady, her mother, +waited for me to say what I would in my own way when I thought +right. + + + +Chapter 13: Jealousy. + + +That generous foe of mine, Egil--if indeed I should not call him my +friend, as he named me once--had set two months as the time in +which I must bide in peace, and I will not say that this space +seemed likely to go over-heavily for me. We could hear little news +except from such ships as put in from along the coast, and the +first news that came was when Godwine returned from Bosham. + +The Danes had taken the queen to Winchester in high honour, and +there she was living in some sort of state, which pleased her well +enough, until word came from Cnut concerning her. It was thought +that he would let her go back to Normandy, keeping the athelings as +hostages. So concerning her and them my mind was at rest. + +Now Cnut was besieging London. But before he had left Wessex, there +had been a great council of bishops and clergy at Salisbury, and at +that gathering he had been chosen as king in succession to +Ethelred, whose house was not loved. There, too, he was present, +and swore to be their faithful king and to protect Holy Church in +all things. + +Then into Wessex went Eadmund, ravaging and laying waste there. One +might know what hatred of him would come from that, and my heart +sank at hearing this folly. + +Two days after Godwine came, we saw the sails of a great fleet +going westward, and we thought that Cnut had been beaten off from +London. But a ship that had sprung a leak in some way put into +Wulfnoth's haven at Shoreham from this fleet, and from thence we +learnt that the Danes had halved their forces, and that Cnut and +Ulf the jarl were going again into the Severn to withstand Eadmund +in Wessex, and if possible to hem him in between two forces in the +old way of the days of Alfred. London was beset straitly, but not +taken yet. + +I was more content then, for I could not have reached our king, had +I returned from Normandy, as it seemed. And now it was possible +that he might make headway against the divided forces of the Danes. +I might join him yet in time to share in some final victory. + +So the early summer days at Penhurst became very pleasant to me, +for I had little care that need sit heavily on my mind. Indeed, I +think that I should almost have forgotten that I had any, but for +the foolishness of Sexberga, which bid fair to turn all things to +sadness at one time. + +I had spoken with her mother about my search for Hertha, telling +her plainly all that had passed between me and Ailwin, and I asked +her to tell me what she thought I must do now. + +"Wait yet longer," she answered; "peace will come, and he will +bring Hertha back to Bures." + +That ought to have been my own plan, but I had rather hoped to hear +her say that I was right in holding myself free to choose afresh as +I would. The thought of being bound seemed irksome to me; though +why I, landless and luckless, should have found it so, I could not +say. It mattered not at all at present. So I said: + +"That is all one can do, lady; it matters not." + +"What thinks Sexberga?" I asked presently. + +"You have not spoken to her of your search, then?" the lady said. +"I had thought that she would ask you of it first of all." + +She had asked nothing, and I had said nothing. + +Then the lady said: + +"She and I spoke thereof with Uldra but yesterday, and they were +both full of your praises for wishing to seek for your Hertha. They +will be glad to hear that you have done so, and sad that you have +failed to find her." + +Then there came over me a wish that Uldra knew nought about it. And +that angered me with myself, because it was plain that I cared +overmuch for the company and pleasant voice and looks of this +maiden who was friendless as I. + +So that was all that was said at the time, and I met Uldra in my +foolishness as if this were going to make some difference in her +way with me. Which of course it did not. Whereupon I was angrier +yet with myself for deeming that it would. + +Now, there was another person who should have known of this +betrothal of mine, and that was Edred, but Sexberga never told him, +and her mother did not, for she thought that Sexberga would do so. + +Of all the foolish things that a maiden can do, the most foolish is +to try to make the man who is to wed her jealous. For it is playing +with edged tools in two ways--if the man, being an honest man and +trustful, is not jealous, the maiden thinks that he cares not, and +so is herself wretched. But if he is jealous, why, then every +thought of his towards the maiden is changed and spoilt, and it +will be long, if ever, before full trust is won again between those +two. + +But this seems to be good sport to some damsels, and so it was with +Sexberga. The blacker grew the young thane's looks the more she +would praise me, and the more she would choose to speak with me +rather than to him; wherefore his life was made wretched for him, +and I think he hated the sight of me. Maybe I was blind not to see +this, but I liked him well enough, save for what I thought was his +sullen temper, and I would try to joke him into better humour at +times in all good fellowship. But I think that the trouble began +before I came back, with talk of the time when I had been at +Penhurst before. + +He was ever at Penhurst--I should have thought ill of him if he had +not been--for Dallington was close at hand, and he was ever +welcome. + +After that talk with the lady I must needs ask Sexberga what she +thought concerning my strange betrothal, she having had so much to +say thereon before. And so one day, as I had been with Spray to see +some traps set by the bank of the Ashbourne river for otter, and was +coming back with him, bearing a great one between us on a pole, we +met Sexberga in the woodland track to the house, and Spray went on, +while I walked back with her on her way to the old village--where +we had had the fight--and talked about my baffled search. + +Now her saying was that I had no need to pay any more heed to this +betrothal after what I had said to Ailwin, and that he himself +would seem to try to break it by thus taking Hertha out of my ken. +And we talked freely of the matter, and the last thing that I said +was this, coming round to what I had made up my better mind for: + +"It is not much matter either way. I can think of no maiden as +things are." + +Whereon we met Eldred, and his face was not pleasant to look on, +though he said nothing at that moment, and turned and walked +silently with us on the other side of the maiden. + +When we came to the village I said that we would wait outside until +she came back, and thought that Eldred would go along with her. But +he stayed with me, and I looked round for a sunny seat where one +could see all the long chain of bright hammer ponds that went in +steps, as it were, down the valley before us. + +"Nay," he said in a strange voice, "come over to the other side of +the valley--there is a pleasant place there." + +"The lady will miss us," said I. + +"We need not be long," he said. "The place I would show you is not +far. One of us can be back before she has done with these churls." + +So, as I supposed that we might have to wait for half an hour, +because every woman in the place would want to tell her ailments to +the kindly young mistress most likely, we went together, passing +over the brook, and going up the steep valley side beyond it, until +we came to the rocks of the old quarry where we had rested before +the fight with the outlaws. + +A pleasant place enough it was, truly, for the rocks stood round in +a little cliff, hemming in a lawn of short grass on every side but +one, and the trees that hung on the bank of the stream closed that +in. So when we were fairly within this circle of red cliff and +green trees Eldred said: + +"This will do. We will see which of us is to go back to Sexberga." + +"Why, you will," said I, thinking that he had some device by which +he might be free from my presence. "I spoil company for you both, +and will go back to the hall by the lower track presently." + +"You have spoilt company long enough," he said, his face growing +very savage of a sudden. "Now I will end it, one way or the other." + +"What is this foolishness?" I said, seeing now what he meant. + +"You know well enough," he answered with a great oath. "Pluck out +that fine sword of yours and show that you can do more than talk of +using it." + +"Come, Eldred," said I, "I have not deserved this." + +"You deserve all that I shall give you," he answered, drawing his +sword. "Stand up like a man." + +Now it seemed very hard to me that all these friendships should be +broken and spoilt by this foolish business, as they would be if +either of us was hurt; and so I tried to quiet him yet once more. + +"Eldred, listen to reason," I said. "I have done you no wrong. Tell +me of what you complain." + +Thereat he only cursed, bidding me draw and cease prating. + +"I will not fight you thus," I said, for he was growing over wild +to fight well for himself. "Let us find some to attend us and watch +the business, that neither of us may be blamed. It is ill to slay a +man in a hidden place like this with none to say that the fight was +fair." + +"You are afraid," he said sneeringly. + +"You must ask Relf if that is likely," said I, for I would not be +angered by his angry words. "But I do not care to risk blame to you +or me. Nought is gained by fighting thus." + +"Ask Relf, forsooth!" he snarled. "I care not to hear again how you +lay hid in the pit yonder while others fought." + +"Have a care, Eldred," I said then. "You grow heedless in your +anger, and go too far. I do not think that you mean this." + +"Do you need to be called nidring {12}?" he snarled at me. + +Now none heard that word pass between us, and though it made me +bitterly angry I kept my wrath back. Truly I began to think that I +was foolish to argue with him; but there would be grief, lifelong, +at Penhurst if deadly harm befell either of us where none could say +that all was fairly fought out. + +"Are you not going?" he said in a choking sort of way. + +"No," I said, "not until I know what all this is about." + +"What good in going over that again?" he answered. "You know well +enough. Let me be--you have won." + +"I know," said I; "but you have not told me aught. I can only guess +that you think that I have taken your place with Sexberga." + +"Aye--and now you have won it." + +"I want it not," I answered. "Had you not been so angry you would +have known that, when I bid you go back and meet her without me." + +Now he looked at me with a sort of doubt, and said, in a somewhat +halting way: + +"I heard you just now tell her that it could not be that you could +think of her--as things are." + +Then I remembered what my last words had been, and I saw that they +might easily have misled him after all the trouble he seemed to +have had. + +"You heard too much or too little," said I, being minded to laugh, +though the matter was over serious to him to let me do so. "I spoke +of my own troubles, which were the less because my fortunes prevent +my thinking of any maiden, seeing that I have no home to give a +wife when I find her. You were wrong in thinking that I spoke of +Sexberga--I spoke, as you might have known, of the one whom I have +lost." + +"How should I know that? I know nought of your affairs." + +Then thought I to myself that I would punish Sexberga, for she had +tortured this honest lover of hers over much. + +"I will not tell you that tale. Ask Sexberga, who has known it from +the first." + +Then I was sorry for what I had said, for he flushed darkly. + +"I have been made a fool of," he said. + +"Nay; but you should have been more trustful," said I. "Now, were I +in your place, I would go home to Dallington and bide there for a +week, and the maiden will be pleased enough to see you when you +return. And if she tries to make you jealous again, seem to mind it +not. There is little sport in it for her then." + +"I suppose there would not be," said he, and he began to look more +cheerful. + +"Now," said I, "I was betrothed long ago--the war time has come +between me and her who should have been my wife. I have hunted for +her and cannot find her--and that is all. Now you understand. It +was Sexberga who cheered me in my search, and so I spoke to her +thereof." + +"I should not have doubted you," he said frankly; "forgive me." + +I held out my hand and he took it. There was nought but +friendliness in his grasp, and I could not blame him. I blamed +Sexberga wholly. + +Then he laughed a little ruefully. + +"I am a fool with a sword," he said. "Will you teach me somewhat? I +think I was mad when I used those evil words to you." + +"I have forgotten them," I answered; and so I had. One does not +think much of what a man says in utmost rage as his. "Come, let us +go back to the village." + +So we went back together, but Sexberga had gone on her way homeward +without us. Whereat Eldred was not sorry, and said that he was +going back to his own place. + +"You will see me no more for a few days," he said. "I think your +plan is good." + +"Mind this," I answered, "I never tried it." + +"Lookers-on see best," he answered, laughing bitterly. "But think +no more of my anger with yourself, I pray you." + +I told him that I would not, and so we parted good friends enough, +though I feared that he might take this matter to heart in such +wise that he would have some ill moments presently. There was +little spring in his walk as he took the path towards Dallington. + +I said nought of this affair, as one might suppose, and made little +excuse to Sexberga for leaving her. We had walked too far, and had +returned too late to find her, I said. She pouted and said nothing, +but I thought that her punishment had already begun. + +Next day there were ships heading in for Pevensea, and I rode away +to find out what I could, and forgot Eldred and his troubles. For +Olaf had come, and that was luck beyond what I could have looked +for. + +The ten great ships slid into the haven, and I was first on the +strand to meet the king. Wulfnoth and Godwine were riding inland, +and doubtless were returning posthaste if they knew that ships had +come. But for a little while I had my kinsman to myself, and great +was his wonder to find me in this place. + +"I have thought that I should have to ransom you from Cnut's hand," +he said, "for we have heard that Thorkel's men took the queen's +ship. Were you not taken likewise?" + +So when he heard of all that had brought me here, he praised Egil +highly. + +"He is a Norseman, and no Dane, by birth," he said. "One may be +proud that he is so. I would that he were my man." + +Then was my turn, and I wondered how Olaf had left London, for the +Thames was full of Danish ships, as I had heard. + +"Aye, so it is yet," he told me. "The Danes cannot take the city, +try what they will, though they dug a great ditch round the +Southwark fort, and took ships through it above the bridge, and so +kept us shut up close enough. But walls and forts and citizens are +too much for them. Now the siege is but a blind, while the real +warfare is to be in Wessex. So I came away with the Danes, my men +being tired of unprofitable warfare where we were not wanted, and +gaining, moreover, neither gold nor honour." + +"You came away with the Danes?" I cried. "Surely you made no pact +with them?" + +"Not I," said he. "But they sailed with an evening tide, which was +my chance. Ten ships among four hundred or so make no odds. We took +off the dragon heads, and when it was quite dark rowed down after +them, and so caught them up at Greenwich. Then we slipped through +the fleet easily, for it was mostly of cargo ships full of men, and +no one paid any heed to us, as might be supposed. So by daylight we +led the fleet, or nearly, and when the next night came we stood +away from it, going across Channel. Then I came here to see if +Wulfnoth or Godwine would cruise with me on some other shore, as I +promised." + +Then I asked him what I had better do, for with the sight of his +face came the longing to be free again. + +"Come with me," he said. "I am going to win ransom from a town or +two against the time when I shall need gold wherewith to win men to +me in Norway." + +I think that I should have done this in the end, though I did not +like to leave England without striking one more blow for Eadmund, +and I cannot deny that I thought that Uldra would blame me if I did +leave our land when she needed every sword that would strike for +her. I had come to think very much of what the steadfast eyes of +the brave maiden would tell me as I watched her face. + +But that evening came Wulfnoth and Godwine, and they had made a +plan for themselves which might help me to reach Eadmund when my +freedom came. They had manors on the Severn, at Berkeley, and the +earl would go there to save them if possible from plunder. At +least, that is what he told me and Olaf. Whether he had any other +deeper plan I cannot say. It seemed afterwards as if that might be +so. + +They brought back some strange news, too, at which both Olaf and I +wondered. There was a rumour spreading through the country from +Winchester that Cnut would wed Emma the queen. + +"It is not likely," said Olaf. "She is twenty years older than he." + +"If any man wants revenge on Cnut, I would counsel him to go and do +all he can to see that this marriage comes to pass," sneered the +earl, in his hatred of the Norman lady. + +"What says Redwald?" asked Godwine. + +"First, that the queen has little choice in the matter," said I; +"and next, that, between ourselves, I think that she would do much +to remain a queen in truth, if it must be over Denmark instead of +England; and lastly, that if Cnut weds her, he keeps the duke, her +brother, quiet, and maybe brings over more of our people to his +side." + +It was only too plain now that Cnut had a party for him in England, +and I thought that he tried to strengthen it thus, if the report +were true. But it seemed hardly possible; so much so, that when I +turned the question over in speaking with Olaf presently, we +thought that no man could have invented the story, and that it must +be true. + +Now Olaf and I went to Penhurst on the next day, for though he +would not stop long in England, he would see and thank these good +friends of mine for their care of me. And great was the rejoicing +when he came. + +I had told him of Uldra, and presently he bade Ottar, who was with +us, sing of Leavenheath fight, and so spoke quietly with her, +sitting a little apart in the shadow of the hall, for he wished to +tell her also that he owed her thanks. + +When the end of the long summer day came, and he must go back to +the ships--for he would not sleep away from them--I went with him +in order to see all that I might of him before he left, for I had +made up my mind to go westward with Godwine, seeing that my promise +to Egil was to bide in peace with Wulfnoth till the time came when +I was free. + +So as we rode with no other near us, he said: + +"What of Hertha, my cousin?" + +"I know not," I answered. "I have heard nought, nor shall I now +till I go back to Bures." + +"Shall you hold to your betrothal?" + +"Aye; the ladies think that it is my part to do so." + +"So you asked them? Is that why fair Sexberga is so dull and +restless?" + +I laughed, for he had heard Ottar jesting about the fair maid at +Penhurst more than once. + +"No," I answered. "She has been crossing her lover, and he is in +dudgeon for a while--that is all." + +"I am glad," he said. "Asked you aught of Uldra?" + +"I have not spoken of it to her." + +"Is that so?" said Olaf, smiling. "Now she is likely to have more +than common interest in you, for one reason or another." + +Then I said frankly, knowing what he meant: + +"And I in her. That is partly the reason why I must go with +Wulfnoth and Godwine westward. And the rest of the reason is this, +that I would be near Eadmund. And maybe if I looked to find more +reason yet it would be to leave Sexberga to work out matters +without having me to fall back on when Eldred is to be made +jealous." + +Thereat Olaf laughed long. + +"You have had an ill time with the womenfolk of late," he said, and +it was true enough. + +"I have," said I, "and I am tired thereof. I shall be glad to be +where byrnies and swords are more common than kirtles and +distaffs." + +Yet in my mind I knew that I should not leave Uldra with much +cheerfulness. Such companionship as ours had been, strange and full +of peril, was a closer bond than even the care of me that had made +me think twice or more about Sexberga. Thoughts of her came lightly +in idleness, but when I thought of Uldra, there was comradeship +that had borne the strain of peril. + +Now I knew well what that comradeship might easily ripen into, and +maybe, because I knew it, what I would not allow had begun. But +Uldra had never given me any reason to think that this was so with +her. + +Olaf said that maybe I was right, and after that we talked of his +doings, wondering now when we should meet again, for we were going +different ways. Our parting was not as it had been before, when we +knew that sooner or later we should forgather in one place or the +other. + +"I think, my cousin," he said, "that the time will soon come when I +shall head north again for Norway, and I long for the sign that I +must go. I am going to sail now towards Jerusalem Land, that I may +at least try to see the Holy Places before I die. It may be that I +shall reach that land, and it may be not, but when the sign comes I +must turn back and go to fight the last fight that shall be between +Christian and heathen in our country." + +So he said to me before his ship sailed with the morning tide. And +I had no words in which to answer him, for his going seemed to +leave me friendless again, so much had we been at one together. +Almost had I taken up that journey to the Holy Land with him, but I +thought that if it was a good and pious thing to go on that +pilgrimage for myself, it was even more so to bide for the sake of +king and country here in the land that should be holy for all of us +who are English. And when I said that to Olaf, he smiled brightly +and answered: + +"If old Norway called for me, I would say the same. You are right." + +Thus we parted, and I watched his sails fade and sink into the rim +of the southern sea, and then rode back to Relf feeling as if the +time to come had little brightness for me. + +I went slowly, and by the longer way, for I had much to think of, +and I cared not just yet for the light talk of the happy people in +the Penhurst hall. And so I came into the way that leads across the +woodland through Ashburnham and so by the upper hammer ponds to +Penhurst, and when I was about a mile from the hall I met Uldra +coming from a side track. + +"Why, thane," she said in her bright way, "is aught amiss?" + +"I have lost my kinsman, lady," I said, "and I have none other left +me. Therefore I am sad enough. But these things must be, and the +shadow of parting will pass presently." + +I got off my horse and walked beside her, and I was glad that I had +met her first of all. She had been to some sick thrall, and was now +returning. + +"Partings are hard," she said, "but one may always hope to meet +again." + +Then I said, speaking my thoughts: + +"I must go west into Wessex with the earl's ships, and I have more +partings to come therefore." + +She made no answer at once, and I thought that none was needed; but +when she spoke again her voice was graver than before. + +"You would be near our king if possible by doing so?" + +"That is my thought," I answered. "If I wait in this pleasant place +I may be far from him when the day comes that I should stand at his +side again." + +"You have six weeks--not so much by two days--yet," she said +thoughtfully. "It is not long. Then you will be fighting once +more." + +"I hope so--and not in vain at last," I answered. "All our land +longs for peace." + +"Aye, and they tell me that you have a search to make," she said, +looking away across the woodlands that lay down the valley to our +right. "I fear there will be sorrow if--if you fall." + +"Aye, I have a search that has been made hard for me," I said +somewhat bitterly. "Truly I had not thought of falling; but it is +in my mind that little grief will be in that quarter if I do so. +Those who might have ended the search in an hour or two have kept +their charge more deeply hidden than ever from me." + +"Is that the maiden's doing, think you?" she said, hesitating a +little, for the question was not an easy one for her to put, maybe. +But it was like her to make excuse for others. + +"I cannot tell," said I, "but I think it likely. We were but +children, and she fears me now." + +"That is to be seen," she said; "but I hope that you will find her. +What shall you do if--if she loves you not now?" + +"I would let her go free, surely." + +"Even if you found you loved her yet?" + +"Aye. I would not hold her bound were she unwilling." + +"But if it were the other way--if she would wed you willingly, and +you--well, were unwilling?" + +"I would keep troth," said I; "she should not know it." + +She laughed softly and answered: + +"You could not hide that from her." + +Then I fell silent, for I liked not this subject at any time--still +less from Uldra. And I think that she saw that I was displeased at +her questioning, for after a little while she said shyly: + +"I think that I have asked you too closely about your affairs. +Forgive me--women are anxious about such matters." + +"It is a trouble to me, lady," I said, hardening my heart lest I +should say too much; "but I can see no further than the coming +warfare. When that is ended there will be time for me to think more +thereof. But, as I have said, I believe that Hertha wishes that she +were not bound." + +Now I had almost said "even as I wish," but I stopped in time. + +"Now, whether that is so or not, she should think well of you for +your faith kept to her," Uldra said, and there was a little shake +in her voice as of tears close at hand. + +Then I knew that if she kept faith with me as I with her--though +this was in a poor way enough--I must think well of her also. +Wherefore, being obliged thus to think of one another, it would be +likely enough that there would be pretence of love on both +sides--and so things would be bad. Whereupon the puzzle in my mind +grew more tangled yet, and I waxed savage, being so helpless. + +And all the while those two words that came to me as I talked to +Relf grew plainer, and seemed to ring in my ears unspoken, +"Landless and luckless--landless and luckless," for that was what +it all came to. + +Then Uldra looked at me and saw the trouble in my face, and took +what seemed to her to be the only way to help me. + +"You cannot think of these matters now, Redwald," she said softly. +"It is well for a warrior that he has none who is bound to him so +closely that he must ever think of her. It is well for Hertha that +she knows not what peril you are in--that she cannot picture you to +herself--" + +She stopped with a sob that she could not check, and stayed her +walk as if she had tripped. I turned to her, and put out my hand, +and she leant on my arm with both hers for a moment, hanging her +head down, and I thought she was faint, for my pace had quickened. +So I waited till she raised her head again, longing to help her +more and yet not daring to do so, lest I should give way altogether +and say all I would. And then I said: + +"Let me set you on the horse--you are weary with keeping step with +me." + +She shook her head, but she said nothing, and so I lifted her and +set her in the saddle, and the colour came back to her face. + +"Thanks, thane," she said, "I am very foolish. I have been setting +myself in your Hertha's place--as if she knew aught of you now. +Aye, it is better as it is for both of you, as things must be for a +while." + +And I thought to myself: + +"Would that you were in Hertha's place;" and then this other +thought, "She says right--landless and luckless am I, and there is +none to trouble about me--nor shall there be." + +"But I was going to tell you this, if I may," she said, "I will +pray night and day that things may be well for you and yours in the +end." + +"Aye, pray therefor, Uldra," I answered, and thereafter we said no +more, for the hall gates were before us, and the dogs came out to +bid us welcome, and the thralls followed them to see who came. I +helped her from the horse, and she smiled and went in. + +Now, I saw Uldra no more that night, and Sexberga was unfriendly +with me because Eldred still kept away. So I had my thoughts to +myself while Relf slept as was his wont after supper, and the lady +of the house turned her wheel as ever. I think that I would not +wish any man to have such strange and sad thoughts as mine were at +that time. There was nought of which I could be sure--save of +Uldra's friendship, and of that it were better not to think, maybe. + + + +Chapter 14: The Last Great Battle. + + +Ten days after I spoke thus with Uldra I was at Berkeley with +Wulfnoth and Godwine. That was in the third week in June, while I +was on my honour not to fight for a month yet. I had parted from +Uldra as from a dear friend and no more, though well I knew now +that she was more than that to me. And there had been a look in her +face, moreover, that bided with me, making me wretched and yet +glad, for it told me that her thoughts were as mine. And more than +that neither of us would show. The tide of war had hold of me, and +whither it would drift me none could say. Nor did I lose much. I +had nought to lose as it seemed to me. + +As for the rest of those who were such good friends of mine at +Penhurst, they had wished me hearty God-speeds, bidding me return +again, and that soon. Eldred of Dallington and Sexberga stood hand +in hand as I went, vowing that they would not be content till I +returned for their wedding, for there was no trouble between them +since the young thane had come in from his place one day as if +nought had happened, calling me to walk with him when Sexberga had +feigned to wish for none of his company. After which he had talked +lightly of going to Wessex with the earl and me; and he had no +further trouble. I know not what he said presently in private to +Sexberga, but he was the one who led thereafter, and I think that +the maiden was the happier that it was so. There are some maids who +will seem to wish to rule, though they are longing all the while to +be ruled. + +So we came up the Severn river to Berkeley, passing the endless +lines of Danish ships that lay along the strand below Anst cliffs +and Oldbury. Cnut's ship guard held the ancient fort in force, men +said. His men boarded us, but Wulfnoth's name was well known, and +it was not Cnut's plan to make an enemy of him. So we went on our +way unhindered, and I bided, chafing sorely, in the great house +where Wulfnoth lived in no state at all, as if he were but a rich +franklin--gray clad and rough in ways and talk. + +Now it is hard to me to think of what passed so close to me while I +was helpless. But I saw nought of the battle that was at +Pen-Selwood, and even as I heard thereof from men who had left the +levy, the greatest battle of all was being fought within a +morning's ride of us, at Sherston. + +Two days that battle raged, and all men say that Eadmund would +surely have chased the Danes in the end to their ships, but for a +trick of Edric Streone's. It was another count in the long score +against him, and I seemed to see that the words of the witch of +Senlac were coming true--his shadow was over our king, for ill in +all things. + +The battle was going against Cnut--once Eadmund himself had cut his +way through the press of Danes before their king, and had almost +come to hand strokes with him, but had been borne back. And then +Streone's eyes lit on one Osmer, a warrior of the Danish host, +standing near him, and he saw that he was like our king. Therefore +he slew him, and set his head on a spear, and rode forward to where +the English line pressed most hardly on the Danish ranks. There he +raised the head aloft, shouting in his great voice: + +"Fly, English, fly! Eadmund is dead. Know his head!" + +Then for a moment panic seized our folk, and they held their hands, +and in that pause Ulf the jarl charged among them, and the line was +broken and flight began. + +But Eadmund unhelmed when he heard the cry that he was slain, and +rode through the ranks, and our men knew him, and cheered, and fell +on the Danes afresh, and the broken line closed up, and they fought +till night fell, and in the night the Danes drew off. And in the +night by twos and threes, and then in companies, Eadmund's levies +melted away from him, for his men were worn out and sick of +slaughter, and knew not enough to bid them stay to follow their +foes and turn retreat into rout, and doubt into victory. The Danes +were going, they saw and heard; what need to stay longer? + +So it came to pass that nothing was wrought by that awful fighting, +and both sides claimed victory, for our men deemed that they had +won, and the Danes claimed it because they were not followed, and +because Ulf the jarl had cut through our line. + +It was through this last that I lost Godwine as a companion. For +Ulf lost himself in the forest that was in the rear of our forces, +because he followed the flying too far, and the dusk of the evening +was close at hand. He thought that the victory was surely won, for +it had ever been that the first sign of flight was followed by rout +of our men. At least the Danes learnt this at Sherston, that +Eadmund could hold his own against them. + +So Ulf the jarl wandered all night in the wood, and came out of it +on the hillside where Godwine was speaking to one of his father's +shepherds. And Godwine brought him, unknowing who he was, back to +Berkeley. + +Then maybe came into Wulfnoth's mind that rede of the witch of +Senlac, that bade Godwine mind his sheep, and so find his place, or +else this was part of the plan which had brought him into Wessex. +For he asked Ulf to take Godwine to Cnut, and find him a place in +his court, and the jarl did so. It was not until Godwine came to +the ships that he knew who it was that he had guided, and they won +him over, and he stayed. + +Nor did I know. I spoke with Ulf, asking him of the battle, and of +Egil, and the like, for he was the earl's guest. And I thought +nothing of Godwine's guidance of a Dane to the ships, for the earl +was no foe of Cnut. But when I rose in the morning after Ulf had +come, and found that he and Godwine had gone in the night, and was +told by Wulfnoth who the warrior was, and what he had asked for his +son, I was very angry, though I knew that the earl had little cause +to love the house of Ethelred. + +But the earl said, very quietly: + +"There are two kings in England, and no king of England. Choice is +free to me, and I choose that king who will honour my son, and who +has done me no wrong. Were you to go to Cnut I would hold you +blameworthy, seeing how things have been between you and Eadmund. +Godwine goes to Cnut even as he flies to his ships. No man may say +that he did but join him when he was victor." + +Now, it was not Wulfnoth's way to give reasons thus for aught that +he did, and I was surprised that he would do so to me. But I could +look at things in his way if I put my own love for Eadmund aside, +and I said: + +"I may not blame you, lord earl, maybe; but it is hard for me to +see my friend take what I think the wrong side." + +"Think no ill of him. It is my doing," Wulfnoth said. "All his life +has Godwine been bidden to hate the house of Ethelred of Wessex. +Now before long this warfare must end. And if your king has the +victory I pray you speak for Godwine if need is. And if Cnut is +victor you will need Godwine, maybe, to speak for you. Let this +matter bide there between us. I would now that I had not let him +go, for I am lonely." + +Then I knew why the fierce old earl unbent to speak thus to me, and +I spoke only of honour to be gained in the service of so great a +king as Cnut. + +Thereafter the time went very heavily for me. The great Danish +fleet left the Severn on the day when Godwine would have come to +them, and then Eadmund must gather another levy, and prepare for +some fresh landing. And before that was done I was free again, and +I could join him with a light heart. The earl gave me a good horse +when I rode away, and parted with me very kindly for Godwine's +sake, he said, and his own liking for me also. + +"I shall look for you at Pevensea yet. Come to me when things go +ill with you, and you shall be welcome." + +I knew not if ever I should see Sussex again. But of this I was +sure now, that if fortune went with me presently, I would surely +seek Ailwin and tell him that I must be free, and so would seek +Uldra, and ask her to share what I might have to give her, if a +home should be mine again. I had thought much of this brave, quiet +maiden while I was chafing at doing nought in Wulfnoth's farmstead, +though I would not have stayed at Penhurst. + +Now came a time when the victory was ours, and it seemed that at +last the strong hand had come. For men would follow Eadmund, and he +had the power of making them fight as he would. Yet there was +nothing that would keep our levies together. Had they done so we +had surely conquered, but it was ever the same. They fought and +dispersed, and all the work and loss was for nought. I think it +would have been the same with the Danish host had they been in +their own country; but here they must needs hold together, and Cnut +and his jarls wielded that mighty force as a man wields his sword. +Eadmund smote as a man who fells his enemy with a staff that breaks +in the smiting, so that he must needs seek another while his fallen +foe rises again, sword in hand. + +But our men were called from home and fireside to fight, and when +they won and their own fields and houses were safe, they thought +they had done all, and went home again, at ease, and maybe boasting +overmuch. + +We marched on London and relieved the city, driving the Danes in +flight to their ships. And Eadmund slept that night among a great +host; and in the morning the Wessex men were going home, and only +his own housecarles and the men who followed him from ruined Mercia +and East Anglia and Kent would bide around him. London could take +care of herself now. But Eadmund strove to gather them for one more +blow, and we had a great fight at Brentford, for the Danes had gone +up river, and we won. Yet the Danes turned on us when the ships +were reached, and we lost many men in the river, for they scattered +in their eagerness to plunder the ships that they thought were +already won, and so, without order or leaders, were driven to their +death in the swift water. + +Then Wessex disbanded, and all the work of gathering our forces +must be done over again; and at once the Danes closed in round +London when Eadmund had gone back to Salisbury. + +Surely it would have broken the heart of any man but Eadmund the +Ironside that thus it must be, but he would say: + +"England is waking; we shall win yet." + +Then Cnut recalled the ships and host from London, and they raised +the siege, and went into the Orwell, and once again began to march +across the heart of our land. + +This fourth levy that Eadmund the king had made was the best that +he had had. And word must have come thereof to the Danes, for they +went back to their fleet; and so waited for a little while, +thinking doubtless that this levy would melt away in idleness as +ever. For they came back into the Medway with the booty they had, +and there we fell on them and drove them headlong to their ships, +and I surely thought that we had done with Cnut for good and all. + +Then fell the shadow of ill on us. Edric Streone and his men met us +at Aylesford, and he came in to the king and made most humble +submission to him. + +And that was what Olaf had told Eadmund would happen when once +again he had the victory. Therefore when I saw the earl come into +the camp to speak with Eadmund I said: + +"Mind you what Olaf said. How that you should hang Streone." + +"Aye, I mind it. But the man is deserted by his new friends. They +have gone." + +Almost had Eadmund quarrelled with Olaf on that saying. + +"Put him in ward, my king, at least," I urged, and Ulfkytel, who +had come with us from London, prayed him also to do so. + +But Eadmund's fate was on him, and he received his foster father +kindly, and forgave him, and thought that all would be well. + +Now with Ulfkytel came my Colchester men, or rather the thirty who +were left, And those two brothers, Thrand and Guthorm, who had +ridden to Stamford with me were there also. These two came to me +that evening when I was alone, and said that they had a plan they +would carry out if I gave the word. And it was nothing more or less +than that they would fall on Edric Streone and slay him when and +where they met him. + +I would that they had not asked me, but had wrought the deed on +their own account. But I said that I could not have this done, for +it was too much after Streone's own manner of settling things. I +could not think of letting my men lie in wait for any foe of mine, +however good cause I had for hating him. And I did hate Streone +with a hate that I am not ashamed of, not for my own sake, but +because he was a traitor to both king and country. There were +Englishmen who fought for Cnut thinking that thus they wrought best +for England and her peace--as Wulfnoth chose for Godwine--and I had +no hatred for them. They were honest if they were wrong; but they +were no traitors. But Edric Streone was as Judas to me. + +So Thrand and Guthorm grumbled, and forbore, though they would have +spent their own lives willingly in this way had I lifted a finger. +It was, however, in revenge for the Stamford business that they +would slay the earl, and that was only my quarrel, nothing higher. +Nevertheless I owed them thanks for their love thus shown to me, +and so I told them. Little had I done to deserve it; but who shall +know what wins the love of rough souls like these? + +Strange news came with Streone, though I had heard rumours thereof +before, as I have said. It was true that Cnut was to wed Emma the +queen; and they had, as it seemed, already been betrothed, at the +advice of the three great jarls. Now she and the athelings her sons +were back in Normandy, and one might see what the reason of this +policy was, Not only was Duke Richard kept quiet, but also Cnut was +stepfather to Eadward Atheling and his brothers. That meant that if +Cnut won, they must needs suffer him to take the crown unopposed. +And more than this, if Cnut must leave England alone presently, +when Eadmund died he would claim the throne at once, either for +himself or for one of these athelings as his under-king. For no man +ever thought twice of Eadmund's brother Edwy, who was weak bodily, +nor of his half brother, the other Edwy, whom we called "king of +the churls," by reason of the low birth of his mother, for no +thanes would follow him had he had the gift of leading. + +Cnut's fleet went from the Medway northward, and it was in the +thoughts of all men that the end had come, and that he sought his +own land at last. And that seemed the more certain to most because +Streone had submitted, as if he knew that he had no further hope of +honour from the Danish king. Presently, however, it was plain that +his coming over was but part of the deepest plot that he had yet +made. + +Suddenly, even as our levies dispersed in spite of all the king's +entreaties, came the news that the Danish fleet had turned and was +in the Crouch river in Essex, whence already the host had begun +their march inland across Mercia in the old way. And so for the +fifth time Eadmund strove to gather all England to him, and his +summons was well obeyed. The thanes and their men gathered in +haste, savage with hope deferred, and Cnut shrank back again to +Ashingdon on the Crouch, and there built himself an earthwork on +the south side of the river, while his ships lay on the further +shore at Burnham, and in the anchorage, and along the mud below the +earthworks, seeming countless. And there he waited for us, and +there we knew that he meant to end the warfare in one great fight +for mastery, with his ships behind him that he might go if he were +at last obliged. + +And there, too, though we knew it not, he waited for Streone to +give England into his hands. + +We were close on him when his main force fell back upon his +earthworks, where they stand on the little hill above the river +banks that men will call "Cnut's dune" {13} henceforward, in +memory of what he won there. And Ulfkytel and I and the few East +Anglians that we had were with the advance guard, and drove in the +pickets that were between us and the hill. And then we knew that +Cnut meant to stand and fight in the open, and we were glad, for +out of his intrenchments poured his men, and we sent horsemen back +to Eadmund to hurry on the main body of our forces. + +They were a mile or two behind us, and we waited impatiently, +watching the Danish host as it neared us, forming into the terrible +half circle as it came. And I remember all of that waiting, for the +day began with such hope, and ended so fearfully for us. + +One could not have had a better day on which to fight, for there +was neither sun to dazzle, nor rain to beat in the faces of men who +needed eyes to guard their lives. But it was a gray day with a +pleasant wind that blew in from the sea, and the light was +wonderfully clear and shadowless as before rain, so that one could +see all things over-plainly, as it were. The rounded top of +Ashingdon hill seemed to tower higher than its wont, and close at +hand, beyond the swampy meadows to our left, and I wondered that +Cnut had not chosen that for his camping ground, though maybe it +would have been less well placed for reaching the ships, owing to +some shoaling of water that did not suit them. The tide was nearly +high now, and all the wide stretch of the Crouch river was alive +with the ships that brought over men from the Burnham shore, and +one could see the very wake and the ripple at the bows as they +came. + +And when one looked at the Danes, the chiefs who ordered the host +were plain to be seen, and the gay colours of banners and cloaks +and shields were wonderful in the brightness, though at first we +were nearly half a mile from them as we waited. I thought that we +were about equal to them in numbers, and I knew that did we but +fight as at Sherston the day would surely be ours. For when a force +that is hard pressed knows that safety is close behind them there +is an ever-present reason for giving way. + +"We can drive this host to the ships, lord earl," I said to +Ulfkytel. + +"Aye, surely," he answered. "They know that the ships wait for +them, and so will give back." + +Now came Eadmund, and behind him our men marched steadily, and at +his side was Edric Streone. He looked at the Danes, and his face +was bright and confident. + +"How shall we fight, lord earl?" he said to Ulfkytel. + +"Redwald and I have spoken thereof," the earl answered. "And it +seems to us that Olaf's viking plan is best. Let us fight in a +wedge, and drive the point through that circle and break it in +twain. We of East Anglia will willingly make the point, as we are +on our own ground." + +"It is a good plan, but I have not tried it," said Eadmund; and +then Streone spoke. + +"The old Saxon line is surely good enough," he said. "What need to +take up with outland plans?" + +"It will be good enough if our men fight as at Sherston," Eadmund +answered. + +And all the thanes who were gathering round him cried out that they +would surely not fail him, and one could not but listen to the +voice of all the noblest in England who were gathered there, for +Eadmund had all his best with him. It was indeed a levy of all +England. + +So we were to fight in line, as Eadmund had given us our places on +the day before, when we neared the battlefield. He himself was in +the centre with his Wessex men, and Edric Streone and his Mercians +were with him. There were some of us who had cried out at that, but +the earl had said proudly that he would make amends for former ill, +and the council had listened to and believed his words. + +Ulfkytel was on the left, and there our line was flanked by the +marshes that lie between the long slope where we were to fight and +Ashingdon hill. At least he would have no horsemen upon him from +the side, and that flank was safe from turning. The right wing was +given to the Lindsey men under their own ealdorman, and with them +were the men of the Five Boroughs {14}. + +So our line was drawn up, and Eadmund rode out before them and they +cheered, and then he unhelmed, and Bishop Ednoth of Dorchester, +clad in his robes over chain mail, and with a heavy mace at his +saddle bow, rode up beside him, and a monk who was with him brought +forward and raised aloft a golden cross, and at that sign the host +knelt, and the bishop shrived them and blessed them before the +fight, and the sound of the "Amen" they spoke was like a thunder +roll from end to end of the line. And it reached the ears of the +Danes who waited for us, and they broke out into their war +song--the Heysaa--and thereat our men sprang up and shouted thrice, +and then the sullen silence of the Saxon kin settled down on them, +for we are not wont to speak much when work is meant. + +Silently we crossed the heath between us and the yelling Danes, and +I rode beside Eadmund in my old place, and my heart was light, and +sword Foe's Bane rattled in the scabbard as if longing to be let +loose. And all the while I kept my eyes on Streone, who was riding +among his Mercians twenty yards away to our right, and presently +behind him I saw Thrand and Guthorm. + +I thought that was ill for Streone, but I could not help it now--we +were but a hundred yards from the foe. The first arrow flight +crossed as I saw them, and then Eadmund cried: + +"Forward--remember Sherston!" + +At that word the front ranks sprang like wolves to meet one +another--and then came the shock of the meeting lines and the howl +and cheer of Dane and Englishman--and under the arrow storm the +spear and axe and sword were at work. + +I kept my shield up and covering Eadmund's right side, and watched. +The time for us to take our part had not come yet. And Eadmund +looked on his foes to see what chance might be for a charge that +would break them when arms grew weary. + +Many were the brave deeds that I saw done in that little time, as +the first lines fought man to man. And presently I knew that over +against us was Cnut the king, for I saw one who was little more +than a boy, whose helm bore a golden crown. There were several +chiefs round him also, and one was Ulf. But I saw not Godwine, for +he would not fight on that day against his own kin. + +There, too, was another chief--he was Eirik the jarl, though I knew +it not then; and he looked ever to our right, as if waiting for +somewhat. And when I saw that I looked also, but there was nought +that I could see. Our whole line was fighting well, and this first +attack had brought no faltering on either side. + +Then said Eadmund to me: + +"Let us make a dash for my stepfather yonder," pointing to +Cnut--and even as he said it the brave bishop on his left threw up +his arms and fell from his horse, smitten in the face with a +javelin, and Eadmund leapt down to help him. + +As he did so I heard a shout raised that he was slain. + +Then was a roar from our right like nothing that I had ever +heard--I pray that none may ever hear the like again--and I turned +and looked to see what was on hand, and I saw the Mercians going +backward, and Streone's horse was heading away from the Danes; and +then the men of the Five Boroughs howled and fell on Dane and +Mercian alike, cursing and smiting like madmen. + +And I saw my two men leap up among the press and smite over the +heads of those around them at Streone, and they were smitten +down--they had not touched him. + +That was all in a moment, and I called to the king, and he rose up +and leapt on his horse and looked. And as he did so the Mercians, +Streone's men, wheeled round and fell on our flank, fighting for +the Danes, and the Danish line swept the Stamford men from before +them and joined the Mercians; and I heard a great sob rise in +Eadmund's throat, and he called to me, and charged among the +traitor's men to reach him if he might. And the Mercians broke and +fled before us, and the Danish line unbroken rolled forward and +swept us into flight, for our men knew not what they could do. + +Then I pointed to Ashingdon hill and cried: + +"We can rally yonder!" + +And Eadmund gainsaid me not, but groaned, and called to his men, +and we got together and faced round, so that the Danes drew back a +little, as men will when a boar turns to bay. And we fought to +reach the Lindsey and Borough men through the Danes, who had filled +the gap that the flight of the Mercians had made--and won to them. +There was the greatest slaughter of the Danish host at that time. +But we could not win to Ulfkytel, for the centre and left wing of +the Danes lapped us round, and their right drove him back on the +marshes, away from us. + +Then we were pressed back along the higher ground, and we were +forced into a great ring that the Danes could not break, and ever +where sign of weakening was Eadmund rode and shouted and smote, and +the Danes gave back before him. Once or twice I could hold my hand +as he sat in the midst of our circle watching all that went on, and +I saw many things in those few moments while sword Foe's Bane +rested. + +The Mercians had not followed us for very shame, but they sat on +the open hillside in the place where the Danish line had been. I +think it was not Streone's fault that they were not fighting hand +to hand with us. I saw him ride to Ulf the jarl, and I saw Ulf turn +his shoulder on him, and then he sought Rink, and that chief spoke +but a word to him, so that he tried not to reach Cnut, who never +looked at him. + +Then I saw Ulfkytel's men breaking and taking to the marshes, where +the Danes cared not to follow them. More than one I could see +sinking under the weight of arms in the fen slime among the green +tussocks of grass that he had slipped from, and I saw that the +flying men made for Ashingdon hill. + +Now as we drew back some word went round among the Danish host and +their onset slackened, and presently they drew off and left us to +retreat as we would. They could not break our ring, and we were +coming to broken land where we might have some advantage. + +Then Eadmund said: + +"We will go to yonder hill and hold it. Then will East Anglia come +to us, and we can begin again tomorrow, maybe; and if not, we can +watch the Danes away. All is not lost yet." + +So we went to Ashingdon hill, and there formed up. Only the Danish +horsemen followed us to find out what we did. And we saw the main +force drawing back towards their earthworks on one wing, while the +other held the place of battle, and it was not plain at once why +they thus divided. + +We rested for a short half hour on Ashingdon hill, and the men of +Ulfkytel gathered to us. But the brave earl was slain, and with him +Abbot Wulsy, and the Mercians had slain the Ealdorman of Lindsey +when they turned on us, and many more lay in the place where the +flight began, good men and noble sold to their deaths by the +traitor. + +It was about midday when we won back to the hill, and the battle, +from the time when we had first met, had lasted but a short time. +Yet what with slaughter when we broke, and the desertion of the +Mercians, we were short of a full third of our men now. + +Eadmund waxed restless. There was the best half of a long summer +day before us, and our men were angry and full of longing to fight +and take revenge. I think there was not one that did not know all +that might hang on this battle. + +"Redwald," the king said, "is there no way by which we might cross +the river? Then might we fall on the ships at Burnham, and Cnut +must send his men over ship by ship, and so we might well gain the +victory." + +I looked at the tide, and called for some Essex men who knew the +place, and one came and told me that in two hours' time we might +cross at a ford higher up, which they name Hull bridge, though +there is no bridge there. And when he heard that, at once our king +set his men in order and cheered them with fresh hopes, and we +started to march thither. + +And at the same time Cnut's ships began to move, and from Burnham +and from this shore his men were coming up on the tide towards the +very place where we would cross, and before the ford could be +passed by us we knew that they would be there in force. + +"So," said Eadmund quietly, "they are before us. We will even go +back to the hill." + +We went back, and then I think that we knew the worst. We were +hemmed in upon it, for the half of the Danish force that had +remained were barring our way inland, while from the river every +other man of the Danish host was coming up to attack us from that +side. + +"Now it would seem that some of us will stay on this hill for +good," said Eadmund; "but if we must lie here till the last day it +is a place whence one can look out over the English land and sea +and river for which we have died." + +And so he drew us up in the ring again there on the hilltop, which +was wide enough, and we sat down and waited for the coming of the +Danes. + +"Lord king," I said, "let us make a wedge and cut through the Danes +inland. So shall we win back to the open country, and we can gather +men afresh." + +He smiled wearily at me, and it seemed to me that at last he had +given up hope. And but for Streone's treachery that thing would +never have been. It had broken our king's spirit. + +"Friend," he said, "I will die here if I can." + +"That shall not be while there is one to give his life for you," I +answered, and the thanes around us murmured "Aye!" in that stern +voice that means more than aught of clamour. + +Then I saw some Wessex thanes speaking earnestly to one another, +and presently they beckoned to me, and while Eadmund sat silent on +his horse I went to them to hear what they would. + +"We will get the king off this field if we can," they said. "We +cannot lose him. If chance is, we will take him against his will. +Hinder us not." + +"That is well," said I. "I will help you, for he is the hope of +England." + +Maybe Ashingdon hilltop is full fifty acres in the more level +summit, and we could not guard it all; so we waited on that edge +nearest the Danes, the half circle that faces inland from the +marshes towards the battle ground we had lost, and to Hockley from +the river. And presently the Danes began to come up the hill in +even line, and we watched them drawing nearer in silence. + +Then Eadmund bade our bowmen get to work; but the arrows were as +nought against the long line that did but quicken its advance as +they felt their sting here and there. + +The Danes spread out along the hillside to surround us, and then +when they had gained the summit they charged on us, and again we +were hand to hand with them. + +I suppose we fought so, without stirring from the place where we +were, for half an hour. Our circle thinned, but never broke, and +Dane after Dane fell or drew back to let fresh men come forward, +and as we might we also sent fresh men from our inner ranks to +relieve those who had grown weary. It was stern hand-to-hand +fighting, and one knows how that will ever be--one of two men must +go down or give way, and our men fell, but give way they would not. + +I have said we were on the edge of the hilltop circle, and +therefore the attack from the steep hill slope was weakest. And so +it came to pass that presently the line against us there was +thinned out, because men pressed upwards to the level, and then +those Wessex thanes saw that we might break through and cut our way +down the hill and make good our retreat. + +Where Eadmund was I followed, and I know that I saved him once or +twice from spear thrusts that would have slain him when he charged +among the Danes, where they pressed us most hardly. Wearied was my +arm, but sword Foe's Bane bit through helm and harness, and once I +was facing Ulf the jarl, and he cried out to me: + +"Well smitten, Wulfnoth's man!" + +For he knew me. And I looked for Egil, that I might call him to +come and win the sword from me, but I could not see him; and a +foolish fear that some other than he might get the good blade got +hold of me, for I had no doubt that I must fall, and no fear +thereof, save that. And why I longed for Egil thus was, I think, +because of utter weariness and loss of hope. + +Then they pushed us as it were over the hill edge, and we began to +go down, and I knew at once what would come next. + +The line of Danes on the hill slope gave way before us and left the +way clear; and at first we went slowly and in good order, and then +they charged on us down the hill with crushing weight of numbers. + +And so we fled. I saw the Wessex thanes catch Eadmund's bridle, and +they turned his horse and spoke to him. And he threatened them with +his sword for a moment; but they were urgent, and at last he fled. +And I, knowing that if we could keep back the Danes but for a few +minutes longer he might escape, cried to what chiefs were left to +us, and we rallied on the hillside for a last stand. + +Then my horse reared and fell back on me, and I heard a great +shout, and the rush of many feet passed over me, and Ashingdon +fight and aught else was lost in blackness. + + + +Chapter 15: The Shadow Of Edric Streone. + + +"The man is dead," said a rough voice. "Let him bide." + +"He is not," one answered. "He had nought to slay him. Here be +three flesh wounds only." + +Then I began to come to myself, for water was being poured on my +face, and I opened my eyes and saw Thrand of Colchester looking at +me. My head was on his knee, and he had a helm full of water in his +hand. His own head and arm were bandaged, and the man who spoke to +him was passing on, seeking elsewhere. All that had happened came +back to me in a moment then, and my ears woke to the sounds round +me. I knew them only too well, for they were the awesome sounds of +the time after battle. + +"Where is the king?" I said. + +"Safe enough, they say," Thrand answered. "Is it well with you, +master?" + +I sat up, and the maze passed from me. I had but been stunned by +the fall from my horse, and now seemed little the worse, save for +sickness and dull weight of weariness. I had been an hour or two +thus, as it would seem, for now the Danish host was gone, and only +a few men sought for friends on that hillside, as Thrand had sought +for me. My horse was dead, slain by the spear thrust that made him +rear. It was that one which Earl Wulfnoth gave me when I left him. + +"I shall be myself again directly," I said. "How has it all ended? +I thought I saw you slain." + +"The Danes are chasing our men towards yon village," he said grimly +pointing towards Hockley. "They will not catch the king, however. +They smote me badly enough when I tried to be revenged on Streone, +and they slew Guthorm; but they only stunned me." + +"Go hence before Streone catches you," said I. + +"Not I," said Thrand. "He knows me not, and I shall wait for +another chance. The Danes think me a Mercian, and so I bide with +you. Can you fly now, master?" + +I tried to rise, but I was weak and shaken, and sank down again. I +was not fit for walking even yet. + +"I must wait," I said. + +"There are stray horses enough down yonder," Thrand said, looking +over the meadows below us. "I will go and catch one. We must go +soon, or the Danes will be back." + +"No use," said I. "They are between us and safety. I must wait and +take my chance." + +With that I missed the sword that I loved, for I had thought of +selling my life dearly if the Danes would slay me. + +"Where is sword Foe's Bane?" I cried. + +Thrand looked round about me, but could see it not. Then he turned +over one or two of the slain men who lay thickly in the place where +our last stand was made. But he could not find it, until a wounded +man of ours asked what he sought. Thrand told him. Then I noted how +few wounded there were. The sun, nigh to setting now, broke out and +shone athwart the hillside; and it sparkled like the ice heaps on +the long banks that a winter's tide has left by the river, for +everywhere were the mail-clad slain. But the sparkles were steady, +as on the ice, not as on a host that is marching. Ice cold were +those who would need mail no more on Ashingdon hill. + +"The sword is under the horse," the man said groaning. And it was +so, and unhurt. + +"Get me a sword from off the field," I said, "and hide Foe's Bane +somewhere. Then, if they slay me, take it to Egil, Jarl Thorkel's +foster brother; and if not, I can find it again. I will not have it +taken from me thus." + +So Thrand took it and its scabbard and hid both under his cloak, +and went to where there was a patch of woodland at the foot of the +hill--ash and alder growing by the marsh side--some two hundred +yards off. + +I closed my eyes and waited till he came back--and he was gone for +some while. Presently he came, and told me that he had hidden it +under a fallen tree trunk, and that the place was dry and safe. He +found me another sword easily enough--and it was notched from point +to hilt. Its edge was not like that of Foe's Bane, but the man +whose it had been had done his duty with it. It was an English +sword. + +Now I thought that I could walk again, and stood up and made a step +or two, painfully enough, in truth, but in such wise that I should +soon do better. And then over the brow of the hill the Danes began +to come. They had circled round and I had not noted them, and came +on us from the other side. They were searching among the slain for +their comrades. + +Half a dozen of them came towards Thrand and me, and I suppose that +they would have slain me. But my man was ready for them, and took +the sword from me quickly. + +"Will the king suffer us to keep captives?" he said. + +"Aye," one answered, in some Jutland speech that was new to me, +though one could understand it well enough, "there is word that we +are to take any chiefs alive--but that is a new word to us. Who +minds it?" + +"I do," said Thrand. "Here is one who will pay for freedom, and he +has yielded to me." + +"That is luck for you," they said, and passed on. + +There was plunder enough all around, and they were in haste lest +others should come. Thrand's Anglian speech was Danish enough for +them. + +"Now you are safe, master," Thrand said; "no need for the sword." + +"I am a captive," said I bitterly. + +Then my eyes sought the ground as Thrand cast the useless blade +away, and there, crawling on the reddened turf, was a toad that +feared not the still dead, and must seek its food whether men lived +or died, unheeding aught but that. And when I saw it, into my mind +flashed the time when I had stood, weakened and hurt, and looked at +the like in Penhurst village--and the words that Spray the smith +spoke came to me, and they cheered me, as a little thing will +sometimes. And then I thought of her who prayed for me among +Penhurst woods, and I was glad that life was left me yet. + +More Danes kept coming now, and presently one who was in some +command came to where I sat with Thrand standing over me. + +"Is this a captive?" he asked. + +"Aye," said Thrand. + +"Who is he?" + +"Some thane or other. What shall I do with him?" + +"Cnut wants to see all captives. Take him to the fort whence we +came." + +He passed on, and Thrand said: + +"Master, if you can find Egil all may be well, Let us go." + +That was all that I could do. Egil or Godwine might befriend me. +Godwine surely would, but I knew not if his word would go for +anything. + +Aye, but that was an awesome walk across the upland, where the +flower of England lay dead. I knew not what had befallen us fully +until I went slowly over Ashingdon hill. All the best blood of +England was spilt there; and I knew, as we passed the wide ring of +heaped corpses where our stand had been longest, that the hopes of +Eadmund had come to nought, and that the shadow of Streone lay +black across his life. + +We came to the further slope of the hill, and were going down, and +through the tears of rage and grief that filled my eyes I saw a few +horsemen breasting the slope towards us, and one of them was Edric +Streone the traitor himself; and when I saw him I felt as a man who +lights suddenly on a viper, and I shuddered, for the sight of him +was loathsome to me, and Thrand ground his teeth. + +Streone's eyes fell on us, and he turned his horse to meet us. And +when he knew who I was he glowered at me without speaking, and I +looked him full in the face once, and then turned my back on him. +He did not know my man. + +"Bind your prisoner," he said sharply to Thrand. + +"No need to do that," said Thrand coolly, "he is sorely hurt, and +has no arms." + +Then the other horsemen rode up leisurely. + +"Who is this?" said one--and he was Jarl Eirik. + +"No one worth having," said Streone, and reined round his horse to +go on as if caring nought. + +They went on up the hill. I suppose that they were going there that +Edric Streone might say who the slain were. As for us we went our +way, and Thrand cursed the earl with every step. + +We had hardly got away from the hill when men came after us in +haste, and before I knew that it was myself whom they sought, they +had pushed Thrand aside and bound my hands. + +"What is this?" Thrand asked angrily. + +And I said: + +"Bind me not. I go to yield myself." + +"Earl Edric's orders," said the men. "We are to keep you here till +he comes." + +At that I knew that I had fallen into his hands, and that my life +was not worth much. I could see that Thrand knew this also. + +"That is all very well," I said; "but I am Egil Thorarinsson's +captive." + +Whereat one of the men laughed. + +"You may not choose your captor, man. Egil has not been ashore all +day. He is with the ships yonder." + +Then Thrand said, seeming very wroth: + +"I will not lose a good captive and ransom for any Mercian +turncoat. I will go and find the king and make complaint." + +"Tell him that you are Egil at the same time," a Dane sneered. "You +will not hoodwink him as you have this Saxon." + +"Is not this man Egil?" I asked, looking at Thrand with a hope that +he would guess whom I needed. + +"He Egil!" they answered, laughing loudly. And at that Thrand +turned and went away quickly, and I sat down and said: + +"What will Earl Edric do with me?" + +One said one thing and one another, and I did not listen much. But +they all thought in the end that Edric's lust for gold would make +him hold me to heavy ransom. I thought that he loved revenge even +better than wealth, and this cheered me not at all. + +About sunset Edric Streone came. Thrand had, I thought, made his +escape, most likely, and I was glad. He had helped me all he could. + +The earl left the party he was with, and came to me and my guards. +He looked at me sidewise for a while, and then spoke to me in broad +Wessex, which the Danes could hardly understand, if at all. + +"So, Master Redwald, what will you give for freedom?" + +I answered him back in my own Anglian speech, which any Dane knows, +for it is but the Danish tongue with a difference of turn of voice, +and words here and there: + +"I will give a traitor nothing." + +"But I am going to hang you," and he chuckled in his evil way. +There were many meanings in that laugh of Streone's. + +"You can do as you like with me, as it happens," I answered, "but I +had rather swing at a rope's end as an honest man than sit at +Cnut's table as Streone the traitor." + +He tried to laugh, but it stuck in his throat, and so he turned to +rage instead. + +"Smite him," he said to the Danes. + +"Not we," said the spokesman of the half dozen. "Settle your own +affairs between you." + +"Take him to yon tree and hang him, and have done," said Edric. + +"Spear me rather," said I in a low voice to the men. + +They laughed uneasily, but did not move, and Edric again bade them +take me to the tree, which was about a hundred paces away. + +They took me there and set me under a great bough, and then stood +looking at me and the earl. They had no rope, and the belts that +bound me were of no use for a halter. Edric saw what was needed, +and swore. Then he sent one of the men to the ships to get a line +of some sort; and I think that his utter hatred of anyone who had +seen through his plans made him spare me from spear or sword, for +there is no disgrace in death by steel. But at this time there +seemed no disgrace in the death he meant me to die, for it was +shame to him, not to me. + +The ships were not so far off. It was not long before three or four +men came through the gathering dusk, and one had a coil of rope +over his shoulder. And after them came across the hillside a +horseman, beside whom ran a man on foot. There were many men about, +and these were too far for me to heed them. I only noticed that +which should end my life. + +"Set to work quickly," said Streone. + +So they flung the end of the line over the bough, sailorwise, and +made a running bowline in the part that came down. There is torture +in that way, and some of the men grumbled thereat, being less hard +hearted. So they began to argue about the matter, and Streone +watched my face, for this was pleasure to him, as it seemed, though +he did not look straight at me. I wished they would hasten, that +was all. + +Now the horseman and his follower came up, and lo! Egil was the +rider, and with him was Thrand. + +"Ho!" cried Egil, "hold hard. That is my man." + +Streone turned on him with a snarl. + +"Your man!" he said. "I took him. Hold your peace." + +"There you lie," quoth Thrand. "I took him myself for Egil, my +master--as your own men know. I told them." + +"He did so," the Danes said, for they loved Egil, and Streone was a +stranger of no great reputation, though high in rank. + +"Set him loose," said Egil. "I will have no man interfere with my +captives." + +Then Streone hid his anger, and took Egil aside while the Danes and +Thrand set me free. Presently Egil broke out into a great laugh. + +"Want you to hang him for slaying men of yours!" he cried. "Why, he +might hang you for the same. How many of his men did you slay this +morning?" + +"That was in fight--he killed the others in time of peace." + +"Better not say much of that fight," said Egil. "There was a peace +breaking there." + +Streone turned pale at that, for he saw that the Danes did not hold +his ways in honour though they had profited by them. + +"Well, then, take him. Little gain will he be to you, for he is +landless and ruined," he sneered, chuckling. + +"Well," said Egil, "he is a close friend of Earl Wulfnoth's, and +maybe it is just as well that you hung him not. Cnut would hardly +have thanked you for setting that man against him, and maybe +bringing Olaf the Norseman down on him also." + +Streone had thought not of those things. He turned ashy pale at the +picture Egil had drawn of loss of Cnut's favour. He looked once or +twice towards me as if he were trying to frame some excuse, but +none would come. + +"I knew it not," he said, falsely enough. "I am glad you came." + +Egil only laughed, and with that Streone rode away quickly, and +never looked back as he went. + +Thereafter Egil took me down to the ships, and he sent Thrand for +sword Foe's Bane when the night had fallen. Most kindly did the +Dane treat me, but I cared for little. I could not move for +stiffness and bruising after I had slept for twelve hours on end, +but that was nought compared with the sorrow for what had befallen +us. + +Two days after this the Danish host followed in the track of +Eadmund and his flying levies: but Egil stayed in command of the +ships, and I with him. I had not seen Cnut, but Egil had spoken of +me to him. + +"I have heard of Redwald of Bures before," the king had said. "What +know I of him? I think it is somewhat good." + +"He nearly got Emma the queen out of England," Egil had answered. +"I know not if you call that a good deed, lord king." + +"That is it. She spoke to me for him, asking me to treat him well +if he fell into my hands, because of his faithful service and +long-suffering patience on the journey." + +Then he asked what he could do, but Egil answered that I would bide +with him at this time, and hereafter he would mind the king of me +again. + +"Do so," said Cnut. "He must be a friend of mine." + +I could not but think well of the young king for this, but it +seemed unlikely that friendly towards him I should ever be. +Nevertheless, the words of the witch of Senlac were coming true. + +Then we, safe in the shelter of the river, waited for news: the two +kings being in Wessex. But I could not think it likely that Cnut +would give time for a fresh gathering of Wessex men to Eadmund. + +Nor did he. All men know how the two kings met at Olney in the +Severn, and how peace was made, after Eadmund had said that he +would rather fight out the matter hand to hand to the death. Few of +us knew then how little able Cnut was to fight the mighty Ironside, +but we thought him strong in body as in name. Else had that plan +never been thought of. + +They say that Edric Streone advised Cnut to take the old Danelagh +and Northumbria and leave Eadmund the rest of the kingdom, the +survivor to succeed to all the land. Maybe he did. If so, it was +that he might earn more from Cnut by giving him all the land. But +it is certain that thus Cnut wrought best for himself, for the +Danelagh received him gladly, while Wessex loved Eadmund. And when +Eadmund should die, Wessex would take Cnut for king at Eadmund's +word, as it were, by reason of the treaty made and oaths given and +received. Not for nothing do men call the King Cnut the Wise, for +it is certain that he had Eadmund in his power, and forbore to use +his advantage to the full. + +So the long struggle ended, and at last there was rest to the land. +But I, who had hoped for victory, felt as though life had little +pleasure left when first this news came to me. But in a few days +came one of Godwine's men bearing messages to me from him, and also +from Eadmund my king. + +The first were most kindly, speaking of hope of seeing me ere long, +and the like; but it seemed that the young earl had promised +Eadmund to send me the letter which the messenger brought, and that +that was the most important business. I took the letter ashore and +went to Ashingdon hill and sat there among the graves of the slain +and read it, while the summer sun and wind and sky were over me, +while the land and sea seemed at rest, and all was in a great peace +after the strife that I had seen in that place. + +To my Thane, greeting.--What has befallen us, and how we have +divided the kingdom with our brother Cnut in the old way of the +days of Alfred the greatest of our line, you will have heard. We +have fought, and all men say that we have fought well; but this is +how things have been ordered by the Lord of Hosts. Therefore, my +thane, for your sake, and seeing specially that already our brother +Cnut is well disposed toward you, as Godwine son of Wulfnoth tells +us, by reason of your service to Emma the queen--I would bid you +accept him as ruler of East Anglia, where your place is. And you +shall hold this letter in proof that thus our word to you is, if in +days to come the line of Wessex kings shell hold the kingdom once +more. Few have been those who have been faithful to us as have you. + +Now, I will set down no more, for Eadmund my king wrote to me as he +was wont to speak in the days that were gone, and I wept as I read +his words--wept bitterly there on Ashingdon hill, and I am not +ashamed thereof. + +And when I had spelt out to the end of his letter there were words +also that were pleasant to me. For they were written by Elfric the +abbot, my friend, thus: + +Written by the hand of Elfric, Abbot of St. Peter's Minster at +Medehamstede. + +I, Elfric, bid you, my son Redwald, be of cheer, for in the end all +shall be for the best. Bide in your home of Bures if Cnut wills, as +I think shall be, and see to the good of your own people as would +your father who has gone. There is an end of war for England. It +remains for us to make for the things of peace. + +Then I sat and thought for long, and at last it seemed to me that I +could do nought but as both king and friend would bid me, and the +words that Elfric had written weighed more with me than those of +the king. Now that I could fight no more I began to long to get +back to that home life in the old place that had seemed so near to +me and had been taken away. + +And then came the thought of Uldra, and of what she would say of +this. But as things were, and with this letter before me, I could +not doubt what her word would be. She would speak as Elfric wrote. +Then I longed for Olaf and his counsel. But he was far beyond my +reach, nor could I tell where he might be. He had gone across the +gray rim of the sea, and no track was there for me to follow. + +The evening fell, and still I sat there, and Thrand of Colchester +came to seek me--I know not what he feared for me if I grew lonely +on Ashingdon hill now that all seemed lost. + +"Master, come back to the ships," he said. "It is ill biding here +after sunset. The slain are unquiet by reason of Streone's deeds." + +"They will not harm me, Thrand," I answered. "I would I lay here +with them even now . . . but that is past." + +I rose up and went down the hill with him, and the sun set behind +it, and it was gray and black against the red evening sky. There +was a mist from the river, and one might think that one saw many +things moving therein. + +And I know not that I saw anything more than mortal--though maybe I +did--until as we went to Cnut's dune, under which Egil's ship lay, +and we passed that place where the left wing of our line had been +driven back on the marsh. Then I saw an armed man coming towards +us, and Thrand, who walked at my shoulder, closed up to me, for the +warrior had a drawn sword in his hand. + +And when we came face to face I knew that I looked once more on +Ulfkytel our earl, and a great fear fell on me, for he lay with his +men in the mound where he fell, and Egil and I had raised it over +him. Then I must speak. + +"Greeting to the earl," I said, and my voice sounded strange. + +But he made no answer, save that he looked me in the face and +smiled at me gravely and sweetly, and sheathed the sword he held, +folding his arms thereafter as one whose work is done. And while +one might count a score, I saw him, plainly as in life, and then he +was gone. + +Wherefore I thought that our own earl was not wroth with me for +what I would do; and after that my mind was at rest, and ready to +take what peace might come to me at the hands of Cnut the king. + +"We have seen the earl," Thrand said, when he was gone. + +"Aye. He tells us that the war is at an end, and that, in truth, +Cnut is king in East Anglia." + +"It is well," Thrand answered simply. "Dane were my fathers, and +Danish is my name and that of Guthorm my brother. If Cnut lets us +keep our old customs and governs with justice, it is all we need." + +There was spoken the word of all Anglia, whether of the north or +south folk, and I knew it. No man would but hail him there +willingly. Our people had never forgotten that the Wessex kings +were far from them, and that little help came from thence. + +Now, when I came to Egil, I told him that the letter I had gotten +bore messages to me from Eadmund, and I read it to him so far as I +have written here. + +"This is good," he answered, when I said that it should be as the +king said. "Now are you Cnut's man and my friend indeed. Thorkel, +my foster brother, is to be Earl of East Anglia, and you shall be +Thane of Bures as ever. And I shall have to mind Colchester and +this shore, and we shall see much of each other." + +So he rejoiced, and I grew more cheerful as the days went on. Then +Thorkel came, and together we went to Colchester, and thence he +bade me go to Bures in peace and take my old place, for he said +that Cnut and Emma the queen would have me honoured in all that I +would, even did he himself not wish to keep me as his own friend. + +Then said I: + +"What of Geirmund, your own man, who had Bures?" + +Egil laughed. + +"Geirmund is the man over whom I fell at your feet at Leavenheath +fight. You yourself have made an end of him. I wonder that you knew +it not." + +So I went back to Bures, and there is no need to say how my poor +folk rejoiced. But Ailwin was not there, nor had Gunnhild been +seen. The young priest was there yet, and well loved. + +Then I said to myself: + +"Let things bide for a while. When peace comes altogether and +certainly, then will Ailwin bring back Hertha, and there will be +trouble enough then, maybe. As it is, my house must be rebuilt, and +the land has to settle down after war." + +With that I set to work to gather the timber together from my own +woods, that we might begin to build in the coming springtime, and I +grew happy enough at that work, though I would that I worked for +Uldra. + +Then came the news that Eadmund our king was dead, slain by +Streone's men--some say by the Earl's son, others by the king's own +men, whom he bribed. One will, I suppose, never know what hands did +the deed, but Streone's doing it was when all is told. + +There is more in my mind about this than I will say. But Thrand, +who had been with me, begged that he might go to Colchester for a +while; and I let him go, for he waxed restless, though I knew not +what he would leave me for. + +Then the kingdom was Cnut's, and he spoke to the Wessex nobles at a +great council in London in such wise that they hailed him for king. +There was naught else for them to do. And he promised to keep the +laws of Eadgar {15}, and to defend Holy Church, and to make no +difference between Dane and Saxon, and by that time men knew that +what Cnut the king promised that he would perform. + +So came the strong hand that Ethelred our dying king had foretold, +and sure and lasting peace lay fair before England. Above all +things that made for our content Cnut promised to send home his +host. Nor was it long before Jarl Eirik sailed away with all but +those to whom lands had fallen. There were many manors whose +English lords had died, and they must own Danish masters. + +And I will say this other word, that now at the time that I write +of these things, men speak of English only, for Cnut has welded the +races of England into one in such wise as has never been before. + +So I mourned for Eadmund, and wrought at home-making until the +springtime came, and all the while the thought of Uldra grew dearer +to me, and I longed to seek her again. And the thought of Hertha +and my betrothal seemed as bondage to me. Yet I would do nought +till Ailwin came or till I could find him. But none knew where he +was. + +I knew now that it was well that Hertha and I should not meet till +all was broken off, for her I could not love, and she knew nought +of me. Yet for her sake I set the Wormingford thralls at work in +the like manner as my own people were busied, that she might find +withal to build her own house place afresh, when, if ever, she +should return. + +Now, one day as I stood watching the shaping of the timber for the +first framing of my hall, Thrand came back. He ran to me when he +saw me, and cried: + +"Master all is avenged! Streone the traitor is no more." + +I took him away to a quiet place, for this news was strange, and +the thralls were listening wonderingly, and I asked him how this +came about. + +"Master, I slew him myself," he said grimly. + +Then said I: + +"By subtlety--after his own manner?" + +"Not so, master. But even in Cnut's own presence." + +So I was amazed, and bade him tell all. + +"When I left you, master," he said, "I took service with Jarl +Thorkel. Then he went to court in London, even as I hoped, for that +was all I needed, and presently came Streone with a great train to +see Cnut. Now the king is not a great and strong man, as men think +who have not seen him, but is tall and overgrown for his years, +looking eighteen or twenty, though he is younger. He will be a +powerful man some day, but his mail hangs loosely on him now. He is +like an eagle in face, for his nose is high and bent, and his eyes +are clear and piercing. Quiet and very pleasant is he in his way, +and being so young also, some think they can do as they will with +him. But that they try not twice. + +"This is what Streone thought, for he deemed that he should be the +king's master if he set him on the throne. So he must needs try to +gain more wealth from the king, and after he had been at court for +a while, one might see that Cnut grew weary of his words. But at +last there was a great feast, and I stood behind Thorkel at the +high place, and Streone was next to Thorkel, and Thorkel to the +king on his right hand. When the ale was going round, Streone began +to find fault with some ordering of Cnut's, and at last said: + +"Maybe one might judge how things would go when the man who gave +you this kingdom is treated thus.' + +"Then Cnut looked at him very quietly and said: + +"'You have the same honours from me as from Ethelred.' + +"'Not so, not so,' he said. 'I was wont to sit at the king's right +hand, with none between me and him.' + +"Thereat Thorkel would have spoken, but Cnut held up his hand. I +saw his bright eyes shining, and Streone should have taken warning, +but his fate was on him. + +"'You think, then, that you have not all you deserve?' the king +said. + +"'I have not. You have all--owing to me.' + +"Then Cnut rose up and faced him, and a great hush fell on all the +assembly. + +"'This earl, as it seems, will be content with nothing short of the +king's seat. Two kings has he pulled down, and one has he slain of +those two. We have profited by this, as all men know. But here do I +proclaim myself clear from all part in the slaying of Eadmund my +brother, who, but for this man, might hereafter have taken all the +kingdom when I died, according to our oaths. I suppose that no man +will believe that I had nought to do with this murder, but I am +clear thereof, both in thought or wish or deed. + +"'Now in gaining the kingdom which has been the right of the Danish +kings--if tribute paid for conquest in old time means aught--at +least since the days of Guthrum, if not before, I have used the +help of this earl, for Mercia was ours by right, as in the +Danelagh. I will not say that his way of helping me has been what +one would wish, but in war one uses what weapons one can find. For +his help to me the Earl of Mercia has been well paid. Now, what +shall be given to the man who betrayed to death the foster son who +believed in him as in himself?' + +"Then I, Thrand the freeman of Colchester, nowise caring what +befell me, answered in a loud voice: + +"'Let him die. He is not fit to live.' + +"'Slay him, therefore,' said Cnut. + +"Thereat Streone cried for mercy once, grovelling. And he having +done so, I lifted the axe I bore and slew him, even on the high +place at the king's feet. + +"Then one in the hall said in a great voice: + +"'Justice is from the hands of Cnut the king.' + +"There went round a murmur of assent to that, and I called to me +another of Thorkel's men, a Colchester man of your guard also, and +while all held their peace and Cnut stood still looking at what was +done, stirring neither hand nor foot, but with his eyes burning +bright with rage and his head a little forward, as an eagle that +will strike, we two bore the traitor's body to the window that +overhangs the Thames, and cast it thereout into the swift tide. + +"After that I went my way down the hall, and the king cried: + +"'Let the man go forth.' + +"So that none spoke to me or withstood me. + +"When I got to the street it was dark, and it seemed to me that the +best thing that I could do was to fly. So I went by day and night, +and I am here." + +So that was the traitor's end. And I was glad, for I knew that +England was free from her greatest foe. Justly was Edric Streone +slain, and all men held that it was well done. Nor did any man ever +seek Thrand to avenge the earl's death on his slayer. I think none +held him worth avenging. + +I bade Thrand hold his peace concerning his part in this matter, +for a while at least, lest I should lose him. + +After Streone's death it was plain that Cnut was king indeed, for +his Danish jarls knew him too well to despise him. They went each +to his place, and the land began to smile again with the peace that +had come, and Cnut sent Eirik the jarl home to Denmark with the +host, as I have said. + + + +Chapter 16: By Wormingford Mere. + + +Now it was not long after Streone's death that I had a message from +Emma the queen to bid me to her wedding with Cnut, that should be +completed with all magnificence. And I went with Thorkel the jarl +and Egil, and I could not complain of the welcome I had both from +the queen and from Cnut. I might say much of that wedding, for it +was wonderful, but I cared not much for it, except that there I met +Elfric the abbot again, and he would have me stay in his house, so +that it was most pleasant to be with him, and away from the bustle +and mirth of the strangers who were with the king. + +But for this wedding Eadward Atheling would not come from Normandy. +Men said that he was likely to gather forces against his new +stepfather, but that it would be of no use. So thought I, for it +was a true word that I had heard at Senlac in the hut on Caldbec +hill--that Cnut should have the goodwill of all men, even of +myself. For so it was, as one might see written in the faces of the +London burghers, who alone of all England had baffled him again and +again, and now could not do enough honour to him. He had won even +their love. + +When I would go back to Bures, Emma the queen sent for me, hearing +that I would speak with her ere I went, and she received me most +kindly, coming down from her high place to greet me. + +"Redwald," she said, laughing a little, "I was a sore burden to you +when we fled hence." + +"My queen," I answered, "the danger was the burden. It weighed on +all of us." + +"That is a court speech," she said; "but we taught you court ways, +and I will not blame it. Nevertheless, though you will not tell me +so plainly, I know that I made things worse for you by my +foolishness. Forgive the abbess, if the queen may expect nought but +smooth words." + +"I do not know how I can answer you, Queen Emma," said I at that, +"but it is true that for you I would go through the same again." + +"Then I am forgiven," she said. "Now tell me what became of the +brave maiden who withstood the Danes with you, and also my sharp +tongue--trouble sharpened it, Redwald, and I have repented my hard +words to her." + +"She is with friends at Penhurst, near to Earl Wulfnoth's castle of +Pevensea. And she feared that you would hate her." + +"I would that I could reward her rather," the queen said. "Have you +seen her of late?" + +"Not since just before last midsummer," I answered; and I suppose +my face showed some feeling that the queen noted. + +"Redwald," she said, "if you would wed this maiden it is I who +would give her a portion that should be worthy of her and of you. +Can it be so?" + +"My queen," I said with a great hope in my heart, "if that is your +will, I think that it must be so. But in honesty I will tell you +that an old betrothal that was when I was a child seems to stand in +the way. But neither I nor the child to whom I was betrothed have +seen one another since the coming of Swein's host. And I know not +where she is." + +"Ah! you would have it broken, and I wonder not. That can surely +be." + +Then all at once came over me one thought of how Hertha had +perhaps, after all, longed and waited and prayed for my coming. I +remembered words that Ailwin had spoken that seemed to say that +this might be so; and thus on the very threshold of freedom I +shrank back lest I should wrong the child I had loved by breaking +my troth so solemnly plighted; and I knew not what to say, while +the queen looked at me wondering. + +Then she smiled and said: + +"Maybe you cannot love the maiden. Wait awhile, and let me hear of +you again. One may not, in kindness, force these matters. But I +will trust you to tell me if she is to wed any other than you--for +her portion shall be ready for her. The riches of England and +Denmark and Norway are mine." + +There spoke Emma of Normandy again, and her proud look came back. +The maidens on the dais were smiling at one another, for the queen +was turned away from them. + +"Let it be thus, my queen," I said, after I had thanked her. + +And she said that it should be so, deeming that I had thought of +Uldra not at all, maybe. + +Then she spoke of my own doings, and Cnut came as we did so. I +bowed to him, and he took my hand, calling me "thane" in all good +faith. + +"Now I have to come ere long into your country," he said, "for I +have vowed to build a church in each place where I have fought and +conquered. Have you a house where I may stay?" + +"My place is far from Ashingdon, lord king," I answered, "and I am +rebuilding my father's house as best I can." + +"I suppose my men burnt it?" he said plainly. + +"Your father's men did so in the first coming." + +"Therefore shall his son rebuild for your father's son," said the +king. "Will you accept aught from me?" + +"Lord king," said I, "I have fought against you, and have owned you +unwillingly at first." + +"That is certain," he said laughing, "else had you not tried to +take away my queen. Go to, Redwald, you are a troublesome subject." + +"I think I shall be so no longer," I answered. + +So those two most royal ones bade me farewell, and I went away to +Elfric, and found Godwine there. The young earl was high in favour +with Cnut, and rightly. + +Presently came one from the king with somewhat for me, and that was +a goodly gift of money, which I hardly cared to take at first. + +Then Godwine laughed at me. + +"We have a great chest half full of gold at Pevensea out of which +you may take a double handful whenever you need it. Cnut has the +gold of three kingdoms and says you may do the same out of his +hoards. Head breaking brought you the first, and hardship the +second. Take one as you would the other, man. It is your due." + +And Elfric added that the king's gift was surely out of goodness of +heart. There could be no thought of bribes now. So I took it, and +was glad thereof, for I could not ask my people for rents and dues +yet. + +Elfric asked me of Uldra, as one might suppose, and was glad when +he heard of her welfare. + +"I suppose that when I get back to Medehamstede her folk will want +to know how she fares in Normandy, or the like. Maybe they have +troubled the good abbess already more than enough, for she brought +her to me." + +"Whose daughter was she?" I asked. + +"Maybe I heard, but I have forgotten," he said. "The abbess knows. +I saw not her folk, for the sisters brought her with them with my +consent." + +So I went back to Bures well content with all but one thing, and +that was what troubled me more than enough. But I knew not that to +my dying day I shall rejoice that I kept my troth to Hertha. + +It was on one of those wondrous days that come in October, with +glory of sunshine and clear sky over gold and crimson of forest and +copse, that I learnt this. + +I would go to Wormingford now and then to see that all was going +well with the rebuilding of Hertha's home, for Cnut's gift was +enough for that also, seeing that all one needed was at hand and +did but require setting up by skilled workers. Our priest, Father +Oswin, found me such craftsmen as I needed. + +"Let me rebuild the church first, father," I had said to him when I +returned thus rich. + +"Not so, my son. That is a matter which must be taken in hand +presently, and not hurriedly. Shelter first the man who shall do +it, and provide for the fatherless at Wormingford, and it will be +better done after all." + +Therefore I was very busy. And on this day of which I speak I +walked in the late afternoon, and must needs turn aside into the +woods by the mere, for I had often done that of late, loving the +place for old memories the more now that Olaf came into them. It +seemed to me that I had never seen the still mere look more +wondrously beautiful than on this day, for we had had neither wind +nor rain to mar the autumn beauty of the trees, and that was +doubled by the mirror of the water. + +So I lingered in that place where Olaf and I had been so nearly +slain, thinking of that night and of many other days, and then I +heard a footstep coming through the wood, and turned to see who it +might be, for I had never met any other in the haunted place. + +And there came towards me slowly a white-robed maiden who looked +steadfastly at me, saying nought. And I thought that surely she was +the White Lady of the Mere. The shadows flickered across her face +and dress, and in her hand she bore a basket with crimson leaves +and the like. + +And then I saw that surely this was Hertha coming to meet me as in +the old days when I had waited for her here--Hertha grown older, +and changed; but yet as I saw her here in the old place one could +not but know her, and half I cried out her name, and then stayed +with my heart beating fast. + +For as she came into the clearing and was close to me she held out +her hands, and the basket fell at her feet, and lo! it was Uldra, +whom I loved--and Uldra was Hertha--and I had in my arms all that I +longed for, and my trouble was gone for evermore. + +"How was it that you knew me not before this?" she asked presently, +while we walked together to Wormingford to find Ailwin. They had +but come back that morning. + +"Always have I seemed to know you well," I said, "but first the +sisters' dress, and then that I looked not for Hertha in London, +prevented me. And so I grew to know your looks and ways as Uldra, +whom I grew to love. Then all thought of the old likeness that +puzzled me at first was forgotten. There is no wonder in it, for +you have grown from childhood to womanhood since we fled from +Bures, and I have gone through much that blotted your face from my +mind. Rather do I wonder where you have been all this time." + +"One secret I may not tell you today," she said; "and that is where +our safest hiding place has been in sorest peril. Some day I will +show it you, for it is not far. But for long did Gunnhild and I +dwell with her brother in the forest and marsh fastnesses beyond +the Colne. There one might take to the woods when prowling Danes +were near, though it was but twice, and but for a few hours then, +that we had to do so. There was little or no danger there when the +host passed on. Some day shall you and I ride to that quiet +farmstead, for I love the kindly folk who cared for me so well." + +Then I said, and my words came to pass afterwards: + +"If they will, they shall have my best farm here for their own, +that they may be near you. Now tell me how you came to be with +Elfric." + +She blushed a little, and laughed. + +"When we were at Penhurst," she said, "you told me how you were +seeking me--well, maybe I was seeking you. It fell out thus. When +you and Olaf, whom I long to see, scattered the Danes here, +Gunnhild said that we must fly, for they were seeking hiding +places. So she would go to her sister, who is abbess at Ramsey, by +the great mere of Whittlesea. So we fled there, and the journey was +overmuch for her, and there she died after two days. That was a +sore grief to me, but I will not speak of grief now. Then Ailwin +told the abbess to keep me with her until all things were safe, +when he would return for me. But Gunnhild had asked her to find me +a place with the Lady Algitha, Eadmund Atheling's wife, because I +should meet you in his house often enough. That she could do, and +would have done. + +"Then the Danes came, and one day Elfric sent word that he was +going to Normandy. Those two sisters would go home, and so the +abbess sent me with them, thinking that thus her sister's plan for +me would be best carried out. For she was told by Elfric that you +were in charge of the party, saying the sisters would be safe in +your care. Elfric might get me a place in the queen's new +household; and if not--if you knew me not nor cared for me--there +was always the convent." + +"So all that plan came out thus--and it is well," I said. "But why +would you not come to Penhurst at first?" + +She laughed lightly, answering: + +"Can you not guess? Relf saw, and set things right. Did he never +tell you what was wrong?" + +"He said that it was want of travelling gear," said I. + +"Why, that was not it, though being thoughtful and fatherly he +asked of that first." + +"Tell me what was the trouble, then." + +"I thought--there were things said, and you called me by her +name--that the wedding Relf spoke of was yours and Sexberga's. That +was all." + +"Surely Relf knew not who you were?" + +"No. He did not till Ailwin came to Penhurst." + +"Then," said I, "it passes me to know how he found out what the +trouble was." + +"Because he has a daughter of his own," she laughed. + +And so she began to speak of Sexberga's wedding, which had been not +long since. + +Then we came to Wormingford, and there was Ailwin, bent and aged +indeed by the troubles, but well, and rejoiced to see me once more, +and that I and Hertha were so happily together. But I had to ask +his pardon for my roughness to him before I could feel content. + +"My son, had you not felt this matter very deeply, I know you would +not have troubled yourself even to wrath about it. Truly I was glad +to hear you speak so. There is nought to forgive." + +So he said, and maybe he was right. + +I rode back presently to Bures with my heart full of joy, and a +wondrous content. And when I came to the house on the green I was +to learn that joys come not always singly any more than sorrows, +which are ever doubled. + +The door stood open as I rode up, and in the red light from within +the house stood two tall figures on the threshold, and the light +flashed from helms and mail as they moved, and for a moment a fear +came over me that some new call to arms waited me, so that the +peace that I thought I had at last found was to be snatched from +me. For it was as in the days when Olaf's men stood on guard over +us at the doorway. + +More like those days it was yet to be, for as I reined up a voice +cried: + +"Ho, cousin what of the White Lady?" + +And Olaf himself came and greeted me as I leapt from the saddle, +holding my shoulders and looking at me as he took me into the light +to scan my face. The other warrior was Ottar the scald, my friend, +and now I had all that I could wish. + +We sat together in the old places, and he said presently: + +"You seem contented enough with Cnut, to judge by your face, my +cousin." + +"I had forgotten him. I am content with all things," I answered. + +"How came you here?" + +"Nay, but you shall tell me of yourself first," he said. "Then I +may have somewhat to say of my doings." + +So I told him all. + +"Why then, you must be wedded betimes," he said; "for I must see +that wedding, though I would not have Cnut catch me. The ships are +in Colchester river, and but for Egil I had never got there even." + +Then I heard how he had been southward, and what deeds he had done; +and it was Ottar who told me that, for Olaf had nought to say of +himself. But presently when it came to the time when he turned his +ships homeward, Olaf took up the story. + +"When I was minded to go on from this place, in Carl's water as +they call it, even to Jerusalem and the holy places, I had the sign +that I looked for--the sign that I should go back to Norway. I +slept, and in my sleep there came to me a man, very noble looking +and handsome, and yet terrible, and he stood by me and spoke to me +saying, 'Fare back to the land that is thy birthright, for King of +Norway thou shalt be for evermore.' And I knew this man for Olaf +Tryggvesson my kinsman, and I think that he means that I shall gain +all Norway for Christ's faith, and that my sons shall reign after +me in the days to come." + +"It is certain that you shall win Norway," I said, "for so also ran +the words of the Senlac witch, 'For Olaf a kingdom and more than a +kingdom--a name that shall never die'." + +"I think men will remember me if I beat Cnut in my own land," he +said lightly. "So I came back as far as the Seine river, and there +was Eadward Atheling trying to raise men against Cnut his +stepfather. I knew not that that peaceful youth could rage so +terribly when occasion was, It was ill to speak of Cnut to him--or +of the queen either. Now I spoke with his few thanes, and they held +that it was of no use to try to attack England. None would rise to +help him. But he begged me to go with him for the sake of old days +and common hatred of the Dane. Wherefore I thought that it was as +well for England that he learnt his foolishness, and we went +together, and were well beaten off from the first place we put +into. So he went back contented to try no more, and I put in here +on my way homeward." + +Then I said: + +"Do you blame me for submitting to Cnut?" + +"You could do nought else," he answered. "And from all I hear he is +likely to be a good king. Mind you that vision we saw on the shore +in Normandy?" + +"It has come to pass as you read it," I answered. + +Then he said: + +"Yet more is to come to pass of that vision. Cnut will reign and +will pass when his time comes, and with him will pass his kingdoms. +There will be none of his line who shall keep them {16}." + +"After him Eadward, therefore, or Alfred, should they live," I +said, musing. For the words of dying Ethelred came back to me--his +foretelling of the strong hand followed by the wise. + +"That will be seen," answered Olaf. "Now I came to know if you were +yet landless and desperate so that you would sail to Norway with +me. But now I cannot ask you that. Nevertheless I shall be more +glad to see you wedded and at rest here, for I think that you have +seen your share of war." + +"And I have been unlucky therein," said I. + +"Now has your luck changed," said Olaf. "And all is well." + +So it came to pass that our wedding was made the happier by the +presence of Olaf the king and by the songs of Ottar the scald. And +Egil came from Colchester, and with him many of those of my men who +were left, and Olaf's ship captains, so that with Sudbury folk and +our own people there was a merry gathering enough, and the little +church was over full when Ailwin and Oswin were ready at the altar. + +After that was over, Olaf came forward and gave to the priests a +great chain of gold links, bidding them lay it on the altar for a +gift towards rebuilding the house of God. + +"Only one thing do I ask you," he said, speaking in a hushed voice as +he stood there. "And that is that no week shall pass without remembrance +of those of my men who died for England on Leavenheath." + +And Oswin said: + +"It shall be so, King Olaf, for it has already become our custom +here. Now will we remember your name also." + + * * * * * * + +Ten years agone it is since Olaf sailed away from us and won Norway +from the hand of Cnut. Now and then come Norsemen to me from him +when they put into Colchester or Maldon, and ever do they bring +gifts for Hertha and Olaf and Eadmund and Uldra, the children that +are ours. For all things have gone well with us, and with all +England under the strong and wise rule of Cnut the king. + +I stood beside him on Ashingdon hill when he came to see to the +building of the churches on the battlefield at the place of the +first fight, and at Ashingdon, and at Hockley where the flight +ended. And he dedicated that at Ashingdon to St. Andrew, in memory +of Eadmund his noble foe and brother king, for on the day of that +saint Streone slew him. + +There Cnut the king stood and spoke to me: + +"I build these churches, and their walls will decay in time, and +maybe men will forget who built them, but the deeds of Eadmund will +not be forgotten, for there are few men who have fought a losing +fight so sternly and steadfastly as did he. Nor shall men forget +you, Redwald, and those who fought and died here, and on the other +fields that are rich with their blood spilt for love of England. +None may say that their lives are wasted, for I see before us a new +brotherhood that will rise out of our long strife, because Dane and +Saxon and Anglian know each other for men." + +So he said, and so it is, and our England is rising from the strife +into a mighty oneness that has never been hers before. + +We went to London before long to see the great wedding that was +made for Godwine, my friend, and Gyda, the fair daughter of Ulf the +jarl, and niece of Cnut himself. There also were Relf and the lady +of Penhurst, and Eldred and Sexberga, and many more of Wulfnoth's +thanes. But the old viking had gone to his place beyond the grave, +and I saw him no more after I left him at Berkeley. + +Godwine is the greatest man in England now, and well loved. All men +speak of his deeds in Denmark, whither he took the king's English +host when troubles were there, and he is one of those who hold the +kingdoms together since Ulf and Thorkel and Eirik are dead. They +were slain in petty quarrels, and it is ever in my mind that it was +in judgment on them for treating with Streone the traitor in the +days when Cnut had not yet taken the kingship and rule into his own +hands. I hold him blameless of that, for what could a boy of +thirteen, however wise, do against their word and plans? + +But Thrand of Colchester lives yet, being port reeve of his own +town under Egil, my good friend. + +None have ever seen the White Lady of the Mere again, nor has aught +ill befallen my thrall, who thought he saw her. I gave him his +freedom when we were wedded, and he is over the herds for us. But +ever do I choose rather to call my dear one "Uldra," the name which +she borrowed from the White Lady when I met her at Bosham, and +asked what I should call her, for by that name I learnt to love +her. + +Now one day she bade me take her to the great mound of Boadicea the +queen beyond the river, for she had somewhat to show me, and half +fearing I went. But she had no fear of the place, and one might see +that she knew her way through the pathless woods around it well, so +that I wondered. She led me across the water which stands around it +in the old trench, stepping on fallen trees which made a sort of +bridge, and then went to a place where the bushes grew thickly and +tangled. + +"Can you see aught strange here?" she said to me. + +I could see nothing but thicket of briar and sloe climbing the +steep side of the mound. And therefore she parted them, not easily +at first, for none had touched them for long; and there before me +was the opening of a low stone-sided-and-roofed passage, leading to +the heart of the mound. + +"Enter," she said. "This is our hiding place in sorest need." + +"Hardly dare I do so. It is ill to disturb the mighty dead," I +answered. + +"The dead queen has sheltered us helpless women well," she +answered. "She is not disturbed, for this is not her resting +place." + +So I went in, stooping double, for the stone passage was very low. +I cannot tell whence the stone came, nor why the place was made +unless it were to receive some chiefs of the Iceni, whose bones +were gone had they ever been there, for there was a stone chamber +in the mound's heart, fitted with stone seats and stone beds, as it +were, and four people might well live in that place, for it was +cool in summer and warm in winter, but very silent. + +I spoke not a word till we were in the sunshine again, and then I +shivered. + +"I could not have entered that place alone," I said. + +"Gunnhild had no fear thereof, nor had I as a little child. Three +times we bided there for days, while the Danes pillaged and burnt +all around us, and were safe." + +It was some old secret handed down to Gunnhild that had taught her +how to find the passage entrance. But she knew not where the great +queen lay. Maybe her resting place is below the mound itself, or +maybe she lies elsewhere, as some say. + +Then said I: + +"Let us close the place. I pray that none may need it again." + +So I loosened the earth above with my spear butt and it fell and +covered the doorway. And none, save Hertha and myself, know where +its place is. + +Yet men say that they see the bale fires burning even now, on the +mound top on the nights when men look for such things. I have never +seen them. + +There are two men of whom I must say a word, for I love them well. +One is Father Ailwin, our priest, and my old master--who bides here +with Oswin, whom I prayed to stay with us also--growing old +peacefully; and the other is Elfric the abbot, my friend ever, and +now Cnut's best adviser. Each in his own way fills well the place +that is his, one as the counsellor and friend of plain folk like +ourselves, winning the love and reverence of thane, and franklin, +and thrall alike; and the other as the wisest in the land maybe, +high in honour with all the highest in church and state. Well have +those two wrought, and we cannot do without their like, whether in +village or court. + +It is likely that Elfric will be archbishop ere long, and that will +be well for us all. So great is the name of Cnut the king that +hereafter it will be that all that was wrought of wisdom in his +time will be laid to his account; but he would not have it so, for +he knows what he owes to Elfric. But also I think that the cruel +deeds wrought by the jarls while he was yet but a child will be +thought his work also, for men will forget how young he was when +the crown came to him, seeing that in utmost loyalty the jarls +spoke of him ever as commanding, as the old viking ways bade them. + +But I who knew him almost from the first have seen how he hated +these deeds, staying the hands of his chiefs as soon as he knew +what his power was. Therein wrought Emma the queen, whose pride +taught him what his place was, sooner than might else have been. + +Now I will say one last word of myself, who am happy--in wife, and +children, and home. Cnut made me ealdorman, that so I might serve +East Anglia, and I am glad, for I must needs go to the great witan +at times and meet Godwine and Relf and many others who are my +friends. But, rather than Redwald the ealdorman, I would that I +might be called ever by the name which comes into the songs of +Ottar the scald now and then--the name in which I have most pride, +King Olaf's kinsman. + +THE END. + + + +Notes. + + +1 the armed followers of a Saxon noble. + +2 The national weapon. A short, strong, curved blade used as a dirk. + +3 The massacre of the Danes on St. Brice's day, 1002 A.D., in + which Swein's sister was killed. + +4 Now Peterborough. + +5 From the Heimskringla, Saga of Olaf the Saint. + +6 Tribute. + +7 An embodied familiar spirit. + +8 According to Bede, in A.D. 418 the Romans collected and hid + all the treasure in England, except some part which they + took to Gaul. OElla took Anderida in 491 A.D. + +9 The cold spring. + +10 Mail shirt. + +11 Daughter of Alfred the Great, and wife of Ethelred, Earl of + Mercia. + +12 The utmost term of Saxon contempt. + +13 Now Canewdon. + +14 The "Five Boroughs" of the old Danelagh were Leicester, + Lincoln, Nottingham, Stamford, and Derby. + +15 The work of the great Dunstan, and the first code that + recognized the rights of Danish settlers. + +16 This prophecy of Olaf's is recorded in the "Saga of Olaf the + Saint". + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of King Olaf's Kinsman, by Charles Whistler + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK KING OLAF'S KINSMAN *** + +***** This file should be named 16196.txt or 16196.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/1/6/1/9/16196/ + +Produced by Martin Robb + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/16196.zip b/16196.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..159f5d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/16196.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..98e6938 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #16196 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/16196) |